QSS-32 series

Service Manual

Issued in August, 2007

– for service personnel only –

CHAPTER DESCRIPTION

[Link] for work

[Link] and adjustment of parts

[Link]

[Link]

[Link] sequence

[Link] parts

[Link] for service personnel

[Link]
 Notes to service personnel
Be sure to read this manual carefully to gain a thorough understanding of the correct procedures before servicing the system.
The printer processor uses both tapping truss head screws and spike truss head screws. When attaching the screws once
removed, make sure they are on their original positions. These screws are used for the place where grounding is required.

Tapping truss head screw

Spike truss head screw (green)

Washer head screw (for ground)

SCREW

System program:
• QSS-32 series: Ver. 9
• QSS-32S2 (S) series: Ver. 9
• QSS-32 PRO series: Ver. 9
• QSS-32S2 (S) PRO series: Ver. 9
• S-900SA/S-1700SA: Ver. 9
• QSS-32 DLS series: Ver. 4.01
• QSS-32SD series: Ver. 4.02
• QSS-32SDS series: Ver. 4.02
• QSS-32SD PRO series: Ver. 4.02

z It is prohibited to show, provide, lend or transfer this manual to the others except the service personnel.
z The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice.
z Illustrations in this manual may vary depending on the model or manufacturing lot.
System configuration
This system can have the following combinations:
IMPORTANT
• For details, refer to ☞ 20005.

System Scanner Control Station Laser Printer Paper Processor

QSS-3201 Digital S-2/S-3/S-4 CS-1 LP-1700 PP-1213
QSS-3201SM Digital S-2/S-3/S-4 CS-1 LP-1700 PP-1213SM

QSS-3201S Digital S-2S CS-1S LP-1700S PP-1213S

QSS-3201S2 Digital S-2S2 CS-1S2 LP-1700S2 PP-1213S2

QSS-3202 Digital S-2/S-3/S-4 CS-1 LP-1700 PP-1213

QSS-3202SM Digital S-2/S-3/S-4 CS-1 LP-1700 PP-1213SM
QSS-3202J Digital S-2/S-3/S-4 CS-1 LP-1700 PP-1213J

QSS-3202S Digital S-2S CS-1S LP-1700S PP-1213S

QSS-3202S2 Digital S-2S2 CS-1S2 LP-1700S2 PP-1213S2

QSS-3203 Digital S-2/S-3/S-4 CS-1 LP-1700 PP-1217

QSS-3203SM Digital S-2/S-3/S-4 CS-1 LP-1700 PP-1217SM
QSS-3203J Digital S-2/S-3/S-4 CS-1 LP-1700 PP-1217J

QSS-3203S Digital S-2S CS-1S LP-1700S PP-1217S

QSS-3203S2 Digital S-2S2 CS-1S2 LP-1700S2 PP-1217S2

QSS-3211 Digital S-2/S-3/S-4 CS-1 LP-1700 PP-1213

QSS-3211SM Digital S-2/S-3/S-4 CS-1 LP-1700 PP-1213SM

QSS-3212 Digital S-2/S-3/S-4 CS-1 LP-1700 PP-1213

QSS-3212SM Digital S-2/S-3/S-4 CS-1 LP-1700 PP-1213SM

QSS-3213 Digital S-2/S-3/S-4 CS-1 LP-1700 PP-1217

QSS-3213SM Digital S-2/S-3/S-4 CS-1 LP-1700 PP-1217SM

S-900SA S-2/S-3 CS-1

S-1700SA S-2/S-3 CS-1

QSS-3202 PRO Digital - CS-1 LP-1700 PP-1213

Printer
QSS-3202SM PRO Digital - CS-1 LP-1700 PP-1213SM
Printer
QSS-3202J PRO Digital - CS-1 LP-1700 PP-1213J
Printer

QSS-3202S PRO Digital - CS-1S LP-1700S PP-1213S

Printer
QSS-3202S2 PRO Digital - CS-1S2 LP-1700S2 PP-1213S2
Printer

QSS-3203PRO Digital Printer - CS-1 LP-1700 PP-1217

QSS-3203SM PRO Digital - CS-1 LP-1700 PP-1217SM
Printer
QSS-3203J PRO Digital - CS-1 LP-1700 PP-1217J
Printer

ii
QSS-3203S PRO Digital - CS-1S LP-1700S PP-1217S
Printer
QSS-3203S2 PRO Digital - CS-1S2 LP-1700S2 PP-1217S2
Printer

QSS-3211 DLS S-2/S-3/S-4 CS-1 LP-1700 PP-1213

QSS-3211SM DLS S-2/S-3/S-4 CS-1 LP-1700 PP-1213SM
QSS-3212 DLS S-2/S-3/S-4 CS-1 LP-1700 PP-1213
QSS-3212SM DLS S-2/S-3/S-4 CS-1 LP-1700 PP-1213SM
QSS-3213 DLS S-2/S-3/S-4 CS-1 LP-1700 PP-1217
QSS-3213SM DLS S-2/S-3/S-4 CS-1 LP-1700 PP-1217SM

QSS-3201SD Digital S-4/S1-II CS-2 LP-1700 PP-1213

QSS-3201SD SM Digital S-4/S1-II CS-2 LP-1700 PP-1213SM
QSS-3201SD J Digital S-4/S1-II CS-2 LP-1700 PP-1213J
QSS-3201SD F Digital*1 S-4/S1-II CS-2 LP-1700 PP-1213F

QSS-3201SDS Digital S-4S CS-2S LP-1700S2 PP-1213S2

QSS-3202SD Digital S-4/S1-II CS-2 LP-1700 PP-1213

QSS-3202SD SM Digital S-4/S1-II CS-2 LP-1700 PP-1213SM
QSS-3202SD J Digital S-4/S1-II CS-2 LP-1700 PP-1213J
QSS-3202SD F Digital*1 S-4/S1-II CS-2 LP-1700 PP-1213F

QSS-3203SD Digital S-4/S1-II CS-2 LP-1700 PP-1217

QSS-3203SD SM Digital S-4/S1-II CS-2 LP-1700 PP-1217SM
QSS-3203SD J Digital S-4/S1-II CS-2 LP-1700 PP-1217J
QSS-3203SD F Digital*1 S-4/S1-II CS-2 LP-1700 PP-1217F

QSS-3202SD PRO Digital - CS-2 LP-1700 PP-1213

Printer
QSS-3202SD SM PRO - CS-2 LP-1700 PP-1213SM
Digital Printer
QSS-3202SD J PRO Digital - CS-2 LP-1700 PP-1213J
Printer
QSS-3202SD F PRO Digital - CS-2 LP-1700 PP-1213F
Printer*1

QSS-3203SD PRO Digital - CS-2 LP-1700 PP-1217

Printer
QSS-3203SD SM PRO - CS-2 LP-1700 PP-1217SM
Digital Printer
QSS-3203SD J PRO Digital - CS-2 LP-1700 PP-1217J
Printer
QSS-3203SD F PRO Digital - CS-2 LP-1700 PP-1217F
Printer*1

*1. F specification is supported only in Japan.

iii
Explanation of manual
Description for each specification

This manual contains the maintenance procedure for all the specifications.
The procedure for each specification may differ.
Symbols used when procedures vary
The specification mark is mentioned for the procedure.

Specification Mark
F specification [F]
Normal specification [N]
SM specification [SM]
J specification [J]

There is no specification mark for the procedure which is same for all the specifications.

About the chapters

„ 1. Cautions for work

Contains information on how to achieve safety in service operations. Be sure to read precautions thoroughly and
carefully.
„ 2. Replacement and adjustment of parts
Describes how to remove or replace component parts and units, and how to adjust each part in replacement.
„ 3. Mode
Shows the service personnel mode transition.
„ 4. Troubleshooting
This chapter explains the corrective action for trouble.
„ 5. Operation sequence
Describes the operation sequence.
„ 6. Electrical parts
Describes the PCBs used.
„ 7. Setup for service personnel
Describes the setup procedures for service personnel.
„ 8. Appendix
Describes the wiring diagram.

Symbols used in this manual

This section explains the definitions of the symbols used in this manual.

This is called the alert symbol.

Text following this symbol contains particularly important information concerning safety. Be sure to heed this information.
This symbol is used in conjunction with the words DANGER, WARNING and CAUTION, according to the possible
degree of injury to people or damage to physical property.

The Important symbol indicates supplementary explanations, operations or procedures that require caution and instructions
that must be followed.

The pointing finger symbol indicates the manual or section where you can find additional information.

iv
 The Note symbol indicates useful information on functions and instructions.

Abbreviations for processing solutions used in this manual

The names of the processing solutions in this manual are indicated as shown below. Some types of processing solutions may
have other names.
Processing solutions Abbreviations
Color Developer CD
Bleach Fixer BF
Stabilizer STB

v
This page is intentionally blank.

vi
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Notes to service personnel
System configuration ..............................................................................................................................ii
Explanation of manual ...........................................................................................................................iv
Description for each specification ..................................................................................................iv
About the chapters .........................................................................................................................iv
Symbols used in this manual .........................................................................................................iv
Abbreviations for processing solutions used in this manual ............................................................v

1. Cautions for work

Description of warnings (signal words) .................................................................................. 10010
Description of warnings (signal words) ................................................................................................................10010
Location of warning labels ...................................................................................................... 10020
Location of warning labels ...................................................................................................................................10020
For safe operation .................................................................................................................. 10030
For safe operation .................................................................................................................................................10030
Prevention of static electricity when replacing and maintaining the electrical parts ...........................................10040
Laser Precautions ..................................................................................................................................................10050
LED Precautions ...................................................................................................................................................10060

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

System list .............................................................................................................................. 20005
List of QSS-32 series ............................................................................................................................................20005
Removing covers ................................................................................................................... 20010
Removing covers (Printer section) .......................................................................................................................20010
Removing covers (Processor section) [F] .............................................................................................................20020
Removing covers (Processor section) [N][SM] ....................................................................................................20020
Removing covers (Processor section) [J] .............................................................................................................20020
Removing covers (Desk section/CS-1) [32] .........................................................................................................20050
Removing covers (Desk section/CS-2) [32SD] ....................................................................................................20050
Adjusting belt tension ............................................................................................................. 20110
Adjusting the belt tension (printer section) ..........................................................................................................20110
Adjusting the belt tension (processor section) ......................................................................................................20120
Adjusting the belt tension (colorimeter) ...............................................................................................................20125
Display monitor section .......................................................................................................... 20310
Replacing the display monitor ..............................................................................................................................20310
Replacing the display monitor (DLS specification) .............................................................................................20320
Desk section ........................................................................................................................... 21110
Replacing the colorimeter and the calibration plate .............................................................................................21110
Adjusting the height of the colorimeter ................................................................................................................21120
Magazine section ................................................................................................................... 22000
Checking the paper magazine ...............................................................................................................................22000
Adjusting the zigzagging of the paper magazine deck .........................................................................................22100

vii
Paper supply unit ................................................................................................................... 25610
Removing the paper supply unit ...........................................................................................................................25610
Removal and the right angle adjustment of the cutter unit ...................................................................................25620
Adjusting the timing of the paper supply pressure change sensor ........................................................................25630
Adjusting the paper hold timing of the paper hold motor ....................................................................................25640
Adjusting the CVP imprint pressure .....................................................................................................................25650
Removing paper supply unit A .............................................................................................................................25660
Paper supply unit A2 .............................................................................................................. 25710
Removing paper supply unit A2 ...........................................................................................................................25710
Exposure advance unit ........................................................................................................... 25810
Removing the exposure advance unit ...................................................................................................................25810
Replacing the pressure guide in the exposure advance unit .................................................................................25820
Banding adjustment for the exposure advance unit ..............................................................................................25830
Banding shooting ..................................................................................................................................................25910
Paper advance unit 1 ............................................................................................................. 26510
Removing paper advance unit 1 ...........................................................................................................................26510
Paper advance unit 2 ............................................................................................................. 26550
Removing paper advance unit 2 ...........................................................................................................................26550
Removing the paper advance pressure change motors (right and left) and adjusting the pressure timing for the arm(s)
26560
Adjusting the arm position ....................................................................................................................................26570
Processor loading unit ............................................................................................................ 26610
Removing the processor loading unit ...................................................................................................................26610
Laser unit ............................................................................................................................... 26710
Removing the laser unit ........................................................................................................................................26710
Adjusting the zigzagging of the paper advance section ........................................................................................26810
Zigzag adjustment .................................................................................................................. 26820
How to adjust the zigzagging in paper supply unit A2 .........................................................................................26820
Drive section .......................................................................................................................... 27230
Backlash adjustment of the dryer rack ..................................................................................................................27230
Adjusting the position of the dryer rack ...............................................................................................................27260
Adjusting the drive motor belt tension .................................................................................................................27270
Order classification section .................................................................................................... 27410
Adjusting the stop position of the print receiving tray .........................................................................................27410
Removing the print conveyor unit ........................................................................................................................27420
Replacing the print receiving tray .........................................................................................................................27430
Removing the print sorter unit ..............................................................................................................................27440
F replenishment unit [F specification] ..................................................................................... 27500
Removing the F replenishment unit [F] ................................................................................................................27500
Removing the replenishment cartridge installation section [F] ............................................................................27510
Replacing the replenishment cartridge opening motor [F] ...................................................................................27520
Replacing the replenishment solution level sensor [F] .........................................................................................27530
Output check for the cartridge flushing valve and replenishment cartridge cleaning pump [F] ..........................27540
Position of the replenishment solution collection hoses [F] .................................................................................27550

viii
Tablet replenishment section ................................................................................................. 27610
Removing the tablet replenishment unit [J] ..........................................................................................................27610
Replacing the module [J] ......................................................................................................................................27620
Replacing the drum drive motor [J] ......................................................................................................................27630
Replacing the elevator motor [J] ...........................................................................................................................27640
Adjusting the tension of the elevator chain [J] .....................................................................................................27650
Adjusting the position of the elevator upper sensor [J] ........................................................................................27660
Adjusting the position of the elevator middle sensor [J] ......................................................................................27670
Adjusting the position of the elevator lower sensor [J] ........................................................................................27680
Cleaning method of the drum of module [J] .........................................................................................................27690
Replacing the STB tablet conveyor motor [J] ......................................................................................................27700
Replenishment package unit .................................................................................................. 27810
Replacing the replenisher pump and the water supply pump [SM] ......................................................................27810
Replacing the probe [SM] .....................................................................................................................................27820
Adjusting the sensitivity of the replenisher solution sensor [SM] ........................................................................27830

3. Mode
Password ............................................................................................................................... 30500
Password ...............................................................................................................................................................30500
Passwords (DLS specification) .............................................................................................................................30600
QSS mode structure chart (QSS specification) ...................................................................... 31000
Mode structure table .............................................................................................................................................31000
DLS mode structure chart ...................................................................................................... 32000
DLS mode structure chart .....................................................................................................................................32000
QSS mode structure chart (Order Display) ...........................................................................................................32010
QSS mode structure chart ...................................................................................................... 32020
QSS mode structure chart (Menu display) ............................................................................................................32020
Setup ...................................................................................................................................... 32510
Paper Specification Registration/Setup ................................................................................................................32510
Magazine Registration/Setup ................................................................................................................................32520
Monitor setup ........................................................................................................................................................32530
Monitor Setup [Stand Alone Scanner] ..................................................................................................................32540
Data Initialization .................................................................................................................................................32550
Data Initialization [Stand Alone Scanner] ............................................................................................................32560
Data Initialization [Stand Alone Printer] ..............................................................................................................32561
Processor Settings ................................................................................................................. 33002
Standard Replenishment Amount Setting[F] ........................................................................................................33002
Pump Output Amount Setting[F] ..........................................................................................................................33003
Pump Output Amount Setting [N] [SM] ..............................................................................................................33003
Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount Setting[F] .................................................................................................33004
Total Replenishment Amount Display[F] ............................................................................................................33030
Total Replenishment Amount Display [N] ...........................................................................................................33040
Total Replenishment Amount Display [SM] ........................................................................................................33040
Correction Setting [SM] .......................................................................................................................................33060
Counter [J] ............................................................................................................................................................33070

ix
Processor Standard Setting ................................................................................................... 33500
Thermosensor Calibration [F] [N] [SM] [J] .........................................................................................................33500
Cleaning Water Amount Setting[F] ......................................................................................................................33501
Cleaning Water Amount Setting [N] [SM] [J] .....................................................................................................33501
Drive Motor Revolution Count Setting ................................................................................................................33502
Display Processor Working Information[F] .........................................................................................................33503
Processor Set Up Mode[F] ....................................................................................................................................33504
Refilling Water Amount Setting [N] ....................................................................................................................33510
Refilling Water Amount Setting [SM] .................................................................................................................33510
Basic Kit Setting [J] ..............................................................................................................................................33520
Kit Correction [J] ..................................................................................................................................................33530
Refilling Water Amount Setting [J] ......................................................................................................................33540
Pump Output Amount Setting [J] .........................................................................................................................33550
Operation Check [J] ..............................................................................................................................................33560
Manual Kit Change [J] ..........................................................................................................................................33570
Dryer Lane Select Operation Setting [F] [N] [SM] [J] .........................................................................................33590
Maintenance ........................................................................................................................... 35100
Colorimeter Unit Adjustment ...............................................................................................................................35100
Input Check (Input Section) ..................................................................................................................................35200
Input Check (Printer) ............................................................................................................................................35210
Input Check (Processor) [F] ..................................................................................................................................35220
Input Check (Processor) [N] .................................................................................................................................35220
Input Check (Processor) [SM] ..............................................................................................................................35220
Input Check (Processor) [J] ..................................................................................................................................35220
Output Check (Input Section) ...............................................................................................................................35300
Output Check (Printer) .........................................................................................................................................35310
Output Check (Processor) [F] ...............................................................................................................................35320
Output Check (Processor) [N] ..............................................................................................................................35320
Output Check (Processor) [SM] ...........................................................................................................................35320
Output Check (Processor) [J] ................................................................................................................................35320
Reading and Writing Data ....................................................................................................................................35400
Reading and Writing Data [Stand Alone Scanner] ...............................................................................................35410
Procedures for Backup & Restore Software .........................................................................................................35450
System Version Check ..........................................................................................................................................35500
System upgrade for each control PCB (CPU) ......................................................................................................35600
Operation Information ..........................................................................................................................................35700
Machine Specification ..........................................................................................................................................35800
Self-diagnostic ......................................................................................................................................................35920
Media Drive Self-diagnostic .................................................................................................................................35920

x
Printer Mechanical Adjustment .............................................................................................. 36000
Paper sensor adjustment .......................................................................................................................................36000
Paper Guide Width Correction .............................................................................................................................36005
Paper Advance Unit Correction ............................................................................................................................36010
Exposure Magnification Correction .....................................................................................................................36020
Exposure Position Adjustment .............................................................................................................................36030
Exposure Magnification Fine Adjustment ............................................................................................................36040
Paper Advance Length Correction ........................................................................................................................36050
Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction .......................................................................................................................36060
Paper Guide Width Correction (for each Paper Width) ........................................................................................36065
Exposure Center Correction .................................................................................................................................36070
Exposure Advance Adjustment ............................................................................................................................36080
Paper pressure operation correction ......................................................................................................................36090
WB width correction .............................................................................................................................................36100
Compact Archive Unit Adjustment ......................................................................................... 36700
Compact Archive Unit Initialization ....................................................................................................................36700
Compact Archive Unit Capacity Check ...............................................................................................................36710
Laser Unit Adjustment ............................................................................................................ 37300
Laser Unit Adjustment ..........................................................................................................................................37300
Operation Information ............................................................................................................ 37500
Saving log data .....................................................................................................................................................37500
Saving the memory data .......................................................................................................................................37510
Saving the memory data and Logdata at the same time .......................................................................................37520
System Version Check on No. 6901 ARCNET communication error .................................................................37530
Saving the DLS log file ........................................................................................................................................37600
Flatbed execution display ....................................................................................................... 38000
Flatbed execution display .....................................................................................................................................38000

4. Troubleshooting
Error and attention message regulation ................................................................................... 4001
Classification of errors and attention messages ......................................................................................................4001
Suffix number .........................................................................................................................................................4002
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring ............ 4201
Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring (desk section/CS-1) [32] ..........................................................4201
Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring (desk section/CS-2) [32SD] .....................................................4201
Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring (printer section) ........................................................................4202
Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring (processor) ...............................................................................4203
Diagnosis appendix: Symptoms result from blowout of fuse .................................................... 4251
Symptoms result from blowout of fuse (desk section) ...........................................................................................4251
Symptoms result from blowout of fuse (printer section) ........................................................................................4252
Symptoms result from blowout of fuse (processor section) ...................................................................................4253
Diagnosis appendix: Diagnosis flowchart ................................................................................. 4302
The message, Laser temperatures are being adjusted. does not disappear from the order display. .......................4302
An abnormal print is made .....................................................................................................................................4304
Checking for media drive defect .............................................................................................................................4305
PC does not start normally ......................................................................................................................................4306

xi
Diagnosis appendix: Example of abnormal print ...................................................................... 4400
BGR uneven colors or white strips (film advance direction) .................................................................................4400
Line like a bar code (film advance direction) .........................................................................................................4401
Light density line (white) (paper advance direction) ..............................................................................................4450
Monochrome line (perpendicular to paper advance direction) ...............................................................................4451
Light color is appeared in unexposure position ......................................................................................................4452
Stripped pattern like a wavy line ............................................................................................................................4453
Diagnosis appendix: FB scanner ............................................................................................. 4500
List of FB scanner's error message (for EPSON type) ...........................................................................................4500
Diagnosis appendix: [F specification] ....................................................................................... 4600
Replenishment cartridge installation section troubleshooting flow ........................................................................4600
Recovery procedure 1 from the replenishment error ..............................................................................................4610
Recovery procedure 2 from the replenishment error ..............................................................................................4620
Taking countermeasures after the error No.5916 to No.5921 occurs .....................................................................4630
DLS Error Messages ................................................................................................................ 4900
DLS Error Messages ...............................................................................................................................................4900
System Error messages (No. 3-) .............................................................................................. 4910
No. 3-1 WIP Partition is Half Full ........................................................................................................................4910
No. 3-2 WIP Partition is Three Quarters Full .......................................................................................................4910
No. 3-3 WIP Partition Is Full ................................................................................................................................4910
No. 3-4 WIP Partition Is Full ................................................................................................................................4910
No. 3-6 Order Failed Image Analysis ...................................................................................................................4910
Archive Error messages (No. 6-) .............................................................................................. 4920
No. 6-1 Insufficient Store-It Disk Space ..............................................................................................................4920
Archive Error messages (No. 10-) ............................................................................................ 4961
No. 10-9 Cannot Connect to Upload Host ............................................................................................................4961
No. 10-10 Error While Uploading Network Order ...............................................................................................4961
No. 10-11 Upload Server Cannot Recognize Customer Name ............................................................................4961
No. 10-12 Cannot Connect to Upload Host ..........................................................................................................4961
No. 10-13 Upload Server Cannot Recognize Scan Location ...............................................................................4961
No. 10-14 Upload Server Cannot Recognize Customer Name ............................................................................4961
No. 10-15 Upload Server Cannot Recognize Scan Location ...............................................................................4961
No. 10-19 Connection Processing Failed .............................................................................................................4961
No. 10-20 Busy Modem .......................................................................................................................................4961
Archive Error messages (No. 12-) ............................................................................................ 4970
No. 12-1 Print Service Initialization Failed ..........................................................................................................4970
No. 12-2 Print Initialization Failed .......................................................................................................................4970
No. 12-7 Rendering Error .....................................................................................................................................4970
No. 12-8 Printing Error .........................................................................................................................................4970
No. 12-11 Print Service Error ...............................................................................................................................4970
No. 12-13 Print Creation Error .............................................................................................................................4970
No. 12-14 Order Queuing Failed ..........................................................................................................................4970
No. 12-40 Error Preparing a Print .........................................................................................................................4970
Media Output Error messages (No. 13-) .................................................................................. 4980
No. 13-12 CD Authoring Complete ......................................................................................................................4980
No. 13-13 CD Authoring Complete ......................................................................................................................4980

xii
Attention message/Error: QSS TWAIN driver ........................................................................ 40101
No. 101 Start the QSS and enter the Net Scan mode. .........................................................................................40101
No. 103 The QSS is already connected to another QSS TWAIN driver. Would you like to search for another QSS?
40101
No. 107 48 bit image may not correspond, depending on application. Would you like to enable the setting? 40101
No. 110 Error/Attention has occurred in the QSS. Check the QSS. .................................................................40101
No. 115 The COM port for the external controller is already occupied by another application. Confirm the use
condition of the COM port. ..................................................................................................................................40101
No. 116 Failed to open the COM port for the external controller. .....................................................................40101
No. 117 Would you like to stop processing? ......................................................................................................40101
No. 502 Failed to connect with the QSS. Would you like to search the QSS? ................................................40101
No. 504 This version does not match the QSS. ..................................................................................................40101
No. 505 Communication has been disconnected. The QSS TWAIN driver will be closed. ............................40101
No. 508 A QSS TWAIN driver has been started. Multiple QSS TWAIN drivers cannot be started together. .40101
No. 512 Error/Attention has occurred in the QSS. Quit the process. ................................................................40101
No. 513 Language version of message data is incorrect. Messages are displayed in English. .........................40101
No. 514 There is insufficient memory. ...............................................................................................................40101
Attention message: Processor ............................................................................................... 40500
No. 0500[N] Add water to the Refilling Water Tank. ........................................................................................40500
No. 0501[N] The replenisher switch is turned on. ..............................................................................................40500
No. 0502[N] Add replenishment solution to the replenishment tank. ................................................................40500
No. 0503[N][SM] Empty the Effluent Tank. ......................................................................................................40500
No. 0505 Remove the prints from the Print Sorter Unit. ....................................................................................40500
No. 0506 Close the Dryer Cover. .......................................................................................................................40500
No. 0507 Close the Processor Top Cover. ..........................................................................................................40500
No. 0508 Paper remains in the processor. Are you sure you want to turn the drive off? ...................................40500
No. 0510 Attach the Print Conveyor Unit. .........................................................................................................40500
No. 0515 Set the Rack Stopper. ..........................................................................................................................40500
Attention message: Tablet Replenishment ............................................................................ 40600
No. 0600[J] The Tablet Cartridge is [Link] .................................................................................................40600
No. 0601[J] The Tablet Cartridge is [Link] ..................................................................................................40600
No. 0602[J] The Tablet Cartridge is [Link] ................................................................................................40600
No. 0603[J] Add water to the Water Supply Tank. ............................................................................................40600
No. 0604[J] Add water to the SW/DW Tank. ....................................................................................................40600
No. 0605[J] Attach the Tablet [Link] ......................................................................................................40600
No. 0606[J] Attach the Tablet [Link] ......................................................................................................40600
No. 0607[J] Attach the Tablet [Link] ....................................................................................................40600
No. 0608[J] Attach the Tablet Replenishment Unit. ..........................................................................................40600
No. 0609[J] The Tablet kit is empty. ..................................................................................................................40600
No. 0610[J] Empty the Effluent Tank.### .........................................................................................................40600
Attention message: SM replenishment .................................................................................. 40700
No. 0700 [SM] Replace the Replenishment Package with a new one.P-# .........................................................40700
No. 0701[SM] Attach the Replenishment Package.P-# ......................................................................................40700
No. 0702[SM] Add water to the Water Supply Tank. ........................................................................................40700
No. 0703[SM] Would you like to initialize the remaining amount of the Replenishment Package? .................40700
No. 0704[SM] Press the [YES/START] key to initialize the remaining amount of the Replenishment Package. ......
40700
No. 0705[SM] Replace the Replenishment Package with a new one.P-# ..........................................................40700

xiii
Attention message: F replenishment ...................................................................................... 40900
No. 900 [F] PSR is running out. ........................................................................................................................40900
No. 901 [F] PSR is empty. .................................................................................................................................40900
No. 902 [F] Install the replenisher cartridge. .....................................................................................................40900
No. 903 [F] Close the replenisher section door. ................................................................................................40900
No. 904 [F] Replenish PSR. ..............................................................................................................................40900
No. 905 [F] Install the new replenisher cartridge. .............................................................................................40900
No. 906 [F] It is ready to replace the replenisher cartridge. ..............................................................................40900
No. 907 [F] Collect the waste solution. .............................................................................................................40900
No. 908 [F] Open operation was not completed correctly. Replenishment solution preparation will resume. 40900
No. 909 [F] Replenishment tank is empty. Cannot start the operation. ............................................................40900
No. 910 [F] Preparing the replenishment solution. One moment please . . . ...................................................40900
No. 911 [F] Prcessor Section is processing. One moment please. . . ...............................................................40900
No. 912 [F] Replenishment solution was created. Initialize replenishment data and restart replenishment. ...40900
No. 913 [F] Manual opening cannot be started. ................................................................................................40900

xiv
Attention message: Printer ..................................................................................................... 41000
No. 1000 The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine A ...................................................................41000
No. 1001 The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine B ...................................................................41000
No. 1002 Would you like to feed the leading edge of paper? Paper Magazine A .............................................41000
No. 1003 Would you like to feed the leading edge of paper? Paper Magazine B .............................................41000
No. 1004 Attach the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine A ................................................................................41000
No. 1005 Attach the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine B ................................................................................41000
No. 1010 Change the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine A ...............................................................................41000
No. 1011 Change the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine B ...............................................................................41000
No. 1012 The print channel is not set. Confirm the print channel. ....................................................................41000
No. 1013 Outputting. . . ......................................................................................................................................41000
No. 1014 The system is being initialized, one moment please. . . ......................................................................41000
No. 1017 Would you like to stop printing? ........................................................................................................41000
No. 1024 Would you like to register the correction value? ................................................................................41000
No. 1026 Close the Printer Top Cover. ..............................................................................................................41000
No. 1027 Profile data was not found. .................................................................................................................41000
No. 1028 More than 3 correction keys of low, middle or high density area. Execute correction? ...................41000
No. 1029 The measurement failed. Measure it again. ........................................................................................41000
No. 1030 Wait until printing is complete. ..........................................................................................................41000
No. 1031 Paper Specification Registration Setup was not completed. ...............................................................41000
No. 1032 One moment please. . . ........................................................................................................................41000
No. 1035 Paper Magazine Registration Setup is not completed. .......................................................................41000
No. 1038 Paper type for the magazine is not set. ...............................................................................................41000
No. 1039 Paper type specification is not set. ......................................................................................................41000
No. 1040 Press the [ORDER] key. .....................................................................................................................41000
No. 1041 Unable to accept additional processing at this time. The order will be counted. Wait until the output
process is complete. ..............................................................................................................................................41000
No. 1043 Laser temperature is being adjusted. One moment please. . . ............................................................41000
No. 1047 Close printer door. ..............................................................................................................................41000
No. 1048 Press the [ORDER] key. Wait until output has completed. ...............................................................41000
No. 1050 Additional Picture CD's cannot be made in this order. Press the [ORDER] key. .............................41000
No. 1051 Multiple input media cannot be used to create a Picture CD. .............................................................41000
No. 1052 The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine C ...................................................................41000
No. 1053 Would you like to feed the leading edge of paper? Paper Magazine C .............................................41000
No. 1065 Would you like to continue? ...............................................................................................................41000
No. 1067 Attach the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine C ................................................................................41000
No. 1068 Replace the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine C ..............................................................................41000
No. 1072 Paper color intensity is low. Execute correction? ..............................................................................41000
No. 1074 Sensors may be dirty. ..........................................................................................................................41000
No. 1079 If you would like to make a Picture CD, using the current data, press the [ORDER] key. ................41000
No. 1080 Unable to accept additional processing at this time. Press the [ORDER] key. .................................41000
No. 1081 The Paper Magazine is out of paper. ..................................................................................................41000
No. 1095 Unable to accept additional processing at this time. ...........................................................................41000

xv
Attention message: Printer 2 .................................................................................................. 41083
No. 1083 The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine A2 .................................................................41083
No. 1084 Would you like to feed the leading edge of paper? Paper Magazine A2 ...........................................41083
No. 1085 The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine A ...................................................................41083
No. 1086 Would you like to feed the leading edge of paper? Paper Magazine A .............................................41083
No. 1088 Attach the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine A2 ..............................................................................41083
No. 1089 Change the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine A2 .............................................................................41083
No. 1090 Attach the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine A ................................................................................41083
No. 1091 Change the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine A ...............................................................................41083
Attention message: Scanner/ Film Carrier ............................................................................. 41300
No. 1302-1320 Refer to the Scanner Service Manual for Corrective action of Attention message. ..................41300
No. 1400-1439 Refer to the Scanner Service Manual for Corrective action of Attention message. ..................41300
Attention message: Disk/Media1 ............................................................................................ 41500
No. 1501-1549 Refer to the Troubleshooting Manual for Corrective action of Attention message. .................41500
Attention message: Colorimeter ............................................................................................. 41550
No. 1550 Register the Calibration Plate Data. ....................................................................................................41550
No. 1551 The calibration plate data is out of range. Register the data? .............................................................41550
No. 1552 The paper in the Colorimeter is too short. It cannot be measured. .....................................................41550
Attention message: Pricing unit .............................................................................................. 41600
No. 1601 Turn on the Pricing Unit or supply a pricing sheet. ............................................................................41600
No. 1603 The rest 2 order could be kept by the Pricing Unit. ............................................................................41600
No. 1604 Pricing Sheet Print Out Check ............................................................................................................41600
Attention message: NMC1 ..................................................................................................... 41620
No. 1621-1722 Refer to the Troubleshooting Manual for Corrective action of Attention message. .................41620
Attention message: Software upgrade ................................................................................... 41800
No. 1801 Execute software upgrade. ..................................................................................................................41800
No. 1803 The program does not match the installed Paper Magazine. Upgrade the software. Printer ............41800
Attention message: External system ...................................................................................... 41821
No. 1821 For corrective action of the attention message, see the d-Storage/ CD-R external writing system Service
Manual. .................................................................................................................................................................41821

xvi
Attention message: Main ........................................................................................................ 41900
No. 1900 It was not registered as an option. .......................................................................................................41900
No. 1901 Selected optional function is not available. If you need to use, Install it. .........................................41900
No. 1902 Adobe Photoshop is being used. To enter Menu, Quit the Adobe Photoshop. ..................................41900
No. 1903 Proceeding. One moment please. . . ....................................................................................................41900
No. 1904 Proceeding. One moment please. . . ....................................................................................................41900
No. 1905 Program Timer was not set. ................................................................................................................41900
No. 1908 A Picture CD could not be made. Confirm the settings. ....................................................................41900
No. 1909 Title was not set. .................................................................................................................................41900
No. 1910 There is no frame. The format will be deleted. ..................................................................................41900
No. 1911 This Title data already exist. ...............................................................................................................41900
No. 1912 There is no format. New format will be created. ...............................................................................41900
No. 1913 This format is used in a Print Channel. Would you like to edit? .......................................................41900
No. 1914 The format has reached maximum capacity. No more data can be added. ........................................41900
No. 1920 Capacity Booster Key was not detected. Confirm the connection status. .........................................41900
No. 1921 Capacity Booster Key was detected. ...................................................................................................41900
No. 1922 Viewer Software was not found. Confirm the settings. .....................................................................41900
No. 1923 Set the destination of Media Output to other than External System. ..................................................41900
No. 1924 Set the paper width wider than 127 mm for the Long Print. ..............................................................41900
No. 1925 Would you like to quit the Net Scan Mode? .......................................................................................41900
No. 1926 Set the Media Print Paper Fitting in Frame Print to "Cut", "Overall" or "Real Size". .......................41900
No. 1927 Sort by Output Media Frame Number function cannot be used. ........................................................41900
No. 1928 DPOF File Output function cannot be used. .......................................................................................41900
No. 1933 Select an input media other than the Compact Archive Unit. ............................................................41900
No. 1935 There is insufficient space on the disk for the Order Controller. Are you sure you want to delete the
Compact Archive Unit data automatically? ..........................................................................................................41900
No. 1936 Compact Archive Unit data was not deleted. Delete them manually. ...............................................41900
No. 1937 The file was not found. .......................................................................................................................41900
No. 1939 The String is too long to register. .......................................................................................................41900
No. 1940 Invalid format. Failed to read. ............................................................................................................41900
No. 1977 There is insufficient space left on the disk. Stop the process. ...........................................................41900
No. 1980 Failed to import the file. Confirm the file is correctly selected. ........................................................41900
No. 1981 Short Cut Key is selected overlapped. ................................................................................................41900
Attention message: Compact Archive Unit/Edit ..................................................................... 43370
No. 3371-4052 Refer to the Troubleshooting Manual for Corrective action of Attention message. .................43370
Attention message: External system ...................................................................................... 44200
No. 4200-4360 For corrective action of the attention message, see the d-Storage/ CD-R external writing system
Service Manual. ....................................................................................................................................................44200
Attention message: QSS-Kids ................................................................................................ 44250
No. 4250-4308 Refer to the QSS-Kids Service Manual for Corrective action of Attention message. ..............44250
Attention message: Bravo II ................................................................................................... 44350
No. 4350-4358 See the Bravo II Service Manual for Corrective action of Attention message. ........................44350

xvii
Error message: Processor 1 .................................................................................................. 45500
No. 5500 The processing solution temperature is above the safety range. CD ..................................................45500
No. 5501 The processing solution temperature is above the safety range. BF ...................................................45500
No. 5502 The processing solution temperature is above the safety range. STB ................................................45500
No. 5503 The dryer temperature is above the safety range. ...............................................................................45500
No. 5504 The processing solution temperature is below the processing range. CD ..........................................45500
No. 5505 The processing solution temperature is below the processing range. BF ...........................................45500
No. 5506 The processing solution temperature is below the processing range. STB ........................................45500
No. 5507 The dryer temperature is below the processing range. .......................................................................45500
No. 5508 The processing solution level is too low. ............................................................................................45500
No. 5509 The circulation amount has decreased. ...............................................................................................45500
No. 5510 Processor A/D conversion error. .........................................................................................................45500
No. 5511 The circulation pump has stopped. CD ...............................................................................................45500
No. 5513 The circulation pump has stopped. BF ...............................................................................................45500
No. 5515 The circulation pump has stopped. STB1 ...........................................................................................45500
No. 5516 The circulation pump has stopped. STB2 ...........................................................................................45500
No. 5517 The circulation pump has stopped. STB3 ...........................................................................................45500
No. 5518 The circulation pump has stopped. STB4 ...........................................................................................45500
No. 5519 Thermosensor error. CD .....................................................................................................................45500
No. 5520 Thermosensor error. BF ......................................................................................................................45500
No. 5521 Thermosensor error. STB ...................................................................................................................45500
No. 5522 Dryer Thermosensor error. .................................................................................................................45500
No. 5524 Refilling water operation error. CD-W ...............................................................................................45500
No. 5525 Refilling water operation error. BF-W ...............................................................................................45500
No. 5526 Refilling water operation error. STB1-W ...........................................................................................45500
No. 5527 Refilling water operation error. STB2-W ...........................................................................................45500
No. 5528 Refilling water operation error. STB3-W ...........................................................................................45500
No. 5529 Refilling water operation error. STB4-W ...........................................................................................45500
Error: Processor 2 .................................................................................................................. 45530
No. 5530 The Processor Top Cover is open. ......................................................................................................45530
No. 5531 The dryer cover is open. .....................................................................................................................45530
No. 5532 The Processing Solution Safety Thermostat has activated. ................................................................45530
No. 5533 The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated. .......................................................................................45530
No. 5534 Print Sorter Unit operation error. ........................................................................................................45530
No. 5535 Paper has jammed in the processor section. .......................................................................................45530
No. 5537 The Rack Stopper is not set. ...............................................................................................................45530
No. 5538 Backup data error. Processor .............................................................................................................45530
No. 5539 Print Conveyor Unit was removed. .....................................................................................................45530
No. 5549 Drive Motor Revolution Count Auto Adjustment error. ....................................................................45530
No. 5550 Drive Motor has stopped. ....................................................................................................................45530

xviii
Error message: Tablet replenishment .................................................................................... 45600
No. 5600[J] Tablet Drum operation error. CD ...................................................................................................45600
No. 5601[J] Tablet Drum operation error. BF ....................................................................................................45600
No. 5602[J] Tablet Drum operation error. STB .................................................................................................45600
No. 5603[J] A tablet has [Link] .................................................................................................................45600
No. 5604[J] A tablet has [Link] .................................................................................................................45600
No. 5605[J] A tablet has [Link] ...............................................................................................................45600
No. 5609[J] Printing cannot continue without replenishment. CD ....................................................................45600
No. 5610[J] Printing cannot continue without replenishment. BF .....................................................................45600
No. 5611[J] Printing cannot continue without replenishment. STB ...................................................................45600
No. 5612[J] Tablet Replenishment Elevator operation error. .............................................................................45600
No. 5613[J] The processing solution level is too low. STB1 ...........................................................................45600
Error message: SM replenishment ......................................................................................... 45700
No. 5700[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. CD-A .............................................................................45700
No. 5701[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. CD-B .............................................................................45700
No. 5702[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. CD-C .............................................................................45700
No. 5703[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. CD-W ............................................................................45700
No. 5704[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. BF-A ..............................................................................45700
No. 5705[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. BF-B ..............................................................................45700
No. 5706[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. STB ................................................................................45700
No. 5708[SM] Replenishment Package solution remaining error. .....................................................................45700
No. 5709[SM] Replenishment Package solution remaining error. .....................................................................45700
No. 5710[SM] Refilling water operation error. CD-W ......................................................................................45700
No. 5711[SM] Refilling water operation error. BF-W .......................................................................................45700
No. 5712[SM] Refilling water operation error. STB1-W ...................................................................................45700
No. 5713[SM] Refilling water operation error. STB2-W ...................................................................................45700
No. 5714[SM] Refilling water operation error. STB3-W ...................................................................................45700
No. 5715[SM] Refilling water operation error. STB4-W ...................................................................................45700

xix
Error message: F replenishment ............................................................................................ 45900
No. 5900[F] Replenisher cartridge open motor operation error. ........................................................................45900
No. 5901[F] Replenishment solution level sensor error. P1R ............................................................................45900
No. 5902[F] Replenishment solution level sensor error. P2RA .........................................................................45900
No. 5903]F] Replenishment solution level sensor error. P2RB .........................................................................45900
No. 5904[F] Replenishment solution level sensor error. PSR ............................................................................45900
No. 5905[F] P1R replenishment solution output amount/replenishment solution level management is abnormal. ....
45900
No. 5906[F] P2RA replenishment solution output amount/replenishment solution level management is abnormal. .
45900
No. 5907[F] P2RA replenishment solution output amount/replenishment solution level management is abnormal. .
45900
No. 5908[F] Failed to open the replenisher cartridge. ........................................................................................45900
No. 5909[F] Cartridge cleaning valve/Agitation solenoid valve is abnormal. P1R ...........................................45900
No. 5910[F] Cartridge cleaning valve cleaning valve is abnormal. P2RA ........................................................45900
No. 5911[F] Cartridge cleaning valve cleaning valve is abnormal. P2RB .........................................................45900
No. 5912[F] Predetermined process amount was exceeded. ..............................................................................45900
No. 5913[F] An error occurred in the replenisher section. .................................................................................45900
No. 5914[F] Temperature and humidity sensor error. ........................................................................................45900
No. 5916[F] Solution level of the processing tank goes below the processable level. P1 .................................45900
No. 5917[F] Solution level of the processing tank goes below the processable level. P2 .................................45900
No. 5918[F] Solution level of the processing tank goes below the processable level. PS1 ...............................45900
No. 5919[F] Solution level of the processing tank goes below the processable level. PS2 ...............................45900
No. 5920[F] Solution level of the processing tank goes below the processable level. PS3 ...............................45900
No. 5921[F] Solution level of the processing tank goes below the processable level. PS4 ...............................45900
No. 5922[F] Replenisher section door is open. ..................................................................................................45900
No. 5923[F] Solution remains in the replenishment tank. ..................................................................................45900
Error message: Printer 1 ........................................................................................................ 46000
No. 6012 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A ..............................................................................................46000
No. 6013 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine B ...............................................................................................46000
No. 6014 Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine A ..........................................................................................46000
No. 6015 Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine B ..........................................................................................46000
No. 6016 Paper Cutter operation error. ..............................................................................................................46000
No. 6017 Paper has jammed in the printer section. ............................................................................................46000
No. 6021 Paper remains in the printer section. ...................................................................................................46000
No. 6049 Pressure Guide operation error. ..........................................................................................................46000
No. 6054 The Initial Setup was not executed. ....................................................................................................46000
No. 6056 Printer system error. ............................................................................................................................46000
No. 6069 The printer top cover is open. .............................................................................................................46000
No. 6073 Synchronous Sensor error. ..................................................................................................................46000
No. 6074 B Laser control error. ..........................................................................................................................46000
No. 6075 G Laser control error. ..........................................................................................................................46000
No. 6076 Polygon Mirror control error. .............................................................................................................46000
No. 6077 Interlock error. ....................................................................................................................................46000
No. 6081 Backup data error. Printer ..................................................................................................................46000
No. 6082 Setup error. ..........................................................................................................................................46000
No. 6087 Laser Control PCB system error. ........................................................................................................46000

xx
Error message: Printer 2 ........................................................................................................ 46100
No. 6101 Paper Hold Motor operation error. .....................................................................................................46100
No. 6104 Printer Door is open. ...........................................................................................................................46100
No. 6105 B Laser light source status error. ........................................................................................................46100
No. 6106 G Laser light source status error. ........................................................................................................46100
No. 6107 R Laser temperature is out of range. ...................................................................................................46100
No. 6112 Could not load the paper. Paper Magazine C ....................................................................................46100
No. 6113 Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine C ..........................................................................................46100
No. 6134 Paper Supply Pressure Change Motor operation error. ......................................................................46100
No. 6135 Arm Unit 1 operation error. ................................................................................................................46100
No. 6136 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 1 operation error. ..........................................................46100
No. 6137 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 2 operation error. ..........................................................46100
No. 6138 Paper Advance Arm Motor (Left) operation error. .............................................................................46100
No. 6139 Paper Advance Arm Motor (Right) operation error. ..........................................................................46100
No. 6140 Lane Select Motor (Left) operation error. ..........................................................................................46100
No. 6141 Lane Select Motor (Right) operation error. ........................................................................................46100
No. 6142 Paper Advance Pressure Change Motor (Left) operation error. .........................................................46100
No. 6143 Paper Advance Pressure Change Motor (Right) operation error. .......................................................46100
No. 6148 Paper End Sensor A error. ..................................................................................................................46100
No. 6149 Paper End Sensor B error. ...................................................................................................................46100
No. 6150 Paper End Sensor C error. ...................................................................................................................46100
No. 6151 Paper Loading Sensor error. ...............................................................................................................46100
No. 6152 Zigzagging Correction Sensor (Left) error. ........................................................................................46100
No. 6153 Zigzagging Correction Sensor (Right) error. ......................................................................................46100
No. 6155 Exposure Start Sensor error. ...............................................................................................................46100
No. 6157 Paper Sensor 1 error. ...........................................................................................................................46100
No. 6158 Paper Sensor 2 (Left) error. ................................................................................................................46100
No. 6159 Paper Sensor 2 (Center) error. ............................................................................................................46100
No. 6160 Paper Sensor 2 (Right) error. ..............................................................................................................46100
No. 6173 Printer Door 3 is open. It may be adversely affect print quality. .......................................................46100
No. 6177 Laser Unit temperature is out of range. ..............................................................................................46100
No. 6179 B/G Laser Output Unit error. ..............................................................................................................46100
No. 6187 Setup calculation error. .......................................................................................................................46100
No. 6195 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A2 ............................................................................................46100
No. 6196 Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine A2 ........................................................................................46100
No. 6197 Paper End Sensor A2 error. ................................................................................................................46100
No. 6199 Pressure Release Motor A2 operation error. .......................................................................................46100
No. 6200 Width Change Motor A2 operation error. ..........................................................................................46100
No. 6201 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A ..............................................................................................46100
No. 6202 Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine A ..........................................................................................46100
Error message: Scanner/ Film Carrier ................................................................................... 46300
No. 6303-6337 Refer to the Scanner Service Manual for Corrective action of Error message. .........................46300
No. 6400-6446 Refer to the Scanner Service Manual for Corrective action of Error message. .........................46300
Error message: Disk/Media .................................................................................................... 46500
No. 6506 Hard disk is full. Delete the unnecessary image file(s). ....................................................................46500
Error message: Colorimeter ................................................................................................... 46550
No. 6551 Paper has jammed in the Colorimeter Unit. ........................................................................................46550
No. 6552 Backup data error. Colorimeter Unit .................................................................................................46550
No. 6554 Calibration Plate advance error. ..........................................................................................................46550

xxi
Error message: Pricing unit .................................................................................................... 46600
No. 6600 Pricing Unit communication error. .....................................................................................................46600
No. 6601-## Pricing Unit operation error. ..........................................................................................................46600
No. 6602 Pricing Unit Printer operation error. ...................................................................................................46600
No. 6603 Backup data error. PU ........................................................................................................................46600
Error: NMC ............................................................................................................................. 46620
No. 6620 Remote Control was not finished. .......................................................................................................46620
No. 6621 Could not connect to the server. .........................................................................................................46620
No. 6622 There is no backup data in the server. ................................................................................................46620
No. 6623 Noritsu-eNET Mail was not started. ...................................................................................................46620
Error message: D-ICE control ................................................................................................ 46640
No. 6640 System error. (D-ICE Control PCB) ...................................................................................................46640
No. 6641 Backup Data error. D-ICE Control PCB ...........................................................................................46640
No. 6642 D-ICE Control PCB error. ..................................................................................................................46640
No. 6643 Digital Masking Unit operation error. ................................................................................................46640
Error message: Software upgrade ......................................................................................... 46802
No. 6803 Language version of message data is incorrect. Message display in English. ...................................46802
Error message: Image processing PCB ................................................................................. 46820
No. 6822 Image Processing PCB Image data operation error. ..........................................................................46820
Error message: Main .............................................................................................................. 46900
No. 6900 Main control system error. ..................................................................................................................46900
No. 6901 ARCNET communication error. .........................................................................................................46900
No. 6902 LVDS communication error. ..............................................................................................................46900
No. 6903 Serial communication error. ...............................................................................................................46900
No. 6906 Failed to change the mode. Enter to the next mode? .........................................................................46900
No. 6907 The file was not found. .......................................................................................................................46900
No. 6908 Processing response error. ..................................................................................................................46900
No. 6909 CPU was reset. Abort the process. .....................................................................................................46900
No. 6913 System was shut down forcibly. Restart the system. .........................................................................46900
No. 6916 PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB control error. ...........................................................................................46900
No. 6921 PCB error. ...........................................................................................................................................46900
No. 6918 Failed to start the DLS. .......................................................................................................................46900
No. 6922 Device control error. ...........................................................................................................................46900
No. 6925 PC-Laser Interface PCB control error. ...............................................................................................46900
Error: Compact Archive Unit .................................................................................................. 48350
No. 8361 Archive File read error. .......................................................................................................................48350
No. 8362 Archive File write error. .....................................................................................................................48350
No. 8363 Compact Archive Unit processing error. ............................................................................................48350
No. 8364 Compact Archive Unit cannot be used. ..............................................................................................48350
Error message: Edit ............................................................................................................... 49000
No. 9000 Edit mode System error. ....................................................................................................................49000
No. 9001 Edit mode Information file error. .......................................................................................................49000
No. 9002 Edit mode Image data error. ..............................................................................................................49000
No. 9003 Edit mode Image read error. ..............................................................................................................49000
Error message: External device ............................................................................................. 49200
No. 9200-9381 For corrective action of the attention message, see the d-Storage/ CD-R external writing system
Service Manual. ....................................................................................................................................................49200

xxii
Error message: QSS-Kids ...................................................................................................... 49250
No. 9250-9311 For error corrective action, refer to QSS-Kids Service Manual. ..............................................49250
Error: Bravo II ......................................................................................................................... 49350
No. 9350-9376 For error corrective action, refer to Bravo II Service Manual. .................................................49350

5. Operation sequence
Starting up/Closing down Operation ...................................................................................... 50500
Startup sequence ...................................................................................................................................................50500
Startup sequence (DLS specification) ..................................................................................................................50501
Startup sequence for PC ........................................................................................................................................50510
ARCNET communication ....................................................................................................... 50520
ARCNET communication flow ............................................................................................................................50520
Data Flow Chart (32) .............................................................................................................. 50600
Data flow in printing (negative/positive) [32] ......................................................................................................50600
Data flow in printing (media) [32] ........................................................................................................................50610
Data flow in data saving [32] ................................................................................................................................50620
Data flow to the CD-R external writing system [32] ............................................................................................50630
Data flow to the CAU [32] ...................................................................................................................................50640
Data flow in the image processing PCB [32] .......................................................................................................50650
Data flow in the D-ICE PCB [32] .........................................................................................................................50660
Data Flow Chart [Stand Alone Scanner] (32) ......................................................................... 50670
Data flow of the Net Scan mode [Stand Alone Scanner] [32] ..............................................................................50670
Data flow in the Image processing PCB [Stand Alone Scanner] [32] ..................................................................50680
Data Flow Chart (32SD) ......................................................................................................... 50700
Data flow in printing [32SD] ................................................................................................................................50700
Data flow in data saving [32SD] ..........................................................................................................................50710
Data flow to the CAU [32SD] ..............................................................................................................................50730
Data Flow Chart (DLS specification) ...................................................................................... 50800
Data flow around the DLS System Management Software [DLS specification] .................................................50800
Data flow in printing [DLS specification] ............................................................................................................50810
Data flow in data saving [DLS specification] .......................................................................................................50820
Data flow in the image processing PCB [DLS specification] ..............................................................................50830
Data flow in the D-ICE PCB [DLS specification] ................................................................................................50840
Paper path diagram ................................................................................................................ 55000
Paper path diagram ...............................................................................................................................................55000
Paper advance operation ....................................................................................................... 55100
Paper supply operation (loading operation) ..........................................................................................................55100
Paper supply operation (arm unit 1 operation) .....................................................................................................55200
Exposure advance operation .................................................................................................................................55300
Paper advance operation (paper advance unit 1 operation) ..................................................................................55400
Paper advance operation (paper advance unit 2 operation) ..................................................................................55500
Paper rewind operation .........................................................................................................................................55600
Paper splicing operation .......................................................................................................................................55700
Paper end operation ..............................................................................................................................................55800
Fogged paper operation ........................................................................................................................................55900

xxiii
Processor paper advance operation ...................................................................................... 56100
Processor paper advance operation .......................................................................................................................56100
Print conveyor unit operation ................................................................................................. 56200
Print conveyor unit operation ...............................................................................................................................56200
Print sorter unit operation ....................................................................................................... 56300
Print sorter unit operation .....................................................................................................................................56300
Replenishment operation sequence [F specification] ............................................................. 57010
Replenishment operation sequence [F] .................................................................................................................57010
Replenishment operation sequence [F] .................................................................................................................57020

6. Electrical parts
Compatibility of PCBs and electrical parts ............................................................................. 60100
Compatibility of QSS-32 series PCBs and electrical parts ...................................................................................60100
Position of electrical parts (desk section) ............................................................................... 61000
Desk section/CS-1 (positions of PCBs and electrical parts) [32] .........................................................................61000
Desk section/CS-2 (positions of PCBs and electrical parts) [32SD] ....................................................................61000
Position of electrical parts (printer section) ............................................................................ 63000
Printer section (positions of PCBs) .......................................................................................................................63000
Printer section (positions of electrical parts) ........................................................................................................63050
Paper magazine mounts A, A2, B, and C (positions of electrical parts) ..............................................................63051
Paper supply unit A2 (positions of electrical parts) ..............................................................................................63055
Paper supply unit (positions of electrical parts) ...................................................................................................63060
Exposure advance unit (positions of electrical parts) ...........................................................................................63070
Laser unit (position and description of electrical parts) .......................................................................................63080
Paper advance unit 1 (positions of electrical parts) ..............................................................................................63090
Paper advance unit 2 (positions of electrical parts) ..............................................................................................63100
Processor loading unit (positions of electrical parts) ............................................................................................63110
Position of PCBs (processor section) ..................................................................................... 63200
Processor section (positions of PCBs) [F] [N] [SM] [J] .......................................................................................63200
Processor section (position of PCB) [SM] .....................................................................................................63200
Processor section (positions of PCBs) [J] ......................................................................................................63200
Position of electrical parts (dryer section and order classification section) ............................ 63260
Dryer section and order classification section (positions of electrical parts) .......................................................63260
Positions of electrical parts (Processor section) .................................................................... 63280
Processor section (positions of electrical parts) [F] ..............................................................................................63280
Processor section (positions of electrical parts) [N] .............................................................................................63290
Processor section (positions of electrical parts) [SM] ..........................................................................................63300
Processor section (positions of electrical parts) [J] ..............................................................................................63310
Processor section (List of adjustment after electrical parts replacement) [F] ......................................................63312
Processor section (fan operation specification) ..................................................................... 63321
Processor section (fan operation specification) ....................................................................................................63321

xxiv
Descriptions of PCB (desk section) ........................................................................................ 64000
Image processing PCB (J391305) ........................................................................................................................64000
Image correction PCB (J391359) .........................................................................................................................64010
D-ICE control PCB (J391306) ..............................................................................................................................64030
D-ICE PCB (J391374) ..........................................................................................................................................64040
D-ICE control PCB and removing the D-ICE PCB (CS-1) ..................................................................................64045
DIMM (I090499) ..................................................................................................................................................64050
Scratch mend PCB 2 (J390905) ............................................................................................................................64060
Scratch mend PCB 1 [J484A] and scratch mend PCB 1 [J485] (J390904) ..........................................................64070
Data change-over PCB (J390906) ........................................................................................................................64080
Switch control PCB (J391238) .............................................................................................................................64090
ARCNET HUB PCB (J391277) ...........................................................................................................................64100
Keyboard connecting PCB (J391265) ..................................................................................................................64110
Keyboard switch PCB (J390794) .........................................................................................................................64120
Colorimeter control PCB (J391264) .....................................................................................................................64130
PU control PCB (J391321) ...................................................................................................................................64140
Power PCB (J391262) ..........................................................................................................................................64160
Description of power supply (desk section) .........................................................................................................64170
Description of PCB (printer section) ....................................................................................... 66000
Printer control PCB (J391254) .............................................................................................................................66000
Laser control PCB (J391270) ...............................................................................................................................66010
Printer I/O PCB 1 (J391255) ................................................................................................................................66020
Printer I/O PCB 2 (J391256) ................................................................................................................................66030
Printer I/O PCB 3 (J391253) ................................................................................................................................66040
Triple magazine PCB (J391257) ..........................................................................................................................66050
Quad magazine PCB (J391177) ............................................................................................................................66055
Laser I/O PCB (J391252) .....................................................................................................................................66060
B laser driver and G laser driver ...........................................................................................................................66070
AOM driver ..........................................................................................................................................................66080
CVP PCB (J391258) .............................................................................................................................................66090
Power supply (printer section) ..............................................................................................................................66100
Explanation of PCBs (Processor section) .............................................................................. 66200
Processor control PCB [F] [N] [SM] [J] ...............................................................................................................66200
Processor I/O PCB (J391356) [N] [SM] [J] [F] ....................................................................................................66210
Processor relay PCB (J391260) [N] [SM] [J] [F] .................................................................................................66220
Tablet replenishment driver PCB (J391351) [J] ...................................................................................................66500
SM I/O PCB (J391191, J391378) [SM] ...............................................................................................................66600
F replenishment I/O PCB (J391322) [F] ..............................................................................................................66800
Power supply (processor) .....................................................................................................................................67400
Changing the power supply specifications (Outside Japan) .................................................................................68050
Changeing the power supply specifications [Stand alone scanner] ......................................................................68060
Cables .................................................................................................................................... 68100
Precautions for handling the optical fiber cable and LVDS cable ........................................................................68100
Power ON/OFF ...................................................................................................................... 68500
Operation when the power supply is turned on ....................................................................................................68500
When power is not supplied to input and output sections (How to use the starter jumper) ................................68550

xxv
7. Setup for service personnel
Setup for service personnel ................................................................................................... 70010
Setup during installation (Works to do until completing the temperature adjustment) ........................................70010
Setup during installation (Works after completing the temperature adjustment) .................................................70020
Setup during installation [Stand Alone Scanner] ..................................................................................................70021
Setup during installation [Stand Alone Printer] ....................................................................................................70022
Procedure for downgrading the profile data .........................................................................................................70025
Other works after installation (Language setting except English and Japanese) ..................................................70040
Check the processor setting [N] [SM] [J] ............................................................................................................70050
Check the processor setting [F] ............................................................................................................................70051
Scanner section adjustment check [S-2/S-3/S-4] ..................................................................................................70060
Scanner section adjustment check [S1-II] ............................................................................................................70060

8. Appendix
Periodically replaced parts ..................................................................................................... 80110
List of Maintenance/Periodically Replaced Parts/Consumable Parts (Desk Section) ..........................................80110
List of Maintenance/Periodically Replaced Parts/Consumable Parts (Printer Section) .......................................80120
List of Maintenance/Periodically Replaced Parts/Consumable Parts (Processor Section) [N] [F] ......................80130
List of Maintenance/Periodically Replaced Parts/Consumable Parts (Processor Section) [SM] ........................80140
List of Maintenance/Periodically Replaced Parts/Consumable Parts (Processor Section) [J] ............................80150
Positions of paper jam release labels .................................................................................... 80210
Positions of paper jam release labels ....................................................................................................................80210
Service personnel tool list ...................................................................................................... 80310
Service personnel tool list [N] [SM] [J] [F] ..........................................................................................................80310
Operation keyboard correspondence list ............................................................................... 81010
Operation keyboard correspondence list ..............................................................................................................81010
Operation keyboard correspondence list (DLS specification) ..............................................................................81020
Condition list for replenishment solution sensors ................................................................... 81510
Condition list for replenishment solution sensors [SM] .......................................................................................81510
Table of wiring diagrams ........................................................................................................ 89000
Table of wiring diagrams ......................................................................................................................................89000

xxvi
 1000

1. Cautions for work

Description of warnings (signal words) ................................................................................ 10010

Description of warnings (signal words) .............................................................................................................10010

1 Cautions for work

Location of warning labels ................................................................................................... 10020
Location of warning labels ................................................................................................................................10020
For safe operation ............................................................................................................... 10030
For safe operation ..............................................................................................................................................10030
Prevention of static electricity when replacing and maintaining the electrical parts ........................................10040
Laser Precautions ...............................................................................................................................................10050
LED Precautions ................................................................................................................................................10060

1000 1/1
 10010 Description of warnings (signal words)

Description of warnings (signal words)

Description of warnings (signal words)

• Signal words identify the level of injuries that can potentially occur.
• The signal words used in this manual and found on labels, DANGER, WARNING and CAUTION, are assigned according to the
level of potential risk.

1. Cautions for work

• Warning labels are located at or near the part of the system that poses the indicated danger. Ignoring a warning may cause death or
serious injury, or system malfunction. Be sure to follow the indications in the manuals and on the warning labels.
• The warnings include a signal word, the type and extent of the danger, and information on avoiding the danger.
• Carefully read and understand the warnings included in this manual and on the warning labels before operating the system.

This indicates situations that if not immediately avoided could result in serious injury or death.

This indicates situations that if not avoided could result in serious injury or death.

This indicates situations that if not avoided could result in non-life threatening injury. It is also used to indicate situations
which may cause damage to physical property.

Example of warning label

Warning (signal word)

Symbol (warning indication)

Warning text (warning

indication)

SIGNALWORD

10010 1/1
 10020 Location of warning labels

Location of warning labels

Location of warning labels

The following shows the locations and types of warning labels and the parts number on this system. Heed the clearly indicated warnings
and operate safely without accidents. If the warning labels on the system become illegible or peel off, contact your place of purchase and
exchange them with new labels.

1. Cautions for work

Though the system appearance of some models may be different from figures, locations of warning labels are same as shown in figures.
Input section (CS-1)
1 1

1*1

13

1
G068043
*1. This label is attached only if S-2 is equipped.

Input section (CS-2)

1*1 1

13

1
G083030
*1. This label is attached only if S-4 is equipped.

10020 1/6
 10020
Location of warning labels

Scanner (S1-II)

1. Cautions for work

1

G073162

Printer processor section

10 9 3 4
10 2
6
11
1 8
11

3 4 3 1

1
G090212

Processor section (F specification)

16

3
3
4
4
G086876

10020 2/6
 10020
Location of warning labels

Quad magazine unit

When opening printer door 3: Viewed from back

1. Cautions for work

1
1
G086007

135/240 AFC-II

12

G071691

135/240 MMC-II

14

G050548

135/240 AMC-II

15

G061413

10020 3/6
 10020
Location of warning labels

MFC

1. Cautions for work

14

G071916

1 2
A023349-01 A023200-01

3 4
A022523-01 A022531-01

5 6
A022509-01

10020 4/6
 10020
Location of warning labels

7
A234392-01

1. Cautions for work

8
A234350-01

9 10
A022536-01 A023202-01

11 12
A515330-01 A227560-01

13
A063381-01

14 15
A031010-01 A064649-01

10020 5/6
 10020
Location of warning labels

16 A087463-01

1. Cautions for work

10020 6/6
 10030 For safe operation

For safe operation

For safe operation

z General precautions

1. Cautions for work

• Prior to any part replacement or mechanical adjustment, be sure to turn off the power supply.
• Since the work which uses key operations cannot turn off the circuit breaker, the work such as mechanical operation
check requires particular attention.

IMPORTANT
• Ground wires and FG clamps are connected to the covers, units, PCBs, power supply, and cables provided with this
system.
For reassembly, be sure to connect the ground wires and FG clamps as they were.
• For the ground wire with the lock washer, be sure to attach the lock washer to its original position.
• Be sure to perform an operation check after replacing or adjusting any parts (or units).

NOTE
• The grounds positions are shown in the illustrations below as wiring diagrams.

G057008

z Precautions for processing solutions

• This system uses non-pharmaceutical poison and toxic processing solutions which are dangerous to drink in. Direct
contact with processing solutions may irritate eyes.
When handling processing solutions, wear safety goggles.
If a processing solution has been ingested accidentally, immediately rinse the mouth out with water, and drink one or
two cups of water. Contact a physician as soon as possible, and then vomit the solution according to the physician's
instructions.
If processing solution gets into eyes, immediately rinse them under running water for at least 15 minutes, and then
contact a physician.

• Direct contact with processing solutions may irritate the skin and may cause an allergic reaction.
When handling processing solutions, be sure to wear rubber gloves and clothing for workwear, to avoid direct contact.
If there is a possibility of direct or indirect exposure to a processing solution, wash with soap and rinse with lots of
water, after completion of work.
• Processing solution stains on your clothing may result in discoloration or fading. When handling processing solutions,
wear clothing for workwear.

10030 1/3
 10030
For safe operation

z Precautions against electric shock

• If any case you have to take care of wiring for the power such as moving the system, ask a qualified professional
electrician for work. Do not forget to ground the system.

1. Cautions for work

• Pay attention to avoid shocks when performing troubleshooting, wiring checking, or voltage/current measurement.
• When replacing a fuse or PCB, be sure to turn off the circuit breaker and the main power supply. Wait for 10 seconds
or more before replacement.

z Precautions for operating rotary section

• Be careful for your hands, hair, clothes, etc., not to be caught under the gear, chain, belt, roller, fan and other rotating
parts.
Do not remove the cover unless it is specified.
Be sure to turn off the circuit breaker and main power supply of this system before performing any work.
Keep away your hands from the system during operation.
If your hand or the like is caught and you cannot move, ask someone around you to turn off the circuit breaker at once.

z Precautions for operating heating section

• The processing solution heater, dryer heater and motor, etc. generate high fever.
If you directly touch them during operation or right after operation, you may get burnt.
When replacement of parts or maintenance is performed, make sure that the temperature is fully lowered.
After temperature fully falls, carry out the operation by turning OFF the circuit breaker and the main power supply.
Cooling time, such as the heater section and the motor, changes with work [Link] off the circuit breaker and
main power supply. Then, perform the work after the temperature has become low enough.
If you have got burnt, cool the burn with flowing water and contact a physician as soon as possible.

10030 2/3
 10030
For safe operation

z Precautions for movable units

• There is a danger of hands being caught by the open/close covers or doors, or by the movable units.
When opening and closing covers or doors, be sure to hold them firmly.

1. Cautions for work

When moving a unit manually, hold the specified parts only.
When working with a unit which automatically moves, or when working around the unit, be sure to turn off the circuit
breaker and main power supply.
If your hand is caught and you cannot move, immediately call for help to turn off the circuit breaker.

z Precautions for using edged tools

• There is a danger of cutting hands on edged tools.

Do not remove the covers from edged tools. Keep hands away from edged tools.
When operating near edged tools, turn off the circuit breaker and main power supply.

• There is a danger of cutting hands on edged tools.

When replacing an edged tool with a new one, do not touch the edge.

10030 3/3
 10040
For safe operation

Prevention of static electricity when replacing and maintaining the

electrical parts

Static electricity from your body may damage electronic components such as PCBs, if you touch them when charged.
When handling electronic parts, be sure to use static-dissipative tools as below to prevent parts from being damaged by static electricity.

1. Cautions for work

In addition, use the static-dissipative tools for maintenance of the digital units or engines.
Static-dissipative tools
Description Remarks
Portable Static-Dissipative Field Service Kit Use this kit when replacing or installing/removing electronic parts from the system.
This kit consists of four items: Static-Dissipative Work Mat, Wrist Strap, Ground
Cord, and Alligator Clips.
Static-Dissipative conductive gloves Use these to prevent oil from your hands adhering when you touch a PCB.
Wrist strap Use this when checking electronic parts.

• When using the static-dissipative tools, be sure to turn off the circuit breaker of the system and the main power supply,
and wait 10 seconds or more before performing the operation.

10040 1/1
 10050
For safe operation

Laser Precautions

The laser is built into the printer.

1. Cautions for work

• Follow the instructions to avoid exposing your eyes to laser radiation.
• Do not perform the operation that is not described in this manual.
• Do not perform printing operations while the safety switch is released.
Location of laser labels
The labels for the laser are placed on this machine.
1
5

3*1
4*1 2*1
G086476

If the quad magazine unit is installed If the triple magazine unit is installed

5 1

3*1 4*1 2*1 3*1 4*1 2*1

G086475
*1. This label is not attached on QSS-32##S2 models.

10050 1/2
 10050
For safe operation

1 2

1. Cautions for work

3 4

10050 2/2
 10060
For safe operation

LED Precautions

The LED is built into the scanner.

1. Cautions for work

• Follow the instructions to avoid exposing your eyes to LED radiation.
• Do not remove any parts except specified ones.
• Do not look at the LED directly using optical instruments.
Location of LED labels
The labels for the LED precautions are placed on this system.
Do not remove these labels.
Except for S1-II

1 2 G070355

S1-II

2 G082952

10060 1/2
 10060
For safe operation

1 2

1. Cautions for work

10060 2/2
 2000

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

System list ........................................................................................................................... 20005

List of QSS-32 series .........................................................................................................................................20005
Removing covers ................................................................................................................. 20010
Removing covers (Printer section) ....................................................................................................................20010
Removing covers (Processor section) [F] ..........................................................................................................20020
Removing covers (Processor section) [N][SM] .................................................................................................20020

2 Replacement and adjustment of parts

Removing covers (Processor section) [J] ..........................................................................................................20020
Removing covers (Desk section/CS-1) [32] ......................................................................................................20050
Removing covers (Desk section/CS-2) [32SD] .................................................................................................20050
Adjusting belt tension .......................................................................................................... 20110
Adjusting the belt tension (printer section) .......................................................................................................20110
Adjusting the belt tension (processor section) ...................................................................................................20120
Adjusting the belt tension (colorimeter) ............................................................................................................20125
Display monitor section ....................................................................................................... 20310
Replacing the display monitor ...........................................................................................................................20310
Replacing the display monitor (DLS specification) ..........................................................................................20320
Desk section ........................................................................................................................ 21110
Replacing the colorimeter and the calibration plate ..........................................................................................21110
Adjusting the height of the colorimeter .............................................................................................................21120
Magazine section ................................................................................................................. 22000
Checking the paper magazine ............................................................................................................................22000
Adjusting the zigzagging of the paper magazine deck ......................................................................................22100
Paper supply unit ................................................................................................................. 25610
Removing the paper supply unit ........................................................................................................................25610
Removal and the right angle adjustment of the cutter unit ................................................................................25620
Adjusting the timing of the paper supply pressure change sensor ....................................................................25630
Adjusting the paper hold timing of the paper hold motor .................................................................................25640
Adjusting the CVP imprint pressure ..................................................................................................................25650
Removing paper supply unit A ..........................................................................................................................25660
Paper supply unit A2 ........................................................................................................... 25710
Removing paper supply unit A2 ........................................................................................................................25710
Exposure advance unit ........................................................................................................ 25810
Removing the exposure advance unit ................................................................................................................25810
Replacing the pressure guide in the exposure advance unit ..............................................................................25820
Banding adjustment for the exposure advance unit ...........................................................................................25830
Banding shooting ...............................................................................................................................................25910
Paper advance unit 1 ........................................................................................................... 26510
Removing paper advance unit 1 ........................................................................................................................26510
Paper advance unit 2 ........................................................................................................... 26550
Removing paper advance unit 2 ........................................................................................................................26550
Removing the paper advance pressure change motors (right and left) and adjusting the pressure timing for the
arm(s) .................................................................................................................................................................26560
Adjusting the arm position ................................................................................................................................26570
Processor loading unit ......................................................................................................... 26610
Removing the processor loading unit ................................................................................................................26610

2000 1/2
 2000

Laser unit ............................................................................................................................. 26710

Removing the laser unit .....................................................................................................................................26710
Adjusting the zigzagging of the paper advance section ....................................................................................26810
Zigzag adjustment ............................................................................................................... 26820
How to adjust the zigzagging in paper supply unit A2 ......................................................................................26820
Drive section ........................................................................................................................ 27230
Backlash adjustment of the dryer rack ..............................................................................................................27230
Adjusting the position of the dryer rack ............................................................................................................27260

2 Replacement and adjustment of parts

Adjusting the drive motor belt tension ..............................................................................................................27270
Order classification section .................................................................................................. 27410
Adjusting the stop position of the print receiving tray ......................................................................................27410
Removing the print conveyor unit .....................................................................................................................27420
Replacing the print receiving tray .....................................................................................................................27430
Removing the print sorter unit ...........................................................................................................................27440
F replenishment unit [F specification] .................................................................................. 27500
Removing the F replenishment unit [F] .............................................................................................................27500
Removing the replenishment cartridge installation section [F] .........................................................................27510
Replacing the replenishment cartridge opening motor [F] ................................................................................27520
Replacing the replenishment solution level sensor [F] ......................................................................................27530
Output check for the cartridge flushing valve and replenishment cartridge cleaning pump [F] .......................27540
Position of the replenishment solution collection hoses [F] ..............................................................................27550
Tablet replenishment section ............................................................................................... 27610
Removing the tablet replenishment unit [J] .......................................................................................................27610
Replacing the module [J] ...................................................................................................................................27620
Replacing the drum drive motor [J] ...................................................................................................................27630
Replacing the elevator motor [J] .......................................................................................................................27640
Adjusting the tension of the elevator chain [J] ..................................................................................................27650
Adjusting the position of the elevator upper sensor [J] .....................................................................................27660
Adjusting the position of the elevator middle sensor [J] ...................................................................................27670
Adjusting the position of the elevator lower sensor [J] .....................................................................................27680
Cleaning method of the drum of module [J] ......................................................................................................27690
Replacing the STB tablet conveyor motor [J] ...................................................................................................27700
Replenishment package unit ............................................................................................... 27810
Replacing the replenisher pump and the water supply pump [SM] ..................................................................27810
Replacing the probe [SM] ..................................................................................................................................27820
Adjusting the sensitivity of the replenisher solution sensor [SM] .....................................................................27830

2000 2/2
 20005 System list

System list

List of QSS-32 series

*1. It is sometimes shown as (32, 32SD) in service manual.

System name is expressed by the name shown in Remarks 2 in service manual.(Some files are not always applicable.)

NOTE
• For details about the capacity booster, see ☞ Capacity booster list.

z QSS-32 series*1
System Process Illustration System Scanner Remarks 1 Remar

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Specifica program ks 2
*1
tion
QSS-3201 Digital Normal S-2 32
SM S-3
J S-4
QSS-3201/3202
3203/3211
3212/3213 Digital

QSS-3202 Digital Normal • Capacity booster A is

SM installed.
J

QSS-3203 Digital Normal • Capacity boosters A and B

SM are attached.
J

QSS-3211 Digital Normal • High specification computer

SM is equipped.
QSS-3211 DLS Normal S-2
QSS-3211DLS
SM 3212 DLS S-3
3213DLS S-4

QSS-3212 Digital Normal S-2 • High specification computer

SM QSS-3201/3202 S-3 is equipped.
3203/3211
3212/3213 Digital S-4 • Capacity booster A is
installed.

QSS-3212 DLS Normal S-2

QSS-3211DLS
SM 3212 DLS S-3
3213DLS S-4

QSS-3213 Digital Normal S-2 • High specification computer

SM QSS-3201/3202 S-3 is equipped.
3203/3211
3212/3213 Digital S-4 • Capacity boosters A and B
are attached.

QSS-3213 DLS Normal S-2

QSS-3211DLS
SM 3212 DLS S-3
3213DLS S-4

20005 1/3
 20005
System list

System Process Illustration System Scanner Remarks 1 Remar

Specifica program ks 2
*1
tion
S-900SA − S-2
S-3
S-900SA
S-1700SA

S-1700SA • Capacity booster A is

installed.

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

QSS-3202 PRO Normal QSS-3202 PRO
−
Digital Printer SM QSS-3203 PRO

QSS-3203PRO • Capacity booster B is

Digital Printer attached.

*1. For 32 series, image is processed by the image processing PCB.

For 32 series, CS-1 is equipped with input section.

z QSS-32SD series*1
System Process Illustration System Scanner Remarks 1 Remar
Specifica program ks 2
*1
tion
QSS-3201SD Normal S-4 32SD
Digital SM QSS-3211DLS S1-II
3212 DLS
J 3213DLS

F
QSS-3202SD • Capacity booster C is
Digital attached.

QSS-3203SD • Capacity boosters B and C

Digital are attached.

QSS-3202SD PRO Normal QSS-3202SD PRO

−
Digital Printer SM QSS-3203SD PRO

QSS-3203SD PRO • Capacity booster B is

Digital Printer attached.

*1. For 32SD series, image is processed by the computer.

For 32SD series, CS-2 is equipped with input section.

20005 2/3
 20005
System list

z Capacity booster list

Capacity booster Model Details
Capacity booster A only 3202 • It increases software process speed from film or digital
3212 media input to print.
3212DLS • It fully uses the capability of the printer and processor
S-1700SA (PP-1213).
• For stand alone scanner specification, software
processing speed for film input increases twice as fast
as QSS-32.

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Capacity booster B only 3203 PRO • It increase software process speed from digital media
3203SD PRO input to printing.
• It fully uses the capability of the printer and processor
(PP-1217).
Capacity booster A and B 3203 • It increases software process speed from film or digital
3213 media input to print.
3213DLS • It fully uses the capability of the printer and processor
(PP-1217).
Capacity booster C only 3202SD • It increases software process speed from film or digital
media input to print.
• It fully uses the capability of the printer and processor
(PP-1213).
Capacity booster B and C 3203SD • It increases software process speed from film or digital
media input to print.
• It fully uses the capability of the printer and processor
(PP-1217).

20005 3/3
 20010 Removing covers

Removing covers

Removing covers (Printer section)

When the triple magazine is not equipped

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

4

When the triple magazine is equipped

2
6

Remove screws with this mark.

Loosen screws with this mark.

G069801

20010 1/2
 20010
Removing covers

When equipped with the quad magazine unit

5 7

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

8

Remove screws with this mark.

G086486

No. Name Screw Remarks

(Q'ty)
1 Printer side cover 8 When the triple magazine unit is equipped, the number of screws for
the printer side cover is six.
2 Printer rear cover 16
3 Printer door 1 -
4 Printer door 2 -
5 Printer door 3 -
6 Printer top cover -
7 Printer door 4 -
8 Rear cover 12

20010 2/2
 20020
Removing covers

Removing covers (Processor section) [F]

Description for each specification

In this section, the location of information varies depending on the specification. See below for the description for each specification.

Reference
☞ Removing covers (Processor section) [N][SM] ☞ Removing covers (Processor section) [J]

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

6

5 8

10 3
7

14
2

1
13

Holder (2)
12

Conveyor guide

11

Remove screws with this mark.

Loosen screws with this mark.

G085932

20020 1/7
 20020
Removing covers

No. Name Screw Remarks

(Q'ty)
1 Processor cover 1 6
2 Sub-tank top cover -
3 Processor rear cover 7
4 Processor door 1 2 Remove this after removing the mounting plate of the processor door 1.
5 Processor cover 4 6
6 Processor drive cover 4
7 Conveyor damper cover 2

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

8 Angle bracket cover - Remove this after removing the dryer side cover.
9 Distribution plate cover 3 Remove this after removing processor cover 1.
10 Dryer side cover 4
11 Sorter cover 1
12 Conveyor cover 4 Remove this after removing holder (2) and the conveyor guide.
13 Power supply unit cover 2 Remove this after removing processor cover 1.
14 PCB cover 4 Remove this after removing the processor rear cover.

20020 2/7
 20020
Removing covers

Removing covers (Processor section) [N][SM]

Description for each specification

In this section, the location of information varies depending on the specification. See below for the description for each specification.

Reference
☞ Removing covers (Processor section) [J] ☞ Removing covers (Processor section) [F]

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

6
9

8
3

11

10 2

Remove screws with this mark.

Loosen screws with this mark.

G069802

20020 3/7
 20020
Removing covers

13

Holder (2)

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Conveyor guide

12

Remove screws with this mark.

Loosen screws with this mark.

G070010

No. Name Screw Remarks

(Q'ty)
1 Processor cover 1 4
2 Sub-tank top cover -
3 Processor rear cover 2
4 Processor door 1 2 Remove this after removing the mounting plate of the processor door
1.
5 Processor door 2 2 Remove this after removing the mounting plate of the processor door
2.
6 Processor cover 4 7
7 Processor drive cover 4
8 Conveyor damper cover 2
9 Angle bracket cover - Remove this after removing the dryer side cover.
10 Distribution plate cover 3 Remove this after removing processor cover 1.
11 Dryer side cover 4
12 Sorter cover 1
13 Conveyor cover 4 Remove this after removing holder (2) and the conveyor guide.

20020 4/7
 20020
Removing covers

Removing covers (Processor section) [J]

Description for each specification

In this section, the location of information varies depending on the specification. See below for the description for each specification.

Reference
☞ Removing covers (Processor section) [N][SM] ☞ Removing covers (Processor section) [F]

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

6
9

8 3

10 11

5
4
G070018

20020 5/7
 20020
Removing covers

13

Holder (2)

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Conveyor guide

12

14

Remove screws with this mark.

Loosen screws with this mark.

G070019

No. Name Screw Remarks

(Q'ty)
1 Processor cover 1 4
2 Sub-tank top cover -
3 Processor rear cover 2
4 Processor door 1 2 Remove this after removing the mounting plate of the processor door
1.
5 Processor door 2 2 Remove this after removing the mounting plate of the processor door
2.
6 Processor cover 4 7
7 Processor drive cover 4
8 Conveyor damper cover 2
9 Angle bracket cover - Remove this after removing the dryer side cover.

20020 6/7
 20020
Removing covers

No. Name Screw Remarks

(Q'ty)
10 Distribution plate cover 3 Remove this after removing processor cover 1.
11 Dryer side cover 4
12 Sorter cover 1
13 Conveyor cover 4 Remove this after removing holder (2) and the conveyor guide.
14 Tablet replenishment cover 4

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

20020 7/7
 20050
Removing covers

Removing covers (Desk section/CS-1) [32]

Removing covers differ between 32 and 32SD.

• For details about 32SD, refer to ☞ Removing covers (Desk section/CS-2) [32SD].

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

3

Remove screws with this mark.

Loosen screws with this mark.

G068535

No. Name Screw Remarks

(Q'ty)
1 PC rear cover 6
2 PC side cover 6 Remove this after removing the PC rear cover.
3 Rear cover 16
4 Monitor table cover 2

20050 1/2
 20050
Removing covers

Removing covers (Desk section/CS-2) [32SD]

Removing covers differ between 32 and 32SD.

• For detail about 32, refer to ☞ Removing covers (Desk section/CS-1) [32].

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

3

Remove screws with this mark.

Loosen screws with this mark.

G082806

No. Name Screw Remarks

(Q'ty)
1 PC rear cover 6
2 PC side cover 6 Remove this after removing the PC rear cover.
3 Rear cover 8
4 Monitor table cover 2

20050 2/2
 20110 Adjusting belt tension

Adjusting belt tension

Adjusting the belt tension (printer section)

18

Exposure advance unit (far side)

Viewed from the arrow
19

12
15 16,17
14 20
13

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

11
21

22

10
9

7,8
23

24 5

1
6
2 3
G069803

IMPORTANT
• All views of belts are from the side of printer doors.

No. Name Force Deflection Adjusting point Illustration

1 Paper magazine motor A belt From 411 to 637 g 1.5 mm Paper magazine motor
(From 4.0 to 6.3 A
N)

2 Paper supply motor A belt 1086±214 g 1.0 mm Paper supply motor A

(10.7±2.1 N)

3 Paper supply motor B/C belt 638±136 g 1.0 mm Paper supply motor B/C
(6.3±1.3 N)

4 Paper magazine motor C belt From 412 to 637 g 1.5 mm Paper magazine motor
(From 4.0 to 6.3 C
N)

20110 1/3
 20110
Adjusting belt tension

No. Name Force Deflection Adjusting point Illustration

5 Paper magazine motor B belt From 441 to 657 g 2.5 mm Paper magazine motor
(4.3 to 6.4 N) B

6 Paper advance motor 1 belt 198±43 g 1.0 mm Paper advance motor 1

(1.9±0.4 N)

7 Paper supply arm motor (left) 255±48 g 5.0 mm Paper supply arm motor
belt (2.5±0.5 N) (left)

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

8 Paper supply arm motor (right) Paper supply arm motor
belt (right)
9 Exposure advance motor 1 belt 200 to 230 g 1.0 mm Pre-exposure advance
(2.0 to 2.3 N) pressure release motor 1

10 Exposure advance pressure From 90 to 130 g 1.0 mm Pre-exposure advance

change motor 2 belt (0.9 to 1.3 N) pressure release motor 2

11 Exposure advance pressure From 90 to 140 g 1.0 mm Exposure advance

change motor 1 belt (0.9 to 1.4 N) pressure change motor 1

12 Exposure advance motor 1 belt From 1050 to 1.0 mm Exposure advance

1150 g motor 1
(10.3 to 11.3 N)

13 Exposure advance motor 2 belt From 900 to 1000 2.0 mm Exposure advance
g motor 2
(8.8 to 9.8 N)

14 Paper advance motor 2 belt 218±50 g 1.0 mm Paper advance motor 2

(2.1±0.5 N)

15 Pressure guide motor belt 294±59 g 1.0 mm Pressure guide motor

(2.9±0.6 N)

16 Paper advance arm motor (right) 280±60 g 5.0 mm Paper advance arm
belt (belt width: 10 mm) (2.7±0.6 N) motor (right)
17 Paper advance pressure change Paper advance pressure
motor (left) belt (belt width: 10 change motor (left)
mm)
16 Paper advance arm motor (right) 383±46 g 8.0 mm Paper advance arm
belt (belt width: 8 mm) (3.8±0.5 N) motor (right)
17 Paper advance pressure change Paper advance pressure
motor (left) belt (belt width: 8 change motor (left)
mm)

20110 2/3
 20110
Adjusting belt tension

No. Name Force Deflection Adjusting point Illustration

18 Lane select motor (left) belt 178±33 g 5.0 mm Lane select motor (left)
19 Lane select motor (right) belt (1.8±0.3 N) Lane select motor
(right)

20 Paper advance motor 3 belt 576±97 g 1.0 mm Paper advance motor 3

(5.7±1.0 N)

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

21 Paper advance belt 270±53 g 2.0 mm Tension pulley
(2.7±0.5 N)

22 Paper magazine motor A2 belt 5.4±1.2 N 1.5 mm Paper magazine motor

(546±117 g) A2

23 Paper supply motor A2 belt 6.26±1.33 N 1.0 mm Paper supply motor A2

(639±136 g)

24 Width change motor A2 belt 0.3±0.1 N 1.0 mm Width change motor A2

(33±9 g)

20110 3/3
 20120
Adjusting belt tension

Adjusting the belt tension (processor section)

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

2

G070006

No. Name Force Deflection Adjusting point Illustration

1 Sorter motor timing belt 330±10 g 2.7 mm Motor mount
(3.24±0.1 N)

2 Sorter chain*1 275±25 g 10 mm Two tension plates

(2.7±0.25 N)
(17 order
specification)
425±25 g
(4.17±0.25 N)
(14 order
specification)

3 Conveyor motor timing belt*2 - - Conveyor motor (four

screws)

4 Drive motor belt*3 From 265 to 1.6 mm Drive motor (four

296 g screws)
(2.6 to 2.9 N)

5 Dryer rack drive chain It is automatically tensed. No adjustment is needed.

*1. Remove all the print receiving trays, then adjust tension on the sorter chain belt.
*2. The procedure for adjusting the conveyor motor timing belt is shown below:

20120 1/2
 20120
Adjusting belt tension

Adjust the timing belt so that part A is 15.4±0.9 mm by moving the conveyor motor in the direction indicated by the arrow.

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

G070007
*3. For details, see ☞ 27270.

20120 2/2
 20125
Adjusting belt tension

Adjusting the belt tension (colorimeter)

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

1 G072390

Colorimeter
No. Name Force Deflection Adjusting point Illustration
1 Paper advance motor belt 163±30 g 1.0 mm Attaching position of the
(1.6±0.3 N) tension pulley

Paper advance motor belt 74±15 g 1.0 mm Attaching position of the

(0.73±0.15 tension pulley
N)

NOTE
• There are two types of belt tensions for the colorimeter unit. The strength differs depending on the belt positions.

20125 1/1
 20310 Display monitor section

Display monitor section

Replacing the display monitor

z Procedure

Replacing the display monitor

1. Disconnect the connector(s).
RGB connector (Monitor)
Power supply connector (Monitor)

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

2. Remove the monitor table cover. (two screws)
Display monitor
Power supply connector
RGB connector

Monitor table cover

G068523

3. Remove the monitor fixing angle bracket. (two screws)

Monitor fixing angle bracket

G068524

Removing the monitor table

1. Disconnect the connector(s).
J/P171 (Keyboard switch PCB)
J/P172 (Keyboard switch PCB)
J/P176 (Keyboard switch PCB)
Keyboard
Mouse
IMPORTANT
• Remove the connectors on keyboard switch PCB if the standard PC is equipped.

20310 1/2
 20310
Display monitor section

2. Remove the monitor table. (Loosen four screws.)

Monitor table

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

J/P171
J/P176
J/P172
Mouse
Keyboard
G068525

z Adjustment after the replacement

1. Carry out the monitor setup.

☞ 32530

20310 2/2
 20320
Display monitor section

Replacing the display monitor (DLS specification)

z Procedure

Replacing the standard type monitor

1. Disconnect the connector(s).
RGB connector (Monitor)
Power supply connector (Monitor)

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

2. Remove the monitor table cover. (two screws)
Standard type monitor
Power supply connector
RGB connector

Monitor table cover

G068523

3. Remove the monitor fixing angle bracket and then remove the monitor. (two screws)
Monitor fixing angle bracket

G068524

Replacing the touch monitor (option)

1. Disconnect the connector(s).
Serial connector (Monitor)
Power supply connector (Monitor)

20320 1/2
 20320
Display monitor section

2. Remove the monitor table cover. (two screws)

Touch monitor
Power supply connector
RGB cable
Serial connector

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

PC rear cover
Rear cover
Monitor table cover
G072414

3. Remove the PC rear cover and the rear cover.

☞ 20050
4. Disconnect the RGB connector.

RGB connector
G072416

5. Remove the monitor fixing angle bracket and then remove the monitor. (two screws)
NOTE
• The procedure of removing them is same as for the standard type monitor.

z Adjustment after the replacement

1. Adjust the monitor.

For details about adjustment, refer to PC Service Manual.

20320 2/2
 21110 Desk section

Desk section

Replacing the colorimeter and the calibration plate

The following procedures for the colorimeter are explained here.

‹ Replacing the colorimeter unit

‹ Replacing the colorimeter

‹ Replacing the calibration plate

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

IMPORTANT
• The colorimeter unit consists of the following items.
Colorimeter unit

FD for Calibration plate

Colorimeter calibration data

G068540
• When replacing the colorimeter, remember that the colorimeter, the calibration plate, and the FD for calibration make a
set. Replace them as one set.
• When replacing the calibration plate, remember that the calibration plate and the FD for calibration data make a set.
Replace them as one set.

z Replacing the colorimeter unit

1. Remove the rear cover.

☞ 20050
2. Disconnect the connector(s).
J/P156 (Relay connector)
J/P157 (Relay connector)
NOTE
• Remove cable clamps on colorimeter unit.

21110 1/4
 21110
Desk section

J/P156 and J/P157

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

G068538
NOTE
• This illustration shows 32 (CS-1).
For 32SD (CS-2), layout of component parts is different. Relay connector is placed in same position as 32 (CS-1).
3. Remove the colorimeter unit.
(two screws)

Colorimeter unit

G068536

4. Attach the colorimeter unit.

5. Upgrade the colorimeter unit.
☞ 35600
6. Follow the procedures in Replacing the calibration plate.
☞ Replacing the calibration plate
7. Adjusts the colorimeter unit.
☞ 35100

z Replacing the colorimeter

1. Remove the colorimeter unit.

21110 2/4
 21110
Desk section

2. Remove the colorimeter top cover.

(two screws)
Colorimeter top cover

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

G068537

3. Remove the fixing plate from the colorimeter.

(Loosen two mounting nuts.)
4. Disconnect the connector of the colorimeter and replace the colorimeter.
Connector

Fixing plate

Fixing nuts
G068539

5. Adjust the height of the colorimeter.

☞ 21120
6. Follow the procedures in Replacing the calibration plate.
☞ Replacing the calibration plate

z Replacing the calibration plate

1. Update the calibration plate data.

NOTE
• Register the new calibration plate data to the system.
Bringing up the display
PTBurn Interface : → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Colorimeter Calibration

(1) Click F: Functions on the Colorimeter Calibration display, then click Updating the Calibration Plate Data.
(2) Insert the calibration data FD into the floppy disk drive.
(3) Click YES: OK.
Data of colorimeter and data in the calibration data FD are displayed.
(4) Click YES: OK.
Register the data in the FD to the colorimeter.

21110 3/4
 21110
Desk section

(5) Click YES: OK.

Confirm the registration.
(6) Replace the calibration plate stored in the colorimeter unit with new one.
(7) Click YES: OK.
Data is updated.
(8) Click YES: OK.
The screen returns to the Colorimeter Calibration display.
2. Check whether updating was performed normally.

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

NOTE
• Confirm that the colorimeter data and the calibration plate data are the same.

(1) Click F: Functions on the Colorimeter Calibration display, then click Confirming the Colorimeter and
Calibration Plate Data.
(2) Click YES: OK since the FD for calibration data has already been inserted in step 1 (2).
The confirmation display appears. Check that the message It matches the Colorimeter Data appears.
At this time, S/No. of the calibration plate is registered.
(3) Click YES: OK.
The screen returns to the Colorimeter Calibration display.
(4) Remove the FD for calibration data from the floppy disk drive.

21110 4/4
 21120
Desk section

Adjusting the height of the colorimeter

IMPORTANT
• When replacing the colorimeter of the colorimeter unit, be sure to adjust the height.

z Procedure
NOTE
• If you go on to this adjustment work after you install the new colorimeter, proceed to step 3.

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

1. Remove the colorimeter unit.
☞ 21110
2. Remove the colorimeter top cover.
(two screws)
Colorimeter top cover

G068537

3. Loosen the lock screw on the leading end control holder of the colorimeter.
NOTE
• The lock screw is at the lower part of the colorimeter. Loosen it through the square hole using a hexagonal screwdriver.

Square hole

Hexagonal screwdriver

Leading end control holder Lock screw

G072361

4. Unplug the connectors of the paper sensor(s).

J/P188 (Paper sensors 1 and 2)
5. Remove the colorimeter mount and turn it over. (three screws)
IMPORTANT
• Do not damage the cable(s) since the adjustment is carried out with the connector(s) connected.

21120 1/4
 21120
Desk section

Cable Colorimeter mount

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

J/P188 G072362

6. Turn the leading end control holder so that the height of colorimeter leading end aligns with the back
face of the colorimeter mount. Use the colorimeter height adjustment jig.
IMPORTANT
• The colorimeter height adjustment jig is a service personnel tool. See Service personnel tool list.
☞ 80310
• Attach the colorimeter height adjustment jig on groove of the leading end control holder and turn it.

Leading end of the measurement part

Colorimeter height adjustment jig

Back face of the colorimeter

mount
Groove of the leading end
control holder
G072363

Use the handle side of the jig.

G072364
NOTE
• Use the handle side of the colorimeter height adjustment jig to check the height of colorimeter leading end.

21120 2/4
 21120
Desk section

7. Confirm that the height of colorimeter leading end aligns with the back face of the colorimeter mount,
and then turn the leading end control holder approximately 30 degree clockwise to lower it.
NOTE
• This operation is to adjust the height of colorimeter leading end from the base of the colorimeter mount to 0 to -0.1 mm.
One revolution (360 degree) of the leading end control holder makes 1 mm movement.

IMPORTANT
• If the colorimeter leading end is out of back face of the colorimeter mount, it may damage the calibration plate
or test prints.

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Turn the leading end control holder approximately 30 degree
clockwise to lower it.

Colorimeter leading end

Leading end control holder
G072365

8. Reassemble the parts.

z Precautions when installing colorimeter unit

1. Tighten the lock screw on the leading end control holder of the colorimeter. (one screw)
Square hole

Hexagonal screwdriver

Leading end control holder Lock screw

G072361

21120 3/4
 21120
Desk section

2. Place the colorimeter mount to the positioning holes and attach by pushing it in the direction indicated
by the arrow. (three screws)
Positioning holes

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Colorimeter mount

G074587

21120 4/4
 22000 Magazine section

Magazine section

Checking the paper magazine

Items to confirm
Paper magazine Check that paper roll is straight.
Check that paper guides are attached securely.
Check that the reel plate is closed securely.

z Procedure

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

1. Check that the position of the magazine reel plate corresponds to the paper width which is in use.
Dark room type magazine

The third from the left is unused.

127 203
120
130 210
117
152 216
114 240
102 165 254
89 178 279
82.5 305

G072384

2. Put a scale in the magazine to check whether deformation of the reel plate is within 0.3 mm.
IMPORTANT
• When the deflection of paper magazine reel plate is 0.3 mm or more, check the condition of the reel plate and
nut plate. See Step 7.

0.3 mm

Reel plate Ruler

G072381

3. Place the paper magazine on the level floor.

IMPORTANT
• Place the paper magazine on the level floor to check the magazine reel plate correctly because the paper
magazine may deforms.

22000 1/3
 22000
Magazine section

4. Set the paper tube onto the spindle.

Paper tube

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

G072371
NOTE
• Use the paper tube that corresponds to the paper width that is set to the paper magazine.
5. Set the spindle to the paper magazine.
6. Check that the deformation of the magazine reel plate is within 0.3 mm inside from the paper guide.
IMPORTANT
• Put a ruler against the reel plate and turn the spindle to check the deformation of the reel plate.
• When the deflection of paper magazine reel plate is 0.3 mm or more, check the condition of the reel plate and
nut plate. See Step 7.

Reel plate
Paper tube

Ruler

Paper guide face

0.3 mm

Ruler Inside
G072370

7. Check the condition of reel plate and nut plate.

NOTE
• Do not loosen or tighten the screws at the side with the dents since they are fixed.

22000 2/3
 22000
Magazine section

Dark room type magazine

Dark room type magazine Dark room type magazine
Dents

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Reel plate, nut plate

IMPORTANT
• If there is nothing wrong with the condition of reel plate and nut plate, and the reel plate's deflection is 0.3 mm
or more, replace the reel plate.

22000 3/3
 22100
Magazine section

Adjusting the zigzagging of the paper magazine deck

z Procedure

IMPORTANT
• The zigzagging of the magazine deck must be adjusted for each paper magazine A, A2, B, and C.
• When adjusting the zigzagging of the magazine deck, make a test print using the maximum size of paper which has
been used.

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

1. Make the test prints via Test Print 1/2 for Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction.
☞ 36060
2. Take the second test print as a standard. Confirm the difference of lines A and lines C of the first and
second prints.
Center line on the second Second test print
print
Center line on the First test print
first print

A
C
CA
A

C Paper advance direction

First test print Second test print

G072383

22100 1/8
 22100
Magazine section

3. Compare with the following patterns, and calculate the amount of zigzagging.
The center line of the first print leans to the right. The center line of the first print leans to the left.

P5 A
P4 A
A A
P1 P2

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

C C
C C
P6 A
A
P3

C
C

Pattern No. Amount of zigzagging Inclination direction of the center

line
P1 A-C Right
P2 A+C
P3 C-A
P4 C-A Left
P5 A+C
P6 A-C

4. If the amount of zigzagging is not within 0.5 mm, position the magazine deck.
For each magazine
Magazine deck Reference
Magazine deck B ☞ Adjusting magazine deck B
Magazine deck C ☞ Adjusting magazine deck C
Magazine deck A ☞ Adjusting magazine deck A
Magazine deck A2 ☞ 26820

22100 2/8
 22100
Magazine section

z Adjusting magazine deck B

IMPORTANT
• Measure the dimension shown below before adjusting the positioning pin for magazine deck B. It will help you to
restore after adjustment of the positioning pin.

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Ruler
G072374

1. Loosen the fixing screw on the positioning pin for the magazine deck B. (Loosen two fixing screws.)
2. Adjust the positioning pin for the magazine deck B. (One adjusting screw and one nut)
If the first test print is misaligned in the right. Step 2 Adjust the positioning pin downwards. (Turn the positioning pin
counterclockwise.)
If the first test print is misaligned in the left. Step 2 Adjust the positioning pin upwards. (Turn the positioning pin clockwise.)

IMPORTANT
• When tightening the fixing screws on the positioning pin, push the pin in the directions indicated by arrows 1
and 2.
• When the adjusting screw is turned 360 degree, the positioning pin moves approximately 0.7 mm.

Fixing screws

Positioning pin Nut

Adjusting screw
G072378

22100 3/8
 22100
Magazine section

3. When magazine B is set on the positioning pin after the positioning pin is adjusted, check that the gap
under the magazine B is 0.5 mm.
Magazine B

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Magazine deck B
G072379

4. If the gap under the magazine B is not 0.5 mm when the magazine B is set on the positioning pin,
loosen the screws on magazine deck B. (four screws)
5. Adjust the height of the magazine deck B so that the gap under magazine B is 0.5 mm when magazine
B is set on the positioning pin. (Two adjusting screws and two nuts)
6. Tighten screws on the magazine deck B. (four screws)
Loosen this screw.
Adjusting screws and nuts

Loosen these screws.

Loosen this screw.

Magazine deck B
G072380

7. Perform Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction.

☞ 36060
8. When repeating the zigzagging adjustment of magazine deck B, repeat Step 1 to Step 7.

22100 4/8
 22100
Magazine section

z Adjusting magazine deck C

IMPORTANT
• Measure the dimension shown below before adjusting the positioning pin for magazine deck C. It will help you to
restore after adjustment of the positioning pin.

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Ruler

Measure here.

G072375

1. Loosen the fixing screw on the positioning pin for the magazine deck C. (Loosen two fixing screws.)
2. Adjust the positioning pin for the magazine deck C. (One adjusting screw and one nut)
If the first test print is misaligned in the right. Step 2 Adjust the positioning pin to the left. (Turn the positioning pin
counterclockwise.)
If the first test print is misaligned in the left. Step 2 Adjust the positioning pin to the right. (Turn the positioning pin
clockwise.)

IMPORTANT
• When tightening the fixing screws on the positioning pin, push the pin in the directions indicated by arrows 1
and 2.

22100 5/8
 22100
Magazine section

• When the adjusting screw is turned 360 degree, the positioning pin moves approximately 0.7 mm.

Positioning pin

Fixing screws

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Nut Adjusting

Hexagonal screwdriver
G072376

3. After adjusting the positioning pin, check that positioning pin goes into the positioning hole of the
magazine smoothly when removing and attaching.
4. If the positioning pin is not smoothly inserted into the hole, loosen the screws of magazine deck C.
(three screws)
5. Adjust the position of magazine deck C so that the positioning pin goes into the hole smoothly.
6. Tighten screw(s) on magazine deck C. (three screws)
Screws

Screw Magazine deck C

G072377

7. Perform Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction.

☞ 36060
8. When repeating the zigzagging adjustment of magazine deck C, repeat Step 1 to Step 7.

22100 6/8
 22100
Magazine section

z Adjusting magazine deck A

IMPORTANT
• Measure the dimension shown below before adjusting the positioning pin for magazine deck A. It will help you to
restore after adjustment of the positioning pin.

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Ruler

Measure here.

Positioning pin
G072373

1. Loosen the fixing screw on the positioning pin for magazine deck A. (Loosen two fixing screws.)
2. Adjust the positioning pin for magazine deck A. (One adjusting screw and one nut)
If the first test print is misaligned in the right. Step 2 Adjust the positioning pin to the right. (Turn the positioning pin
counterclockwise.)
If the first test print is misaligned in the left. Step 2 Adjust the positioning pin to the left. (Turn the positioning pin
clockwise.)

IMPORTANT
• When tightening the fixing screws on the positioning pin, push the pin in the directions indicated by arrows 1
and 2.
• When the adjusting screw is turned 360 degree, the positioning pin moves approximately 0.7 mm.

Fixing screws

Positioning pin

Nut
Hexagonal screwdriver
Adjusting screw
G072368

3. After adjusting the positioning pin, check that positioning pin fits the positioning hole of the magazine
smoothly when removing and attaching magazine A.

22100 7/8
 22100
Magazine section

4. If the positioning pin is not smoothly inserted into the hole, loosen the screws of magazine deck A.
(three screws)
5. Adjust the position of magazine deck A so that the positioning pin fits the hole smoothly.
6. Tighten screws on magazine deck A. (three screws)

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Magazine deck A
G072369

7. Perform Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction.

☞ 36060
8. When repeating the zigzagging adjustment of magazine deck A, repeat Step 1 to Step 7.

22100 8/8
 25610 Paper supply unit

Paper supply unit

Removing the paper supply unit

z Procedure

Removing the paper supply unit

1. Pull out the paper supply unit.
2. Hold part A and lift up the paper supply unit to the direction of the arrow.
IMPORTANT

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

• The paper supply unit is heavy. Do not drop it and handle it carefully after removing.

Part A

Upper rail

Paper supply
unit

Lower rail

G068526

IMPORTANT
• Set the paper supply unit on the lower rail and then set it on the upper rail.

z Adjusting the attaching position

When the original paper supply unit is reattached

1. It is not necessary to adjust.

25610 1/2
 25610
Paper supply unit

When the new paper supply unit is attached

1. Perform Paper Sensor Adjustment.
☞ 36000
2. When the paper supply unit is replaced, check that the unit can be stored smoothly in the main body.
3. Check if the right angle adjustment of the cutter unit is completed correctly.
☞ 25620
4. Perform Paper Advance Length Correction.
☞ 36050

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

5. Perform Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction.
☞ 36060

25610 2/2
 25620
Paper supply unit

Removal and the right angle adjustment of the cutter unit

z Procedure

Removing the cutter unit

1. Pull out the paper supply unit.
2. Disconnect the connector.
J/P134 (Cut motor)

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

J/P135 (Cut home sensor and cut end sensor)
J/P364 (paper loading sensor)
3. Remove the cutter unit. (two screws)
Cutter unit

J/P134
J/P135 and J/P364
G068527

4. Remove the sensor holder. (two screws)

Sensor holder

Cutter unit
G068528

5. Remove the cutter cover. (two screws)

6. Remove the mounting angle bracket. (one screw)

Cutter cover

Angle bracket G068529

25620 1/3
 25620
Paper supply unit

Adjusting the position of the sensor holder

1. Reattach the cutter cover. (two screws)
2. Attach the mounting angle bracket. (one screw)
3. Fix the sensor holder temporarily. (two screws)
4. Position the sensor holder so that it is 0 to 0.5 mm lower than the cutter lower blade. (two screws)
NOTE
• Usually, if the cutter lower blade is contacted and the sensor holder is attached, it becomes within the above standard
range. Finally, confirm the standard dimension of the sensor holder and cutter lower blade.

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Contact

0 to 0.5
mm

Sensor
holder
Cutter lower
blade

Cutter unit back face

Cutter lower blade

Cutter unit front front face

Sensor holder

G068532

The right angle adjustment of the cutter unit

1. Loosen two screws on the cutter unit positioning plate, then carry out the right angle adjustment using
the adjustment screw. (Loosen one screw and one nut.)
IMPORTANT
• Loosen two screws on the cutter unit and test the right angle adjustment for the cutter unit.

25620 2/3
 25620
Paper supply unit

Loosen these screws.

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Adjusting
screw

Nut

Cutter unit
positioning
plate

G068530

IMPORTANT
• To adjust the right angle of the cutter unit, move the cutter unit positioning plate pushing onto the reference
surface of the paper supply unit.
Cutter unit positioning plate

Reference surface G068531

„ Point
Check the right angle of the paper cut section by matching up with cut edges as shown illustration below.
Paper First one
advance
direction

A B

Paper
emulsion
side

Second one
G052651
• If the cutting end is as shown in A, adjust the cutting angle by moving the cutter unit positioning plate in the direction
indicated by the arrow A as shown above.
• If the cutting end is as shown in B, adjust the cutting angle by moving the cutter unit positioning plate in the direction
indicated by the arrow B as shown above.

25620 3/3
 25630
Paper supply unit

Adjusting the timing of the paper supply pressure change sensor

z Procedure

1. Activate the paper supply pressure change motor in the Output check to turn the paper supply
pressure change sensor to DARK.
2. Pull out the paper supply unit and check the condition of the cam.
3. Adjust the position of the detection plate of the paper supply pressure change sensor in order to set the

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

cam of the paper supply unit to be in the vertical position to the pressure release arm. (one set-screw)
NOTE
• The arm opens fully and the paper advance rollers release pressure.

Paper supply pressure change sensor

Detection
plate

Cam (vertical
position)

Direction A Set-screw

Paper supply unit

Cam (vertical position)

G068545

View from direction A

Paper advance rollers

Pressure release arm
Rotation direction

Cam Detection
(vertical plate
position)
Paper supply pressure change sensor
Paper advance rollers
G068544

25630 1/3
 25630
Paper supply unit

4. Repeat steps from ☞ 1 through ☞ 3 and adjust the position of the detection plate of the paper supply
pressure change sensor in order to set the cam of the paper supply unit to be in the vertical position to
the pressure release arm.
5. Reassemble the parts.
z Checking after adjustment
1. Check the center part of the paper (around the position of 450 mm) for the banding in case printing
several gray prints with the paper advance length of 914 mm.

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

2. If the banding appears at the center part of the paper (around the position of 450 mm), adjust the
position of the detection plate in the direction indicated by the arrow.
IMPORTANT
• The banding disappears if you adjust the position of the detection plate in the arrow direction. However, note
that an advance failure may occur if you process paper with the paper advance length of 82.5 mm.

Detection
plate

Paper supply pressure change sensor

G078434

3. Check the center part of the paper (around the position of 450 mm) for the banding in case printing
several gray prints with the paper advance length of 914 mm.
4. Check if paper is advanced properly in case of printing with paper advance length of 82.5 mm.
5. If paper jam occurs in case of printing with the paper advance length of 82.5 mm, adjust the position of
the detection plate in the direction indicated by the arrow.

Detection
plate

Paper supply pressure change sensor

G078435

25630 2/3
 25630
Paper supply unit

6. Repeat Checking after adjustments from ☞ 1 through ☞ 5 to adjust the position of the detection plate
of the paper supply unit so that no banding or paper jam occurs.

z Supplement
1. There are two types of cams for the paper supply unit, which are new and old types.
The new type has more allowance with regard to banding and paper jam.
New type cam Old type cam

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

G078436

2. There is an attaching direction for the new type cam.

Refer to the illustration below.
New type cam
Mark

Direction of
arrow B

Mark

View in the Direction of Arrow B

G078437

25630 3/3
 25640
Paper supply unit

Adjusting the paper hold timing of the paper hold motor

z Procedure

1. Pull out the paper supply unit.

2. Set a hexagonal screwdriver onto the detection plate and loosen one of two set-screws on the paper
hold motor.
Hexagonal screwdriver

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Detection plate
Cam

Paper hold sensor

G070029

3. Adjust the position of the detection plate of the paper hold motor.
(1) Look and adjust from the direction indicated by arrow.
Detection plate

View from this side.

G068542

(2) Turn the detection plate with a hexagonal screwdriver clockwise to make the cam in a horizontal position.
(3) Loosen another set-screw of the paper hold motor that is loosened in step 2. (Loosen one of the two set-screws.)

25640 1/2
 25640
Paper supply unit

(4) Keep the cam in a horizontal position and adjust the detection plate at the position of 2.35±0.5 mm away from the
edge of the paper hold sensor. (one set-screw)
Hexagonal screwdriver
Detection plate
Cam

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Paper hold sensor
Detection plate

Cam

Center of the paper

hold sensor
2.35±0.5 mm

G068543

(5) Tighten the set-screws of the paper hold motor. (Two set-screws)
4. Operate the paper hold motor via Output check to check that the pressure pin is align with the guide
when the paper hold sensor is LIGHT.
☞ 35310
0.0 mm

Pressure
Guide pin

Paper hold motor

G068547

25640 2/2
 25650
Paper supply unit

Adjusting the CVP imprint pressure

z Procedure

1. Pull out the paper supply unit.

2. Loosen the two screws on the correction value printing unit.
Loosen these screws.

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Correction value
printing unit

G070033

3. Attach the head adjusting jig in the paper supply unit.

IMPORTANT
• The head adjusting jig is a service personnel tool. See Service personnel tool list.
• ☞ 80310
Head adjustment jig

Paper supply unit

G070034

25650 1/2
 25650
Paper supply unit

4. Adjust the correction value printing unit position by turning the adjusting screw according to the
thickness of the head adjusting jig.
Correction value printing unit

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Adjusting screw

G070035

5. Tighten the two screws of the correction value printing unit.

6. Make actual prints, then confirm the printing density of the CVP unit.

25650 2/2
 25660
Paper supply unit

Removing paper supply unit A

z Procedure

1. Remove the paper supply unit.

☞ 25610
2. Disconnect the connector(s).
J/P321 (paper supply motor A)

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

3. Remove paper supply unit A in the direction indicated by arrow 1. (six screws)
IMPORTANT
• Be careful because the paper supply unit falls down in the arrow 2 direction when you remove paper supply unit
A from the paper supply unit.

J/P321

Paper supply
unit A

Paper supply
unit A

G068533

z Adjusting the attaching position

1. Attach paper supply unit A to the paper supply unit temporarily. (six screws)

25660 1/2
 25660
Paper supply unit

2. Attach paper supply unit A pushing it in the direction indicated by the arrows 1 and 2. (six screws)

Paper supply
unit A

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Paper supply
unit A

G068534

When the original paper supply unit A is reattached

1. Check that the paper supply unit is set to the machine main body smoothly.
2. Check the adjustment of Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction → Paper Magazine A.
☞ 36060

When the new paper supply unit A is attached

1. Check that the paper supply unit is set to the machine main body smoothly.
2. Adjust Paper Advance Length Correction → Paper Magazine A.
☞ 36050
3. Check the adjustment of Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction → Paper Magazine A.
☞ 36060

25660 2/2
 25710 Paper supply unit A2

Paper supply unit A2

Removing paper supply unit A2

z Procedure

Removing paper supply unit A2

1. Pull out paper supply unit A2.
2. Remove the fixing angle bracket. (one screw)
3. Hold part A and lift up paper supply unit A2 to the direction of the arrow.

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

IMPORTANT
• Paper supply unit A2 is heavy. Do not drop it and handle it carefully after removing.

Upper rail

Part A

Screw

Fixing angle bracket

Lower rail Paper supply unit A2

G086491

IMPORTANT
• Set paper supply unit A2 on the lower rail and then set it on the upper rail.

z Adjusting the attaching position

When the original paper supply unit A2 is reattached

1. It is not necessary to adjust.
When the new paper supply unit is attached
1. Adjust zigzagging for paper supply unit A2.
☞ 26820
2. Perform Paper Sensor Adjustment.
☞ 36000
3. Perform the paper guide width correction (for each Paper Width).
☞ 36065
25710 1/2
 25710
Paper supply unit A2

4. Perform Paper Advance Length Correction.

☞ 36050
5. Perform Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction.
☞ 36060

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

25710 2/2
 25810 Exposure advance unit

Exposure advance unit

Removing the exposure advance unit

z Procedure

1. Open the printer top cover.

2. Remove paper advance unit 1.
☞ 26510
3. Open paper advance unit 2.

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

4. Disconnect the connector(s).
J/P342 (Relay connector)
J/P385 (Relay connector)
5. Remove the pressure guide.
6. Remove the reinforcement angle bracket from the exposure advance unit. (four screws)
NOTE
• There is no position adjustment in attaching the reinforcement angle bracket.

Reinforcement angle bracket

Exposure advance unit

G078385

25810 1/2
 25810
Exposure advance unit

7. Remove the exposure advance unit. (four screws)

J/P342

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

J/P385

Pressure guide

Exposure advance unit

G068511

z Adjusting the attaching position

1. The exposure advance unit has positioning pin(s). No position adjustment is needed in attaching the
exposure advance unit.

z Adjustment after reattaching and setup

When the original exposure advance unit is reattached
• There is no need for adjustment.

When the new exposure advance unit is attached

1. Perform Paper Sensor Adjustment.
☞ 36000
2. Adjust the zigzagging of the exposure advance unit.
☞ 36080
3. Perform the exposure advance adjustment.
☞ 36080
4. Check the exposure center correction.
☞ 36070

25810 2/2
 25820
Exposure advance unit

Replacing the pressure guide in the exposure advance unit

z Procedure

1. Open the printer top cover.

2. Open paper advance unit 2.
3. Remove the pressure guide from the exposure advance unit.

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Pressure guide

Exposure advance unit

G072366

z Adjustment after reattaching and setup

When the original pressure guide is reattached
• There is no need for adjustment.

When a new pressure guide is attached

1. Perform the exposure advance adjustment.
☞ 36080
2. Check the exposure center correction.
☞ 36070

25820 1/1
 25830
Exposure advance unit

Banding adjustment for the exposure advance unit

z Procedure

IMPORTANT
• Banding adjustment for the exposure advance unit needs to be performed when the banding is found at the area 32
mm from the paper leading end or 24 to 27 mm from the paper rear end.

32 mm

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Leading
end Rear end

24 to 27 mm

Exposure advance unit

Pressure roller at the exit side

Pressure roller at the inlet

side
G072396

1. Make some prints of gray prints in the Print mode.

NOTE
• Any paper size is acceptable.
2. When the banding is found at the area 32 mm from the paper leading end, adjust the pressure of the
pressure roller at the exit side in the exposure advance unit. ☞ The banding at the area 32 mm from the
paper leading end
3. When the banding is found at the area 24 to 27 mm from the paper rear end, adjust the pressure of the
pressure roller at the inlet side in the exposure advance unit. ☞ The banding at the area 24 to 27 mm
from the paper rear end
4. If the banding is found at the area that is not mentioned above, perform adjustment referring the
banding shooting.
☞ 25910

25830 1/6
 25830
Exposure advance unit

z The banding at the area 32 mm from the paper leading end

1. Turn the cam in the exposure advance unit to release the pressure of the pressure roller at the exit side
and set the paper.
2. Make fine adjustments of the cam in the exposure advance unit so that the pressure release amount of
the pressure roller at the exit side is the thickness of about one sheet of paper. Use the paper to check
that the pressure of the pressure roller at the exit side is equable at the right and left.

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Pressure roller
at the exit side

Cam G072398

IMPORTANT
• If the pressure needs to be adjusted, perform the following adjustments.
3. Remove the pressure guide from the exposure advance unit.
4. Loosen the fixing screw of the exposure advance unit exit roller. (Loosen one fixing screw.)
5. Loosen the nut on the exposure advance unit exit roller. (Loosen one nut.)

25830 2/6
 25830
Exposure advance unit

6. Adjust the exit roller adjusting screw so that the pressure of the pressure guide at the exit side in the
exposure advance unit is equable at the left and right. (one adjusting screw)
Pressure roller at Exit roller adjusting screw
the exit side Exit roller nut

Exit roller fixing

screw

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Inlet roller
fixing screw
Pressure roller at
the inlet side
Inlet roller Inlet roller nut
adjusting screw

G072393

The direction of rotation of the adjusting screw

The pressure of the pressure The direction of
roller rotation of the
adjusting screw
The pressure at the right side is Clockwise
stronger.
The pressure at the left side is Counterclockwise
stronger.

IMPORTANT
• Adjust the zigzagging by turning the adjusting screw between 2.0 and 2.5 mm. If adjustment is performed out of
the range between 2.0 and 2.5 mm, the banding may appear on the area 32 mm from the paper leading end.
Exit roller adjusting screw
Exit roller nut

2.0 to 2.5 mm

Ruler
Inlet roller nut

Inlet roller
adjusting screw 2.0 to 2.5 mm
G072395

25830 3/6
 25830
Exposure advance unit

IMPORTANT
• Tighten the fixing screw of the exposure advance roller while the angle bracket of the pressure roller unit is
pressed in the direction indicated by the arrow.

Screwdriver

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Pressure guide

G072394

7. Make some gray prints in Print mode to see if the banding occurs.
NOTE
• Any paper size is acceptable.
8. Repeat the pressure adjustment of the pressure guide if the banding is found.
9. After completing the banding adjustment, select and execute Exposure Advance Adjustment →
F:Functions → Exposure Advance Pressure Inlet Roller Test Print (Paper Magazine A/A2/B/C).
IMPORTANT
• Print the test print with the maximum paper width which has been used.
10. After completing the banding adjustment, measure the dimensions between 0 mm-line and 254 mm-line
of right and left edges of the test print and check that the differences are within 0.2 mm.
Paper advance direction
A

Left Right

Rear end
G068467
NOTE
• There is another method to check the difference. Cut the paper at the center and put them together to check the difference.
11. If the difference of right and left measured values is 0.2 mm or more, perform the Exposure Advance
Adjustment.
See 36080 ☞ Adjusting the paper zigzagging in the exposure advance unit.
NOTE
• If the difference of right and left measured value is within 0.2 mm, the zigzagging adjustment is completed.
12. Check the Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction.
☞ 36060

25830 4/6
 25830
Exposure advance unit

z The banding at the area 24 to 27 mm from the paper rear end

1. Turn the cam on the exposure advance unit to release the pressure of the pressure roller at the exit
side.

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Pressure roller
at the exit side

Cam
G072399

2. Release the pressure of the pressure roller at the exit side and set the paper. Make fine adjustments of
the cam in the exposure advance unit so that the pressure release amount of the pressure roller at the
inlet side is the thickness of about one sheet of paper.

25830 5/6
 25830
Exposure advance unit

3. Use the paper to check that the pressure of the pressure roller at the inlet side is equable at the right
and left.

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Pressure roller at
the inlet side

Cam
G072397

4. If the adjustment is required, perform the same adjustment as the adjustment for the exposure advance
unit exit roller.

25830 6/6
 25910
Exposure advance unit

Banding shooting

Test Print 17 mm
32 mm

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Leading end
Rear end

55 mm 55 mm

210 mm G072388

Paper path diagram

42.9 mm

Paper advance unit 1 70.5 mm

Arm

62.8 mm

Exposure advance motor 2 belt

72 mm

17 mm
Exposure position
17 mm

79 mm

Exposure advance unit

G072400

25910 1/3
 25910
Exposure advance unit

z Banding shooting
Print condition Banding position Status Corrective action Refer to
All Around 0 to 11 mm from The bumper rubber for the laser Attach the bumper -
the paper leading edge control box is detached. rubber.
At the area 32 mm from The pressure of the exit side Adjust the ☞ 25830
the paper leading end pressure roller in the exposure zigzagging of the
advance unit is uneven. exposure advance
unit.
Around 17 mm from the The inlet side pressure roller Perform the paper ☞ 36090

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

paper rear edge release amount of the exposure pressure operation
advance unit is too small. correction.
Around 26 mm from the The inlet side pressure roller
paper rear edge release amount of the exposure
advance unit is too big.
Around 24 to 27 mm from The pressure of the inlet side Adjust the ☞ 25830
the paper rear edge pressure roller in the exposure zigzagging of the
advance unit is uneven. exposure advance
unit.
Banding is generated over The belt tension of exposure Check exposure ☞ 20110
the print in a cycle (210 advance motor 2 belt is advance motor 2
mm). maladjusted. belt.
Banding is generated over
the print in a cycle (55
mm).
Whole part of the print The screws of the exposure Tighten the screws ☞ 25810
(no cycle) advance unit are loose. of the exposure
advance unit.
External vibration is applied to - -
the system.
All jack bolts are not effective. Check the level of -
the printer.
The strength of the floor is - -
insufficient.
The banding cannot be Around 61 mm from the The bumper rubber for the laser Attach the bumper -
found on the first and the paper rear edge control box is detached. rubber.
last prints in the around 45 to 48 mm from The pressure pin of the paper Adjust the position ☞ 25640
Continuous Print. The the paper rear edge supply unit comes out of the of the pressure pin
banding cannot be found guide. of the paper supply
on the print when only IMPORTANT
unit.
one print is made. • This banding Guide
occurs when a
paper is being 0.0 mm
exposed while the
next paper to
expose is
advanced from the
paper supply unit Pressure
pin
to the exposure
advance unit.

25910 2/3
 25910
Exposure advance unit

Print condition Banding position Status Corrective action Refer to

Paper with an advance At the center part of the Position adjustment failure of Adjust the position See 25630
length of 914 mm paper (around the position the paper supply unit cam of the cam of the ☞ Checking after
of 450 mm) paper supply unit. adjustment
IMPORTANT
• This banding
appears when the
paper supply unit
cam releases
pressure while the

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

paper with paper
advance length of
914 mm is being
exposed.

25910 3/3
 26510 Paper advance unit 1

Paper advance unit 1

Removing paper advance unit 1

z Procedure

1. Open the printer top cover.

2. Loosen screw(s) on paper advance unit 1. (Loosen four screws.)
Loosen these screws.

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Paper advance unit 1
G068506

3. Open paper advance unit 1.

4. Disconnect the connector(s).
J/P333 (Relay connector)
J/P334 (Relay connector)
5. Remove paper advance unit 1 in the arrow direction.
Paper advance unit 1

J/P333 and J/P334

G068507

26510 1/4
 26510
Paper advance unit 1

z Adjusting the attaching position

1. Attach paper advance unit 1.

NOTE
• Remove two of four screws of the paper advance unit 1 to attach the unit.

Remove the screws.

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

G085233

2. Set paper advance unit 1 to the positioning pin.

3. Tighten four screws of paper advance unit 1 temporarily.
NOTE
• Attach two screws if you removed them in step 1 of Attaching position.
Loosen these screws.

Paper advance unit 1

G070716

26510 2/4
 26510
Paper advance unit 1

4. Tighten the screw(s) pushing paper advance unit 1 in the direction of the arrow. (four screws)
Positioning pins

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Paper advance
unit 1

Tighten these screws.

G068508

5. Check paper advance unit 1 sets on the positioning pin(s) normally in opening and closing.
z Adjustment after reattaching
If the removed paper advance unit 1 is reattached
1. It is not necessary to adjust.
If new paper advance unit 1 is attached
1. Perform Paper Sensor Adjustment.
☞ 36000

26510 3/4
 26510
Paper advance unit 1

2. Execute Test Operation for the Paper Stop Position Correction via F: Functions of Paper Advance
Unit Correction.
Confirm the dimension between the front ends of arm unit 2 and paper is from 3.0±0.5 mm.

Paper advance unit 1

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Paper

Arm unit 2

3.0±0.5 mm

G068452

3. If an adjustment is necessary, perform Paper Advance Unit Correction.

☞ 36010

26510 4/4
 26550 Paper advance unit 2

Paper advance unit 2

Removing paper advance unit 2

z Removing

1. Open the printer top cover.

2. Open paper advance unit 1.
3. Disconnect the connector(s).
J/P322 (Relay connector)

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

J/P323 (Relay connector)
J/P410 (Relay connector)
J/P411 (Relay connector)
J/P412 (Relay connector)
J/P413 (Relay connector)
4. Remove screw(s) from paper advance unit 2. (four screws)
J/P412
J/P413

J/P323

J/P322
J/P411

J/P410

Paper advance unit 1

G068503

5. Open paper advance unit 2 and remove it in the arrow direction.

Paper advance
unit 2

G068504

z Adjusting the attaching position

1. Attach paper advance unit 2.

26550 1/3
 26550
Paper advance unit 2

2. Attach the connector(s) on paper advance unit 2. (Six relay connectors)

IMPORTANT
• Perform wiring on paper advance unit 2 as shown below.
• Check that any cables are not pinched or any extra pressure is not on wiring in opening and closing paper
advance unit 2.

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Wiring
G068548

3. Adjust the position of paper advance unit 2 so that the unit sets on the positioning pin(s) normally. (four
screws)

Positioning
pin

Paper advance unit 2

Positioning pin

G068505

z Adjustment after reattaching

If the removed paper advance unit 2 is reattached

1. It is not necessary to adjust.

26550 2/3
 26550
Paper advance unit 2

If new paper advance unit 2 is attached

1. Check the backlash between the gear of the processor loading unit and that of paper advance unit 2.

Gear

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Screws

G084957

2. Perform Paper Advance Unit Correction.

☞ 36010

26550 3/3
 26560
Paper advance unit 2

Removing the paper advance pressure change motors (right and left) and
adjusting the pressure timing for the arm(s)

z Procedure

1. Remove paper advance unit 2.

☞ 26550

Removing the paper advance pressure change motors (right and left)

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

1. Remove the upper guide (right). (four screws, one plate)
2. Remove the upper guide (left). (four screws)
Upper guide (left)

Plate

Upper guide (right)

G068549

3. Remove the lower guides (right and left). (one screw and one nut each)
IMPORTANT
• If you remove the lower guides (right and left), adjustment will be needed.
Lower guide (left)

Lower guide (right)

G068550

26560 1/3
 26560
Paper advance unit 2

4. Remove the paper advance pressure change motor units (right and left). (three screws each)
Paper advance pressure change motor unit (left)

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Paper advance pressure change
motor unit (right)

G069797

5. Disconnect the connector(s).

J/P377 [Paper advance pressure change sensor (left)]
J/P378 [Paper advance pressure change sensor (right)]
J/P337 [Paper advance pressure change motor (left)]
J/P338 [Paper advance pressure change motor (right)]

Adjusting the paper hold timing of the arm

1. Adjust the position of the detection plates of the paper advance pressure change sensors (right and
left).

(1) View the detection plate in the direction indicated by the arrow.
(2) Rotate the cam using a hexagonal screwdriver to make the cam as shown in the illustration.
(3) Loosen the set-screw of the detection plate. (Loosen two set-screws.)

26560 2/3
 26560
Paper advance unit 2

(4) Adjust the position of the detection plate so that the detection plate is protruded by 3.6±0.5 mm from the Paper
Advance Pressure Change Sensor (Left) or Paper Advance Pressure Change Sensor (Right). (Two set-
screws)
Viewed from the arrow
Arm (left) Arm (right)

Paper advance Paper advance

pressure pressure
change motor change motor

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

(left) (right)

Set-screws of Set-screws of the

the detection detection plate
plate

Cam Cam

Detection plate
Detection
plate
Paper Advance Paper Advance
Pressure Change Pressure Change
Sensor (Left) Sensor (Right)

Hexagonal
Hexagonal screwdriver
screwdriver

View from this side. View from this side.

Detection Detection plate

plate
3.6±0.5 mm

3.6±0.5 mm

Paper Advance
Pressure
Paper Advance Cam
Cam Change Sensor
Pressure (Right)
Change Sensor
(Left)

G069800

2. Attach the paper advance pressure change motor units (right and left). (three screws each)
3. Attach the lower guides (right and left). (one screw and one nut each)
4. Adjust the position of the arm(s).
☞ 26570
5. Operate the Paper Advance Pressure Change Motor (Left) or the Paper Advance Pressure Change
Motor (Right) via Output check to check the pressure roller is released when the Paper Advance
Pressure Change Sensor (Left) or the Paper Advance Pressure Change Sensor (Right) is LIGHT.
☞ 35310

26560 3/3
 26570
Paper advance unit 2

Adjusting the arm position

z Procedure

1. Remove paper advance unit 2.

☞ 26550
2. Remove the upper guide (right). (four screws, one plate)
3. Remove the upper guide (left). (four screws)

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Upper guide (left)

Plate

Upper guide (right)

G068549

Adjusting the position of the arm (right)

1. Perform adjustment so that the dimension between the lower guide of the arm unit and the rail is
53.9±0.2 mm. (one screw)
Lower guide

53.9±0.2 mm

Rail

G069798

26570 1/2
 26570
Paper advance unit 2

Adjusting the position of the arm (left)

1. Perform adjustment so that the dimension between the lower guide of the arm unit and the rail is
53.9±0.2 mm. (one screw)

Lower guide

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

53.9±0.2 mm

Rail
G069799

z Checking after adjustment

1. Test the paper advance.

26570 2/2
 26610 Processor loading unit

Processor loading unit

Removing the processor loading unit

z Procedure

1. Open the printer top cover.

2. Remove paper advance unit 2.
☞ 26550
3. Remove the wiring cover. (two screws)

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Wiring cover

G068509

4. Disconnect the connector(s).

J/P354 (Relay connector)
J/P395 (Relay connector)

J/P354 and J/P395

G068397

26610 1/2
 26610
Processor loading unit

5. Remove the processor loading unit. (four screws)

Positioning pin

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Processor
loading unit

Positioning pin

G068510

z Adjusting the attaching position

1. The processor loading unit has positioning pin(s). No position adjustment is needed in attaching the
processor loading unit.

z Adjustment after reattaching

When the original processor loading unit is reattached
• There is no need for adjustment.

When the new processor loading unit is attached

1. Perform Paper Sensor Adjustment.
☞ 36000

26610 2/2
 26710 Laser unit

Laser unit

Removing the laser unit

z Precautions for laser unit replacement

IMPORTANT
• If you replaced the laser unit, items shown below are necessary in returning the defective unit.

Laser unit Defective laser unit

Sample print The print where the abnormal color can be checked

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Backup data All of the backup data when the problem occurs

IMPORTANT
• Before replacing the laser unit, save all the data in Close Down Checks or Reading and Writing Data.
☞ 35400
• There are two types of laser unit. One is type A1 and another one is type B1. For distinguishing the type, refer to the
following.
☞ 63080
• Basically, when replacing the laser unit, replace it with same type of laser unit.

z Procedure

1. Open the printer top cover.

2. Remove paper advance unit 2.
☞ 26550
3. Remove the processor loading unit.
☞ 26610
4. Remove the wiring cover. (Loosen two screws.)
5. Remove PCB cover 1. (Loosen two screws.)
6. Remove PCB cover 2. (11 screws)
7. Remove paper advance section cooling fan 2. (one screw)
8. Disconnect the ground wire. (one screw)
PCB cover 2
Wiring cover

Ground wire

J/P1653

J/P1663
PCB cover 1
J/P1619
Paper advance section cooling fan 2
G068512

9. Disconnect the connector(s).

J/P1619 (paper advance section cooling fan 2)

26710 1/7
 26710
Laser unit

J/P1653 (B laser driver)

J/P1663 (G laser driver)
10. Remove the AOM driver unit. (Loosen two screws.)

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Loosen this
screw.

AOM driver unit

Loosen this screw.

G068513

IMPORTANT
• Raise the AOM driver and remove it, then place on the processor top cover.
• Operate with extreme care for wiring to the laser unit, laser control PCB and laser I/O PCB.

AOM driver unit

Processor top
cover

J/P1642

J/P1637

J/P1632 G068515

11. Disconnect the connector(s).

J/P1632 (B-AOM driver)

26710 2/7
 26710
Laser unit

J/P1637 (G-AOM driver)

J/P1642 (R-AOM driver)
12. Attach the AOM driver unit to the printer with the connector(s) disconnected.
13. Remove the PCB plate. (five screws and one spacer)
NOTE
• The reason why the PCB plate is removed is to remove the optical fiber cable safely.

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

PCB plate Spacer Wiring cover

G068516

14. Disconnect the connector(s). (one screw)

J/P1532 (Laser I/O PCB)
J/P1539 (Laser I/O PCB)
J/P1540 (Laser I/O PCB)
J/P1513 (Laser control PCB)
J/P1515 (Laser control PCB)
J/P1516 (Laser control PCB)
J/P1517 (Laser control PCB)
J/P1526 (Relay connector)
J/P1525 (Relay Connector)
IMPORTANT
• The positions of the relay connector(s) may be changed.
• Remove the cable clamp(s) if it is attached to the connector(s).

26710 3/7
 26710
Laser unit

15. Remove the laser control box. (four screws)

J/P1516, J/P1517 and J/P1513

J/P1515

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

J/P1525 and J/P1526
J/P1539
J/P1532 and J/P1540
Laser control box

Laser control box

G068517

IMPORTANT
• Remove the laser control box. Turn it over and place on the processor top cover.
• Take extreme care of wiring of the laser control PCB and laser I/O PCB.
16. Remove three vibration-proof mounts and a vibration-proof angle bracket. (two screws)
IMPORTANT
• This step is required only when you replace the laser unit with new one.

26710 4/7
 26710
Laser unit

Vibration-proof mounts

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Vibration-proof angle bracket
G072356

17. Remove the laser unit. (four screws)

Laser unit

G068514

z Adjusting the attaching position

1. Attach the laser unit.

26710 5/7
 26710
Laser unit

2. Attach the laser unit pushing the unit in the direction of the arrow (contact face). (four screws)
Contact faces

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

G068519

3. Attach wiring cover and PCB cover 1 carefully not to pinch any cables.
Wiring cover

PCB cover 1

G072359

z Adjustment after reattaching and setup

When the original laser unit is reattached

1. Carry out the daily setup.
When a new laser unit is attached
1. Attach three vibration-proof mounts and a vibration-proof angle bracket to the new laser unit. (two
screws)
NOTE
• No position adjustment is required for the vibration-proof mounts and vibration-proof angle bracket.

26710 6/7
 26710
Laser unit

Vibration-proof mounts

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Vibration-proof angle bracket
G072356

2. Initialize the laser operation history.

☞ 35700
3. Perform the Exposure Magnification Correction.
☞ 36020
4. Carry out the Exposure Position Adjustment.
☞ 36030
5. Carry out the exposure magnification fine adjustment.
☞ 36040
6. Check that the slippage of the main scanning direction of the Exposure Position Adjustment.
☞ 36030
7. Carry out the initial setup.

26710 7/7
 26810
Laser unit

Adjusting the zigzagging of the paper advance section

This section explains the zigzagging adjustment procedure for paper magazines A, B and C. For the adjustment procedure for paper
magazine A2, see the following.

☞ 26820☞ How to adjust the zigzagging in paper supply unit A2

Items to confirm
All Check if leveling of the system is completed correctly.
Magazine deck Check that the shutter open/close arm works properly. (If the printer door is closed, the shutter

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

open/close arm moves 10 mm and more at the outlet section of the magazine.)

z Procedure

1. Check the condition of the paper magazine.

☞ 22000
2. Adjust the zigzagging of the exposure advance unit.
See ☞ Adjusting the paper zigzagging in the exposure advance unit in 36080.
IMPORTANT
• When adjusting the zigzagging of the exposure advance unit, make a test print using the maximum size of
paper which is in use.
• If the exposure advance adjustment is performed for any one of magazine A, A2, B, or C, the correction is
complete.
• Measure the dimensions between 0 mm-line and 254 mm-line on right and left edges of the test print and
check that the differences are within 0.2 mm. If it is within 0.2 mm, you do not have to adjust it.
Paper advance direction
A

Left Right

Rear end
G068467

NOTE
• There is another method to check the difference. Cut the paper at the center and put them together to check the difference
between 0 mm-line and 254 mm-line.

3. Adjust the zigzagging of the magazine mount.

☞ 22100

26810 1/4
 26810
Laser unit

IMPORTANT
• Take the second test print as a standard. Calculate the zigzagging amount by the difference of lines A and
lines C of the first and second prints. If the zigzagging amount is within 0.5 mm, it is not necessary to adjust.
Center line on the second Second test print
print
Center line on the First test print
first print

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

C
CA
A

C Paper advance
direction
First test print Second test print
G072383

26810 2/4
 26810
Laser unit

The center line of the first print leans to the right. The center line of the first print leans to the left.

A A
P1 P2 P5
P4 A A

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

C C
C C

A
P3 P6 A

C
C

Pattern No. Amount of Inclination direction

zigzagging of the center line
P1 A-C Right
P2 A+C
P3 C-A
P4 C-A Left
P5 A+C
P6 A-C

4. When the zigzagging of the magazine mount is adjusted, perform the right angle adjustment of the
cutter unit.

See ☞ The right angle adjustment of the cutter unit in 25620.

IMPORTANT
• Only when the zigzagging of all the magazine mounts is adjusted, perform the right angle adjustment of the
cutter unit.

5. Perform Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction.

☞ 36060
IMPORTANT
• Perform arm unit 1 zigzagging correction for each paper magazine A, A2, B, and C.
• Make test prints via Test Print Confirmation 1/2 to check the zigzagging amounts (A - C) of two prints are
within the tolerance level in the following table.
If they are within the tolerance level, the adjustment is not necessary.

26810 3/4
 26810
Laser unit

Test Print Tolerance range

Test print 1 (457.0 mm) A − C is within ±0.5 mm
Test print 2 (914.0 mm) A − C is within ±1.0 mm

Line A

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

B
C

Line C
G078473

6. Perform the master correction of the exposure center correction.

☞ 36070
IMPORTANT
• Carry out the master correction of the exposure center correction for each paper magazine A, A2, B, and C.
• Make a test print via Test Print Confirmation with Master Value to check the misalignment of the test print.
If it is within 0.2 mm, no adjustment is required.
Left end of the paper Right end of the paper
Center line
A

G068463
NOTE
• After performing Exposure Center Correction (Master), perform Exposure Center Correction (for each Paper Magazine)
if you use other paper magazines.

26810 4/4
 26820 Zigzag adjustment

Zigzag adjustment

How to adjust the zigzagging in paper supply unit A2

This section explains the zigzagging adjustment procedure for paper magazine A2. For the adjustment procedure for paper magazines A, B
and C, see the following.

See ☞ 26810☞ Adjusting the zigzagging of the paper advance section.

Items to confirm
All Check if leveling of the system is completed correctly.
Magazine deck Check that the shutter open/close arm works properly. (If the printer door is closed, the shutter

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

open/close arm moves 10 mm and more at the outlet section of the magazine.)

z Procedure

1. Check the condition of the paper magazine.

☞ 22000
2. Adjust the zigzagging of the exposure advance unit.
See ☞ Adjusting the paper zigzagging in the exposure advance unit in 36080.
IMPORTANT
• If the exposure advance adjustment is performed for any one of magazine A, A2, B, or C, the correction is
complete.

3. Paper Guide Width Correction

Adjust the paper guide width of paper supply unit A2 so that the width is the same as the loading paper width.
1. Perform Move to 130.0 mm Width via Functions.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Paper Guide Width Correction
2. Open the printer door to pull out the pre-exposure advance unit.
3. Measure the dimension between outsides of the paper guides.

Paper guides Outside of paper guide

Outside of paper guide

Measured value
G086490
4. Enter the measured value into Paper Guide Width Measurement Value.

26820 1/10
 26820
Zigzag adjustment

5. Perform 130.0 mm Width Operation Confirmation via Functions and confirm that the dimension between outsides of
the paper guides is 130.0 mm.
NOTE
• The acceptable value of the dimension between the paper guides is from 129.8 mm to 130.0 mm.

4. Confirming the paper center of paper supply unit A2

Confirm that magazine mount A2 and paper supply unit A2 are mutually adjusted.

• When confirming the paper center of the paper supply unit A2, use the paper of which width is almost 152 mm.

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

1. If the correction value is entered in Paper width (152.0 mm) of Paper Guide Width Adjustment (for each Paper
Width), enter 0.0 mm.

M5398-01
2. Set the paper width to 152.0 mm via Paper Guide Width Adjustment (for each Paper Width)→F:
Functions→Guide Width Test.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Paper Guide Width Adjustment
(for each Paper Width)
3. Turn the cam section of the pressure release motor by hand and make the advance roller into the pressure condition.
Pressure release motor

Cam

G089699
4. Remove the top cover from the quad magazine unit. (four screws)

Screws

Cover

G086496
5. Press the paper magazine while pressing the shutter lever downward.

26820 2/10
 26820
Zigzag adjustment

Gently turn the knob clockwise to be advanced the paper to the advance roller.

Advance roller

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Knob of paper magazine Shutter lever

G085154
6. Turn the knob of the paper supply unit A2 while supporting the paper magazine.
Pull out the paper until it can be shown by 150 mm or more.

Knob of paper supply unit A2

Paper length: 150 mm or more

Paper magazine

G085155
7. Cut the paper between paper magazine A2 and paper supply unit A2 using the manual cutter.

Manual cutter

G085156

26820 3/10
 26820
Zigzag adjustment

8. Pull out paper supply unit A2.

Paper supply unit A2

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Nob of paper guide

G085153
9. Turn the paper guide knob to widen the inside of paper guide larger than the paper width. (Clockwise)
10. Confirm that the space between the paper guide inside and paper is the same measurement at the front and back.
Front space Back space

Paper

Inside of paper guide

G089696

IMPORTANT
• If the dimensions of front and back clearances are the same, confirmation work is complete.
• If the dimensions of space are different, adjust the protruding amount of the magazine mount A2
positioning pin.
11. Loosen the two set-screws fixing the positioning pin.
12. Turn the positioning pin to adjust the protruding amount of the pin.

If moving the magazine mount toward you

• Turn the positioning pin counterclockwise to increase the protruding amount by one half of the difference between
the front and back spaces.

If moving the magazine mount backward

• Turn the positioning pin clockwise to decrease the protruding amount by one half of the difference between the
front and back spaces.

26820 4/10
 26820
Zigzag adjustment

NOTE
• Turning the positioning pin by a screw hole (60 °) moves the unit about 0.2 mm.
Protruding amount of positioning pin

Positioning pin

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Holes of the positioning pin

Set-screws
G089698
13. Tighten the two set-screws of the positioning pin.

5. Paper Guide Width Correction

Before adjusting the zigzagging of paper magazine mount A2, perform Paper Guide Width Adjustment using 89 mm paper
and 305 mm paper.
NOTE
• If there is no paper whose width is 89 mm or 305 mm, use paper of which width is near 89 mm or 305 mm.
Bringing up the display
On the Maintenance Application display, click Maintenance. → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment →
Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Paper Guide Width Adjustment (for each Paper Width)

(1) Select the paper width to be adjusted, and enter −1.0 to the correction value for the surface type.
(2) Click Enter.
(3) Click F: Functions, then click Guide Width Test.
The Guide Width Test display is shown.
(4) Select the paper width and surface type to use, and click OK.
The paper guide width is shortened by the correction value entered.
(5) Open printer doors 3 and 4, then pull out paper supply unit A2.
(6) Load paper to the paper guide.
Paper guide

Paper

G086288

(7) Check if there is a gap between paper and the paper guide when loading paper.
NOTE
• The standard amount of gap between the paper guide and paper is 0.2 mm.

26820 5/10
 26820
Zigzag adjustment

1. Move paper as far as it will go to the right and left of the paper guide with paper loaded to the paper guide, and
check if there is a gap between the paper guide and paper.
Guide width

Paper guide

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Paper

Paper width
Move paper to the right and left. Gap (0.2 mm)
G086290
2. Remove paper from the paper guide, and restore paper supply unit A2.
3. Close printer doors 3 and 4.
If there is no space (about 0.2 mm) between the paper guide and paper
1. On the Paper Guide Width Adjustment (for each Paper Width) display, enter the paper width correction value
for the paper to use.
The larger the correction value is, the wider the space is.
2. Adjust the paper guide width so that the space between the paper guide and paper becomes 0.2 mm.
3. Click Enter.
4. Adjust the paper guide width so that the space between the paper guide and paper becomes 0.2 mm.

6. Adjusting zigzag of magazine mount A2

• When adjusting zigzag of paper magazine mount A2, use paper whose width is about 89 mm or 305 mm.

(1) Make test prints with paper whose width is 89 mm or 305 mm by clicking Test Print 1 in Arm Unit 1
Zigzagging Correction.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Paper Guide Width
Adjustment (for each Paper Width)

26820 6/10
 26820
Zigzag adjustment

(2) Check the test print.

If the amount of zigzagging is not within 0.5 mm, adjust the position of paper supply unit A2.

When the center line of the first print is leaned to the right When the center line of the first print is leaned to the left

Second test print Second test print

(Center line on the second print) (Center line on the second print)

A
A

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

A
A

First test print First test print

(Center line on the first print) (Center line on the first print)

Turn the adjusting screw to the right. Turn the adjusting screw to the left.
(Adjust paper supply unit A2 rightward.) (Adjust paper supply unit A2 leftward.)

(3) Loosen positioning fixing screws of paper supply unit A2. (Loosen two fixing screws.)
(4) Adjust the position of paper supply unit A2. (One adjusting screw and one nut)
IMPORTANT
• Fix the screw while pressing it in the direction of arrow 1.

Adjusting screw Fixing screws

Turn the adjusting screw to the right.

Turn the adjusting screw to the left.

G085419

(5) Make a test print, and check if the zigzagging amount is within 0.5 mm.
If the amount of zigzagging is not within 0.5 mm, perform from Step 6 again.

7. Adjusting the position of the paper guide inlet

(1) Install the paper magazine in lane A2.

Any paper width is available.
(2) Select the paper width to use via Paper Guide Width Adjustment (for each Paper Width)→F:
Functions→Guide Width Test.

26820 7/10
 26820
Zigzag adjustment

(3) Advance the paper.

1. Turn the cam section of the pressure release motor by hand and make the advance roller into the pressure
condition.
2. Press the shutter lever down while pressing the paper magazine to advance the paper to the advance roller
position by slowly rotating the knob clockwise.
3. Turn the knob of paper supply unit A2 while pressing the paper magazine.
• For details, see ☞ 4 Confirming the paper center of paper supply unit A2.
(4) Perform adjustment so that paper leading end comes to the center position of the paper guide. (one adjusting
screw)

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Paper leading end

Paper guide inlet

Adjusting screw

G089693

(5) Insert the leading end of the manual cutter.

(6) Loosen two adjusting screws of the paper guide. Move the paper guide to the manual cutter and temporarily
tighten the adjustment screw on your side. Then, remove the manual cutter.

Manual cutter

Paper guide

Two adjusting screws

G090247

(7) Slowly move the paper guide inlet plate within 1.5 mm while visually confirming the plate, then fix it with the
adjusting screws.
NOTE
• The convex of manual cutter is 1.5 mm.

26820 8/10
 26820
Zigzag adjustment

Convex part of the manual cutter

Paper guide inlet plate

Two adjusting screws

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

1.5 mm

Convex part of the manual cutter

G090249

(8) After adjusting the paper guide position, confirm if the manual cutter smoothly moves in and out.
(9) Reconfirm the paper center of paper supply unit A2.
• See ☞ 4 Confirming the paper center of paper supply unit A2.

8. Reconfirm the paper center of paper supply unit A2.

☞ 4 Confirming the paper center of paper supply unit A2
9. Perform Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction.
☞ 36060
IMPORTANT
• Make test prints via Test Print Confirmation 1/2 to check the zigzagging amounts (A - C) of two prints are
within the tolerance level in the following table.
If they are within the tolerance level, the adjustment is not necessary.
Test Print Tolerance range
Test print 1 (457.0 mm) A − C is within ±0.5 mm
Test print 2 (914.0 mm) A − C is within ±1.0 mm

Line A
A
B
C

Line C
G078473

10. Paper Guide Width Correction (for each Paper Width)

This operation is necessary for all paper widths and surfaces used for paper magazine A2.

26820 9/10
 26820
Zigzag adjustment

Bringing up the display

Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Paper Guide Width Correction (for
each Paper Width)
• See ☞ 5 Paper Guide Width Correction.

11. Perform Exposure Center Correction→Master of Paper Magazine A2.

☞ 36070
IMPORTANT

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

• Make a test print via Test Print Confirmation with Master Value to check the misalignment of the test print.
If it is within 0.2 mm, no adjustment is required.
Left end of the paper Right end of the paper
Center line
A

G068463

NOTE
• After performing Exposure Center Correction (Master), perform Exposure Center Correction (for each Paper Magazine)
if you use other paper magazines.

26820 10/10
 27230 Drive section

Drive section

Backlash adjustment of the dryer rack

z Procedure

IMPORTANT
• The backlash adjustment is required when you replace the dryer rack.

1. Remove the dryer rack.

2. Remove the duct. (one screw and one washer)

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Duct

Dryer rack

G069806

3. Loosen one lock nut and three screws on the drive unit to let the unit move a little.
Lock nut
Adjusting bolt

Gear A

Drive unit

G069807

4. Attach the dryer racks.

5. Keep pushing the plate of the drive unit in the direction of the arrow and turn the adjusting bolt until it
contacts the plate.
IMPORTANT
• Check that the gear of the dryer rack and gear A engage.

27230 1/2
 27230
Drive section

6. At the position where the adjusting bolt contacts the plate, make 1.5 counterclockwise turn and tighten
the lock nut.
Adjusting bolt
Plate of the drive unit
Gear of the dryer rack

Gear A

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Plate
Screws
Lock nut
G069808

7. Remove the dryer rack. Attach the plate of the drive unit in contact with the adjusting bolt. (three screws)
8. Attach the dryer rack and the duct.
z Checking after adjustment
1. Make some prints to check if no paper jam or abnormal noise occurs in the dryer rack.

27230 2/2
 27260
Drive section

Adjusting the position of the dryer rack

z Procedure

1. Open the dryer door and the dryer top cover.

2. Tilt the dryer rack.
3. Loosen the screws on the connector. (two screws)
Dryer door

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Dryer top cover

Loosen these screws. Connector

Dryer rack
G071634

4. Adjust the connection so that the clearance of the connectors is 0.5 mm or less. (two screws)
IMPORTANT
• Pressing the connector strongly may damage the connector. If the clearance is too much great, an error may
occur.

27260 1/2
 27260
Drive section

View hole

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

0.5 mm or less

Connector on the dryer rack side Connector on the body side

G052783

5. Loosen the screws on the lock plate which secures the dryer rack. (two screws)
6. Adjust the position of the lock plate that secures the dryer rack so that the lock works smoothly when
setting the dryer rack. (two screws)

Lock plate

Loosen these screws.

G052781

7. Check the backlash between the gear of the dryer and the gear of the dryer rack.
☞ 27230
8. After the adjustment, process the prints to check.

27260 2/2
 27270
Drive section

Adjusting the drive motor belt tension

z Procedure

1. Remove processor cover 4. (seven screws)

☞ 20020
2. Adjust the position of the drive motor to fix the drive motor belt so that it bends 1.6 mm when pressing it
by 265 to 296 g (2.6 to 2.9 N). (four screws)

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Drive motor belt

Drive motor

Drive motor
G076385

3. Reassemble the parts.

z Checking after adjustment
1. Check if the drive motor operates normally.

27270 1/1
 27410 Order classification section

Order classification section

Adjusting the stop position of the print receiving tray

z Procedure

1. Remove the sorter cover.

☞ 20020
2. Loosen one screw on the sensor holder. Then adjust the stop position of the print receiving tray by
moving the sensor holder up and down.

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Print sorter unit

Print receiving tray

Sorter home sensor holder

G050752

3. Adjust the sorter home sensor holder position to stay the print receiving tray at the position dimension A
up from the top of receiving tray rail.
NOTE
• Dimension A=2 ± 1 mm

27410 1/2
 27410
Order classification section

Print receiving tray

Dimension A

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Top of receiving tray rail

Sorter home sensor holder

G050751

4. Press the manual sorter switch several times to check the stop position of the print receiving tray.
If the stop position is not stable, check the timing belt tension and the chain tension of the sorter motor and adjust them
properly.
NOTE
• Tension adjustment of the sorter motor timing belt
☞ 20120
• Adjustment of the chain tension
☞ 20120

27410 2/2
 27420
Order classification section

Removing the print conveyor unit

z Procedure

1. Remove the processor drive cover.

☞ 20020
2. Open the squeegee unit top cover.
3. Lift up the lever and open the dryer door.

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Squeegee unit top cover
Lever

Dryer door
G068389

4. Set a screwdriver on the cover of stay 2.

IMPORTANT
• Do this not to get your hands pinched with stay 2 or the print conveyor unit after you remove the screw from
stay 2.
5. Remove the screw from stay 2 of the print conveyor unit.
Stay 2

Screwdriver

G068384

27420 1/4
 27420
Order classification section

6. Remove the conveyor guide. (three nuts)

Conveyor guide

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

G068387

7. Remove holder 1 (two screws) and holder 2 (two nuts).

Holder 2

Holder 1
G068385

8. Disconnect the connector(s).

J/P711: Conveyor motor
J/P778: Conveyor unit sensor
IMPORTANT
• Put the connector(s) in the square hole when you attach the print conveyor unit.

27420 2/4
 27420
Order classification section

9. Lift up the print conveyor unit in the direction indicated by the arrow and remove it.
Square hole

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

J/P711 and
J/P778

Print conveyor unit

G068386

z Precautions when reattaching

1. Be careful not to get your hands pinched with stay 2 or the print conveyor unit.
Stay 2

Screwdriver

G068384

27420 3/4
 27420
Order classification section

2. Adjust the position of the conveyor guide so that it does not contact with the roller(s) of the dryer section.
(three nuts)
Roller

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Conveyor guide

G068388

27420 4/4
 27430
Order classification section

Replacing the print receiving tray

z Procedure

Replacing print receiving tray (1)

1. Stop the print receiving tray to be replaced at the print receiving position.
2. Push the pawl of the print receiving tray (2) in the direction indicated by arrow A, then remove the print
receiving tray (1) in the direction indicated by arrow B.

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Print receiving tray (1)
A

Pawl

Print receiving tray (2)

G050796

Replacing print receiving tray (2)

1. Move the print receiving tray to be replaced to the intermediate position.
2. Press the end of receiving tray (3) with your thumb, and remove receiving tray (2) in the direction
indicated by the arrow.
Print sorter unit

Print receiving tray (3)

G052543

27430 1/3
 27430
Order classification section

Replacing print receiving tray (3)

1. Remove the sorter cover.
☞ 20020
2. Remove paper guide (1). (two screws)
Paper guide (1)
Print sorter unit

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Tray rail
G053522

3. Remove the receiving tray rail. (one screw)

4. Remove the tray rails in numerical order by sliding them in the direction indicated by the arrow.
Print sorter unit

Tray rail
G050753

5. Insert a slotted blade screwdriver as shown below, lift the print receiving tray slightly and pull it out in the
direction indicated by the arrow.

G050390

27430 2/3
 27430
Order classification section

6. Reassemble the parts.

7. Press the manual sorter switch, then check that the print receiving tray operates properly.
z Adjustment after the replacement

1. Adjust the stop position of the print receiving tray.

☞ 27410

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

27430 3/3
 27440
Order classification section

Removing the print sorter unit

z Procedure

1. Remove the dryer side cover.

☞ 20020
2. Remove the angle bracket cover.
Angle bracket cover

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Pawls
G050756

3. Disconnect the connector(s).

J/P713: Relay connector
4. Remove the angle bracket. (two screws)
Angle bracket

G050757

5. Remove the print sorter unit in the direction indicated by the arrow.

G050758

27440 1/2
 27440
Order classification section

z Precautions when reattaching

None

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

27440 2/2
 27500 F replenishment unit [F specification]

F replenishment unit [F specification]

Removing the F replenishment unit [F]

z Procedure

1. Remove the replenisher cartridge.

2. Remove the processor rear cover.
☞ 20020
3. Disconnect the connector(s).

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

J/P632: Replenishment cartridge opening motor
J/P637: Relay connector
4. Remove the F replenishment unit. (eight screws)

J/P632

J/P637
F replenishment unit

G085936

z Adjustment after the replacement

When the original F replenishment unit is reattached

1. Confirm that the F replenishment unit works normally using the output check.
When the new F replenishment unit is attached
1. Confirm that the F replenishment unit works normally using the output check.

27500 1/1
 27510
F replenishment unit [F specification]

Removing the replenishment cartridge installation section [F]

• Remove the replenishment cartridge setting section when replacing or checking the replenishment cartridge opening motor,
replenishment cartridge position sensor (upper) or replenishment cartridge position sensor (lower).

z Procedure

1. Remove the F replenishment unit.

☞ 27500

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

2. Remove the replenishment cartridge setting section. (four screws)

Replenishment cartridge setting section

G085882

z Precautions when reattaching

1. Set the cam into the square hole in the replenishment cartridge setting section to attach it.

Cam
Square hole

G085883

2. Confirm that the F replenishment unit works normally using the output check.

27510 1/1
 27520
F replenishment unit [F specification]

Replacing the replenishment cartridge opening motor [F]

z Procedure

1. Remove the F replenishment unit.

☞ 27500
2. Remove the replenishment cartridge setting section.
☞ 27510

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

3. Remove the replenishment cartridge opening motor. (three screws)

Replenishment cartridge opening

motor

G085858

4. Remove the plate (three screws) on the replenishment cartridge opening motor and gear (one screw).
Plate

Gear

Replenishment cartridge opening

motor

G085859

27520 1/2
 27520
F replenishment unit [F specification]

z Adjustment after the replacement

1. Install the gear of the replenishment cartridge opening motor so that the space between the outer
surface of the gear and the edge of the motor axis is 3 mm. (one screw)

Plate

Gear

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

3 mm

G085881

2. Install the replenishment cartridge opening motor with the cam remaining at the upper start point. (three
screws)
• If the cam is not adjusted to the upper start point during the replenishment cartridge opening motor, the F replenishment unit may not
be correctly attached to the system.

Replenishment cartridge opening

motor

Cam (upper start

point)

G085880

3. After placing the replenishment cartridge setting section and the F replenishment unit to the original
positions, confirm that the F replenishment unit works normally using the output check.

27520 2/2
 27530
F replenishment unit [F specification]

Replacing the replenishment solution level sensor [F]

z Procedure

1. Remove processor side cover 4.

☞ 20020
2. Disconnect the connector(s).
See ☞ 63280 for the locations of each replenishment solution level sensor.
J/P611, 612:P1R

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

J/P613, 614:P2RA
J/P615, 616:P2RB
3. Remove the rubber plug from the flange section in the direction of arrow 1.
Remove the replenishment solution level sensor wiring from the rubber plug, and remove the replenishment solution level
sensor connector in the direction of the arrow 2. (two screws for each)
• Regarding the replenishment solution level sensor, replace # # #(upper) replenishment solution level sensor, # # #(lower)
replenishment solution level sensor and HL−F−001 as a set.

# # #(Upper) replenishment solution level sensor # # #(Lower) replenishment solution level sensor

(1) (2)

HL−F−001
Rubber plug Flange section

G085895

z Checking after replacement

1. Confirm that the replenishment solution level sensors are securely attached as shown below. (two set-
screws each)

# # #(Upper) replenishment solution level sensor

P1R P2RA P2RB
12mm

18.7mm
22.4mm
77.2mm

65.9mm

65.9mm

# # #(Lower) replenishment solution level sensor

G085180

27530 1/1
 27540
F replenishment unit [F specification]

Output check for the cartridge flushing valve and replenishment cartridge
cleaning pump [F]

• Perform the output check for the cartridge flushing valve and replenishment cartridge cleaning pump following the procedure with
attaching a hose. Or, water may come into a replenishment tank and it may adversely affect the replenishment solution.

z Procedure

1. Remove the replenisher cartridge.

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

2. By the output check, move the replenishment cartridge setting part from upper point to lower point.
☞ 35320
3. Turn on Interlock Switch (Replenisher Section Door).
4. Insert a hose of 13 mm diameter into the cleaning nozzle to be checked and fix it with adhesive tape.
• The hose is a service personnel tool. See Service personnel tool list☞ 80310.

Interlock Switch (Replenisher Section Door)

Hose

Cleaning nozzles

G085941

5. By the output check, operate P1R Cartridge Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning
Pump, P2RA Cartridge Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump and P2RB
Cartridge Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump, which are to be checked.
• The replenishment cartridge cleaning pump stops after operating for 10 seconds.
• The output amount of the replenisher cartridge cleaning pump is about 227 ml per 10 seconds.

6. Remove the hose. By the output check, move the replenishment cartridge setting part from lower point
to upper point.

27540 1/1
 27550
F replenishment unit [F specification]

Position of the replenishment solution collection hoses [F]

• Indicates position of the hoses to drain the replenishment solutions after an attention or error message is displayed for the F
specification.

Hoses to drain replenishment solutions

To each hose, a sticker P1R/P2RA/P2RB or PSR is attached.

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Hoses to drain working solutions

G085974

27550 1/1
 27610 Tablet replenishment section

Tablet replenishment section

Removing the tablet replenishment unit [J]

z Procedure

1. Remove all the tablet cartridges.

2. Remove the tablet replenishment unit section cover.
☞ 20020
3. Disconnect the connector(s).

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

J/P539, J/P541: tablet replenishment driver PCB
4. Remove the hinge that connects the tablet replenishment unit to the processor. (two screws)
NOTE
• After operating, confirm that the tablet replenishment units were properly installed.

Hinge

Tablet replenishment unit Paper processor section

G050733

5. Reassemble the parts.

6. Check the tablet sensor via Input Check.
☞ 35220
7. Check the drum operation via Output Check.
☞ 35320

27610 1/1
 27620
Tablet replenishment section

Replacing the module [J]

z Procedure

1. Remove all the tablet cartridges.

2. Remove the tablet replenishment unit section cover. ☞ 20020
3. Disconnect the connector(s).
J/P571, J/P572, J/P575, J/P588: CD module

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

J/P576, J/P577, J/P580, J/P589: BF module
J/P581, J/P582, J/P585, J/P590: STB module
4. Replace the module. (Loosen two of the four screws.)
Module

Loosen this screw.

G050711

5. Reassemble the parts.

6. Check the tablet sensor via Input Check.
☞ 35220
7. Check the drum operation via Output Check.
☞ 35320

27620 1/1
 27630
Tablet replenishment section

Replacing the drum drive motor [J]

z Procedure

1. Remove the module.

☞ 27620
2. Remove the gear (32T).

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Gear (32T)

G050712

3. Remove the drive gear. (two screws)

Drive gear

G050713

4. Remove the drum drive motor. (three screws)

Drum motor

G050732

5. Replace the drive motor and reassemble the parts.

NOTE
• When attaching the gear (32T), adjust the backlash by adjusting the attaching position of the gear (32T). (three screws)

Gear (32T)
G052554

27630 1/2
 27630
Tablet replenishment section

6. Check the tablet sensor via Input Check.

☞ 35220
7. Check the drum operation via Output Check.
☞ 35320

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

27630 2/2
 27640
Tablet replenishment section

Replacing the elevator motor [J]

z Procedure

1. Remove all the tablet cartridges.

2. Remove the tablet replenishment unit section cover.
☞ 20020
3. Disconnect the connector(s).

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

J/P540: Tablet replenishment drive PCB
4. Remove the motor mounting plate from the frame. (four screws)
5. Remove the drive gear cover. (two screws)
6. Remove the gear (12T). (one screw)
Drive gear cover
Motor mounting plate

Gear (12T)

G050734

7. Replace the elevator motor. (three screws)

Elevator motor

G050735

8. Attach the gear (12T).

27640 1/2
 27640
Tablet replenishment section

9. Check the backlash between gear (12T) and the upper idle gear.
Gear (12T) Upper idle gear

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

0.2 mm

G050736

10. Reassemble the parts.

11. Check the backlash between the friction roller gear and the idle gear.
Upper idle gear

0.2 mm

Friction roller gear

G050737

12. Check the elevator operation via Output Check.

☞ 35320

27640 2/2
 27650
Tablet replenishment section

Adjusting the tension of the elevator chain [J]

z Procedure

1. Remove all the tablet cartridges.

2. Remove the tablet replenishment unit section cover. ☞ 20020
3. Loosen the two screws of the tension plate.

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

G050738

4. Adjust the tension of the elevator chain.

„ Point
Adjust the position of the tension plates so that the elevator chain deflects by 9 mm when the part shown by the arrow is pulled
with the force of 200 g. (Adjust both right and left of elevator chain tensions.)

200 g

9 mm G050739

5. Raise the elevator until the upper sensor turns DARK.

6. Measure A, B and C as shown in the illustration to confirm that the bucket platform is parallel to the
tablet replenishment unit.
Tablet replenishment unit

Square holes

C
B
A

Bucket platforms
G050740

27650 1/2
 27650
Tablet replenishment section

NOTE
• If the bucket platform is not parallel to the tablet replenishment unit, perform adjustment described below.
1. Perform the tension adjustment for the right and left elevator chains again.
2. Check that the elevator chains are meshed with right and left sprockets at the same position.
3. Replace the right and left elevator chains.
7. Check the elevator operation via Output Check.
☞ 35320
8. Reassemble the parts.

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

27650 2/2
 27660
Tablet replenishment section

Adjusting the position of the elevator upper sensor [J]

z Procedure

1. Remove all the tablet cartridges.

2. Remove the tablet replenishment unit section cover. ☞ 20020
3. Check that the stopper contacts with the upper of the slot.
„ Point

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

If the stopper does not contact with the upper of the slot, open the tablet replenishment unit and then adjust the position of the
stopper. (Loosen two screws for each.)
Tablet replenishment unit

Oval hole

Stopper
G050741

4. Adjust the position of the elevator upper sensor so that clearance between the lowest bottom of bucket
platform and tablet gate is 1.5 mm±0.5 mm when the elevator is stopped at the position where the
elevator upper sensor is closed via Output Check. (two screws)
Screws Elevator upper sensor

Bottom of the
1.5±0.5 mm
bucket
platform
Tablet gate

Tablet gate Bucket platform Tablet

replenishment unit
G050742

IMPORTANT
• Stopping the elevator at the elevator upper sensor position
1. Select Tablet Replenishment Section on the Output Check.

27660 1/2
 27660
Tablet replenishment section

2. When the elevator motor (UP) is selected and the key is kept pressed, the elevator lifts up and stops at the
position where the elevator middle sensor is closed for 2 seconds.
3. When the key is pressed furthermore, the elevator rises again and stops at the position where the elevator
upper sensor is closed.
4. At this point, if the key is released, the elevator stays at the position of the elevator upper sensor.
5. Reassemble the parts.
6. Check if the tablet falls from the elevator via Output Check.
☞ 35320

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

27660 2/2
 27670
Tablet replenishment section

Adjusting the position of the elevator middle sensor [J]

z Procedure

1. Remove all the tablet cartridges.

2. Remove the tablet replenishment unit section cover.
☞ 20020
3. Check that the stopper contacts with the upper of the slot.

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

„ Point
If the stopper does not contact with the upper of the slot, open the tablet replenishment unit and then adjust the position of the
stopper. (two screws for each)

Oval hole

G050741

4. Adjust the position of the elevator middle sensor so that space between the higher bottom of the bucket
platform and tablet gate is 1.5 mm±0.5 mm when the elevator is stopped at the position where the
elevator middle sensor detects dark in the Output Check. (two screws)
Screws Elevator middle sensor

Bucket platform

1.5±0.5 mm
Bucket

Higher bottom of
the bucket

Chute inlet Tablet gate Chute inlet

Tablet gate

G050743

27670 1/2
 27670
Tablet replenishment section

IMPORTANT
• Stopping the elevator at the elevator middle sensor position
1. Select Tablet Replenishment Section on the Output Check.
2. Select Elevator Motor (UP) and keep pressing the key, then the elevator lifts up and stops at the position
where the elevator middle sensor detects dark.
3. At that time, release the key, then the elevator stays at the position of the elevator middle sensor.
5. Reassemble the parts.
6. Check if the tablet falls from the elevator via Output Check.

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

☞ 35320

27670 2/2
 27680
Tablet replenishment section

Adjusting the position of the elevator lower sensor [J]

z Procedure

1. Stop the elevator at the position where the elevator lower sensor detects dark in the Output Check.
• ☞ 35320
2. Adjust the position of the elevator lower sensor so that the space between the lower bottom of the
bucket platform and the lower side of the hole of the frame is 0 to -2.0 mm. (one screw)

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Lower bottom of the bucket platform

Tablet gate

Lower bottom of the bucket

0 to -2.0 mm

Hole of the tablet replenishment

Elevator lower sensor

Screw

G050744

3. Check if the tablet falls from the drum via Output Check.
• ☞ 35320

27680 1/1
 27690
Tablet replenishment section

Cleaning method of the drum of module [J]

z Procedure

1. Remove the module.

☞ 27620
2. Remove the cartridge guide.

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Cartridge guide Cartridge guide

G050745

3. Remove the drum case. (six screws)

Drum case

G050746

4. Remove the gear (64T). (one mount ring)

Mount ring

Gear (64T)
G050747

27690 1/3
 27690
Tablet replenishment section

5. Face the right narrow notch of the drum to you and align the center of drum unit's opening with the
center of notch, and pull out the drum to the arrow direction.

Narrow Wide

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

G050748

6. Clean the space between the tablet drop section and vapor proof blocks.
Vapor proof block

Space

Tablet drop section

Vapor proof block

G050749

IMPORTANT
• There is a spring in the space of vapor proof block. Be careful not to damage it when cleaning.
• After cleaning, check that there is no space when the vapor proof block is pushed in the arrow direction.

Vapor proof block

Space

Space

Springs
Vapor proof block

G050750

27690 2/3
 27690
Tablet replenishment section

7. Reassemble the parts.

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

27690 3/3
 27700
Tablet replenishment section

Replacing the STB tablet conveyor motor [J]

z Procedure

1. Remove the tablet chute and the conveyor cover.

2. Disconnect the connector(s).
J/P720: STB tablet conveyor motor
Tablet replenishment unit

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

STB tablet conveyor motor J/P720
G050793

3. Remove the conveyor frame. (one screw)

Conveyor frame

Processor cover 1 (inside)

G050794

4. Remove processor cover 1.

☞ 20020
5. Remove the drive gear. (one screw)

27700 1/2
 27700
Tablet replenishment section

6. Remove the STB tablet conveyor motor from processor cover 1. (two screws)
Drive gear

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

STB tablet conveyor motor
G050795

7. Reassemble the parts.

8. Check the operation of the STB tablet conveyor motor via Output Check.
☞ 35220

27700 2/2
 27810 Replenishment package unit

Replenishment package unit

Replacing the replenisher pump and the water supply pump [SM]

z Procedure

1. Pull out the replenishment package unit.

2. Remove the replenishment packages.
3. Remove the pump mount.

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Arrangement for the replenisher pump and the
water supply pump

Tray units

G070020

4. Close the strainer unit valve of the pump to be replaced.

5. Attach the tube clamps to the OUT side of the hoses of the pump to be replaced.
6. Loosen the wire bands on the caps of the pump to be replaced, and then remove the hoses.
IMPORTANT
• For the replenisher pumps of CD-A, CD-B, CD-C, BF-A, BF-B and STB, do not remove the new caps from the
pumps. If they are removed, the poppet valves may be taken off. Then the pump output amount indicated on
the rating plate will not be determined properly.
IN
Caps
(Do not remove this.)

Poppet valves OUT

G050887
• Be careful not to let the pump rotating part come into contact with chemical or water.
7. Remove the pump as shown in the figure.
2. Push the main body backward. 3. Lift it up.

1. Push. G050874

27810 1/4
 27810
Replenishment package unit

8. Remove the cover from the removed pump.

Cover

Lift up the cover holding the part

indicated by the arrow.

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

G050875

9. Take a note of the output amount displayed on the new pump's rating plate.
The pump of which output amount measurement is no good must be replaced.
Output amount

Rating plate
G050888

10. Unplug the connectors, and replace the pump.

J/P611, cord CD-A: CD-A replenisher pump
J/P612, cord CD-B: CD-B replenisher pump
J/P613, cord CD-C: CD-C replenisher pump
J/P617, 618: CD-W water supply pump
J/P614, cord BF-A: BF-A replenisher pump
J/P615, cord BF-B: BF-B replenisher pump
J/P616, cord STB: STB replenisher pump
J/P619: STB-W water supply pump
Cord BF-W: BF-W water supply pump
11. Reassemble the parts.
12. Enter the output amount.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Processor Settings → Pump Output Amount Setting
Setting for CD-A, CD-B, CD-C, CD-W, BF-A, BF-B and STB
Enter the output amount written in step 9.
☞ 33003
Setting for BF-W and STB-W
Perform pump output amount settings, and then enter the measurement values.

z Adjustment after the replacement

1. Remove air from the replenisher pump and the water supply pump (except BF-W and STB-W).
IMPORTANT
• If air remains in the pump, output cannot be performed accurately.
• If a large amount of air remains in the pump, the chemical may undergo oxidation, or precise values may not be
obtained because air escapes during the measurement.

(1) Remove the sub-tank top cover and processor cover 1.

☞ 20020
(2) Fix the replenisher pipe and the water supply pipe.
Remove the replenisher pipe and the water supply pipe from the sub-tank and fix the pipes in the vertical position with
the output ports front faced.
NOTE
• Fix the replenisher pipe and the water supply pipe at the same height as when the system is operating. When the
output amount is measured, the pipes should be secured to obtain values correctly.

27810 2/4
 27810
Replenishment package unit

(3) Prepare a container for the replenishment solution or water to be output.

Replenisher pipe and water
supply pipe

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Tape G050889

IMPORTANT
• For measurements of two or more replenishment solutions, use a different container for each solution.
If no different containers are available, clean the container before using.
(4) Press on the Pump Output Amount Setting display and select Pump Output Amount Setting.
(5) Select the pump for output.
(6) Operate the pump by pressing the Manual sorter switch.
(7) Check that the air does not remain in the hose. Then repeat step (5) until the replenishment solution or water
comes to the exit of the replenisher pipe or the water supply pipe.
(8) Attach the air exhaust tool to the replenisher pipe.
Replenisher pipe and water
supply pipe

Air exhaust tool

G050890

IMPORTANT
• When air is exhausted for two or more chemicals, be sure to start from CD-A pump.
• Before air exhausting from the pumps, be sure to clean the tool. If the tool is not cleaned, contamination
and chemical reaction may occur.

NOTE
• The air exhaust tool is a service tool. See the Service personnel tool list. ☞ 80310
(9) Exhaust the air from the replenisher pump and the water supply pump by pulling the cylinder of the syringe from
the air exhaust tool at one stroke.
Remove the air exhaust tool from the replenisher pipe or the water supply pipe, and discharge the air, water, or
replenishment solution.
IMPORTANT
• When the air is exhausted by using the air exhaust tool, the float of the package may fall by the force of
attraction and the attention messages such as Replace the Replenishment Package with a new one.
may be displayed.
There may be still some replenisher solution left in the package. Remove the replenishment package
from the replenishment unit and shake it to check if the float is rising.
• If the injection syringe slips out of the air exhaust tool, the replenishment solution or water may be
splashed.

27810 3/4
 27810
Replenishment package unit

(10) After air has been exhausted by the air exhaust tool, check that the air does not remain in the hose.
2. Check the output amount.
• For the operation procedures, see Operator's Manual - Additional Operations & Setup Manual -.

IMPORTANT
• Make sure that the difference between the measured value and the output amount entered in the system is
within ±3%. If the difference is not within ±3%, check for damage or clogging of the pipes. When there is still no
problem relating to those items, air must be remained in the pumps. Exhaust air, and measure output amount
securely again.

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

• When the output amount for each replenishment package is measured, the remaining amount of each solution
varies.
3. Replace the replenisher pipe and the water supply pipe to their original position.
4. Mark the label with a new pump output amount.
(The label is affixed to the inside of processor door 1.)
5. Reattach the sub-tank top cover and processor cover 1.
IMPORTANT
• Do not leave the air exhaust tool without cleaning after use. Otherwise the syringe packing may be damaged.
Be sure to clean the tool before storing.

27810 4/4
 27820
Replenishment package unit

Replacing the probe [SM]

z Procedure

1. Pull out the replenishment package unit.

2. Remove the replenishment package.
3. Remove the protection cover of the SM I/O PCB. (one screw)
Protection cover

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

G050891

4. Disconnect the tray unit connectors.

J/P601: Tray unit A
J/P600: Tray unit B
5. Remove the tray units.
2. Lift it up.
Tray unit B

1. Press the lever.

Tray unit A
G050892

6. Remove the probe nut and the probe.

BF-B BF-A

Probe nut

Probe

O-ring

Probe holder
STB CD-C CD-B CD-A
G050893

7. Assemble the new probe, then tighten the probe nut securely using the probe replacing jig.
IMPORTANT
• The O-ring is attached to the new probe.
• The probe (including the O-ring) should be used properly for each solution.

27820 1/2
 27820
Replenishment package unit

For CD-C solution, use the whole black probe and the O-ring marked with a white dot.
For other solutions, use the probe which the resin part is brown and the O-ring marked with a green dot.
• The probe replacing jig is a service tool. See the Service personnel tool list.
☞ 80310
8. Reassemble the parts.

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

27820 2/2
 27830
Replenishment package unit

Adjusting the sensitivity of the replenisher solution sensor [SM]

z Procedure

1. Clean the LED and detection sections of the replenishment solution sensor.
Sensor arrangement
Trays

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

Replenishment solution sensors

G085952

2. Attach the replenishment package containing the replenishment solution.

3. Set the valve chuck, then turn the handle to ON position.
4. Remove the protection cover of the SM I/O PCB. (one screw)
5. Turn the VR of each sensor on the SM I/0 PCB counterclockwise fully.
Cover

Replenishment solution Replenishment solution

package P-1 package P-2

G085953

VR Replenishment solution sensor

Counterclockwise Decreases the amount of light.
Clockwise Increases the amount of light.

27830 1/3
 27830
Replenishment package unit

6. Adjust each VR depending on each LED condition which is off.

• Replenishment solution sensor sensitivity adjustment method varies depending on the part number and VR number of the
mounted SM I/O PCB.
Details about SM I/O PCB SM I/O PCB part number
Chemical VR No. LED No. J391191, J390330 J391378
CD-A VR1 LED1 ☞ Adjustment ☞ Adjustment
CD-B VR2 LED2 procedure 1 procedure 2
CD-C VR3 LED3

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

STB VR4 LED4
BF-A VR5 LED5
BF-B VR6 LED6 ☞ Adjustment
procedure 1

z VR adjustment procedure of SM I/O PCB

Adjustment procedure 1 Adjustment procedure 2
• J391191, J390330 (adjustment method for VR1 to VR6)
• J391378 (adjustment method for VR6) • J391378 (adjustment method for VR1 to VR5)
Adjusting procedure Adjusting procedure
1. Adjust each VR depending on each LED condition which is 1. Adjust each VR depending on each LED condition which is
off. off.
1. If turning the VR clockwise less than twice from the 1. If turning the VR clockwise less than one-half from the
leftmost position turns LED on, carry out ☞ If LED turns leftmost position turns LED on, carry out ☞ It LED turns
on by turning the VR less than twice:. on by turning the VR less than one-half:.
2. If turning VR clockwise twice or more from the left most 2. If turning clockwise the VR one-half or more from the left
position turns LED on, carry out ☞ If LED turns on by most position turns LED on, carry out ☞ If LED turns on
turning the VR twice or more:. by turning the VR one-half:.
If LED turns on by turning the VR less than twice: It LED turns on by turning the VR less than one-half:
1. If turning the VR of each replenishment solution sensor 1. If turning the VR of each replenishment solution sensor
clockwise less than twice from the leftmost position turns on clockwise less than one-half from the leftmost position turns
LED, return the VR to the leftmost position, and turn it on the LED, return the VR to the leftmost position, then turn it
clockwise three times. clockwise twice.
IMPORTANT IMPORTANT
• This includes the case when LED turns on while the • This includes the case when LED turns on while the
VR is at the leftmost position. VR is at the leftmost position.
2. Reassemble the parts as they were. 2. Reassemble the parts as they were.

27830 2/3
 27830
Replenishment package unit

Adjustment procedure 1 Adjustment procedure 2

• J391191, J390330 (adjustment method for VR1 to VR6)
• J391378 (adjustment method for VR6) • J391378 (adjustment method for VR1 to VR5)
If LED turns on by turning the VR twice or more: If LED turns on by turning the VR one-half:
1. While counting the rotation number of the VR of each 1. While counting the rotation number of the VR of each
replenishment solution sensor, turn the VR clockwise slowly replenishment solution sensor, turn the VR clockwise slowly
and stop it at the position when LED turns on. and stop it at the position when LED turns on.
IMPORTANT IMPORTANT
• If the VR is turned too far clockwise, turn it • If the VR is turned too far clockwise, turn it

2. Replacement and adjustment of parts

counterclockwise to the position where the LED counterclockwise to the position where the LED
goes off. Then turn it clockwise again until the LED goes off. Then turn it clockwise again until the LED
lights up. lights up.
2. Under the condition in Step 1, turn each VR of the 2. Under the condition in Step 1, turn each VR of the
replenishment solution sensor clockwise 1 turn to the right. replenishment solution sensor clockwise half a turn to the
3. Replace the replenishment solution sensor to adjust its right.
sensitivity if total number of VR rotations of each sensor 3. Replace the replenishment solution sensor to adjust its
exceeds 11 turns in Step 1 and Step 2. sensitivity if total number of VR rotations of each sensor
NOTE exceeds 11 turns in Step 1 and Step 2.
• The maximum number of VR rotations for each NOTE
replenishment solution sensor is 13. • The maximum number of VR rotations for each
• When the float in the replenishment package blocks off replenishment solution sensor is 13.
the replenishment solution sensor, the LED goes off. • When the float in the replenishment package blocks off
the replenishment solution sensor, the LED goes off.
4. Reassemble the parts as they were.
4. Reassemble the parts as they were.

Floats Replenishment
solution

Replenishment package

Replenishment solution sensor

(detection)

Replenishment
Probe
solution
Replenishment solution sensor
(LED)
G050897

27830 3/3
 3000

3. Mode

Password ............................................................................................................................. 30500

Password ............................................................................................................................................................30500
Passwords (DLS specification) ..........................................................................................................................30600
QSS mode structure chart (QSS specification) ................................................................... 31000
Mode structure table ..........................................................................................................................................31000
DLS mode structure chart .................................................................................................... 32000
DLS mode structure chart ..................................................................................................................................32000
QSS mode structure chart (Order Display) ........................................................................................................32010
QSS mode structure chart ................................................................................................... 32020

3 Mode
QSS mode structure chart (Menu display) ........................................................................................................32020
Setup ................................................................................................................................... 32510
Paper Specification Registration/Setup .............................................................................................................32510
Magazine Registration/Setup .............................................................................................................................32520
Monitor setup .....................................................................................................................................................32530
Monitor Setup [Stand Alone Scanner] ...............................................................................................................32540
Data Initialization ..............................................................................................................................................32550
Data Initialization [Stand Alone Scanner] .........................................................................................................32560
Data Initialization [Stand Alone Printer] ...........................................................................................................32561
Processor Settings .............................................................................................................. 33002
Standard Replenishment Amount Setting[F] .....................................................................................................33002
Pump Output Amount Setting[F] ......................................................................................................................33003
Pump Output Amount Setting [N] [SM] ...........................................................................................................33003
Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount Setting[F] ..............................................................................................33004
Total Replenishment Amount Display[F] .........................................................................................................33030
Total Replenishment Amount Display [N] ........................................................................................................33040
Total Replenishment Amount Display [SM] .....................................................................................................33040
Correction Setting [SM] ....................................................................................................................................33060
Counter [J] .........................................................................................................................................................33070
Processor Standard Setting ................................................................................................. 33500
Thermosensor Calibration [F] [N] [SM] [J] ......................................................................................................33500
Cleaning Water Amount Setting[F] ...................................................................................................................33501
Cleaning Water Amount Setting [N] [SM] [J] ..................................................................................................33501
Drive Motor Revolution Count Setting .............................................................................................................33502
Display Processor Working Information[F] ......................................................................................................33503
Processor Set Up Mode[F] ................................................................................................................................33504
Refilling Water Amount Setting [N] .................................................................................................................33510
Refilling Water Amount Setting [SM] ..............................................................................................................33510
Basic Kit Setting [J] ...........................................................................................................................................33520
Kit Correction [J] ...............................................................................................................................................33530
Refilling Water Amount Setting [J] ...................................................................................................................33540
Pump Output Amount Setting [J] ......................................................................................................................33550
Operation Check [J] ...........................................................................................................................................33560
Manual Kit Change [J] ......................................................................................................................................33570
Dryer Lane Select Operation Setting [F] [N] [SM] [J] ......................................................................................33590

3000 1/3
 3000

Maintenance ........................................................................................................................ 35100

Colorimeter Unit Adjustment ............................................................................................................................35100
Input Check (Input Section) ..............................................................................................................................35200
Input Check (Printer) .........................................................................................................................................35210
Input Check (Processor) [F] ..............................................................................................................................35220
Input Check (Processor) [N] ..............................................................................................................................35220
Input Check (Processor) [SM] ...........................................................................................................................35220
Input Check (Processor) [J] ...............................................................................................................................35220
Output Check (Input Section) ............................................................................................................................35300
Output Check (Printer) ......................................................................................................................................35310
Output Check (Processor) [F] ............................................................................................................................35320
Output Check (Processor) [N] ...........................................................................................................................35320

3 Mode
Output Check (Processor) [SM] ........................................................................................................................35320
Output Check (Processor) [J] ............................................................................................................................35320
Reading and Writing Data .................................................................................................................................35400
Reading and Writing Data [Stand Alone Scanner] ............................................................................................35410
Procedures for Backup & Restore Software ......................................................................................................35450
System Version Check .......................................................................................................................................35500
System upgrade for each control PCB (CPU) ...................................................................................................35600
Operation Information .......................................................................................................................................35700
Machine Specification .......................................................................................................................................35800
Self-diagnostic ...................................................................................................................................................35920
Media Drive Self-diagnostic ..............................................................................................................................35920
Printer Mechanical Adjustment ............................................................................................ 36000
Paper sensor adjustment ....................................................................................................................................36000
Paper Guide Width Correction ..........................................................................................................................36005
Paper Advance Unit Correction .........................................................................................................................36010
Exposure Magnification Correction ..................................................................................................................36020
Exposure Position Adjustment ..........................................................................................................................36030
Exposure Magnification Fine Adjustment .........................................................................................................36040
Paper Advance Length Correction ....................................................................................................................36050
Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction ...................................................................................................................36060
Paper Guide Width Correction (for each Paper Width) ....................................................................................36065
Exposure Center Correction ..............................................................................................................................36070
Exposure Advance Adjustment .........................................................................................................................36080
Paper pressure operation correction ..................................................................................................................36090
WB width correction .........................................................................................................................................36100
Compact Archive Unit Adjustment ....................................................................................... 36700
Compact Archive Unit Initialization .................................................................................................................36700
Compact Archive Unit Capacity Check ............................................................................................................36710
Laser Unit Adjustment ......................................................................................................... 37300
Laser Unit Adjustment .......................................................................................................................................37300
Operation Information .......................................................................................................... 37500
Saving log data ..................................................................................................................................................37500
Saving the memory data ....................................................................................................................................37510
Saving the memory data and Logdata at the same time ....................................................................................37520
System Version Check on No. 6901 ARCNET communication error ..............................................................37530
Saving the DLS log file .....................................................................................................................................37600

3000 2/3
 3000

Flatbed execution display .................................................................................................... 38000

Flatbed execution display ..................................................................................................................................38000

3 Mode

3000 3/3
 30500 Password

Password

Password

z Explanation

z Service personnel password

1. Press the key to select Menu.

2. Insert the service personnel floppy disk into the floppy disk drive on the Menu display.
3. Press the key, and then press the key.
4. Enter the password (2260).
When it is in service mode, Service Mode is displayed on each display.
NOTE

3. Mode
• After password input display appears, enter the password within 10 seconds.
If the display disappears while you are entering the password, start it over again.

IMPORTANT
• Do not eject the floppy disk while the LED of the floppy disk drive is ON. (It may damage the floppy disk drive or the
floppy disk.)

z Deleting the service personnel password

1. Press the key to select Menu.

2. Press the key, and then press the key.
3. Enter the password except for 2260.
When it is in service mode, Service Mode is displayed on each display.

z Deleting the owner password

1. Press the key to select Menu.

2. Press the key while the key is pressed on the Menu display to bring up the Password
Deletion display.
3. Enter 0 six times slowly, and then press the key.
NOTE
• After deleting the password, it is set to the initial value (0123).
The Password Deletion display does not appear if the password is not registered.
The Password Deletion display is appeared only when deleting the password which has been registered.

30500 1/1
 30600
Password

Passwords (DLS specification)

z Explanation
DLS mode and QSS mode need their own service personnel passwords respectively.
For DLS mode, the password is used to proceed to the key operator mode. For QSS mode, the password makes it possible to display
the service personnel mode and perform each setting.
NOTE
• Quitting the application is performed at the close down checks in the QSS mode.

z Service personnel password in DLS mode

1. Select Service Operator from the Administration menu and press OK.
The password input display appears.

3. Mode
S072403

2. Enter the password (2260) and press OK.

Key Operator mode appears.
NOTE
• Service personnel floppy disk is unnecessary.

z Proceeding to the QSS mode

1. Select QSS Menu in the Administration menu.

It proceeds to the QSS mode.
NOTE
• The DLS mode can proceed to the QSS Menu from either Operator mode or Key Operator mode.

IMPORTANT
• To display the Windows taskbar, it is necessary to proceed to the QSS mode from Key Operator mode.

z Service personnel password in the QSS mode

1. Press the key to select Menu.

2. Insert the service personnel floppy disk into the floppy disk drive on the Menu display.
3. Press the key, and then press the key.
4. Enter the password (2260).
When it is in service mode, Service Mode is displayed on each display.
NOTE
• After password input display appears, enter the password within 10 seconds.
If the display disappears while you are entering the password, start it over again.

30600 1/2
 30600
Password

IMPORTANT
• Do not eject the floppy disk while the LED of the floppy disk drive is ON. (It may damage the floppy disk drive or the
floppy disk.)

z Deleting the service personnel password

1. Press the key to select Menu.

2. Press the key, and then press the key.
3. Enter the password except for 2260.
When it is in service mode, Service Mode is displayed on each display.

z Deleting the owner password

3. Mode
1. Press the key to select Menu.
2. Press the key while the key is pressed on the Menu display to bring up the Password
Deletion display.
3. Enter 0 six times slowly, and then press the key.
NOTE
• After deleting the password, it is set to the initial value (0123).
The Password Deletion display does not appear if the password is not registered.
The Password Deletion display is appeared only when deleting the password which has been registered.

z Proceeding to the DLS mode

1. Select NO in the initial menu display of QSS mode or PASS in the menu display.
It proceeds to the DLS mode.

30600 2/2
 31000 QSS mode structure chart (QSS specification)

QSS mode structure chart (QSS specification)

Mode structure table

• SP1: Entering the service personnel password (2260) enables you to select a mode.
• SP2: Entering the service personnel password (2260) enables you to change data.

z Order Display
Item Reference
[F] PTBurn Interface :
Scanner Lamp ON/OFF*1
Processor Drive ON/OFF*2
Rewind Paper*2
Media Copy

3. Mode
Start Adobe Photoshop
Net Order Mode*3
Net Scan Mode [Stand-alone scanner]
Start Bravo Utility See the Bravo Service
Manual.
Remote Control Start
Noritsu-eNET Mail
Help Display

*1. For the Stand Alone Printer, this does not appear.
*2. In case of the Stand Alone Scanner, this does not appear.
*3. If a check mark is put for Order Controller as ; at Option Registration, Order Controller Mode appears.

z Menu display
Item Reference
Close Down Checks
Pricing Sheet Reissue*4
Daily Totals*1*4
Daily Setup
Emulsion Number Change*3
AFC Cleaning*2
Cleaning of Arm Unit 1
Extension ☞ Extension display
*1. If pricing unit is not registered as an option, selecting this item is not available.
*2. For the Stand Alone Printer, this does not appear.
*3. In case of the Stand Alone Scanner, this does not appear.
*4. This function cannot be used in the Stand Alone Scanner or Stand Alone Printer.

31000 1/5
 31000
QSS mode structure chart (QSS specification)

z Extension display
Item Reference
Extension Setup ☞ Setup
Processor Settings*2 ☞ Processor setting*1
Operator Selections ☞ Operator Selections
DVD Writing Setting
IX Data Settings*1
Noritsu-eNET Setting (SP1) See Noritsu-eNET system
program Setting Manual.
Price Setting*3
Function and Option Registration
Password Registration
☞ Maintenance

3. Mode
Maintenance

*1. For the Stand Alone Printer, this does not appear.
*2. In case of the Stand Alone Scanner, this does not appear.
*3. This function cannot be used in the Stand Alone Scanner or Stand Alone Printer.

z Setup
Item Reference
Laser Setup*2 Paper Specification Registration/Setup ☞ 32510
Magazine Registration/Setup ☞ 32520
Paper Setup*2
Print Channel
Scanner Setup*1 See the Scanner Service
Manual.
Flatbed Scanner Setup
Master Data
Monitor Setup ☞ 32530
Monitor Setup [Stand-alone scanner] ☞ 32540
Data Initialization (SP1) ☞ 32550
Data Initialization (SP1) [Stand alone printer] ☞ 32561
Data Initialization (SP1) [Stand alone scanner] ☞ 32560
Initial Setup (SP1) *2
Create Template

*1. For the Stand Alone Printer, this does not appear.
*2. In case of the Stand Alone Scanner, this does not appear.

z Processor setting*1
Reference
☞ Processor settings [F] ☞ Processor settings [SM] ☞ Processor settings [J]
*1. In case of the Stand Alone Scanner, this does not appear.

Processor settings [F]

Item Reference
Processing Solution Temperature Setting
Standard Replenishment Amount Setting (SP2) ☞ 33002
Pump Output Amount Setting ☞ 33003
Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount Setting ☞ 33004
Quiet Process Setting

31000 2/5
 31000
QSS mode structure chart (QSS specification)

Item Reference
Total Replenishment Amount Display (SP2) ☞ 33030
Dryer Temperature Setting
Processor Standard Setting (SP1) Thermosensor Calibration ☞ 33500
Cleaning Water Amount Setting
Drive Motor Revolution Count Setting ☞ 33502
Display Processor Working Information ☞ 33503
Processor Set Up Mode ☞ 33504
Processor settings [N]
Item Reference
Processing Solution Temperature Setting

3. Mode
Standard Replenishment Amount Setting
Pump Output Amount Setting (SP1) ☞ 33003
Total Replenishment Amount Display (SP2) ☞ 33040
Dryer Temperature Setting
Processor Standard Setting (SP1) Thermosensor Calibration ☞ 33500
Refilling Water Amount Setting ☞ 33510
Cleaning Water Amount Setting ☞ 33501
Dryer Lane Select Operation Setting ☞ 33590
Drive Motor Revolution Count Setting ☞ 33502

Processor settings [SM]

Item Reference
Processing Solution Temperature Setting
Standard Replenishment Amount Setting
Pump Output Amount Setting (SP2) ☞ 33003
Total Replenishment Amount Display (SP2) ☞ 33040
Dryer Temperature Setting
Correction Setting (SP2) ☞ 33060
Processor Standard Setting (SP1) Thermosensor Calibration ☞ 33500
Refilling Water Amount Setting ☞ 33510
Cleaning Water Amount Setting ☞ 33501
Dryer Lane Select Operation Setting ☞ 33590
Drive Motor Revolution Count Setting ☞ 33502

Processor settings [J]

Item Reference
Processing Solution Temperature Setting
Status Display (Basic)
Counter (SP2) ☞ 33070
Status Display (correction)
Dryer Temperature Setting
Processor Standard Setting Thermosensor Calibration (SP1) ☞ 33500
Basic Kit Setting (SP1) ☞ 33520
Kit Correction (SP1) ☞ 33530
Refilling Water Amount Setting (SP1) ☞ 33540
Pump Output Amount Setting (SP1) ☞ 33550
Operation Check (SP1) ☞ 33560
Manual Kit Change ☞ 33570

31000 3/5
 31000
QSS mode structure chart (QSS specification)

Item Reference
Cleaning Water Amount Setting (SP1) ☞ 33570
Dryer Lane Select Operation Setting (SP1) ☞ 33590
Drive Motor Revolution Count Setting (SP1) ☞ 33502

z Operator Selections
Only the function modes which are exclusive to the service mode are explained. See the User Manuals for other modes.

Operator Selections (Processor)*1

Item Details Normal setting
Drive, Dryer Manual ON Switch Processor drive and dryer operate continuously. ON
This operates no matter if the system is printing or not.

3. Mode
Error Occurrence Selection
Replenishment Error*2 (SP1) If it is set to off, the attention message is not shown even though ON
Replenishment Package Error (SP1) the replenisher tanks run out of solutions. ON
(Only for SM specification)
Refilling Water Error*2 (SP1) If it is set to off, the attention message is not shown even though ON
the refilling water tank runs out of water.
Circulation Pump Error (SP1) If it is set to off, the error message is not shown even though the ON
circulation pumps stop.
Order Classification Section Error (SP1) If it is set to off, the attention message is not shown even though ON
the print full sensor detects paper.

*1. In case of the Stand Alone Scanner, this does not appear.
*2. Not in use for F specification.
Setting ON/OFF for errors related to replenishing or water refilling is not available.

Operator Selections (Additional)*2

Item Details Normal setting
120 AFC Diffuser (SP1) *1 The 120 AFC diffuser can be set to "Used" or "Not in use". Not in use
NOTE
• For details, see the Scanner Service Manual.

*1. Normally, use the value of None.

*2. For the Stand Alone Printer, this does not appear.

z Maintenance
Item Reference
*2
Various Adjustment Film Carrier Unit Adjustment (SP1) See the Scanner Service
Manual.
Colorimeter Calibration
Colorimeter Unit Adjustment (SP1) ☞ 35100
Printer Mechanical Adjustment*3 Paper Sensor Adjustment ☞ 36000
Paper Guide Width Correction (SP1) *1 ☞ 36005
Paper Advance Unit Correction (SP1) ☞ 36010
Exposure Magnification Correction (SP1) ☞ 36020
Exposure Position Adjustment (SP1) ☞ 36030
Exposure Magnification Fine Adjustment ☞ 36040
(SP1)
Paper Advance Length Correction (SP1) ☞ 36050
Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction ☞ 36060
Paper Guide Width Adjustment (for each ☞ 36065
Paper Width)*1

31000 4/5
 31000
QSS mode structure chart (QSS specification)

Item Reference
Exposure Center Correction ☞ 36070
Exposure Advance Adjustment (SP1) ☞ 36080
Paper Pressure Operation Correction ☞ 36090
WB Width Correction ☞ 36100
Scanner Unit Adjustment (SP1) *2 Swing and Tilt/Light Axis Adjustment See the Scanner Service
Light Source Registration Manual.
Focus Adjustment
Light Source Update
Scanner Sensitivity Check
Laser Unit Adjustment (SP2) *3 ☞ 37300
Compact Archive Unit Adjustment*4 Compact Archive Unit Initialization ☞ 36700
☞ 36710

3. Mode
Compact Archive Unit Capacity Check
Process Control Strip*3
Input Check Input Section ☞ 35200
Printer*3
☞ 35210
Processor*3 ☞ 35220
Output Check Input Section ☞ 35300
Printer*3 ☞ 35310
Processor*3 ☞ 35320
Reading and Writing Data All Data ☞ 35400
Service Data (SP1)
Reading and Writing Data [Stand-alone scanner] All Data ☞ 35410
Service Data (SP1)
System Version Check Accessories ☞ 35500
Profile Data (SP1)
DLL/Driver (SP1)
Software Upgrade Software Upgrade (CD-ROM) ☞ 35600
Software Upgrade (NET) (SP1)
Software Upgrade (HD) (SP1)
Operation Information Error Record ☞ 35700
Daily Setup History*3
Laser Operation Record (SP1) *3
Machine Specification (SP2) ☞ 35800
Self-diagnostic (SP1) Image Path Check ☞ 35920
Media Drive Self-diagnostic
*1. Displayed only when the Quad Magazine Unit is selected in the Option Registration
*2. For the Stand Alone Printer, this does not appear.
*3. In case of the Stand Alone Scanner, this does not appear.
*4. This function cannot be used in the Stand Alone Printer.

31000 5/5
 32000 DLS mode structure chart

DLS mode structure chart

DLS mode structure chart

3. Mode
S072402

Operator display
Item Reference
Order Picture Package
Custom
Preview Density & Color
Filter
Lighting Correction
Zoom & Crop
Red Eye Correction
Dust & Scratch
Borders & Text
Order Status WIP
Archive
System Status Printer ☞ Printer Status display
Scanner
Media Input
Media Output
System
Output Metering
Help
Manage Operator
Key Operator
Service Operator
QSS Menu

32000 1/3
 32000
DLS mode structure chart

3. Mode
S072405

Key Operator display

Item Reference
System Setup Preview Image Setup
Index Print Setup
Disk Drive Management
Print Management
System Defaults
Picture Package Setup
System Diagnostics
KODAK Picture Center Online
Network Management
Device Setup Scanner
Order Status Same as Operator display
System Status

32000 2/3
 32000
DLS mode structure chart

3. Mode
S072406

Printer Status display

Item Reference
Replenishment On/Off
Paper Remaining
Version Information

32000 3/3
 32010
DLS mode structure chart

QSS mode structure chart (Order Display)

3. Mode
S072404

Order Display
Item Reference
F PTBurn Interface : ☞ Menu display
Scanner Lamp ON/OFF
Processor Drive ON/OFF
Rewind Paper
Help Display

32010 1/1
 32020 QSS mode structure chart

QSS mode structure chart

QSS mode structure chart (Menu display)

• SP1: Entering the service personnel password (2260) enables you to select a mode.
• SP2: Entering the service personnel password (2260) enables you to change data.

z Menu display
Item Reference
Close Down Checks*1
Daily Totals
Daily Setup
Emulsion Number Change
AFC Cleaning

3. Mode
Cleaning of Arm Unit 1
Extension ☞ Extension display
*1. When the service personnel password (2260) has been entered, the value of Total Counter in Daily Totals can be reset.

z Extension display
Item Reference
Extension Setup ☞ Setup
Processor Settings ☞ Processor Settings
Operator Selections ☞ Operator Selections
Function and Option Registration
Password Registration
Maintenance ☞ Maintenance

z Setup
Item Reference
Laser Setup Paper Specification Registration/Setup ☞ 32510
Magazine Registration/Setup ☞ 32520
Scanner Setup See the Scanner Service
Manual.
Master Data
Data Initialization (SP1) ☞ 32550
Initial Setup (SP1)

z Processor Settings
Reference
☞ Processor settings [N] ☞ Processor settings [SM]

Processor settings [N]

Item Reference
Processing Solution Temperature Setting
Standard Replenishment Amount Setting
Pump Output Amount Setting (SP1) ☞ 33003
Total Replenishment Amount Display (SP2) ☞ 33040
Dryer Temperature Setting

32020 1/3
 32020
QSS mode structure chart

Item Reference
Processor Standard Setting (SP1) Thermosensor Calibration ☞ 33500
Refilling Water Amount Setting ☞ 33510
Cleaning Water Amount Setting ☞ 33501
Dryer Lane Select Operation Setting ☞ 33590
Drive Motor Revolution Count Setting ☞ 33502
Processor settings [SM]
Item Reference
Processing Solution Temperature Setting
Standard Replenishment Amount Setting
Pump Output Amount Setting (SP2) ☞ 33003
☞ 33040

3. Mode
Total Replenishment Amount Display (SP2)
Dryer Temperature Setting
Correction Setting (SP2) ☞ 33060
Processor Standard Setting (SP1) Thermosensor Calibration ☞ 33500
Refilling Water Amount Setting ☞ 33510
Cleaning Water Amount Setting ☞ 33501
Dryer Lane Select Operation Setting ☞ 33590
Drive Motor Revolution Count Setting ☞ 33502

z Operator Selections
Only the function modes which are exclusive to the service mode are explained. See the User Manuals for other modes.

Operator Selections (Processor)

Item Details Normal setting
Drive, Dryer Manual ON Switch Processor drive and dryer operate continuously. ON
This operates no matter if the system is printing or not.
Error Occurrence Selection
Replenishment Error (SP1) If it is set to off, the attention message is not shown even though ON
Replenishment Package Error (SP1) the replenisher tanks run out of solutions. ON
(Only for SM specification)
Refilling Water Error (SP1) If it is set to off, the attention message is not shown even though ON
the refilling water tank runs out of water.
Circulation Pump Error (SP1) If it is set to off, the error message is not shown even though the ON
circulation pumps stop.
Order Classification Section Error (SP1) If it is set to off, the attention message is not shown even though ON
the print full sensor detects paper.

z Maintenance
Item Reference
Various Adjustment Film Carrier Unit Adjustment See the Scanner Service
Manual.
Colorimeter Calibration
Colorimeter Unit Adjustment (SP1) ☞ 35100
Printer Mechanical Adjustment Paper Sensor Adjustment ☞ 36000
Paper Advance Unit Correction (SP1) ☞ 36010
Exposure Magnification Correction (SP1) ☞ 36020
Exposure Position Adjustment (SP1) ☞ 36030

32020 2/3
 32020
QSS mode structure chart

Item Reference
Exposure Magnification Fine Adjustment ☞ 36040
(SP1)
Paper Advance Length Correction (SP1) ☞ 36050
Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction ☞ 36060
Exposure Center Correction ☞ 36070
Exposure Advance Adjustment (SP1) ☞ 36080
Paper Pressure Operation Correction ☞ 36090
WB Width Correction ☞ 36100
Scanner Unit Adjustment (SP1) Swing and Tilt/Light Axis Adjustment See the Scanner Service
Light Source Registration Manual.
Focus Adjustment
Light Source Update

3. Mode
Laser Unit Adjustment (SP2) ☞ 37300
Process Control Strip
Input Check Input Section ☞ 35200
Printer ☞ 35210
Processor ☞ 35220
Output Check Input Section ☞ 35300
Printer ☞ 35310
Processor ☞ 35320
Reading and Writing Data All Data ☞ 35400
Service Data (SP1)
System Version Check Accessories ☞ 35500
Profile Data (SP1)
DLL/Driver (SP1)
Software Upgrade Software Upgrade (CD-ROM) ☞ 35600
Software Upgrade (HD) (SP1)
Operation Information Error Record ☞ 35700
Laser Operation Record (SP1)
Machine Specification (SP2) ☞ 35800
Self-diagnostic (SP1) Image Path Check ☞ 35920
Media Drive Self-diagnostic

32020 3/3
 32510 Setup

Setup

Paper Specification Registration/Setup

Bringing up the display

PTBurn Interface :: 2260 → Extension → Setup → Laser Setup → Paper Specification Registration/Setup

3. Mode
S1028-00-SM00

z Explanation
A paper type for setup is registered and setup is carried out.

z Paper Type Selection/Paper Magazine Selection

A maximum of three available paper types can be set.

z Paper Magazine Selection

Select the paper magazine used for setup of each paper type.
127 (1) or the like OK The magazine for which paper specification is registered
127 (1) or the like − The magazine which is registered and for which paper specification is not
registered
# # # (#) − The magazine which is not registered

z Paper Specification Registration/Setup

Carry out System Exposure Light Intensity Setting, Paper Gamma Setup, Black Balance Adjustment, and Printer Profile
Calibration for each paper type.
Test prints are one sheet of 22-step setup print for setting the exposure light intensity , one sheet of 22-step setup print for adjusting the
paper gamma setup, one sheet of 22-step setup print for adjusting the black balance, and three sheets of test prints for the printer profile
calibration.
NOTE
• The test prints for the paper gamma setup are printed 3 times at most.

32510 1/5
 32510
Setup

System Exposure Light Intensity Setting/Paper gamma setup 1 Black Balance Adjustment

Each unexposed part length: 12 mm

Each unexposed part length: 12 mm

Each step length: 12 mm

Each step length: 12 mm

22 step setup print: 320 mm

3. Mode
22 step setup print: 320 mm

Printer Profile Calibration

Each unexposed part length: 12 mm

Each step length: 12 mm

20-step, 22-step setup prints: 320 mm

z Functions

z Profile Chart Output

Make five test prints for creating the printer profile.
NOTE
• The service personnel password (2260) is required to display this.

NOTE
• There is no adjustment for outputting the printer profile.
• The printer profile need to be created for each paper type.

32510 2/5
 32510
Setup

z Printer Profile Calibration

Calibrate the printer profile.
Make test prints for calibrating the printer profile and calibrate them with the colorimeter unit.
IMPORTANT
• If the profile data installed and recovery carried out, surely carry out Printer Profile Calibration. If not, the printer
profile data does not become valid.
Make two sheets of 22-step setup prints and one sheet of 20-step test print.
Profile Chart Output Printer Profile Calibration

9.5 mm

89 mm

3. Mode
9.5 mm
9.5 mm
89 mm

9.5 mm
9.5 mm
89 mm

9.5 mm
9.5 mm

89 mm

9.5 mm
14.5 mm

89 mm

14.5 mm

z Print Check
When a problem occurs, sample images 1 to 7 are printed. Then, the system can be checked using the sample prints.
Sample 1: Print for CMS and gamma checks
A print of sample image with the CMS setting ON.
Sample 2: Print for CMS and gamma checks
A print of sample image with the CMS setting OFF
Sample 3: Letter confirmation print
A print of letter image.
Sample 4: Print for banding and laser checks
The print contains three kind of gray colors.
NOTE
• The service personnel password (2260) is required to display this.
Sample 5: Print for banding and laser checks
A solid gray print.

32510 3/5
 32510
Setup

NOTE
• The service personnel password (2260) is required to display this.
Sample 6: Print for laser check
A print of test chart.
NOTE
• The service personnel password (2260) is required to display this.
Sample 7: Print for laser check
A print of test chart.
NOTE
• The service personnel password (2260) is required to display this.

z Black Balance Adjustment

3. Mode
Adjust each R,G and B color automatically so as to show the black letters as black.
The test print is one sheet of gray 22-step setup print.

z Black Balance Adjustment (Manual)

Adjust each R,G and B color manually so as to show the black letters as black.
NOTE
• After the initial setup or Paper Specification Registration/Setup, Black Balance Adjustment will be automatically carried out. To
carry out the fine adjustment just a little more, do it by Black Balance Adjustment (Manual).
System Exposure Light Intensity Setting/Paper gamma setup Black Balance Adjustment
1

Select the most appropriate color (black).

z Setup Switch
When the setup switch is on, high density section is calculated and setup to be the most appropriate Dmax.
When the setup switch is off, setup within the range of the colorimeter specification (Dmax: 2.2 D or less).
IMPORTANT
• If you change the setup switch, it is necessary to carry out the operation from the initial setup again.
• Normally, the setup switch is ON for use.

32510 4/5
 32510
Setup

NOTE
• The service personnel password (2260) is required to display this.

3. Mode

32510 5/5
 32520
Setup

Magazine Registration/Setup

Bringing up the display

PTBurn Interface : → Extension → Setup → Laser Setup → Magazine Registration/Setup

3. Mode
S1035-00-SM00

z Explanation
The paper magazine to be used is registered and the paper gamma setup is carried out.
Setup OK The magazine is registered for setup and its paper specification is also registered.
Setup − The magazine is registered for setup and its paper specification is not registered.
Magazine Registration OK The magazine not for setup is registered and the magazine registration setup is
completed.
Magazine Registration − The magazine not for setup is registered and the magazine registration setup is not
completed.
− The magazine not for setup is not registered and the magazine registration setup is not
completed.

z Magazine Registration/Setup (Paper width: 82.5 to 305 mm) (Paper surface: 1 to 4)

You can resister and setup the paper magazine for each paper type to be used. Also setup status can be checked.
The test print is one sheet of gray 22-step setup print.

Each unexposed part length: 12 mm

Each step length: 12 mm

22 step setup print: 320 mm

G068485

IMPORTANT
• To carry out Magazine Registration/Setup, Paper Specification Registration/Setup of the paper type needs to be
completed.

32520 1/2
 32520
Setup

NOTE
• The test prints are printed 3 times at most.

z Functions

z Paper Specification Registration/Setup

Paper Specification Registration/Setup is linked, and Paper Specification Registration/Setup can be carried out.
☞ 32510

3. Mode

32520 2/2
 32530
Setup

Monitor setup

Bringing up the display

PTBurn Interface : → Extension → Setup → Monitor Setup

3. Mode
S1030-00-SM00

z Explanation
Basic adjustments of the display monitor can be performed. In addition, the displayed color can be adjusted according to the color of
prints. Also display monitor color can be adjusted to the print color according to the operating environment of the system.
IMPORTANT
• Before performing the monitor setup, check whether the color can be checked in the current condition. Change the
environment of the operating place as needed.

z Brightness Adjustment (CRT monitor, LCD monitor)

Perform the basic adjustment using hard keys or buttons of the display monitor.
IMPORTANT
• The brightness adjustment is required according to the operating environment.

z Monitor Setup (CRT monitor, LCD monitor)

Make a test print and adjust the monitor color by visual check.

z Adjustment procedure (CRT monitor, LCD monitor)

Follow the procedure below.

Working place environment check

Brightness adjustment

Monitor setup

z Brightness Adjustment (CRT monitor)

Perform the following adjustments using hard keys or buttons of the display monitor.

32530 1/2
 32530
Setup

1. Set color temperature to the value displayed on the monitor with the hard keys.
2. Maximize the contrast.
3. Adjust the brightness so that the difference of the density between the BGR digital values 0, 0, 0 and
10,10,10 can barely be recognized.

z Brightness Adjustment (LCD monitor)

Perform the following adjustments using hard keys or buttons of the display monitor.
NOTE
• For monitor setup procedure for LCD monitor, see Option Manual.

z Monitor Setup

1. Make a test print.

3. Mode
NOTE
• If Only Color Adjustment Pattern is selected, one test print is made. If All is selected, seven test prints are made.
2. Adjust the monitor color to match the test print following the instructions on the display.
Display

Color pallet Image selection section

Color pallet
Compare the sample image on the display with the test print. You can adjust the monitor color by clicking the color pallet.
Image selection section
Compare the sample image on the display with the test print. You can adjust the monitor color by selecting a sample image.
REPT: Data Initialization button
The monitor calibration data is initialized.
N: Confirmation button
Images that is adjusted and not adjusted are displayed.
ORDER: Save Profile button
The monitor profile data to which the configured settings are applied is made, and data is overwritten.
D: Detail button
The Detail Setting display is shown and the selected image can be adjusted in detail.
3. After all adjustments are finished, select Save Profile. A new monitor profile is made and the data is
overwritten.

32530 2/2
 32540
Setup

Monitor Setup [Stand Alone Scanner]

Bringing up the display

PTBurn Interface : → Extension → Setup → Monitor Setup

3. Mode
S1030-00-SM00

z Explanation
Basic adjustments of the display monitor can be performed. In addition, the displayed color can be adjusted according to the color of
prints. Also display monitor color can be adjusted according to the operating environment of the machine.
IMPORTANT
• Before performing the monitor setup, check whether the color can be checked in the current condition. Change the
environment of the operating place as needed.

z Brightness Adjustment (CRT monitor, LCD monitor)

Perform the basic adjustment using hard keys or buttons of the display monitor.
IMPORTANT
• The brightness adjustment is required according to the operating environment.

z Monitor Setup (CRT monitor, LCD monitor)

Color can be visually adjusted.
IMPORTANT
• In case of the Stand Alone Scanner, any sample print cannot be made. Therefore, the color matching cannot be
performed. The sample image can be adjusted so that it seems as standard color.

z Adjustment procedure (CRT monitor, LCD monitor)

Follow the procedure below.

Working place environment check

Brightness adjustment

Monitor setup

32540 1/3
 32540
Setup

z Brightness Adjustment (CRT monitor)

Perform the following adjustments using hard keys or buttons of the display monitor.
1. Set color temperature to the value displayed on the monitor with the hard keys.
2. Maximize the contrast.
3. Adjust the brightness so that the difference of the density between the BGR digital values 0, 0, 0 and
10,10,10 can barely be recognized.

z Brightness Adjustment (LCD monitor)

Perform the following adjustments using hard keys or buttons of the display monitor.
NOTE
• For monitor setup procedure for LCD monitor, refer to Option Manual → LCD monitor unit → Setup Manual.

3. Mode
z Monitor Setup

1. Make a test print.

NOTE
• In case of the Stand Alone Scanner, any sample print cannot be made. Click PASS:> Next.
2. According to the instructions on the display, perform the color adjustment so that the color of sample
image on the display monitor seems to be the standard color.
Display

Color pallet
Image selection section

Color pallet
By selecting the color pallet with the mouse, you can adjust the monitor color so that the sample image on the monitor seems to
be the standard color.
Image selection section
By selecting a sample image, you can adjust the monitor color so that the sample image on the monitor seems to be the standard
color.
REPT: Data Initialization button
The monitor calibration data is initialized.
N: Confirmation button
Images that is adjusted and not adjusted are displayed.

32540 2/3
 32540
Setup

ORDER: Save Profile button

The monitor profile data to which the configured settings are applied is made, and data is overwritten.
D: Detail button
The Detail Setting display is shown and the selected image can be adjusted in detail.
3. After all adjustments are finished, select Save Profile. A new monitor profile is made and the data is
overwritten.

3. Mode

32540 3/3
 32550
Setup

Data Initialization

Bringing up the display

PTBurn Interface :: 2260 → Extension → Setup → Data Initialization

3. Mode
S1022-00-SM00

z Explanation
Data stored on the hard disk of the PC can be initialized.
IMPORTANT
• Before initializing the data, backup the data.
If the data has been initialized by mistake, the data can be restored to the original by reading out the backup floppy
disk data or the backup media. However, be sure to update the light source when reading out data from the floppy
disk.
☞ 35400
• Only for F specification, the following error messages may appear in a specific condition after initializing the data.
☞ No. 5905[F], ☞ No. 5906[F], ☞ No. 5907[F]
For details, see ☞ 57020.
• If there is a backup data of the service personal level, each data can be written individually.
• In case of the backup data of the user level, each data cannot be written individually.

Item Backup file name Mode or data to be initialized Remarks

All Data BkData0100 Main data All data indicated on the left is
initialized at a time.
BkData0120 User Setting data
[Link]
BkData0200 Main (Setup) data
BkData0205
BkData1400 NMC data
BkData1700 Correction Value related data
BkData0300 Auto Film Carrier data
BkData0400 *1 Image Processing data
BkData2700 Printer data

32550 1/4
 32550
Setup

Item Backup file name Mode or data to be initialized Remarks

BkData0900 Processor data
BkData1000 Colorimeter Unit data
BkData1100 Pricing Unit data
All Data BkData2100 Laser related data
roi_SHD.bin Correction Data for Brightness of
the Edge of Image Field
Bk0300_SCN Scanner data
BkData2900
Misreg135_1 Erasing Scratch data (S-2/S-3/S-4)
Misreg135_2*4
Misreg135_4*2*4
Misreg135_6*4

3. Mode
Misreg135_8*4
Misreg135_9
Misreg240_1
Misreg240_4
Misreg240_5*2*4
Misreg240_7*4
Misreg240_8*4
Misreg240_9
Misreg110_1
Misreg110_9
Misreg110_11*4
Misreg2B_1
MisregMMC_1*3
MisregMMC_3*4
MisregMMC_5*2*4
MisregMMC_7*4
MisregMMC_8*4
MisregMMC_9*3
MisregAMC_1*3
MisregAMC_3*4
MisregAMC_5*2*4
MisregAMC_7*4
MisregAMC_8*4
MisregAMC_9*3
MisregCROP_1
MisregMFC_1
MisregMFC_2*4
MisregMFC_4*4
MisregMFC_6*4
MisregMFC_7*4
MisregMFC_8*4
MisregMFC_9
Misreg135_1 Erasing Scratch data (S1-II)
Misreg240_1
*1. For 32SD, BKData0400 (Image Processing data) does not exist.
*2. This data is now unnecessary because of upgrading the system program on S-2 and S-3.
*3. This is unnecessary data for S-2 and S-3.
*4. This is unnecessary data for S-4.

32550 2/4
 32550
Setup

Item Backup file name Mode or data to be initialized Remarks

Main BkData0100 Machine Specification
Option Registration
Password Registration
Error Record
BkData0120 Print Channel Setting User Setting data
Operator Selections
IX Data Settings
[Link] Shortcut Key Setting
BkData0200 Master Data
Paper Temperature Correction
Key Difference Ratio Setting
Each Setup History

3. Mode
BkData0205 Laser Setup
BkData1400 NMC Setting
BkData1700 Each Slope Correction
Image Processing BKData0400 *1 Image Processing PCB Setting
Auto film carrier BkData0300 Adjustment data of AFC
Printer BkData2700 Each data of Printer
Processor BkData0900 Each data of Processor
Colorimeter BkData1000 Each data of Colorimeter
Pricing Unit BkData1100 Price setting data except the print
price setting
Basic price setting data
Total data
LASER BkData2100 Each data of Laser
Correction Data for roi_SHD.bin Correction Data for Brightness of
Brightness of the Edge of the Edge of Image Field
Image Field
Scanner Bk0300_SCN Area Registration
Light Axis Adjustment
Light Source Registration
Focus Adjustment
Parameter (negative)
BkData2900 Each data relating to D-ICE control
PCB

32550 3/4
 32550
Setup

Item Backup file name Mode or data to be initialized Remarks

Misreg135_1 Erasing Scratch data (S-2/S-3/S-4)
Misreg135_2*4
Misreg135_4*2*4
Misreg135_6*4
Misreg135_8*4
Misreg135_9
Misreg240_1
Misreg240_4
Misreg240_5*2*4
Misreg240_7*4
Misreg240_8*4

3. Mode
Misreg240_9
Misreg110_1
Misreg110_9
Misreg110_11*4
Misreg2B_1
MisregMMC_1*3
MisregMMC_3*4
Scanner MisregMMC_5*2*4 Erasing Scratch data
MisregMMC_7*4
MisregMMC_8*4
MisregMMC_9*3
MisregAMC_1*3
MisregAMC_3*4
MisregAMC_5*2*4
MisregAMC_7*4
MisregAMC_8*4
MisregAMC_9*3
MisregCROP_1
MisregMFC_1
MisregMFC_2*4
MisregMFC_4*4
MisregMFC_6*4
MisregMFC_7*4
MisregMFC_8*4
MisregMFC_9
Scanner Misreg135_1 Erasing Scratch data (S1-II)
Misreg240_1
*1. For 32SD, BKData0400 (Image Processing data) does not exist.
*2. This data is now unnecessary because of upgrading the system program on S-2 and S-3.
*3. This is unnecessary data for S-2 and S-3.
*4. This is unnecessary data for S-4.

z Data that are not initialized

Basically, all data are initialized when initialization is performed.
Some data are not initialized, which are listed below.
Data that are not initialized
Data of total counter, daily totals counter, daily sales totals, paper remaining amount, order number, archive number, total counter 2, laser
operation record

32550 4/4
 32560
Setup

Data Initialization [Stand Alone Scanner]

Bringing up the display

PTBurn Interface :: 2260 → Extension → Setup → Data Initialization

3. Mode
S1022-00-SM01

z Explanation
Data stored on the hard disk of the PC can be initialized.
IMPORTANT
• Before initializing the data, backup the data.
If the data has been initialized by mistake, the data can be restored to the original by reading out the backup floppy
disk data or the backup media. However, be sure to update the light source when reading out data from the floppy
disk.
☞ 35400
• If there is a backup data of the service personal level, each data can be written individually.
• In case of the backup data of the user level, each data cannot be written individually.

32560 1/4
 32560
Setup

Item Backup file name Mode or data to be initialized Remarks

All Data BkData0100 Main data All data indicated on the left is
initialized at a time.
BkData0120 User Setting data
[Link]
BkData0200 Main (Setup) data
BkData0205
BkData1400 NMC data
BkData1700 Correction Value related data
BkData0300 Auto Film Carrier data
BkData0400 Image Processing data
*1
BkData1100 Pricing Unit data
Bk0300_SCN Scanner data

3. Mode
BkData2900 Scanner data
Misreg135_1 Erasing Scratch data
Misreg135_2
Misreg135_4 (*1)
Misreg135_6
Misreg135_8
Misreg135_9
Misreg240_1
Misreg240_4
Misreg240_5 (*1)
Misreg240_7
Misreg240_8
Misreg240_9
Misreg110_1
Misreg110_9
Misreg110_11
Misreg2B_1
MisregMMC_3
MisregMMC_5 (*1)
MisregMMC_7
MisregMMC_8
MisregAMC_3
MisregAMC_5 (*1)
MisregAMC_7
MisregAMC_8
MisregCROP_1.Izh
MisregMFC_1.Izh
MisregMFC_2.Izh
MisregMFC_4.Izh
MisregMFC_6.Izh
MisregMFC_7.Izh
MisregMFC_8.Izh
MisregMFC_9.Izh

• (*1) This is the data which has not been used after upgrading the system program.

32560 2/4
 32560
Setup

Item Backup file name Mode or data to be initialized Remarks

Main BkData0100 Machine Specification
Option Registration
Password Registration
Error Record
BkData0120 Print Channel Setting User Setting data
Operator Selections
IX Data Settings
[Link] Shortcut Key Setting
BkData0200 Master Data
Key Difference Ratio Setting
BkData1400 NMC Setting
BkData1700 Each Slope Correction

3. Mode
Image Processing BKData0400 Image Processing PCB Setting
Auto film carrier BkData0300 Adjustment data of AFC
*1
Pricing Unit BkData1100 Price setting data except the print
price setting
Basic price setting data
Total data
Scanner Bk0300_SCN Area Registration
Light Axis Adjustment
Light Source Registration
Focus Adjustment
Parameter (negative)
BkData2900 Each data relating to D-ICE control
PCB
Misreg135_1 Erasing Scratch data
Misreg135_2
Misreg135_4 (*1)
Misreg135_6
Misreg135_8
Misreg135_9
Misreg240_1
Misreg240_4
Misreg240_5 (*1)
Misreg240_7
Misreg240_8
Misreg240_9
Misreg110_1
Misreg110_9
Misreg110_11
Misreg2B_1
MisregMMC_3
MisregMMC_5 (*1)
MisregMMC_7
MisregMMC_8
MisregAMC_3
MisregAMC_5 (*1)
MisregAMC_7
MisregAMC_8

32560 3/4
 32560
Setup

Item Backup file name Mode or data to be initialized Remarks

Scanner MisregCROP_1.Izh Erasing Scratch data
MisregMFC_1.Izh
MisregMFC_2.Izh
MisregMFC_4.Izh
MisregMFC_6.Izh
MisregMFC_7.Izh
MisregMFC_8.Izh
MisregMFC_9.Izh
• (*1) This is the data which has not been used after upgrading the system program.
*1. This function cannot be used in the Stand Alone Scanner.

z Data that are not initialized

3. Mode
Basically, all data are initialized when initialization is performed.
Some data are not initialized, which are listed below.

Data that are not initialized

Data of total counter, daily totals counter, daily sales totals, paper remaining amount, order number, archive number, total counter 2, laser
operation record

32560 4/4
 32561
Setup

Data Initialization [Stand Alone Printer]

Bringing up the display

PTBurn Interface :: 2260 → Extension → Setup → Data Initialization

3. Mode
S1022-00-SM02

z Explanation
Data stored on the hard disk of the PC can be initialized.
IMPORTANT
• Before initializing the data, backup the data.
If the data has been initialized by mistake, the data can be restored to the original by reading out the backup floppy
disk data or the backup media.
☞ 35400
• Only for F specification, the following error messages may appear in a specific condition after initializing the data.
☞ No. 5905[F], ☞ No. 5906[F], ☞ No. 5907[F]
For details, see ☞ 57020.
• If there is a backup data of the service personal level, each data can be written individually.
• In case of the backup data of the user level, each data cannot be written individually.

32561 1/3
 32561
Setup

Item Backup file name Mode or data to be initialized Remarks

All Data BkData0100 Main data All data indicated on the left is
initialized at a time.
BkData0120 User Setting data
[Link]
BkData0200 Main (Setup) data
BkData0205
BkData1400 NMC data
BkData1700 Correction Value related data
BkData0400 *2 Image Processing data
BkData2700 Printer data
BkData0900 Processor data
BkData1000 Colorimeter Unit data

3. Mode
*1
BkData1100 Pricing Unit data
BkData2100 Laser related data
roi_SHD.bin Correction Data for Brightness of
the Edge of Image Field

Item Backup file name Mode or data to be initialized Remarks

Main BkData0100 Machine Specification
Option Registration
Password Registration
Error Record
BkData0120 Print Channel Setting User Setting data
Operator Selections
IX Data Settings
[Link] Shortcut Key Setting
BkData0200 Master Data
Paper Temperature Correction
Key Difference Ratio Setting
Each Setup History
BkData0205 Laser Setup
BkData1400 NMC Setting
BkData1700 Each Slope Correction
Image Processing BKData0400 *2 Image Processing PCB Setting
Printer BkData2700 Each data of Printer
Processor BkData0900 Each data of Processor
Colorimeter BkData1000 Each data of Colorimeter
*1
Pricing Unit BkData1100 Price setting data except the print
price setting
Basic price setting data *1

Total data
LASER BkData2100 Each data of Laser
Correction Data for roi_SHD.bin Correction Data for Brightness of
Brightness of the Edge of the Edge of Image Field
Image Field

*1. This function cannot be used in the Stand Alone Printer.

*2. For 32SDPRO, BKData0400 (Image Processing data) does not exist.

z Data that are not initialized

Basically, all data are initialized when initialization is performed.

32561 2/3
 32561
Setup

Some data are not initialized, which are listed below.

Data that are not initialized

Data of total counter, daily totals counter, daily sales totals, paper remaining amount, order number, archive number, total counter 2, laser
operation record

3. Mode

32561 3/3
 33002 Processor Settings

Processor Settings

Standard Replenishment Amount Setting[F]

z Display
Bringing up the display
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Standard Replenishment Amount Setting

3. Mode
S4501-00

z Explanation
NOTE
• Enter the service personnel password (2260) to set the standard replenishment amount of P1R, P2RA and P2RB.

z Standard Replenishment Amount Setting (Input range: 0.1 to 500.0 mL/m2)

The standard replenishment amount of P1R, P2RA, P2RB and PSR can be specified on the Standard Replenishment Amount Setting.

• In the replenishment package or process specification change, change the standard replenishment amount only when the instruction
for changing the standard replenishment amount arrives from the manufacturer.
• Do not change the standard replenishment amount without the instruction from the manufacturer.

33002 1/1
 33003
Processor Settings

Pump Output Amount Setting[F]

Description for each specification

In this section, the location of information varies depending on the specification. See below for the description for each specification.
• [For N and SM specifications, refer to ☞ Pump Output Amount Setting [N] [SM].

z Display
Bringing up the display
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Pump Output Amount Setting

3. Mode
S4502-00-SM00

z Explanation

z Pump Output Amount Setting (Input range: 0.1 to 200.0 ml)

By Pump Output Amount Measurement via F: Functions, output amount of each replenisher pump is measured, and the measured
values are entered.

z F: Functions

z Pump Output Amount Measurement

Use this function to measure the output amount of each pump.
For the operation procedures, see Operator's Manual - Additional Operations - Measuring the pump output amount.
• Do not return the replenishment solution used for measuring the output amount to the replenishment tank because this amount is
subtracted from the total replenishment solution amounts.

z Manual Open
There are two functions in Manual Open: creating replenishment solution and resetting the remaining amount of the replenishment
solution.

• When restarting the process without draining the replenishment solution from P1R/P2RA/P2RB after taking countermeasures
against replenisher section errors: ☞ No. 912 [F] occurs if adding water to the replenishment tank and performing manual opening
with turning on all the (upper) and (lower) replenishment solution level sensors (ON: the state of solution filled).
At this time, the remaining amount of replenishment solution is reset.
• ☞ No. 913 [F] occurs if performing Manual Open with # # # (lower) replenishment solution level sensor on (EXCEPT FOR the
case that all the (upper) and (lower) replenishment solution level sensors of P1R/P2RA/P2RB are on, which is the state of solution
filled).
• The same process can be performed as Processor Standard Setting→Processor Set Up Mode→Create Replenishment Solution
(Manual Open).

33003 1/3
 33003
Processor Settings

z Initial Replenishment Operation (SP1)

You can remove the remaining air in the hose by operating P1R Replenisher Pump, P2RA Replenisher Pump and P2RB
Replenisher Pump for a specified time.
To cancel Initial Replenishment Operation, press NO: Cancel.
• Exhausting the air from PSR replenisher pump is performed when exhausting the air at Auto Cleaning.
• The same process can be performed as Processor Standard Setting→Processor Set Up Mode→Initial Replenisher Operation
(Replenisher Pump).

3. Mode

33003 2/3
 33003
Processor Settings

Pump Output Amount Setting [N] [SM]

z Display
Bringing up the display
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Pump Output Amount Setting
[N] specification display [SM] specification display

3. Mode
z Explanation

z Pump Output Amount Setting (input range: 0.1 to 200.0 ml)

In Pump Output Amount Setting via F: Functions, output amount of each replenisher pump is measured and compared with the set
values.

z F: Functions
• SP1: Entering the service personnel password (2260) enables you to select a mode.

z Pump Output Amount Measurement

Use this function to measure the output amount of each pump.
IMPORTANT
• When the replenisher pump is activated via the pump output amount measurement of Functions, amount remaining
is subtracted.
• Do not change the pump output amount except for when changing the pump.

z Initial Replenishment Operation (SP1)

After operating each replenisher pump for a specified time, the air remaining in the hose can be exhausted.
To stop the initial replenishment, press NO: Cancel.
IMPORTANT
• Be sure to carry out the initial replenishment operation at system installation.
• When the initial replenishment operation has been carried out if air in the hose cannot be removed, activate the pump
of the relevant hose to remove air using the pump output amount setting of Functions.

33003 3/3
 33004
Processor Settings

Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount Setting[F]

z Display
Bringing up the display
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount Setting

3. Mode
S4504-00-SM00

z Explanation

z Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount Setting (Input range: 0.1 to 200.0 ml)
Measure the output amount of Measure Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount, P1 Auto Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge
Cleaning Pump, P2 Auto Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump and PS Auto Cleaning Valve + Replenisher
Cartridge Cleaning Pump in Functions, and enter the measured values.

z Functions

z Measure Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount (Initial value:P1: 69.0 ml, P2: 70 ml, PS: 108 ml)
Use this function to measure the output amount of the cleaning water of P1/P2/PS.

• There is no problem even if the output amount difference of the cleaning water is ±20% compared with the initial value of cleaning
water of P1/P2/PS.

z Initial Replenishment Operation (SP1)

You can exhaust the air remaining in the hose by operating PSR Replenisher Pump, P1 Auto Cleaning Valve + Replenisher
Cartridge Cleaning Pump, P2 Auto Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump and PS Auto Cleaning Valve +
Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump for a specified time.
To cancel Initial Replenishment Operation, press NO: Cancel.
• The same process can be performed as Processor Standard Setting→Processor Set Up Mode→Initial Replenisher Operation
(Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump).

z Adjustment (Measure Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount)

1. Spread a cloth or the like over the processor top.

When removing the hose of automatic cleaning pipe, the water in the hose comes out. Spread a cloth from the lower
processor top cover to upper processing tank to prevent water from getting into the processing tank.

33004 1/4
 33004
Processor Settings

2. Remove the hose of automatic cleaning pipe used for measuring the output of the processing solution
at the connection part.

IMPORTANT
• Water comes out from the hose of automatic cleaning pipe. Be careful not to get in the water in the processing
tank to prevent the contamination.

Connection

3. Mode
G086879

3. Connect the measurement hose to the connection part which removed the hose at the step 2.
Measure the output amount after removing the water inside the hose completely.
IMPORTANT
• There are two types of measurement hoses; one is for P1/P2 and the other is for PS. A label is attached on
each hose. If the hose for different processing solution is used for measuring the output, water cannot be
supplied correctly.

4. Prepare the measuring container to get water from the measurement hose.
IMPORTANT
• Water comes out. Be careful not to get in the water in the processing tank to prevent the contamination.

Measurement hose
Prepare the measuring container to get water from the outlet.
G086880

5. Measure the pump output amount.

(1) Confirm that the measuring container to get water from the measurement hose is ready.
(2) Perform the output.
There are two types for performing the output.

33004 2/4
 33004
Processor Settings

When performing the output with the manual sorter switch (manual replenisher switch)
Press the manual sorter switch (manual replenisher switch).
The time of the procedure completion is shown. Wait until the time is 0.

Manual sorter switch

3. Mode
G086903

When performing the output on the display monitor

Click YES: Execute.
The time of the procedure completion is shown. Wait until the time is 0.

IMPORTANT
• When the replenishment solution does not come out from the exit of the replenishment pipe, the pipe may
contain the air. In this case, repeat the procedure of output until the replenishment solution comes out, and
dispose the replenishment solution as effluent after coming out the replenishment solution and measure the
output amount again.

6. Measure the water amount discharged to the measuring container and write down the amount.
If the pump is activated once, the output is carried out at one time. The output cannot be divided in several times. Confirm the
completion of the output and measure the output amount.

7. After measuring the output amount, dispose the water discharged to the measuring container as
effluent.

IMPORTANT
• Be sure to dispose the water discharged to the measuring container as effluent and not to put it in the
processing tank.

8. Measure the output amount three times or more on a processing solution and calculate the average
amount.

The first output amount is unstable. Measure the average amount at the measured value after second output amount.
Repeat the procedure from Step 4 to Step 7 three times or more and calculate the average amount. When measuring the
output amount of other processing solution continuously, wipe the measuring container and remove the water completely.

9. Click NO: Cancel.

The screen returns to the Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount Setting display.

10. Change the output amount measured on the Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount Setting screen
to the average amount calculated on Step 8.

11. Click YES: OK.

The output amount is registered.

12. Remove the measuring hose.

33004 3/4
 33004
Processor Settings

13. Reconnect the hose of automatic cleaning pipe.

IMPORTANT
• Fit the hoses in the cutouts so that they will not be pinched by the processor top cover when it is closed.
• Be sure to connect the appropriate hose for each processing solution hose. If the hose is connected to other
processing solution hose, the replenishment is carried out to the different processing solution tank.

3. Mode
Cutout
G086881

33004 4/4
 33030
Processor Settings

Total Replenishment Amount Display[F]

Bringing up the display

PTBurn Interface :: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Total Replenishment Amount Display

3. Mode
S4503-00-00
• Clear of Replenishment Lack Time is shown if you enter the service personnel password (2260).

z Explanation

z Total Replenishment Amount

Accumulated replenishment amount for each pump is shown.

z Replenishment Lack Time

Replenishment is stopped if the effluent tank is full or an error occurs. However, if paper is being processed at that moment, the system
can continue processing the paper. Based on the amount of the processed paper, the amount of the replenishment solution shortfall will
be accumulated as Replenishment Lack Time so that such shortfall during lack time will be replenished after the effluent is removed
or the error is cleared.

z Clear
Resets each data.

33030 1/1
 33040
Processor Settings

Total Replenishment Amount Display [N]

Description for each specification

In this section, the location of information varies depending on the specification. See below for the description for each specification.
• For SM specification, see ☞ Total Replenishment Amount Display [SM].

z Display
Bringing up the display
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Total Replenishment Amount Display

3. Mode
S4004-00-SM00

z Explanation

z Total Replenishment Amount

The total replenishment amount can be checked.

z Replenishment Lack Time

The replenishment stops when the waste solution tank is full or when the replenisher solution is empty. Replenishment Lack Time is
accumulated according to the paper amount which are processed after the replenishment is stopped. Carry out the replenishment after
the error is closed.
NOTE
• When the replenisher switch is turned off, the message is shown and the process stops after the replenishment lack time reaches
600 seconds.

z Clear
Clears the value which is accumulated.
NOTE
• The service personnel password (2260) is required to display the clear button.

33040 1/3
 33040
Processor Settings

Total Replenishment Amount Display [SM]

z Display
Bringing up the display
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Total Replenishment Amount Display

3. Mode
S4203-01-SM00

z Explanation

z Total Replenishment Amount (Input range: 0.00 to 99999.99 mL)

The total replenishment amount can be checked and set.

z Remaining (Initial value: Package Capacity) (Input range: 0.00 to Package Capacity)
When the prints have been processed, the amount discharged from the replenisher pump is subtracted from the remaining amount.
When replacing the package before the replenishment package gets completely empty, it returns to the initial value. (Initial value:
Package Capacity)

z Package Capacity
The package capacity which has been set in the Package Capacity Setting via Functions is shown.

z Functions

z Package Capacity Setting

The service personnel password (2260) is required to display this.

‹ Replenishment Alarm Value (Initial value: -5%) (Input range: -50 to +50%)
When the percentage of the replenishment remaining amount (internal calculated value) to the replenishment
package capacity became smaller than the Replenishment Alarm Value, 5708-5709 Replenishment Package
solution remaining error. occurs.
☞ No. 5708[SM]
‹ Package Capacity Setting (Input range: 0.1 to 9999.9 mL)
Set the replenishment solution amounts for the replenishment packages.

z SM Forced Replenishment Setting

The service personnel password (2260) is required to display this.

33040 2/3
 33040
Processor Settings

‹ SM Forced Replenishment Amount Setting (Initial value: See the table below.) (Input range: 0.0 to 999.9
mL)
3201
SM Forced
Replenishment Amount
CD-A 58.1
CD-B 58.1
CD-C 83.0
BF-A 41.7
BF-B 60.5
STB 30.0

3203

3. Mode
SM Forced
Replenishment Amount
CD-A 55.3
CD-B 55.3
CD-C 79.0
BF-A 41.7
BF-B 60.5
STB 30.0

This is the limit amount when carrying out forced replenishment.

When the forced replenishment amount reaches this value, each replenishment pump stops.
IMPORTANT
• Do not change it to any other value than the initial value of the forced replenishment amount.

‹ Revolution Count
The number of pump revolution when each pump operates replenishment with the value input in Forced
Replenishment Amount Setting is shown.

33040 3/3
 33060
Processor Settings

Correction Setting [SM]

Bringing up the display

Menu: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Correction Setting

3. Mode
S4205-00-SM00

z Explanation

z Correction Setting
The amount of replenish and water supply can be increased depending on the paper process amount.

z Replenishment Correction Rate

The standard replenishment amount including the water supply amount can be changed by the same rate, without changing the value
of Standard Replenishment Amount Setting.
NOTE
• The replenishment correction rate can be changed by entering the service personnel password (2260).

z Refilling Water Level 2

It switches Refilling Water Amount according to the operating environment of the system.
• Standard: It becomes the refilling water amount set in the Refilling Water Amount Setting 2.
• Low Humidity: It becomes the refilling water amount set in the Refilling Water Amount Setting 2 (Low Humidity).
• Low Processing Amount: It becomes the refilling water amount set in the Refilling Water Amount Setting 2 (Low Processing
Amount).
See ☞ 33510 Refilling Water Amount Setting [SM].

33060 1/1
 33070
Processor Settings

Counter [J]

Bringing up the display

Menu: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Counter

3. Mode
S4102-01-SM00
NOTE
• Enter the service personnel password (2260) to configure these settings.
• The service personnel password (2260) is required to display .

z Explanation

z Replenishment Counter (Input range: 0 to 999999)

The number of tablets that have been dropped can be checked and set.

z Water supply Counter (Input range: 0.0 to 9,999.9 ml)

The total water supply amount can be checked and set.

z Reservoir Count (Input range: 0 to Drop Limit/without Replenishment Limit)

The number of insufficient tables to be replenished for the amount of paper that has been processed since last tablet replenishment can
be checked and set.
If any of the following errors occurred, the tablet replenishment is to be canceled.
(Error)
5600-5602 Tablet Drum operation error.
5603-5605 A tablet has jammed.
5609-5611 Printing cannot continue without replenishment.
5612 Tablet Replenishment Elevator operation error.
(Attention)
0600-0602 The Tablet Cartridge is empty.
0605-0607 Attach the Tablet Cartridge.
0608 Attach the Tablet Replenishment Unit.
NOTE
• To reset the reservoir count, enter 0 with the key.

z Water Supply Reservoir Amount

The insufficient water supply amount for the amount of paper that has been processed since last water supply can be checked and set.
Water supply amount is accumulated every time when printing is processed.
If any of the following errors occurred, the water supply is to be canceled.
NOTE
• Water supply reservoir amount is display only. You cannot input any value.

33070 1/2
 33070
Processor Settings

(Attention)
0603 Add water to the Water Supply Tank.
0604 Add water to the SW/DW Tank.
0610 Empty the Effluent Tank.

z Kit Remains

3. Mode
A B C D E F G H

S4102-01-SM00

Symbol Explanation
A Processing solution
B The number of the remaining cartridges per kit
C The number of the cartridges per kit
D The number of remaining tablets per cartridge
E The number of tablets per cartridge
F The number of remaining tablets per kit is shown or
can be changed. (Input range: 0 to G)
G The number of tablets per kit
H Based on the remaining tablets of CD, the calculated
numbers of remaining tablets that is required for BF
and STB are shown.

NOTE
• The service personnel password (2260) is required to display "H".

z Functions

z Water Supply Reservoir Amount Reset

If Water Supply Reservoir Amount Reset is carried out, the water supply reservoir amounts for CD, BF and STB is initialized.

33070 2/2
 33500 Processor Standard Setting

Processor Standard Setting

Thermosensor Calibration [F] [N] [SM] [J]

Bringing up the display

PTBurn Interface :: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Processor Standard Setting → Thermosensor Calibration

3. Mode
S3005-00-SM00

z Explanation
NOTE
• Enter the service personnel password (2260) to configure these settings.

z Measurement Value (Initial value: 0.0°C) (Input range: 10 to 52°C (Correction value: 0 to ±3°C)
Measure the temperature with a mercury thermometer and enter the measured values.

z Correction Value
After entering the measured temperature, the correction value, subtracting the displayed temperature from the measured temperature,
will be automatically entered.

z Displayed Temperature
The processing solution temperature measured by the thermosensor is displayed.

33500 1/1
 33501
Processor Standard Setting

Cleaning Water Amount Setting[F]

Description for each specification

In this section, the location of information varies depending on the specification. See below for the description for each specification.
• [For the [N], [SM] and [J]specifications, refer to ☞ Cleaning Water Amount Setting [N] [SM] [J].
Bringing up the display
PTBurn Interface :: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Processor Standard Setting → Cleaning Water Amount Setting

3. Mode
S4508-00-00

z Explanation

z P1 Cleaning Water Amount ON Setting (Initial value: 0.75) (input range: from 0.01 to 10.00 seconds)
Set the operation time of P1 Auto Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump.

z P2 Cleaning Water Amount ON Setting (Initial value: 2.61) (input range: from 0.01 to 10.00 seconds)
Set the operation time of P2 Auto Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump.

z PS Cleaning Water Amount ON Setting (Initial value: 7.60) (input range: from 0.01 to 10.00 seconds)
Set the operation time of PS Auto Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump.

z Cleaning Water Amount OFF Setting (Initial value: 3.00) (input range: from 0.01 to 100.00 seconds)
Set the stop time of the replenishment cartridge cleaning pump.

z Drive Start Setting (Initial value: 10.0) (input range: from 0.1 to 100.0 seconds)
Set the time from when the replenishment cartridge cleaning pump starts discharging until the drive motor starts.

z Drive Stop Setting (Initial value: 3.0) (input range: from 0.1 to 100.0 seconds)
Set the time from when the replenishment cartridge cleaning pump completes discharging until the drive motor stops.

z Cleaning Valve ON Wait Time (Initial value: 1.00) (input range: from 0.01 to 2.00 seconds)
Set the time from when the replenishment cartridge cleaning pump turns on until P1, P2, PS automated cleaning valves open.

33501 1/2
 33501
Processor Standard Setting

Cleaning Water Amount Setting [N] [SM] [J]

Bringing up the display

PTBurn Interface :: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Processor Standard Setting → Cleaning Water Amount Setting

3. Mode
S4009-00-SM00

z Explanation

z Cleaning Water Amount ON Setting (initial value: 14.0) (input range: from 0.1 to 99.9 seconds)
Set the operation time of the cleaning pump.

z Cleaning Water Amount OFF Setting (Initial value: 3.0) (input range: 0.1 to 99.9 seconds)
Set the stop time of the cleaning pump.

z Drive Start Setting (Initial value: 10.0) (input range: 0.1 to 99.9 seconds)
Set the time when the drive motor starts operation after the cleaning pump starts the output operation.

z Drive Stop Setting (Initial value: 3.0) (input range: 0.1 to 99.9 seconds)
Set the time when the drive motor stops operation after the cleaning pump completes the output operation.

33501 2/2
 33502
Processor Standard Setting

Drive Motor Revolution Count Setting

Bringing up the display

PTBurn Interface :: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Processor Standard Setting → Drive Motor Revolution Count Setting

3. Mode
S4012-00-SM00

z Explanation

z Drive Motor Setting Value (Standards value: PP-1213: 125, PP-1217: 216)
Displays the setting count of the drive motor revolution.

z Drive Motor Revolution Count

Displays the present count of the drive motor revolution.

z Functions

z Drive Motor Revolution Count Auto Adjustment

The count of the drive motor revolution is automatically adjusted.
NOTE
• When the drive motor has been replaced and the machine type registration of the machine specification has been changed, it is
adjusted.

33502 1/1
 33503
Processor Standard Setting

Display Processor Working Information[F]

z Display
Bringing up the display
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Processor Standard Setting → Display Processor Working Information

3. Mode
S4507-00-SM00

z Explanation

z Replenishment Solution Preparing Counts

• You can confirm Replenishment Solution Preparing Counts.

z Pump Operation Counts

• You can confirm the operation counts of each replenishment pump in 100 times.

z Processor Drive Time

• The time period of drive motor can be confirmed.

z Clear
Clears the value which is accumulated.

33503 1/1
 33504
Processor Standard Setting

Processor Set Up Mode[F]

z Display
Bringing up the display
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Processor Standard Setting → Processor Set Up Mode

3. Mode
S4509-00-SM00

z Explanation
• If air in the auto cleaning pump is not exhausted during installation, the auto cleaning pump may be damaged. Be sure to perform
Processor Set Up Mode in the above order.

z Initial Replenisher Operation (Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump)

S4509-00-SM01
• At the installation, you can exhaust the air remaining in the hose by operating PSR Replenisher Pump,P1 Auto Cleaning Valve
+ Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump, P2 Auto Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump and PS Auto
Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump for a specified time.
To cancel Initial Replenisher Operation (Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump), press NO: Cancel.
• If the air in the hose cannot be exhausted even though after performing Initial Replenisher Operation (Replenisher Cartridge
Cleaning Pump), exhaust the air by operating the pump of hose that the air remains by Measure Auto Cleaning Water Output
Amount via F: Functions from Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount Setting, or Pump Output Amount Measurement via F:
Functions from Pump Output Amount Setting.

z Create Replenishment Solution (Manual Open)

S4509-00-SM02
• There are two functions in Manual Operation: creating replenishment solution and the resetting the remaining amount of the
replenishment solution.

33504 1/2
 33504
Processor Standard Setting

z Initial Replenisher Operation (Replenisher Pump)

S4509-00-SM03
• After operating P1R Replenisher Pump, P2RA Replenisher Pump and P2RB Replenisher Pump for a specified time, the air
remaining in the hose can be exhausted.
To cancel Initial Replenisher Operation (Replenisher Pump), press NO: Cancel.

• If air cannot be exhausted from hoses after performing Initial Replenisher Operation (Replenisher Pump), activate the
appropriate pumps and remove the air inside using Functions Pump Output Amount Measurement of Pump Output Amount
Setting.

3. Mode

33504 2/2
 33510
Processor Standard Setting

Refilling Water Amount Setting [N]

Description for each specification

In this section, the location of information varies depending on the specification. See below for the description for each specification.
• For SM specification, refer to ☞ Refilling Water Amount Setting [SM].

z Display
Bringing up the display
PTBurn Interface :: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Processor Standard Setting → Refilling Water Amount Setting

3. Mode
S4008-00-SM00

z Explanation

z Process Specification
The process specification which has been registered in the machine specification is shown.
☞ 35800
z Refilling Water Amount Setting (Initial value: See the table below.) (Input range: 0.0 to 999.9 ml)
Refilling Refilling
Water Water
Amount Amount
Setting 1 Setting 2
CD-W 186.0 79.5
BF-W 185.0 56.0
STB1-W 360.0 71.4
STB2-W 139.0 71.8
STB3-W 130.0 79.4
STB4-W 202.0 71.5

The output amount of automatic refilling for each refilling water pump is set.

‹ Refilling Water Amount Setting 1

When refilling water with Refilling Water Level off, set the refilling water amount after Refilling Water Level is set
to on. (For automatic refilling water during start up checks and normal processing.)

‹ Refilling Water Amount Setting2

Set the refilling water amount with Refilling Water Level on. (For automatic refilling during start up checks.)

33510 1/3
 33510
Processor Standard Setting

Refilling Water Amount Setting [SM]

z Display
Bringing up the display
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Processor Standard Setting → Refilling Water Amount Setting

3. Mode
S4204-00-SM00

z Explanation

z Process Specification
The process specification which has been registered in the machine specification is shown.
☞ 35800
z Refilling Water Amount Setting (Initial value: Refer to the table below.) (Input range: 0.0 to 999.9 ml)
Refilling Refilling Water
Water Amount Setting 2
Amount Refilling Water
Setting 1 Amount 2 (Low
Humidity)
Refilling Water
Amount Setting 2
(Low Processing
Amount)
CD 151.0 58.5
BF 197.0 35.0
STB1 350.0 71.4
STB2 118.0 71.8
STB3 127.0 79.4
STB4 184.0 50.5

The output amount of automatic refilling for each refilling water pump is set.

‹ Refilling Water Amount Setting 1

When refilling water with Refilling Water Level off, set the refilling water amount after Refilling Water Level is set
to on. (For automatic refilling water during start up checks and normal processing.)

‹ Refilling Water Amount Setting 2

Set the refilling water amount with Refilling Water Level on. This setting is valid when the Refilling Water Level 2
of Correction Setting has been set to Standard. (For automatic refilling during start up checks.)

33510 2/3
 33510
Processor Standard Setting

‹ Refilling Water Amount 2 (Low Humidity)

Each refilling water amount is set in selecting Low Humidity for Refilling Water Level 2 of Correction Setting
for Refilling Water Amount Setting 2 (Standard).

‹ Refilling Water Amount Setting 2 (Low Processing Amount)

Each refilling water amount is set in selecting Low Processing Amount for Refilling Water Level 2 of Correction
Setting for Refilling Water Amount Setting 2 (Standard).
Each refilling water amount can be set according to the amount of evaporation when processing amount is low (for
each machine or time of year).
IMPORTANT
• The initial values of Refilling Water Amount 2 (Low Humidity) and Refilling Water Amount 2 (Low Processing
Amount) are the same as that of Refilling Water Amount Setting 2. Do not change them.
If it is necessary to change the settings, the setting values are specified.

3. Mode

33510 3/3
 33520
Processor Standard Setting

Basic Kit Setting [J]

Bringing up the display

Menu: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Processor Standard Setting → Basic Kit Setting

3. Mode
S4105-00-SM00

z Explanation

z Kit Processing Amount Setting (initial value: 388.8) (input range: 0.1 to 999.9 m2)
The paper area that can be processed per kit can be set.

z Kit Water Supply Amount Setting (initial value CD: 24.49, BF: 19.05. STB: 46.66) (input range: 0.01 to
327.67 L)
The water supply amount that is required per kit can be changed.

z Drop Limit/without Replenishment Limit Setting (initial value CD: 4, BF: 8, STB: 8) (input range: 0 to
Tablets Per Cartridge)
If the tablet kit is finished, Tablet Operation will be performed. (The rest of the tablets will be dropped at once.)
A limit value for the number of tablets that can be dropped at that time can be set.
If it exceeds the setting value (Drop Limit/without Replenishment Limit Setting), the attention message 609: The Tablet kit is
empty. is shown.

z Total Cartridge Count (initial value CD: 6, BF: 12, STB: 2) (input range: 1 to 99)
The number of cartridges per kit can be set.

z Number of tablets in the cartridge (initial value CD:40, BF:40, STB:20)

The number of tablets per cartridge can be set.
IMPORTANT
• Even if the values of settings are changed, the changes are not to be effective until the kit ends, which are Kit
Processing Amount Setting, Kit Water Supply Amount Setting, Drop Limit/without Replenishment Limit Setting, Total
Cartridge Count, and Tablets Per Cartridge.

33520 1/1
 33530
Processor Standard Setting

Kit Correction [J]

Bringing up the display

Menu: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Processor Standard Setting → Kit Correction

3. Mode
S4106-00-SM00

z Explanation

z Auto Low Processing Correction (initial value: ON), Correction Rate (initial value: 30) (input range: 0
to 99 %), Detection (initial value: 2.02) (input range: 0.01 to 9.99 m2)
Correction Rate and Detection is to be effective only when the Auto Low Processing Correction is ON.
This function corrects the tablet drop and water supply cycle automatically while low print processing. If it is ON, and the day
continues for one week when the accumulated processing amount per day (paper processing area) is smaller than that of detected auto
low processing correction, the correction rate is to be effective from the eighth day. However, if processing in more value than the
setting is performed for more than two consecutive days, it is to return to the normal processing from the third day.
IMPORTANT
• Even if the value of Correction Rate or Detection of Auto Low Processing Correction is changed, the changes are not
to be effective until the kit ends.

z Replenishment Correction Rate Setting (Initial value: 100) (input range: 1 to 250 %)
This function corrects the tablet drop cycle. The setting of large value makes drop cycle fast and that of small value makes it slow.

z Water Supply Correction Rate Setting (Initial value: 100) (input range: 1 to 250 %)
This function corrects the water supply cycle. The setting of large value makes water supply cycle fast and that of small value makes it
slow.

33530 1/1
 33540
Processor Standard Setting

Refilling Water Amount Setting [J]

Bringing up the display

Menu: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Processor Standard Setting → Refilling Water Amount Setting

3. Mode
S4107-00-SM00

z Explanation

z Environment Setting (Initial value: (1) 12-2 (2) 3-5 (3) 6-8 (4) 9-11 ) (Input range: 1 to 12)
A year can be divided into 4 environments and their periods can be set for the evaporation refill.
NOTE
• If a month is not set through the year, it cannot be registered when the key is pressed.
Example: (1) 1-6 (2) 8-12
In this case, it cannot be registered because July is missing.
• If you press the key, the value is initialized.

z Environment Correction Setting (Input range: 0 to 4)

The magnification of Evaporation Refill Amount can be set for each environment.
Magnification
No. Working Not working
0 0.0 1.0
1 0.6 0.6
2 1.0 1.0
3 1.4 1.4
4 Free setting Free setting

Magnific Condition
ation
0.0 No refilling water
0.6 Humid condition
1.0 Standard condition
1.4 Dry condition

NOTE
• The value can be set freely for No.4. (input range: 0.0 to 9.9)

z Basic Evaporation Refill Amount (Input range: 0.0 to 99.9 ml)

The value for Evaporation Refill Amount can be set freely for both Working and Not Working.

33540 1/2
 33540
Processor Standard Setting

IMPORTANT
• Even if the value of Basic Evaporation Refill Amount is changed, the changes are not to be effective until the kit ends.

3. Mode

33540 2/2
 33550
Processor Standard Setting

Pump Output Amount Setting [J]

Bringing up the display

Menu: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Processor Standard Setting → Pump Output Amount Setting

3. Mode
S4108-00-SM00

z Explanation

z Pump Output Amount Setting (Input range: 0.1 to 200 ml)

Measure the pump output amount in Pump Output Amount Measurement in Functions, and check the measured value.

z Functions

z Pump Output Amount Measurement

Be sure to measure the output amount when installing it.
If the output amount setting is not appropriate, the water supply or replenishment operation is not carried out properly.

z Initial Replenishment Operation

The service personnel password (2260) is required to display this.
After operating each replenisher pump, water supply pump, refilling water pump for a specified time, the air remaining in the hose can
be extracted.
To stop the initial replenishment, press NO: Cancel.
IMPORTANT
• Be sure to carry out the initial replenishment operation at system installation.
• When the initial replenishment operation has been carried out if air in the hose cannot be removed, activate the pump
of the relevant hose to remove air using the pump output amount setting of Functions.

33550 1/1
 33560
Processor Standard Setting

Operation Check [J]

Bringing up the display

Menu: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Processor Standard Setting → Operation Check

3. Mode
S4109-00-SM00

z Explanation
Operation Checks of Tablet Sensor 1 and 2 can be carried out.

z Functions

z Dropping Tablet
One dropping tablet operation is carried out for the selected chemical.
Conditions of tablet sensor 1 and 2 in dropping tablet are displayed.
IMPORTANT
• The number of the dropped tablet in Dropping Tablet is not to be subtracted from the number of remaining tablets.

z Home Operation
When Either tablet sensor 1 or 2 is close, Home Operation of the drum can be carried out for the selected chemical.
IMPORTANT
• When carrying out Home Operation, be sure to remove the cartridges.

33560 1/1
 33570
Processor Standard Setting

Manual Kit Change [J]

Bringing up the display

Menu → Extension → Processor Settings → Processor Standard Setting → Manual Kit Change

3. Mode
S4110-00-SM00

z Explanation

z Manual Kit Change

When carrying out Manual Kit Change, the following values are to be initialized (setting value).
• Kit Correction Amount
• Kit Water Supply Amount Setting
• Kit Remains
• Drop Limit/without Replenishment Limit
• Total Cartridge Count
• Tablets Per Cartridge
• Basic Evaporation Refill Amount
NOTE
• When setting value is changed, the new setting is to be effective from the time when the manual kit change or kit end is carried
out, or kit end error occurs.

33570 1/1
 33590
Processor Standard Setting

Dryer Lane Select Operation Setting [F] [N] [SM] [J]

Bringing up the display

PTBurn Interface :: 2260 → Extension → Processor Settings → Processor Standard Setting → Dryer Lane Select Operation Setting

3. Mode
S4011-00-SM00

z Explanation

z Lane Select Operating Time (after Paper Front End Detected) (Initial value: PP-1213: 6.09 sec, PP-
1217: 4.79 sec) (Input range: 0.00 to 9.90 sec)
Set the timing of turning on the dryer selection solenoid after the dryer select sensor detects the paper front end.

z Returning Operating Time (Initial value: PP-1213: 7.26 sec, PP-1217: 5.76 sec) (Input range: 0.00 to
9.90 sec)
Set the timing of turning off the dryer selection solenoid after the dryer select sensor does not detect the paper front end.

33590 1/1
 35100 Maintenance

Maintenance

Colorimeter Unit Adjustment

Bringing up the display

PTBurn Interface :: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Colorimeter Unit Adjustment

3. Mode
S3088-00-SM00

z Explanation
Correct the paper stop position and feed error so that each step, such as 20-step, 22-step test prints, can be measured correctly by the
colorimeter.
NOTE
• Enter the service personnel password (2260) to configure these settings.

z Paper Front End Advance Length Correction (Initial value: 0.0) (Input range: -5.0 to +5.0 mm)
Corrects the feed error of the colorimeter unit roller from the paper front end to the measurement position.

z Paper Feed Error Correction (Initial value: 0.0) (Input range: -5.0 to +5.0 mm)
Corrects the feed error of the colorimeter unit roller.

z Functions

z Test Paper Advance

When a test is executed, paper is advanced for 345 mm to the paper advance unit 1 and 2.

z Paper Test Advance

Adjusts the colorimeter unit.

z Cleaning operation
Cleans the colorimeter unit advance roller using the cleaning sheet (for the colorimeter).

z Adjusting procedure

z Paper Front End Advance Length Correction, Advance Length Correction

1. Execute Test Paper Advance via Functions.

35100 1/3
 35100
Maintenance

2. Open the printer top cover, and then remove the test paper from the paper advance unit 1 and 2.
Paper advance unit 1

Paper

3. Mode
Paper advance unit 2

G068474

3. Draw the first line on the paper at 116 mm away from the test paper edge, then the second line at 201
mm away from the first position.

First line Second line

G068475

4. Execute Paper Test Advance via Functions.

5. Insert test paper with the first line into the colorimeter.
6. Press the key.
The test paper stops at the first line.
7. Press the or key and adjust so that the first line and the front ends of paper loading guide align.
NOTE
• Press the key to return the test paper to the front.
• Press the key to advance the test paper to the back.
Front end of paper loading guide

First line

G068476

35100 2/3
 35100
Maintenance

8. Press the key to advance the test paper to the second line.
9. Press the or key and adjust so that the second line and the front ends of paper loading guide
align.
10. Press the key to remove the test paper.

z Colorimeter cleaning

1. Execute Cleaning operation of Functions.

2. Insert the cleaning sheet (for the colorimeter) into the colorimeter.
3. Press the key.
The cleaning sheet (for the colorimeter) is advanced to the colorimeter.
4. Press the key again.

3. Mode
The cleaning sheet (for the colorimeter) is ejected.

35100 3/3
 35200
Maintenance

Input Check (Input Section)

Bringing up the display

Menu → Extension → Maintenance → Input Check → Input section

S3128-00-SM03

3. Mode
z Explanation
A buzzer will sound if the sensor, limit switch or any other device that is currently selected turns DARK or on.
IMPORTANT
• The momentary operation cannot be shown on the Input Check display because there is a time lag of approx. 0.5
seconds.

NOTE
• In case of the Stand Alone Scanner, the colorimeter unit is not loaded in the input section.
• For the Stand Alone Printer, film carrier section, LED light source unit and scanner unit are not equipped to the input section.
• For the details about film carrier section, LED light source unit and scanner unit, refer to Scanner Service Manual.
Scanner Unit [S-2/S-3]
No. Display Status
1 OK/-*1 Capacity booster OK When the capacity booster is attached

Scanner Unit [S-4]

No. Display Status
1 OK/-*1 Capacity booster OK When the capacity booster is attached

*1. Displays the detection status of capacity booster A or C. The following messages will appear when pressing the F key on the Order Display to
pass through the Input Check display in starting up the machine.
• When the detection of ON has changed to -, the attention message No. 1920 Capacity Booster Key cannot be detected. Make sure
connecting conditions. appears.
• When the detection of - has changed to ON, the attention message No. 1921 Capacity Booster Key is detected. appears.

Colorimeter unit
No. Display Status
1 DARK/LIGHT Paper Sensor 1 DARK Paper is detected.
2 DARK/LIGHT Paper Sensor 2 DARK Paper is detected.
3 ON/OFF DIP Switch 1 OFF Displays the dip switch status of the
4 ON/OFF DIP Switch 2 OFF colorimeter control PCB.
☞ 64130
5 ON/OFF DIP Switch 3 OFF
Be sure to turn OFF.
6 ON/OFF DIP Switch 4 OFF

35200 1/2
 35200
Maintenance

D-ICE control PCB *1

No. Display Status
1 ON/OFF DIP Switch 1-1 OFF Displays the dip switch status of the
2 ON/OFF DIP Switch 1-2 OFF D-ICE control PCB.
3 ON/OFF DIP Switch 1-3 OFF
☞ 64030
Be sure to turn OFF.
4 ON/OFF DIP Switch 1-4 OFF

*1. Not displayed for 32SD.

3. Mode

35200 2/2
 35210
Maintenance

Input Check (Printer)

Bringing up the display

Menu → Extension → Maintenance → Input Check → Printer

z Input Check
Item Reference
Paper Supply Unit ☞ Paper Supply Unit (Paper Magazine Code)
☞ Paper Supply Unit (Paper Supply)
☞ Paper Supply Unit (Magazine Unit (Magazine A))
☞ Paper Supply Unit (Magazine Unit (Magazine A2))
Exposure Advance Unit ☞ Exposure Advance Unit
☞ Engine Section

3. Mode
Engine Section
Paper Advance Section ☞ Paper Advance Section (Paper Advance Section 1)
☞ Paper Advance Section (Paper Advance Section 2)

z Explanation
A buzzer will sound if sensors, limit switches or other devices at the cursor position turn dark or on.
IMPORTANT
• The momentary operation cannot be displayed on the input check display because there is a time lag of approx. 0.5
seconds.
Paper Supply Unit (Paper Magazine Code)
No. Display Status
1 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor B1 (Right) DARK When the pin is detected.
2 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor B2 DARK When the pin is detected.
3 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor B3 DARK When the pin is detected.
4 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor B4 DARK When the pin is detected.
5 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor B5 DARK When the pin is detected.
6 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor B6 DARK When the pin is detected.
7 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor B7 (Left) DARK When the pin is detected.
8 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor C1 (Lower) DARK When the pin is detected.
9 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor C2 DARK When the pin is detected.
10 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor C3 DARK When the pin is detected.
11 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor C4 DARK When the pin is detected.
12 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor C5 DARK When the pin is detected.
13 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor C6 DARK When the pin is detected.
14 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor C7 (Upper) DARK When the pin is detected.
15 ### Attached Paper Magazine B Displays the attached paper magazine.
16 ### Attached Paper Magazine C Displays the attached paper magazine.

Paper Supply Unit (Paper Supply)

No. Display Status
1 DARK/LIGHT Paper End Sensor B DARK Paper is detected.
2 DARK/LIGHT Paper End Sensor C DARK Paper is detected.
3 DARK/LIGHT Paper Loading Sensor DARK Paper is detected.
4 DARK/LIGHT Cut Home Sensor DARK Home position: When the cutter is
opened.
5 DARK/LIGHT Cut End Sensor DARK When the cutter is closed.

35210 1/5
 35210
Maintenance

No. Display Status

6 DARK/LIGHT Hold Sensor DARK When the pressure is applied on the
paper.
7 DARK/LIGHT Zigzagging Correction Sensor (Left) DARK When the left arm is detected.
8 DARK/LIGHT Zigzagging Correction Sensor (Right) DARK When the right arm is detected.
9 DARK/LIGHT Paper Supply Pressure Change Sensor DARK When the pressure is applied on the
paper.
10 ON/OFF Interlock Switch (Printer Top Cover) ON When the cover is closed.
11 ON/OFF Interlock Switch (Printer Door 1) ON When the cover is closed.
12 ON/OFF Interlock Switch (Printer Door 2) ON When the cover is closed.
13 ON/OFF Printer Door 3 Sensor ON When the cover is closed.
14 ON/OFF DIP Switch 1-1 OFF Displays the dip switch status of the
15 ON/OFF DIP Switch 1-2 OFF printer control PCB. ☞ 66000

3. Mode
Turn off all.
16 ON/OFF DIP Switch 1-3 OFF
17 ON/OFF DIP Switch 1-4 OFF
18 OK/-*1 Capacity booster B OK When the capacity booster A is
attached.
*1. Displays the detection status of capacity booster B. The following attention messages appear when closing the Input Check display on the
starting up of the machine.
• When the detection of ON has changed to -, the attention message No. 1920 Capacity Booster Key cannot be detected. Make sure
connecting conditions. appears.
• When the detection of - has changed to ON, the attention message No. 1921 Capacity Booster Key is detected. appears.

Paper Supply Unit (Magazine Unit (Magazine A))

No. Display Status
1 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor A1 (Upper) DARK When the pin is detected.
2 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor A2 DARK When the pin is detected.
3 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor A3 DARK When the pin is detected.
4 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor A4 DARK When the pin is detected.
5 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor A5 DARK When the pin is detected.
6 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor A6 DARK When the pin is detected.
7 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor A7 (Lower) DARK When the pin is detected.
8 ### Attached Paper Magazine A Displays the attached paper magazine.
9 DARK/LIGHT Paper End Sensor A DARK Paper is detected.
10 ON/OFF Interlock Switch (Printer Top Cover) ON When the cover is closed.
11 ON/OFF Interlock Switch (Printer Door 1) ON When the cover is closed.
12 ON/OFF Interlock Switch (Printer Door 2) ON When the cover is closed.
13 ON/OFF Printer Door 3 Sensor ON When the cover is closed.

Paper Supply Unit (Magazine Unit (Magazine A2))

No. Display Status
1 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor A21 (Upper) DARK When the pin is detected.
2 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor A22 DARK When the pin is detected.
3 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor A23 DARK When the pin is detected.
4 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor A24 DARK When the pin is detected.
5 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor A25 DARK When the pin is detected.
6 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor A26 DARK When the pin is detected.
7 DARK/LIGHT Paper Magazine Code Sensor A27 (Lower) DARK When the pin is detected.
8 ### Attached Paper Magazine A2 Displays the attached paper magazine.
9 DARK/LIGHT Paper End Sensor A2 DARK Paper is detected.
9 DARK/LIGHT Pressure Change Sensor A2 DARK Paper is detected.
9 DARK/LIGHT Width Change Sensor A2 DARK Paper is detected.

35210 2/5
 35210
Maintenance

No. Display Status

10 ON/OFF Interlock Switch (Printer Top Cover) ON When the cover is closed.
11 ON/OFF Interlock Switch (Printer Doors 1, 4) ON When the cover is closed.
12 ON/OFF Interlock Switch (Printer Door 2) ON When the cover is closed.
13 ON/OFF Printer Door 3 Sensor ON When the cover is closed.

Exposure Advance Unit

No. Display Status
1 DARK/LIGHT Exposure Advance Pressure Change Sensor 1 DARK When the pressure is applied on the
paper.
2 DARK/LIGHT Exposure Start Sensor DARK Paper is detected.
3 DARK/LIGHT Exposure Advance Pressure Change Sensor 2 DARK When the pressure is applied on the
paper.

3. Mode
4 ##.#°C Inner Temperature Displays the inner temperature of printer.
5 ON/OFF Interlock Switch (Printer Doors 1, 4)*1 ON When the cover is closed.
6 ON/OFF Interlock Switch (Printer Door 1) ON When the cover is closed.
7 ON/OFF Interlock Switch (Printer Door 2) ON When the cover is closed.
8 ON/OFF Printer Door 3 Sensor ON When the cover is closed.
9 ON/OFF DIP Switch 2-1 OFF Displays the dip switch status of the
10 ON/OFF DIP Switch 2-2 OFF printer control PCB. ☞ 66000
Turn off all.
11 ON/OFF DIP Switch 2-3 OFF
12 ON/OFF DIP Switch 2-4 OFF

*1. Printer door 4 is shown only when the Quad Magazine Unit has been registered to Option Registration.

Engine Section
Display Status
1 ON/OFF Interlock Switch (Printer Top Cover) ON When the cover is closed.
2 Synchronous/Asy Polygon Mirror Synchronous Synchr Normal
nchronous onous When the polygon mirror rotates
properly
Asynch Problem
ronous The polygon mirror does not
normally rotate.
When entering the input check, the polygon mirror is ON.
The polygon mirror driver outputs the signal which indicates the stability of the polygon mirror rotation.
3 Synchronous/Asy Laser Synchronous Sensor Synchr When the polygon mirror is
nchronous onous synchronous and either of R/G/B
laser or all lasers is/are emitting
Asynch When the polygon mirror is
ronous asynchronous
When the polygon mirror is
synchronous and either of R/G/B
laser or all lasers is/are not emitting
When entering the input check, the polygon mirror and R/G/B lasers are ON.
When either of R/G/B laser is not emitting, it depends on the timing of measurement and the laser light intensity
whether synchronous or asynchronous appears.
When checking for any problems in the laser output, check with the output check. ☞ 35310

35210 3/5
 35210
Maintenance

Display Status
4 OK/No Good G Laser Light Source Status OK The laser and G/B laser drivers are
B Laser Light Source Status normal.
No The laser unit is deteriorated.
Good The G/B laser driver is not connected
properly, or is damaged.
The laser light intensity depends on the electric current applied to the laser diode. When the laser diode is being
deteriorated, add the electric current to acquire the specified amount of output. No Good is displayed when the
current value exceeds the limitation.
5 ##.#°C R Laser Thermosensor Displays the R laser temperature.
6 ##.#°C Laser Unit Thermosensor Displays the temperature of the laser unit.
7 ##### Polygon Mirror Frequency 1380±7 When the polygon mirror rotates
properly
- The polygon mirror does not

3. Mode
normally rotate.
8 ON/OFF DIP Switch 201-1 OFF Displays the dip switch setting of the
9 ON/OFF DIP Switch 201-2 OFF laser control PCB. ☞ 66010
Turn off all.
10 ON/OFF DIP Switch 201-3 OFF
11 ON/OFF DIP Switch 201-4 OFF
12 ON/OFF DIP Switch 201-5 OFF
13 ON/OFF DIP Switch 201-6 OFF
14 ON/OFF DIP Switch 201-7 OFF
15 ON/OFF DIP Switch 201-8 OFF
16 ON/OFF G Laser Judgment Signal 1 OFF The combination of ON/OFF
17 ON/OFF G Laser Judgment Signal 2 OFF identifies the laser unit type.
For details, see ☞ Engine Section
18 ON/OFF B Laser Judgment Signal 1 OFF
(Details).
19 ON/OFF B Laser Judgment Signal 2 OFF
20 ON/OFF G Laser Ready Status (SP1) *1 ON When the G/B-SHG laser is normal
21 ON/OFF B Laser Ready Status (SP1) *1*2 ON (ready for printing)
22 Laser Unit System Version Name (SP1)
*1. Displayed only when the system is equipped with the Laser Unit (Type A1)
*2. Displayed only when the system is equipped with the Laser Unit (Type Ff)

Paper Advance Section (Paper Advance Section 1)

Display Status
1 DARK/LIGHT Paper Sensor 1 DARK Paper is detected.
2 DARK/LIGHT Lane Select Sensor (Left) DARK When the arm is detected.
3 DARK/LIGHT Lane Select Sensor (Right) DARK When the arm is detected.
4 DARK/LIGHT Arm Sensor (Left) DARK When the arm is detected.
5 DARK/LIGHT Arm Sensor (Right) DARK When the arm is detected.
6 DARK/LIGHT Paper Sensor 2 (Left) DARK Paper is detected.
7 DARK/LIGHT Paper Sensor 2 (Center) DARK Paper is detected.
8 DARK/LIGHT Paper Sensor 2 (Right) DARK Paper is detected.
9 ON/OFF Interlock Switch (Printer Top Cover) ON When the cover is closed.
10 ON/OFF Interlock Switch (Printer Doors 1, 4)*1 ON When the cover is closed.
11 ON/OFF Interlock Switch (Printer Door 2) ON When the cover is closed.
12 ON/OFF Printer Door 3 Sensor ON When the cover is closed.
13 ON/OFF DIP Switch 3-1 OFF Displays the dip switch status of the
14 ON/OFF DIP Switch 3-2 OFF printer control PCB. ☞ 66000
Turn off all.
15 ON/OFF DIP Switch 3-3 OFF
16 ON/OFF DIP Switch 3-4 OFF

*1. Printer door 4 is shown only when the Quad Magazine Unit has been registered to Option Registration.

35210 4/5
 35210
Maintenance

Paper Advance Section (Paper Advance Section 2)

Display Status
1 DARK/LIGHT Pressure Guide Sensor DARK When the paper pressure is released.
2 DARK/LIGHT Paper Advance Pressure Change Sensor (Left) DARK When the pressure is applied on the
paper.
3 DARK/LIGHT Paper Advance Pressure Change Sensor (Right) DARK When the pressure is applied on the
paper.
4 ON/OFF DIP Switch 4-1 OFF Displays the dip switch status of the
5 ON/OFF DIP Switch 4-2 OFF printer control PCB. ☞ 66000
Turn off all.
6 ON/OFF DIP Switch 4-3 OFF
7 ON/OFF DIP Switch 4-4 OFF

3. Mode

35210 5/5
 35220
Maintenance

Input Check (Processor) [F]

Description for each specification

For the specifications other than [F] specification, this section only gives description that differs from that for [F] specification. See below
for the description for each specification.

Reference
☞ Input Check (Processor) [N] ☞ Input Check (Processor) ☞ Input Check (Processor) [J]
[SM]

z Input Check
Item Specification Reference
Processor Section F ☞ Processor Section (1) (for each ☞ Processor Section (2) (for each

3. Mode
specification) [F] specification) [F]
N ☞ Processor Section [N]
SM ☞ Processor Section (1) [SM] ☞ Processor Section (2) [SM]
J ☞ Processor Section [J] ☞ Tablet Replenishment Section [J]
Dryer Section Common ☞ Dryer Section (common to all specifications)
Order Classification Section ☞ Order Classification Section (common to all specifications)

z Processor Section (1) (for each specification) [F]

No. Display Status
1 ON/OFF Processing Solution Level OFF ☞ No. 5508 occurs.
2 ON/OFF Processing Solution Safety Thermostat ON Normal
2 ON/OFF Interlock Switch (Processor Top Cover) ON When the cover is closed.
3 ON/OFF P1 Processable Solution Level OFF ☞ No. 5916[F]occurs.*3
4 ON/OFF P2 Processable Solution Level ☞ No. 5917[F]occurs.*3
5 ON/OFF PS1 Processable Solution Level ☞ No. 5918[F]occurs.*3
6 ON/OFF PS2 Processable Solution Level ☞ No. 5919[F]occurs.*3
7 ON/OFF PS3 Processable Solution Level ☞ No. 5920[F]occurs.*3
8 ON/OFF PS4 Processable Solution Level ☞ No. 5921[F]occurs.*3
9 ON/OFF P1 Effluent Float Switch ON When the effluent is full.
10 ON/OFF P2 + PS Effluent Float Switch ON
11 CLOSE/OPEN Starter Jumper Setting CLOSE When the jumper of the processor relay
PCB is connected
12 ON/OFF Rack Stopper Sensor ON When the rack stopper is set.
13 ### Pump Rotation Detector When an error occurs.*1
14 50/60 Power Supply Frequency (Hz) Displays the frequency.
15 #.## P1 Flow Amount Displays the P1 circulation amount.*2
16 ### Drive Motor Revolution Count

*1. Displays OK if all circulation pumps are normally rotating.

When an error occurs, displays the circulation pump at which an error is occurring. (CD, BF, STB1, STB2, STB3, STB4)
If the errors occur at two or more pumps simultaneously, the error is displayed in the order from CD.
*2. Displays only when the digital flowmeter is registered as options.
*3. If the processable level sensors for each processing solution are OFF, the system stops printing to prevent the time that paper is soaked from
becoming short and printing quality from degrading.

35220 1/8
 35220
Maintenance

z Processor Section (2) (for each specification) [F]

No. Display Status
1 ON/OFF P1R (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level OFF When the solution level is too low.
Sensor
2 ON/OFF P1R (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level OFF
Sensor
3 ON/OFF P2RA (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level OFF
Sensor
4 ON/OFF P2RA (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level OFF
Sensor
5 ON/OFF P2RB (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level OFF
Sensor
6 ON/OFF P2RB (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level OFF

3. Mode
Sensor
7 ON/OFF PSR (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level OFF
Sensor
1 ON/OFF PSR (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level OFF
Sensor
2 ON/OFF Interlock Switch (Replenisher Section Door) ON When the cover is closed.
3 DARK/LIGHT Replenisher Cartridge Set Sensor DARK When the replenish cartridge is set
4 DARK/LIGHT Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper) DARK When the replenish cartridge is in the
upper position
5 DARK/LIGHT Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower) DARK When the replenish cartridge is in the
lower position
6 #.# Environment Temperature Displays the temperature and humidity in the place
7 #.# Environment Humidity where the temperature and humidity sensor is
attached.
See ☞ 63280 for the installation position of the
temperature and humid sensor.

z Dryer Section (common to all specifications)

No. Display Status
1 ON/OFF Dryer Safety Thermostat OFF When the dryer safety thermostat is
turned off.
2 ON/OFF Interlock Switch (Dryer Cover) ON When the cover is closed.
3 DARK/LIGHT Print Sensor (Left) DARK When the paper is detected.
4 DARK/LIGHT Print Sensor (Center) DARK When the paper is detected.
5 DARK/LIGHT Print Sensor (Right) DARK When the paper is detected.
6 DARK/LIGHT Dryer Lane Select Sensor DARK When the Paper is detected.

z Order Classification Section (common to all specifications)

No. Display Status
1 DARK/LIGHT Sorter Home Sensor DARK Home position: Print receiving position
2 DARK/LIGHT Print Full Sensor DARK When the paper is detected.
3 ON/OFF Manual Sorter Switch ON When the switch is pressed.
4 DARK/LIGHT Conveyor Unit Sensor DARK When the conveyor unit is set.

35220 2/8
 35220
Maintenance

Input Check (Processor) [N]

Bringing up the display

Menu → Extension → Maintenance → Input Check → Processor
Description for each specification
For the specifications other than [F] specification, this section only gives description that differs from that for [F] specification. See below
for the description for each specification.
Reference
☞ Input Check (Processor) ☞ Input Check (Processor) [J]
[SM]

z Explanation

3. Mode
A buzzer will sound if the sensor, limit switch or any other device that is currently selected turns DARK or on.
IMPORTANT
• The momentary operation cannot be shown on the Input Check display because there is a time lag of approx. 0.5
seconds.

z Processor Section [N]

No. Display Status
1 ON/OFF Processing Solution Level OFF When the solution level is too low.
2 ON/OFF CD Replenishment Solution Level Sensor OFF When the replenishment solution is
run out.
3 ON/OFF BF Replenishment Solution Level Sensor OFF When the replenishment solution is
run out.
4 ON/OFF STB Replenishment Solution Level Sensor OFF When the replenishment solution is
run out.
5 ON/OFF CD Refilling Water Level OFF When the solution level is too low.
6 ON/OFF BF Refilling Water Level OFF When the solution level is too low.
7 ON/OFF STB 1 Refilling Water Level OFF When the solution level is too low.
8 ON/OFF STB 2 Refilling Water Level OFF When the solution level is too low.
9 ON/OFF STB 3 Refilling Water Level OFF When the solution level is too low.
10 ON/OFF STB 4 Refilling Water Level OFF When the solution level is too low.
11 ON/OFF Refilling Water Tank Level Sensor OFF When the solution level is too low.
12 ON/OFF Processing Solution Safety Thermostat ON When the solution safety thermostat
operates normally
13 ON/OFF Interlock Switch (Processor Top Cover) ON When the cover is closed.
14 ON/OFF Rack Stopper Sensor ON When the rack stopper is set.
15 ON/OFF CD Effluent Float Switch ON When the effluent is full.
16 ON/OFF BF Effluent Float Switch ON When the effluent is full.
17 ON/OFF STB Effluent Float Switch ON When the effluent is full.
18 ON/OFF DIP Switch 1 OFF Displays the dip switch status of the
19 ON/OFF DIP Switch 2 OFF processor control PCB. ☞ 66200
Turn off all.
20 ON/OFF DIP Switch 3 OFF
21 ON/OFF DIP Switch 4 OFF
22 CLOSE/OPEN Starter Jumper Setting CLOSE When the jumper of power PCB 2 is
connected.
23 ### Pump Rotation Detector When an error occurs.*1
24 50/60 Power Supply Frequency (Hz) Displays the frequency.
25 #.## CD Flow Amount Displays the CD circulation amount.*2
26 ### Drive Motor Revolution Count

35220 3/8
 35220
Maintenance

*1. Displays OK if all circulation pumps are normally rotating.

When an error occurs, displays the circulation pump at which an error is occurring. (CD, BF, STB1, STB2, STB3, STB4)
If the errors occur at two or more pumps simultaneously, the error is displayed in the order from CD.
*2. Displays only when the digital flowmeter is registered as options.

3. Mode

35220 4/8
 35220
Maintenance

Input Check (Processor) [SM]

Description for each specification

For the specifications other than [F] specification, this section only gives description that differs from that for [F] specification. See below
for the description for each specification.

Reference
☞ Input Check (Processor) [N] ☞ Input Check (Processor) [J] ☞ Input Check (Processor) [F]

z Processor Section (1) [SM]

No. Display Status
1 ON/OFF Processing Solution Level OFF When the solution level is too low.

3. Mode
2 ON/OFF CD Refilling Water Level OFF When the solution level is too low.
3 ON/OFF BF Refilling Water Level OFF When the solution level is too low.
4 ON/OFF STB 1 Refilling Water Level OFF When the solution level is too low.
5 ON/OFF STB 2 Refilling Water Level OFF When the solution level is too low.
6 ON/OFF STB 3 Refilling Water Level OFF When the solution level is too low.
7 ON/OFF STB 4 Refilling Water Level OFF When the solution level is too low.
8 ON/OFF Processing Solution Safety Thermostat ON Normal
9 ON/OFF Interlock Switch (Processor Top Cover) ON When the cover is closed.
10 ON/OFF Rack Stopper Sensor ON When the rack stopper is set.
11 ON/OFF CD Effluent Float Switch ON When the effluent is full.
12 ON/OFF BF Effluent Float Switch ON When the effluent is full.
13 ON/OFF STB Effluent Float Switch ON When the effluent is full.
14 ON/OFF DIP Switch 1 OFF Displays the dip switch status of the
15 ON/OFF DIP Switch 2 OFF processor control PCB. ☞ 66200
Turn off all.
16 ON/OFF DIP Switch 3 OFF
17 ON/OFF DIP Switch 4 OFF
18 CLOSE/OPEN Starter Jumper Setting CLOSE When the jumper of power PCB 2 is
connected.
19 ### Pump Rotation Detector When an error occurs.*1
20 50/60 Power Supply Frequency (Hz) Displays the frequency.
21 #.## CD Flow Amount Displays the CD circulation amount.*2
22 ### Drive Motor Revolution Count

*1. Displays OK if all circulation pumps are normally rotating.

When an error occurs, displays the circulation pump at which an error is occurring. (CD, BF, STB1, STB2, STB3, STB4)
If the errors occur at two or more pumps simultaneously, the error is displayed in the order from CD.
*2. Displays only when the digital flowmeter is registered as options.

z Processor Section (2) [SM]

No. Display Status
1 ON/OFF CD-A Replenisher Pump Sensor ON Home position
2 ON/OFF CD-B Replenisher Pump Sensor ON Home position
3 ON/OFF CD-C Replenisher Pump Sensor ON Home position
4 ON/OFF CD-W Water Supply Pump Sensor ON Home position
5 ON/OFF BF-A Replenisher Pump Sensor ON Home position
6 ON/OFF BF-B Replenisher Pump Sensor ON Home position
7 ON/OFF STB Replenisher Pump Sensor ON Home position
8 DARK/LIGHT CD-A Replenishment Solution Sensor LIGHT When the replenishment solution level is
normal.

35220 5/8
 35220
Maintenance

No. Display Status

9 DARK/LIGHT CD-B Replenishment Solution Sensor LIGHT When the replenishment solution level is
normal.
10 DARK/LIGHT CD-C Replenishment Solution Sensor LIGHT When the replenishment solution level is
normal.
11 DARK/LIGHT BF-A Replenishment Solution Sensor LIGHT When the replenishment solution level is
normal.
12 DARK/LIGHT BF-B Replenishment Solution Sensor LIGHT When the replenishment solution level is
normal.
13 DARK/LIGHT STB Replenishment Solution Sensor LIGHT When the replenishment solution level is
normal.
14 ON/OFF Replenishment Package Sensor P-1 ON When the replenishment package is set.
15 ON/OFF Replenishment Package Sensor P-2 ON When the replenishment package is set.
16 ON/OFF Water Supply Tank Level Sensor OFF When the solution level is too low.

3. Mode

35220 6/8
 35220
Maintenance

Input Check (Processor) [J]

Description for each specification

For the specifications other than [F] specification, this section only gives description that differs from that for [F] specification. See below
for the description for each specification.

Reference
☞ Input Check (Processor) [N] ☞ Input Check (Processor) aaaaa
[SM]

z Processor Section [J]

No. Display Status

3. Mode
1 ON/OFF Processing Solution Level OFF When the solution level is too low.
2 ON/OFF SW Tank Level Sensor OFF When the solution level is too low.
3 ON/OFF SW/DW Tank Level Sensor OFF When the solution level is too low.
4 ON/OFF STB 1 Refilling Water Level OFF When the solution level is too low.
5 ON/OFF Processing Solution Safety Thermostat ON Normal
6 ON/OFF Interlock Switch (Processor Top Cover) ON When the cover is closed.
7 ON/OFF Rack Stopper Sensor ON When the rack stopper is set.
8 ON/OFF CD Effluent Float Switch ON When the effluent is full.
9 ON/OFF BF Effluent Float Switch ON When the effluent is full.
10 ON/OFF STB Effluent Float Switch ON When the effluent is full.
11 ON//OFF DIP Switch 1 OFF Displays the dip switch status of the
12 ON/OFF DIP Switch 2 OFF processor control PCB. ☞ 66200
Turn off all.
13 ON/OFF DIP Switch 3 OFF
14 ON/OFF DIP Switch 4 OFF
15 CLOSE/OPEN Starter Jumper Setting CLOSE When the jumper of power PCB 2 is
connected.
16 ### Pump Rotation Detector When an error occurs.*1
17 50/60 Power Supply Frequency (Hz) Displays the frequency.
18 #.## CD Flow Amount Displays the CD circulation amount.*2
19 ### Drive Motor Revolution Count

*1. Displays OK if all circulation pumps are normally rotating.

When an error occurs, displays the circulation pump at which an error is occurring. (CD, BF, STB1, STB2, STB3, STB4)
If the errors occur at two or more pumps simultaneously, the error is displayed in the order from CD.
*2. Displays only when the digital flowmeter is registered as options.

z Tablet Replenishment Section [J]

No. Display Status
1 DARK/LIGHT CD Tablet Sensor 1 DARK When the tablet is detected
2 DARK/LIGHT CD Tablet Sensor 2 DARK When the tablet is detected
3 DARK/LIGHT BF Tablet Sensor 1 DARK When the tablet is detected
4 DARK/LIGHT BF Tablet Sensor 2 DARK When the tablet is detected
5 DARK/LIGHT STB Tablet Sensor 1 DARK When the tablet is detected
6 DARK/LIGHT STB Tablet Sensor 2 DARK When the tablet is detected
7 DARK/LIGHT CD Cartridge Sensor LIGHT When the cartridge is detected
8 DARK/LIGHT BF Cartridge Sensor LIGHT When the cartridge is detected
9 DARK/LIGHT STB Cartridge Sensor LIGHT When the cartridge is detected
10 DARK/LIGHT Elevator Upper Sensor DARK When the elevator is detected
11 DARK/LIGHT Elevator Middle Sensor DARK When the elevator is detected

35220 7/8
 35220
Maintenance

No. Display Status

12 DARK/LIGHT Elevator Lower Sensor DARK When the elevator is detected
13 ON/OFF Tablet Replenishment Unit Interlock Switch ON When the tablet unit is attached

3. Mode

35220 8/8
 35300
Maintenance

Output Check (Input Section)

Bringing up the display

Menu → Extension → Maintenance → Output Check → Input section

3. Mode
S3126-00-SM01

z Explanation
Check the operation of the motor, buzzer and LED etc. at the cursor.
NOTE
• In case of the Stand Alone Scanner, the colorimeter unit is not loaded in the input section.
• For the Stand Alone Printer, film carrier section, LED light source unit and scanner unit are not equipped to the input section.
• For the details about film carrier section, LED light source unit and scanner unit, refer to Scanner Service Manual.
Colorimeter Unit
No. Display Operation
1 Paper Advance Motor Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
2 Pressure Change Solenoid Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.

D-ICE Control PCB (Switch control PCB) *1

No. Display Operation
1 Buzzer Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.

*1. D-ICE Control PCB is displayed for 32. Switch control PCB is displayed for 32SD.

35300 1/1
 35310
Maintenance

Output Check (Printer)

Bringing up the display

Menu → Extension → Maintenance → Output Check → Printer

z Output Check
Item Reference
Paper Supply Unit ☞ Paper Supply Unit (Paper Supply Section 1)
☞ Paper Supply Unit (Paper Supply Section 2)
☞ Paper Supply Unit (Magazine Unit (Magazine A)
☞ Paper Supply Unit (Magazine Unit (Magazine A2)
Exposure Advance Unit ☞ Exposure Advance Unit
☞ Engine Section

3. Mode
Engine Section
☞ Engine Section (Details)
Paper Advance Section ☞ Paper Advance Section (Paper Advance Section 1)
☞ Paper Advance Section (Paper Advance Section 2)

z Explanation
Check the operation of the motor, buzzer and LED etc. at the cursor.
Paper Supply Unit (Paper Supply Section 1)
No. Display Operation
1 Paper Advance Motor 1 Press the YES/START key to operate once.
2 Paper Supply Motor B/C Press the YES/START key to operate once.
3 Cut Motor Press the YES/START key to operate once.
4 Paper Magazine Motor B Press the YES/START key to operate once.
5 Paper Magazine Motor C Press the YES/START key to operate once.
6 Paper Magazine Lamp B/C Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
7 Paper Supply Pressure Change Motor Press the YES/START key to repeat pressure/release.
8 Paper Sensor LED Power Supply OFF Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.

Paper Supply Unit (Paper Supply Section 2)

No. Display Operation
1 Ribbon Advance Motor Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
2 Dot Head (1st Line) Press the YES/START key to operate once.
3 Dot Head (2nd Line) Press the YES/START key to operate once.
4 Paper Hold Motor Press the YES/START key to repeat pressure/release.
5 Paper Supply Arm Motor (Left / Right) Press the YES/START key to repeat the forward/backward
operation.

Paper Supply Unit (Magazine Unit (Magazine A)

No. Display Operation
1 Paper Magazine Motor A Press the YES/START key to operate once.
2 Paper Supply Motor A Press the YES/START key to operate once.
3 Paper Magazine Lamp A Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
4 Paper Sensor LED Power Supply OFF Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.

35310 1/4
 35310
Maintenance

Paper Supply Unit (Magazine Unit (Magazine A2)

No. Display Operation
1 Paper Magazine Motor A2 Press the YES/START key to operate once.
2 Paper Supply Motor A2 Press the YES/START key to operate once.
3 Pressure Release Motor A2 Press the YES/START key to operate once.
4 Width Change Motor A2 Press the YES/START key to operate once.
5 Paper Magazine Lamp A Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
6 Paper Sensor LED Power Supply OFF Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.

Exposure Advance Unit

No. Display Operation

3. Mode
1 Exposure Advance Motor 1 Press the YES/START key to operate once.
2 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 1 Press the YES/START key to repeat pressure/release.
3 Exposure Advance Motor 2 Press the YES/START key to operate once.
4 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 2 Press the YES/START key to repeat pressure/release.
5 Paper Sensor LED Power Supply OFF Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.

Engine Section
No. Display Operation
1 Polygon Mirror OFF Press the YES/START key to stop the polygon mirror.
Press the NO/STOP key to start the operation of the polygon
mirror.
2 Laser Unit Cooling Fan 1,2 ON Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
3 Laser Unit Heater ON Press the YES/START key for Laser Unit Heater ON.
Press the NO/STOP key to turn OFF the laser unit heater.
4 R Laser Output ON Press the YES/START key to turn ON the R laser output.
Press the NO/STOP key to turn OFF the R laser output.
5 G Laser Output ON Press the YES/START key to turn ON the G laser output.
Press the NO/STOP key to turn OFF the G laser output.
6 B Laser Output ON Press the YES/START key to turn ON the B laser output.
Press the NO/STOP key to turn OFF the B laser output.
7 G Laser Reset (SP1) *1 Press the YES/START key to reset the G laser.
8 B Laser Reset (SP1) *1*2 Press the YES/START key to reset the B laser.

*1. Displayed only when the system is equipped with the Laser Unit (Type A1)
*2. Displayed only when the system is equipped with the Laser Unit (Type Ff)

Engine Section (Details)

Display Status
Synchronous/Asy Polygon Mirror Synchronous Synchron When the polygon mirror rotates properly and is
nchronous ous stable
• When entering the output check
• When turning ON the polygon mirror
Asynchro The polygon mirror does not normally rotate.
nous • When turning OFF the polygon mirror

35310 2/4
 35310
Maintenance

Display Status
Synchronous/Asy Laser Synchronous Sensor Synchron When either of R/G/B laser is emitting
nchronous ous • When the polygon mirror is synchronous
and either of R/G/B laser output is turned
ON
Asynchro When all the R/G/B lasers are not emitting
nous • When entering the output check
• When the polygon mirror is asynchronous
• When the R/G/B laser output are all OFF
This part checks the output condition of each R/G/B laser.
Since the Synchronous Check cannot be carried out in the same condition as the usual printing operation even if
all the R/G/B lasers light, a problem may occur in the usual operation with no trouble at the Output Check.
OK/No Good G Laser Light Source Status OK The laser and G/B laser drivers are normal.
B Laser Light Source Status

3. Mode
No Good The laser unit is deteriorated.
The G/B laser driver is not connected properly,
or is damaged.
##.#°C R Laser Thermosensor Displays the R laser temperature.
##.#°C Laser Unit Thermosensor Displays the temperature of the laser unit.
##### Polygon Mirror Frequency 1380±7 When the polygon mirror rotates properly
- The polygon mirror does not normally rotate.
ON/OFF G Laser Judgment Signal 1 OFF The combination of ON/OFF identifies the laser
ON/OFF G Laser Judgment Signal 2 OFF unit type.
See the list below for details.
ON/OFF B Laser Judgment Signal 1 OFF
ON/OFF B Laser Judgment Signal 2 OFF
*1
ON/OFF G Laser Ready Status (SP1) ON When the G/B-SHG laser is normal (ready for
ON/OFF B Laser Ready Status (SP1) *1*2 ON printing)

*1. Displayed only when the system is equipped with the Laser Unit (Type A1)
*2. Displayed only when the system is equipped with the Laser Unit (Type Ff)

Laser unit (Type # # #) G laser differentiation signal B laser differentiation signal

1 2 1 2
Type Ff ON ON OFF ON
Type B1 ON ON ON ON
Type A1 OFF OFF OFF OFF

Paper Advance Section (Paper Advance Section 1)

No. Display Operation
1 Paper Advance Arm Motor (Left) Press the YES/START key to operate up/down repeatedly.
2 Paper Advance Arm Motor (Right) Press the YES/START key to operate up/down repeatedly.
3 Lane Select Motor (Left) Press the YES/START key to operate move-left/move-right
repeatedly.
4 Lane Select Motor (Right) Press the YES/START key to operate move-left/move-right
repeatedly.
5 Paper Advance Motor 3 Press the YES/START key to operate once.
6 Paper Sensor LED Power Supply OFF Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.

Paper Advance Section (Paper Advance Section 2)

No. Display Operation
1 Paper Advance Motor 2 Press the YES/START key to operate up/down repeatedly.
2 Pressure Guide Motor Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.

35310 3/4
 35310
Maintenance

No. Display Operation

3 Paper Advance Pressure Change Motor (Left) Press the YES/START key to operate move-left/move-right
repeatedly.
4 Paper Advance Pressure Change Motor (Right) Press the YES/START key to operate move-left/move-right
repeatedly.

3. Mode

35310 4/4
 35320
Maintenance

Output Check (Processor) [F]

Description for each specification

For the specifications other than [F] specification, this section only gives description that differs from that for [F] specification. See below
for the description for each specification.

Reference
☞ Output Check (Processor) ☞ Output Check (Processor) ☞ Output Check (Processor) [J]
[N] [SM]

z Output Check
Item Specification Reference
Processor Section F ☞ Processor Section (1) (for each ☞ Processor Section (2) (for each

3. Mode
Dryer Section specification) [F] specification) [F]*7
Order Classification Section N ☞ Processor Section (1) [N] ☞ Processor Section (1) [N]
SM ☞ Processor Section (1) [SM] ☞ Processor Section (2) [SM]
J ☞ Processor Section [J] ☞ Tablet Replenishment Section [J]
Common ☞ Dryer Section (common to all
specifications)
☞ Order Classification Section
(common to all specifications)

z Processor Section (1) (for each specification) [F]

No. Display Operation
1 Drive Motor + Drive Cooling Fan Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
2 P1 Heater stop.
3 P2 Heater
4 PS Heater
5 P1 Cooling Water Solenoid Valve
6 P2 Cooling Water Solenoid Valve
7 PS Cooling Water Solenoid Valve
8 Tank Cooling Fan
9 Exhaust Fan
10 Processor Condition Lamp (Green) Press the YES/START key to turn on, and the NO/STOP
11 Processor Condition Lamp (Red) key to turn off.
12 Signal Lamp Press the YES/START key to turn on, and the NO/STOP
key to turn off.

z Processor Section (2) (for each specification) [F]*7

No. Display Operation
1 Replenisher Cartridge Open Motor See ☞ Replenisher Cartridge Open Motor operation.
2 P1R Replenisher Pump YES/START moves each replenishment pump one stroke
3 P2RA Replenisher Pump (maximum) . *1
4 P2RB Replenisher Pump IMPORTANT
5 PSR Replenisher Pump • If each replenishment pump is operated, the initial
value is used for the next opening.

35320 1/9
 35320
Maintenance

No. Display Operation

6 P1R Cartridge Cleaning Valve + Replenisher YES/START operates each cartridge flushing valve and auto
Cartridge Cleaning Pump cleaning pump. *2*3*6
7 P2RA Cartridge Cleaning Valve + Replenisher • Follow the steps 1-4 below.
Cartridge Cleaning Pump • 1. Turn ON the auto cleaning pump.
8 P2RB Cartridge Cleaning Valve + Replenisher • 2. Wait for water pressure to be adjusted for one second.
Cartridge Cleaning Pump
• 3. Open each cartridge flushing valve (maximum 10
seconds).
• 4. Close each cartridge cleaning valve. → Turn OFF the
cleaning pump.
IMPORTANT
• The output amount of the replenisher cartridge
cleaning pump is about 194 ml per 10 seconds.

3. Mode
9 P1R agitation solenoid valve + Replenisher Cartridge YES/START operates P1R agitation solenoid valve +
Cleaning Pump Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump. *2*4
• Follow the steps 1-4 below.
• 1. Turn ON the auto cleaning pump.
• 2. Wait for water pressure to be adjusted for one second.
• 3. Open P1R agitation solenoid valve (maximum three
seconds).
• 4. Close P1R agitation solenoid valve. → Turn OFF the
cleaning pump.

IMPORTANT
• If P1R agitation solenoid valve + Replenisher
Cartridge Cleaning Pump is operated, the initial
value is used for the next opening.
• The output amount of P1R agitation solenoid
valve + Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump is
about 227 ml per 3 seconds.
10 P1 Auto Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge YES/START operates each automated flushing valve and
Cleaning Pump auto cleaning pump. *2*5
11 P2 Auto Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge • Follow the steps 1-4 below.
Cleaning Pump • 1. Turn ON the auto cleaning pump.
12 PS Auto Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge • 2. Wait for water pressure to be adjusted for one second.
Cleaning Pump
• 3. Open each automated flushing valve (maximum three
seconds).
• 4. Close each automated flushing valve. → Turn OFF
the cleaning pump.
*1. If one of the waste solution float switches is ON, the replenishment pump does not work.
*2. If one of the waste solution float switches is ON, each automated flushing valve does not work.
However, auto cleaning pump works regardless of the waste solution float switch. If the operation continues when either of waste solution float
switches is ON, the auto cleaning pump may be damaged.
*3. When Execute is clicked, the message Confirm whether to complete the air pulling out of the Cleaning Pump system piping. Operate the
Replenisher Cartridge Open Motor, prepare the cleaning water does not run into the replenishment tank from the nozzle to check. For
details, see the manual. Would you like to operate the Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump? is shown.
*4. Press the YES/START key to display Confirm whether to complete the air pulling out of the Cleaning Pump system piping. Cleaning
water will be run into the replenishing tank. Please refrain from draining for a long time. For details, refer to the manual. Would you
like to operate the Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump?.
*5. Press the YES/START key to display Confirm whether to complete the air pulling out of the Cleaning Pump system piping. Cleaning
water will be run into the replenishing tank. Please refrain from draining for a long time. For details, refer to the manual. Would you
like to operate the Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump?.
*6. If the cleaning water gets into a tank, the amount of replenishment solution changes. Insert a hose into a cleaning nozzle and execute Output
Check without allowing any water to get in the tank.
When you insert a hose into the cleaning nozzle, we recommend you to operate Replenisher Cartridge Open Motor and move the replenishment
cartridge installation section to the lower position.
For details, see ☞ 27540.
*7. SP1: Entering the service personnel password (2260) enables you to select a mode.

35320 2/9
 35320
Maintenance

Replenisher Cartridge Open Motor operation

Count Replenisher Cartridge Open Motor operation
First Pressing YES/START moves it from the upper position to the lower position. *1
Second Pressing YES/START moves it from the lower position to the upper position. *2

*1. Replenisher Cartridge Open Motor rotates to right.

*2. Replenisher Cartridge Open Motor rotates to left.

z Dryer Section (common to all specifications)

No. Display Operation
1 Dryer Fan Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
2 Dryer Heater 1 Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to

3. Mode
stop.
3 Dryer Heater 2 Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
4 Dryer Heater 3 Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
5 Dryer selection Solenoid Press the YES/START key to operate once.

z Order Classification Section (common to all specifications)

No. Display Operation
1 Sorter Motor Press the YES/START key to operate once.
2 Conveyor Motor Press the YES/START key to operate once.
3 Manual Sorter Switch Lamp Press the YES/START key to turn on, and the NO/STOP
key to turn off.

35320 3/9
 35320
Maintenance

Output Check (Processor) [N]

Description for each specification

For the specifications other than [F] specification, this section only gives description that differs from that for [F] specification. See below
for the description for each specification.

Reference
☞ Output Check (Processor) ☞ Output Check (Processor) [J] ☞ Output Check (Processor) [F]
[SM]

z Explanation
Check the operation of the motor, buzzer and LED etc. at the cursor.

3. Mode
z Processor Section (1) [N]
No. Display Operation
1 Drive Motor + Drive Cooling Fan Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
2 CD Heater Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
3 BF Heater Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
4 STB Heater Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
5 CD Cooling Water Solenoid Valve Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
6 BF Cooling Water Solenoid Valve Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
7 STB Cooling Water Solenoid Valve Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
8 CD Replenisher Pump Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
9 BF Replenisher Pump Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
10 STB Replenisher Pump Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
11 Tank Cooling Fan Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
12 Cleaning Pump Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
13 Exhaust Fan Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
14 Processor Condition Lamp (Green) Press the YES/START key to turn on, and the NO/STOP
key to turn off.
15 Processor Condition Lamp (Red) Press the YES/START key to turn on, and the NO/STOP
key to turn off.
16 Signal Lamp Press the YES/START key to turn on, and the NO/STOP
key to turn off.

z Processor Section (1) [N]

No. Display Operation
1 CD-W Refilling Water Pump Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.

35320 4/9
 35320
Maintenance

No. Display Operation

2 BF-W Refilling Water Pump Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
3 STB 1-W Refilling Water Pump Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
4 STB 2-W Refilling Water Pump Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
5 STB 3-W Refilling Water Pump Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
6 STB 4-W Refilling Water Pump Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.

3. Mode

35320 5/9
 35320
Maintenance

Output Check (Processor) [SM]

Description for each specification

For the specifications other than [F] specification, this section only gives description that differs from that for [F] specification. See below
for the description for each specification.

Reference
☞ Output Check (Processor) ☞ Output Check (Processor) [J] ☞ Output Check (Processor) [F] aaaaa
[N]

z Processor Section (1) [SM]

No. Display Operation

3. Mode
1 Drive Motor + Drive Cooling Fan Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
2 CD Heater Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
3 BF Heater Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
4 STB Heater Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
5 CD Cooling Water Solenoid Valve Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
6 BF Cooling Water Solenoid Valve Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
7 STB Cooling Water Solenoid Valve Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
8 Tank Cooling Fan Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
9 STB 1-W Refilling Water Pump Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
10 STB 2-W Refilling Water Pump Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
11 STB 3-W Refilling Water Pump Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
12 Cleaning Pump Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
13 Exhaust Fan Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
14 Processor Condition Lamp (Green) Press the YES/START key to turn on, and the NO/STOP
key to turn off.
15 Processor Condition Lamp (Red) Press the YES/START key to turn on, and the NO/STOP
key to turn off.
16 Signal Lamp Press the YES/START key to turn on, and the NO/STOP
key to turn off.

z Processor Section (2) [SM]

No. Display Operation
1 CD-A Replenisher Pump Press the YES/START key to operate once.
2 CD-B Replenisher Pump Press the YES/START key to operate once.
3 CD-C Replenisher Pump Press the YES/START key to operate once.
4 CD-W Water Supply Pump Press the YES/START key to operate once.
5 BF-A Replenisher Pump Press the YES/START key to operate once.
6 BF-B Replenisher Pump Press the YES/START key to operate once.

35320 6/9
 35320
Maintenance

No. Display Operation

7 BF-W Water Supply Pump Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
8 STB Replenisher Pump Press the YES/START key to operate once.
9 STB 4-W Water Supply Pump Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
10 Circulation Pump Stand-by Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.

3. Mode

35320 7/9
 35320
Maintenance

Output Check (Processor) [J]

Description for each specification

For the specifications other than [F] specification, this section only gives description that differs from that for [F] specification. See below
for the description for each specification.

Reference
☞ Output Check (Processor) ☞ Output Check (Processor) ☞ Output Check (Processor) [F]
[N] [SM]

z Processor Section [J]

No. Display Operation

3. Mode
1 Drive Motor + Drive Cooling Fan Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
2 CD Heater Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
3 BF Heater Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
4 STB Heater Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
5 CD Cooling Water Solenoid Valve Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
6 BF Cooling Water Solenoid Valve Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
7 STB Cooling Water Solenoid Valve Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
8 Tank Cooling Fan Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
9 CD Water Supply Pump Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
10 S -> B Replenishment Pump Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
11 STB Water Supply Pump Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
12 Cleaning Pump Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
13 Exhaust Fan Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
14 Processor Condition Lamp (Green) Press the YES/START key to turn on, and the NO/STOP
key to turn off.
15 Processor Condition Lamp (Red) Press the YES/START key to turn on, and the NO/STOP
key to turn off.
16 Signal Lamp Press the YES/START key to turn on, and the NO/STOP
key to turn off.

z Tablet Replenishment Section [J]

No. Display Operation
1 CD Operation Lamp Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
2 BF Operation Lamp Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
3 STB Operation Lamp Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop.
4 CD Drum Motor (Forward) Press the YES/START key to operate once.

35320 8/9
 35320
Maintenance

No. Display Operation

5 CD Drum Motor (Reverse) Press the YES/START key to operate once.
6 BF Drum Motor (Forward) Press the YES/START key to operate once.
7 BF Drum Motor (Reverse) Press the YES/START key to operate once.
8 STB Drum Motor (Forward) Press the YES/START key to operate once.
9 STB Drum Motor (Reverse) Press the YES/START key to operate once.
10 Elevator Motor (Up) Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop. Temporarily stops if detected by the elevator middle
sensor. When two seconds passes, starts again. When detected
by the elevator upper sensor, stops.
11 Elevator Motor (Down) Press the YES/START key to start, and the NO/STOP key to
stop. Stops when detected by the elevator lower sensor.
12 STB Tablet Conveyor Motor Press the YES/START key to operate once.

3. Mode

35320 9/9
 35400
Maintenance

Reading and Writing Data

Bringing up the display

Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Reading and Writing Data
Reading and Writing Data
Item Item Reference
All Data Writing Data (CPU -> Floppy Disk) ☞ Writing Data (CPU → Floppy Disk), Reading
Reading Data (Floppy Disk -> CPU) Data (Floppy Disk → CPU)Åv
Format Floppy Disk ☞ Format Floppy Disk
Writing All Data (CPU -> Media)*1 ☞ Writing All Data (CPU -> Media), Reading All
Reading All Data (Media -> CPU)*1 Data (Media -> CPU)
Reading Data (Auto Backup Data -> CPU) ☞ Reading Data (Auto Backup Data -> CPU)

3. Mode
Reading Data (Noritsu-eNET -> CPU) aaaaa
Service Data*1 Writing Data (CPU -> Floppy Disk) ☞ Writing Data (CPU → Floppy Disk), Reading
Reading Data (Floppy Disk -> CPU) Data (Floppy Disk → CPU)Åv
Format Floppy Disk ☞ Format Floppy Disk
Writing All Data (CPU -> Media) ☞ Writing All Data (CPU -> Media), Reading All
Reading All Data (Media -> CPU) Data (Media -> CPU)

*1. Service Mode

z Explanation

z Writing Data (CPU → Floppy Disk), Reading Data (Floppy Disk → CPU)
The data can be read or written individually when the service personnel password (2260) has been entered.
Data can be saved via the close down checks. (User level)
When carrying out Reading Data/Writing Data via Service Data, four floppy disks are required to save the data for each printer,
processor, and scanner section.
NOTE
• The floppy disks shown below are required.
User Level Service personnel level
Backup data INITIAL DATA1 INITIAL DATA3
INITIAL DATA2 INITIAL DATA4

IMPORTANT
• When Writing Data is carried out in the user level, the individual data is written in the same manner as that in the
service level.
• When Writing Data is carried out via Service Data, Data which is to be written to the Back Up DATA of user level is
separated to the FDs of INITIAL DATA1, INITIAL DATA2, INITIAL DATA3, and INITIAL DATA4.
• When the Reading Data is carried out via Service Data, User Setting Data appears. The Operator Selections, IX
Data Settings (except serial number) and Print Channel Setting (except image data) are read after reading the User
Setting Data. You can create print channels using channel data of another PC.
It is possible to read User Setting data from the INITIAL DATA1 or Back Up DATA that is saved in the user level.
• Data related to the main, image processing and Pricing Unit is written to INITIAL DATA1.
• Data related to the printer, colorimeter unit, LASER and Correction Data for Brightness of the Edge of Image Field is
written to INITIAL DATA2.
• Data related to the processor is written to INITIAL DATA3.
• Data related to the scanner and auto film carrier is written to INITIAL DATA4.
• When the Reading Data is carried out in the user level, the data cannot be read individually. All the data is read from
a floppy disk.
• Be sure to update the light source when having performed Reading Data from the floppy disk written the data of Back
Up DATA of user level or Back Up DATA of service personnel level.
☞ Scanner data ([Link])

35400 1/4
 35400
Maintenance

NOTE
• For the Stand Alone Printer, there is no INITIAL DATA4 FD.
• For 32SD, image processing: [Link] does not exist.
Back Up DATA FD
Item File name Remarks
Main (*1) [Link]
Image Processing (*1) [Link]
Pricing Unit (*1) [Link]
Printer (*2) [Link]
Colorimeter unit (*2) [Link]
LASER (*2) [Link]
Correction Data for Brightness of the Edge of Image Field roi_SHD.lzh

3. Mode
(*2)
Processor (*3) [Link]
Auto Film Carrier (*4) [Link]

S-2/S-3/S-4
Back Up DATA FD
Item File name
Scanner (*4) [Link] Misreg110_1.lzh MisregAMC_7.lzh (*7)
Misreg135_1.lzh Misreg110_9.lzh MisregAMC_8.lzh (*7)
Misreg135_2.lzh (*7) Misreg110_11.lzh (*7) MisregAMC_9.lzh (*6)
Misreg135_4.lzh (*5) (*7) Misreg2B_1.lzh MisregCROP_1.Izh
Misreg135_4.lzh (*7) MisregMMC_1.lzh (*6) MisregMFC_1.Izh
Misreg135_8.lzh (*7) MisregMMC_3.lzh (*7) MisregMFC_2.lzh (*7)
Misreg135_9.lzh MisregMMC_5.lzh (*5) (*7) MisregMFC_4.lzh (*7)
Misreg240_1.lzh MisregMMC_7.lzh (*7) MisregMFC_6.lzh (*7)
Misreg240_4.lzh MisregMMC_8.lzh (*7) MisregMFC_7.lzh (*7)
Misreg240_5.lzh (*5) (*7) MisregMMC_9.lzh (*6) MisregMFC_8.lzh (*7)
Misreg240_7.lzh (*7) MisregAMC_1.lzh (*6) MisregMFC_9.Izh
Misreg240_8.lzh (*7) MisregAMC_3.lzh (*7)
Misreg240_9.lzh MisregAMC_5.lzh (*5) (*7)

S1-II
Back Up DATA FD
Item File name
Scanner (*4) Misreg135_1.lzh Misreg240_1.lzh

• (*1) Data which is to be written to INITIAL DATA1 for Service Data.

• (*2) Data which is to be written to INITIAL DATA2 for Service Data.
• (*3) Data which is to be written to INITIAL DATA3 for Service Data.
• (*4) Data which is to be written to INITIAL DATA4 for Service Data.
• (*5) This item is not contained in the backup depending on the version of the system program of S-2 and S-3.
NOTE
• (*5) of the list is the data which has not been used after the upgrading the system program.
If upgrading, the data cannot be deleted automatically. So the data which has not been used after the upgrading may still be
contained in the backup.
• (*6) This item is not contained in the backup of S-2 and S-3.
• (*7) This item is not contained in the backup of S-4.

35400 2/4
 35400
Maintenance

z Format Floppy Disk

Format (Initialize) floppy disks. Data can only be written onto a floppy disk which has been formatted.
IMPORTANT
• Available floppy disk: 3.5 inch type 2 HD
• Floppy disks must be 1.44 MB format but not 1.2 MB format.

z 3. Reading the laser history (floppy disk → CPU)

If an error occurs on the laser, read the data to analyze it.
When replacing the laser control PCB, read the data that is saved using writing data function.
IMPORTANT
• Use this mode to read the data into the laser control PCB.
• The data cannot be read into the laser control PCB via All Data Reading or Service Data Reading.

3. Mode
• Some data of BkData2100 is to be read.

z Writing All Data (CPU -> Media), Reading All Data (Media -> CPU)
• Backup the data to media other than FD and USB flash memory.

The data to backup is as follows.

Data Explanation
BkData###.dat The data saved with the usual backup
[Link]*1 ID photo data
Template*1 Frame data set in the print channel setting
[Link]*1 Customer information in the edit data
*1
[Link] Package frame information set by user
[Link]*1 Tiling data
[Link]*1 Data of the tone curve shape in the Edit Mode
[Link]*1 Data including the standard format of the pricing sheet print and the insertion image path
[Link]*1 Data including the pricing sheet print format that the user created and the insertion image path
PuPrt*1 All the image data included in the pricing sheet print is saved in this folder.

*1. Not saved as backup data for DLS specification.

z Reading Data (Auto Backup Data -> CPU)

At the Close Down Checks, the data automatically saved to HDD just before entering to the program timer mode can be read.
Location to save the data: C:\NKData\BkData
NOTE
• If the user has failed in Daily Setup and lost backup FD, read the data with this mode.

z Data that cannot be saved

The following data cannot be saved in the Reading and Writing Data. When replacing the HDD or PC main unit, be sure to save the
following data beforehand.
Data name Destination Data name Destination
Image data C:\Image Image data saved in the Edit C:\EditData
mode.

IMPORTANT
• The destinations of the image data may be changed. When you back up the data, confirm the destinations on the
Operator Selections display.

z Scanner data ([Link])

Among the scanner data written in the floppy disk, the data updated by the Light Source Update is pressed and saved with setting the
data other than that of the maximum/minimum magnification to 0.

35400 3/4
 35400
Maintenance

IMPORTANT
• When having read the floppy disk data made a backup, the Light Source Update is necessary after reading the data.
For this reason, the software is set as follows.

Software contents (after reading FD data)

Set to be updated the light source automatically after the daily setup.
Set the attention message urging you to update the light source to occur by switching the film carrier.

• When the daily setup is not performed after writing the FD data to QSS, be sure to update the light source.
See the Scanner Service Manual.

NOTE
• The reason why the Light Source Update is necessary is that the Light Source Update data saved on the side of QSS at that point
will be available and will not be updated to the normal data even though the backup data has been read normally.
And also, the second reason is that the FD data made a backup remains as initial value after initializing the data.

3. Mode
• The reason why the data updated by the Light Source Update is set to 0 in writing to FD is to reduce the storage capacity and to
save in one FD.

z Functions

z Path Setting
When reading and writing data, carry out the path setting to save to the media except FD.
Only the media type set as Input/Output in option registration can be carried out the path setting.
NOTE
• Enter the service personnel password (2260) to configure these settings.

z Data that will not be replaced by backup data

Basically, all data are replaced by backup data.
Data below are not replaced.
Data that are not replaced
Data of total counter, daily totals counter, daily sales totals, paper remaining amount, order number, archive number, total counter 2, net
order spooler place
Laser Operation Record*1

*1. Reading the laser operation record is not available from reading all data or service data but available from reading the laser history (floppy disk →
CPU).

35400 4/4
 35410
Maintenance

Reading and Writing Data [Stand Alone Scanner]

Bringing up the display

Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Reading and Writing Data
Reading and Writing Data
Item Item Reference
All Data Writing Data (CPU -> Floppy Disk) ☞ Writing Data (CPU → Floppy Disk), Reading
Reading Data (Floppy Disk -> CPU) Data (Floppy Disk → CPU)Å
Format Floppy Disk ☞ Format Floppy Disk
Writing All Data (CPU -> Media)*1 ☞ Writing All Data (CPU -> Media), Reading All
Reading All Data (Media -> CPU)*1 Data (Media -> CPU)
Reading Data (Auto Backup Data -> CPU) ☞ Reading Data (Auto Backup Data -> CPU)

3. Mode
Reading Data (Noritsu-eNET -> CPU) aaaaa
Service Data*1 Writing Data (CPU -> Floppy Disk) ☞ Writing Data (CPU → Floppy Disk), Reading
Reading Data (Floppy Disk -> CPU) Data (Floppy Disk → CPU)Å
Format Floppy Disk ☞ Format Floppy Disk
Writing All Data (CPU -> Media) ☞ Writing All Data (CPU -> Media), Reading All
Reading All Data (Media -> CPU) Data (Media -> CPU)

*1. Service Mode

z Explanation

z Writing Data (CPU → Floppy Disk), Reading Data (Floppy Disk → CPU)
The data can be read or written individually when the service personnel password (2260) has been entered.
Data can be saved via the close down checks. (User level)
When carrying out Reading Data/Writing Data via Service Data, two floppy disks are required to save the data for each input and
scanner section.
NOTE
• The floppy disks shown below are required.
User Level Service personnel level
Backup data INITIAL DATA1 INITIAL DATA4

IMPORTANT
• When Writing Data is carried out in the user level, the individual data is written in the same manner as that in the
service level.
• When Writing Data is carried out via Service Data, data which is to be written to the Back Up DATA of user level is
separated to the FDs of INITIAL DATA1 and INITIAL DATA4.
• When the Reading Data is carried out via Service Data, User Setting Data appears. The Operator Selections, IX
Data Settings (except serial number) and Print Channel Setting (except image data) are read after reading the User
Setting Data. You can create print channels using channel data of another PC.
• Data related to the input section is written to INITIAL DATA1.
• Data related to the scanner and film carrier are written to INITIAL DATA4.
• When the Reading Data is carried out in the user level, the data cannot be read individually. All the data is written to
a floppy disk.
It is possible to read User Setting data from the INITIAL DATA1 or Back Up DATA that is saved in the user level.
• Be sure to update the light source when having performed Reading Data from the floppy disk written the data of Back
Up DATA of user level or Back Up DATA of service personnel level.
☞ Scanner data ([Link])
Back Up DATA FD
Item File name Remarks
Main (*1) [Link]

35410 1/3
 35410
Maintenance

Back Up DATA FD
Item File name Remarks
Image Processing (*1) [Link]
Pricing Unit (*1) [Link]
Auto Film Carrier (*4) [Link]

Back Up DATA FD
Item File name
Scanner (*4) [Link] Misreg110_1.lzh MisregMFC_1.Izh
Misreg135_1.lzh Misreg110_9.lzh MisregMFC_2.Izh
Misreg135_2.lzh Misreg110_11.lzh MisregMFC_4.Izh
Misreg135_4.lzh (*5) Misreg2B_1.lzh MisregMFC_6.Izh
Misreg135_6.lzh MisregMMC_3.lzh MisregMFC_7.Izh

3. Mode
Misreg135_8.lzh MisregMMC_5.lzh (*5) MisregMFC_8.Izh
Misreg135_9.lzh MisregMMC_7.lzh MisregMFC_9.Izh
Misreg240_1.lzh MisregMMC_8.lzh
Misreg240_4.lzh MisregAMC_3.lzh
Misreg135_5.lzh (*5) MisregAMC_5.lzh (*5)
Misreg240_7.lzh MisregAMC_7.lzh
Misreg240_8.lzh MisregAMC_8.lzh
Misreg240_9.lzh MisregCROP_1.Izh

• (*1) Data which is to be written to INITIAL DATA1 for Service Data.

• (*4) Data which is to be written to INITIAL DATA4 for Service Data.
• (*5) This item is not contained in the backup depending on the version of the system program.
NOTE
• (*5) of the list is the data which has not been used after the upgrading the system program.
If upgrading, the data cannot be deleted automatically. So the data which has not been used after the upgrading may still be
contained in the backup.

IMPORTANT
• The data relating to the auto film carrier (Auto gain standard value and Frame stop position correction) is stored in the
EEP-ROM of the AFC/Scanner control PCB. Therefore, it cannot be saved to a floppy disk.

z Format Floppy Disk

Format (Initialize) floppy disks. Data can only be written onto a floppy disk which has been formatted.
IMPORTANT
• Available floppy disk: 3.5 inch type 2 HD
• Floppy disks must be 1.44 MB format but not 1.2 MB format.

z Writing All Data (CPU -> Media), Reading All Data (Media -> CPU)
Backup the data to the media except FD.
The data to backup is as follows.

Data Explanation
BkData####.dat The data saved with the usual backup

z Reading Data (Auto Backup Data -> CPU)

At the Close Down Checks, the data automatically saved to HDD just before entering to the program timer mode can be read.
Location to save the data: C:\NKData\BkData
NOTE
• If the user has failed in Daily Setup and lost backup FD, read the data with this mode.

35410 2/3
 35410
Maintenance

z Scanner data ([Link])

Among the scanner data written in the floppy disk, the data updated by the Light Source Update is pressed and saved with setting the
data other than that of the maximum/minimum magnification to 0.
IMPORTANT
• When having read the floppy disk data made a backup, the Light Source Update is necessary after reading the data.
For this reason, the software is set as follows.
Software contents (after reading FD data)
Set to be updated the light source automatically after the daily setup.
Set the attention message urging you to update the light source to occur by switching the film carrier.

• When the daily setup is not performed after writing the FD data to QSS, be sure to update the light source.
See the Scanner Service Manual.

3. Mode
NOTE
• The reason why the Light Source Update is necessary is that the Light Source Update data saved on the side of QSS at that point
will be available and will not be updated to the normal data even though the backup data has been read normally.
And also, the second reason is that the FD data made a backup remains as initial value after initializing the data.
• The reason why the data updated by the Light Source Update is set to 0 in writing to FD is to reduce the storage capacity and to
save in one FD.

z Functions

z Path Setting
When reading and writing data, carry out the path setting to save to the media except FD.
Only the media type set as Input/Output in option registration can be carried out the path setting.
NOTE
• Enter the service personnel password (2260) to configure these settings.

z Data that will not be replaced by backup data

Basically, all data are replaced by backup data.
Some data are not replaced however, which are listed below.

Data that are not replaced

Data of total counter, daily totals counter, daily sales totals, order number, archive number, total counter 2

35410 3/3
 35450
Maintenance

Procedures for Backup & Restore Software

IMPORTANT
• To backup at the recovery when installing, backup the QSS system data, as well.
☞ 35400

z Backup data
Backup data
DLS system data minilab folder
Index logo data Logos folder

NOTE
• When the data other than above is to be saved, it can be added optionally.

3. Mode
z Start procedure

1. Quit the application at Close down checks in the QSS menu to switch to the Windows desktop display.
2. Access the DLS Backup & Restore display.
Bringing up the display
Start → Programs → Administrative tools (common) → DLS System Management Software → Backup & Restore

S072408

z Backup procedure

1. Select Actions → Preferences from the menu.

35450 1/4
 35450
Maintenance

2. The Backup Preferences display appears.

3. Mode
S072409

3. Select the destination for saving the data.

For saving the daily data at close down checks, it is recommended to save the data to drive U or a storage media such as MO
and Zip. Prepare the storage media of 64 MB or more.
When changing the setting data, it is recommended to save the data to CD-R.
IMPORTANT
• When making the backup before carrying out recovery of the IPW, it is recommended to save the data to CD-R.
4. Click OK.
5. When you want to save optional data, use the following procedure.
(1) Put a check mark to the check box next to Select additional files?
(2) Select the data you want to save in the Source list. And drag the selected data to the Destination list.
6. When you save the data to a storage media, insert the media.
7. Click Start Backup.
8. The Backup Process display appears.

S072410

9. When the message appears, click Yes.

35450 2/4
 35450
Maintenance

10. Click Start.

Saving the data starts.
11. When the data saving is complete, click Exit.
12. When you finished to save the data to a storage media, remove the media.
z Restore procedure

1. When the data have been saved to a storage media, insert the media.
2. Load the TOC file.
(1) Open the drive or directory where the backup data have been saved.
(2) Right-click the [Link] file.

3. Mode
(3) Click Load TOC.

S072411

3. The data to read to the Destination list appear.

4. Make sure that the check boxes of Restore Registry? and Restore archive database index file?
have not been checked.
When the check boxes have been checked, remove the checks.
IMPORTANT
• When the Restore archive database index file? check box is checked, the archive database index file is
returned to the setting data which have been saved. The changed data after saving become invalid.

IMPORTANT
• When restoring the data after carrying out recovery of the IPW, be sure to put a check mark to the Restore
archive database index file? check box.
5. Click Start Restore.

35450 3/4
 35450
Maintenance

6. The Restore Process display appears.

3. Mode
S072412

7. Click Start.
8. When the message appears, click Yes to All.
Reading the data starts.
9. When the data reading is complete, click Exit.
10. When you read the data from a storage media, remove the media.

35450 4/4
 35500
Maintenance

System Version Check

Bringing up the display

Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → System Version Check
Display (32) Display (32SD)

3. Mode
Display (32, 32SD)

z Explanation
NOTE
• The display returns to the Maintenance display by pressing NO: End, but it returns to the Software Upgrade display if pressed
it on the Software Upgrade display.

z Accessories

‹ CPU
The name of each control PCB is displayed.
NOTE
• For DLS specification, pricing unit, NMC and NMC2 do not appear.

‹ Version
The system program version number saved on all control PCBs is displayed.

35500 1/3
 35500
Maintenance

‹ Version (Main)
Version of Main (32SD)
Functions Displays Main software version.
Image Quality Displays Image Quality software version.

‹ Version (LASER)
You can check the type of the laser unit by checking the version name of LASER.
Laser unit Display Laser unit Display
Type A1 #.# # # ×1E1 *1
Type B1 #.# # # ×1B1
#.# # # ×1A1 #.# # # ×1B*2
#.# # # ×1E*2
Type f #.# # # ×Ff

3. Mode
*1. The display may appear depending on the type of the B and G laser driver.
*2. The display may appear depending on the difference of the laser version.

No. Display Explanation

1 2 3

LASER 1.089 X1 Ef1 N OK

B f
A
E
B
EF
F
1 1.089 Shows the software version of the laser control PCB.
2 A, B, E, F The type of the B and G laser drivers is displayed.
• A: B laser driver (J390973), G laser driver (J390973)
• B: B laser driver (J390929), G laser driver (J390929)
• E: B laser driver (J391160), G laser driver (J391160)
• F: B laser driver (J391160), G laser driver (J391231)
F: B laser driver (J391160), G laser driver (J390929)
3 f Shows the laser unit type.
• f: laser unit f (Z025544)*1

*1. Not displayed if the system is equipped with the Laser Unit (Type A1) or Laser Unit (Type B1)

35500 2/3
 35500
Maintenance

‹ Version (scanner)
The Auto Film Carrier version name indicates the LED light source unit used for [S-2/S-3].
The Auto Film Carrier unit name indicates the type of the scanner used for [S-4].
The Auto Film Carrier unit name indicates the type of the scanner used for [S-4/S1-II].
LED light source unit type display (S-2/S-3) Scanner type display (S-4/S1-II)
LED light source unit type display (S-4)
LED light source unit Display LED light source unit Scanner Display
Type 0 Not displayed - - -
Type 1 # # # # L1 - - -
Type 2 # # # # L2 - - -
Type 3 # # # # L3 - - -
Type 4 # # # # L4 - - -
− − Type 0 S-4 # # # # S4

3. Mode
− − Type 1 S-4 # # # #L1 S4
− − - S1-II # # # # S1-2

NOTE
• If error occurs such as the system program cannot be executed or read, the boot flash version is displayed.

‹ Communication
The communication status of all control PCBs is displayed.
OK: Communicating
-: Not communicating, not registered as an option, not connected.
• Depending on the ARCNET communication feature, Communication on the System Version Check may not be able to decide if
the ARCNET communication is working or not.
• In that case, the ARCNET communication status can be checked more correctly by using Self-Diagnosis Program.
For details, check the ARCNET Communication Diagnosis Manual.

z Profile Data
The profile data version is displayed.
NOTE
• It is displayed only when the service personnel password (2260) has been entered.

z DLL/Driver
The versions of DLL and SYS file (driver) are displayed.
NOTE
• It is displayed only when the service personnel password (2260) has been entered.

35500 3/3
 35600
Maintenance

System upgrade for each control PCB (CPU)

Bringing up the display

Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Software Upgrade

3. Mode
S3060-00-SM00

IMPORTANT
• This section explains the procedure for updating the system of each control PCBs.
For details about how to perform Software Upgrade, refer to Updating the QSS software in Installation procedures of the
QSS software.
See the PC Service Manual.
• When the external PC compatible with the CT-1 or printer driver has been connected, do not receive the order or make
prints before or during software upgrading. Upgrading may not be performed normally.
• When the CD-R external writing system has been connected, be sure not to turn on/off the power supply just before or
during upgrading. Upgrading may not be performed normally.

z Explanation
NOTE
• When the software upgrade is completed, the alarm informs the completion of the upgrade. After 1 minute, the display changes to
the System Version Check display automatically. Pressing NO: End also changes the display to the System Version Check
display.

z Software Upgrade (CD-ROM)

Copy the system program from the program CD to the directory for software upgrade and save it.
Upgrade each control PCB (CPU) using system program data saved in the directory for software upgrade.

z Software Upgrade (HD)

Upgrade each control PCB (CPU) using system program data saved in the directory for software upgrade.
The software upgrade is carried out individually for each control PCB (CPU).
NOTE
• It is displayed only when the service personnel password (2260) has been entered.

z Operation procedure

1. Before upgrading, backup the system data.

☞ 35400
IMPORTANT
• This backup data is stored just incase that the version upgrade would be failed, and used for returning to the
previous version.

35600 1/2
 35600
Maintenance

2. When Software Upgrade (CD-ROM) is selected, insert the program CD.

Each control PCB (CPU) is upgraded.
IMPORTANT
• Data reading after upgrading is not necessary as upgrading does not initialize the system data.
Do not read the backup data of the previous version after upgrading is successfully ended as it may
malfunction.
However, since the procedure differs depending on the versions, be sure to refer to the REPLACEMENT
INSTRUCTION for details.
3. Backup the system data after upgrading.
☞ 35400
IMPORTANT
• Be sure to backup the system data of the new version, and be careful not to mix the backup data of the
previous version with the new one.

3. Mode
z Data

z Control PCB (CPU), system file name, and software to be upgraded

At replacing any of the control PCBs, check the check box of the software to be upgraded, and then carry out upgrading (HD).

Control PCB Software to be upgraded System file name Remarks

Processor control PCB*1 Processor [Link] [Link]
Printer control PCB*1*4 Printer [Link] [Link] Other specifications
than the quad magazine
unit*4
supply0_1.sys supply1_1.sys Quad magazine unit*4
AFC/scanner control PCB*3 Auto film carrier [Link] [Link]
PU control PCB*1*2 Pricing Unit [Link] [Link]
Laser control PCB*1 LASER [Link] [Link]
D-ICE control PCB D-ICE control PCB [Link] [Link] 32
D-ICE PCB digital ICE d_ice.sys
Image processing PCB Image processing PCB [Link] [Link]
Image correction PCB Image correction PCB [Link] [Link]
*3
PC-scanner interface PCB PC-scanner interface PCB [Link] [Link] 32SD
Switch control PCB Switch control PCB [Link] [Link]
Colorimeter Control PCB*1 Colorimeter unit [Link] [Link]

*1. In case of the Stand Alone Scanner, be sure not to check the check boxes because they are not set.
*2. Not displayed for DLS specification.
*3. In case of the Stand Alone Printer, this does not appear.
*4. When the system program is upgraded to the one supporting the quad paper magazine, the system automatically recognizes whether it is equipped
with the quad magazine unit, and either of the system files are read into the printer control PCB.
However, all the system files are read in the hard disk.

z The location of the system program

Software Upgrade (CD-ROM)
CD-ROM\Sys
Software Upgrade (HD)
C:\Noritsukoki\QSS-32_33\Data\Sys

35600 2/2
 35700
Maintenance

Operation Information

Bringing up the display

PTBurn Interface :: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Operation Information
Operation Information

3. Mode
z Explanation
Operation Information
Item Explanation
Error Record Error records are displayed in the order from the latest one of those occurred.
The latest 20 errors can be checked.
NOTE
• Up to 500 errors can be checked when the service personnel password (2260) has been entered.
If the number of errors exceeds the limit, the oldest one is deleted.
Daily Setup History The daily setup history from the latest setup is displayed.
All data for the past 7 setups will be displayed, and any data prior to that will be deleted.

z Laser Operation Record

Laser Operation Record
(Type A1 or Type B1) (Type Ff)

35700 1/2
 35700
Maintenance

z Laser Operation Record (Type A1 or Type B1)

Turned ON Time Record, Turned ON Operation Count, Polygon Mirror Operation Time and Operation Count of each laser (R, G and
B) are shown.

z Functions
When replacing the laser unit, reset each set value to 0.
NOTE
• The date when the data is reset is displayed on the lower left part of the display.

z Laser Operation Record (Type Ff)

Item Explanation
Laser Operation Record You can check operation records of laser-related parts.
IMPORTANT

3. Mode
• The laser operation record PCB maintains the data of the Serial Number, Laser
Generation Accumulated Time, Laser Generation Count, Polygon Mirror Total
Operation Time and Polygon Mirror Operation Count.
The data listed above is not changed if loading all the data into the system with the
Reading and Writing Data.
• The data listed above can be maintained up to five.
Laser Unit Serial Number Displays the serial No. of the laser unit.
Laser component information Displays the laser code described in the laser operation record PCB (in the laser unit).
Do not change the laser code because an error may occur.
Serial Number Displays the serial No. of the system that installed the laser unit.
NOTE
• Serial Number displays the serial No. detected in Machine Specification.
The Serial Number data is maintained in the laser unit.
Laser Generation Accumulated Displays the total lighting time of the R, G and B lasers.
Time
Laser Generation Count Displays the operation counts of the R, G and B lasers.
Polygon Mirror Total Operation Displays the polygon mirror operation time.
Time
Polygon Mirror Operation Count Displays the polygon mirror operation count.

35700 2/2
 35800
Maintenance

Machine Specification

z Display
Bringing up the display
PTBurn Interface :: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Machine Specification

3. Mode
S3066-00-SM00
NOTE
• Enter the service personnel password (2260) to configure these settings.

z Explanation

z Machine Type Registration

Register the machine type.
IMPORTANT
• If the message After restarted, execute following adjustment is displayed after changing the machine type, carry
out following settings.
Not displayed for Stand Alone Scanner specification.
• Drive Motor Revolution Count Auto Adjustment: ☞ 33502
• Pump Output Amount Measurement: ☞ 33003
• Thermosensor Calibration: ☞ 33500

z Serial Number (Input range: 00000000 to 99999999)

The Serial Number of the machine can be set or checked.
At the installation, enter the production number.

z Process Specification (Input range: 0 to 60)

Use this mode to set the process specification for the system.
Not displayed for Stand Alone Scanner specification.

z Processing Solution Display

Set the display of the chemical solution names by process specification.
Not displayed for Stand Alone Scanner specification.
Processing solution name
CD BF STB
P1 P2 PS
P1 P2 P3
CD BF TCS

35800 1/3
 35800
Maintenance

Processing solution name

PS1 PS2 PS3
PJ1 PJ2 PJ3

z Language (Initial value: ENGLISH)

The language loaded by the system program can be set.

ENGLISH KOREAN
JAPANESE PEKINESE
FRENCH TAIWANESE
GERMAN DANISH
ITALIAN GREEK
SPANISH DUTCH

3. Mode
PORTUGUESE FINNISH
RUSSIAN SWEDISH
INDONESIAN -

z HELP Language (Initial value: ENGLISH)

The language used to display the HELP messages of Attention/Error can be set.

z Installation Date
The installation date of the system can be checked and set.

z Power Supply Specification

The power supply specification of the system can be checked.

Power supply specification table

1P2W 200 V 3P-3W 220 V
1P2W 208 V 3P-3W 230 V
1P2W 220 V 3P-3W 240 V
1P2W 230 V 3P-4W 346 V
1P2W 240 V 3P-4W 380 V
1P-3W 100/200 V 3P-4W 400 V
3P-3W 200 V 3P-4W 415 V
3P-3W 208 V 3P3W/1P2W 100/200 V

z Terminal name (Initial value: computer name)

Setting QSS terminal name is available.

z Monitor Type (Initial value: TYPE 1)

Select a monitor to use with the QSS from TYPE 1, TYPE 2 and Directly Input.

Monitor Type
TYPE 1 The number of pixels is fixed to 1024 pixels in width by 768 in height.
TYPE 2 The number of pixels is fixed to 1280 pixels in width by 1024 in height.
Directly Input Resolution of each monitor is displayed in conjunction with monitor type indication.
(Initial value: 1024 × 768 pixels)

NOTE
• The monitor used in QSS is set to 1024 × 768 pixels display.
However, there are LCD monitors that display the resolution at only 1020 × 1280 pixels.
If this monitor is used, the displayed image is enlarged in the vertical direction.
In this case, set the monitor type setting to TYPE 2 to prevent enlarging the Judgement Display or Edit Display in the vertical
direction.

35800 2/3
 35800
Maintenance

z Circulation Pump Stand-by Function (only for SM specification)

Circulation Pump Stand-by function can be set in this mode.

z SM Replenishment Setting (only for SM specification)

Forced replenishment ON/OFF can be set.

z Functions

z Program Timer Setting

The mode can be moved to the program timer setting.
At the installation, set the date/time and program timer.

z Machine information

3. Mode
The machine type information is displayed.

35800 3/3
 35920
Maintenance

Self-diagnostic

Bringing up the display

PTBurn Interface :: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Self-diagnostic
Description for Self-diagnostic
In Self-diagnostic, there are Image Path Check and Media Drive Self-diagnostic.
• For details of Media Drive Self-diagnostic, see ☞ Media Drive Self-diagnostic.

Display (Self-diagnostic: 32 and 32SD)

3. Mode
Display (Image Path Check: 32) Display (Image Path Check: 32SD)

Failed portion display Failed portion display

z Explanation

z Image Path Check

Transfers the data in each data path to judge the failure part by the CRC check or data comparison.

35920 1/7
 35920
Maintenance

z Media Series Image Path

Put a check mark for Media Series Image Path and perform the following checks, if an abnormal print is made from the scanned image
though the scanned image saved to the storage media was normal.
Diagnosis of the Media Series Image Path (32)
Main PC -> Image Processing PCB (Input Memory) Image Correction
Image Processing PCB (Input Memory) -> Image Processing Image Correction PCB Solo Check
PCB (Expanded Memory)
Image Processing PCB (Expanded Memory) -> Main PC Image Correction PCB Connection Check
Main PC -> Image Processing PCB (Expanded Memory)

z Film Series Image Path

Use this function if unevenness occurs on scanned images.

3. Mode
Diagnosis of the Film Series Image Path
32 32SD
Image Correction PCB Solo Check Scanner → Main PC
Image Correction PCB Connection Check Main PC → Laser control PCB
D-ICE PCB Memory Check Photometry Section Dirt Check
D-ICE PCB Internal Image Path Check −
Scanner -> D-ICE PCB Input Section −
D-ICE PCB -> Main PC −
D-ICE PCB -> Image Processing PCB (Input Memory) −
Image Processing PCB (Input Memory) -> Main PC −
Image Processing PCB -> Main PC −
Photometry Section Dirt Check −

NOTE
• The Film Series Image Path is not displayed for the Stand-alone Printer.

z Test Print
Allows you to select Test Print for checking the test print, if an abnormal print is made from the scanned image though the scanned
image saved to the storage media was normal.
NOTE
• Also perform the checks in the following conditions.
• Lines and noises are seen on the print.
• The color on the print is not good. (Black and white are not good.)
• The color on the print gets worse by performing the setup.
• The color on the print does not become better by performing the setup.

NOTE
• ← indicates it is same as on the left.
• − stands for unused.

Diagnosis of Test Print

32 32SD
Image Correction PCB Solo Check −
Image Correction PCB Connection Check −
Main PC -> Image Processing PCB (Input Memory) −
Image Processing PCB (Input Memory) -> Image Processing PCB −
(Expanded Memory)
Image Processing PCB (Expanded Memory) -> Laser Control PCB −
Test Print Check Result −
Main PC -> Image Processing PCB (Expanded Memory) −

35920 2/7
 35920
Maintenance

Diagnosis of Test Print

32 32SD
Main PC -> Image Processing PCB (Composite Memory) −
Image Composition −
Main PC -> Image Processing PCB (Expanded Memory) −
Image Correction −
Confirming AOM Setup Value ←
Test Print Check Result ←
− Main PC -> Laser control PCB

NOTE
• The Test Print is not displayed for the Stand-alone Scanner.

z Media Series Image Path/Film Series Image Path/Test Print

3. Mode
Model Explanation
32 Put a checkmark for all the Media Series Image Path, Film Series Image Path and Test Print, and
perform the following checks when you are not sure what the problem is.
32SD Select Film Series Image PathTest Print when it is difficult to point out the problem.

NOTE
• The diagnosis contains all the results of Media Series Image Path, Film Series Image Path and Test Print.

z Test Print Image selection

Select the image to transfer from the images for checking the laser or the files.
NOTE
• Available files are 24-bit BMP and 32-bit BMP files only.

z Paper Magazine for Test Print

Allows you to set the magazine to make a test print.

z Test Print Advance Length

Allows you to set the paper advance length to make a test print.

z Execution Time
Displays the expected time for the diagnostics.

z Start Test
The dialog for the Image Path Check appears by clicking Start Test. Click YES to start the diagnostics.

z Test Print Check Result

Displays the result of the diagnostics by selecting Good or No Good of Test Print Check Result after checking the test print.

z Save Result
Allows you to save the result of Image Path Check in a file.
IMPORTANT
• The test result should be saved in C:\NoritsuKoki\QSS-##\LogData\[Link].
• Only one file is available to save the result.

z Clear Result
Deletes the result of Image Path Check.

35920 3/7
 35920
Maintenance

z Result
Displays the result of the test after Image Path Check is completed.
NOTE
• The AOM setup value may be displayed as Unknown in the following condition.
• When making the test print, Dairy Setup or Initial Setup has not been performed for the selected paper.

z Checking procedure

1. Select a Test Item.

NOTE
• When selecting Test Print, select a test print image.
2. The dialog for the Image Path Check appears by clicking Start Test. Click YES to start the test.
3. Assumable failed parts are displayed on the Diagnostic Contents column.

3. Mode
NOTE
• ← indicates it is same as on the left.
• − stands for unused.
Diagnostic Contents
32 32SD
Scanner unit ←
Dirt on the Scanner Unit/Light Source Section (CCD Side) ←
Dirt on the Scanner Unit/Light Source Section (Light Source Side) ←
Failed to diagnose. (LED light source temperature is being ←
adjusted.)*1
Failed to diagnose. (Focus Adjustment is not executed.)*1 ←
Failed to diagnose. (Light Source is not registered.)*1 ←
Failed to diagnose. *1 ←
LVDS Cable (Scanner Unit - D-ICE PCB) −
− PC-scanner interface PCB
− LVDS cable between the scanner ↔ PC-scanner interface PCB
− PC-scanner interface PCB
− PC-laser interface PCB
− LVDS Cable (PC-Laser interface PCB ↔ Laser Control PCB)
D-ICE PCB −
LVDS Cable between D-ICE PCB - Image Processing PCB −
Scratch mend PCB 1 [J484A] −
Scratch mend PCB 1 [J485] −
Scratch mend PCB 2 −
Data change-over PCB −
DIMM −
Contact between D-ICE PCB ↔ Scratch mend PCB 1 [J484A] −
Contact between D-ICE PCB ↔ Scratch mend PCB 1 [J485] −
Image processing PCB −
Image correction PCB −
LVDS Cable between Main PC and Image Processing PCB −
PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB −
LVDS cable between Image Processing PCB and Laser Control −
PCB
Laser control PCB ←
R Laser Deterioration ←
G Laser Deterioration ←

35920 4/7
 35920
Maintenance

Diagnostic Contents
32 32SD
B Laser Deterioration ←
R Laser Failure ←
G Laser Failure ←
B Laser Failure ←
Setup failure ←
R Laser failure or Setup failure ←
G Laser failure or Setup failure ←
B Laser failure or Setup failure ←
The processing solution is out of control. ←
*1. When the dirt in the photometry section was not checked properly, the message "Failed to diagnose." appears.

3. Mode
IMPORTANT
• The message, Failed to diagnose. (LED light source temperature is being adjusted.), Failed to diagnose. (Focus
Adjustment is not executed.), Failed to diagnose. (Light Source is not registered.), or Failed to diagnose. may be
displayed when the self-diagnosis is not performed normally in checking the scanner unit/light source section.

35920 5/7
 35920
Maintenance

Media Drive Self-diagnostic

Bringing up the display

PTBurn Interface :: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Self-diagnostic → Media Drive Self-diagnostic
Description for Self-diagnostic
In Self-diagnostic, there are Image Path Check and Media Drive Self-diagnostic.
• For details of Image Path Check, see ☞ Self-diagnostic.

Media Drive Self-diagnostic

3. Mode
S3406-00-SM00
NOTE
• For DLS specification, DVD-RAM does not appear.

IMPORTANT
• For DLS specification, since the five slots card reader media is set to write protected, the diagnosis cannot be performed.

z Explanation

z Media Drive Self-diagnostic

Perform Media Drive Self-diagnostic when reading and writing from/to the media drive is not performed normally.
For the media drive diagnostic, the following process is carried out to get result. The fixed data on the hard disk is written to the
specified drive and the data is returned to the hard disk. Then the fixed data on the hard disk and the data returned to the hard disk are
compared.
IMPORTANT
• Perform Media Drive Self-diagnostic when the following message appears even though the media is set to the
media drive.
• 1503:The appropriate file was not found.
• 1510:Read the data. Set the media.
• 1511:Write the data. Set the media.
• 1512:Data was not read from the media.

z Drive
The media drive with the check mark is performed the writing test.

z Name
Displays the name of media drive.
NOTE
• Displays the media that is registered at option registration.
• For CD and DVD, if type is registered at input, the name will not displayed.

35920 6/7
 35920
Maintenance

For conducting self-diagnosis, register the type as output or input/output, and prepare writable disk.

z Failed Counts
The denominator shows the number of tests and the numerator shows the number of tests failed.

z Communication System
Displays the communication type of media drive.

z Failed Information
Displays the cause of error when performing the writing test of media drive.

z Executed Counts (Initial value: 5) (input range: 1 to 60)

Can set how many tests are performed to write the data set to Data Size into the media drive.

3. Mode
z Data Size (MB) (initial value: 10) (input range: 1 to 500)
Can set the data size to perform the writing test to the media drive.

z Execution Time
Displays the time required for performing the writing test to the media drive.
NOTE
• The Execution Time varies depending on the number of drives with the check marks, Executed Counts and Data Size.

z Start Writing Test

The Media Drive Self-diagnostic dialog appears, click Yes to start the diagnostic.

z Save Result
Allows you to save the result of Media Drive Self-diagnostic in a file.
IMPORTANT
• The test result of writing to the media drive is saved in C:\NoritsuKoki\QSS-##\LogData\[Link].
• Only one file is available to save the writing test result of the media drive.

z Clear Result
Deletes the result of Media Drive Self-diagnostic.

z Checking procedure

1. Insert the media to perform the writing test into the media drive.
IMPORTANT
• In the case of CD-R/RW and Multi DVD, do not use the important media since the data is overwritten.
• In the case of other than CD-R/RW and Multi DVD, when the data is added then the Media Drive Self-
diagnostic is finished, the data is deleted.
2. Put a check mark for the drive to perform the writing test.
3. Set the Executed Counts and Data Size.
4. Clicking Start Writing Test displays the dialog. Click YES to start the test.
5. The cause of error is displayed in the Failed Information.
Causes of the problem
Media is not set. Data Comparison error.
The media is write protected. Failed to read and write.
Capacity error.

35920 7/7
 36000 Printer Mechanical Adjustment

Printer Mechanical Adjustment

Paper sensor adjustment

Bringing up the display

PTBurn Interface :: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Paper Sensor
Adjustment

3. Mode
S3370-00-SM00
NOTE
• The LED light intensity value of each sensor can be checked and set by entering the service personnel password (2260).

z Explanation

z Paper Sensor Adjustment (standard value: 5) (input range: 0 to 255)

It is the standard value to be used for adjusting the LED light intensity of each sensor.
NOTE
• The normal range of the LED light intensity value of each sensor is from 1 to 169.
• When the paper sensor LED light intensity adjustment was finished abnormally, the numeric value input section becomes 0 and
the status section becomes -.

z Functions

z Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment

Adjust the LED light intensity of each sensor.
NOTE
• With this Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment function, the sensors below are adjusted.

Sensors for Sensor LED Light Intensity Value Adjustment

Paper end sensors A, A2, B, and C
Paper loading sensor
Zigzag correction sensors (left and right)
Exposure start sensor
Paper sensor 1
Paper sensors 2 (left, center, and right)

• Paper end sensor A is shown when the triple magazine unit or the quad magazine unit has been attached.
• Paper end sensor A2 is shown when the quad magazine unit has been attached.

36000 1/2
 36000
Printer Mechanical Adjustment

z Adjusting procedure

z Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment

1. Check that each printer cover of the printer section and printer doors are closed.
2. Perform Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment.
NOTE
• The LED light intensity value of each sensor is not shown if the service personnel password has not been entered.
• After Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment is completed normally, OK is shown.
OK: When the LED light intensity of each sensor is from 1 to 169
• After Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment is not completed normally, − is shown.
−: When the LED light intensity of each sensor is 0 or 170 or more

3. Mode

36000 2/2
 36005
Printer Mechanical Adjustment

Paper Guide Width Correction

Bringing up the display

Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Paper Guide Width Correction

3. Mode
S3264-00-SM31
NOTE
• Enter the service personnel password (2260) to access this display.
• This display is shown if you register the Quad Magazine Unit in Option Registration.

z Explanation
Adjust the paper guide width of paper supply unit A2 so that the width is the same as the loading paper width.
This adjustment is required when replacing paper supply unit A2 or the guide width sensor.

z Paper Guide Width Measurement Value (initial value: 130.0) (input range: 127.0 to 133.0 mm)
Carry out Move to 130.0 mm Width via Functions and input measured value.

z Functions

z Move to 130.0 mm Width

The paper guide is moved to the home position. Then the correction value is canceled and it moves to the standard position (width
130.0 mm).

z 130.0 mm Width Operation Confirmation

The paper guide is moved to the home position. Then the correction value is activated and it moves to the standard position (width
130.0 mm).

z Adjusting procedure

z Paper Guide Width Correction

1. Perform Move to 130.0 mm Width via Functions.

2. Open the printer door to pull out the pre-exposure advance unit.

36005 1/2
 36005
Printer Mechanical Adjustment

3. Measure the dimension between outsides of the paper guides.

Paper guides Outside of paper guide

3. Mode
Outside of paper guide
Measured
value

G086490

4. Enter the measured value into Paper Guide Width Measurement Value.
5. Perform 130.0 mm Width Operation Confirmation via Functions and confirm that the dimension
between outsides of the paper guides is 130.0 mm.
NOTE
• The acceptable value of the dimension between the paper guides is from 129.8 mm to 130.0 mm.

36005 2/2
 36010
Printer Mechanical Adjustment

Paper Advance Unit Correction

Bringing up the display

PTBurn Interface :: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Paper Advance Unit
Correction

3. Mode
S3386-00-SM00
NOTE
• Enter the service personnel password (2260) to configure these settings.

z Explanation
Correct the receive/release stop position of the paper advance unit.
IMPORTANT
• Perform Paper Advance Unit Correction with any of paper magazine A, A2, B or C.

z Arm Unit 2 (Left) Receive Stop Position Correction (Initial value: 0.0) (Input range: from −2.0 to +2.0)
The paper receive position of arm unit 2 (left) is corrected.

z Arm Unit 2 (Right) Receive Stop Position Correction (Initial value: 0.0) (Input range: from −2.0 to +2.0)
The paper receive position of arm unit 2 (right) is corrected.

z Paper Stop Position Correction (Initial value: 0.0) (Input range: from −5.0 to +5.0)
The stop position of paper which is advanced to arm unit 2 is corrected.

z Functions

z Arm Unit 2 (Left) Receive Stop Position Correction Test Operation

The input correction value is invalidated and the arm unit 2 is moved to the arm unit 2 (left) receive stop position.

z Arm Unit 2 (Left) Receive Stop Position Correction Test Operation Confirmation
The input correction value is validated and the arm unit 2 is moved to the arm unit 2 (left) receive stop position.

z Arm Unit 2 (Right) Receive Stop Position Correction Test Operation

The input correction value is invalidated and the arm unit 2 is moved to the arm unit 2 (right) receive stop position.

z Arm Unit 2 (Right) Receive Stop Position Correction Test Operation Confirmation
The input correction value is validated and the arm unit 2 is moved to the arm unit 2 (right) receive stop position.

36010 1/3
 36010
Printer Mechanical Adjustment

z Test Operation for the Paper Stop Position Correction

The input correction value is invalidated and the paper is advanced to the arm unit 2.

z Paper Stop Position Correction Test Operation Confirmation

The input correction value is validated and the paper is advanced to the arm unit 2.

z Adjusting procedure

1. Execute Arm Unit 2 (Left) Receive Stop Position Correction Test Operation via F: Functions.
2. Open the printer top cover and check the condition of arm unit 2.
3. Input the correction value so that the distance between the upper end of paper guide in paper advance
unit 1 and front end of arm unit 2 becomes 55.3±0.5 mm.

3. Mode
Paper advance unit 1

55.3±0.5 mm

Arm unit 2 (upper)

Upper paper guide

G068451

NOTE
• Positive correction makes the arm unit move away from paper advance unit 1 and negative correction makes it move close.
4. After inputting the correction value, execute Arm Unit 2 (Left) Receive Stop Position Correction Test
Operation via F: Functions, then check that the value is 55.3±0.5 mm.
5. Correct the arm unit 2 (right) receive stop position in the same way.
6. Execute Test Operation for the Paper Stop Position Correction via F: Functions.
7. Open the printer top cover and check the condition of arm unit 2 and paper.

36010 2/3
 36010
Printer Mechanical Adjustment

8. Input the correction value so that the dimension between the front ends of arm unit 2 and paper
becomes 3.0±0.5 mm.

Paper advance unit 1

Paper

3. Mode
Arm unit 2

3.0±0.5 mm

G068452
NOTE
• Positive correction moves the paper arm unit 2 away from the front end of paper and negative correction moves to close.
9. After inputting the correction value, execute Paper Stop Position Correction Test Operation
Confirmation via F: Functions, then check that the value is 3.0±0.5 mm.

36010 3/3
 36020
Printer Mechanical Adjustment

Exposure Magnification Correction

Bringing up the display

PTBurn Interface :: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Exposure
Magnification Correction
A B

3. Mode
S3318-00-SM00

NOTE
• Enter the service personnel password (2260) to configure these settings.

z Explanation
The image to be exposed can be expanded or reduced in the paper width direction.
IMPORTANT
• When the exposure magnification correction is carried out for any one of magazine A, A2, B or C, it is complete.
• When you do not have the paper of 178 mm width or more, make a test print with the maximum paper size which you
used, then measure the length between most outside lines of it.

z Cyan Line Exposure Size (Initial value: 160.0 mm) (Input range: 65.0 to 295.0 mm)
The length of the test print image is measured, and then the actual measurement value can be entered.

z Functions

z Test Print (Paper Magazine A/A2/B/C)

Invalidate each correction value to make test prints.
NOTE
• A piece of paper with the advance length 100 mm is printed.
• The paper width, [A ####(#)] is printed as the CVP imprinting.

z Test print confirmation (Paper Magazine A/A2/B/C)

Validate each correction value to make test prints.
NOTE
• The arrow is printed in magenta on the print made as a test print (Confirmation).

Test Print Test Print (Confirmation)

G066121
• A piece of paper with the advance length 100 mm is printed.

36020 1/2
 36020
Printer Mechanical Adjustment

• The print pattern of the test print made with Test Print (Confirmation) is as same as that made with Test Print but of which
color of the center line on the test prints differ. (Red)
• The paper width, 〈A ####(#)〉 is printed as the CVP imprinting.

z Adjusting procedure

1. Carry out Test Print of F: Functions.

IMPORTANT
• Make a test print with the maximum paper size which you use.
2. Measure length A on the test print.

3. Mode
G068453

3. Select the line from part A and enter the measured value in part B.
IMPORTANT
• Measure the length of 160 line usually.
• When you do not have the paper of 178 mm width or more, measure the length between most outside lines of it.
4. Perform Test Print (Confirmation) of Functions.
5. Confirm that Part A on the test print is within ±0.1 mm of the specified length.
6. Perform exposure center correction.
☞ 36070
7. Perform Exposure Position Adjustment.
☞ 36030

36020 2/2
 36030
Printer Mechanical Adjustment

Exposure Position Adjustment

Bringing up the display

PTBurn Interface :: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Exposure Position
Adjustment

3. Mode
S3313-00-SM00
NOTE
• Enter the service personnel password (2260) to configure these settings.

z Explanation
Carry out correction so that the exposure position in the laser unit is positioned at the center of the test print. Correct the positions of
the R, G, B laser main and sub scanning.
IMPORTANT
• Perform Exposure Position Adjustment with any of paper magazine A, A2, B or C.
• When you do not have the paper of 178 mm width or more, make a test print with the maximum paper size which you
used, then measure the dimension of the most outside line of it.

z BLOCK-B Check Image Selection 1 for Main Scan Cyan Line = Magenta Line
Enter the number and letter of the image where the cyan line aligns with the magenta line on the test print BLOCK-B.

z BLOCK-B Check Image Selection 2 for Main Scan Cyan Line = Yellow Line
Enter the number and letter of the image where the cyan line aligns with the yellow line on the test print BLOCK-B.

z BLOCK-B Magenta Offset Value of Main Scanning

Measure the dimension between the cyan and magenta lines on BLOCK-C 0i and enter the measured value if there is no image where
the cyan line aligns with the magenta line on the test print BLOCK-B.

z BLOCK-B Yellow Offset Value of Main Scanning

Measure the dimension between the cyan and yellow lines on BLOCK-C 0i and enter the measured value if there is no image where
the cyan line aligns with the yellow line on the test print BLOCK-B.

z BLOCK-D1 Check Image Selection 1 for Sub Scan Cyan Line = Magenta Line
Enter the number of the image where the cyan line aligns with the magenta line on the test print BLOCK-D1.

z BLOCK-D2 Check Image Selection 2 for Sub Scan Cyan Line = Magenta Line
Enter the number of the image where the cyan line aligns with the magenta line on the test print BLOCK-D2.

36030 1/5
 36030
Printer Mechanical Adjustment

z Functions

z Test Print (Paper Magazine A/A2/B/C)

Invalidate each correction value to make test prints.
NOTE
• A piece of paper with the advance length 355.6 mm is printed.
• The paper width, [A ####(#)] is printed as the CVP imprinting.

z Test print confirmation (Paper Magazine A/A2/B/C)

Validate each correction value to make test prints.
NOTE
• The arrow is printed in magenta on the print made as a test print (Confirmation).

3. Mode
Test Print Test Print (Confirmation)

G066121
• A piece of paper with the advance length 355.6 mm is printed.
• The paper width, 〈A ####(#)〉 is printed as the CVP imprinting.

z Adjusting procedure

1. Check that the Exposure Zoom Rate Correction has been completed.
☞ 36020
2. Carry out Test Print of F: Functions.
IMPORTANT
• Make a test print with the maximum paper size which you use.
3. Check the number of the part where the cyan line aligns with the magenta line on the test print BLOCK-
B. And check the number of the part where the cyan line aligns with the yellow line.
Magenta line

Cyan line Yellow line

G068454

IMPORTANT
• Check the line using the loupe.
• Loupe is a service personnel tool. See Service personnel tool list.
☞ 80310

36030 2/5
 36030
Printer Mechanical Adjustment

4. Check BLOCK-C 0i and enter the offset value of main scanning and make a Test Print again if there is
no part where the cyan line aligns with the magenta/yellow line on the test print BLOCK-B.
Minus correction

Positive correction

3. Mode
G068455

5. Enter each checked number.

6. Check the number of the part where the cyan line aligns with the magenta line on the test print BLOCK-
D1. And check the number of the part where the cyan line aligns with the yellow line on the test print
BLOCK-D2.
Magenta line
Yellow line

Cyan lines

G068456

IMPORTANT
• Check the line using the loupe.
• Loupe is a service personnel tool. See Service personnel tool list.
☞ 80310
7. Enter each checked number.
8. Perform Test Print (Confirmation) of Functions.

36030 3/5
 36030
Printer Mechanical Adjustment

9. Check that the lines (cyan, magenta and yellow) of the column 0a to 0h in BLOCK-B make the
straightest line comparing with the other columns.
Check area

3. Mode
G068457

10. Confirm that the lines (cyan, magenta and yellow) of the column 0 and -1 in BLOCK-D1 and D2 make
the straightest line comparing with the other columns.
IMPORTANT
• When the print is made via Test Print (Confirmation), it is exposed on the same position, 0 and -1 in BLOCK-
D1 and D2.

Check area

G068458

11. Confirm that the lines (cyan, magenta and yellow) make a straight line in BLOCK-E. If it is not the
straight line, carry out the Exposure Zoom Rate Fine Adjustment.
☞ 36040
IMPORTANT
• Check line 160 usually.
• When you do not have the paper of 178 mm width or more, make a test print with the maximum paper size
which you used, then check the dimension of the most outside line of it.

36030 4/5
 36030
Printer Mechanical Adjustment

Y
G068459

3. Mode

36030 5/5
 36040
Printer Mechanical Adjustment

Exposure Magnification Fine Adjustment

Bringing up the display

PTBurn Interface :: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Exposure
Magnification Fine Adjustment

3. Mode
S3329-00-SM00
NOTE
• Enter the service personnel password (2260) to configure these settings.

z Explanation
This mode is used to correct dot displacement for each laser of B, G and R on the both sides of a print.
IMPORTANT
• If the exposure magnification fine adjustment is performed for any of magazine A, A2, B or C, the correction is
complete.
• When you do not have the paper of 178 mm width or more, make a test print with the maximum paper size which you
used, then measure the dimension of the most outside line of it.

z Magenta Line (Main Scanning) (Initial value: 0.0 dot) (Input range: from −9.9 to +9.9 dot)
G laser expansion and contraction can be corrected against the paper width direction.

z Yellow Line (Main Scanning) (Initial value: 0.0 dot) (Input range: from −9.9 to +9.9 dot)
B laser expansion and contraction can be corrected against the paper width direction.

z Functions

z Test Print (Paper Magazine A/A2/B/C)

Invalidate each correction value to make test prints.
NOTE
• A piece of paper with the advance length 178 mm is printed.
• The paper width, [A ####(#)] is printed as the CVP imprinting.

z Test print confirmation (Paper Magazine A/A2/B/C)

Validate each correction value to make test prints.

36040 1/3
 36040
Printer Mechanical Adjustment

NOTE
• The arrow is printed in magenta on the print made as a test print (Confirmation).

Test Print Test Print (Confirmation)

G066121
• A piece of paper with the advance length 178 mm is printed.
• The paper width, 〈A ####(#)〉 is printed as the CVP imprinting.

z Adjusting procedure

1. Check that the Exposure Zoom Rate Correction and Exposure Position Adjustment have been
complete.

3. Mode
☞ 36020
☞ 36030
2. Carry out Test Print of F: Functions.
IMPORTANT
• Check line 160 usually.
• When you do not have the paper of 178 mm width or more, make a test print with the maximum paper size
which you used, then check the dimension of the most outside line of it.

1 dot

+correction −correction

G068460

IMPORTANT
• Check the line using the loupe.
• Loupe is a service personnel tool. See Service personnel tool list.
☞ 80310

36040 2/3
 36040
Printer Mechanical Adjustment

3. Carry out the correction so that the magenta and yellow lines make a straight line with cyan line in the
vertical direction at 0 on the test print.
IMPORTANT
• Check line 160 usually.
• When you do not have the paper of 178 mm width or more, make a test print with the maximum paper size
which you used, then check the dimension of the most outside line of it.
• If there is no image where magenta and cyan lines make one line, carry out the fine adjustment by 0.1 dot.
• Check the line with the most outside chart of the test print.

NOTE
• When correcting the magenta line to the right, input minus correction value.
• When correcting the magenta line to the left, input + correction value.
4. Enter the correction value.

3. Mode
5. Perform Test Print (Confirmation) of Functions.
6. Check the magenta and yellow lines make a straight line with cyan line in the vertical direction at 0 on
the test print again.
7. Carry out the Exposure Position Adjustment again.
☞ 36030

36040 3/3
 36050
Printer Mechanical Adjustment

Paper Advance Length Correction

Bringing up the display

PTBurn Interface :: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Paper Advance
Length Correction

3. Mode
S3385-00-SM00

NOTE
• Enter the service personnel password (2260) to configure these settings.

z Explanation
Correct the paper advance length and the advance roller feed error.
IMPORTANT
• It is necessary to carry out paper advance length correction for each paper magazine A, A2, B, and C.

z Test Paper Measurement Value (1st) (Initial value: 150.0 mm) (Input range: from 145.0 to 155.0 mm)
The first paper is for the correction of the paper which has just been fed out from the paper magazine (distance between the paper
loading sensor and the paper cutter) and the advance feed error.

z Test Paper Measurement Value (2nd) (Initial value: 200.0 mm) (Input range: from 180.0 to 220.0 mm)
The second test paper is for the correction of the advance roller feed error.

z Functions

z Test Paper Advance

Invalidate the correction and advance the test papers of 150.0 mm for the first and 200.0 mm for the second.
IMPORTANT
• Be sure to enter the measurement dimensions of the first and second test papers at the same time.

NOTE
• The paper width, [A ####(#)] is printed as the CVP imprinting.

z Test Paper Advance Confirmation

Validate the correction and advance the test papers of 150.0 mm for the first and 200.0 mm for the second.
NOTE
• The paper width, 〈A ####(#)〉 is printed as the CVP imprinting.

z Loading (Paper Magazine A/A2/B/C)

The paper is loaded.

36050 1/2
 36050
Printer Mechanical Adjustment

z Rewind
The paper is rewound.

z Adjusting procedure

1. Attach the paper magazine to carry out the paper advance length correction on the magazine mount
A/A2/B/C.
2. Select paper magazine A/A2/B/C.
3. Carry out Test Paper Advance via Functions.
4. Open the printer top cover and remove the paper from paper advance unit 1 and 2.
Paper advance unit 1

3. Mode
Paper Paper advance unit 2

G068461

5. Measure each test paper length of the first and second paper which are removed.
6. Enter each measurement dimension.
7. After correcting, carry out Test Paper Advance Confirmation via F: Functions and be sure to make a
print and check if the advance length is correct.
8. If the advance length is not correct, adjust it in the following procedure.
If the print advance length of the first paper after loading is not correct.
When the advance length is long. Carry out + correction for Test Paper Measurement Value (1st).
When the advance length is short. Carry out − correction for Test Paper Measurement Value (1st).

If the print advance length of the second or later paper after loading is not correct.
Reset the measurement dimensions for Test Paper Measurement Valued (1st, 2nd) to the initial values and adjust them again.

36050 2/2
 36060
Printer Mechanical Adjustment

Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction

Bringing up the display

PTBurn Interface : → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging
Correction

3. Mode
S3388-00-SM00

z Explanation
Correct if the image is exposed diagonally toward the paper because of the paper zigzagging.
IMPORTANT
• Perform arm unit 1 zigzagging correction for each paper magazine A, A2, B, and C.

z A − C (Initial value: 0.0 mm) (Input range: −2.0 to +2.0 mm)

The correction for each magazine (paper width and surface) is necessary.

z Magazine A, Magazine A2, Magazine B, Magazine C

Paper magazine A/A2/B/C can be selected.

z Functions

z Test Print 1 (Paper Magazine A/A2/B/C)

Invalidate the correction and output two test prints.
NOTE
• The advance length of the test print is 457.0 mm.
• The paper width, [A ####(#)] is printed as the CVP imprinting.

z Test Print Confirmation 1 (Paper Magazine A/A2/B/C)

Validate the correction and output two test prints.
NOTE
• The arrow is printed in magenta on the print made as a test print (Confirmation).

Test Print Test Print (Confirmation)

G066121
• The advance length of the test print is 457.0 mm.
• The paper width, 〈A ####(#)〉 is printed as the CVP imprinting.

36060 1/4
 36060
Printer Mechanical Adjustment

z Test Print 2 (Paper Magazine A/A2/B/C)

Invalidate the correction and output two test prints.
NOTE
• The advance length of the test print is 914.0 mm.
• The paper width, [A ####(#)] is printed as the CVP imprinting.

z Test Print Confirmation 2 (Paper Magazine A/A2/B/C)

Validate the correction and output two test prints.
NOTE
• The arrow is printed in magenta on the print made as a test print (Confirmation).
Test Print Test Print (Confirmation)

3. Mode
G066121
• The advance length of the test print is 914.0 mm.
• The paper width, 〈A ####(#)〉 is printed as the CVP imprinting.

z Loading (Paper Magazine A/A2/B/C)

The paper is loaded.

z Rewind (Paper Magazine A/A2/B/C)

The paper which has been loaded is rewound.

z Adjusting procedure

1. Check that the zigzagging adjustment of the exposure advance unit has been completed.
☞ 36080
2. Check that the zigzagging adjustment of the magazine mount has been completed.
☞ 22100
3. Check that the right angle adjustment of the cutter unit has been finished.
See ☞ The right angle adjustment of the cutter unit in 25620.
4. Attach the paper magazine to be carry out arm unit 1 zigzagging correction to magazine mount
A/A2/B/C.
5. Select paper magazine A/A2/B/C.
6. Execute Test Print 1 or Test Print 2 of F: Functions.
7. Measure the difference of lines A and C on the second test print. And input the value to (A−C).
IMPORTANT
• Input the correction value in millimeter (mm).
• Use a scale to measure the dimensions of lines A and C on the test print.

NOTE
• When the measured values of the test print are line A: 121 mm and C: 120 mm, for example, see the below.

36060 2/4
 36060
Printer Mechanical Adjustment

• Line A (121 mm) − Line C (120 mm) = Correction value A − C (1 mm)

Line A

3. Mode
B
C

Line C
G068462

8. After the correction, make test prints in Test Print (Confirmation) of Functions. And then check that
the difference of dimensions of lines A and C (on the second test print) is within the allowable range in
the following table.
Test Print Tolerance range
Test print 1 (457.0 mm) A − C is within ±0.5 mm
Test print 2 (914.0 mm) A − C is within ±1.0 mm

IMPORTANT
• If the difference of dimensions of lines A and C (on the second test print) is out of the tolerance level, input the
correction value to A−C.

A>C Positive correction

A<C Negative correction

NOTE
• When correcting 1.0 mm in (A-C), the zigzagging of approx. 1.0 mm can be corrected on the test print.
9. Make test prints in Test Print (Confirmation) of Functions. And then check that the difference of
dimensions of lines A and C (on the second test print) and the difference of dimensions of lines A and C
(on the first test print) are within the allowable range in the following table.
Test Print Tolerance range
Test print 1 (457.0 mm) A − C is within ±0.5 mm
Test print 2 (914.0 mm) A − C is within ±1.0 mm

IMPORTANT
• If the difference between lines A and C is not within the allowable range, check the zigzagging adjustment of
the magazine mount. ☞ 22100

36060 3/4
 36060
Printer Mechanical Adjustment

• If the differences of lines A and C both on the first and second test prints are out of the allowable range
specified in the following table, confirm the exposure center correction. ☞ 36070
Test Print Tolerance range
Test print 1 (457.0 mm) A and C are within 1/2±0.5 mm of the actual paper width
Test print 2 (914.0 mm) A and C are within 1/2±1.0 mm of the actual paper width

3. Mode

36060 4/4
 36065
Printer Mechanical Adjustment

Paper Guide Width Correction (for each Paper Width)

Bringing up the display

Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Paper Guide Width Correction (for each Paper
Width)

3. Mode
S3314-00-00

z Explanation
When the paper width or the paper surface of paper magazine A2 are changed, the paper guide width of paper supply unit A2 can be
adjusted to the paper width to be used.

z Adjusting procedure
See Adjusting the paper guide width [Paper Guide Width Adjustment (for each Paper Width)], in the Quad Magazine Unit
Operator's Manual.

36065 1/1
 36070
Printer Mechanical Adjustment

Exposure Center Correction

Bringing up the display

PTBurn Interface : → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Exposure Center
Correction

3. Mode
S3387-00-SM00

z Explanation
The exposure center correction can be carried out for each paper width and surface.
IMPORTANT
• Carry out the Master (Exposure Center Correction Value) and Exposure Center Correction (for each Paper Magazine)
for each paper magazine A/A2/B/C.

z Exposure Center Correction (for each Paper Magazine) (Initial value: 0.0 mm) (Input range: from −2.0
to +2.0 mm)
The reference line is corrected to be in the center on the test paper for each paper magazine (for each paper width and emulsion type).

z Master (Exposure Center Correction 1) Paper Left End − Center (Initial value: 127.0 mm) (Input range:
from 31.3 mm to 162.4 mm)
Enter the length from the left end to the center line on the leading end of the test print.

z Master (Exposure Center Correction 2) Center − Paper Right End (Initial value: 0.0 mm) (Input range:
from 31.3 mm to 162.4 mm)
Enter the length from the center line to the right end on the leading end of the test print.

z Master (Exposure Center Correction Value)

The exposure center correction value which is calculated from the entered values of master (Exposure Center Correction Value 1) and
(Exposure Center Correction Value 2) is displayed.
NOTE
• When the correction value is over ±9.9 mm, the correction value display part turns red and it cannot be registered.

z Functions

z Test print (Paper Magazine A/A2/B/C) without Correction Value

Invalidate the correction values of Master (Exposure Center Correction Value) and Exposure Center Correction (for each Paper
Magazine) to make a test print.

z Test print confirmation (Paper Magazine A/A2/B/C) with Master Value

Validate Master (Exposure Center Correction Value) and make a test print.

36070 1/4
 36070
Printer Mechanical Adjustment

z Test Print Confirmation (Paper Magazine A/A2/B/C) with Master and Paper Magazine Values
Validate the correction values of Master (Exposure Center Correction Value) and Exposure Center Correction (for each Paper
Magazine) to make a test print.
NOTE
• The arrow is printed in magenta on the print made as a test print (Confirmation).

Test Print Test Print (Confirmation)

G066121
• When making test prints in Functions, a print with the advance length of 100 mm is made and the paper width 〈A ####(#)〉 is
printed as the CVP imprinting.

z Loading (Paper Magazine A/A2/B/C)

3. Mode
The paper is loaded.

z Rewind
The paper which is being loaded is rewound.

z Adjusting procedure

Exposure Center Correction (Master)

1. Check that the zigzagging adjustment of the exposure advance unit has been completed.
☞ 36080
2. Check that the zigzagging adjustment of the magazine mount has been completed.
☞ 22100
3. Check that Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction has been completed.
☞ 36060
4. Check that Exposure Zoom Rate Correction has been completed.
☞ 36020
5. Attach the paper magazine to carry out Master (Exposure Center Correction Value) to magazine mount
A/A2/B/C.
6. Select paper magazine A/A2/B/C.
7. Carry out Test Print without Correction Value of F: Functions.
IMPORTANT
• Make a test print with the maximum paper size which you use.

36070 2/4
 36070
Printer Mechanical Adjustment

8. Measure the length from the left end to the center line and the length from the center line to the right end
on the leading end of the test print.
Left end of the paper Right end of the paper
Center line

3. Mode
G068463

9. Enter each measurement dimension.

10. After correcting carry out Test Print Confirmation with Master Value of F: Functions and be sure to
make a print and check if the exposure center is correct.

Exposure Center Correction (for each Paper Magazine)

1. Check that the zigzagging adjustment of the exposure advance unit has been completed.
☞ 36080
2. Check that the zigzagging adjustment of the magazine mount has been completed.
☞ 22100
3. Attach the paper magazine for Exposure Center Correction to the magazine mount A/A2/B/C.
4. Select paper magazine A/A2/B/C.
5. Carry out Test Print Confirmation with Master value of F: Functions.

36070 3/4
 36070
Printer Mechanical Adjustment

6. Measure dimension B from the left end to the center line on the test print.
IMPORTANT
• When measuring the test print, use the front end of the test print.
Center line

Front end of the test print

3. Mode
G068464

7. Carry out correction so that dimension B is half of the paper width.

B is larger than one half of Negative correction
the paper width.
B is smaller than one half of Positive correction
the paper width.

8. After correcting, carry out Test Print Confirmation with Master and Paper Magazine Values of F:
Functions and be sure to make a print to check if the exposure center is correct.

36070 4/4
 36080
Printer Mechanical Adjustment

Exposure Advance Adjustment

Bringing up the display

PTBurn Interface :: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Exposure Advance
Adjustment

3. Mode
S3316-00-SM00
NOTE
• Enter the service personnel password (2260) to access this display.

z Explanation
Exposure Start Position Correction and Exposure Advance Motor Speed Correction are carried out.
Zigzagging due to the pressure of the inlet roller and exit roller of exposure advance unit is corrected.
IMPORTANT
• If the exposure advance adjustment is performed for any one of magazine A, A2, B, or C, the correction is complete.

z Paper Front End - 0 mm-line Test Paper Measurement Value (Initial value: 25.4 mm) (Input range: 22.4
to 28.4 mm)
The Exposure Start Position is corrected.
Measure the length between the test paper front end and 0 mm-line, then input measured value.

z 0 mm-line - 254 mm-line Test Paper Measurement Value (Initial value: 254.0 mm) (Input range: 244.4 to
264.4 mm)
The Exposure Advance Motor Speed is corrected.
Measure the length between 0 mm-line and 254 mm-line of the test paper and input measured value.

z Functions

z Test Print (Paper Magazine A/A2/B/C)

Invalidate the correction value that is entered for Exposure Start Position Correction and Exposure Advance Motor Speed Correction
and then make a test print.
A piece of paper with the advance length of 457 mm is printed.
NOTE
• The paper width, [A ####(#)] is printed as the CVP imprinting.

z Test print confirmation (Paper Magazine A/A2/B/C)

Validate the correction value that is entered for Exposure Start Position Correction and Exposure Advance Motor Speed Correction
and then make a test print.
A piece of paper with the advance length of 457 mm is printed.

36080 1/10
 36080
Printer Mechanical Adjustment

NOTE
• The arrow is printed in magenta on the print made as a test print (Confirmation).

Test Print Test Print (Confirmation)

G066121
• The paper width, 〈A ####(#)〉 is printed as the CVP imprinting.

z Exposure Advance Pressure Inlet Roller Test Print (Paper Magazine A/A2/B/C)
Paper is advanced by the exposure advance unit inlet roller, and then a test print is made.
NOTE
• A piece of paper with the advance length 305.0 mm is printed.

3. Mode
z Exposure Advance Pressure Exit Roller Test Print (Paper Magazine A/A2/B/C)
Paper is advanced by the exposure advance unit exit roller, and then a test print is made.
NOTE
• A piece of paper with the advance length 305.0 mm is printed.

z Loading (Paper Magazine A/A2/B/C)

The paper is loaded.

z Rewind
The paper which is being loaded is rewound.

z Adjusting procedure

Exposure Advance Adjustment

1. Make a test print by selecting Test Print (Paper Magazine A, A2, B or C) in F:Functions.
2. Measure the length between the paper front end and 0 mm-line of the test print, then input the
measured value in Paper Front End - 0 mm-line Test Paper Measurement Value.

36080 2/10
 36080
Printer Mechanical Adjustment

3. Measure the length between 0 mm-line and 254 mm line of the test print, then input the value in 0 mm-
line - 254 mm-line Test Paper Measurement Value.
Paper Front End - 0 mm-line Test Paper Measurement Value
Paper advance direction

3. Mode
0 mm-line - 254 mm-line Test Paper Measurement
Value
G068465

4. Make a test print by selecting Test Print (Paper Magazine A, A2, B or C) in F:Functions.
5. For confirmation of the test print results, see each value shown below.
Length between the paper front end and 0 mm-line 25.4 mm
Length between 0 mm-line and 254 mm-line 254.0 mm

Paper advance direction

A

Rear end
G068466

Adjusting the paper zigzagging in the exposure advance unit

1. Make a test by selecting Exposure Advance Pressure Inlet Roller Test Print (Paper Magazine A,
A2, B or C) in F:Functions.
IMPORTANT
• Print the test print with the maximum paper width which has been used.

36080 3/10
 36080
Printer Mechanical Adjustment

2. Measure the lengths between 0 mm-line and 254 mm-line of right and left edges of the test print and
check that the difference is within 0.2 mm.
Paper advance direction

Left Right

3. Mode
Rear end G068467

IMPORTANT
• If the difference between the right and left measured values is ±0.2 mm or more, carry out the following
adjustment.

NOTE
• There is another method to check the difference. Cut the paper at the center and put them together to check the difference
between lines A and B.
3. Lift up paper advance units 1 and 2.
4. Remove the pressure guide. (two locks)
Paper advance unit 1
Locks

Pressure guide Paper advance unit 2

G068468

36080 4/10
 36080
Printer Mechanical Adjustment

5. Check that the dimension of inlet roller adjusting screw of exposure advance unit is between 2.0 and 2.5
mm. If an adjustment is necessary, loosen the nut of the inlet roller and adjust the screw. (Loosen one
nut, adjust one screw.)
Exit roller adjusting screw
Exit roller nut

2.0 to 2.5 mm

3. Mode
Scales
Inlet roller nut

Inlet roller
adjusting screw 2.0 to 2.5 mm

G072395

IMPORTANT
• Make a test print again. Measure the lengths between 0 mm-line and 254 mm-line on right and left edges of the
test print. If the difference is not within 0.2 mm, carry out the following adjustment.
• Adjust the zigzagging by turning the adjusting screw between 2.0 and 2.5 mm. If adjustment is performed out of
the range between 2.0 and 2.5 mm, the banding appears on the area 32 mm from the paper front end.
6. Loosen the fixing screw of the exposure advance unit inlet roller. (Loosen one fixing screw.)
7. Loosen the nut of the exposure advance unit inlet roller. (Loosen one nut.)
8. Adjust the adjusting screw of the exposure advance unit inlet roller. (one adjusting screw)
Exit roller adjusting screw
Exit roller nut

Exit roller fixing

screw

Pressure guide Inlet roller

fixing screw

Inlet roller Inlet roller nut

adjusting screw

G072393
Carry out adjustment for the advance error that is measured in ☞ 2 of Exposure Advance Unit Zigzagging Adjustment
referring to the following table.

36080 5/10
 36080
Printer Mechanical Adjustment

When the measurement value on the LEFT is longer

Paper advance Rotation direction of the Rotation amount
error screw of the screw
(mm)
0.2 to 0.3 Counterclockwise Approximately 45°
0.4 Counterclockwise Approximately 60°
0.6 Counterclockwise Approximately 90°
0.9 Counterclockwise Approximately 135°

When the measurement value on the RIGHT is longer

Paper advance Rotation direction of the Rotation amount of the
error screw screw
(mm)

3. Mode
0.1 to 0.2 Clockwise Approximately 45°
0.3 Clockwise Approximately 60°
0.5 Clockwise Approximately 90°
0.9 Clockwise Approximately 135°

IMPORTANT
• Tighten the fixing screw of the exposure advance roller while the angle bracket of the pressure roller unit is
pressed in the direction indicated by the arrow.

Screwdriver

Pressure guide

G072394

9. Attach the pressure guide to the exposure advance unit.

10. Check the pressure of the pressure rollers at the exit and inlet sides in the exposure advance unit.
See ☞ Checking (pressure roller at the exit side).
See ☞ Checking (pressure roller at the inlet side).
11. Make a test print again by selecting Exposure Advance Pressure Inlet Roller Test Print (Paper
Magazine A, A2, B or C) in F:Functions.

36080 6/10
 36080
Printer Mechanical Adjustment

12. Measure the lengths between 0 mm-line and 254 mm-line of right and left edges of the test print and
check that the difference is within 0.2 mm.
Paper advance direction

Left Right

3. Mode
Rear end G068467

IMPORTANT
• If the difference between the right and left measured values is ±0.2 mm or more, readjust from ☞ 6 of
Exposure Advance Unit Zigzagging Adjustment.
13. Adjust the exposure advance unit exit roller following the same procedure.
14. Check the Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction.
☞ 36060

Checking (pressure roller at the exit side)

IMPORTANT
• When adjusting the pressure roller at the exit side in the exposure advance unit, check the followings since the
banding may be found at the area 32 mm from the paper leading end.
1. Turn the cam in the exposure advance unit to release the pressure of the pressure roller at the exit side
and set the paper.

36080 7/10
 36080
Printer Mechanical Adjustment

2. Make fine adjustments of the cam in the exposure advance unit so that the pressure release amount of
the pressure roller at the exit side is the thickness of about one sheet of paper. Use the paper to check
that the pressure of the pressure roller at the exit side is equable at the right and left.

3. Mode
Pressure roller
at the exit side

Cam G072398

IMPORTANT
• If the pressure adjustment is required, perform ☞ 6 to ☞ 8 of Exposure Advance Unit Zigzagging
Adjustment.
3. Make some gray prints in the Print mode to see if the banding occurs at the area 32 mm from the paper
leading end.
32 mm

Leading
Rear end
end

G074601
NOTE
• Any paper size is acceptable.

Checking (pressure roller at the inlet side)

IMPORTANT
• When adjusting the pressure roller at the inlet side in the exposure advance unit, check the followings since the
banding may be occurred at the area 24 to 27 mm from the paper rear end.

36080 8/10
 36080
Printer Mechanical Adjustment

1. Turn the cam on the exposure advance unit to release the pressure of the pressure roller at the exit
side.

3. Mode
Pressure roller
at the exit side

Cam
G072399

2. Release the pressure of the pressure roller at the exit side and set the paper. Make fine adjustments of
the cam in the exposure advance unit so that the pressure release amount of the pressure roller at the
inlet side is the thickness of about one sheet of paper.

36080 9/10
 36080
Printer Mechanical Adjustment

3. Use the paper to check that the pressure of the pressure roller at the inlet side is equable at the right
and left.

3. Mode
Pressure roller at
the inlet side

Cam
G072397

IMPORTANT
• If the pressure adjustment is required, perform ☞ 6 to ☞ 8 of Exposure Advance Unit Zigzagging
Adjustment.
4. Make some gray prints in the Print mode to see if the banding occurs at the area 24 to 27 mm from the
paper rear end.

Leading
end Rear end

24 to 27 mm

G074602
NOTE
• Any paper size is acceptable.

36080 10/10
 36090
Printer Mechanical Adjustment

Paper pressure operation correction

Bringing up the display

PTBurn Interface : → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Paper Pressure Operation
Correction

3. Mode
S3389-00-SM00

z Explanation
The banding for each magazine type can be carried out by adjusting the space between the pressure roller of the exposure advance unit
and the paper.
IMPORTANT
• Carry out paper pressure operation correction for each paper type.
• Copy the paper width correction value that the correction is finished to the same paper type paper magazine.

z Paper Pressure Operation Correction (Initial value: 1) (input range: from 1 to 13)
Correct the pressure release of the pressure roller.

z Functions

z Test Print (Paper Magazine A/A2/B/C)

Prints the gray test prints (13 patterns).
Test prints with the advance length of 152 mm to 164 mm is printed.
NOTE
• The paper width, [A ####(#)] is printed as the CVP imprinting.

z Test print confirmation (Paper Magazine A/A2/B/C)

Validate the Paper Pressure Operation Correction to make a test print.
A test print which number is registered to the paper pressure operation correction is made.
NOTE
• The arrow is printed in magenta on the print made as a test print (Confirmation).

Test Print Test Print (Confirmation)

G066121
• The paper width, 〈A ####(#)〉 is printed as the CVP imprinting.

36090 1/3
 36090
Printer Mechanical Adjustment

z Loading (Paper Magazine A/A2/B/C)

The paper is loaded.

z Rewind
The paper which has been loaded is rewound.

z Adjusting procedure

1. Select and execute Test Print via F:Functions.

NOTE
• 13 patterns of the test prints are made as shown in the list below.
• When the CVP (optional) has been installed, the print No. and the revolution pulse count are printed on the back print.

3. Mode
Print No. Revolution pulse count Test print advance
(pps) length (mm)
1 1733 152
2 1600 153
3 1545 154
4 1502 155
5 1466 156
6 1434 157
7 1405 158
8 1378 159
9 1353 160
10 1329 161
11 1307 162
12 1285 163
13 1265 164

2. Banding appears around 17 mm or 26 mm from the rear end on the test print. Check the table below
and enter the correction pattern No. as the correction value.
Banding position Correction Banding position Correction
Around 26 mm from the paper rear +2 Around 17 mm from the paper rear −2
edge edge
Example: Around 26 mm at the rear end Example: Around 17 mm at the rear end
Banding (26 mm at the rear end) −2 Banding (17 mm at the rear end)
+2

10 11 12 13
Test print with no
banding

Test print with no Print No.

banding
Print No.

Paper advance direction Paper advance direction

36090 2/3
 36090
Printer Mechanical Adjustment

3. Carry out the procedure 1 and 2 for each paper magazine type.

3. Mode

36090 3/3
 36100
Printer Mechanical Adjustment

WB width correction

Bringing up the display

PTBurn Interface : → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → WB Width Correction

3. Mode
S3394-00-SM00

z Explanation
The margin correction can be carried out for each paper width and surface.
IMPORTANT
• When the correction is carried out for any one of magazine A, B or C, it is complete.
• This correction affects the exposure position both of WB and BL, because the image exposure position is corrected.

z Paper Magazine (Input range: from 82.5 to 305 mm)

Specify the paper magazine to be corrected.

z Left Margin Correction (Initial value: 5.0 mm) (Input range: 0.0 to 10.0 mm)
Correct the left margin of the test print so that it becomes 4.0 mm.

z Right Margin Correction (Initial value: 5.0 mm) (Input range: 0.0 to 10.0 mm)
Correct the right margin of the test print so that it becomes 4.0 mm.

z Functions

z Test Print (Paper Magazine A/B)

Invalidate the correction value to make a test print.
NOTE
• A piece of paper with the advance length of 216 mm and the margin of 5.0 mm is printed.
• The paper width, [A ####(#)] is printed as the CVP imprinting.

z Confirmation of Test Print (Paper Magazine A/B)

Validate the correction value to make a test print.

36100 1/2
 36100
Printer Mechanical Adjustment

NOTE
• The arrow is printed in magenta on the print made as a test print (Confirmation).

Test Print Test Print (Confirmation)

G066121
• A piece of paper with the advance length of 216 mm and the margin of 5.0 mm is printed.
• The paper width, 〈A ####(#)〉 is printed as the CVP imprinting.

z WB width correction

1. Check that the zigzagging adjustment of the magazine mount has been completed.
☞ 22100

3. Mode
2. Check that the exposure center correction has been completed.
☞ 36070
3. Carry out Test Print of F: Functions.
4. Measure the right and left margins on the test print.

G068472

5. Enter the measured value in each item.

6. Carry out Test Print Confirmation of F: Functions and make sure that the margin is 5.0 mm.

36100 2/2
 36700 Compact Archive Unit Adjustment

Compact Archive Unit Adjustment

Compact Archive Unit Initialization

Bringing up the display

PTBurn Interface :: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Compact Archive Unit Adjustment → Compact Archive
Unit Initialization

IMPORTANT
• Carry out the Hard disk drive format for Compact Archive Unit first when the compact archive unit is installed newly or
the hard disk drive of the compact archive unit is replaced.
See the PC Service Manual.

3. Mode
S3401-00-SM00

z Explanation
The compact archive unit can be initialized or optimized.
IMPORTANT
• The backup data of the compact archive unit is not made.
• If the data in the compact archive unit was initialized accidentally, it cannot be recovered.

z Functions

z Initialization of the Compact Archive Unit

The image data which is saved in the hard disk drive of the compact archive unit can be initialized.
NOTE
• The service personnel password (2260) is required to display this.

z Defragmentation of the Compact Archive Unit

The hard disk drive of the compact archive unit can be optimized.
NOTE
• A fragmented hard disk drive stores parts of a file in many different locations. Defrag is placing all data sequentially. This
reduces the time for the hard disk drive to access the data.
• Carry out Defrag regularly to improve the performance of the computer.

z Procedure

z Initialization of the Compact Archive Unit

1. Click F: Functions.

36700 1/3
 36700
Compact Archive Unit Adjustment

2. Click Initialization of the Compact Archive Unit.

Windows 2000 format dialog is displayed.

3. Mode
G069963

3. Click Start.
Initialization starts.
IMPORTANT
• You cannot change the setting of Capacity, File system, Allocation unit size, and Enable Compression on the
format dialog.
• If you select the Enable Compression, it takes approx. 35 minutes.
• If you select Quick Format, it finishes in a few of seconds.

z Defragmentation of the Compact Archive Unit

1. Click F: Functions.
2. Click Defragmentation of the Compact Archive Unit.
Disk Defragementer is displayed and the optimization (defragmentation) starts.

G069964

IMPORTANT
• If the fragments is 7%, it takes approx. 25 minutes for defragmentation.

36700 2/3
 36700
Compact Archive Unit Adjustment

NOTE
• After finishing the defragmentation, Defragmentation Complete is sometimes displayed. When the message is displayed,
select Close.

3. Mode

36700 3/3
 36710
Compact Archive Unit Adjustment

Compact Archive Unit Capacity Check

Bringing up the display

PTBurn Interface :: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Compact Archive Unit Adjustment → Compact Archive
Unit Capacity Check
When TYPE1 is selected When TYPE2 is selected

3. Mode
z Explanation
You can check the compact archive unit capacity.

z Unit Number
You can set the unit number of the compact archive unit.
NOTE
• If there are some QSS with which are equipped the compact archive unit, change the unit number in order to identify each archive
unit.
• When TYPE 2 is selected, the archive code (2x−xxxx⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅) does not appear.

z Drive
You can check the drive and capacity to use the compact archive.
Drive
Select the drive for the compact archive unit.

IMPORTANT
• Check the drive letter of the hard disk drive for compact archive unit in Windows Explorer.
• The conditions for a compact archive unit are as follows.
• Hard disk
• Drive other than C drive
• Available 5 GB or more free space
Capacity
All capacity of the drive which is selected is displayed.
Free Space
Free space of the drive which is selected is displayed.

z Save Data
You can check the data saved in the compact archive.

36710 1/2
 36710
Compact Archive Unit Adjustment

All Order Counts

All order counts saved is displayed.
All Frame Counts
All frame counts saved is displayed.
Hold on Save Frame Counts
Hold on save frame counts is displayed.
Hold on Save Used Space
Hold on save used space is displayed.

z Compact Archive Unit Capacity Setting

NOTE
• Appears when Compact Archive Unit TYPE2 is selected.

3. Mode
You can set the size of the capacity used for the compact archive unit and that of the space used for Hold on save.
Size to be used for Compact Archive Unit
Set the size of space in the hard disk to be used for the compact archive unit.
Setting from 0.1 GB up to 80% of the hard disk drive capacity is available.
The size to be used for Hold on Save
Set the size of space in the hard disk to be used for Hold on Save.
Setting from 0 GB up to a 50% of the capacity to be used for Compact Archive Unit is available.
Default Size
Put the settings of the size to be used to the default as for the compact archive unit and the Hold on save.
NOTE
• The values are changed to the following.
• Size of the space to be used for Compact Archive Unit: 80% of the hard disk drive capacity
• The size of the space to be used for Hold on save: 50% of the size of space to be used for Compact Archive Unit

36710 2/2
 37300 Laser Unit Adjustment

Laser Unit Adjustment

Laser Unit Adjustment

Bringing up the display

Menu → Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Laser Unit Adjustment
Display Details

Laser Unit Thermosensor

R Laser Thermosensor

R laser

r
ase

r
se
la
Bl

3. Mode
Laser unit heater

Laser unit

z Explanation
NOTE
• Because the R laser thermosensor and laser unit thermosensor are inside of the laser unit, you cannot check each sensor.

z R Thermosensor Display Section

The temperature of R laser temperature sensor is displayed.
NOTE
• Temperature control is equipped in the R laser and this temperature control section has been adjusted to become within the
controlled temperature.
• When the displayed temperature is within the following range, it is normal.
Condition Details
R laser control temperature 27.7°C to 28.3°C

IMPORTANT
• The error message of error No. 6107 R Laser temperature is out of range. appears under the following condition.
R laser temperature is controlled between 27.7°C and 28.3°C for 6 seconds or more (standby status) and then the
temperature exceeds 31.0°C (upper limit temperature) again.
R laser temperature is controlled between 22.7°C and 28.3°C for six seconds or more (standby status) and then the
temperature drops to 15.0°C (lower temperature limit) or lower again.
☞ No. 6107
z Laser Unit Thermosensor Display Section
The temperature of the laser unit temperature sensor is displayed.
NOTE
• The laser unit control temperature is adjusted using the laser unit heater and laser unit cooling fan 1 and 2, which are installed in
the laser unit, to keep it within the control temperature range.
• The laser unit control temperature becomes within the controlled temperature, and then controlling temperature of the R laser will
start.
• When the displayed temperature is within the following range, it is normal.

37300 1/2
 37300
Laser Unit Adjustment

Condition Details
Laser unit control temperature 23.0°C to 42.0°C
Laser unit cooling fans 1 and 2: ON If the laser unit temperature sensor exceeds 30°C.
Laser unit cooling fans 1 and 2: OFF If the laser unit temperature sensor drops to 27°C or lower.
Laser unit heater: ON If the laser unit temperature sensor drops to 25°C or lower.
Laser unit heater: OFF If the laser unit temperature sensor exceeds 26°C.

IMPORTANT
• The error message of error No. 6177 Laser Unit temperature is out of range. appears under the following
conditions.
Laser temperature is controlled once between 23.0°C and 42.0°C for ten seconds or more (standby status) and then
the temperature exceeds 45.0°C (upper limit temperature) again.
Laser temperature is controlled once between 23.0°C and 42.0°C for ten seconds or more (standby status) and then
the temperature falls under 20.0°C (lower limit temperature) again.

3. Mode
☞ No. 6177

37300 2/2
 37500 Operation Information

Operation Information

Saving log data

z Explanation
If a problem occurs while the QSS is running, the operation status when the problem occurs is recorded to HDD as a Logdata file.
IMPORTANT
• Usually, the log files are automatically saved. However, they can also be saved manually. Select the files to save as
needed.
• The log files are automatically saved in the following conditions.
• An error occurs.
• A problem occurs with the system program.
• Up to 10 Logdata files that are stored automatically are saved. When the number of Logdata files exceeds 10, the files
will be overwritten from the oldest one.

3. Mode
• If the problem occurs several times, or another problem occurs subsequently, it records the time and the contents of
the problem.

NOTE
• If a problem occurs with the software, obtain the information below with the log data and memory data.
• Status when the problem occurred
• Operation performed before the problem occurred
• With or without an error, its kind
• Paper used when the problem occurred
• Any other things you realized

z How to obtain

z To obtain Logdata recorded automatically when the problem occurs

NOTE
• This is the data not included in saving at the same time.
Save the data if necessary, for example, when the situation in which the problem occurs cannot be recurred.
☞ 37520

1. Press the Windows key on the keyboard if QSS software works.

NOTE
• For DLS specification, switch the DLS display to the key operator mode or service operator mode and then move to the
QSS menu. It displays the taskbar and makes the Windows key selectable.

S0100-WIN-SM00

2. Access the Start menu and select Accessories via Programs.

37500 1/3
 37500
Operation Information

3. Select Windows Explorer.

4. Select C:\NKData\LogData in the Local Disc:C via My Computer.
5. Select the necessary Logdata file.
NOTE
• The Logdata files that are stored automatically are saved in compressed.
• The file name is used from [Link] to [Link].
• Select the necessary file referring to the saved time of Logdata file.
6. Press the C key while pressing the Ctrl key with the file selected.
Copy the Logdata using the shortcut key.
7. Press the V key while pressing the Ctrl key.
Paste the Logdata using the shortcut key.
8. The file creating time and the contents about the problem are recorded in the Copy of File.

3. Mode
9. Save the Logdata to the storage media.
NOTE
• The size of the Logdata is large, therefore save it to a storage media which has a large capacity such as MO.

z To obtain Logdata at present

NOTE
• This is the data included in saving at the same time.
☞ 37520

1. Press the L key while pressing the Ctrl key and the Alt key on the keyboard when the problem occurs.
NOTE
• For specifications other than DLS, the operation can be performed using only the Alt key and the L key.

IMPORTANT
• Be sure to carry out this operation immediately after the problem occurs. The correct information cannot be
recorded after changing the mode or performing other operations.
2. Press the Windows key on the keyboard if QSS software works.
NOTE
• For DLS specification, switch the DLS display to the key operator mode or service operator mode and then move to the
QSS menu. It displays the taskbar and makes the Windows key selectable.

S0100-WIN-SM00

3. Access the Start menu and select Accessories via Programs.

4. Select Windows Explorer.

37500 2/3
 37500
Operation Information

5. Select C:\NoritsuKoki\QSS-## in the Local Disc:C via My Computer.

NOTE
• The machine type appears in the ## of QSS-##.
6. Select Logdata.
7. Press the C key while pressing the Ctrl key with the file selected.
Copy the Logdata using the shortcut key.
NOTE
• When the Logdata file is stored manually, it is not compressed.
8. Press the V key while pressing the Ctrl key.
Paste the Logdata using the shortcut key.
9. The file creating time and the contents about the problem are recorded in the Copy of File.
10. Save the Logdata to the storage media.

3. Mode
NOTE
• The size of the Logdata is large, therefore save it to a storage media which has a large capacity such as MO.

37500 3/3
 37510
Operation Information

Saving the memory data

NOTE
• This is the data included in saving at the same time.
☞ 37520

z Explanation
If a problem occurs during the QSS operation, the operation status at present can be recorded as a memory data file.
IMPORTANT
• The memory data is from the each CPU.
• The recorded memory data is not the one recorded automatically when the problem occurs.
Be sure to save the data when the problem occurs.
• If the problem occurs several times, or another problem occurs subsequently, it records the time and the contents of

3. Mode
the problem.

NOTE
• If a problem occurs with the software, obtain the information below with the log data and memory data.
• Status when the problem occurred
• Operation performed before the problem occurred
• With or without an error, its kind
• Paper used when the problem occurred
• Any other things you realized

z Saving procedure

Saving the memory data

1. Press the D key while pressing the Ctrl key and the Alt key on the keyboard when the problem occurs.
The display to acquire the memory data appears.
IMPORTANT
• Be sure to carry out this operation immediately after the problem occurs. The correct information cannot be
recorded after changing the mode or performing other operations.

S1146-02-SM00

37510 1/2
 37510
Operation Information

2. Press Memory data inhale.

The display to select CPU appears.

3. Mode
S1146-02-SM02

3. Select the CPU you want.

The available CPU is shown as an active button to be selected.
4. After the dialog of Save As appears, select output directory.

S1146-06-SM01

IMPORTANT
• The acquired file should be named the store name, date and the running number.
• Example: Noritsu12-24-01
Noritsu (store name) 12 (month) -24 (day) -01 (running number)

37510 2/2
 37520
Operation Information

Saving the memory data and Logdata at the same time

3. Mode
G074617

z Explanation
The current memory data and Logdata can be compressed and saved at the same time when a problem occurs in running the QSS.
IMPORTANT
• The memory data is from the each CPU.
• The recorded memory data and Logdata are not the ones recorded automatically when the problem occurs.
Be sure to save the data when the problem occurs.
• The Logdata recorded automatically when the problem occurs can be saved by Saving the Logdata.
☞ 37500
• If the problem occurs several times, or another problem occurs subsequently, it records the time and the contents of
the problem.
• For DLS specification, it is necessary to save the DLS log file.
☞ 37600
NOTE
• If a problem occurs in the software, save the information shown below with the Logdata and memory data.
• Status when the problem occurred
• Operation performed before the problem occurred
• With or without an error, its kind
• Paper used when the problem occurred
• Any other things you realized

z Save in
Shows the saving destination of the memory data and Logdata files.

z Browse
Can change the saving destination of data to each media drive or the like.

z START
Saves the memory data and Logdata to the files.

z CANCEL
Closes the Read All Memory Data & Save LogData display and returns to the QSS display.

37520 1/3
 37520
Operation Information

z Saving procedure

Saving the memory data and Logdata

1. Press the Ctrl key, the Alt key and the Y key on the keyboard when the problem occurs.
The Read All Memory Data & Save LogData display appears.
NOTE
• For specifications other than DLS, the saving display appears pressing only the Alt key and the Y key.

3. Mode
G074617

IMPORTANT
• Be sure to carry out this operation immediately after the problem occurs. The correct information cannot be
recorded after changing the mode or performing other operations.
2. Click START in the display to save the memory data and Logdata to the files.
IMPORTANT
• Save the test result to C:\Noritsukoki\QSS-##_##\Log_Data\Memory\############.
• Before clicking START, clicking Browse in the display can change the saving destination of data to each media
drive or the like.

G074618

IMPORTANT
• When closing the Read All Memory Data & Save LogData display forcibly using Ctrl+Alt+Delete, the QSS and
PC operations may be unstable.

37520 2/3
 37520
Operation Information

• If you start the memory data and Logdata saving function during the QSS process (printing, outputting to the
media, etc.), the QSS process and saving data may become unstable.
3. When finishing saving the memory data and Logdata, the screen returns to the QSS display.
4. Completion

3. Mode

37520 3/3
 37530
Operation Information

System Version Check on No. 6901 ARCNET communication error

Bringing up the display

Press the D key while pressing the Ctrl key and the Alt key on the keyboard.

3. Mode
S1146-02-SM01

z Explanation
Since communication of each control PCB cannot be performed when No. 6901 ARCNET communication error. occurs, it cannot
go into the System Version Check display from Extension.
When No. 6901 ARCNET communication error. occurs, if System Version Check is used in the following procedure, it can go into
the System Version Check display easily.

z Procedure

No. 6901 ARCNET communication error. occurs:

1. On the error display, press NO: Stop alarm and press F: Reserve to make this error to suspension.
IMPORTANT
• Do not press NO: Error clear. If NO: Error clear is pressed, ARCNET communication is performed again by
the main CPU, then the same error recurs and it cannot go into the System Version Check display smoothly.
2. Press the D key while pressing the Ctrl key and the Alt key on the keyboard.

37530 1/2
 37530
Operation Information

3. The System Version Check display appears.

3. Mode
S1146-02-SM01

4. The System Version Check display appears by clicking System Version Check.
Display (32) Display (32SD)

5. Confirm the Version and Communication on the System Version Check display.
‹ Communication
The communication status of all control PCBs is displayed.
OK: Communicating
-: Not communicating, not registered as an option, not connected.
IMPORTANT
• Since communication data has collected on the ARCNET circuit when ARCNET communication error.
occurs, therefore, it may take time until OK is displayed.

‹ Version
The system program version number saved on all control PCBs is displayed.
Version is displayed.: It is communicating.
Version is not displayed.: Not communicating, not registered as an option, not connected.
IMPORTANT
• The version of each control PCB is displayed if main CPU receives the communication OK signal which
each control PCB sent responding to main CPU's ARCNET communication request to each control PCB.
• If OK is displayed in Communication field, a version will remain displayed even if Communication
becomes - later.
6. Perform the diagnosis of ARCNET communication error.
☞ 50520

37530 2/2
 37600
Operation Information

Saving the DLS log file

z Explanation
Save the log file of DLS software when a problem occurs during the operation.
IMPORTANT
• It is also necessary to save Logdata and memory data of QSS.
☞ 37520
NOTE
• If a problem occurs in the software, save the following information at the same time.
• Status when the problem occurred
• Operation performed before the problem occurred
• With or without an error, its kind

3. Mode
• Paper used when the problem occurred
• Any other things you realized

z Saving procedure

1. Press the Ctrl, the Alt, the SHIFT and the L keys on the keyboard all together when a problem occurs.
The command prompt appears and will be saved automatically.
2. Select Quit The Application from Close Down Checks in the QSS menu to display the Windows
display.
NOTE
• Switch the DLS display to the key operator mode or the service operator mode and then move to the QSS menu. It displays
the taskbar and makes the Windows key able to be selected.
3. Access the Start menu and select Accessories via Programs.
4. Select Windows Explorer.
5. Copy DLSLOG_1.zip in X:\Kodak_Logs which can be accessed from My Computer via Local Disc:X,
to a storage media.
NOTE
• The most recent file name is always set to DLSLOG_1.
The previous file name is changed to _2, _3 or the like automatically.
• The size of the Logdata is large, therefore save it to a storage media which has a large capacity such as MO.

37600 1/1
 38000 Flatbed execution display

Flatbed execution display

Flatbed execution display

Bringing up the display

Menu

3. Mode
S0100-FB-SM00

z Explanation
It appears when selecting scanner as an input media on the order display of QSS and pressing .
It does not appear with the check mark for auto color correction.
IMPORTANT
• This display appears when using the FB scanner (EPSON type) which is prepared by customers.

z Gamma (Initial value: 1.2) (Input range: 0.5 to 5.0)

Gamma of the image scanned by the FB scanner can be adjusted.
IMPORTANT
• Gamma initialization is performed only when bringing up the FB scanner execution display and pressing Initializing
Setting Value in the service mode.

38000 1/1
 4000

4. Troubleshooting

Error and attention message regulation ................................................................................ 4001

Classification of errors and attention messages ...................................................................................................4001
Suffix number ......................................................................................................................................................4002
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring .......... 4201
Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring (desk section/CS-1) [32] .......................................................4201
Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring (desk section/CS-2) [32SD] ..................................................4201
Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring (printer section) ....................................................................4202
Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring (processor) ............................................................................4203
Diagnosis appendix: Symptoms result from blowout of fuse ................................................. 4251
Symptoms result from blowout of fuse (desk section) ........................................................................................4251
Symptoms result from blowout of fuse (printer section) .....................................................................................4252
Symptoms result from blowout of fuse (processor section) ................................................................................4253
Diagnosis appendix: Diagnosis flowchart .............................................................................. 4302

4 Troubleshooting
The message, Laser temperatures are being adjusted. does not disappear from the order display. ...................4302
An abnormal print is made ..................................................................................................................................4304
Checking for media drive defect .........................................................................................................................4305
PC does not start normally ...................................................................................................................................4306
Diagnosis appendix: Example of abnormal print ................................................................... 4400
BGR uneven colors or white strips (film advance direction) ..............................................................................4400
Line like a bar code (film advance direction) ......................................................................................................4401
Light density line (white) (paper advance direction) ...........................................................................................4450
Monochrome line (perpendicular to paper advance direction) ............................................................................4451
Light color is appeared in unexposure position ...................................................................................................4452
Stripped pattern like a wavy line .........................................................................................................................4453
Diagnosis appendix: FB scanner ........................................................................................... 4500
List of FB scanner's error message (for EPSON type) ........................................................................................4500
Diagnosis appendix: [F specification] .................................................................................... 4600
Replenishment cartridge installation section troubleshooting flow ....................................................................4600
Recovery procedure 1 from the replenishment error ...........................................................................................4610
Recovery procedure 2 from the replenishment error ...........................................................................................4620
Taking countermeasures after the error No.5916 to No.5921 occurs ..................................................................4630
DLS Error Messages ............................................................................................................. 4900
DLS Error Messages ............................................................................................................................................4900
System Error messages (No. 3-) ........................................................................................... 4910
No. 3-1 WIP Partition is Half Full .....................................................................................................................4910
No. 3-2 WIP Partition is Three Quarters Full ....................................................................................................4910
No. 3-3 WIP Partition Is Full .............................................................................................................................4910
No. 3-4 WIP Partition Is Full .............................................................................................................................4910
No. 3-6 Order Failed Image Analysis ................................................................................................................4910
Archive Error messages (No. 6-) ........................................................................................... 4920
No. 6-1 Insufficient Store-It Disk Space ...........................................................................................................4920

4000 1/12
 4000

Archive Error messages (No. 10-) ......................................................................................... 4961

No. 10-9 Cannot Connect to Upload Host .........................................................................................................4961
No. 10-10 Error While Uploading Network Order ............................................................................................4961
No. 10-11 Upload Server Cannot Recognize Customer Name .........................................................................4961
No. 10-12 Cannot Connect to Upload Host .......................................................................................................4961
No. 10-13 Upload Server Cannot Recognize Scan Location ............................................................................4961
No. 10-14 Upload Server Cannot Recognize Customer Name .........................................................................4961
No. 10-15 Upload Server Cannot Recognize Scan Location ............................................................................4961
No. 10-19 Connection Processing Failed ..........................................................................................................4961
No. 10-20 Busy Modem ....................................................................................................................................4961
Archive Error messages (No. 12-) ......................................................................................... 4970
No. 12-1 Print Service Initialization Failed .......................................................................................................4970
No. 12-2 Print Initialization Failed ....................................................................................................................4970
No. 12-7 Rendering Error ..................................................................................................................................4970
No. 12-8 Printing Error ......................................................................................................................................4970
No. 12-11 Print Service Error ............................................................................................................................4970

4 Troubleshooting
No. 12-13 Print Creation Error ..........................................................................................................................4970
No. 12-14 Order Queuing Failed .......................................................................................................................4970
No. 12-40 Error Preparing a Print .....................................................................................................................4970
Media Output Error messages (No. 13-) ............................................................................... 4980
No. 13-12 CD Authoring Complete ..................................................................................................................4980
No. 13-13 CD Authoring Complete ..................................................................................................................4980
Attention message/Error: QSS TWAIN driver ...................................................................... 40101
No. 101 Start the QSS and enter the Net Scan mode. .....................................................................................40101
No. 103 The QSS is already connected to another QSS TWAIN driver. Would you like to search for another
QSS? ..................................................................................................................................................................40101
No. 107 48 bit image may not correspond, depending on application. Would you like to enable the setting? .......
40101
No. 110 Error/Attention has occurred in the QSS. Check the QSS. ..............................................................40101
No. 115 The COM port for the external controller is already occupied by another application. Confirm the use
condition of the COM port. ...............................................................................................................................40101
No. 116 Failed to open the COM port for the external controller. ..................................................................40101
No. 117 Would you like to stop processing? ...................................................................................................40101
No. 502 Failed to connect with the QSS. Would you like to search the QSS? .............................................40101
No. 504 This version does not match the QSS. ...............................................................................................40101
No. 505 Communication has been disconnected. The QSS TWAIN driver will be closed. .........................40101
No. 508 A QSS TWAIN driver has been started. Multiple QSS TWAIN drivers cannot be started together. ........
40101
No. 512 Error/Attention has occurred in the QSS. Quit the process. .............................................................40101
No. 513 Language version of message data is incorrect. Messages are displayed in English. ......................40101
No. 514 There is insufficient memory. ............................................................................................................40101

4000 2/12
 4000

Attention message: Processor ............................................................................................. 40500

No. 0500[N] Add water to the Refilling Water Tank. .....................................................................................40500
No. 0501[N] The replenisher switch is turned on. ..........................................................................................40500
No. 0502[N] Add replenishment solution to the replenishment tank. .............................................................40500
No. 0503[N][SM] Empty the Effluent Tank. ..................................................................................................40500
No. 0505 Remove the prints from the Print Sorter Unit. .................................................................................40500
No. 0506 Close the Dryer Cover. ....................................................................................................................40500
No. 0507 Close the Processor Top Cover. .......................................................................................................40500
No. 0508 Paper remains in the processor. Are you sure you want to turn the drive off? ................................40500
No. 0510 Attach the Print Conveyor Unit. ......................................................................................................40500
No. 0515 Set the Rack Stopper. .......................................................................................................................40500
Attention message: Tablet Replenishment .......................................................................... 40600
No. 0600[J] The Tablet Cartridge is [Link] ..............................................................................................40600
No. 0601[J] The Tablet Cartridge is [Link] ...............................................................................................40600
No. 0602[J] The Tablet Cartridge is [Link] .............................................................................................40600
No. 0603[J] Add water to the Water Supply Tank. .........................................................................................40600

4 Troubleshooting
No. 0604[J] Add water to the SW/DW Tank. .................................................................................................40600
No. 0605[J] Attach the Tablet [Link] ...................................................................................................40600
No. 0606[J] Attach the Tablet [Link] ...................................................................................................40600
No. 0607[J] Attach the Tablet [Link] .................................................................................................40600
No. 0608[J] Attach the Tablet Replenishment Unit. .......................................................................................40600
No. 0609[J] The Tablet kit is empty. ...............................................................................................................40600
No. 0610[J] Empty the Effluent Tank.### ......................................................................................................40600
Attention message: SM replenishment ................................................................................ 40700
No. 0700 [SM] Replace the Replenishment Package with a new one.P-# ......................................................40700
No. 0701[SM] Attach the Replenishment Package.P-# ..................................................................................40700
No. 0702[SM] Add water to the Water Supply Tank. .....................................................................................40700
No. 0703[SM] Would you like to initialize the remaining amount of the Replenishment Package? .............40700
No. 0704[SM] Press the [YES/START] key to initialize the remaining amount of the Replenishment Package. ...
40700
No. 0705[SM] Replace the Replenishment Package with a new one.P-# .......................................................40700
Attention message: F replenishment ................................................................................... 40900
No. 900 [F] PSR is running out. .....................................................................................................................40900
No. 901 [F] PSR is empty. ..............................................................................................................................40900
No. 902 [F] Install the replenisher cartridge. ..................................................................................................40900
No. 903 [F] Close the replenisher section door. .............................................................................................40900
No. 904 [F] Replenish PSR. ...........................................................................................................................40900
No. 905 [F] Install the new replenisher cartridge. ..........................................................................................40900
No. 906 [F] It is ready to replace the replenisher cartridge. ...........................................................................40900
No. 907 [F] Collect the waste solution. ..........................................................................................................40900
No. 908 [F] Open operation was not completed correctly. Replenishment solution preparation will resume. ......
40900
No. 909 [F] Replenishment tank is empty. Cannot start the operation. ........................................................40900
No. 910 [F] Preparing the replenishment solution. One moment please . . . ................................................40900
No. 911 [F] Prcessor Section is processing. One moment please. . . ............................................................40900
No. 912 [F] Replenishment solution was created. Initialize replenishment data and restart replenishment. 40900
No. 913 [F] Manual opening cannot be started. .............................................................................................40900

4000 3/12
 4000

Attention message: Printer .................................................................................................. 41000

No. 1000 The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine A ...............................................................41000
No. 1001 The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine B ................................................................41000
No. 1002 Would you like to feed the leading edge of paper? Paper Magazine A .........................................41000
No. 1003 Would you like to feed the leading edge of paper? Paper Magazine B ..........................................41000
No. 1004 Attach the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine A .............................................................................41000
No. 1005 Attach the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine B .............................................................................41000
No. 1010 Change the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine A ............................................................................41000
No. 1011 Change the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine B ............................................................................41000
No. 1012 The print channel is not set. Confirm the print channel. ................................................................41000
No. 1013 Outputting. . . ...................................................................................................................................41000
No. 1014 The system is being initialized, one moment please. . . ...................................................................41000
No. 1017 Would you like to stop printing? .....................................................................................................41000
No. 1024 Would you like to register the correction value? .............................................................................41000
No. 1026 Close the Printer Top Cover. ...........................................................................................................41000
No. 1027 Profile data was not found. ..............................................................................................................41000

4 Troubleshooting
No. 1028 More than 3 correction keys of low, middle or high density area. Execute correction? ................41000
No. 1029 The measurement failed. Measure it again. .....................................................................................41000
No. 1030 Wait until printing is complete. .......................................................................................................41000
No. 1031 Paper Specification Registration Setup was not completed. ...........................................................41000
No. 1032 One moment please. . . .....................................................................................................................41000
No. 1035 Paper Magazine Registration Setup is not completed. ....................................................................41000
No. 1038 Paper type for the magazine is not set. ............................................................................................41000
No. 1039 Paper type specification is not set. ...................................................................................................41000
No. 1040 Press the [ORDER] key. ..................................................................................................................41000
No. 1041 Unable to accept additional processing at this time. The order will be counted. Wait until the output
process is complete. ...........................................................................................................................................41000
No. 1043 Laser temperature is being adjusted. One moment please. . . .........................................................41000
No. 1047 Close printer door. ...........................................................................................................................41000
No. 1048 Press the [ORDER] key. Wait until output has completed. ............................................................41000
No. 1050 Additional Picture CD's cannot be made in this order. Press the [ORDER] key. ..........................41000
No. 1051 Multiple input media cannot be used to create a Picture CD. .........................................................41000
No. 1052 The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine C ................................................................41000
No. 1053 Would you like to feed the leading edge of paper? Paper Magazine C ..........................................41000
No. 1065 Would you like to continue? ............................................................................................................41000
No. 1067 Attach the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine C .............................................................................41000
No. 1068 Replace the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine C ...........................................................................41000
No. 1072 Paper color intensity is low. Execute correction? ...........................................................................41000
No. 1074 Sensors may be dirty. .......................................................................................................................41000
No. 1079 If you would like to make a Picture CD, using the current data, press the [ORDER] key. .............41000
No. 1080 Unable to accept additional processing at this time. Press the [ORDER] key. ..............................41000
No. 1081 The Paper Magazine is out of paper. ...............................................................................................41000
No. 1095 Unable to accept additional processing at this time. ........................................................................41000

4000 4/12
 4000

Attention message: Printer 2 ............................................................................................... 41083

No. 1083 The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine A2 .............................................................41083
No. 1084 Would you like to feed the leading edge of paper? Paper Magazine A2 .......................................41083
No. 1085 The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine A ...............................................................41083
No. 1086 Would you like to feed the leading edge of paper? Paper Magazine A .........................................41083
No. 1088 Attach the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine A2 ...........................................................................41083
No. 1089 Change the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine A2 ..........................................................................41083
No. 1090 Attach the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine A .............................................................................41083
No. 1091 Change the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine A ............................................................................41083
Attention message: Scanner/ Film Carrier ........................................................................... 41300
No. 1302-1320 Refer to the Scanner Service Manual for Corrective action of Attention message. ...............41300
No. 1400-1439 Refer to the Scanner Service Manual for Corrective action of Attention message. ...............41300
Attention message: Disk/Media1 ......................................................................................... 41500
No. 1501-1549 Refer to the Troubleshooting Manual for Corrective action of Attention message. ..............41500
Attention message: Colorimeter .......................................................................................... 41550

4 Troubleshooting
No. 1550 Register the Calibration Plate Data. .................................................................................................41550
No. 1551 The calibration plate data is out of range. Register the data? ..........................................................41550
No. 1552 The paper in the Colorimeter is too short. It cannot be measured. ..................................................41550
Attention message: Pricing unit ........................................................................................... 41600
No. 1601 Turn on the Pricing Unit or supply a pricing sheet. .........................................................................41600
No. 1603 The rest 2 order could be kept by the Pricing Unit. .........................................................................41600
No. 1604 Pricing Sheet Print Out Check .........................................................................................................41600
Attention message: NMC1 ................................................................................................... 41620
No. 1621-1722 Refer to the Troubleshooting Manual for Corrective action of Attention message. ..............41620
Attention message: Software upgrade ................................................................................ 41800
No. 1801 Execute software upgrade. ...............................................................................................................41800
No. 1803 The program does not match the installed Paper Magazine. Upgrade the software. Printer .........41800
Attention message: External system ................................................................................... 41821
No. 1821 For corrective action of the attention message, see the d-Storage/ CD-R external writing system Service
Manual. ..............................................................................................................................................................41821

4000 5/12
 4000

Attention message: Main ..................................................................................................... 41900

No. 1900 It was not registered as an option. ...................................................................................................41900
No. 1901 Selected optional function is not available. If you need to use, Install it. ......................................41900
No. 1902 Adobe Photoshop is being used. To enter Menu, Quit the Adobe Photoshop. ...............................41900
No. 1903 Proceeding. One moment please. . . .................................................................................................41900
No. 1904 Proceeding. One moment please. . . .................................................................................................41900
No. 1905 Program Timer was not set. .............................................................................................................41900
No. 1908 A Picture CD could not be made. Confirm the settings. ................................................................41900
No. 1909 Title was not set. ..............................................................................................................................41900
No. 1910 There is no frame. The format will be deleted. ...............................................................................41900
No. 1911 This Title data already exist. ............................................................................................................41900
No. 1912 There is no format. New format will be created. ............................................................................41900
No. 1913 This format is used in a Print Channel. Would you like to edit? ....................................................41900
No. 1914 The format has reached maximum capacity. No more data can be added. ....................................41900
No. 1920 Capacity Booster Key was not detected. Confirm the connection status. ......................................41900
No. 1921 Capacity Booster Key was detected. ...............................................................................................41900

4 Troubleshooting
No. 1922 Viewer Software was not found. Confirm the settings. ..................................................................41900
No. 1923 Set the destination of Media Output to other than External System. ...............................................41900
No. 1924 Set the paper width wider than 127 mm for the Long Print. ...........................................................41900
No. 1925 Would you like to quit the Net Scan Mode? ....................................................................................41900
No. 1926 Set the Media Print Paper Fitting in Frame Print to "Cut", "Overall" or "Real Size". ....................41900
No. 1927 Sort by Output Media Frame Number function cannot be used. .....................................................41900
No. 1928 DPOF File Output function cannot be used. ....................................................................................41900
No. 1933 Select an input media other than the Compact Archive Unit. .........................................................41900
No. 1935 There is insufficient space on the disk for the Order Controller. Are you sure you want to delete the
Compact Archive Unit data automatically? .......................................................................................................41900
No. 1936 Compact Archive Unit data was not deleted. Delete them manually. ............................................41900
No. 1937 The file was not found. ....................................................................................................................41900
No. 1939 The String is too long to register. ....................................................................................................41900
No. 1940 Invalid format. Failed to read. .........................................................................................................41900
No. 1977 There is insufficient space left on the disk. Stop the process. ........................................................41900
No. 1980 Failed to import the file. Confirm the file is correctly selected. .....................................................41900
No. 1981 Short Cut Key is selected overlapped. .............................................................................................41900
Attention message: Compact Archive Unit/Edit ................................................................... 43370
No. 3371-4052 Refer to the Troubleshooting Manual for Corrective action of Attention message. ..............43370
Attention message: External system ................................................................................... 44200
No. 4200-4360 For corrective action of the attention message, see the d-Storage/ CD-R external writing system
Service Manual. .................................................................................................................................................44200
Attention message: QSS-Kids ............................................................................................. 44250
No. 4250-4308 Refer to the QSS-Kids Service Manual for Corrective action of Attention message. ...........44250
Attention message: Bravo II ................................................................................................ 44350
No. 4350-4358 See the Bravo II Service Manual for Corrective action of Attention message. .....................44350

4000 6/12
 4000

Error message: Processor 1 ................................................................................................ 45500

No. 5500 The processing solution temperature is above the safety range. CD ...............................................45500
No. 5501 The processing solution temperature is above the safety range. BF ................................................45500
No. 5502 The processing solution temperature is above the safety range. STB .............................................45500
No. 5503 The dryer temperature is above the safety range. ............................................................................45500
No. 5504 The processing solution temperature is below the processing range. CD .......................................45500
No. 5505 The processing solution temperature is below the processing range. BF ........................................45500
No. 5506 The processing solution temperature is below the processing range. STB .....................................45500
No. 5507 The dryer temperature is below the processing range. ....................................................................45500
No. 5508 The processing solution level is too low. .........................................................................................45500
No. 5509 The circulation amount has decreased. ............................................................................................45500
No. 5510 Processor A/D conversion error. ......................................................................................................45500
No. 5511 The circulation pump has stopped. CD ............................................................................................45500
No. 5513 The circulation pump has stopped. BF ............................................................................................45500
No. 5515 The circulation pump has stopped. STB1 ........................................................................................45500
No. 5516 The circulation pump has stopped. STB2 ........................................................................................45500

4 Troubleshooting
No. 5517 The circulation pump has stopped. STB3 ........................................................................................45500
No. 5518 The circulation pump has stopped. STB4 ........................................................................................45500
No. 5519 Thermosensor error. CD ..................................................................................................................45500
No. 5520 Thermosensor error. BF ...................................................................................................................45500
No. 5521 Thermosensor error. STB ................................................................................................................45500
No. 5522 Dryer Thermosensor error. ..............................................................................................................45500
No. 5524 Refilling water operation error. CD-W ............................................................................................45500
No. 5525 Refilling water operation error. BF-W ............................................................................................45500
No. 5526 Refilling water operation error. STB1-W ........................................................................................45500
No. 5527 Refilling water operation error. STB2-W ........................................................................................45500
No. 5528 Refilling water operation error. STB3-W ........................................................................................45500
No. 5529 Refilling water operation error. STB4-W ........................................................................................45500
Error: Processor 2 ............................................................................................................... 45530
No. 5530 The Processor Top Cover is open. ...................................................................................................45530
No. 5531 The dryer cover is open. ..................................................................................................................45530
No. 5532 The Processing Solution Safety Thermostat has activated. .............................................................45530
No. 5533 The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated. ....................................................................................45530
No. 5534 Print Sorter Unit operation error. .....................................................................................................45530
No. 5535 Paper has jammed in the processor section. ....................................................................................45530
No. 5537 The Rack Stopper is not set. ............................................................................................................45530
No. 5538 Backup data error. Processor ..........................................................................................................45530
No. 5539 Print Conveyor Unit was removed. .................................................................................................45530
No. 5549 Drive Motor Revolution Count Auto Adjustment error. .................................................................45530
No. 5550 Drive Motor has stopped. ................................................................................................................45530

4000 7/12
 4000

Error message: Tablet replenishment ................................................................................. 45600

No. 5600[J] Tablet Drum operation error. CD ................................................................................................45600
No. 5601[J] Tablet Drum operation error. BF .................................................................................................45600
No. 5602[J] Tablet Drum operation error. STB ..............................................................................................45600
No. 5603[J] A tablet has [Link] ..............................................................................................................45600
No. 5604[J] A tablet has [Link] ..............................................................................................................45600
No. 5605[J] A tablet has [Link] ............................................................................................................45600
No. 5609[J] Printing cannot continue without replenishment. CD .................................................................45600
No. 5610[J] Printing cannot continue without replenishment. BF ..................................................................45600
No. 5611[J] Printing cannot continue without replenishment. STB ................................................................45600
No. 5612[J] Tablet Replenishment Elevator operation error. .........................................................................45600
No. 5613[J] The processing solution level is too low. STB1 ........................................................................45600
Error message: SM replenishment ...................................................................................... 45700
No. 5700[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. CD-A ..........................................................................45700
No. 5701[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. CD-B ..........................................................................45700
No. 5702[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. CD-C ..........................................................................45700

4 Troubleshooting
No. 5703[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. CD-W .........................................................................45700
No. 5704[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. BF-A ...........................................................................45700
No. 5705[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. BF-B ...........................................................................45700
No. 5706[SM] Replenishment pump operation error. STB .............................................................................45700
No. 5708[SM] Replenishment Package solution remaining error. ..................................................................45700
No. 5709[SM] Replenishment Package solution remaining error. ..................................................................45700
No. 5710[SM] Refilling water operation error. CD-W ...................................................................................45700
No. 5711[SM] Refilling water operation error. BF-W ....................................................................................45700
No. 5712[SM] Refilling water operation error. STB1-W ...............................................................................45700
No. 5713[SM] Refilling water operation error. STB2-W ...............................................................................45700
No. 5714[SM] Refilling water operation error. STB3-W ...............................................................................45700
No. 5715[SM] Refilling water operation error. STB4-W ...............................................................................45700

4000 8/12
 4000

Error message: F replenishment ......................................................................................... 45900

No. 5900[F] Replenisher cartridge open motor operation error. .....................................................................45900
No. 5901[F] Replenishment solution level sensor error. P1R .........................................................................45900
No. 5902[F] Replenishment solution level sensor error. P2RA ......................................................................45900
No. 5903]F] Replenishment solution level sensor error. P2RB ......................................................................45900
No. 5904[F] Replenishment solution level sensor error. PSR .........................................................................45900
No. 5905[F] P1R replenishment solution output amount/replenishment solution level management is abnormal. .
45900
No. 5906[F] P2RA replenishment solution output amount/replenishment solution level management is abnormal.
45900
No. 5907[F] P2RA replenishment solution output amount/replenishment solution level management is abnormal.
45900
No. 5908[F] Failed to open the replenisher cartridge. .....................................................................................45900
No. 5909[F] Cartridge cleaning valve/Agitation solenoid valve is abnormal. P1R ........................................45900
No. 5910[F] Cartridge cleaning valve cleaning valve is abnormal. P2RA .....................................................45900
No. 5911[F] Cartridge cleaning valve cleaning valve is abnormal. P2RB ......................................................45900
No. 5912[F] Predetermined process amount was exceeded. ...........................................................................45900

4 Troubleshooting
No. 5913[F] An error occurred in the replenisher section. ..............................................................................45900
No. 5914[F] Temperature and humidity sensor error. .....................................................................................45900
No. 5916[F] Solution level of the processing tank goes below the processable level. P1 ..............................45900
No. 5917[F] Solution level of the processing tank goes below the processable level. P2 ..............................45900
No. 5918[F] Solution level of the processing tank goes below the processable level. PS1 ............................45900
No. 5919[F] Solution level of the processing tank goes below the processable level. PS2 ............................45900
No. 5920[F] Solution level of the processing tank goes below the processable level. PS3 ............................45900
No. 5921[F] Solution level of the processing tank goes below the processable level. PS4 ............................45900
No. 5922[F] Replenisher section door is open. ...............................................................................................45900
No. 5923[F] Solution remains in the replenishment tank. ...............................................................................45900
Error message: Printer 1 ..................................................................................................... 46000
No. 6012 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A ...........................................................................................46000
No. 6013 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine B ............................................................................................46000
No. 6014 Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine A .......................................................................................46000
No. 6015 Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine B .......................................................................................46000
No. 6016 Paper Cutter operation error. ...........................................................................................................46000
No. 6017 Paper has jammed in the printer section. .........................................................................................46000
No. 6021 Paper remains in the printer section. ................................................................................................46000
No. 6049 Pressure Guide operation error. .......................................................................................................46000
No. 6054 The Initial Setup was not executed. .................................................................................................46000
No. 6056 Printer system error. .........................................................................................................................46000
No. 6069 The printer top cover is open. ..........................................................................................................46000
No. 6073 Synchronous Sensor error. ...............................................................................................................46000
No. 6074 B Laser control error. .......................................................................................................................46000
No. 6075 G Laser control error. ......................................................................................................................46000
No. 6076 Polygon Mirror control error. ..........................................................................................................46000
No. 6077 Interlock error. .................................................................................................................................46000
No. 6081 Backup data error. Printer ...............................................................................................................46000
No. 6082 Setup error. ......................................................................................................................................46000
No. 6087 Laser Control PCB system error. .....................................................................................................46000

4000 9/12
 4000

Error message: Printer 2 ..................................................................................................... 46100

No. 6101 Paper Hold Motor operation error. ..................................................................................................46100
No. 6104 Printer Door is open. ........................................................................................................................46100
No. 6105 B Laser light source status error. .....................................................................................................46100
No. 6106 G Laser light source status error. .....................................................................................................46100
No. 6107 R Laser temperature is out of range. ................................................................................................46100
No. 6112 Could not load the paper. Paper Magazine C .................................................................................46100
No. 6113 Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine C .......................................................................................46100
No. 6134 Paper Supply Pressure Change Motor operation error. ...................................................................46100
No. 6135 Arm Unit 1 operation error. .............................................................................................................46100
No. 6136 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 1 operation error. .......................................................46100
No. 6137 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 2 operation error. .......................................................46100
No. 6138 Paper Advance Arm Motor (Left) operation error. .........................................................................46100
No. 6139 Paper Advance Arm Motor (Right) operation error. .......................................................................46100
No. 6140 Lane Select Motor (Left) operation error. .......................................................................................46100
No. 6141 Lane Select Motor (Right) operation error. .....................................................................................46100

4 Troubleshooting
No. 6142 Paper Advance Pressure Change Motor (Left) operation error. ......................................................46100
No. 6143 Paper Advance Pressure Change Motor (Right) operation error. ....................................................46100
No. 6148 Paper End Sensor A error. ...............................................................................................................46100
No. 6149 Paper End Sensor B error. ...............................................................................................................46100
No. 6150 Paper End Sensor C error. ...............................................................................................................46100
No. 6151 Paper Loading Sensor error. ............................................................................................................46100
No. 6152 Zigzagging Correction Sensor (Left) error. .....................................................................................46100
No. 6153 Zigzagging Correction Sensor (Right) error. ...................................................................................46100
No. 6155 Exposure Start Sensor error. ............................................................................................................46100
No. 6157 Paper Sensor 1 error. ........................................................................................................................46100
No. 6158 Paper Sensor 2 (Left) error. .............................................................................................................46100
No. 6159 Paper Sensor 2 (Center) error. .........................................................................................................46100
No. 6160 Paper Sensor 2 (Right) error. ...........................................................................................................46100
No. 6173 Printer Door 3 is open. It may be adversely affect print quality. ....................................................46100
No. 6177 Laser Unit temperature is out of range. ...........................................................................................46100
No. 6179 B/G Laser Output Unit error. ...........................................................................................................46100
No. 6187 Setup calculation error. ....................................................................................................................46100
No. 6195 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A2 .........................................................................................46100
No. 6196 Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine A2 .....................................................................................46100
No. 6197 Paper End Sensor A2 error. .............................................................................................................46100
No. 6199 Pressure Release Motor A2 operation error. ....................................................................................46100
No. 6200 Width Change Motor A2 operation error. .......................................................................................46100
No. 6201 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A ...........................................................................................46100
No. 6202 Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine A .......................................................................................46100
Error message: Scanner/ Film Carrier ................................................................................. 46300
No. 6303-6337 Refer to the Scanner Service Manual for Corrective action of Error message. .....................46300
No. 6400-6446 Refer to the Scanner Service Manual for Corrective action of Error message. .....................46300
Error message: Disk/Media ................................................................................................. 46500
No. 6506 Hard disk is full. Delete the unnecessary image file(s). .................................................................46500
Error message: Colorimeter ................................................................................................ 46550
No. 6551 Paper has jammed in the Colorimeter Unit. .....................................................................................46550
No. 6552 Backup data error. Colorimeter Unit ..............................................................................................46550
No. 6554 Calibration Plate advance error. ......................................................................................................46550

4000 10/12
 4000

Error message: Pricing unit ................................................................................................. 46600

No. 6600 Pricing Unit communication error. ..................................................................................................46600
No. 6601-## Pricing Unit operation error. ......................................................................................................46600
No. 6602 Pricing Unit Printer operation error. ................................................................................................46600
No. 6603 Backup data error. PU .....................................................................................................................46600
Error: NMC .......................................................................................................................... 46620
No. 6620 Remote Control was not finished. ...................................................................................................46620
No. 6621 Could not connect to the server. ......................................................................................................46620
No. 6622 There is no backup data in the server. .............................................................................................46620
No. 6623 Noritsu-eNET Mail was not started. ................................................................................................46620
Error message: D-ICE control ............................................................................................. 46640
No. 6640 System error. (D-ICE Control PCB) ................................................................................................46640
No. 6641 Backup Data error. D-ICE Control PCB ........................................................................................46640
No. 6642 D-ICE Control PCB error. ...............................................................................................................46640
No. 6643 Digital Masking Unit operation error. .............................................................................................46640

4 Troubleshooting
Error message: Software upgrade ....................................................................................... 46802
No. 6803 Language version of message data is incorrect. Message display in English. ...............................46802
Error message: Image processing PCB .............................................................................. 46820
No. 6822 Image Processing PCB Image data operation error. .......................................................................46820
Error message: Main ........................................................................................................... 46900
No. 6900 Main control system error. ...............................................................................................................46900
No. 6901 ARCNET communication error. ......................................................................................................46900
No. 6902 LVDS communication error. ...........................................................................................................46900
No. 6903 Serial communication error. ............................................................................................................46900
No. 6906 Failed to change the mode. Enter to the next mode? ......................................................................46900
No. 6907 The file was not found. ....................................................................................................................46900
No. 6908 Processing response error. ...............................................................................................................46900
No. 6909 CPU was reset. Abort the process. ..................................................................................................46900
No. 6913 System was shut down forcibly. Restart the system. ......................................................................46900
No. 6916 PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB control error. ........................................................................................46900
No. 6921 PCB error. ........................................................................................................................................46900
No. 6918 Failed to start the DLS. ....................................................................................................................46900
No. 6922 Device control error. ........................................................................................................................46900
No. 6925 PC-Laser Interface PCB control error. ............................................................................................46900
Error: Compact Archive Unit ................................................................................................ 48350
No. 8361 Archive File read error. ....................................................................................................................48350
No. 8362 Archive File write error. ..................................................................................................................48350
No. 8363 Compact Archive Unit processing error. .........................................................................................48350
No. 8364 Compact Archive Unit cannot be used. ...........................................................................................48350
Error message: Edit ............................................................................................................. 49000
No. 9000 Edit mode System error. .................................................................................................................49000
No. 9001 Edit mode Information file error. ....................................................................................................49000
No. 9002 Edit mode Image data error. ...........................................................................................................49000
No. 9003 Edit mode Image read error. ...........................................................................................................49000
Error message: External device .......................................................................................... 49200
No. 9200-9381 For corrective action of the attention message, see the d-Storage/ CD-R external writing system
Service Manual. .................................................................................................................................................49200

4000 11/12
 4000

Error message: QSS-Kids ................................................................................................... 49250

No. 9250-9311 For error corrective action, refer to QSS-Kids Service Manual. ...........................................49250
Error: Bravo II ...................................................................................................................... 49350
No. 9350-9376 For error corrective action, refer to Bravo II Service Manual. ..............................................49350

4 Troubleshooting

4000 12/12
 4001 Error and attention message regulation

Error and attention message regulation

Classification of errors and attention messages

z Attention message
Messages shown to provide information in normal processing are attention messages.
• If replacing consumable parts is necessary
• If the judgment of operator is necessary
• If a simple operation mistake has been made

z Error
Messages shown in abnormal conditions are error messages.
• If there is something wrong with the system
• If a serious operation mistake has been made, performing the operation not allowed to be performed

z Error/Attention message number

Error/Attention message number consists of main and suffix numbers. In case of 1234-0001, 1234 is the main number and 0001 is the
suffix number.

4. Troubleshooting
Main number
It identifies the content of Error/Attention message.
Operator takes a corrective action judging from the content and the countermeasure represented by the main number.

Main number
Error 0001 to 4999
Attention message 5000 to 9999

Suffix number
It identifies error occurring place and condition.
Service personnel figures out the error occurring condition judging with the content of the suffix number and performs the diagnosis.
NOTE
• For the content of suffix number, see Suffix number.
☞ 4002

4001 1/1
 4002
Error and attention message regulation

Suffix number

z Types of suffix number

Suffix numbers can be classified to the following three types.
• No suffix numbers
• Displays the condition
• Displays the total of bit operation

z No suffix numbers
If the occurring condition is single
Example 1
Suffix number Condition
- The cover is opened.

z Displays the condition

4. Troubleshooting
If the occurring condition is multiple and only one of them is the object of the occurring cause, its suffix number appears in four digits.
Example 2
Suffix number Condition
0001 The sensor does not detect DARK.
0002 The sensor does not detect LIGHT.

z Displays the total of bit operation

If the occurring condition is multiple and some of them are possible to be the objects of the occurring cause, the total of the target
suffix numbers (bit) appears.
NOTE
• The bit operation value is shown by hexadecimal digit.
Example 3
Suffix number (bit) Condition
0001 Sensor 1 does not detect.
0002 Sensor 2 does not detect.
0004 Sensor 3 does not detect.
0008 Sensor 4 does not detect.
0010 Sensor 5 does not detect.

NOTE
• When the sensors 1 and 3 of example 3 are the objects, 0005 appears. When all the sensors are the objects, 001F appears.
• The suffix number (bit) assigned to each condition is necessarily consisted of 1, 2, 4, 8 and 0.
As for the bit display, the other 3, 5, 6, 7... are used for the multiple conditions.
For example, 3 is for the multiple condition of 1 and 2, and 5 is for that of 4 and 1.

z How to determine the condition from the total of bit operation

This section describes the procedure of determining the target condition from the displayed suffix number without the knowledge of
the bit operation theory.

1. Divide the displayed suffix number into each digit.

NOTE
• When the displayed suffix number is 13, it is divided into 1 and 3.

4002 1/4
 4002
Error and attention message regulation

2. Replace them with the bits (1, 2, 4, 8) according to the object table below.
NOTE
• 1 → 1, 3 → 2 and 1
(Object table)
Suffix number display Suffix number (bit)
F 8 4 2 1
E 8 4 2
D 8 4 1
C 8 4
B 8 2 1
A 8 2
9 8 1
8 8
7 4 2 1
6 4 2
5 4 1

4. Troubleshooting
4 4
3 2 1
2 2
1 1
0

NOTE
• It can be calculated by replacing the suffix number of hexadecimal digit with decimal and assigning it from the larger
number.
3. Add 0 to the second digit or later to make the number of digits same as the original one.
NOTE
• 1→10 (second digit), 2 and 1 are remained (first digit).
• For the second digit, add 0 once. For the third digit, add 0 two times.
(Example of determining)
13 4C0
↓ ↓
Divide into each digit.
1 3 4 C (12) 0
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
Replace with the suffix number of each condition.
1 2, 1 4 8, 4 Not in use
Return the number of digits by adding 0.
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
10 2, 1 400 80, 40 Not in use
↓ ↓
10, 2 and 1 400, 80 and 40 are the objects.
are the objects.

4. Check each condition by the target suffix number (bit), and specify the occurring condition.
NOTE
• When the suffix number of 13 appears in the condition of example 3, the numbers of 1, 2 and 10 are the objects of the
suffix numbers (bit). From this, the occurring condition is recognized as The sensors 1, 2 and 5 do not detect.

4002 2/4
 4002
Error and attention message regulation

Example 3
Object Suffix Condition
number
(bit)
9 0001 Sensor 1 does not detect.
9 0002 Sensor 2 does not detect.
0004 Sensor 3 does not detect.
0008 Sensor 4 does not detect.
9 0010 Sensor 5 does not detect.

NOTE
• To know more details of the bit operation mechanism, refer to the following explanatory notes.
Digit
• Binary digit is the basic value of computer calculation and expresses the state of ON and OFF of the signal.
A digit of the binary digit is called as bit. It expresses two types of numbers, 0 and 1, as one digit.
When there are two types of bit (condition), it is expressed by the binary digit with two digits and called as 2 bit.
• Decimal digit is generally used to express ten kinds of numbers, 0 to 9, as one digit.

4. Troubleshooting
The combinations expressed as one digit are ten kinds.
• Hexadecimal digit is used to express 16 kinds of numbers, 0 to F, as one digit. The combinations expressed as one digit are 16
kinds.
• Each digit can be converted into other digits.
When there are ten types of conditions, it is 10 bit (ten digits) by expressing with the binary digit, four digits with the decimal
digit and three digits with the hexadecimal digit.
Thus, the number of digits can be less when there are more combinations which can be expressed as one digit.
NOTE
• A to F of the hexadecimal digit are handled as a number in the operation.
(Conversion table)
Hexadecimal Decimal numeral Binary number
numeral
0 0 0
1 1 1
2 2 10
3 3 11
4 4 100
5 5 101
6 6 110
7 7 111
8 8 1000
9 9 1001
A 10 1010
B 11 1011
C 12 1100
D 13 1101
E 14 1110
F 15 1111
10 16 10000
FF 255 11111111
3FF 1023 1111111111

Bit operation
• When assigning sensor 1 of example 3 to the first digit and sensor 2 to the second digit as in order, the bit operation value is as
follows in the case that only each condition is ON.

4002 3/4
 4002
Error and attention message regulation

This hexadecimal digit value is assigned as the bit of single condition.

When multiple conditions are the objects, the total bit assigned to each condition appears.
Condition Suffix number (bit)
Hexadecima Decimal Binary
l numeral numeral number
Sensor 1 1 1 1
Sensor 2 2 2 10
Sensor 3 4 4 100
Sensor 4 8 8 1000
Sensor 5 10 16 10000

(Example) When the errors of sensors 1, 2 and 5 have occurred at the same time
Condition Suffix number (bit)
Hexadecimal Decimal Binary
numeral numeral number
Sensors 1, 2 and 5 13 19 10011

4. Troubleshooting

4002 4/4
 4201 Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring

Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring

Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring (desk section/CS-1) [32]

Symptoms due to the connection failure are different between 32 and 32SD.
• For details about 32SD, see ☞ Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring (desk section/CS-2) [32SD].

z Condition for checking disconnection of connector

The tables below explain errors and symptoms seen when the power supply of this system is turned on with each connector
disconnected (for example, the monitor is not turned on, the lamp does not light, the fan does not rotate, etc.)
IMPORTANT
• As the symptom of disconnection of connector, only the symptom on each PCB of the triple paper magazine
specification is described.
• Symptom for the PC is not mentioned.
• For the optional PCBs, some of them are explained.
• When any malfunction does not occur in turning ON the power supply of the system on condition that a connector is
unplugged from each PCB, Any malfunction does not occur on this condition. is mentioned for the connector in
the list.
• Several errors may occur at the same time with a single connector.

4. Troubleshooting
• The suffix number (description of PCB) of No. 6901 ARCNET communication error. may be different from the
following explanation depending on the ARCNET communication feature.

z Desk section
Reference
☞ Image processing PCB ☞ Image correction PCB
☞ D−ICE control PCB ☞ D−ICE PCB
☞ DIMM ☞ Scratch mend PCB 2
☞ Scratch mend PCB 1 [J484A] ☞ Scratch mend PCB 1 [J485]
☞ Data change-over PCB ☞ Colorimeter Control PCB
☞ Power PCB ☞ Desk power supply 1
☞ Desk power supply 2

z Image processing PCB

See the electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89000.

Connector No. Symptom

J/P155 Connects to the image No. 6822-0040 Image Processing PCB Image data operation error. occurs.
correction PCB.
J/P442 ARCNET No. 1014 The system is being initialized, one moment please. . . occurs and the system
Connecting to D-ICE control program does not start.
PCB No. 6901-0080 ARCNET communication error. Image Processing PCB occurs.
J/P443 ARCNET No. 6901-2000 ARCNET communication error. Digital ICE Control PCB occurs.
Connecting to D-ICE control
PCB
J/P444 Power supply from desk No. 6901-0080 ARCNET communication error. Image Processing PCB occurs.
power supply 1 (+5 V−1)
J/P445 Connects to PCI- No. 6822-0002 Image Processing PCB Image data operation error. occurs while scanning.
LVDS/ARCNET PCB for
compact archive unit
(LVDS).
J/P450 Connects to D-ICE PCB. No. 6822-0011 Image Processing PCB Image data operation error. occurs while scanning.
J/P455 Connects to the laser control No. 6087-0003 Laser Control PCB system error. occurs while printing. Then No. 6900-0800
PCB (LVDS). Main control system error. and 6822-0008 Image Processing PCB Image data operation
error. occur.
The printing operation does not proceed from exposing.

4201 1/8
 4201
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring

Connector No. Symptom

J/P456 Connects to PCI- No. 6902-0002 LVDS communication error. Image Processing PCB occurs.
LVDS/ARCNET PCB
(LVDS).

z Image correction PCB

See the electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89000.

Connector No. Symptom

J/P154 Power supply from desk No. 6822-0040 Image Processing PCB Image data operation error. occurs.
power supply 1 (+5 V−1)
J/P155 Connects to the image No. 6822-0040 Image Processing PCB Image data operation error. occurs.
processing PCB.
J/P1363 Memory No. 6822-0003 Image Processing PCB Image data operation error. occurs when carrying
J/P1364 Memory out 1 frame magnification processing for the scanned image.

z D−ICE control PCB

See the electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89000.

4. Troubleshooting
Connector No. Symptom
J/P45 Connects to D-ICE PCB. No. 6640-4000 System error. (D-ICE Control PCB) occurs.
No. 6643-0001 Digital Masking Unit operation error. occurs.
J/P50 Power supply from desk No. 1014 The system is being initialized, one moment please. . . occurs and the system
power supply 1 (+5 V−1) program does not start.
No. 6901-2008 ARCNET communication error. Processor Digital ICE Control PCB
occurs.
J/P51 Connects to the PC. No. 6900-0001 Main control system error. occurs while printing.
J/P52 Connects to the buzzer. The buzzer does not sound.
J/P53 ARCNET No. 1014 The system is being initialized, one moment please. . . occurs and the system
Connects the printer control program does not start.
PCB. No. 6901-2008 ARCNET communication error. Processor Digital ICE Control PCB
occurs.
J/P54 ARCNET No. 6901-0209 ARCNET communication error. Paper Supply Section Processor LASER
Connects the printer control occurs.
PCB.
J/P71 ARCNET No. 1014 The system is being initialized, one moment please. . . occurs and the system
Connects the AFC/scanner program does not start.
control PCB. No. 6901-0010 ARCNET communication error. Scanner AFC occurs.
J/P72 ARCNET No. 1014 The system is being initialized, one moment please. . . occurs and the system
Connects the AFC/scanner program does not start.
control PCB. No. 6901-2000 ARCNET communication error. Digital ICE Control PCB occurs.
J/P73 ARCNET No. 6901-2000 ARCNET communication error. Digital ICE Control PCB occurs.
Connects the image
processing PCB.
J/P74 ARCNET No. 1014 The system is being initialized, one moment please. . . occurs and the system
Connects the image program does not start.
processing PCB. No. 6901-0080 ARCNET communication error. Image Processing PCB occurs.
J/P75 ARCNET No. 1014 The system is being initialized, one moment please. . . occurs and the system
Connects the PC control unit. program does not start.
No. 6901-2008 ARCNET communication error. Processor Digital ICE Control PCB
occurs.
J/P76 ARCNET No. 1014 The system is being initialized, one moment please. . . occurs and the system
Connects the PC control unit. program does not start.
No. 6901-2008 ARCNET communication error. Processor Digital ICE Control PCB
occurs.

4201 2/8
 4201
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring

Connector No. Symptom

J/P158 Inputs the power supply (+24 The PC does not start automatically.
V-4) from printer I/O PCB 1. Any malfunction does not occur on this condition after starting up the PC forcibly.

z D−ICE PCB
See the electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89000.

Connector No. Symptom

J/P45 Connects to D-ICE control No. 6640-4000 System error. (D-ICE Control PCB) occurs.
PCB. No. 6643-0001 Digital Masking Unit operation error. occurs.
J/P436 Connects to LVDS and No. 6822-0011 Image Processing PCB Image data operation error. occurs.
scanner section.
J/P437 Power supply from disk No. 6640-4000 System error. (D-ICE Control PCB) occurs.
power supply 1 (+5 V−1) No. 6643-0001 Digital Masking Unit operation error. occurs.
J/P438 Connects to the image No. 6822-0011 Image Processing PCB Image data operation error. occurs while scanning.
processing PCB.
J/P480 Connects to DIMM. No. 6643-0001 Digital Masking Unit operation error. occurs.

4. Troubleshooting
J/P483 Connects to the scratch mend No. 6643-0001 Digital Masking Unit operation error. occurs.
PCB 2.
J/P484 Connects to the scratch mend No. 6643-0001 Digital Masking Unit operation error. occurs.
PCB1 [J484 A]
J/P485 Connects to the scratch mend No. 6643-0001 Digital Masking Unit operation error. occurs.
PCB1 [J484 A]
J/P486 Connects to the data change- No. 6643-0001 Digital Masking Unit operation error. occurs.
J/P487 over PCB.

z DIMM
See the electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89000.

Connector No. Symptom

J/P480 Connects to D-ICE PCB. No. 6643-0001 Digital Masking Unit operation error. occurs.

z Scratch mend PCB 2

See the electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89000.

Connector No. Symptom

J/P483 Connects to D-ICE PCB. No. 6643-0001 Digital Masking Unit operation error. occurs.

z Scratch mend PCB 1 [J484A]

See the electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89000.

Connector No. Symptom

J/P484A Connects to D-ICE PCB. No. 6643-0001 Digital Masking Unit operation error. occurs.

z Scratch mend PCB 1 [J485]

See the electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89000.

Connector No. Symptom

J/P485 Connects to D-ICE PCB. No. 6643-0001 Digital Masking Unit operation error. occurs.

4201 3/8
 4201
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring

z Data change-over PCB

See the electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89000.

Connector No. Symptom

J/P486 Connects to D-ICE PCB. No. 6643-0001 Digital Masking Unit operation error. occurs.
J/P487

z Colorimeter Control PCB

See the electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89000.

Connector No. Symptom

J/P180 Power supply from desk No. 6903-0001 Serial communication error. Colorimeter Unit occurs.
power supply 2 (+24 V−1)
J/P181 Connects to the paper sensor When calibrating the colorimeter, No. 6554-0003 Calibration Plate advance error. occurs.
(LED PCB).
J/P182 Connects to paper sensors 1 When calibrating the colorimeter, No. 6554-0003 Calibration Plate advance error. occurs.
and 2 (detection PCB).
J/P183 Connects to the colorimeter. No. 6903-0002 Serial communication error. Colorimeter occurs.

4. Troubleshooting
J/P184 Connects to the PC. No. 6903-0001 Serial communication error. Colorimeter Unit occurs.
J/P185 Connects to the paper When calibrating the colorimeter, No. 6554-0001 Calibration Plate advance error. occurs.
advance motor.
J/P186 Connects to the pressure When calibrating the colorimeter, No. 6554-0006 Calibration Plate advance error. occurs.
change solenoid.

z Power PCB
See the electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89000.

Connector No. Symptom

J/P99 Supplies the power from the The input section does not activate because power is not supplied to the desk section.
earth leakage circuit breaker.
J/P100 Jumper No malfunction occurs on this condition.
J/P101 Supplies the power to the The monitor is not turned on.
monitor and ATX power The PC does not start.
supply.
J/P102 Supplies the power to the The scanner section does not operate.
scanner section. No. 6901-0010 ARCNET communication error. Scanner AFC occurs.
J/P104 Supplies the power to the No. 6901-2008 ARCNET communication error. Processor Digital ICE Control PCB
desk power supply 1 and 2. occurs.
No. 6903-0001 Serial communication error. Colorimeter Unit occurs.
No. 1014 The system is being initialized, one moment please. . . occurs and the system
program does not start.
The control unit cooling fan and D-ICE cooling fan do not rotate.

z Desk power supply 1

See the electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89000.

Connector No. Symptom

J/P112 Power supply from the No. 6901-2008 ARCNET communication error. Processor Digital ICE Control PCB
power PCB. occurs.
No. 1014 The system is being initialized, one moment please. . . occurs and the system
program does not start.

4201 4/8
 4201
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring

Connector No. Symptom

J/P121 Supplies the power (+5 V−1) No. 6901-2008 ARCNET communication error. Processor Digital ICE Control PCB
to the D-ICE PCB, D-ICE occurs.
control PCB, image No. 1014 The system is being initialized, one moment please. . . occurs and the system
processing PCB, and image program does not start.
correction PCB.
J/P122 Supplies the power to the D- No. 6901-2008 ARCNET communication error. Processor Digital ICE Control PCB
ICE PCB, D-ICE control occurs.
PCB, image processing No. 1014 The system is being initialized, one moment please. . . occurs and the system
PCB, and image correction program does not start.
PCB (GND).

z Desk power supply 2

See the electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89000.

Connector No. Symptom

J/P113 Power supply from the No. 6903-0001 Serial communication error. Colorimeter Unit occurs.
power PCB. No. 6901-0100 ARCNET communication error. PU occurs.
The control unit cooling fan and D-ICE cooling fan do not rotate.

4. Troubleshooting
J/P153 Supplies the power to the No. 6903-0001 Serial communication error. Colorimeter Unit occurs.
colorimeter control PCB, D- No. 6901-0100 ARCNET communication error. PU occurs.
ICE control PCB, control
The control unit cooling fan and D-ICE cooling fan do not rotate.
unit cooling fan, and D-ICE
PCB cooling fan (+24 V−1).

4201 5/8
 4201
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring

Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring (desk section/CS-2)

[32SD]

Symptoms due to the connection failure are different between 32 and 32SD.
• For detail about 32, refer to ☞ Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring (desk section/CS-1) [32].

z Condition for checking disconnection of connector

The tables below explain errors and symptoms seen when the power supply of this system is turned on with each connector
disconnected (for example, the monitor is not turned on, the lamp does not light, the fan does not rotate, etc.)
IMPORTANT
• As the symptom of disconnection of connector, only the symptom on each PCB of the triple paper magazine
specification is described.
• Symptom for the PC is not mentioned.
• For the optional PCBs, some of them are explained.
• When any malfunction does not occur in turning ON the power supply of the system on condition that a connector is
unplugged from each PCB, Any malfunction does not occur on this condition. is mentioned for the connector in

4. Troubleshooting
the list.
• Several errors may occur at the same time with a single connector.
• The suffix number (description of PCB) of No. 6901 ARCNET communication error. may be different from the
following explanation depending on the ARCNET communication feature.

z Desk section
Reference
☞ Switch control PCB ☞ Colorimeter Control PCB
☞ Power PCB ☞ Desk power supply 1
☞ Desk power supply 2 ☞ PC-laser interface PCB
☞ PC-scanner interface PCB

z Switch control PCB

See the electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89000.
Connector No. Symptom
J/P50 Power supply from desk After No. 1014 The system is being initialized, one moment please. . . appears, No. 6901-
power supply 1 (+5 V−1) 4000 ARCNET communication error. Switch Control PCB occurs.
J/P51 Connects to the PC. The PC does not start automatically. Prints can be made normally after starting up the PC
forcibly.
J/P52 Connects to the buzzer. The buzzer does not sound.
J/P53 ARCNET After No. 1014 The system is being initialized, one moment please. . . appears, No. 6901-
Connects the printer control 0009 ARCNET communication error. Printer Processor Scanner AFC occurs.
PCB.
J/P54 ARCNET After No. 1014 The system is being initialized, one moment please. . . appears, No. 6901-
Connects the printer control 0009 ARCNET communication error. Printer Processor Scanner AFC occurs.
PCB.
J/P71 ARCNET After No. 1014 The system is being initialized, one moment please. . . appears, No. 6901-
Connects the AFC/scanner 0010 ARCNET communication error. Scanner AFC occurs.
control PCB.
J/P72 ARCNET After No. 1014 The system is being initialized, one moment please. . . appears, No. 6901-
Connects the AFC/scanner 0010 ARCNET communication error. Scanner AFC occurs.
control PCB.
J/P73 ARCNET After No. 1014 The system is being initialized, one moment please. . . appears, No. 6901
Connected to the PU control ARCNET communication error. occurs.
PCB

4201 6/8
 4201
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring

Connector No. Symptom

J/P74 ARCNET After No. 1014 The system is being initialized, one moment please. . . appears, No. 6901
Connected to the PU control ARCNET communication error. occurs.
PCB
J/P75 ARCNET After No. 1014 The system is being initialized, one moment please. . . appears, No. 6901
PC-laser interface PCB ARCNET communication error. occurs.
J/P76 ARCNET After No. 1014 The system is being initialized, one moment please. . . appears, No. 6901
PC-laser interface PCB ARCNET communication error. occurs.
J/P158 Inputs the power supply (+24 The PC does not start automatically. Prints can be made normally after starting up the PC
V-4) from desk power supply forcibly. The buzzer does not sound.
2.

z Colorimeter Control PCB

See the electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89000.

Connector No. Symptom

J/P180 Power supply from desk No. 6903-0001 Serial communication error. Colorimeter Unit occurs.
power supply 2 (+24 V−1)

4. Troubleshooting
J/P181 Connects to the paper sensor When calibrating the colorimeter, No. 6554-0003 Calibration Plate advance error. occurs.
(LED PCB).
J/P182 Connects to paper sensors 1 When calibrating the colorimeter, No. 6554-0003 Calibration Plate advance error. occurs.
and 2 (detection PCB).
J/P183 Connects to the colorimeter. No. 6903-0002 Serial communication error. Colorimeter occurs.
J/P184 Connects to the PC. No. 6903-0001 Serial communication error. Colorimeter Unit occurs.
J/P185 Connects to the paper When calibrating the colorimeter, No. 6554-0001 Calibration Plate advance error. occurs.
advance motor.
J/P186 Connects to the pressure When calibrating the colorimeter, No. 6554-0006 Calibration Plate advance error. occurs.
change solenoid.

z Power PCB
See the electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89000.

Connector No. Symptom

J/P99 Supplies power from the AC The input section does not activate because power is not supplied to the desk section.
receptacle
J/P100 Jumper No malfunction occurs on this condition.
J/P101 Supplies the power to the The monitor is not turned on.
monitor and ATX power The PC does not start.
supply.
J/P102 Supplies the power to the The scanner section does not operate.
scanner section. No. 6901-0010 ARCNET communication error. Scanner AFC occurs.
J/P104 Supplies the power to the No.6901-4000 ARCNET communication error. Switch Control PCB occurs.
desk power supply 1 and 2. No. 6903-0001 Serial communication error. Colorimeter Unit occurs.
No. 1014 The system is being initialized, one moment please. . . occurs and the system
program does not start.

z Desk power supply 1

See the electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89000.

Connector No. Symptom

J/P112 Power supply from the No.6901-4000 ARCNET communication error. Switch Control PCB occurs.
power PCB. No. 1014 The system is being initialized, one moment please. . . occurs and the system
program does not start.

4201 7/8
 4201
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring

Connector No. Symptom

J/P121 Supplies the power to the No.6901-4000 ARCNET communication error. Switch Control PCB occurs.
switch control PCB (+5 V− No. 1014 The system is being initialized, one moment please. . . occurs and the system
1). program does not start.

z Desk power supply 2

See the electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89000.

Connector No. Symptom

J/P113 Power supply from the No. 6903-0001 Serial communication error. Colorimeter Unit occurs.
power PCB. No. 6901-0100 ARCNET communication error. PU occurs.
J/P153 Supplies power to the No. 6903-0001 Serial communication error. Colorimeter Unit occurs.
colorimeter control PCB, the No. 6901-0100 ARCNET communication error. PU occurs.
switch control PCB and the
PU control PCB (+24 V−1)

z PC-laser interface PCB

See the electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89000.

4. Troubleshooting
Connector No. Symptom
J/P198 ARCNET After No. 1014 The system is being initialized, one moment please. . . appears, No. 6901
(J/P73) Connects to the switch ARCNET communication error. occurs.
control PCB
J/P199 ARCNET After No. 1014 The system is being initialized, one moment please. . . appears, No. 6901
(J/P74) Connects to the switch ARCNET communication error. occurs.
control PCB
J/P455 Connecting to the laser The system starts up normally. When printing is started from the PJP mode, then No.6087-
control PCB 0003 Laser Control PCB system error. occurs, but the error can be released and the print
(LVDS) started, while the print of the 1st sheet had stopped in the exposure standby position, it does
not progress to the next. The 2nd print is cut and stops in the receiving position of arm 1 and
the paper was not rewound to the paper magazine, and it has stopped in the state where it was
sent out.
J/P457 Connected to the PC-scanner No. 1014 The system is being initialized, one moment please. . . appears, and then No.
interface PCB 6901-2000 ARCNET communication error. PC-scanner interface PCB appears.

z PC-scanner interface PCB

See the electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89000.

Connector No. Symptom

J/P436 Connects to the scanner unit. After starting the scanning, the message One moment please... appears and it does not
(LVDS) change. NO is selected and scanning can be stopped.
J/P437 Inputs the power supply (+5 No. 1014 The system is being initialized, one moment please. . . appears, and then No.
V) from ATX power supply. 6901-2000 ARCNET communication error. PC-scanner interface PCB appears.
J/P457 Connects to the PC-laser No. 1014 The system is being initialized, one moment please. . . appears, and then No.
interface PCB. 6901-2000 ARCNET communication error. PC-scanner interface PCB appears.

4201 8/8
 4202
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring

Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring (printer section)

z Condition for checking disconnection of connector

The tables below explain errors and symptoms seen when the power supply of this system is turned on with each connector
disconnected (for example, the monitor is not turned on, the lamp does not light, the fan does not rotate, etc.)
IMPORTANT
• Only the symptom of disconnection of connector on each PCB of the triple magazine specification and quad magazine
specification is described.
• For the optional PCBs, some of them are explained.
• When any malfunction does not occur in turning ON the power supply of the system on condition that a connector is
unplugged from each PCB, Any malfunction does not occur on this condition. is mentioned for the connector in
the list.
• Several errors may occur at the same time with a single connector.
• The suffix number (description of PCB) of No. 6901 ARCNET communication error. may be different from the
following explanation depending on the ARCNET communication feature.

z Printer section

4. Troubleshooting
Reference
☞ Printer control PCB ☞ Laser control PCB
☞ Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ Printer I/O PCB 2
☞ Printer I/O PCB 3 ☞ Triple magazine PCB
☞ Laser I/O PCB ☞ B laser driver
☞ G laser driver ☞ CVP PCB
☞ Printer power supply 1 (PS1) ☞ Printer power supply 2 (PS2)
☞ Printer power supply 3 (PS3) ☞ Multi power supply (printer) (PS4)
☞ Laser power supply (PS5) ☞ B-AOM driver
☞ G-AOM driver ☞ R-AOM driver
☞ Quad magazine PCB ☞ Printer power supply 4 (PS6)

z Printer control PCB

See the electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89000.

Connector No. Symptom

J/P200 Connects to printer I/O PCB No. 1026 Close the Printer Top Cover. occurs.
1.
J/P201 Connects to printer I/O PCB No. 6016-0004 Paper Cutter operation error. occurs.
2.
J/P202 Connects to printer I/O PCB No. 6021-0009 Paper remains in the printer section. occurs.
3.
J/P203 Connects to printer I/O PCB No. 6021-0009 Paper remains in the printer section. occurs.
3.
J/P204 Connects to the triple No. 1047-0002 Close printer door. occurs.
magazine PCB.
Connects to the quad No. 1047-0002 Close printer door. occurs.
magazine PCB.
J/P206 Connects to printer I/O PCB No. 6021-0004 Paper remains in the printer section. occurs.
2.
J/P207 Connects to printer I/O PCB No. 6021-0005 Paper remains in the printer section. occurs.
3.
J/P208 Connects to the triple No. 6021-0001 Paper remains in the printer section. occurs.
magazine PCB.
J/P209 Connects to printer I/O PCB No. 6021-0009 Paper remains in the printer section. occurs.
3.

4202 1/10
 4202
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring

Connector No. Symptom

J/P210 Connects to the CVP PCB. The CVP unit does not operate.
J/P211 Connects to the magazine All the magazine code sensors B and C turn DARK.
code sensor.
J/P212 Connects to the laser control The printing operation does not proceed from exposing.
PCB.
J/P213 Connects to the quad No. 6021-0001 Paper remains in the printer section. occurs.
magazine PCB. No. 6196-0002 Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine A2 occurs.
J/P218 Power supply from the multi No. 6901-0209 ARCNET communication error. Paper Supply Section Processor LASER
power supply (printer) (+5 V) occurs.
J/P219 ARCNET No. 1014 The system is being initialized, one moment please. . . occurs and the system
Connecting to the laser program does not start.
control PCB No. 6901-2000 ARCNET communication error. Digital ICE Control PCB occurs.
J/P220 ARCNET No. 6901-0200 ARCNET communication error. LASER occurs.
Connecting to the laser
control PCB
J/P221 ARCNET No. 6901-0209 ARCNET communication error. Paper Supply Section Processor LASER
Connecting to D-ICE control occurs.

4. Troubleshooting
PCB
J/P222 ARCNET No. 1014 The system is being initialized, one moment please. . . occurs and the system
Connecting to D-ICE control program does not start.
PCB No. 6901-2008 ARCNET communication error. Processor Digital ICE Control PCB
occurs.
J/P223 ARCNET No. 6901-0008 ARCNET communication error. Processor occurs.
Connects to the processor
control PCB.
J/P224 ARCNET No. 6901-0008 ARCNET communication error. Processor occurs.
Connects to the processor
control PCB.

z Laser control PCB

See the electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89000.

Connector No. Symptom

J/P1501 Connects to the B-AOM The print whose color is blue only is made.
driver.
J/P1502 Connects to the G-AOM The print whose color is green only is made.
driver.
J/P1503 Connects to the R-AOM No. 6073 Synchronous Sensor error. occurs while printing, or white prints are made.
driver.
J/P1505 Power supply from the The message does not change from Laser temperatures are being adjusted. (U).
multi power supply (printer)
(+12 V)
J/P1506 Power supply from the No. 6901-0200 ARCNET communication error. LASER occurs.
multi power supply (printer)
(+5 V)
J/P1508 Connects to the B, G and R- No. 6073 Synchronous Sensor error. occurs after the message, Laser temperatures are
AOM drivers. being adjusted. Approx.## disappeared.
J/P1511 Connects to the laser I/O The message does not change from Laser temperatures are being adjusted. (R) after the
PCB. message, Laser temperatures are being adjusted. Approx.## disappeared.
J/P1512 Connects to the laser I/O The message does not change from Laser temperatures are being adjusted. after the
PCB. message, Laser temperatures are being adjusted. Approx.## disappeared.
J/P1513 Connects to the image No. 6087-0003 Laser Control PCB system error. occurs while printing. Then No. 6900-0800
processing PCB (LVDS). Main control system error. and 6822-0008 Image Processing PCB Image data operation
error. occur.
The printing operation does not proceed from exposing.

4202 2/10
 4202
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring

Connector No. Symptom

J/P1515 Connects to the laser unit. No. 6073 Synchronous Sensor error. occurs after the message, Laser temperatures are
being adjusted. Approx.## disappeared.
J/P1516 ARCNET No. 6901-0200 ARCNET communication error. LASER occurs.
Connects the printer control
PCB.
J/P1517 ARCNET No. 1014 The system is being initialized, one moment please. . . occurs and the system
Connects the printer control program does not start.
PCB. No. 6901-2000 ARCNET communication error. Digital ICE Control PCB occurs.
J/P1519 Connects to the B and G The message does not change from Laser temperatures are being adjusted.
laser drivers.
J/P1520 Connects to the printer The printing operation does not proceed from exposing.
control PCB.
J/P1522 Connects to the laser unit The message does not change from Laser temperatures are being adjusted. (U).
and inner thermosensor.

z Printer I/O PCB 1

See the electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89000.

4. Troubleshooting
Connector No. Symptom
J/P232 Connects to the counter. The counter stops operation.
J/P233 Connects to the paper The paper advance unit cooling fan stops operation.
advance unit cooling fan.
J/P234 Connects to printer I/O PCB The control box cooling fans 2, 3 and 4 stop operations.
3.
J/P235 Power supply from printer The counter, paper advance section cooling fan, inner cooling fan, control box cooling fans 1, 2,
power supply 3 (+24 V) 3, and 4 stop operations.
J/P237 Supplies the power to the No. 6136-0001 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 1 operation error. occurs.
printer power supplies 1, 2
and 3.
J/P238 Power supply from the No. 6136-0001 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 1 operation error. occurs.
processor section
J/P239 Connects to the interlock No. 1047-0001 Close printer door. occurs.
switch (printer door 2).
J/P240 Connects to the interlock No. 1047-0001 Close printer door. occurs.
switch (printer door 2).
J/P241 Connects to the laser I/O No. 1026 Close the Printer Top Cover. occurs.
PCB.
J/P242 Connects to the printer I/O No. 6016-0004 Paper Cutter operation error. occurs.
PCB 2 and paper end sensor
B.
J/P245 Connects to the printer No. 1026 Close the Printer Top Cover. occurs.
control PCB.
J/P246 Connects to the triple No. 6021-0001 Paper remains in the printer section. occurs.
magazine PCB.
Connects to the quad No. 6021-0010 Paper remains in the printer section. occurs.
magazine PCB.
J/P247 Power supply from the multi No. 6136-0001 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 1 operation error. occurs.
power supply (printer) (+5
V)
J/P248 Connects to the exposure No. 6136-0001 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 1 operation error. occurs.
advance pressure change
motors 1 and 2.
J/P249 Connects to the exposure No. 6017-0001 Paper has jammed in the printer section. occurs while printing.
advance motors 1 and 2.

4202 3/10
 4202
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring

Connector No. Symptom

J/P250 Connects to the paper No. 6013-0001 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine B or No. 6112-0001 Could not load the
magazine motors 1 and 2. paper. Paper Magazine C occurs while printing.
J/P251 Power supply from printer No. 6136-0001 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 1 operation error. occurs.
power supply 1 (+24 V)
J/P252 Connects to the processor No. 6101-0001 Paper Hold Motor operation error. occurs.
I/O PCB 2.
J/P253 Connects to the triple No. 6012-0001 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A occurs while printing.
magazine PCB.
Connects to the quad No malfunction occurs on this condition.
magazine PCB.
J/P254 Power supply from printer No. 6012-0001 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A, No. 6013-0001 Paper did not load.
power supply 2 (+36 V) Paper Magazine B or No. 6112-0001 Could not load the paper. Paper Magazine C occurs
while printing.
J/P255 Connects to the CVP PCB. The CVP unit does not operate.
J/P256 Connects to the paper No. 6017-0003 Paper has jammed in the printer section. occurs while printing.
advance motor 2 and
pressure guide motor.

4. Troubleshooting
J/P257 Connects to the inner The inner cooling fan and control box cooling fan 1 stop operations.
cooling fan and control box
cooling fan 1.

z Printer I/O PCB 2

See the electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89000.

Connector No. Symptom

J/P258 Connects to the cut motor. No. 6016-0004 Paper Cutter operation error. occurs while printing.
J/P259 Connects to the paper hold No. 6101-0002 Paper Hold Motor operation error. occurs.
motor and paper hold
sensor.
J/P260 Connects to the paper No. 6134-0002 Paper Supply Pressure Change Motor operation error. occurs.
supply pressure change
motor and paper supply
pressure change sensor.
J/P261 Connects to the cut home No. 6021-0004 Paper remains in the printer section. occurs.
sensor, cut end sensor and
paper loading sensor.
J/P262 Connects to the printer No. 6016-0004 Paper Cutter operation error. occurs.
control PCB.
J/P263 Connects to printer I/O PCB No. 6016-0004 Paper Cutter operation error. occurs.
1.
J/P264 Connects to printer I/O PCB No. 6101-0001 Paper Hold Motor operation error. occurs.
1.
J/P265 Connects to the paper No. 6017-0001 Paper has jammed in the printer section. occurs while printing.
advance motor 1.
J/P266 Connects to the paper No. 6135-0001 Arm Unit 1 operation error. occurs.
supply motor B/C and paper
supply arm motor (right).
J/P267 Connects to the paper No. 6012-0002 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A occurs while printing.
supply motor A.
J/P268 Connects to the paper No. 6135-0001 Arm Unit 1 operation error. occurs.
supply arm motor (left).

4202 4/10
 4202
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring

z Printer I/O PCB 3

See the electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89000.

Connector No. Symptom

J/P271 Connects to the lane select No. 6142-0001 Paper Advance Pressure Change Motor (Left) operation error. occurs.
motor (left) and paper
advance pressure change
motor (left).
J/P272 Connects to the lane select No. 6143-0001 Paper Advance Pressure Change Motor (Right) operation error. occurs.
motor (right) and paper
advance pressure change
motor (right).
J/P273 Connects to the paper No. 6138-0001 Paper Advance Arm Motor (Left) operation error. occurs.
advance arm motor (left) No. 6139-0001 Paper Advance Arm Motor (Right) operation error. occurs.
and paper advance arm
motor (right).
J/P274 Connects to paper advance No. 6017-0001 Paper has jammed in the printer section. occurs while printing.
motor 3.
J/P275 Power supply from printer No. 6138-0001 Paper Advance Arm Motor (Left) operation error. occurs.

4. Troubleshooting
power supply 1 (+24 V) No. 6139-0001 Paper Advance Arm Motor (Right) operation error. occurs.
J/P276 Connects to the control box The control box cooling fans 2, 3 and 4 stop operations.
cooling fans 2, 3 and 4.
J/P277 Connects to printer I/O PCB The control box cooling fans 2, 3 and 4 stop operations.
1.
J/P278 Connects to the paper Paper magazine lamp B/C does not turn on.
magazine lamp B/C.
J/P279 Connects to the printer No. 6021-0009 Paper remains in the printer section. occurs.
control PCB.
J/P280 Connects to the printer No. 6021-0009 Paper remains in the printer section. occurs.
control PCB.
J/P281 Connects to the paper end No. 6021-0003 Paper remains in the printer section. occurs.
sensors B and C.
J/P282 Connects to the paper No. 6021-0009 Paper remains in the printer section. occurs.
sensors 2 (left, center and
right).
J/P283 Connects to the paper sensor No. 6021-0006 Paper remains in the printer section. occurs.
1 and pressure guide sensor.
J/P284 Connects to the zigzagging No. 6021-0005 Paper remains in the printer section. occurs.
correction sensors (left and
right), exposure start sensor,
exposure advance pressure
change sensors 1 and 2.
J/P285 Power supply from the multi No. 6021-0009 Paper remains in the printer section. occurs.
power supply (printer) (+5
V)
J/P286 Connects to the arm sensors No. 6138-0002 Paper Advance Arm Motor (Left) operation error. occurs.
(left and right). No. 6139-0002 Paper Advance Arm Motor (Right) operation error. occurs.
J/P287 Connects to the lane select No. 6142-0002 Paper Advance Pressure Change Motor (Left) operation error. occurs.
sensor (left) and paper
advance pressure change
sensor (left).
J/P288 Connects to the lane select No. 6143-0002 Paper Advance Pressure Change Motor (Right) operation error. occurs.
sensor (right) and paper
advance pressure change
sensor (right).

4202 5/10
 4202
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring

z Triple magazine PCB

See the electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89000.

Connector No. Symptom

J/P295 Connects to the paper No. 6012-0001 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A occurs while printing.
magazine motor A.
J/P296 Connects to the paper Paper magazine lamp A does not turn on.
magazine lamp A.
J/P297 Connects to the printer door No. 1047-0002 Close printer door. occurs.
3 sensor.
J/P298 Connects to the paper All the magazine code sensors A turn dark.
magazine code sensor A.
J/P299 Connects to the paper end No. 6021-0001 Paper remains in the printer section. occurs.
sensor A.
J/P300 Connects to printer I/O PCB No. 6021-0001 Paper remains in the printer section. occurs.
1.
J/P301 Connects to the printer No. 1047-0002 Close printer door. occurs.
control PCB.

4. Troubleshooting
z Quad magazine PCB
See the electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89000.

Connector No. Symptom

J/P295 Connects to the paper No. 6012-0001 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A occurs while printing.
magazine motor A.
J/P296 Connects to the paper Paper magazine lamp A does not turn on.
magazine lamp A.
J/P297 Connects to the printer door No. 1047-0002 Close printer door. occurs.
3 sensor.
J/P298 Connects to the paper All the magazine code sensors A turn dark.
magazine code sensor A.
J/P299 Connects to the paper end No. 6021-0001 Paper remains in the printer section. occurs.
sensor A.
J/P300 Connects to printer I/O PCB No. 6021-0001 Paper remains in the printer section. occurs.
1.
Power supply from printer
power supply 4 (+36 V)
J/P301 Connects to the printer No. 1047-0002 Close printer door. occurs.
control PCB.
J/P1700 Connects to the printer No. 6021-0001 Paper remains in the printer section. occurs.
control PCB. No. 6196-0002 Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine A2 occurs.
J/P1701 Connects to the paper end No. 6021-0001 Paper remains in the printer section. occurs.
sensor A2. No. 6196-0002 Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine A2 occurs.
J/P1702 Connects to the paper No. 6195-0001 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A2 occurs.
magazine code sensor A2. Information of paper magazine A2 is not displayed on the Order Display.
J/P1703 Connects to the paper No. 6195-0001 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A2 occurs while printing.
magazine motor A2.
J/P1704 Connects to the paper supply No. 6195-0002 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A2 occurs while printing.
motor A2.
J/P1705 Connects to the width No. 6199-0002 Pressure Release Motor A2 operation error. occurs.
change motor A2 and
pressure release motor.
J/P1707 Connects to the pressure No. 6199-0002 Pressure Release Motor A2 operation error. occurs.
change sensor A2 and width
change sensor A2.

4202 6/10
 4202
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring

Connector No. Symptom

J/P1708 Power supply from printer No. 6199-0002 Pressure Release Motor A2 operation error. occurs.
power supply 3 (+24 V)
J/P1709 Connects to printer I/O PCB No. 6200-0001 Width Change Motor A2 operation error. occurs while printing.
1.

z Laser I/O PCB

See the electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89000.

Connector No. Symptom

J/P1532 Connects to the laser unit. The message does not change from Laser temperatures are being adjusted. (R) after the
message, Laser temperatures are being adjusted. Approx.## disappeared.
J/P1533 Connects to the interlock No. 1026 Close the Printer Top Cover. occurs.
switch (printer top cover).
J/P1534 Connects to printer I/O No. 1026 Close the Printer Top Cover. occurs.
PCB 1.
J/P1535 Power supply from the No. 6105 B Laser light source status error. occurs after the message, Laser temperatures
multi power supply are being adjusted. Approx.## disappeared.

4. Troubleshooting
(printer) (+5 V)
J/P1536 Connects to the laser The message does not change from Laser temperatures are being adjusted. (R) after the
control PCB. message, Laser temperatures are being adjusted. Approx.## disappeared.
J/P1538 Connects to the laser The message does not change from Laser temperatures are being adjusted. after the
control PCB. message, Laser temperatures are being adjusted. Approx.## disappeared.
J/P1539 Connects to the laser unit. No. 6076-0001 Polygon Mirror control error. occurs after the message, Laser temperatures
are being adjusted. Approx.## disappeared.
J/P1540 Connects to the laser unit. No malfunction occurs on this condition.
J/P1541 Power supply from the No. 1026 Close the Printer Top Cover. occurs.
laser power supply (+24
V)
J/P1542 Connects to the B-AOM The print whose color is blue only is made.
driver.
J/P1543 Connects to the G-AOM The print whose color is green only is made.
driver.
J/P1544 Connects to the R-AOM No. 6073 Synchronous Sensor error. occurs while printing, or white prints are made.
driver.
J/P1549 Connects to the B and G No. 6105 B Laser light source status error. or No. 6106 G Laser light source status error.
laser drivers. occurs after the message, Laser temperatures are being adjusted. Approx.## disappeared.
J/P1550 Power supply from the The message does not change from Laser temperatures are being adjusted. (R) after the
multi power supply message, Laser temperatures are being adjusted. Approx.## disappeared.
(printer) (+12 V)
J/P1551 Connects to the laser unit No malfunction occurs on this condition.
heater.

z B laser driver
See the electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89000.

Connector No. Symptom

J/P1653 Connects to the laser unit. The print whose color is blue only is made.
J/P1654 Connects to the laser No. 6105 B Laser light source status error. occurs after the message, Laser temperatures
control PCB. are being adjusted. Approx.## disappeared.
J/P1655 Connects to the laser I/O No. 6105 B Laser light source status error. occurs after the message, Laser temperatures
PCB. are being adjusted. Approx.## disappeared.

4202 7/10
 4202
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring

z G laser driver
See the electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89000.

Connector No. Symptom

J/P1663 Connects to the laser unit. No. 6106 G Laser light source status error. occurs after the message, Laser temperatures
are being adjusted. Approx.## disappeared.
J/P1664 Connects to the laser No. 6106 G Laser light source status error. occurs after the message, Laser temperatures
control PCB. are being adjusted. Approx.## disappeared.
J/P1665 Connects to the laser I/O No. 6106 G Laser light source status error. occurs after the message, Laser temperatures
PCB. are being adjusted. Approx.## disappeared.

z CVP PCB
See the electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89000.

Connector No. Symptom

J/P500 Connects to the printer The CVP unit does not operate.
control PCB.
J/P501 Connects to the printer I/O The CVP unit does not operate.

4. Troubleshooting
PCB 1.
J/P502 Connects to the dot head and The CVP unit does not operate.
ribbon advance motor.

z Printer power supply 1 (PS1)

See the electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89000.

Connector No. Symptom

J/P422 Supplies the power to the No. 6136-0001 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 1 operation error. occurs.
printer I/O PCBs 1 and 3
(+24 V).
J/P428 Power supply from the No. 6136-0001 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 1 operation error. occurs.
printer I/O PCB 1

z Printer power supply 2 (PS2)

See the electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89000.

Connector No. Symptom

J/P420 Supplies the power (+36 V) to No. 6012-0001 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A, No. 6013-0001 Paper did not load.
printer I/O PCB 1. Paper Magazine B or No. 6112-0001 Could not load the paper. Paper Magazine C occurs
while printing.
J/P421 Supplies the power (+36 V) to No. 6012-0001 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A, No. 6013-0001 Paper did not load.
printer I/O PCB 1. Paper Magazine B or No. 6112-0001 Could not load the paper. Paper Magazine C occurs
while printing.
J/P430 Power supply from the printer No. 6012-0001 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A, No. 6013-0001 Paper did not load.
I/O PCB 1 Paper Magazine B or No. 6112-0001 Could not load the paper. Paper Magazine C occurs
while printing.

z Printer power supply 3 (PS3)

See the electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89000.

Connector No. Symptom

J/P424 Supplies the power (+24 V) The counter, paper advance section cooling fan, inner cooling fan, control box cooling fans 1, 2,
to printer I/O PCB 1. 3, and 4 stop operations.
J/P431 Power supply from the The counter, paper advance section cooling fan, inner cooling fan, control box cooling fans 1, 2,
printer I/O PCB 1 3, and 4 stop operations.

4202 8/10
 4202
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring

z Multi power supply (printer) (PS4)

See the electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89000.

Connector No. Symptom

J/P418 Supplies the power to the No. 6901-0209 ARCNET communication error. Paper Supply Section Processor LASER
printer I/O PCBs 1 and 3, occurs.
printer control PCB, laser
I/O PCB and laser control
PCB (+5 V).
J/P419 Supplies the power to the The message does not change from Laser temperatures are being adjusted. (U).
laser I/O PCB and laser
control PCB (+12 V).
J/P432 Power supply from the No. 6901-0209 ARCNET communication error. Paper Supply Section Processor LASER
processor section occurs.

z Laser power supply (PS5)

See the electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89000.

Connector No. Symptom

4. Troubleshooting
J/P433 Power supply from the No. 1026 Close the Printer Top Cover. occurs.
processor section
J/P1614 Supplies the power to the No. 1026 Close the Printer Top Cover. occurs.
laser I/O PCB (+24 V).
J/P1615 Supplies the power to the No. 1026 Close the Printer Top Cover. occurs.
laser I/O PCB (+24 V).

z Printer power supply 4 (PS6)

See the electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89000.

Connector No. Symptom

J/P1711 Power supply from the No. 6195-0002 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A2 occurs while printing.
printer I/O PCB 1
J/P1712 Supplies the power to the No. 6195-0002 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A2 occurs while printing.
quad paper magazine PCB
(+36 V).

z B-AOM driver
See the electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89000.

Connector No. Symptom

J/P1631 Connects to the laser The print whose color is blue only is made.
control PCB.
J/P1632 Connects to the laser unit. The print whose color is blue only is made.
J/P1633 Connects to the laser I/O The print whose color is blue only is made.
PCB.
J/P1634 Connects to the laser The print whose color is blue only is made.
control PCB.

z G-AOM driver
See the electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89000.

Connector No. Symptom

J/P1636 Connects to the laser The print whose color is green only is made.
control PCB.
J/P1637 Connects to the laser unit. The print whose color is green only is made.

4202 9/10
 4202
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring

Connector No. Symptom

J/P1638 Connects to the laser I/O The print whose color is green only is made.
PCB.
J/P1639 Connects to the laser The print whose color is green only is made.
control PCB.

z R-AOM driver
See the electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89000.

Connector No. Symptom

J/P1641 Connects to the laser No. 6073 Synchronous Sensor error. occurs while printing, or white prints are made.
control PCB.
J/P1642 Connects to the laser unit. No. 6073 Synchronous Sensor error. occurs while printing, or white prints are made.
J/P1643 Connects to the laser I/O No. 6073 Synchronous Sensor error. occurs while printing, or white prints are made.
PCB.
J/P1644 Connects to the laser No. 6073 Synchronous Sensor error. occurs while printing, or white prints are made.
control PCB.

4. Troubleshooting

4202 10/10
 4203
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring

Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring (processor)

z Condition for checking disconnection of connector

The tables below explain errors and symptoms seen when the power supply of this system is turned on with each connector
disconnected (for example, the monitor is not turned on, the lamp does not light, the fan does not rotate, etc.)
IMPORTANT
• Symptom results from disconnection of connector is described only QSS-3203 (triple magazine specification) of each
PCB.
• For the PCBs of the processor, the PCBs only for normal specifications are mentioned.
• For the optional PCBs, some of them are explained.
• When any malfunction does not occur in turning ON the power supply of the system on condition that a connector is
unplugged from each PCB, Any malfunction does not occur on this condition. is mentioned for the connector in
the list.
• Several errors may occur at the same time with a single connector.
• The suffix number (description of PCB) of No. 6901 ARCNET communication error. may be different from the
following explanation depending on the ARCNET communication feature.

4. Troubleshooting
z Processor section
Reference
☞ Processor control PCB ☞ Processor I/O PCB
☞ Processor relay PCB ☞ Processor power supply 1 (PS1)
☞ Processor power supply 2 (PS2) ☞ Processor power supply 3 (PS3)
☞ Earth leakage circuit breaker 1 (NFB2) ☞ Earth leakage circuit breaker 2 (NFB3)
☞ Earth leakage circuit breaker 3 (NFB4)

z Processor control PCB

See the electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89000.

Connector No. Symptom

J/P510 Connects to the processor I/O No. 0500 Add water to the Refilling Water Tank. occurs.
PCB. No. 0502 Add replenishment solution to the replenishment tank. CD BF STB occurs.
No. 0503 Empty the Effluent Tank. CD BF STB occurs.
No. 0515 Set the Rack Stopper. occurs.
No. 5508 The processing solution level is too low. occurs.
No. 5532 The Processing Solution Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
No. 5533 The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
J/P511 Connects to the processor No. 0506 Close the Dryer Cover. occurs.
relay PCB. No. 5508 The processing solution level is too low. occurs.
No. 5532 The Processing Solution Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
No. 5533 The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
J/P512 Connects to the CD digital No. 5509 The circulation amount has decreased. 0.0 L/min CD occurs.
flowmeter.
J/P513 Print sensor, dryer select No. 5535 Paper has jammed in the processor section. occurs while printing.
sensor
J/P514 +5 V, +24 V No. 6901-0008 ARCNET communication error. Processor occurs.
J/P515 Connects to the drive motor. No. 5550 Drive Motor has stopped. occurs.
J/P516 Connects to the processing No. 5519 to 5521 Thermosensor error. occurs.
solution temperature sensor, No. 5522 Dryer Thermosensor error. occurs.
dryer temperature sensor.
P517 ARCNET No. 6901-0008 ARCNET communication error. Processor occurs.
Connects to the printer
control PCB.

4203 1/5
 4203
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring

Connector No. Symptom

P518 ARCNET No. 6901-0008 ARCNET communication error. Processor occurs.
Connects to the printer
control PCB.
J/P519 Connects to the drive motor. No malfunction occurs on this condition.

z Processor I/O PCB

See the electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89000.

Connector No. Symptom

J/P670 Rack stopper sensor No. 0515 Set the Rack Stopper. occurs.
J/P673 Hour meter The hour meter does not operate.
J/P674 24 V−1−1, 24 V−1−2, 24 V− No. 5508 The processing solution level is too low. occurs.
3 No. 5532 The Processing Solution Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
No. 5533 The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
J/P677 Connects to the CD No. 5509 The circulation amount has decreased. 0.0 L/min CD occurs.
circulation pump. No. 5511 The circulation pump has stopped. CD occurs.

4. Troubleshooting
J/P678 Connects to the BF No. 5511 The circulation pump has stopped. BF occurs.
circulation pump.
J/P679 Connects to the STB1 No. 5511 The circulation pump has stopped. STB1 occurs.
circulation pump.
J/P680 Connects to the STB2 No. 5511 The circulation pump has stopped. STB2 occurs.
circulation pump.
J/P681 Connects to the STB3 No. 5511 The circulation pump has stopped. STB3 occurs.
circulation pump.
J/P682 Connects to the STB4 No. 5511 The circulation pump has stopped. STB4 occurs.
circulation pump.
J/P683 Connects to the No malfunction occurs on this condition.
replenishment pump and
water supply pump.
J/P685 Connects to the refilling No malfunction occurs on this condition.
water pump.
J/P686 Connects to the drive motor The drive motor cooling fan, tank cooling fans 1, 2 and 3 stop operations.
cooling fan, tank cooling fans
1, 2 and 3.
J/P687 Connects to the effluent float No. 0503 Empty the Effluent Tank. CD BF STB occurs.
switch.
J/P688 Connects to the No. 0500 Add water to the Refilling Water Tank. occurs.
replenishment solution level No. 0502 Add replenishment solution to the replenishment tank. CD BF STB occurs.
sensor and refilling water
tank level sensor.
J/P689 Connects to the processor No malfunction occurs on this condition.
relay PCB (24 V).
J/P690 Power supply from processor No. 0500 Add water to the Refilling Water Tank. occurs.
power supply 2 (+24 V) No. 0502 Add replenishment solution to the replenishment tank. CD BF STB occurs.
No. 0503 Empty the Effluent Tank. CD BF STB occurs.
No. 5508 The processing solution level is too low. occurs.
No. 5532 The Processing Solution Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
No. 5533 The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
J/P694 Connects to the processor The processor condition lamp does not turn on.
condition lamp.
J/P695 Connects to the conveyor No malfunction occurs on this condition.
unit.
J/P696 Connects to the dryer No malfunction occurs on this condition.
selection solenoid.

4203 2/5
 4203
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring

Connector No. Symptom

J/P697 Connects to the sorter unit. No malfunction occurs on this condition.
J/P698 Power supply from processor No. 0500 Add water to the Refilling Water Tank. occurs.
power supply 1 (+5 V) No. 0502 Add replenishment solution to the replenishment tank. CD BF STB occurs.
J/P699 Connects to the processor No. 0500 Add water to the Refilling Water Tank. occurs.
control PCB. No. 0502 Add replenishment solution to the replenishment tank. CD BF STB occurs.
No. 0503 Empty the Effluent Tank. CD BF STB occurs.
No. 0515 Set the Rack Stopper. occurs.
No. 5508 The processing solution level is too low. occurs.
No. 5532 The Processing Solution Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
No. 5533 The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.

z Processor relay PCB

See the electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89000.

Connector No. Symptom

J/P641 Connects to the processor I/O No malfunction occurs on this condition.

4. Troubleshooting
PCB (24 V).
J/P643 Supplies the power to the All the systems do not start.
processor power supplies 1, 2
and 3.
J/P644 Connects to the dryer fan. The dryer fan does not rotate.
No. 5533 The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
J/P646 Supplies the power to the Starts up the processor only
printer.
J/P648 Connects to the processor No. 0506 Close the Dryer Cover. occurs.
control PCB. No. 5508 The processing solution level is too low. occurs.
No. 5532 The Processing Solution Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
No. 5533 The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
J/P649 Connects to the power supply The power supply cooling fan stops operation.
cooling fan.
J/P650 Connects to the processing No. 5508 The processing solution level is too low. occurs.
solution float switch. No. 5532 The Processing Solution Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
J/P651 Connects to the interlock No. 0506 Close the Dryer Cover. occurs.
switch (dryer cover).
J/P652 Connects to the interlock No. 0507 Close the Processor Top Cover. occurs.
switch (processor top cover).
J/P653 Connects to the dryer safety No. 5533 The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
thermostat.
J/P654 Connects to the processor I/O No. 5508 The processing solution level is too low. occurs.
PCB. No. 5532 The Processing Solution Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
No. 5533 The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
J/P655 Connects to the drive motor. No. 5550 Drive Motor has stopped. occurs.
J/P656 Power supply from the printer Starts up the processor only
power supply 3 (+24 V)
J/P657 Connects to the dryer heater. No malfunction occurs on this condition.
J/P659
J/P660
J/P662 Connects to the processing No malfunction occurs on this condition.
solution heater.
J/P663 Jumper No malfunction occurs on this condition.

4203 3/5
 4203
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring

z Processor power supply 1 (PS1)

See the electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89000.

Connector No. Symptom

J/P791 Power supply from the No. 6901-0008 ARCNET communication error. Processor occurs.
processor relay PCB
J/P792 Supplies the power to the
processor control PCB (+24
V) and processor I/O PCB
(+5 V).

z Processor power supply 2 (PS2)

See the electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89000.

Connector No. Symptom

J/P793 Power supply from the No. 0500 Add water to the Refilling Water Tank. occurs.
processor relay PCB No. 0502 Add replenishment solution to the replenishment tank. CD BF STB occurs.
No. 5508 The processing solution level is too low. occurs.

4. Troubleshooting
No. 5510 Processor A/D conversion error. CD occurs.
No. 5519 to 5521 Thermosensor error. CD BF STB occurs.
No. 5522 Dryer Thermosensor error. occurs.
No. 5532 The Processing Solution Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
No. 5533 The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
J/P794 Supplies the power to the No. 0500 Add water to the Refilling Water Tank. occurs.
processor control PCB (+24 No. 0502 Add replenishment solution to the replenishment tank. CD BF STB occurs.
V) and processor I/O PCB
No. 0503 Empty the Effluent Tank. CD BF STB occurs.
(+24 V).
No. 5508 The processing solution level is too low. occurs.
No. 5510 Processor A/D conversion error. CD occurs.
No. 5519 to 5521 Thermosensor error. CD BF STB occurs.
No. 5522 Dryer Thermosensor error. occurs.
No. 5532 The Processing Solution Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
No. 5533 The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
J/P795 Supplies the power to the No. 0500 Add water to the Refilling Water Tank. occurs.
processor control PCB (+24 No. 0502 Add replenishment solution to the replenishment tank. CD BF STB occurs.
V) and processor I/O PCB
No. 5508 The processing solution level is too low. occurs.
(+24 V).
No. 5510 Processor A/D conversion error. CD occurs.
No. 5519 to 5521 Thermosensor error. CD BF STB occurs.
No. 5522 Dryer Thermosensor error. occurs.
No. 5532 The Processing Solution Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
No. 5533 The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.

z Processor power supply 3 (PS3)

See the electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89000.

Connector No. Symptom

J/P796 Power supply from the Starts up the processor only
processor relay PCB
J/P797 Supplies the power to the Starts up the processor only
processor relay PCB (+24 V).
J/P798 Supplies the power to the Starts up the processor only
processor relay PCB (+24 V).

4203 4/5
 4203
Diagnosis appendix for the failures: Symptom due to the connection failure of wiring

z Earth leakage circuit breaker 1 (NFB2)

See the electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89000.

Connector No. Symptom

Power supply from TA2 to TA3 No error occurs under this condition. (The power supply to the CD, BF and STB heaters turns
to OFF.)

z Earth leakage circuit breaker 2 (NFB3)

See the electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89000.

Connector No. Symptom

Power supply from TA2 to TA3 No error occurs under this condition. (The power supply to the dry heater turns to OFF.)

z Earth leakage circuit breaker 3 (NFB4)

See the electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89000.

Connector No. Symptom

Power supply from TA2 to TA3 All the systems do not start.

4. Troubleshooting

4203 5/5
 4251 Diagnosis appendix: Symptoms result from blowout of fuse

Diagnosis appendix: Symptoms result from blowout of fuse

Symptoms result from blowout of fuse (desk section)

z Condition of checking for the blowout of fuse

In the table below, it explains the errors and symptoms seen when the power supply of this system is turned ON with each fuse
removed (for example, the monitor does not bring up, the light does not turn on, the fun does not rotate, or the like).
IMPORTANT
• Symptom results from blowout of fuse is described only the triple magazine of each PCB.
• Symptom for the PC is not mentioned.
• When any malfunction does not occur in turning ON the power supply of the system on condition that a fuse is
removed from each PCB, Any malfunction does not occur on this condition. is mentioned for the fuse in the list.

z Desk section
Reference
☞ Keyboard switch PCB ☞ Power PCB
☞ Desk power supply 1 (PS2) ☞ Desk power supply 2 (PS3)

4. Troubleshooting
z Keyboard switch PCB
See the electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89000.

Fuse No. Symptom

F24 T3.15/125 V (ATX power This fuse has not been checked because it cannot remove.
supply protection)

z Power PCB
See the electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89000.

Fuse No. Symptom

FL1 T5 A/250 V (Surge This fuse has not been checked because it cannot remove.
protection)
FL2 T5 A/250 V (Surge This fuse has not been checked because it cannot remove.
protection)

z Desk power supply 1 (PS2)

See the electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89000.

Fuse No. Symptom

F1 T6.3 AH/250 V (AC 200 V This fuse has not been checked because it cannot remove.
power supply protection)

z Desk power supply 2 (PS3)

See the electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89000.

Fuse No. Symptom

F1 T5 AH/250 V (AC 200 V This fuse has not been checked because it cannot remove.
power supply protection)

4251 1/1
 4252
Diagnosis appendix: Symptoms result from blowout of fuse

Symptoms result from blowout of fuse (printer section)

z Condition of checking for the blowout of fuse

In the table below, it explains the errors and symptoms seen when the power supply of this system is turned ON with each fuse
removed (for example, the monitor does not bring up, the light does not turn on, the fun does not rotate, or the like).
IMPORTANT
• Symptom results from blowout of fuse is described only the triple magazine and quad paper magazine of each PCB.
• For the optional PCBs, some of them are explained.
• When any malfunction does not occur in turning ON the power supply of the system on condition that a fuse is
removed from each PCB, Any malfunction does not occur on this condition. is mentioned for the fuse in the list.
• Several errors may occur at the same time with a single fuse.

z Printer section
Reference
☞ Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ Printer I/O PCB 3
☞ Laser I/O PCB ☞ CVP PCB

4. Troubleshooting
☞ Multi power supply (printer) ☞ Printer power supply 1 (PS1)
☞ Printer power supply 2 (PS2) ☞ Printer power supply 3 (PS3)
☞ Multi power supply (printer) (PS4) ☞ Laser power supply (PS5)
☞ Quad magazine PCB

z Printer I/O PCB 1

See the electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89000.

Fuse No. Symptom

F32 T6.3 A/125 V (DC +24 V−1 No. 6136-0001 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 1 operation error. occurs.
power supply protection)
F33 T6.3 A/125 V (DC +24 V−2 No. 6137-0001 Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 2 operation error. occurs.
power supply protection)
F34 T3.15 A/125 V (DC +24 V No malfunction occurs on this condition.
power supply protection)
F35 T6.3 A/125 V (DC +36 V No. 6012-0001 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A, No. 6013-0001 Paper did not load.
power supply protection) Paper Magazine B or No. 6112-0001 Could not load the paper. Paper Magazine C occurs
while printing.

z Printer I/O PCB 3

See the electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89000.

Fuse No. Symptom

F37 T6.3 A/125 V (DC +24 V−3 No. 6138-0001 Paper Advance Arm Motor (Left) operation error. occurs.
power supply protection) No. 6139-0001 Paper Advance Arm Motor (Right) operation error. occurs.
F38 T6.3 A/125 V (DC +24 V−4 No. 6142-0001 Paper Advance Pressure Change Motor (Left) operation error. occurs.
power supply protection) No. 6143-0001 Paper Advance Pressure Change Motor (Right) operation error. occurs.

z Quad magazine PCB

See the electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89000.

Fuse No. Symptom

F55 T3.15 A/125 V (Protection of No. 6195-0002 Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A2 occurs while printing.
IL+36 V)
F56 T2.0 A/125 V (Protection of No. 6199-0002 Pressure Release Motor A2 operation error. occurs.
IL+24 V)

4252 1/3
 4252
Diagnosis appendix: Symptoms result from blowout of fuse

z Laser I/O PCB

See the electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89000.

Fuse No. Symptom

F1 T3.15 A/125 V (DC +24 V−1 No. 6073 Synchronous Sensor error. occurs after the message, Laser temperatures are
power supply protection) being adjusted. Approx.## disappeared.
F2 T6.3 A/125 V (DC +24 V−2 No. 6076-0001 Polygon Mirror control error. occurs after the message, Laser temperatures
power supply protection) are being adjusted. Approx.## disappeared.
F3 T6.3 A/125 V (DC +24 V−3 No. 1026 Close the Printer Top Cover. occurs.
power supply protection)

z CVP PCB
See the electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89000.

Fuse No. Symptom

F25 T3.15 A/125 V (DC +36 V The CVP unit does not operate.
power supply protection)

4. Troubleshooting
z Multi power supply (printer)
See the electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89000.

Fuse No. Symptom

F1 AC 200 V power supply This fuse has not been checked because it cannot remove.
protection

z Printer power supply 1 (PS1)

See the electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89000.

Fuse No. Symptom

F1 AC 200 V power supply This fuse has not been checked because it cannot remove.
protection

z Printer power supply 2 (PS2)

See the electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89000.

Fuse No. Symptom

F1 AC 200 V power supply This fuse has not been checked because it cannot remove.
protection

z Printer power supply 3 (PS3)

See the electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89000.

Fuse No. Symptom

F1 AC 200 V power supply This fuse has not been checked because it cannot remove.
protection

z Multi power supply (printer) (PS4)

See the electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89000.

Fuse No. Symptom

F1 AC 200 V power supply This fuse has not been checked because it cannot remove.
protection

4252 2/3
 4252
Diagnosis appendix: Symptoms result from blowout of fuse

z Laser power supply (PS5)

See the electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89000.

Fuse No. Symptom

F1 AC 200 V power supply This fuse has not been checked because it cannot remove.
protection

4. Troubleshooting

4252 3/3
 4253
Diagnosis appendix: Symptoms result from blowout of fuse

Symptoms result from blowout of fuse (processor section)

z Condition of checking for the blowout of fuse

In the table below, it explains the errors and symptoms seen when the power supply of this system is turned ON with each fuse
removed (for example, the monitor does not bring up, the light does not turn on, the fun does not rotate, or the like).
IMPORTANT
• Symptom results from blowout of fuse is described only QSS-3203 (triple magazine specification) of each PCB.
• For the PCBs of the processor, the PCBs only for normal specifications are mentioned.
• When any malfunction does not occur in turning ON the power supply of the system on condition that a fuse is
removed from each PCB, Any malfunction does not occur on this condition. is mentioned for the fuse in the list.
• Several errors may occur at the same time with a single fuse.

z Processor section
Reference
☞ Processor I/O PCB ☞ Processor relay PCB
☞ Processor power supply 1 (PS1) ☞ Processor power supply 2 (PS2)

4. Troubleshooting
☞ Processor power supply 3 (PS3)

z Processor I/O PCB

See the electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89000.

Fuse No. Symptom

F14 T6.3 A/125 V (DC +24 V No. 0500 Add water to the Refilling Water Tank. occurs.
power supply protection) No. 0502 Add replenishment solution to the replenishment tank. CD BF STB occurs.
No. 0503 Empty the Effluent Tank. CD BF STB occurs.
No. 5508 The processing solution level is too low. occurs.
No. 5532 The Processing Solution Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
No. 5533 The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
F15 T6.3 A/125 V (DC +24 V No. 5508 The processing solution level is too low. occurs.
power supply protection) No. 5532 The Processing Solution Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
No. 5533 The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated. occurs.
F16 T3.15 A/125 V No malfunction occurs on this condition.

z Processor relay PCB

See the electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89000.
Fuse No. Symptom
FL1 T5 A/250 V (Protection This fuse has not been checked because it cannot remove.
circuit for power surges)
FL2 T5 A/250 V (Protection This fuse has not been checked because it cannot remove.
circuit for power surges)
FL3 T5 A/250 V (Protection This fuse has not been checked because it cannot remove.
circuit for power surges)
FL4 T5 A/250 V (Protection This fuse has not been checked because it cannot remove.
circuit for power surges)
F1 T10 A/250 V (dryer heater) The dryer heater does not operate.
F2 T10 A/250 V (processing The processing solution heater does not operate.
solution heater)
F3 T5 A/250 V (dryer heater) The dryer heater does not operate.
F4 T6.3 A/250 V (dryer heater) The dryer heater does not operate.
F5 T3.15 A/250 V (CD heater) The CD heater does not operate.

4253 1/2
 4253
Diagnosis appendix: Symptoms result from blowout of fuse

Fuse No. Symptom

F6 T3.15 A/250 V (BF heater) The BF heater does not operate.
F7 T5 A/250 V (STB heater) The STB heater does not operate.
F8 T5 A/250 V (dryer heater) The dryer heater does not operate.
F9 T6.3 A/250 V (dryer heater) The dryer heater does not operate.
F10 T5 A/250 V (dryer heater) The dryer heater does not operate.
F11 T15 A/250 V (dryer heater) The dryer heater does not operate.
F12 T3.15 A/250 V (dryer fan) The dryer fan does not operate.
F13 T6.3 A/250 V (DC +24 V No. 5509 The circulation amount has decreased. 0.0 L/min CD occurs.
power supply protection) No. 5511 The circulation pump has stopped. CD occurs.
No. 5513 The circulation pump has stopped. BF occurs.
No. 5515 The circulation pump has stopped. STB1 occurs.
No. 5516 The circulation pump has stopped. STB2 occurs.
No. 5517 The circulation pump has stopped. STB3 occurs.
No. 5518 The circulation pump has stopped. STB4 occurs.
F14 T6.3 A/250 V (DC +24 V The system does not start.
power supply protection)

4. Troubleshooting
z Processor power supply 1 (PS1)
See the electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89000.

Fuse No. Symptom

F1 This fuse has not been checked because it cannot remove.

z Processor power supply 2 (PS2)

See the electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89000.

Fuse No. Symptom

F1 This fuse has not been checked because it cannot remove.

z Processor power supply 3 (PS3)

See the electrical circuit diagram ☞ 89000.

Fuse No. Symptom

F1 This fuse has not been checked because it cannot remove.

4253 2/2
 4302 Diagnosis appendix: Diagnosis flowchart

Diagnosis appendix: Diagnosis flowchart

The message, Laser temperatures are being adjusted. does not disappear
from the order display.

NOTE
• The message No. 1043 Laser temperature is being adjusted. One moment please... appears when some operation with exposure is
carried out while the message is displayed. ☞ No. 1043
• The messages for laser temperature adjustment in the Order Display appear in order of Laser temperatures are being
[Link].##sec, Laser temperatures are being adjusted.(U), Laser temperatures are being adjusted.(R).
• If the message Laser temperatures are being adjusted.(U) does not disappear, see ☞ Specifying the occurring cause: Laser
temperatures are being adjusted. (U) appears.
• Laser temperatures are being adjusted. If the message Laser temperatures are being adjusted. (R) does not disappear, see
☞ Specifying the occurring cause: Laser temperatures are being adjusted. (R) appears..
• Processable range of the laser unit is 23.0°C to 42.0°C.
• Processable range of the R laser is 27.7°C to 28.3°C.
• Measure the voltage of TP (ground) on each PCB for ground described in the flow chart.

z Specifying the occurring cause: Laser temperatures are being adjusted. (U) appears

4. Troubleshooting
Laser temperatures are being adjusted. (U) appears

Reset the power supply and restart the system.

YES
The display of Laser temperatures are being adjusted. has disappeared.

NO
Less than
23.0°C.
Check the temperature on the Laser Unit Thermosensoron the Input Check display. ☞ 35210

More than 42°C.

YES
The temperature on the Laser Unit Thermosensor goes down by 1°C or more in ten minutes.

NO

The voltage between the pin 3 (+) on the connector (J/P1522) of the laser control PCB and the ground is 1 V,
which means the laser sensor unit temperature sensor standard voltage. ☞ 66010

YES NO

Failure on the laser control PCB ☞ 66010

4302 1/7
 4302
Diagnosis appendix: Diagnosis flowchart

The voltage between the pin 7 (+) on the connector (J/P1512) of the laser control PCB is 0 V, which means the
laser unit cooling fan control is ON. ☞ 66010

YES NO

Failure on the laser control PCB ☞ 66010

The voltage between the pins 1 (+) and 2 (−) on the connector (J/P1551) of the laser I/O PCB is 24 V, which
means the power supply to the laser unit cooling fan. ☞ 66060

YES NO

Failure on the laser I/O PCB ☞ 66060

Laser unit cooling fan 1 rotates. ☞ 66050

4. Troubleshooting
YES NO

Failure of laser unit cooling fan 1 ☞ 66050

Laser unit cooling fan 2 rotates. ☞ 66050

YES NO

Failure of laser unit cooling fan 2 ☞ 66050

The voltage between the pins 17 (+) and 18 (−) on the connector (J/P1551) of the laser I/O PCB is 24 V, which
means the power supply to the laser unit heater.

YES NO

The voltage between the pin 13 (+) on the connector (J/P1538) of the laser I/O PCB and the ground is 24 V,
which means the laser unit heater control is OFF. ☞ 66060

YES NO

Failure on the laser I/O PCB ☞ 66060

The voltage between the pin 13 (+) on the connector (J/P1512) of the laser control PCB and the ground is 24 V,
which means the laser unit heater control is OFF. ☞ 66010

YES NO

Failure on the laser control PCB ☞ 66010

4302 2/7
 4302
Diagnosis appendix: Diagnosis flowchart

The voltage between the pin 4 (+) on the connector (J/P1522) of the laser control PCB and the ground is over
0.45 V, which means the laser sensor unit temperature sensor measurement voltage. ☞ 66010

NO YES

The ambient temperature may be high. Keep the ambient

temperature at less than 30°C.

Disconnect the connector (J/P1522) on the laser control PCB. The measured resistance value between pins
3 and 4 on the laser unit thermosensor side is less than 4 kΩ (resistance value of the laser unit thermosensor
). ☞ 66010

YES NO

Failure on the laser control PCB ☞ 66010 Failure in the laser unit ☞ 26710

4. Troubleshooting
The temperature on the Laser Unit Thermosensor goes up by 1°C or more in ten minutes. YES

NO

The voltage between the pin 3 (+) on the connector (J/P1522) of the laser control PCB and the ground is 1 V,
which means the laser sensor unit temperature sensor standard voltage. ☞ 66010

YES NO

Failure on the laser control PCB ☞ 66010

The voltage between the pin 13 (+) on the connector (J/P1512) of the laser control PCB and the ground is 0 V,
which means the laser unit heater control is ON. ☞ 66010

YES NO

Failure on the laser control PCB ☞ 66010

The voltage between the pin 13 (+) on the connector (J/P1538) of the laser I/O PCB and the ground is 0 V,
which means the laser unit heater control is ON. ☞ 66060

YES NO

Failure on the laser I/O PCB ☞ 66060

The voltage between the pins 17 (+) and 18 (−) on the connector (J/P1551) of the laser I/O PCB is 24 V, which
means the power supply to the laser unit heater. ☞ 66060

YES NO

Failure on the laser I/O PCB ☞ 66060

4302 3/7
 4302
Diagnosis appendix: Diagnosis flowchart

The voltage between the pin 7 (+) on the connector (J/P1512) of the laser control PCB and the ground is 24 V,
which means the laser unit cooling fan control is OFF. ☞ 66010

YES NO

Failure on the laser control PCB ☞ 66010

The voltage between the pins 1 (+) and 2 (−) on the connector (J/P1551) of the laser I/O PCB is 24 V, which
means the power supply to the laser unit cooling fan. ☞ 66060

YES NO

Failure on the laser I/O PCB ☞ 66060

4. Troubleshooting
The voltage between the pin 4 (+) on the connector (J/P1522) of the laser control PCB and the ground is less
than 0.25 V, which means the laser sensor unit temperature sensor. ☞ 66010

NO YES

Failure in the laser unit heater ☞ 63080

Disconnect the connector (J/P1522) on the laser control PCB. If the measured resistance value between pins 3
and 4 on the laser thermosensor side is more than 10 kΩ (resistance of the laser unit thermosensor ). ☞ 66010

YES NO

Failure on the laser control PCB ☞ 66010 Failure in the laser unit ☞ 26710

The problem is solved or the temperature is being adjusted properly.

‹ Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure

Failed parts
Refer to 4202 ☞ Laser control PCB.
Refer to 4202 ☞ Multi power supply (printer) (PS4).

4302 4/7
 4302
Diagnosis appendix: Diagnosis flowchart

z Specifying the occurring cause: Laser temperatures are being adjusted. (R) appears.

Laser temperatures are being adjusted. (R) appears.

Reset the power supply and restart the system.

The display of Laser temperatures are being adjusted. has disappeared.

NO YES

The problem is solved or the temperature is being adjusted

properly.

4. Troubleshooting
The voltage between the pins 1 (+) and 3 (−) on the connector (J/P1511) of the laser control PCB is 1 V, which
means the R laser sensor unit temperature sensor standard voltage. ☞ 66010

YES NO

Failure on the laser control PCB ☞ 66010

The voltage between TP2 and TP9 (+) that are test points on the laser I/O PCB is 1 V, which means standard
voltage of R laser thermosensor. ☞ 66060

YES NO

Failure on the laser I/O PCB ☞ 66060

It is below
27.7°C.
Check the temperature of the R Laser Thermosensor on the Input Check display. ☞ 35210

It is over 28.3°C.

Disconnect the connector (J/P1532) on the laser control PCB. The measured resistance value between pins 7
and 8 on the R laser thermosensor side is less than 4.5 kΩ (resistance value of the R laser thermosensor ).
☞ 66010
YES NO

Failure in the laser unit ☞ 26710

The voltage between TP2 and TP11 (+) that are test points on the laser I/O PCB is more than 350 mV
(measured voltage of R laser thermosensor).

YES NO

Failure on the laser I/O PCB ☞ 66060

4302 5/7
 4302
Diagnosis appendix: Diagnosis flowchart

The voltage between the pins 2 (+) and 3 (−) on the connector (J/P1511) of the laser control PCB is over 350
mV, which means R laser temperature sensor measurement voltage. ☞ 66010

YES NO

Failure on the laser control PCB ☞ 66010

The voltage between the pins 4 (+) and 5 (−) on the connector (J/P1511) of the laser control PCB is over 2.5 V,
which means the Peltier control voltage when cooling. ☞ 66010

YES NO

Failure on the laser control PCB ☞ 66010

4. Troubleshooting
The voltage between TP2 and TP12 (+) that are test points on the laser I/O PCB is over 2.5 V, which means the
Peltier control voltage when cooling. ☞ 66060

YES NO

Failure on the laser control PCB ☞ 66010

The voltage between the pins 1 (+) and 2 (−) on the connector (J/P1540) of the laser I/O PCB is over 0 V and
less than 2 V, which means the Peltier control voltage when cooling. ☞ 66060

YES NO

Failure in the laser unit ☞ 26710 Failure on the laser I/O PCB ☞ 66060

Disconnect the connector (J/P1532) on the laser control PCB. The measured resistance value between pins 7
and 8 on the R laser thermosensor side is over 5.4 kΩ (resistance value of the R laser thermosensor ).

YES NO

Failure in the laser unit ☞ 26710

Reference

☞ 66060
YES NO

Failure on the laser I/O PCB ☞ 66060

4302 6/7
 4302
Diagnosis appendix: Diagnosis flowchart

The voltage between the pins 2 (+) and 3 (−) on the connector (J/P1511) of the laser control PCB is less than
350 mV, which means the R laser sensor unit temperature measurement voltage. ☞ 66010

YES NO

Failure on the laser control PCB ☞ 66010

The voltage between the pins 4 (+) and 5 (−) on the connector (J/P1511) of the laser control PCB is less than
2.5 V, which means the Peltier control voltage when heating. ☞ 66010

YES NO

Failure on the laser control PCB ☞ 66010

4. Troubleshooting
The voltage between TP2 and TP12 (+) that are test points on the laser I/O PCB is less than 2.5 V, which
means it is less than the Peltier control voltage when heating. ☞ 66060

YES NO

Failure on the laser I/O PCB ☞ 66060

The voltage between the pins 1 (+) and 2 (−) on the connector (J/P1540) of the laser I/O PCB is over −2 V and
less than 0 V, which means the Peltier control voltage when heating. ☞ 66060

YES NO

Failure in the laser unit ☞ 26710 Failure on the laser I/O PCB ☞ 66060

‹ Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure

Failed parts
See 4202 ☞ Laser control PCB.
See 4202 ☞ Laser I/O PCB.

4302 7/7
 4304
Diagnosis appendix: Diagnosis flowchart

An abnormal print is made

z Specifying the occurring place

The line appears inputting from the film. The line (irregular print) appears
in the setup print.

YES YES

The line appears inputting from the media. NO ☞ Inputting side is not good.
(around the scanner, D-ICE PCB
and around the AFC)

YES

Save the image data to the HDD after scanning the

film.

4. Troubleshooting
YES

Is the line appeared in the image when NO

checking the saved data on the PJP display (1
Frame Magnification)?

YES

Around the image processing PCB may not be ☞ Around the laser unit is not
good. good.

z Inputting side is not good. (around the scanner, D-ICE PCB and around the AFC)
Refer to the table below about an abnormal print which occurred because of around the scanner unit, D-ICE PCB and AFC.

No. Symptom Reference

1 BGR colors mixing line in the film advance direction is occurred. ☞ 4400
2 The line like a bar code in the film advance direction is occurred. ☞ 4401

z Around the laser unit is not good.

Refer to the below table about an abnormal print occurred because of around the laser unit.

No. Symptom Reference

1 The light density line (white) in the paper advance direction is occurred. ☞ 4450
2 The monochrome line perpendicular to paper advance direction is ☞ 4451
occurred.
3 Light color appears in unexposure position. ☞ 4452
4 The stripped pattern like a wavy line in the whole part of print is occurred. ☞ 4453
5 Banding occurs. ☞ 25910☞ 36090

4304 1/1
 4305
Diagnosis appendix: Diagnosis flowchart

Checking for media drive defect

z Checking procedure

What is the drive?

Floppy disk drive CD-ROM and CD- Zip drive MO drive DVD-RAM drive Five slots card
R/RW drive reader

Clean the drive and read the same media again.

• Clean the MO drive with the optional MO head cleaner.
• Clean the floppy disk drive and DVD-RAM drive with a commercial cleaning kit.
• Except above drive are cleaned with the air duster or the like.

4. Troubleshooting
Not settled.

Read the other media.

Not settled.

Confirm that the Device status of each drive is become This device is working properly in the Device Manager.
• If not, each drive is not recognized.
Reinstall the driver or check the cable connection.

Not settled.

Confirm that the cable is securely connected.

• In the case of FD, if the cable is connected reversely, the access lamp is on all the time.

Not settled.

Check the ID setting of IDE. Check the ID setting of SCSI.

• In the case of CD, secondary and • In the case of MO drive, the SCSI ID is 0.
master. • In the case of DVD-RAM drive, the SCSI ID
• In the case of ZIP, secondary and slave. is 6.

High-spec PC:
Check that these are recognized on the BIOS
display of SCSI when starting up the personal
Not settled. computer.
Confirm that the BIOS setting is correct.

4305 1/1
 4306
Diagnosis appendix: Diagnosis flowchart

PC does not start normally

This describes the diagnosis when the PC does not start normally.
For details of terms used below or operations, refer to the startup sequence for PC ☞ 50510

z Specifying the cause

IMPORTANT
• The diagnosis below is for widely used PC (Windows 2000).
Any explanation for the extension PCB such as the PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB, which is used for the QSS only, is not
described here.
When the diagnosis is not effective to solve the problem, check the extension PCB used for the QSS only.

PC does not start normally

Any messages in the monitor display?

4. Troubleshooting
YES NO

Power LED goes on and it beeps.

YES NO

1. Check the power supply cable.

2. Check the connection of motherboard power supply connector.
3. Check the voltage of motherboard power supply connector.
• ±12 V, ±5 V, ±3.3 V are detected.
4. Replace the ATX power supply.
5. Replace the Power Switch.
6. Replace the motherboard.

Specify the beep sound.

1. Just once
2. Long beep: once, Short beep: twice
3. Repeating long beep

1. Check the connection of memory (DIMM).

1
2. Replace the memory (DIMM).
3. Replace the motherboard.

1. Check the video board connection.

2
2. Replace the video board.
3. Replace the motherboard.

1. Check the video cable connection.

3 2. Replace the video cable.
3. Replace the monitor display.
4. Replace the video board.

4306 1/4
 4306
Diagnosis appendix: Diagnosis flowchart

YES

Messages are shown during POST.

• Refer to the startup sequence for PC ☞ POST (Power On Self Test, which is self diagnosis in starting up).

NO YES

Check the messages.

1. BIOS ROM checksum error - System halted
2. CMOS battery failed
3. CMOS checksum error - Defaults loaded
4. Floppy disk(s) fail
5. HARD DISK INSTALL FAILURE
6. Primary master hard disk fail
7. Keyboard error or no keyboard present
8. Keyboard is locked out - Unlock the key
9. Invalid System Disk Replace the disk, then press any key
10. DISK BOOT FAILURE, INSERT SYSTEM DISK AND PRESS ENTER

4. Troubleshooting
1
1. Replace the motherboard.

2, 3 1. Replace the CMOS battery.

2. Replace the motherboard.

1. Check the floppy disk drive cable connection.

4 2. Replace the floppy disk drive cable.
3. Replace the floppy disk drive.
4. Replace the motherboard.

1. Check the IDE cable connection in the hard disk.

5, 6 2. Replace the IDE cable in the hard disk.
3. Replace the hard disk.
4. Replace the motherboard.

1. Check the keyboard cable connection.

7, 8
2. Replace the keyboard.
3. Replace the motherboard.

9 1. Check that no floppy disk is inserted.

2. Replace the floppy disk drive.

1. Recover the OS.

10 2. Format the hard disk and recover the OS.
3. Replace the hard disk.

4306 2/4
 4306
Diagnosis appendix: Diagnosis flowchart

NO

It stops during POST or reading NTLDR, or it restarts.

• Refer to the startup sequence for PC ☞ POST (Power On Self Test, which is self diagnosis in
starting up).

NO YES

Check the messages.

1. It stops on the CPU or the memory test display, or it restarts.
2. It stops on the IDE connected device detecting display, or it restarts.
3. It stops on the SCSI connected device detecting display, or it restarts.
4. It stops before the message Starting Windows... for NTLDR appears, or it restarts.

1. Check the connection of memory (DIMM).

1
2. Replace the memory (DIMM).

4. Troubleshooting
3. Replace the motherboard.

1. Check the IDE cable connection in the hard disk.

2 2. Replace the IDE cable in the hard disk.
3. Replace the hard disk.
4. Replace the motherboard.

1. Check the SCSI ID.

2. Check the terminator.
3
3. Check the SCSI board connection.
4. Replace the SCSI board.
5. Replace the SCSI device.

1. Check the connection of extension board.

4
2. Replace the extension board.
3. Replace the motherboard.

It brings up the message during POST or reading NTLDR.

• Refer to the startup sequence for PC ☞ Reading the NTLDR (NT loader, which is the program to
start the OS).

NO YES

Check the messages.

1. NTLDR missing, Replace disk and press any key to continue

1. Recover the OS.

1
2. Format the hard disk and recover the OS.
3. Replace the hard disk.

4306 3/4
 4306
Diagnosis appendix: Diagnosis flowchart

NO

It stops while starting the OS, or it restarts.

• Refer to the startup sequence for PC ☞ Starting the OS.

NO YES

1. Recover the OS.

2. Format the hard disk and recover the OS.
3. Replace the hard disk.

The STOP code error occurs while starting the OS.

• Refer to the startup sequence for PC ☞ Starting the OS.

NO YES

4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
• The error of STOP code is shown by STOP0xXXXXXXXXX.
• Countermeasure for the STOP code error may be shown on the Microsoft's website.

IMPORTANT
• Record the error No. if the STOP code error occurs.

1. Recover the OS.

2. Format the hard disk and recover the OS.
3. Replace the hard disk.

The PC starts.

4306 4/4
 4400 Diagnosis appendix: Example of abnormal print

Diagnosis appendix: Example of abnormal print

BGR uneven colors or white strips (film advance direction)

4. Troubleshooting
G057580

IMPORTANT
• Above sample image may be different from the actual one.

z Features of symptom
• The BGR moire like a sample print or white stripes is occurring only printing from the film.
• The BGR moire appears in the film advance direction but not always straight stripe, it may be bent a little or like a pattern.
NOTE
• Because it appears in the film advance direction, when the advance length is shorter than the paper width (horizontal feed), it
may appear perpendicular in paper advance direction.
• In BGR, colorful stripes with which the color mixed variously occurs.
IMPORTANT
• This symptom is similar to the Line like a bar code ☞ 4401, be careful of their difference.
• It may be confirmed on the monitor display at PJP.

z Explanation and check point

z Explanation
When the dust around the slot for AFC scanning does not move together with a film, it occurs.
IMPORTANT
• When the dust does not move together with a film, the DIGITAL ICE and digital masking are not effective since the
position of dust is not specified.

z Check point
• Change the 135/240 AFC-II lane (135→240, 240→135) and check.

4400 1/2
 4400
Diagnosis appendix: Example of abnormal print

If it does not occur after changing the lane, the dust may attach to the previous lane. Clean the inside and outside of the AFC
again.
Clean slots (upper and lower), film path surface, protection glass of LED light source, condensing lens of AFC, insertion section,
rewinding section, each roller and etc. too.
IMPORTANT
• When cleaning the AFC, clean the both lanes of AFC.
• Confirm that the dust does not remain in the slots for scanning or between the rollers, and clean the front and rear
sides carefully.
• If this symptom occurs when changing the lane (135→240, 240→135), clean around the dust prevention glass of scanner.
• Clean around the AFC, scanner and film path surface.

4. Troubleshooting

4400 2/2
 4401
Diagnosis appendix: Example of abnormal print

Line like a bar code (film advance direction)

4. Troubleshooting
G057581

IMPORTANT
• Above sample image may be different from the actual one.

z Features of symptom
• The moire like a sample print is occurred only printing from the film.
• The line is appeared in film advance direction.
NOTE
• Because it appears in the film advance direction, when the advance length is shorter than the paper width (horizontal feed), it
may appear perpendicular in paper advance direction.
• The line like a bar code and a pattern.
• The line (pattern) is regular and straight.
• The color is black or contained the BGR.
IMPORTANT
• This symptom is similar to the BGR colors mixing line ☞ 4400, be careful of their difference.
• It can be confirmed on the monitor display at PJP.

z Explanation and check point

z Explanation
It is occurred by connector imperfect contact of the D-ICE PCB and abnormal of D-ICE PCB.

z Check point
• Reset the power supply.
• Check the connector contact around the D-ICE PCB.
D-ICE PCB: J/P45, 480, 483, 484A, 485, 486, and 487
• Replace D-ICE PCB and D-ICE control PCB. ☞ 64040

4401 1/1
 4450
Diagnosis appendix: Example of abnormal print

Light density line (white) (paper advance direction)

4. Troubleshooting
G057583

IMPORTANT
• Above sample image may be different from the actual one.

z Features of symptom
• Lines like in the sample image appear in all prints (printing from the film, media or setup print).
• The line appears parallel to the paper advance direction.

z Explanation and check point

z Explanation
It occurs when the dust adheres to the laser dustproof glass of the laser unit, exposure advance unit or laser dustproof glass cover. Or,
it occurs due to the dust inside the laser unit.

z Check point
• Clean the glass surface of laser unit.
See ☞ Cleaning the laser dust-proof glass.
IMPORTANT
• When the line is not clear, the dust may adhere to the laser dustproof glass of the laser unit or inside of the laser
unit. When the line is clear, the dust may adhere around the pressure guide.
• Clean the laser dustproof glass cover.
• Clean around the exposure section of exposure advance unit.
• Replace the laser unit. ☞ 26710

4450 1/2
 4450
Diagnosis appendix: Example of abnormal print

z Cleaning the laser dust-proof glass

1. Open paper advance units 1 and 2.

Paper advance unit 1

Paper advance unit 2

G069089

2. Pull the knob to release the lock and remove the laser dustproof glass cover.

4. Troubleshooting
Knob Laser dustproof glass cover

G076407

3. Clean the laser dustproof glass with the enclosed cleaning sheet (soft cloth).
IMPORTANT
• When cleaning the laser dustproof glass, clean it with the soft cloth in the direction from far to near or from near
to far at one stroke.
• If cleaning several times, clean in the same direction. If wiping in the opposite direction, the dust which has
been removed adheres on the dustproof glass again. Use the different side of the cleaning cloth every time in
order not to adhere the removed dust again.
• Do not use the alcohol when cleaning. Using alcohol may affect the print quality.

Rear

Laser dust-proof glass

G086408

4450 2/2
 4451
Diagnosis appendix: Example of abnormal print

Monochrome line (perpendicular to paper advance direction)

4. Troubleshooting
G057579

IMPORTANT
• Above sample image may be different from the actual one.

z Features of symptom
• Lines like in the sample image appear in all prints (printing from the film, media or setup print).
• The monochrome line is appeared perpendicular in paper advance direction.
• The line appears at the same intervals.

z Explanation and check point

z Explanation
Something noise may affect the laser unit. Or the inside of laser unit is abnormal.

z Check point
• Reset the power supply.
• Replace the B and G laser drivers. ☞ 66070
IMPORTANT
• B and G laser drivers are sharing the PCB.
• Replace the laser unit. ☞ 26710

4451 1/1
 4452
Diagnosis appendix: Example of abnormal print

Light color is appeared in unexposure position

4. Troubleshooting
G057585

IMPORTANT
• Above sample image may be different from the actual one.

z Features of symptom
• The light color is appeared in the unexposure position or low density position.
• The symptom like a sample print is occurred in all prints (printing from the film, media or setup print).

z Explanation and check point

z Explanation
The chemical may deteriorate or laser light may leak because the inside the laser unit is abnormal.

z Check point
• Process the control strip and check the color of the white part. If the problem occurs, the chemical has deteriorated. Replace the
chemical.
• Shield the center of the laser dustproof glass cover of the laser unit with a splicing tape and make a setup print. If there is a
difference between the unexposed position shielded by the splicing tape and regular unexposed position, the abnormal print is
caused by leakage of laser beam.
IMPORTANT
• Be careful not to adhere dust or damage to the laser dustproof glass of the laser unit.
• Replace the laser unit. ☞ 26710

4452 1/1
 4453
Diagnosis appendix: Example of abnormal print

Stripped pattern like a wavy line

4. Troubleshooting
G057584

IMPORTANT
• Above sample image may be different from the actual one.

z Features of symptom
• Lines like in the sample image appear in all prints (printing from the film, media or setup print).
• A pattern of wavy stripes.
• Appears overall print surface.

z Explanation and check point

z Explanation
Something noise may affect the laser unit. Or the inside of laser unit is abnormal.

z Check point
• Reset the power supply.
• Replace the B and G laser drivers. ☞ 66070
IMPORTANT
• B and G laser drivers are sharing the PCB.
• Replace the laser unit. ☞ 26710

4453 1/1
 4500 Diagnosis appendix: FB scanner

Diagnosis appendix: FB scanner

List of FB scanner's error message (for EPSON type)

The following table shows the conditions and the corrective action when error messages appear.

Error message Condition Countermeasure

The copy may be positioned The copy is out of the edge of the copy deck in the Put the copy properly on the copy deck in the
improperly or the selected area is flatbed scanner. flatbed scanner so that it is not out of the deck.
too small. Set the image frame for the copy manually.
The outline of copy is not clear. Set the image frame for the copy manually.
The message appears when the image frame is too Remove the check mark for the DIGITAL
small with the digital ICE function set to valid. ICE Technology(TM) function.
Resize the image frame manually.
Flatbed Scanner Communication When the driver software for FB scanner has not Check the conditions shown in the left column
Error been installed and start the FB scanner execution display by
When the power of FB scanner is OFF pressing the YES key on the Order Display.
When the cable is not connected properly to USB
port 1 or SCSI2 which the FB scanner has been
connected to
When the lock of FB scanner has not been released

4. Troubleshooting
There is insufficient memory. The memory of the personal computer is not Decrease the resolution or make the frame for
enough. image smaller.
There is nothing to scan. There is no copy on the copy deck. Place the copy correctly.
Cancel When the user interrupt the previewing or scanning Carry out the same previewing or scanning
Quit the process. operation operation again after deleting the message in
the message box.
There is insufficient space left on The hard disk space is not enough. Decrease the resolution or make the frame for
the hard disk. image smaller.
The copy may be improperly When the copy is protruded from the deck Place the copy on the deck not to protrude.
positioned.
When the copy is not protruded from it, release
the error message and enlarge or move the
image frame to fit the image.
Capturing communication error. The flatbed scanner is used by the EZ Controller Check the conditions shown on the left and
software while this flatbed scanner is in use by then start the FB scanner execution display by
other software. clicking Preview again on the Order Display.
When the power of FB scanner is OFF
When the cable is not connected properly to USB
port 1 or SCSI2 which the FB scanner has been
connected to
Are you sure you want to initialize When the Setting Initialization button is clicked If you would like to initialize, click OK. If not,
All Data including Tone Curve on the FB scanner execution display click Cancel.
and its backup data?
Cut position error. When the upper left corner of brought area is Click the Preview button again.
recognized as placed in a wrong position (The
position of copy is not wrong.)
Cut angle error. When the inner angle of brought area is not
recognized 90-degree (The angle of copy is not
wrong.)
DLL Load Completed When trying to load the DLL again although it is Quit the message display and execution display
already loaded of FB scanner by clicking the CLOSE button
DLL Load Failed When the DLL is not recognized as already and restart the FB scanner execution display by
installed clicking YES key in the order display.
When the installation of DLL is failed
The DLL was not loaded. When the DLL is not loaded

4500 1/2
 4500
Diagnosis appendix: FB scanner

IMPORTANT
• If the messages of DLL Load Completed, DLL Load Failed or The DLL was not loaded. appears repeatedly, the DLL
data may be damaged or broken. Reinstall the QSS software as a corrective action. See the PC Service Manual.

NOTE
• DLL is a driver for running the FB scanner execution display on the Order Display of QSS.
Location: My Computer\C\Noritsukoki\QSS-32_33\Exe\NKC_ImageFBScan.dll

4. Troubleshooting

4500 2/2
 4600 Diagnosis appendix: [F specification]

Diagnosis appendix: [F specification]

Replenishment cartridge installation section troubleshooting flow

The replenisher section door is open. Check the setting of the Interlock Switch (Replenisher Section
Door).
YES
NO

Remove the processor rear cover or open the replenisher section door.
NOTE
• If the replenisher section door does not open, unlock the door inserting the driver through the door space.
See ☞ How to open/close the replenisher section door.

4. Troubleshooting
Remove the replenisher cartridge.
If the replenishment cartridge is in the lower position, move the replenishment cartridge setting section to the upper position in the Output Check, and
remove the replenishment cartridge.
Confirm that there is no objects in the replenishment cartridge setting section.
See ☞ Replenishment cartridge setting section.

Confirm that the Light Lock Door Motor operates

normally in the Output Check.
Confirm that the replenishment cartridge position sensor is
normal.
Operating

Not operating

The operation sound of opening motor is heard. Confirm that the drive systems such as gear operate normally.
Yes
No

The replenishment cartridge opening motor or F replenishment I/O PCB is failed.

Perform recovery procedure 1 from the replenishment error.

☞ 4610

4600 1/2
 4600
Diagnosis appendix: [F specification]

z How to open/close the replenisher section door

If the replenishment cartridge installation section is lowered and the replenisher section door is locked, insert the flathead driver into
the slits beside the processor rear cover, lift the lever, unlock it, then open/close the replenisher section door.

Slit

Lever

4. Troubleshooting
Processor rear cover

G085935

z Replenishment cartridge setting section

Confirm that there is no objects in the replenishment cartridge setting section.

Replenishment cartridge setting section

P2RB

P2RA

P1R

G085933

4600 2/2
 4610
Diagnosis appendix: [F specification]

Recovery procedure 1 from the replenishment error

YES Replenishment solution is left in the replenisher cartridge.

The replenisher cartridge is open.
Replenishment solution leaks in the solution tank.

NO
YES NO

1. Discharge all replenishment solution in the replenishment tank.

If the replenish cartridge is not open, perform Manual Open in ☞ 27550
F: Functions of Pump Output Amount Setting.
☞ 33003 2. Attach new replenish cartridge. After the problems are solved,
perform Manual Open in F: Functions of Pump Output Amount
Setting.
☞ 33003

P1R (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor, P2RA

4. Troubleshooting
(Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor and P2RB
(Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor are all ON.

NO YES

• Add water until all the replenishment solution level sensors turn ON while checking the status of P1R (Upper) Replenishment Solution
Level Sensor, P2RA (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor and P2RB (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor at Input
Check.

The maximum additional water (ml)

P1R P2RA P2RB
3695 642.5 642.5

• Add water from the replenisher cartridge setting part when you add water to each replenishment tank.
See 4600 ☞ Replenishment cartridge setting section.

IMPORTANT
• When the replenishment solution level sensor turns ON, immediately stop adding water.
Adding too much water may cause the following errors.

• ☞ No. 5905[F]−0001P1R replenishment solution output amount/replenishment solution level management is abnormal.
• ☞ No. 5906[F]−0001P2RA replenishment solution output amount/replenishment solution level management is abnormal.
• ☞ No. 5907[F]−0001P2RA replenishment solution output amount/replenishment solution level management is abnormal.

After the problems are solved, perform Manual Open in F: Functions of Pump Output Amount Setting and initialize the replenishment
data.
☞ 33003

The printing process can be continued.

4610 1/1
 4620
Diagnosis appendix: [F specification]

Recovery procedure 2 from the replenishment error

The solution levels (P1R/P2RA/P2RB) are even at the ### YES P1R (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor, P2RA
(upper) replenishment solution level sensor. (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor and P2RB
(Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor are all ON.

NO YES
NO

Add a small amount of water to turn ON all of the P1R (Upper)

Drain all replenishment solution in the replenishment tank Replenishment Solution Level Sensor, P2RA (Upper)
(P1R/P2RA/P2RB). ☞ 27550 Replenishment Solution Level Sensor and P2RB (Upper)
Replenishment Solution Level Sensor.

Attach new replenisher cartridge.

4. Troubleshooting
After the problems are solved, perform Manual Open in F: Functions of Pump Output Amount Setting.
☞ 33003

4620 1/1
 4630
Diagnosis appendix: [F specification]

Taking countermeasures after the error No.5916 to No.5921 occurs

1. Error No. 5916 to No. 5921 occurs.

2. Remove the filter pipe of each processing tank, then push and sink the float of the processing solution float
switch with a stick to confirm the processing solution float switch moves smoothly.

Floats

4. Troubleshooting
Sticks
G069042

If the processing solution float switch does not move smoothly

• Check that each processing solution float switch is not soiled.

3. If the processing solution in a tank is found to be below the cutout of the sub-tank or the solution level
indicator, add the processing solution from the sub-tank.

Solution level check positions

Cutout Solution level indicator

G085934

4. Error recurs?

Error recurs Manual No. No error Manual No.

Processing solution float switch ☞ 63280 Check each replenishment pump output ☞ 33003
amount again.
Processor relay PCB ☞ 66220 Check the output amounts of auto cleaning ☞ 33004
pump + each automated cleaning valve again.
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200 Replenisher pump ☞ 63280
Processor I/O PCB ☞ 66210 P1, P2 and PS automated cleaning valve
Processor power supply 2 ☞ 67400 Replenisher cartridge cleaning pump
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200

4630 1/1
 4900 DLS Error Messages

DLS Error Messages

DLS Error Messages

Followings are the error messages that tells Contact your service provider.
NOTE
• Errors other than below, see the Online Help.
System Error messages (No. 3-)
No. Explanation Reference
3-1 WIP Partition is Half Full ☞ 4910
3-2 WIP Partition is Three Quarters Full
3-3 WIP Partition Is Full
3-4 WIP Partition Is Full
3-6 Order Failed Image Analysis

Archive Error messages (No. 6-)

No. Explanation Reference
6-1 Insufficient Store-It Disk Space ☞ 4920

4. Troubleshooting
Uploading Error messages (No. 10-)
No. Explanation Reference
10-9 Cannot Connect to Upload Host ☞ 4961
10-10 Error While Uploading Network Order
10-11 Upload Server Cannot Recognize Customer Name
10-12 Cannot Connect to Upload Host
10-13 Upload Server Cannot Recognize Scan Location
10-14 Upload Server Cannot Recognize Member ID
10-15 Upload Server Cannot Recognize Account ID
10-19 Connection Processing Failed
10-20 Busy Modem

Rendering Error messages (No. 12-)

No. Explanation Reference
12-1 Print Service Initialization Failed ☞ 4970
12-2 Print Initialization Failed
12-7 Rendering Error
12-8 Printing Error
12-11 Print Service Error
12-13 Print Creation Error
12-14 Order Queuing Failed
12-40 Error Preparing a Print

Media Output Error messages (No. 13-)

No. Explanation Reference
13-1 CD Authoring Service Initialization Failed ☞ 4980

4900 1/1
 4910 System Error messages (No. 3-)

System Error messages (No. 3-)

No. 3-1
WIP Partition is Half Full
No. 3-2
WIP Partition is Three Quarters Full
No. 3-3
WIP Partition Is Full
No. 3-4
WIP Partition Is Full

Error message release

Continue

Condition
Condition
• The number of completed WIP orders to be retained is set too high.

4. Troubleshooting
• Too many orders are active in the system, due to one or more of the following reasons:
• The WIP contains many paused orders.
• A backlog of orders is waiting to be processed.
• The printer is not operational.
• A printer error occurred.

Diagnosis
1. Right-click My Computer and select Manage to access the Computer Management display.
2. Selecting Disk Management shows each Disk condition.

S072418
3. The display shows WIP (V:). Check if it is Healthy.
4. The display shows WIP (V:), but if it is not Healthy, format WIP (V:).
5. If the display does not show WIP (V:), carry out recovery.
See the PC Service Manual.
6. It it does not complete successfully, replace the hard disk and execute the recovery.
See the PC Service Manual.

4910 1/2
 4910
System Error messages (No. 3-)

No. 3-6
Order Failed Image Analysis

Attention message release

Continue

Condition
Condition
An error occurred on the software.

Check Point
1 Access the WIP display to execute either of followings.
• Restart printing from the order
• Reprocess the order.
• Erase the order and reprocess from the Order display.

4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
1. Save the log data of DLS.
See the PC Service Manual.
2. Restart the system.
3. If it does not work out, reinstall the DLS software.
See the PC Service Manual.
4. If it does not work out, execute the recovery.
See the PC Service Manual.

4910 2/2
 4920 Archive Error messages (No. 6-)

Archive Error messages (No. 6-)

No. 6-1
Insufficient Store-It Disk Space

Attention message release

OK

Condition
Condition
There is insufficient disk space for the archive system. This is why archiving is unavailable.

Check Point
1 Delete unnecessary order.

Diagnosis
1. Restart the system.
2. Right-click My Computer and select Manage to bring up the Computer Management display if it does not recover.
3. Selecting Disk Management shows each Disk condition.

4. Troubleshooting
S072418
4. The display shows Archive (U:). Check if it is Healthy.
5. The display shows Archive (U:), but if it is not Healthy, format Archive (U:).
6. If the display does not show Archive (U:), carry out recovery.
See the PC Service Manual.
7. It it does not complete successfully, replace the hard disk and execute the recovery.
See the PC Service Manual.

4920 1/1
 4961 Archive Error messages (No. 10-)

Archive Error messages (No. 10-)

No. 10-9
Cannot Connect to Upload Host

Error message release

Retry or Cancel

Condition
Condition
• The network is not connected.
• The modem is not connected.
• The network configuration is not correct.

Check Point
1 Check the network and modem connections.
2 Have the key operator confirm that the network configuration is correct.

Diagnosis

4. Troubleshooting
1. Check if the modem is set correctly.
2. Check that the modem is normal.
3. Confirm that the user's network configuration is correct.

4961 1/9
 4961
Archive Error messages (No. 10-)

No. 10-10
Error While Uploading Network Order

Error message release

Retry or Cancel

Condition
Condition
• An error occurred while uploading to the upload services.

Check Point
1 Have the key operator confirm that the network configuration is correct.

Diagnosis
1. Check if the modem is set correctly.
2. Check that the modem is normal.

4. Troubleshooting
3. Confirm that the user's network configuration is correct.

4961 2/9
 4961
Archive Error messages (No. 10-)

No. 10-11
Upload Server Cannot Recognize Customer Name

Condition
Condition
• The Customer Name is missing.
• The Customer Name is not entered correctly.

Check Point
1 Confirm that the Customer Name is entered correctly.
2 Have the key operator confirm that the network configuration is correct.

Diagnosis
1. Confirm that the user's network configuration is correct.

4. Troubleshooting

4961 3/9
 4961
Archive Error messages (No. 10-)

No. 10-12
Cannot Connect to Upload Host

Error message release

Retry or Cancel

Condition
Condition
• The server cannot recognize the price sheet associated with the customer.

Check Point
1 Check the network and modem connections.
2 Have the key operator confirm that the network configuration is correct.
3 Restart the computer.

Diagnosis

4. Troubleshooting
1. Confirm that the user's network configuration is correct.

4961 4/9
 4961
Archive Error messages (No. 10-)

No. 10-13
Upload Server Cannot Recognize Scan Location

Condition
Condition
• The Scan Location is missing.
• The Scan Location is not entered correctly.

Check Point
1 Confirm that the upload configuration is entered correctly.
2 Have the key operator confirm that the network configuration is correct.

Diagnosis
1. Confirm that the user's network configuration is correct.

4. Troubleshooting

4961 5/9
 4961
Archive Error messages (No. 10-)

No. 10-14
Upload Server Cannot Recognize Customer Name

Condition
Condition
• The Member ID is missing.
• The Member ID is not entered correctly.

Check Point
1 Confirm that the Member ID and upload configuration are entered correctly.
2 Have the key operator confirm that the network configuration is correct.

Diagnosis
1. Confirm that the user's network configuration is correct.

4. Troubleshooting

4961 6/9
 4961
Archive Error messages (No. 10-)

No. 10-15
Upload Server Cannot Recognize Scan Location

Condition
Condition
• The Account ID is missing.
• The Account ID is not entered correctly.

Check Point
1 Confirm that the Account ID is entered correctly.
2 Have the key operator confirm that the network configuration is correct.

Diagnosis
1. Confirm that the user's network configuration is correct.

4. Troubleshooting

4961 7/9
 4961
Archive Error messages (No. 10-)

No. 10-19
Connection Processing Failed

Condition
Condition
• An error has occurred when uploading the image file to Upload Server.

Check Point
1 Upload the image file again.

Diagnosis
1. Confirm that the user's network configuration is correct.
2. Check if any problem occurs with the network cable.

4. Troubleshooting

4961 8/9
 4961
Archive Error messages (No. 10-)

No. 10-20
Busy Modem

Condition
Condition
• System Cannot Communicate with Modem

Check Point
1 Upload the image file again after a while.

Diagnosis
1. Confirm that the user's network configuration is correct.

4. Troubleshooting

4961 9/9
 4970 Archive Error messages (No. 12-)

Archive Error messages (No. 12-)

No. 12-1
Print Service Initialization Failed

Error message release

Continue

Condition
Condition
• Hard disk has an I/O problem.
• Hard disk has no space.
• An error occurred on the software.

Check Point
1 Restart the system.

Diagnosis
1. Save the log data of DLS.

4. Troubleshooting
See the PC Service Manual.
2. Restart the system.
3. If it does not work out, reinstall the DLS software.
See the PC Service Manual.

4970 1/8
 4970
Archive Error messages (No. 12-)

No. 12-2
Print Initialization Failed

Error message release

Retry

Condition
Condition
• Error in Hardware or Software Used for Communication

Check Point
1 Restart the system.

Diagnosis
1. Save the log data of DLS.
See the PC Service Manual.

4. Troubleshooting
2. Restart the system.
3. If it does not work out, reinstall the DLS software.
See the PC Service Manual.

4970 2/8
 4970
Archive Error messages (No. 12-)

No. 12-7
Rendering Error

Error message release

Continue

Condition
Condition
• The partition of print buffer has no efficient disk capacity.
• Hard disk has an I/O problem.
• An error occurred on the software.

Check Point
1 Restart printing on the WIP display.

Diagnosis

4. Troubleshooting
1. Save the log data of DLS.
See the PC Service Manual.
2. Restart the system.
3. If it does not work out, reinstall the DLS software.
See the PC Service Manual.

4970 3/8
 4970
Archive Error messages (No. 12-)

No. 12-8
Printing Error

Error message release

Retry

Condition
Condition
• Error While Sending the Image To Printer

Check Point
1 Access the WIP display to execute either of followings.
• Restart printing from the order
• Reprocess the order.
• Erase the order and reprocess from the Order display.

4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB PC Service Manual

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

4970 4/8
 4970
Archive Error messages (No. 12-)

No. 12-11
Print Service Error

Condition
Condition
• A printer error occurred.

Check Point
1 Restart the system.

Diagnosis
1. Save the log data of DLS.
See the PC Service Manual.
2. Restart the system.
3. If it does not work out, reinstall the DLS software.

4. Troubleshooting
See the PC Service Manual.

4970 5/8
 4970
Archive Error messages (No. 12-)

No. 12-13
Print Creation Error

Error message release

Continue

Condition
Condition
• The print products which do not correspond to the system have been selected.
• There is no necessary template for the index print.

Check Point
1 Reprint the images on the WIP display.
2 Restart the system.

Diagnosis

4. Troubleshooting
1. Save the log data of DLS.
See the PC Service Manual.
2. Restart the system.
3. If it does not work out, reinstall the DLS software.
See the PC Service Manual.

4970 6/8
 4970
Archive Error messages (No. 12-)

No. 12-14
Order Queuing Failed

Error message release

Continue

Condition
Condition
• Although a print request was sent, all the order frames have been denied.
• An error occurred on the software.

Check Point
1 Access the WIP display to execute either of followings.
• Restart printing from the order
• Reprocess the order.
• Erase the order and reprocess from the Order display.

4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
1. Save the log data of DLS.
See the PC Service Manual.
2. Restart the system.
3. If it does not work out, reinstall the DLS software.
See the PC Service Manual.

4970 7/8
 4970
Archive Error messages (No. 12-)

No. 12-40
Error Preparing a Print

Condition
Condition
• The image file which is larger than 4800x7200 pixels has been attempted to be imported by DLS.
• An error occurred while preparing a print.

Check Point
1 Press the image file to 4800x7200 pixels or less using the external software.
2 Access the WIP display to execute either of followings.
• Restart printing from the order
• Reprocess the order.
• Erase the order and reprocess from the Order display.

4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
1. Save the log data of DLS.
See the PC Service Manual.
2. Restart the system.
3. If it does not work out, reinstall the DLS software.
See the PC Service Manual.

4970 8/8
 4980 Media Output Error messages (No. 13-)

Media Output Error messages (No. 13-)

No. 13-12
CD Authoring Complete
No. 13-13
CD Authoring Complete

Error message release

Continue

Condition
Condition
• The CD was authored successfully, but the CD drawer could not be opened.

Check Point
1 Open the CD drawer manually, if necessary.

Diagnosis

4. Troubleshooting
1. Check if the CD drive is set to G drive.

4980 1/1
 40101 Attention message/Error: QSS TWAIN driver

Attention message/Error: QSS TWAIN driver

No. 101
Start the QSS and enter the Net Scan mode.

Attention message release

To connect to QSS again: Click OK.
To stop connecting to QSS: Click Cancel.

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- This message appears when the QSS application of QSS to connect has not been started or when the QSS
application has been started but it is not in the Net Scan Mode while attempting to start QSS TWAIN driver.

NOTE
• This attention message appears on the external computer to which the optional QSS TWAIN driver has been installed.

Check Point
1 Check that the destination QSS is in the Net Order mode.
2 Check if it is set to be in the Net Scan Mode.

4. Troubleshooting
To connect to QSS again
1. Click OK.
The attention message disappears.
2. Check the status of QSS to connect.
3. When it is not in the Net Scan Mode, set it to be in the Net Scan Mode.
4. Start the QSS TWAIN driver again.
To stop connecting to QSS
1. Click Cancel.
The attention message disappears.

40101 1/14
 40101
Attention message/Error: QSS TWAIN driver

No. 103
The QSS is already connected to another QSS TWAIN driver. Would you like to search
for another QSS?

Attention message release

To connect to the same QSS again: Click No.
To connect to the other QSS: Click Yes.

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- This message appears when attempting to connect to the QSS connected to other QSS TWAIN driver already
while attempting to start the QSS TWAIN driver.

NOTE
• This attention message appears on the external computer to which the optional QSS TWAIN driver has been installed.

Check Point

4. Troubleshooting
To connect to the same QSS again
1. Click No.
The attention message disappears.
2. Wait until the connected QSS TWAIN driver finishes.
3. Start the QSS TWAIN driver again.
To connect to the other QSS
1. Click Yes.
The attention message disappears and the Search QSS PC appears.
2. Select the other QSS and click OK.
3. Quit the QSS TWAIN driver once, and start it again.
When the QSS to connect has changed, the change does not become available without quitting the QSS TWAIN driver once.

40101 2/14
 40101
Attention message/Error: QSS TWAIN driver

No. 107
48 bit image may not correspond, depending on application. Would you like to enable
the setting?

Attention message release

To enable the Capture 48bit Image setting: Click OK.
To stop the operation: Click Cancel.

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- This message appears when attempting to enable the Capture 48bit Image setting in the Environmental
Setting display.

NOTE
• This attention message appears on the external computer to which the optional QSS TWAIN driver has been installed.

4. Troubleshooting

40101 3/14
 40101
Attention message/Error: QSS TWAIN driver

No. 110
Error/Attention has occurred in the QSS. Check the QSS.

Attention message release

Click OK.

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- This message appears when some error/attention message occurs on the side of QSS.

NOTE
• This attention message appears on the external computer to which the optional QSS TWAIN driver has been installed.

Check Point
Take a corrective action for the error/attention message occuring on the side of QSS.

4. Troubleshooting

40101 4/14
 40101
Attention message/Error: QSS TWAIN driver

No. 115
The COM port for the external controller is already occupied by another application.
Confirm the use condition of the COM port.

Attention message release

Retry, or Cancel
• Select Retry to check the COM port again.
• Select Cancel to make Wheelman unavailable and continue processing.

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- At the start of QSS TWAIN Driver, the COM port is already occupied with another application and
communicating with Wheelman is not available.

NOTE
• This attention message appears on the external computer to which the optional QSS TWAIN driver has been installed.

4. Troubleshooting

40101 5/14
 40101
Attention message/Error: QSS TWAIN driver

No. 116
Failed to open the COM port for the external controller.

Attention message release

Retry, or Cancel
• Select Retry to check the COM port again.
• Select Cancel to make Wheelman unavailable and continue processing.

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- At the start of QSS Twain Driver, commnication with the Wheelman is not available.

NOTE
• This attention message appears on the external computer to which the optional QSS TWAIN driver has been installed.

4. Troubleshooting

40101 6/14
 40101
Attention message/Error: QSS TWAIN driver

No. 117
Would you like to stop processing?

Attention message release

YES or NO
• Select YES to stop the operation.
• Select NO to continue.

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- It is attempted to stop the operation by pressing the NO key when using the Keyboard Expansion Kit.

NOTE
• This attention message appears on the external computer to which the optional QSS TWAIN driver has been installed.

4. Troubleshooting

40101 7/14
 40101
Attention message/Error: QSS TWAIN driver

No. 502
Failed to connect with the QSS. Would you like to search the QSS?

Error message release

To connect to the same QSS again: Click Cancel.
To connect to the other QSS: Click OK.
To stop the operation: Click Cancel.

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- This message appears when the QSS to connect has not started or the network is not connected properly while
attempting to start the QSS TWAIN driver.

NOTE
• This error message appears on the external computer to which the optional QSS TWAIN driver has been installed.

Check Point
1 Check the network connection.

4. Troubleshooting
2 Restart the QSS.
3 Start the QSS TWAIN driver.

40101 8/14
 40101
Attention message/Error: QSS TWAIN driver

No. 504
This version does not match the QSS.

Error message release

Click OK.

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- This message appears when the version of the QSS TWAIN driver and the version of the connected QSS are not
same while attempting to start the QSS TWAIN driver.

NOTE
• This error message appears on the external computer to which the optional QSS TWAIN driver has been installed.
• The version of the QSS TWAIN driver and the version of the connected QSS need to be same.

Check Point
1 Install the QSS TWAIN driver using the system program CD of the connected QSS.

4. Troubleshooting

40101 9/14
 40101
Attention message/Error: QSS TWAIN driver

No. 505
Communication has been disconnected. The QSS TWAIN driver will be closed.

Error message release

Click OK.

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- This message appears when the connected QSS has completed abnormally and the connection to the QSS
TWAIN driver has been disconnected.

NOTE
• This error message appears on the external computer to which the optional QSS TWAIN driver has been installed.

Check Point
1 Restart the QSS.
2 Start the QSS TWAIN driver.

4. Troubleshooting
3 Check the network connection.

40101 10/14
 40101
Attention message/Error: QSS TWAIN driver

No. 508
A QSS TWAIN driver has been started. Multiple QSS TWAIN drivers cannot be started
together.

Error message release

Click OK.

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- This message appears when attempting to start several QSS TWAIN drivers from one external PC while
attempting to start the QSS TWAIN driver.

IMPORTANT
• It is impossible to start several QSS TWAIN drivers from one external PC at the same time.

NOTE
• This error message appears on the external computer to which the optional QSS TWAIN driver has been installed.

4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
1 Quit the QSS TWAIN driver.

40101 11/14
 40101
Attention message/Error: QSS TWAIN driver

No. 512
Error/Attention has occurred in the QSS. Quit the process.

Error message release

Clicking OK cancels the error message and quits the QSS TWAIN driver.

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- This message appears when some error/attention message urging you to cancel the QSS TWAIN driver occurs on
the side of QSS.

NOTE
• This error message appears on the external computer to which the optional QSS TWAIN driver has been installed.

Check Point
1 Take a corrective action for the error/attention message occuring on the side of QSS.
2 Start the QSS TWAIN driver.

4. Troubleshooting

40101 12/14
 40101
Attention message/Error: QSS TWAIN driver

No. 513
Language version of message data is incorrect. Messages are displayed in English.

Error message release

OK
• Selecting OK displays in English.

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- Display in the selected language is not available at the start up or the Change Display.

NOTE
• This error message appears on the external computer to which the optional QSS TWAIN driver has been installed.

Check Point
1 Reinstall the QSS TWAIN driver.

4. Troubleshooting

40101 13/14
 40101
Attention message/Error: QSS TWAIN driver

No. 514
There is insufficient memory.

Error message release

OK
• Selecting OK cancels the error message and quits the QSS TWAIN driver.

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- There is memory capacity shortage while using QSS TWAIN driver.

NOTE
• This error message appears on the external computer to which the optional QSS TWAIN driver has been installed.

Check Point
1 Check if any other application is running.
2 Restart the external PC.

4. Troubleshooting

40101 14/14
 40500 Attention message: Processor

Attention message: Processor

No. 0500[N]
Add water to the Refilling Water Tank.

Attention message release

YES

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- The refilling water tank level sensor turns off.

Diagnosis
Blown fuses Manual No.
F14 Processor I/O PCB ☞ 66210

Failed parts Manual No.

Refilling water tank level sensor ☞ 63290
• Disconnect the connector of the refilling water tank level sensor and measure the resistance between pins 1 and 2 on the jack side

4. Troubleshooting
when the water temperature is between 10°C and 35°C. The level sensor is defective if the resistance is not between 1.5 kΩ and 4
kΩ.
Processor I/O PCB ☞ 66210
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
Processor power supply 2

‹ Symptoms due to connection failure of wiring/symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse

Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure Symptoms of fuse blowout
☞ 4203 ☞ 4253

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

40500 1/10
 40500
Attention message: Processor

No. 0501[N]
The replenisher switch is turned on.

Attention message release

YES or automatic release
• The replenisher switch turns on by pressing the YES key.

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- After the replenisher switch was turned off, a specified number of seconds of replenishment lack time has passed.
- After the replenisher switch was turned off, a specified time has passed with the replenishment solution sensor
ON.
- After the replenisher switch was turned off, manual replenishment or output amount measurement is carried out.

4. Troubleshooting

40500 2/10
 40500
Attention message: Processor

No. 0502[N]
Add replenishment solution to the replenishment tank.

Attention message release

YES

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- Each replenishment solution level sensor turns OFF.

NOTE
• The name of processing solution causing this attention message will be displayed in the second line of the message.
CD, BF or STB

Diagnosis
Blown fuses Manual No.
F14 Processor I/O PCB ☞ 66210

4. Troubleshooting
Failed parts Manual No.
Replenishment solution level sensor ☞ 63290
• Disconnect the connector of the replenishment solution level sensor. If the resistance between pins 1 and 2 on the jack side is not
between 1.5 kΩ and 4 kΩ when the solution temperature between is 10°C and 35°C, the level sensor is defective.
Processor I/O PCB ☞ 66210
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
Processor power supply 2

‹ Symptoms due to connection failure of wiring/symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse

Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure Symptoms of fuse blowout
☞ 4203 ☞ 4253

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

40500 3/10
 40500
Attention message: Processor

No. 0503[N][SM]
Empty the Effluent Tank.

Attention message release

YES or automatic release
• This attention message will be automatically closed when the effluent tank is emptied.

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- While prints are not being made, each effluent float switch turns ON.

NOTE
• The name of processing solution causing this attention message will be displayed in the second line of the message.
CD, BF or STB

Check Point
1 Check the solution level of the effluent tank.

4. Troubleshooting
2 Check if the float of the effluent float switch moves up and down smoothly.

Diagnosis
Blown fuses Manual No.
F14 Processor I/O PCB ☞ 66210

Failed parts Manual No.

Effluent float switch ☞ 63290
• Disconnect the connector of the effluent float switch. If there is no conduction between pins 1 and 2 on the jack side when the float is
lowered, the float switch is defective.
Processor I/O PCB ☞ 66210
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
Processor power supply 2

‹ Symptoms due to connection failure of wiring/symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse

Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure Symptoms of fuse blowout
☞ 4203 ☞ 4253

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

40500 4/10
 40500
Attention message: Processor

No. 0505
Remove the prints from the Print Sorter Unit.

Attention message release

YES or automatic release
• This attention message will be automatically closed when prints are removed.
NOTE
• While this message appears, the sorter is not activated.

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- The print full sensor turns DARK.

Check Point
1 Check that the print receiving tray and the print full sensor are not soiled.

4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Print full sensor ☞ 63260
Processor I/O PCB ☞ 66210
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

40500 5/10
 40500
Attention message: Processor

No. 0506
Close the Dryer Cover.

Attention message release

YES or automatic release
• This message will be automatically closed when the dryer cover is closed.

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- While prints are not being made, the interlock switch (dryer cover) turns off.

NOTE
• When the interlock switch (dryer cover) turns off, the drive motor, the dryer heater and the dryer fan will stop.

Check Point
1 Check if the dryer top cover and the dryer door are securely closed.

4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Interlock switch (dryer cover) ☞ 63260

Failed parts Manual No.

Interlock switch (dryer cover) ☞ 63260
• Unplug the connector of the interlock switch. If there is no conduction between pins 1 and 2 on the plug side when you place a
magnet close to the interlock switch, the interlock switch is defective.
Processor relay PCB ☞ 66220
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
Processor power supply 3

‹ Symptoms due to connection failure of wiring/symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse

Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure Symptoms of fuse blowout
☞ 4203 −

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

40500 6/10
 40500
Attention message: Processor

No. 0507
Close the Processor Top Cover.

Attention message release

YES or automatic release
• The attention message will be automatically closed when the processor top cover is closed.

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- While prints are not being made, the interlock switch (processor top cover) turns off.
- When auto cleaning is to be carried out, the interlock switch (processor top cover) turns off.
- When refilling with water is to be carried out, the interlock switch (processor top cover) turns off.

NOTE
• The drive motor, the refilling water pump, the cleaning pump, and the exhaust fan will stop when the interlock switch (processor top
cover) turns off.

Check Point

4. Troubleshooting
1 Check that the processor top cover is securely closed.

Diagnosis
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Interlock switch (Processor top cover) ☞ 63290

Failed parts Manual No.

Interlock switch (Processor top cover) ☞ 63290
• Unplug the connector of the interlock switch. If there is no conduction between pins 1 and 2 on the plug side when you place a
magnet close to the interlock switch, the interlock switch is defective.
Processor relay PCB ☞ 66220
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
Processor power supply 3

‹ Symptoms due to connection failure of wiring/symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse

Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure Symptoms of fuse blowout
☞ 4203 −

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

40500 7/10
 40500
Attention message: Processor

No. 0508
Paper remains in the processor. Are you sure you want to turn the drive off?

Attention message release

YES or NO
• Select YES to turn off the drive.
• Select NO to finish the print mode with the drive being on.

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- Although paper still remains in the processing rack or dryer rack, an attempt is made to turn off the drive.

NOTE
• Processing time of the processor varies depending on the specification.

Check Point
1 Check if all pieces of paper come out.

4. Troubleshooting

40500 8/10
 40500
Attention message: Processor

No. 0510
Attach the Print Conveyor Unit.

Attention message release

YES or automatic release
• This attention message will be automatically closed when the print conveyor unit is set.

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- The conveyor unit sensor turns LIGHT in the standby status after the drive has stopped.

Check Point
1 Check if the conveyor unit sensor is soiled.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.

4. Troubleshooting
Conveyor unit sensor ☞ 63260
Processor I/O PCB ☞ 66210
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

40500 9/10
 40500
Attention message: Processor

No. 0515
Set the Rack Stopper.

Attention message release

YES/START or automatic release
• This attention message will be automatically closed when the rack stopper is fixed.

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- While prints are not being made, the rack stopper sensor turns off.

Check Point
1 Check that the rack stopper is securely placed.

Diagnosis
Adjustment failure point Manual No.

4. Troubleshooting
Failure in the attaching position adjustment of the rack stopper sensor ☞ 63290

Failed parts Manual No.

Rack stopper sensor ☞ 63290
• Disconnect the connector of the rack stopper sensor. If there is no conduction between pins 1 and 2 on the plug side when you place
a magnet close to the rack stopper sensor, the sensor is defective.
Processor I/O PCB ☞ 66220
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400

‹ Symptoms due to connection failure of wiring/symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse

Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure Symptoms of fuse blowout
☞ 4203 −

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

40500 10/10
 40600 Attention message: Tablet Replenishment

Attention message: Tablet Replenishment

No. 0600[J]
The Tablet Cartridge is [Link]
No. 0601[J]
The Tablet Cartridge is [Link]
No. 0602[J]
The Tablet Cartridge is [Link]

Countermeasure message
Replace the Tablet Cartridge with the flashing lamp.
Attention message release
YES or automatic release
• The message will be automatically closed when the cartridge is replaced.

Condition
Error message No. Condition
No. 0600 CD Tablet Sensor 1 or 2 did not detect tablet even though the CD Drum motor was
started.

4. Troubleshooting
No. 0601 BF Tablet Sensor 1 or 2 did not detect tablet even though the BF Drum motor was
started.
No. 0602 STB Tablet Sensor 1 or 2 did not detect tablet even though the STB Drum motor was
started.

NOTE
• Printing can be performed until the Reservoir Count reaches Drop Limit if Order Display→Processor Status→Change→Tablet
Drop Reservoir is set to ON. (Tablet Drop is not to be carried out but water supply.)

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Tablet Sensor ☞ 63310
Tablet replenishment driver PCB ☞ 66500
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

40600 1/7
 40600
Attention message: Tablet Replenishment

No. 0603[J]
Add water to the Water Supply Tank.

Attention message release

YES

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- The SW tank level sensor turns off.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
SW Tank Level Sensor ☞ 63310
• Disconnect the connector of the SW tank level sensor and measure the resistance between pins 1 and 2 on the jack side when the
water temperature is between 10°C and 35°C. The Refilling Water Tank Level Sensor is defective if the resistance is out of the range
between 1.5 and 4 k.
Processor I/O PCB ☞ 66210

4. Troubleshooting
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
Processor power supply 2

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

40600 2/7
 40600
Attention message: Tablet Replenishment

No. 0604[J]
Add water to the SW/DW Tank.

Attention message release

YES

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- The SW/DW tank level sensor turns off.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
SW/DW Tank Level Sensor ☞ 63310
• Disconnect the connector of the SW/DW tank level sensor and measure the resistance between pins 1 and 2 on the jack side when the
water temperature is between 10°C and 35°C. The Refilling Water Tank Level Sensor is defective if the resistance is out of the range
between 1.5 and 4 k.
Processor I/O PCB ☞ 66210

4. Troubleshooting
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Processor relay PCB ☞ 66220
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
Processor power supply 2

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

40600 3/7
 40600
Attention message: Tablet Replenishment

No. 0605[J]
Attach the Tablet [Link]
No. 0606[J]
Attach the Tablet [Link]
No. 0607[J]
Attach the Tablet [Link]

Attention message release

YES or automatic release
• This attention message will be automatically closed when you attach the tablet cartridge.

Condition
Error message No. Condition
No. 0605 CD Cartridge Sensor turns LIGHT.
No. 0606 BF Cartridge Sensor turns LIGHT.

4. Troubleshooting
No. 0607 STB Cartridge Sensor turns LIGHT.

NOTE
• Printing can be performed until the Reservoir Count reaches Drop Limit if Order Display→Processor Status→Change→Tablet
Drop Reservoir is set to ON. (Tablet Drop is not to be carried out but water supply.)

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Cartridge Sensor ☞ 63310
Tablet replenishment driver PCB ☞ 66500
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

40600 4/7
 40600
Attention message: Tablet Replenishment

No. 0608[J]
Attach the Tablet Replenishment Unit.

Attention message release

YES or automatic release
• This attention message will be automatically closed when the tablet replenishment unit is set.

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- Tablet replenishment unit interlock switch turns off.

Diagnosis
Blown fuses Manual No.
F25 Tablet replenishment driver PCB ☞ 66500

Failed parts Manual No.

☞ 63310

4. Troubleshooting
Tablet replenishment unit interlock switch
Tablet replenishment driver PCB ☞ 66500
Processor I/O PCB ☞ 66210
Processor power supply 2 ☞ 67400
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

40600 5/7
 40600
Attention message: Tablet Replenishment

No. 0609[J]
The Tablet kit is empty.

Countermeasure message
Replace all the Tablet Cartridges with new ones.
Attention message release
YES

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- All tablets of CD in a kit are dropped.

NOTE
• If all tablets of CD in a kit are dropped, Tablet Operation is to be carried out and tablets of BF and STB are to be dropped up to Drop
Limit/without Replenishment Limit.

4. Troubleshooting

40600 6/7
 40600
Attention message: Tablet Replenishment

No. 0610[J]
Empty the Effluent Tank.###

Attention message release

YES or automatic release
• This attention message will be automatically closed when the effluent tank is emptied.
NOTE
• CD, BF or STB
The name of processing solution causing this attention message will be displayed in the second line of the message.

NOTE
• If the Effluent Float Switch turns on, all water supply pumps and cleaning pumps stops physically.

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- The effluent float switch turns ON.

4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
1 Check if the float of the effluent float switch moves up and down smoothly.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Effluent float switch ☞ 63310
• Disconnect the connector of the effluent float switch. If there is no conduction between pins 1 and 2 on the jack side when the float is
lowered, the float switch is defective.
Processor I/O PCB ☞ 66210
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Processor power supply 2 ☞ 67400
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

40600 7/7
 40700 Attention message: SM replenishment

Attention message: SM replenishment

No. 0700 [SM]

Replace the Replenishment Package with a new one.P-#

Attention message release

YES
This attention message will be closed only when the replenishment package is removed. (You have to turn off the replenishment package
sensor once.)

Condition
Suffix number Condition
0001 While replenishment solution sensor CD-A turns DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are not refilled
forcibly.
0002 While replenishment solution sensor CD-B turns DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are not refilled
forcibly.
0004 While replenishment solution sensor CD-C turns DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are not refilled
forcibly.
0008 While replenishment solution sensor STB turns DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are not refilled
forcibly.

4. Troubleshooting
0010 While replenishment solution sensor BF-A turns DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are not refilled
forcibly.
0020 While replenishment solution sensor BF-B turns DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are not refilled
forcibly.

NOTE
• When the tank is not refilled forcibly whether or not to set SM Replenishment Setting via Machine Specification, these messages
appear. When the following conditions, the tanks are not refilled forcibly.
SM Replenishment Setting Detecting condition of the replenishment solution sensor
ON The replenishment solution is not detected when the power is on.
The replenishment solution is not detected when the replenishment package is replaced.
The replenishment solution is not detected during output checks.
The replenishment solution is not detected while measuring the output amount.
The replenishment solution is not detected while initial replenishing.
Each replenishment solution in the replenishment package is not detected at the same time.
OFF Forced replenishment is not carried out.

• A suffix number is indicated by the hexadecimal numeral.

☞ 81510
Check Point
1 Check that the replenishment solution sensor is not soiled.

Diagnosis
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Sensitivity of the replenishment solution sensor ☞ 27830

Failed parts Manual No.

Replenishment solution sensor ☞ 63300
SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

40700 1/6
 40700
Attention message: SM replenishment

No. 0701[SM]
Attach the Replenishment Package.P-#

Attention message release

YES or automatic release
• When the replenishment package is set, this attention message will be automatically closed and attention message No. 703 Would you
like to initialize the remaining amount of the Replenishment Package? appears.

Condition
Suffix number Condition
0001 Replenishment package sensor P-1 turns off.
0002 Replenishment package sensor P-2 turns off.

Diagnosis
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Failure in the attaching position adjustment of the replenishment package sensor ☞ 63300

4. Troubleshooting
Failed parts Manual No.
Replenishment package sensor ☞ 63300
• Disconnect the connector of the replenishment package sensor. If there is no conduction between pins 1 and 2 on the jack side when
a magnet is placed near the replenishment package sensor, the sensor is defective.
SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

40700 2/6
 40700
Attention message: SM replenishment

No. 0702[SM]
Add water to the Water Supply Tank.

Attention message release

YES

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- The water supply tank level sensor turns off.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Water supply tank level sensor ☞ 63300
• Disconnect the connector of the water supply tank level sensor and measure the resistance between pins 1 and 2 on the jack side when
the water temperature is between 10°C and 35°C. The level sensor is defective if the resistance is not between 1.5 kΩ and 4 kΩ.
SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600
☞ 66200

4. Troubleshooting
Processor control PCB
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
Processor power supply 2

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

40700 3/6
 40700
Attention message: SM replenishment

No. 0703[SM]
Would you like to initialize the remaining amount of the Replenishment Package?

Attention message release

YES or NO
• Select YES to bring up the message No. 0704: Press the [YES/START] key to initialize the remaining amount of the
Replenishment Package.
• Select NO to return to the regular print display.

IMPORTANT
• If the replenishment package is replaced before it becomes completely empty, be sure to initialize the remaining amount
of the replenishment package.
• If the replenishment package is not replaced but attached again, the process will be continued without initializing the
remaining amount of the replenishment package.

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- Before the replenishment package is completely empty, replenishment package sensor 1 or 2 turns off.

4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Failure in the attaching position adjustment of the replenishment package sensor ☞ 63300

Failed parts Manual No.

Replenishment package sensor ☞ 63300
• Disconnect the connector of the replenishment package sensor. If there is no conduction between pins 1 and 2 on the jack side when
a magnet is placed near the replenishment package sensor, the sensor is defective.
SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

40700 4/6
 40700
Attention message: SM replenishment

No. 0704[SM]
Press the [YES/START] key to initialize the remaining amount of the Replenishment
Package.

Attention message release

YES or NO
• Select YES to initialize the remaining amount of the replenishment package.
• Select NO to return to the regular print display.

IMPORTANT
• If the replenishment package is replaced before it becomes completely empty, be sure to initialize the remaining amount
of the replenishment package.
• If the replenishment package is not replaced but attached again, the process will be continued without initializing the
remaining amount of the replenishment package.

Condition
Suffix number Condition

4. Troubleshooting
- Before the replenishment package is completely empty, replenishment package sensor 1 or 2 turns off.

Diagnosis
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Failure in the attaching position adjustment of the replenishment package sensor ☞ 63300

Failed parts Manual No.

Replenishment package sensor ☞ 63300
• Disconnect the connector of the replenishment package sensor. If there is no conduction between pins 1 and 2 on the jack side when
a magnet is placed near the replenishment package sensor, the sensor is defective.
SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

40700 5/6
 40700
Attention message: SM replenishment

No. 0705[SM]
Replace the Replenishment Package with a new one.P-#

Attention message release

YES
This attention message will be closed only when the replenishment package is removed. (You have to turn off the replenishment package
sensor once.)

Condition
Suffix number Condition
0001 While replenishment solution sensor CD-A turns DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are refilled forcibly.
0002 While replenishment solution sensor CD-B turns DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are refilled forcibly.
0004 While replenishment solution sensor CD-C turns DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are refilled forcibly.
0008 While replenishment solution sensor STB turns DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are refilled forcibly.
0010 While replenishment solution sensor BF-A turns DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are refilled forcibly.
0020 While replenishment solution sensor BF-B turns DARK, the remaining replenishment tanks are refilled forcibly.

4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
• If the tank is refilled forcibly after SM replenishment has been set via Machine Specification, these messages appear.
• A suffix number is indicated by the hexadecimal numeral.
☞ 81510
Check Point
1 Check that the replenishment solution sensor is not soiled.

Diagnosis
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Sensitivity of the replenishment solution sensor ☞ 63300

Failed parts Manual No.

Replenishment solution sensor ☞ 63300
SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

40700 6/6
 40900 Attention message: F replenishment

Attention message: F replenishment

No. 900 [F]

PSR is running out.

Countermeasure message
Add 12 liters PSR to the PSR replenishment tank.
Attention message release
YES

• You can select from two methods to make solution from PSR tablets. Although the ratio of water to tablets is slightly different
between these methods, it does not affect solution quality.
1. Dissolve three tablets in 12 liters of water, then replenish this solution into the replenishment tank.
2. Dissolve three tablets in 15 liters of water, then replenish 8 liters of this solution into the replenishment tank.

NOTE
• Even if the above attention message is shown, printing can be continued until the message ☞ No. 901 [F] PSR is empty. is shown.
• The above attention message starts condition check after Start Up Check is performed.

Condition
Suffix number Condition

4. Troubleshooting
- • PSR (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor turns off.
• The power supply is turned on when PSR (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor is off.

Check Point
Add PSR. -
Check the PSR (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor status via Input Check. ☞ 35220

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
PSR (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor ☞ 63280
F replenishment I/O PCB ☞ 66800
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

40900 1/14
 40900
Attention message: F replenishment

No. 901 [F]

PSR is empty.

Countermeasure message
Add 20 liters PSR to the PSR replenishment tank.
Attention message release
YES

• You can select from two methods to make solution from PSR tablets. Although the ratio of water to tablets is slightly different
between these methods, it does not affect solution quality.
1. Dissolve five tablets in 20 liters of water, then replenish this solution into the replenishment tank.
2. Dissolve five tablets in 25 liters of water, then replenish 20 liters of this solution into the replenishment tank.

NOTE
• When the above attention message appears, printing process stops.

Condition
Suffix number Condition

4. Troubleshooting
- • PSR (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor turns off.
• The power supply is turned on when PSR (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor is off.

Check Point
Add PSR. -
Check the PSR (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor status via Input Check. ☞ 35220

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
PSR (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor ☞ 63280
F replenishment I/O PCB ☞ 66800
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

40900 2/14
 40900
Attention message: F replenishment

No. 902 [F]

Install the replenisher cartridge.

Attention message release

YES

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- When performing the cartridge opening process, the Replenisher Cartridge Set Sensor is off.

For details of operation specification, see ☞ 57010.

Check Point
Check that replenisher cartridge is correctly set. -
Check the Replenisher Cartridge Set Sensor status via Input Check. ☞ 35220

Diagnosis

4. Troubleshooting
Failed parts Manual No.
Replenisher Cartridge Set Sensor ☞ 63280
F replenishment I/O PCB ☞ 66800
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

40900 3/14
 40900
Attention message: F replenishment

No. 903 [F]

Close the replenisher section door.

Attention message release

This attention message will be closed when the replenisher section door is close.

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- When performing the cartridge opening process, the replenisher section cover is opened.

For details of operation specification, see ☞ 57010.

Check Point
Check if the replenisher section door is closed securely. -
Check the Interlock Switch (Replenisher Section Door) status via Input Check. ☞ 35220

Diagnosis

4. Troubleshooting
Failed parts Manual No.
Interlock Switch (Replenisher Section Door) ☞ 63280
F replenishment I/O PCB ☞ 66800
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

40900 4/14
 40900
Attention message: F replenishment

No. 904 [F]

Replenish PSR.

Countermeasure message
Add 12 liters PSR to the PSR replenishment tank.
Attention message release
YES

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- When performing the cartridge opening process, the PSR (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor is off.

For details of operation specification, see ☞ 57010.

Check Point
Add PSR. -
Check the PSR (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor status via Input Check. ☞ 35220

4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
PSR (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor ☞ 63280
F replenishment I/O PCB ☞ 66800
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

40900 5/14
 40900
Attention message: F replenishment

No. 905 [F]

Install the new replenisher cartridge.

Attention message release

YES

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- After opening the cartridge, all the following sensors remain off though a specified time has passed.
• P1R (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor
• P2RA (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor
• P2RB (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor

NOTE
• The cartridge installation section is raised, and the attention message appears.

For details of operation specification, see ☞ 57010.

4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
Check that an empty replenisher cartridge is not set. -
Check the Replenisher Cartridge Set Sensor status via Input Check. ☞ 35220

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
• P1R (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor ☞ 63280
• P2RA (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor
• P2RB (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor
F replenishment I/O PCB ☞ 66800
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

40900 6/14
 40900
Attention message: F replenishment

No. 906 [F]

It is ready to replace the replenisher cartridge.

Attention message release

YES

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- If this system is closed down and started while mixing Replenisher has been completed by a cartridge open

NOTE
• If creating the replenishment solution is completed, this attention message is shown only once when the system starts up.
• When creating replenishment solution on the previous day, this message is shown while Start Up Checks are performed.
Replace an empty replenishment cartridge with a new cartridge in advance. When the solution runs out, replenishment solution will be
automatically created which will save you from stopping printing.
It is recommended that cartridges be replaced at the start up of the day.

Check Point

4. Troubleshooting
1 Set a new cartridge.

40900 7/14
 40900
Attention message: F replenishment

No. 907 [F]

Collect the waste solution.

Attention message release

YES or automatic release
• This attention message will be automatically closed when the effluent tank is emptied.

Condition
Suffix number Condition
0001 P1 Effluent Float Switch turns on.
0004 P2 + PS Effluent Float Switch turns on.

Check Point
Check the solution level of the effluent tank. -
Check the effluent float switch status via Input Check. ☞ 35220

Diagnosis

4. Troubleshooting
Failed parts Manual No.
• P1 Effluent Float Switch ☞ 63280
• P2 + PS Effluent Float Switch
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

40900 8/14
 40900
Attention message: F replenishment

No. 908 [F]

Open operation was not completed correctly. Replenishment solution preparation will
resume.

Attention message release

YES

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- The system is shut down with opening operation remaining incomplete and the system is started.

Check Point
1 Wait until the replenishment solution is created (opening operation) completely.

4. Troubleshooting

40900 9/14
 40900
Attention message: F replenishment

No. 909 [F]

Replenishment tank is empty. Cannot start the operation.

Attention message release

YES

Condition
Condition
When trying to measure the output amount or perform the initial replenishment when the replenishment solution level sensor for
replenishment tank is under the conditions below.

Suffix number Condition

0001 P1R (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor: OFF
0002 P2RA (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor: OFF
0004 P2RB (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor: OFF
0008 PSR (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor: OFF

4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
Create the replenishment solution. -
Check each replenishment solution level sensors status via Input Check. ☞ 35220

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
• P1R (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor ☞ 63280
• P2RA (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor
• P2RB (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor
• PSR (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor
F replenishment I/O PCB ☞ 66800
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

40900 10/14
 40900
Attention message: F replenishment

No. 910 [F]

Preparing the replenishment solution. One moment please . . .

Attention message release

YES

Condition
Condition
While preparing the replenishment solution, the system has printed up to the maximum number of printed sheets (approx. 507 sheets for
127 mm × 89 mm).

Check Point
1 Wait until the replenishment solution is created (opening operation) completely.

4. Troubleshooting

40900 11/14
 40900
Attention message: F replenishment

No. 911 [F]

Prcessor Section is processing. One moment please. . .

Attention message release

YES

Condition
Condition
The message appears when executing the following operation while refilling the water or creating the replenishment solution.
• Close Down Checks, Output Check, Pump Output Amount Measurement, Initial Replenishment Operation, Manual Open,
Software Upgrade etc.

4. Troubleshooting

40900 12/14
 40900
Attention message: F replenishment

No. 912 [F]

Replenishment solution was created. Initialize replenishment data and restart
replenishment.

Attention message release

YES or NO
• Select YES to initialize the replenishment data.
• When manual opening is performed by mistake while the replenishment solution is created normally, select NO.
Maintain the status without initializing the replenishment data.

IMPORTANT
• Do not perform manual opening when F: Reserve is selected.
If performing manual opening, the message One moment please. . . is shown, and manual opening is not completed
normally.

Condition
Condition
If all the (upper and lower) replenishment solution level sensors of P1R, P2RA and P2RB are turned on when starting the manual opening

4. Troubleshooting
operation.

• For restarting the process without draining the replenishment solution of P1R/P2RA/P2RB at the countermeasure for replenishment
error: the message No.912 occurs if adding the water to the replenishment tank and performing manual opening with turning on all
the (upper and lower) replenishment level solution sensors for P1R/P2RA/P2RB.

40900 13/14
 40900
Attention message: F replenishment

No. 913 [F]

Manual opening cannot be started.

Countermeasure message
Drain the replenishment solution from the tank.
Attention message release
YES

Condition
Condition
When the (lower) replenishment solution level sensors of P1R/P2RA/P2RB are on after the Manual Open and Create Replenishment
Solution (Manual Open) buttons are clicked

Suffix number Condition

0001 P1R
0002 P2RA
0004 P2RB

4. Troubleshooting
For details of operation specification, see ☞ 57010.

NOTE
• When any one of the (lower) replenishment solution level sensors of P1R/P2RA/P2RB is on after clicking Manual Open and Create
Replenishment Solution (Manual Open) and a specified time has passed, ☞ No. 5923[F] occurs.

Countermeasure
1. Drain replenishment solution completely from the replenishment tanks of P1R, P2RA and P2RB. ☞ 27550
2. Perform Manual Open with each replenishment tank empty.☞ 33003

Check Point
Check the status of # # # (lower) replenishment solution level sensors of each processing solution with ☞ 35220
Input Check.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
P1R (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor ☞ 63280
P2RA (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor
P2RB (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor
F replenishment I/O PCB ☞ 66800
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

40900 14/14
 41000 Attention message: Printer

Attention message: Printer

No. 1000
The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine A
No. 1001
The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine B

Countermeasure message
Remove the Paper Magazine. Press the [YES] key to continue the printing.
Attention message release
YES or NO
• Select YES to restart printing.
• Select NO to stop printing.

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- Paper end sensor A or B turns LIGHT.

NOTE

4. Troubleshooting
• When the triple magazine unit is installed, the paper magazine A is displayed.
• When it is necessary to remove the paper, the message Remove the paper remaining in the Printer Section. appears following the
attention message.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Paper end sensor A or B ☞ 63051
Printer I/O PCB 3 (in case of B) ☞ 66040
Triple magazine PCB (in case of A) ☞ 66050
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Multi power supply ☞ 66100
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

41000 1/39
 41000
Attention message: Printer

No. 1002
Would you like to feed the leading edge of paper? Paper Magazine A
No. 1003
Would you like to feed the leading edge of paper? Paper Magazine B

Attention message release

YES or NO
• Select YES to feed out the first piece of paper without exposing.
• Select NO to exposure from the first piece of paper.

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- An attempt is made to feed out the first piece of paper when the power supply is ON, the daily setup is carried out
or after you replaced the paper magazine.

NOTE
• When the triple magazine unit is installed, the paper magazine A is displayed.

4. Troubleshooting

41000 2/39
 41000
Attention message: Printer

No. 1004
Attach the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine A
No. 1005
Attach the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine B

Attention message release

YES or automatic release
• This attention message will be released automatically when the paper magazine set in the print channel is attached.

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- The paper magazine code sensor A or B cannot detect the paper magazine code. (All the code sensors turn
LIGHT.)
- Although either paper magazine code sensor A or B detects the paper magazine code, the currently selected print
channel is inconsistent.

NOTE

4. Troubleshooting
• When the triple magazine unit is installed, the paper magazine A is displayed.

Check Point
1 Check that the paper magazine code sensor is not soiled.
2 Check that the detection cap of the paper magazine is correctly set.
3 Check that the paper magazine is inserted as far as it will go.

Diagnosis
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Failure in the attaching position adjustment of the paper magazine code sensor. -

Failed parts Manual No.

Paper magazine code sensor A or B ☞ 63051
Triple magazine PCB (in case of A) ☞ 66050
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Multi power supply ☞ 66100
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

41000 3/39
 41000
Attention message: Printer

No. 1010
Change the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine A
No. 1011
Change the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine B

Attention message release

YES

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- The paper magazine which is different from that set in the print channel is set prior to starting print.

NOTE
• When the triple magazine unit is installed, the paper magazine A is displayed.

Check Point

4. Troubleshooting
1 Check that the paper magazine code sensor is not soiled.
2 Check that the detection cap of the paper magazine is correctly set.
3 Check that the paper magazine is inserted as far as it will go.
4 Check the print channel setting.

Diagnosis
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Failure in the attaching position adjustment of the paper magazine code sensor. ☞ 63051

Failed parts Manual No.

Paper magazine code sensor A or B ☞ 63051
Triple magazine PCB (in case of A) ☞ 66050
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Multi power supply ☞ 66100
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

41000 4/39
 41000
Attention message: Printer

No. 1012
The print channel is not set. Confirm the print channel.

Attention message release

YES or automatic release
• This attention message will be canceled automatically after the all settings required in the print channel are entered, or the print
channel is changed.

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- A print channel with improper print channel setting is selected.

Check Point
1 Check the print channel setting.

4. Troubleshooting

41000 5/39
 41000
Attention message: Printer

No. 1013
Outputting. . .

Attention message release

YES or automatic release

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- While printing, outputting to media, or when the paper is feeding in the printer, an attempt is made to access to
the Menu display.

Check Point
1 Check the current print position.

4. Troubleshooting

41000 6/39
 41000
Attention message: Printer

No. 1014
The system is being initialized, one moment please. . .

Attention message release

YES or automatic release
• This attention message will be released automatically after system initialization is completed.

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- After the power supply has been turned ON, the system is being initialized.

IMPORTANT
• If you turn ON the QSS and the message No.1014 The system is being initialized, one moment please. . . is displayed
longer than it is at the usual QSS start up, ARCNET communication error may have caused this situation.
If the error occurs, check the following items.
• Check the ARCNET communication status on the Version Check display.
☞ 37530

4. Troubleshooting
• Check the ARCNET communication path.
☞ 50520
• For the diagnosis of ARCNET communication, confirm the ARCNET communication diagnosis manual.

Diagnosis
32
Failed parts Manual No.
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
D-ICE control PCB ☞ 64030
AFC/scanner control PCB Scanner Service Manual
Multi power supply ☞ 66100
Image processing PCB ☞ 64000
Power PCB ☞ 64160

32SD
Failed parts Manual No.
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
AFC/scanner control PCB Scanner Service Manual
PC-laser interface PCB PC Service Manual
PC-scanner interface PCB
Desk power supply 2 ☞ 64170

‹ Symptoms due to connection failure of wiring/symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse

Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure Symptoms of fuse blowout
☞ 4201 −
☞ 4202 −
See the Scanner Service Manual. −

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

41000 7/39
 41000
Attention message: Printer

No. 1017
Would you like to stop printing?

Attention message release

YES or NO
• Select YES to stop printing.
• Select NO to continue printing.

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- While prints are being made, the NO key is pressed.

4. Troubleshooting

41000 8/39
 41000
Attention message: Printer

No. 1024
Would you like to register the correction value?

Attention message release

YES or NO
• Select YES to start printing.
• Select NO to stop printing.

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- The message appears after measuring the test print in the setup mode.

Check Point
1 Check the channel setting.

4. Troubleshooting

41000 9/39
 41000
Attention message: Printer

No. 1026
Close the Printer Top Cover.

Attention message release

YES or automatic release.
• The message will be automatically closed when the printer top cover is closed.

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- Interlock switch (printer top cover) turns off.

Check Point
1 Check that the printer top cover is securely closed.

Diagnosis
Blown fuses Manual No.

4. Troubleshooting
F3 Laser I/O PCB ☞ 66060

Adjustment failure point Manual No.

Adjustment failure in the attaching position of the interlock switch (printer top cover) -

Failed parts Manual No.

Interlock switch (printer top cover) ☞ 63050
Laser I/O PCB ☞ 66060
Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 66020
Laser control PCB ☞ 66010
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Multi power supply ☞ 66100
Laser power supply

‹ Symptoms due to connection failure of wiring/symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse

Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure Symptoms of fuse blowout
☞ 4202 −
☞ 4252 −
See the Scanner Service Manual. −

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

41000 10/39
 41000
Attention message: Printer

No. 1027
Profile data was not found.

Attention message release

YES

Condition
Suffix number Condition
0001 When setup using the profile data is to be carried out, the monitor profile data is not included in the hard disk.
0002 When setup using the profile data is to be carried out, the monitor initial setting file is not included in the hard
disk.
0011 When setup using the profile data is to be carried out, the profile data of paper type 1 is not included in the hard
disk.
0012 When setup using the profile data is performed, the profile data of paper type 2 does not exist on the hard disk.
0013 When setup using the profile data is to be carried out, the profile data of paper types 1 and 2 are not included in
the hard disk.
0014 When setup using the profile data is performed, the profile data of paper type 3 does not exist on the hard disk.

4. Troubleshooting
0015 When setup using the profile data is to be carried out, the profile data of paper types 1 and 3 are not included in
the hard disk.
0016 When setup using the profile data is performed, the profile data of paper types 2 and 3 do not exist on the hard
disk.
0017 When setup using the profile data is to be carried out, the profile data of paper types 1, 2 and 3 are not included in
the hard disk.
0040 When setup using the profile data is to be carried out, the flatbed scanner profile data is not included in the hard
disk.
0041 When setup using the profile data is to be carried out, the flatbed scanner initial setting file is not included in the
hard disk.
0050 When setup using the profile data is to be carried out, the positive scanner profile data is not included in the hard
disk.
0051 When setup using the profile data is to be carried out, the positive scanner initial setting file is not included in the
hard disk.
0060 When setup using the profile data is to be carried out, the reference table data (monitor) for color correction table
calculation is not included in the hard disk.
0061 When setup using the profile data is to be carried out, the reference table data (printer) for color correction table
calculation is not included in the hard disk.
0090 When setup using the profile data is to be carried out, the parameter file for chroma enhancement is not included
in the hard disk.
0091 When setup using the profile data is to be carried out, the parameter file for gray control is not included in the
hard disk.

Diagnosis
Failure in the profile data Manual No.
Install the profile data from the profile CD corresponding to the main software. PC Service Manual

41000 11/39
 41000
Attention message: Printer

No. 1028
More than 3 correction keys of low, middle or high density area. Execute correction?

Countermeasure message
Press the [YES] key to measure the print again. If this error recurs, press the [NO] key then clean the Advance Roller of the Colorimeter
Unit. For details, refer to the manual.
Attention message release
YES or NO
• Select YES to carry out the correction.
• Select NO to stop the correction.

IMPORTANT
• If this attention message appears, first confirm if the test print is correctly printed. When the test print color density is
normal, cancel the correction to click NO.

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- When the measurement of the test print has been completed in the daily setup, the correction result is ±3 keys or

4. Troubleshooting
more.

Diagnosis
If the test print color density is normal
The countermeasure action and the failed part Manual No.
Clean the calibration plate. -
Replace the calibration plate if it is scratched on. ☞ 21110
Clean the advance rollers of the colorimeter with a cleaning sheet. -
If 1551: The calibration plate data is out of range. Register the data? appears and you click ☞ 21110
YES, you may have registered abnormal colorimeter unit calibration data.
In this case, update the calibration plate data.
Colorimeter unit
ATX motherboard PC Service Manual

If the test print color density is abnormal

The countermeasure action and the failed part Manual No.
B-AOM driver ☞ 66080
G-AOM driver
R-AOM driver
Laser control PCB ☞ 66010
Laser power supply ☞ 66100
Laser unit ☞ 26710
Problems may occur when the processing solution (CD) has been replaced. -
In that case, perform the paper specification registration setup, then perform the paper magazine
registration setup of other magazines.

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

41000 12/39
 41000
Attention message: Printer

No. 1029
The measurement failed. Measure it again.

Countermeasure message
Press the [YES] key to measure the print again. If this error recurs, press the [NO] key then clean the Advance Roller of the Colorimeter
Unit. For details, refer to the manual.
Attention message release
YES or NO
• Select YES to measure the print again.
• Select NO to stop the operation.

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- When measuring the test print, difference of the density between each step is not detected.
- When measuring the test print, abnormal density is detected.

Check Point

4. Troubleshooting
1 Check that the test print is correctly made.
2 Check that the test print is correctly placed in the colorimeter.

Between steps

G078472

Diagnosis
If the test print color density is normal
The countermeasure action and the failed part Manual No.
Clean the advance rollers of the colorimeter with a cleaning sheet. -
Adjust the height of the colorimeter unit. ☞ 21120
Adjust the colorimeter unit. ☞ 35100
Clean the calibration plate. -
Replace the calibration plate if it is scratched on. ☞ 21110
Update the calibration plate data.
Colorimeter unit
ATX motherboard PC Service Manual

If the test print color density is abnormal

The countermeasure action and the failed part Manual No.
B-AOM driver ☞ 66080
G-AOM driver
R-AOM driver
Laser control PCB ☞ 66010
Laser power supply ☞ 66100
Laser unit ☞ 26710

41000 13/39
 41000
Attention message: Printer

The countermeasure action and the failed part Manual No.

It may occur when the contamination has occurred. -
Process the control strip and check the condition of the processing solution.
Problems may occur when the processing solution (CD) has been replaced. -
In that case, perform the paper specification registration setup, then perform the paper magazine
registration setup of other magazines.

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

4. Troubleshooting

41000 14/39
 41000
Attention message: Printer

No. 1030
Wait until printing is complete.

Countermeasure message
Return the Paper Magazine, if you removed it.
Attention message release
YES or automatic release
• This attention message will be automatically released when the print channel is changed or the selected magazine is attached.

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- When the paper magazine needs to be replaced during printing

Check Point
1 Wait until printing is completed, and place the selected paper magazine.

4. Troubleshooting

41000 15/39
 41000
Attention message: Printer

No. 1031
Paper Specification Registration Setup was not completed.

Attention message release

YES

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- An attempt is made to print using the paper type which has not been set up in the Paper Magazine Registration
Setup, Weekly Setup, or the Printer Profile Calibration mode.

Check Point
1 Carry out the setup using the paper type which the Paper Specification Registration Setup has been done.

Diagnosis
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
☞ 32510

4. Troubleshooting
Carry out Paper Specification Registration Setup.

41000 16/39
 41000
Attention message: Printer

No. 1032
One moment please. . .

Attention message release

YES or automatic release

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- Scanning or printing is interrupted by pressing the NO key.

Check Point
1 Wait until the interrupt process has been completed.

4. Troubleshooting

41000 17/39
 41000
Attention message: Printer

No. 1035
Paper Magazine Registration Setup is not completed.

Attention message release

YES

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- The paper magazine which the Paper Magazine Registration Setup has not been done is selected when outputting
the test print for monitor gamma adjustment or profile chart.

Check Point
1 Check that the paper magazine to which Paper Magazine Registration Setup has been completed is selected.

Diagnosis
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
☞ 32520

4. Troubleshooting
Carry out Paper Magazine Registration Setup.

41000 18/39
 41000
Attention message: Printer

No. 1038
Paper type for the magazine is not set.

Attention message release

YES

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- The paper type of the paper magazine with which printing or setup is to be carried out is not specified.

Check Point
1 Check the paper type of the paper magazine.

Diagnosis
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Carry out Paper Magazine Registration Setup. ☞ 32520

4. Troubleshooting

41000 19/39
 41000
Attention message: Printer

No. 1039
Paper type specification is not set.

Attention message release

YES

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- The paper type, the specification of which has not been registered during printing or setup, is selected.

Check Point
1 Check that the paper type, the specification of which has been registered, is selected.

Diagnosis
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Carry out Paper Specification Registration Setup. ☞ 32510

4. Troubleshooting

41000 20/39
 41000
Attention message: Printer

No. 1040
Press the [ORDER] key.

Attention message release

YES or automatic release

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- Since the machine is waiting until the index prints have been made or the data has been output to the medium,
another setting display cannot appear.

4. Troubleshooting

41000 21/39
 41000
Attention message: Printer

No. 1041
Unable to accept additional processing at this time. The order will be counted. Wait
until the output process is complete.

Attention message release

YES
The order number will be counted up automatically.

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- The 151st roll of film or 151st file of media in the same order has been processed continuously.

NOTE
• The data capacity which can be stored in an order is limited.

4. Troubleshooting

41000 22/39
 41000
Attention message: Printer

No. 1043
Laser temperature is being adjusted. One moment please. . .

Attention message release

YES or automatic release.
• When the temperature adjustment of the lasers B, G and R are completed and the machine becomes processable, it returns
automatically.

Condition
Condition
The count down timer is displayed in the Order The B and G lasers are waited until the temperatures become to be processable.
Display.
The count down timer is not displayed in the Order The laser unit or R laser is waited until the temperature becomes to be processable.
Display.

NOTE
• The attention message appears until B and G lasers are processable.
• When the laser unit is waited until the temperature becomes to be processable, Laser temperatures are being adjusted.(U) is

4. Troubleshooting
displayed.
• When the R laser is waited until the temperature becomes to be processable, Laser temperatures are being adjusted.(R) is
displayed.
• Processable range of the laser unit is 23.0°C to 42.0°C.
• Processable range of the R laser is 27.7°C to 28.3°C.
• The laser unit heater works to shorten the time required for adjusting the temperature to processable.
• You can check the temperatures of R laser and laser unit in Laser Unit Adjustment.
☞ 37300
Check Point
1 Wait until the laser temperature adjustment has been completed.
2 See the flow chart of diagnosis appendix for the failures. ☞ 4302

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Laser unit heater ☞ 63080
Laser unit cooling fan 1 or 2 ☞ 63050
B and G laser drivers ☞ 66070
Laser control PCB ☞ 66010
Laser I/O PCB ☞ 66060
Multi power supply ☞ 66100
Laser power supply
Laser unit ☞ 26710

IMPORTANT
• Replacement and adjustment of the parts in the laser unit are impossible.
Replace the unit.

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

41000 23/39
 41000
Attention message: Printer

No. 1047
Close printer door.

Attention message release

YES or automatic release
• This attention message will be automatically closed when the printer door is closed.

Condition
Suffix number Condition
0001 The interlock switch (printer door 1, 2 or 4) turns off.
0002 Printer door 3 sensor turns off.

NOTE
• If the interlock switch (printer door 1, 2 or 4) turns off, power is not supplied to some electrical parts.

Check Point
1 Check that printer doors 1, 2, 3, and 4 are securely closed.

4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Adjustment failure of attaching position of the interlock switch (printer door 1, 2, 4) -
Adjustment failure in the attaching position of the printer door 3 sensor -

Failed parts Manual No.

Interlock switch (printer door 1, 2, 4) ☞ 63050
• Unplug the connector of the interlock switches (printer door 1, 2 and 4). If there is no conduction between pins 1 and 3 on the plug
side when you place a magnet close to the interlock switches (printer door 1, 2 and 4), the interlock switches are defective.
Printer door 3 sensor ☞ 63050
• Unplug the connector of the printer door 3 sensor. If there is no conduction between pins 1 and 3 on the plug side when you place a
magnet close to the printer door 3 sensor, the sensor is defective.
Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 66020
Triple magazine PCB ☞ 66050
Quad magazine PCB ☞ 66055
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Multi power supply ☞ 66100

‹ Symptoms due to connection failure of wiring/symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse

Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure Symptoms of fuse blowout
☞ 4202 −

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

41000 24/39
 41000
Attention message: Printer

No. 1048
Press the [ORDER] key. Wait until output has completed.

Attention message release

YES or automatic release

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- While printing, outputting to media, or when the paper is feeding in the printer, the light source update is
required.

4. Troubleshooting

41000 25/39
 41000
Attention message: Printer

No. 1050
Additional Picture CD's cannot be made in this order. Press the [ORDER] key.

Attention message release

YES

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- Exceeds the limitation of frames of one Picture CD can hold

Check Point
Number of frames varies depending on volume of the Picture CD.
Volume 5.2 or later 200 frames
Volume 5.2 or later 999 frames

4. Troubleshooting

41000 26/39
 41000
Attention message: Printer

No. 1051
Multiple input media cannot be used to create a Picture CD.

Countermeasure message
Press the [ORDER] key to write the data, or restore the input media or film carrier.
Attention message release
YES

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- Input from different media (includes the difference between 135 and 240) processed as the same order.

4. Troubleshooting

41000 27/39
 41000
Attention message: Printer

No. 1052
The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine C

Countermeasure message
Remove the Paper Magazine. Press the [YES] key to continue the printing.
Attention message release
YES or NO
• Select YES to restart printing.
• Select NO to stop printing.

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- Paper end sensor C turns LIGHT.

NOTE
• When it is necessary to remove the paper, the message Remove the paper remaining in the Printer Section. appears after the
attention message is displayed.

4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Paper end sensor C ☞ 63051
Printer I/O PCB 3 ☞ 66040
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Multi power supply ☞ 66100
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

41000 28/39
 41000
Attention message: Printer

No. 1053
Would you like to feed the leading edge of paper? Paper Magazine C

Attention message release

YES or NO
• Select YES to feed out the first piece of paper without exposing.
• Select NO to exposure from the first piece of paper.

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- An attempt is made to feed out the first piece of paper when the power supply is ON, the daily setup is carried out
or after you replaced the paper magazine.

4. Troubleshooting

41000 29/39
 41000
Attention message: Printer

No. 1065
Would you like to continue?

Attention message release

YES

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- Printer door 3 sensor turns OFF while printing using paper magazine B or C.

NOTE
• This attention message appears when using the triple magazine specification machine or the quad paper magazine specification
machine.

Check Point
1 Check that printer door 3 is securely closed.

4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Adjustment failure in the attaching position of the printer door 3 sensor -

Failed parts Manual No.

Printer door 3 sensor ☞ 63050
• Unplug the connector of the printer door 3 sensor. If there is no conduction between pins 1 and 3 on the plug side when you place a
magnet close to the printer door 3 sensor, the sensor is defective.
Triple magazine PCB ☞ 66050
Quad magazine PCB ☞ 66055
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Multi power supply ☞ 66100
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

41000 30/39
 41000
Attention message: Printer

No. 1067
Attach the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine C

Attention message release

YES or automatic release
• This attention message will be released automatically when the paper magazine set in the print channel is attached.

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- The paper magazine code sensor C cannot detect the paper magazine code. (All the sensors turn LIGHT.)
- The paper magazine code which is detected by paper magazine code sensor C is different from the current print
channel setting.

Check Point
1 Check that the paper magazine code sensor is not soiled.
2 Check that the detection cap of the paper magazine is correctly set.

4. Troubleshooting
3 Check that the paper magazine is inserted as far as it will go.

Diagnosis
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Failure in the attaching position adjustment of the paper magazine code sensor. -

Failed parts Manual No.

Paper magazine code sensor C ☞ 63051
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Multi power supply ☞ 66100
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

41000 31/39
 41000
Attention message: Printer

No. 1068
Replace the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine C

Attention message release

YES

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- The paper magazine which is different from that set in the print channel is set prior to starting print.

Check Point
1 Check that the paper magazine code sensor is not soiled.
2 Check that the detection cap of the paper magazine is correctly set.
3 Check that the paper magazine is inserted as far as it will go.
4 Check the print channel setting.

4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Failure in the attaching position adjustment of the paper magazine code sensor. -

Failed parts Manual No.

Paper magazine code sensor C ☞ 63051
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Multi power supply ☞ 66100
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

41000 32/39
 41000
Attention message: Printer

No. 1072
Paper color intensity is low. Execute correction?

Attention message release

YES or NO
• Select YES to carry out the correction.
• Select NO to stop the operation.

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- When the daily setup correction value was calculated, the total correction amount is beyond the limit value from
the point when it completed the initial setup or paper specification registration setup.

IMPORTANT
• It may occur when the processing solution is deteriorated. Confirm that the color density state of the test print have not
changed too much in comparison with the previous print.

4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
If the test print color density is normal
The countermeasure action and the failed part Manual No.
Clean the calibration plate.
Replace the calibration plate if it is scratched on. ☞ 21110
Colorimeter unit
ATX motherboard PC Service Manual
Problems may occur if the process of performing morning daily setup, then performing emulsion -
number change setup on the main paper when the air temperature has risen, is repeated for
several days.
In that case, perform the paper specification registration setup, then perform the paper magazine
registration setup of other magazines.
Even though the color density state of the test print have not changed too much in comparison -
with the previous print, the correction value may have become high due to the gradual
deterioration of the processing solution.
In that case, process the control strip and check the condition of the processing solution.

If the test print color density is abnormal

Failed parts Manual No.
Process the control strip and check the condition of the processing solution. -
Clean the strainer units of the replenisher pumps and the hoses. Check the output amounts. -

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

41000 33/39
 41000
Attention message: Printer

No. 1074
Sensors may be dirty.

Countermeasure message
Clean the sensor with a blower brush. For details, refer to the manual. After cleaning, adjust the Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity again.
Attention message release
YES

Condition
Condition
The light source level when the sensor status changes from DARK to LIGHT is 170 or more, when carrying out Paper Sensor LED
Light Intensity Adjustment via Functions in Paper Sensor Adjustment.

Suffix number (bit) Condition

0001 Paper end sensor A (SE6)
0002 Paper end sensor B (SE4)
0004 Paper end sensor C (SE5)

4. Troubleshooting
0040 Exposure start sensor (SE14)
0080 Paper sensor 1 (SE18)
0100 Paper sensor 2 (left) (SE25)
0200 Paper sensor 2 (center) (SE26)
0400 Paper sensor 2 (right) (SE27)
0800 Paper end sensor A2 (SE29)

NOTE
• The corresponding sensor is displayed in the second line of the message.
• Suffix number is displayed with the total of the bit operation.
For details about how to determine the condition, see Suffix number display.
☞ 4002
Check Point
1 Clean each sensor using a blower brush.
2 Confirm the sensor status on the Paper Sensor Adjustment display. ☞ 36000

NOTE
• In the service mode, LED light intensity value is displayed in the Paper Sensor Adjust.
• After cleaning each sensor, carry out Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment again and check that the sensor LED light
intensity changes.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Paper end sensor A (SE6) ☞ 63051
Paper end sensor B (SE4)
Paper end sensor C (SE5)
Paper end sensor A2 (SE29)
Exposure start sensor (SE14) ☞ 63070
Paper sensor 1 (SE18) ☞ 63090
Paper sensor 2 (left) (SE25) ☞ 63110
Paper sensor 2 (center) (SE26)
Paper sensor 2 (right) (SE27)
Printer I/O PCB 2 ☞ 66030
Printer I/O PCB 3 ☞ 66040
Triple magazine PCB ☞ 66050
41000 34/39
 41000
Attention message: Printer

Failed parts Manual No.

Quad magazine PCB ☞ 66055
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Multi power supply ☞ 66100
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

4. Troubleshooting

41000 35/39
 41000
Attention message: Printer

No. 1079
If you would like to make a Picture CD, using the current data, press the [ORDER] key.

Attention message release

YES

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- Output Picture CD with Auto Order on.

4. Troubleshooting

41000 36/39
 41000
Attention message: Printer

No. 1080
Unable to accept additional processing at this time. Press the [ORDER] key.

Attention message release

YES or ORDER
• Selecting YES can read data up to for less than 10,000 frames.
NOTE
• The rest of the film or the data in the storage media, which come as or after the 10,000th frame, are not printed.
• Selecting ORDER prepares to process orders up to less than 10,000 frames in the order and prints, or writes data to storage media.
NOTE
• As for the rest of the order, it is accepted as a new order and the frames of the film or the data in the storage media that exceeded
the 10,000th frame are printed.

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- • Appears when the number of frames to process in one order reaches 10,000.

4. Troubleshooting

41000 37/39
 41000
Attention message: Printer

No. 1081
The Paper Magazine is out of paper.

Countermeasure message
Remove the Paper Magazine. Press the [YES] key to continue the printing.
Attention message release
YES/START or NO/STOP
• Select YES/START to restart.
• Select NO/STOP to quit printing.

Condition
Condition
Magazine Auto Change in Operator Selections is valid, and all the multiple paper magazines which were equipped with paper of the
same width and surface are in the state of Paper End.

Suffix number (bit) Condition

0001 Paper magazine A

4. Troubleshooting
0002 Paper magazine B
0004 Paper magazine C
0008 Paper magazine A2

NOTE
• The corresponding sensor is displayed in the second line of the message.
• Suffix number is displayed with the total of the bit operation.
For details about how to determine the condition, see Suffix number display.
☞ 4002

41000 38/39
 41000
Attention message: Printer

No. 1095
Unable to accept additional processing at this time.

Attention message release

• The attention message disappears and the screen returns to the Judgment Display by clicking YES: OK.
The images you attempted to print using the 1 Frame Magnification display are not printed.

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- Appears if Print on the 1 Frame Magnification display is clicked but the number of frames in the same order is
or exceeds 10000.

Corrective action
1. Complete processing the order and press ORDER.
Frames after the frame which was not made on 1 Frame Magnification display are normally processed.
2. Scan/read again the data of the image which was not printed on the 1 Frame Magnification display, and

4. Troubleshooting
print it again.

41000 39/39
 41083 Attention message: Printer 2

Attention message: Printer 2

No. 1083
The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine A2

Countermeasure message
Remove the Paper Magazine. Press the [YES] key to continue the printing.
Attention message release
YES or NO
• Select YES to restart printing.
• Select NO to stop printing.

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- The paper end sensor A2 has turned LIGHT.

NOTE
• Paper magazine A2 is an option. (Quad magazine specification)
• When it is necessary to remove the paper, the message Remove the paper remaining in the Printer Section. appears after the
attention message is displayed.

4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Paper end sensor A2 ☞ 63051
Quad magazine PCB ☞ 66055
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Multi power supply ☞ 66100
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

41083 1/8
 41083
Attention message: Printer 2

No. 1084
Would you like to feed the leading edge of paper? Paper Magazine A2

Attention message release

YES or NO
• Select YES to feed out the first piece of paper without exposing.
• Select NO to exposure from the first piece of paper.

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- An attempt is made to feed out the first piece of paper when the power supply is ON, the daily setup is carried out
or after you replaced the paper magazine.

NOTE
• Paper magazine A2 is an option. (Quad paper magazine specification)

4. Troubleshooting

41083 2/8
 41083
Attention message: Printer 2

No. 1085
The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine A

Countermeasure message
Remove the Paper Magazine. Press the [YES] key to continue the printing.
Attention message release
YES or NO
• Select YES to restart printing.
• Select NO to stop printing.

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- The paper end sensor A has turned LIGHT.

NOTE
• When the quad magazine unit is installed, this message appears.
• When it is necessary to remove the paper, the message Remove the paper remaining in the Printer Section. appears after the
attention message is displayed.

4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Paper end sensor A ☞ 63051
Quad magazine PCB ☞ 66055
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Multi power supply ☞ 66100
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

41083 3/8
 41083
Attention message: Printer 2

No. 1086
Would you like to feed the leading edge of paper? Paper Magazine A

Attention message release

YES or NO
• Select YES to feed out the first piece of paper without exposing.
• Select NO to exposure from the first piece of paper.

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- An attempt is made to feed out the first piece of paper when the power supply is ON, the daily setup is carried out
or after you replaced the paper magazine.

NOTE
• When the quad magazine unit is installed, this message appears.

4. Troubleshooting

41083 4/8
 41083
Attention message: Printer 2

No. 1088
Attach the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine A2

Attention message release

YES or automatic release
• This attention message will be released automatically when the paper magazine set in the print channel is attached.

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- The paper magazine code sensor A2 cannot detect the paper magazine code. (All the sensors turn LIGHT.)
- The paper magazine code which is detected by paper magazine code sensor A2 is different from the current print
channel setting.

Check Point
1 Check that the paper magazine code sensor is not soiled.
2 Check that the detection cap of the paper magazine is correctly set.

4. Troubleshooting
3 Check that the paper magazine is inserted as far as it will go.

Diagnosis
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Failure in the attaching position adjustment of the paper magazine code sensor. -

Failed parts Manual No.

paper magazine code sensor A2 ☞ 63051
Quad magazine PCB ☞ 66055
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Multi power supply ☞ 66100
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

41083 5/8
 41083
Attention message: Printer 2

No. 1089
Change the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine A2

Attention message release

YES

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- The paper magazine which is different from that set in the print channel is set prior to starting print.

Check Point
1 Check that the paper magazine code sensor is not soiled.
2 Check that the detection cap of the paper magazine is correctly set.
3 Check that the paper magazine is inserted as far as it will go.
4 Check the print channel setting.

4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Failure in the attaching position adjustment of the paper magazine code sensor. -

Failed parts Manual No.

paper magazine code sensor A2 ☞ 63051
Quad magazine PCB ☞ 66055
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Multi power supply ☞ 66100
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

41083 6/8
 41083
Attention message: Printer 2

No. 1090
Attach the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine A

Attention message release

YES or automatic release
• This attention message will be released automatically when the paper magazine set in the print channel is attached.

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- The paper magazine code sensor A cannot detect the paper magazine code. (All the sensors turn LIGHT.)
- The paper magazine code which is detected by paper magazine code sensor A is different from the current print
channel setting.

NOTE
• When the quad magazine unit is installed, this message appears.

Check Point

4. Troubleshooting
1 Check that the paper magazine code sensor is not soiled.
2 Check that the detection cap of the paper magazine is correctly set.
3 Check that the paper magazine is inserted as far as it will go.

Diagnosis
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Failure in the attaching position adjustment of the paper magazine code sensor. -

Failed parts Manual No.

Paper magazine code sensor A ☞ 63051
Quad magazine PCB ☞ 66055
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Multi power supply ☞ 66100
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

41083 7/8
 41083
Attention message: Printer 2

No. 1091
Change the Paper Magazine. Paper Magazine A

Attention message release

YES

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- The paper magazine which is different from that set in the print channel is set prior to starting print.

NOTE
• When the quad magazine unit is installed, this message appears.

Check Point
1 Check that the paper magazine code sensor is not soiled.
2 Check that the detection cap of the paper magazine is correctly set.
3 Check that the paper magazine is inserted as far as it will go.

4. Troubleshooting
4 Check the print channel setting.

Diagnosis
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Failure in the attaching position adjustment of the paper magazine code sensor. -

Failed parts Manual No.

Paper magazine code sensor A ☞ 63051
Quad magazine PCB ☞ 66055
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Multi power supply ☞ 66100
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

41083 8/8
 41300 Attention message: Scanner/ Film Carrier

Attention message: Scanner/ Film Carrier

No. 1302−1320
Refer to the Scanner Service Manual for Corrective action of Attention message.

Condition

IMPORTANT
• The Attention messages not described in the QSS Service Manual are shown here.
Refer to the Scanner Service Manual for Corrective action of Attention message.
Attention message (Scanner)
Attention message table
No. 1302 Would you like to stop scanning?
No. 1305 Photometry Section may be dirty.
No. 1306 Update the light source. If film remains in the Film Carrier, remove it.
No. 1313 The Focus Adjustment was not completed yet.
No. 1314 Light source evenness is out of allowable range.
No. 1315 LED Light Source temperature is being adjusted. process cannot be continued.

4. Troubleshooting
No. 1316 Focus Adjustment failed.
No. 1317 Failed to perform the Scan Position Auto Correction.
No. 1318 Close the Scanner Unit Cover.
No. 1319 Scanner type was changed. The system will be restarted.
No. 1320 There may be dust on the AFC opening.

NOTE
• In the Attention message table, the attention message No. that the QSS does not currently use may be described.

41300 1/2
 41300
Attention message: Scanner/ Film Carrier

No. 1400−1439
Refer to the Scanner Service Manual for Corrective action of Attention message.

Condition

IMPORTANT
• The Attention messages not described in the QSS Service Manual are shown here.
Refer to the Scanner Service Manual for Corrective action of Attention message.
Attention message (Film carrier)
Attention message table
No. 1400 Lock the Film Carrier.
No. 1401 Attach the Film Carrier.
No. 1402 Attach the 135/240 AFC.
No. 1303 Undeveloped cartridge. Cannot process.
No. 1404 The IX frame data is incomplete.

4. Troubleshooting
No. 1405 Remove the 135 film from the Film Carrier.
No. 1406 Remove the 240 film from the Film Carrier.
No. 1407 Remove the 110 film from the Film Carrier.
No. 1408 Remove the 120 film from the Film Carrier.
No. 1409 Set the lane for the Film Carrier.
No. 1410 Confirm the film stop position in the Film Carrier.
No. 1412 The film is upside down. Would you like to continue processing?
No. 1413 Input the frame number
No. 1414 The FID number was not detected.
No. 1416 Select the 240 lane.
No. 1417 Close the Mount Insertion Cover.
No. 1420 Select the DX code.
No. 1421 Confirm the stop position of all the frames to be processed.
No. 1422 Select the 135 lane.
No. 1423 Execute Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment. Remove the film from the Film Carrier.
No. 1424 Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment is being executed.
No. 1425 Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment is complete.
No. 1426 Attach the 110 AFC.
No. 1427 Execute Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment. If film remains in the Film Carrier, remove it.
No. 1428 Remove the mount from the Film Carrier.
No. 1429 Make sure that the mount is placed correctly.
No. 1430 Confirm the frame size.
No. 1431 Attach the 120 AFC.
No. 1432 Attach the MMC.
No. 1433 Attach the AMC.
No. 1435 Insertion direction of film is different. Insert the film from the rear end (end with largest frame number).
No. 1438 Set the attachment.
No. 1439 Light Source was not updated. Would you like to scan?

NOTE
• In the Attention message table, the attention message No. that the QSS does not currently use may be described.

41300 2/2
 41500 Attention message: Disk/Media1

Attention message: Disk/Media1

No. 1501−1549
Refer to the Troubleshooting Manual for Corrective action of Attention message.

Condition

IMPORTANT
• The Attention messages not described in the QSS Service Manual are shown here.
Refer to the Troubleshooting Manual for Corrective action of Attention message.
Attention message (Storage Media)
Attention message table
No.1500 Would you like to stop outputting media?
No.1501 The media is write protected.
No.1502 Replace the media.
No.1503 The appropriate file was not found.
No.1504 Image Destination for the print channel is not set.
No.1505 Exif Information could not be read.

4. Troubleshooting
No.1506 Would you like to remove the USB Flash Memory?
No.1508 There are some files that could not get written to the media. Would you like to stop processing?
No.1509 Write the data.
No.1510 Read the data. Set the media.
No.1511 Write the data. Set the media.
No.1512 Data was not read from the media.
No.1513 Data was not written to the media. Format the media?
No.1514 Remove the USB Flash Memory.
No.1515 Data is too large to write.
No.1516 Data is too large to read.
No.1517 Invalid image format. Failed to read.
No.1518 Output media is the same as Input media. Select different one.
No.1519 Data has been written to this media. Would you like to delete all the written files?
No.1520 Select the template.
No.1521 Template information does not match to make the Album Print.
No.1522 Are you sure to print the previous frame except selected one?
No.1523 It was not registered as an option.
No.1524 CD-R External Writing System is being output.
No.1526 Cannot remove the USB Flash Memory. Retry?
No.1527 Write the data. Set the media.
No.1528 Registered Print Type of Print Channel is not for normal printing.
No.1529 Failed to read the bar code.
No.1530 The data was not written to the Network Folder. Make sure a Network Folder exists.
No.1531 The data was not written to the Network Folder. Make sure the Network is connected.
No.1532 Write the data.
No.1533 Data was saved to the storage media.
No.1534 Data was not written to the Hard Disk. Would you like to delete the image file(s)?
No.1535 USB Flash Memory is not set.
No.1536 The data has already been written to this media. Format this media?
No.1537 The appropriate file was not found.
No.1538 There are still orders remaining for output. Click the Output Media icon to output.
No.1539 The data has already been written to this media. Set a new media.
No.1540 Data could not be written to the media. Confirm the media drive setting.

41500 1/2
 41500
Attention message: Disk/Media1

Attention message table

No.1541 The data for media output is waiting to be written. Settings cannot be changed until the data is written to
media.
No.1542 The same order number data already exists. Would you like to overwrite?
No.1543 This file is CMYK data. Color cannot be converted correctly. Would you like to read the data?
No.1545 The image size aspect ratio is not correct. Data was not written.
No.1546 Data could not be written to the media. Confirm that the media capacity matches the Media Capacity Setting.
No.1547 Data was saved to the storage media. Remove the media.
No.1548 Hard disk is full. Would you like to delete the image file(s)?
No.1549 Data is too small to read.

NOTE
• In the Attention message table, the attention message No. that the QSS does not currently use may be described.

4. Troubleshooting

41500 2/2
 41550 Attention message: Colorimeter

Attention message: Colorimeter

No. 1550
Register the Calibration Plate Data.

Attention message release

YES

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- The unavailable data is registered in the current calibration plate data.

Check Point
1 Update the calibration plate data. ☞ 21110

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Colorimeter Control PCB ☞ 64130
Colorimeter unit ☞ 21110

4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

41550 1/3
 41550
Attention message: Colorimeter

No. 1551
The calibration plate data is out of range. Register the data?

Countermeasure message
Press the [NO] key then make sure that the Calibration Plate is clean and placed correctly. For details, refer to the manual.
Attention message release
YES or NO
• Select YES to resister the correction value.
• Select NO not to resister the correction value.

IMPORTANT
• When the message 1551: The calibration plate data is out of range. Register the data? appears, select NO.

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- When the colorimeter is calibrated, the difference between the two photometry values obtained by the calibration
plate measurements from the leading end to 9 mm and from that to 18 mm is 100 or less.

4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
1 Check that the calibration plate is not soiled.
2 Check that the calibration plate is correctly inserted.
3 Clean the advance rollers of the colorimeter with a cleaning sheet.
4 Carry out each correction via Colorimeter Unit Adjustment.

IMPORTANT
• The calibration plate may not be inserted correctly or be soiled. In this case, stop registering the correction value with the
NO key, check/clean the calibration plate and properly insert it.
• Check if there is no dirt on the calibration plate, and inserted it properly, then calibrate the colorimeter unit again.
If the same attention message appears again, perform Updating the Calibration Plate Data.
☞ 21110
• If the same attention message appears after Updating the Calibration Plate Data, follow the diagnosis below.

Diagnosis
Adjustment failure
Update the calibration plate data. ☞ 21110
Adjust the height of the colorimeter unit. ☞ 21120
Adjust the colorimeter unit. ☞ 35100
For defective parts
Replace the calibration plate if it is scratched on. ☞ 21110
Replace the colorimeter unit in the case of the colorimeter unit failure. ☞ 21110

Failed parts Manual No.

Colorimeter Control PCB ☞ 64130
Colorimeter unit ☞ 21110
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

41550 2/3
 41550
Attention message: Colorimeter

No. 1552
The paper in the Colorimeter is too short. It cannot be measured.

Countermeasure message
Remove the paper. For details, refer to the manual.
Attention message release
YES

Condition
Suffix number Condition
0001 While feeding test print in the colorimeter unit, paper sensor 1 turned DARK. After that, paper sensor 1 turned
LIGHT before advancing a specified amount of paper.
0002 While feeding test print in the colorimeter unit, paper sensors 1 and 2 turned DARK. After that, paper sensor 1
turned LIGHT before advancing a specified amount of paper.

Check Point
1 Check that a short test print has not been inserted.

4. Troubleshooting
2 Carry out each correction via Colorimeter Unit Adjustment.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Paper sensor 1 or 2 ☞ 61000
Paper advance motor
Colorimeter Control PCB ☞ 64130
Colorimeter unit ☞ 21110
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

41550 3/3
 41600 Attention message: Pricing unit

Attention message: Pricing unit

No. 1601
Turn on the Pricing Unit or supply a pricing sheet.

Attention message release

YES

Condition
Suffix number Condition
0001 When the standard setting of pricing unit is used for printing, the pricing unit power supply is OFF.
0002 When type A (bar-code printer pricing unit) is used for printing, the pricing unit power supply is OFF.

NOTE
• When Pricing Unit Setting via Option Registration is set to Not in use, this attention message does not appear.

Check Point
1 The cover on the pricing unit is open.
2 There is no pricing sheet.

4. Troubleshooting
3 Sheet feed switch is pressed.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
PU control PCB ☞ 64140
PU printer -

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

41600 1/3
 41600
Attention message: Pricing unit

No. 1603
The rest 2 order could be kept by the Pricing Unit.

Countermeasure message
Print the Pricing Sheet.
Attention message release
YES

Condition
Suffix number Condition
0001 Standard pricing unit can store only two more orders of data.
0002 Type A (bar-code printer pricing unit) can store only two more orders of data.

NOTE
• When Pricing Unit Setting via Option Registration is set to Not in use, this attention message does not appear.

Diagnosis

4. Troubleshooting
Failed parts Manual No.
PU control PCB ☞ 64140
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

41600 2/3
 41600
Attention message: Pricing unit

No. 1604
Pricing Sheet Print Out Check

Attention message release

YES or NO
• Select YES to print the pricing sheet.
• Select NO not to print the pricing sheet.

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- This message appears after the judgement is finished or the ORDER key is pressed.

NOTE
• When PJP/AUTO/PPI Automatic Order via Operator Selections is set to Not in use, this attention message will not appear after
the judgement is completed.
• When Pricing Unit Setting via Option Registration is set to Not in use, this attention message does not appear.

4. Troubleshooting

41600 3/3
 41620 Attention message: NMC1

Attention message: NMC1

No. 1621−1722
Refer to the Troubleshooting Manual for Corrective action of Attention message.

Condition

IMPORTANT
• The Attention messages not described in the QSS Service Manual are shown here.
Refer to the Troubleshooting Manual for Corrective action of Attention message.
Attention message (NMC)
Attention message table
No.1621 Would you like to delete the order?
No.1622 Would you like to quit the Net Order Receipt?
No.1634 Data could not be received. Would you like to delete the order?
No.1636 Check whether the Print Type in the QSS Print Channel Setting is Normal Print.
No.1637 Print Channel was not set. The order was not accepted.
No.1638 Print Type in the Print Channel Setting is not Normal Print. The order was not accepted.

4. Troubleshooting
No.1639 Failed to read the DPOF file. The order was not accepted.
No.1641 Print Channel of QSS is not set. Confirm the Print Channel.
No.1642 Destination to save image is not set for the QSS Print Channel. Confirm the Print Channel.
No.1643 The appropriate file was not found.
No.1644 Exif Information was not read.
No.1645 Data is too large to read.
No.1646 Invalid image format. Failed to read.
No.1647 The appropriate file was not found.
No.1648 This file is CMYK data. Color cannot be converted correctly. Would you like to read the data?
No.1649 The Aspect Ratio of image size is incorrect. Failed to write.
No.1650 Data is too small to read.
No.1651 Remote Control was not started.
No.1653 The output media size is too large. The data cannot be output to the External System.
No.1656 When outputting in the HS mode, set the Media Print Paper Fitting to either "Cut", "Overall" or "Real Size".
No.1657 Hold On Save could not be executed. Secure enough space, then restart processing.
No.1658 The Picture CD could not be created because there are more frames than can be saved.
No.1659 Calibrating... Would you like to stop the calibration?
No.1700 Would you like to stop printing?
No.1701 The order waiting for judgment remains. Switch to the Order Controller Display.
No.1702 Meida is being written. One moment please. . .
No.1703 Would you like to delete all the finished orders?
No.1704 The order will be late. Confirm in the Order Controller Display.
No.1705 Would you like to cancel the order?
No.1706 Order Controller is busy.
No.1707 Enable the Compact Archive Unit (TYPE 1) to use the Order Controller.
No.1708 This order number already exists. Change the order number.
No.1709 Reorder cannot be started.
No.1710 No more orders can be registered to the Spooler.
No.1711 The CAU drive and the Spooler are placed in the same location. Spooler will be relocated.
No.1712 The CAU drive and the Spooler are placed in the same location. Relocate the Spooler.
No.1713 The Spooler has orders remaining. Would you like to delete them?
No.1714 The Spooler has some orders. Delete all the orders.
No.1715 The order will be late for the promised Delivery Time. Confirm in the Net Order Display.

41620 1/2
 41620
Attention message: NMC1

Attention message table

No.1716 Proceeding. This function cannot be used.
No.1717 The order waiting for judgment remains. Would you like to switch to the Order Controller Display?
No.1719 New software has been received. Would you like to upgrade the software?
No.1720 E-mail has received.
No.1722 There are remaining orders. Would you like to process with the Order Controller?

NOTE
• In the Attention message table, the attention message No. that the QSS does not currently use may be described.

4. Troubleshooting

41620 2/2
 41800 Attention message: Software upgrade

Attention message: Software upgrade

No. 1801
Execute software upgrade.

Countermeasure message
Upgrade software again. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of purchase.
Attention message release
YES

Condition
Condition
Although the version of each control PCB is checked when the power supply is turned on, it is not correct.

Suffix number (bit) PCB

0001 Printer control PCB
0008 Processor control PCB
0010 AFC/scanner control PCB
0080 Image Processing PCB*1

4. Troubleshooting
0100 PU control PCB
0200 Laser control PCB
0800 D-ICE PCB
1000 d-Storage*1
2000 D-ICE Control PCB (32)
PC-Scanner Interface PCB (32SD)
4000 Image correction PCB (32)
Switch control PCB (32SD)
8000 Colorimeter Control PCB

*1. For 32SD, this attention message does not appear.

NOTE
• The name of PCB for which the attention occurred is displayed in the second line of the message.
• Perform diagnosis following the reference of each PCB below.
• Suffix number is displayed with the total of the bit operation.
For details about how to determine the condition, see Suffix number display.
☞ 4002
Check Point
1 Upgrade the software. ☞ 35600

Diagnosis
32
Failed parts Manual No.
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
AFC/scanner control PCB Scanner Service Manual
Image processing PCB ☞ 64000
PU control PCB ☞ 64140
Laser control PCB ☞ 66010
D-ICE PCB ☞ 64040
D-ICE control PCB ☞ 64030
Image correction PCB ☞ 64010
Colorimeter Control PCB ☞ 64130

41800 1/3
 41800
Attention message: Software upgrade

32SD
Failed parts Manual No.
ARCNET cable -
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
AFC/scanner control PCB Scanner Service Manual
PU control PCB ☞ 64140
Laser control PCB ☞ 66010
Switch control PCB ☞ 64090
PC-laser interface PCB PC Service Manual
PC-scanner interface PCB
Multi power supply (scanner) Scanner Service Manual
Power PCB ☞ 64160
Desk power supply 1 ☞ 64170
Desk power supply 2
Multi power supply (printer) ☞ 66100
☞ 67400

4. Troubleshooting
Processor power supply 1

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

41800 2/3
 41800
Attention message: Software upgrade

No. 1803
The program does not match the installed Paper Magazine. Upgrade the software.
Printer

Attention message release

YES

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- After upgrading the machine equipped with the dual paper magazine or triple magazine to the system program
that corresponds to the quad paper magazine, then turn on the power supply by attaching the quad paper
magazine.
- After changing the machine equipped with the quad paper magazine to the dual paper magazine or triple
magazine, then turn on the power supply.

IMPORTANT
• This attention message appears only when the QSS system program corresponds to the quad paper magazine unit.

4. Troubleshooting
• The system file (supply#.sys) either for the quad paper magazine or others has been loaded into the printer control PCB.
☞ 35600
When the actually loaded system file and the installed unit is different, this message appears.

Check Point
1 Upgrade the software of Printer in Software Upgrade (HD). ☞ 35600

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

41800 3/3
 41821 Attention message: External system

Attention message: External system

No. 1821
For corrective action of the attention message, see the d-Storage/ CD-R external writing
system Service Manual.

Condition

IMPORTANT
• Attention messages not explained in this Service Manual are listed in the table.
For corrective action of the attention message, see the d-Storage/ CD-R external writing system Service Manual.
Attention message (External system)
Attention message table
No. 1821 The data cannot be output to the External System. Confirm the power supply of External System.

NOTE
• In the Attention message table, attention message numbers that are not used currently may be listed.

4. Troubleshooting

41821 1/1
 41900 Attention message: Main

Attention message: Main

No. 1900
It was not registered as an option.

Attention message release

YES

Condition
Condition
When the setup or adjustment for the option which is not registered is to be carried out.

Suffix number (bit) Option

0001 PU
0010 Flatbed scanner

NOTE
• To carry out the setup or adjustment, register as an option.
• The description of suffix number is displayed in the second line of the message.
• Suffix number is displayed with the total of the bit operation.

4. Troubleshooting
For details about how to determine the condition, see Suffix number display.
☞ 4002

41900 1/32
 41900
Attention message: Main

No. 1901
Selected optional function is not available. If you need to use, Install it.

Attention message release

YES

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- After the optional software has been uninstalled, an attempt is made to use its function.

Check Point
1 Install the software of the option to use.

4. Troubleshooting

41900 2/32
 41900
Attention message: Main

No. 1902
Adobe Photoshop is being used. To enter Menu, Quit the Adobe Photoshop.

Attention message release

YES

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- An attempt is made to select Menu using F via Order Display while Adobe Photoshop is being used.

NOTE
• The operation relating to setup cannot be done when the Adobe Photoshop is being used.

4. Troubleshooting

41900 3/32
 41900
Attention message: Main

No. 1903
Proceeding. One moment please. . .

Attention message release

YES

Condition
Condition
1 The F key is selected via the Order Display during processing.
2 The interrupt process is carried out while test prints are made during setup.
3 On the display subsequent from menu, an operation that influences any of the control PCBs was attempted while
processing.

NOTE
• The suffix number varies depending on the operation in progress.

Suffix number Condition

0001 Interrupting

4. Troubleshooting
0002 Initializing
0003 Paper is being processed.
0004 Scanning (AFC)
0005 Scanning (media)
0006 Outputting media
0007 Data for media output is being acquired.
0008 Printing
0009 Outputting data to Bravo remains.
0010 Removing media
0011 When one of the following conditions are fulfilled:
• After main scanning is completed until registration is completed by the Order Controller
• In Output Media, until the message about writing is displayed

NOTE
• In the service mode, attention number 1904 appears instead of condition 3 of attention message No. 1903.

Diagnosis
The following part may have some problem when the error with suffix number 0001 (interrupting) occurs.

Failed parts Manual No.

Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
AFC/scanner control PCB Scanner Service Manual
PU control PCB ☞ 64140
Laser control PCB ☞ 66010
D-ICE control PCB ☞ 64030
Colorimeter Control PCB ☞ 64130
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

41900 4/32
 41900
Attention message: Main

No. 1904
Proceeding. One moment please. . .

Attention message release

YES or NO
• Select YES to proceed the operation.
• Select NO to bring up the next display on your responsibility.

Condition
Condition
- On the display subsequent from menu, an operation that influences any of the control PCBs was attempted while
processing.

NOTE
• The suffix number varies depending on the operation in progress.

Suffix number Condition

0001 Interrupting

4. Troubleshooting
0002 Initializing
0003 Paper is being processed.
0004 Scanning (AFC)
0005 Scanning (media)
0006 Outputting media
0007 Data for media output is being acquired.
0008 Printing

NOTE
• This message is displayed only in the Service Mode.

41900 5/32
 41900
Attention message: Main

No. 1905
Program Timer was not set.

Attention message release

YES

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- When the program timer is to be activated after close down checks have been completed, the time of the program
timer has not been set yet.

Check Point
1 Set the time of the program timer.

4. Troubleshooting

41900 6/32
 41900
Attention message: Main

No. 1908
A Picture CD could not be made. Confirm the settings.

Countermeasure message
Picture CD cannot be created from 110 film, Edit Mode Print, Album Print or Package Print.
Attention message release
YES

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- You tried to make Picture CD from 110 film input.
- You tried to make Picture CD other than Normal Print.

4. Troubleshooting

41900 7/32
 41900
Attention message: Main

No. 1909
Title was not set.

Attention message release

YES

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- It is attempted to register the package print format without setting its title in editing the package print format.

Check Point
1 Set the title.

4. Troubleshooting

41900 8/32
 41900
Attention message: Main

No. 1910
There is no frame. The format will be deleted.

Attention message release

YES

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- It is attempted to delete the package print format and register it in editing the existing format.
- It is attempted to register it with no operation in creating a new package format.

4. Troubleshooting

41900 9/32
 41900
Attention message: Main

No. 1911
This Title data already exist.

Attention message release

YES

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- It is attempted to register the package print format with the same title as existing one in editing the package print
format.

4. Troubleshooting

41900 10/32
 41900
Attention message: Main

No. 1912
There is no format. New format will be created.

Attention message release

YES

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- It is attempted to edit an existing format with no created package format.

4. Troubleshooting

41900 11/32
 41900
Attention message: Main

No. 1913
This format is used in a Print Channel. Would you like to edit?

Attention message release

YES or NO
NOTE
• Select YES to overwrite the existing package format. The change in the package format is reflected on all the print channels to which
the edited package format is set.
• Select NO to create a new package format without overwriting the existing one.

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- It is attempted to select the package format which is set in print channel in editing the package print format.

4. Troubleshooting

41900 12/32
 41900
Attention message: Main

No. 1914
The format has reached maximum capacity. No more data can be added.

Attention message release

YES

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- It is attempted to register it newly with the maximum number of formats in editing the package print format.

4. Troubleshooting

41900 13/32
 41900
Attention message: Main

No. 1920
Capacity Booster Key was not detected. Confirm the connection status.

Attention message release

YES
• Select YES to operate as the low capability type input section.

Condition
Condition
During the start-up, the capacity booster cannot be detected.

Suffix number Condition

0001 Capacity booster A
0002 Capacity booster B
0003 Capacity booster A and B
0004 Capacity booster C
0006 Capacity booster B and C

4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
1 Confirm that the booster hard key is attached correctly.
2 Confirm that the booster software is installed correctly.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Capacity booster PC Service Manual
ATX motherboard

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

41900 14/32
 41900
Attention message: Main

No. 1921
Capacity Booster Key was detected.

Attention message release

YES
• Select YES to operate as the high capability type input section.

Condition
Condition
For the machine with the capacity booster equipped, the capacity booster has been detected again after the message, No. 1920 Capacity
Booster Key was not detected. Confirm the connection status. appears.

Suffix number Condition

0001 Capacity booster A
0002 Capacity booster B
0003 Capacity booster A and B
0004 Capacity booster C

4. Troubleshooting
0006 Capacity booster B and C

41900 15/32
 41900
Attention message: Main

No. 1922
Viewer Software was not found. Confirm the settings.

Attention message release

YES

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- The path set in the Operator Selections does not exist when writing the viewer software. Or the viewer software
does not exist in the specified path.

Check Point
1 Check the Path Setting of the viewer software in the Operator Selections.

4. Troubleshooting

41900 16/32
 41900
Attention message: Main

No. 1923
Set the destination of Media Output to other than External System.

Attention message release

YES

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- The Package Prints has been selected in the print channel setting of long length print, and the external system
has been selected for the media output.

Check Point
1 Change the setting to other than Package Prints, or other than external system for media output.

4. Troubleshooting

41900 17/32
 41900
Attention message: Main

No. 1924
Set the paper width wider than 127 mm for the Long Print.

Attention message release

YES

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- An attempt is made to set less than 178 mm paper width for the print channel setting of long length print.

Check Point
1 Set 203 mm or more paper width.

4. Troubleshooting

41900 18/32
 41900
Attention message: Main

No. 1925
Would you like to quit the Net Scan Mode?

Attention message release

YES or NO

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- The End button is clicked on the Net Scan Mode display.

4. Troubleshooting

41900 19/32
 41900
Attention message: Main

No. 1926
Set the Media Print Paper Fitting in Frame Print to "Cut", "Overall" or "Real Size".

Attention message release

YES/START

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- When registering the frame in the frame setting of the print channel setting display and print channel, the media
print paper fitting is set to except for Cut, All and Real Size.

Check Point
1 When registering the frame in the frame setting, check if the media print paper fitting is Cut or All, Real Size.

4. Troubleshooting

41900 20/32
 41900
Attention message: Main

No. 1927
Sort by Output Media Frame Number function cannot be used.

Attention message release

YES/START
When the attention message is canceled, the system processes without using the function.

Condition
Condition
Sort by Output Media Frame Number function of the Operator Selections is set to Sort by Frame Number, but the Sort by Output
Media Frame Number function is not available for the output external system.

Suffix number (bit) Condition

0800 CD-R external writing system
1000 d-Storage

NOTE
• The message appears only once just after starting up the QSS.

4. Troubleshooting
It does not appear for the second time.
• The corresponding external system is displayed in the second line of the message.
• Suffix number is displayed with the total of the bit operation.
For details about how to determine the condition, see Suffix number display.
☞ 4002
Check Point
1 Change the destination, or change the setting for the Sort by Frame Number in the Operator Selections to
Without Sort by Frame Number.

41900 21/32
 41900
Attention message: Main

No. 1928
DPOF File Output function cannot be used.

Attention message release

YES/START
When the attention message is canceled, the system processes without using the function.

Condition
Condition
DPOF File Output function of the Operator Selections is set to output DPOF file, but the DPOF File Output function is not available
for the output external system.

Suffix number (bit) Condition

0800 CD-R external writing system
1000 d-Storage

NOTE
• The message appears only once just after starting up the QSS.

4. Troubleshooting
It does not appear for the second time.
• The corresponding external system is displayed in the second line of the message.
• Suffix number is displayed with the total of the bit operation.
For details about how to determine the condition, see Suffix number display.
☞ 4002
Check Point
1 Change the destination, or change the setting for the DPOF File Output in the Operator Selections to Without
outputting DPOF file.

41900 22/32
 41900
Attention message: Main

No. 1933
Select an input media other than the Compact Archive Unit.

Attention message release

YES/START
The attention message is closed.

Condition
Condition
When processing, an attempt is made so that the Compact Archive Unit is set to Input Media in Print Channel on the Edit while the
Compact Archive Unit is set toTYPE 1.

NOTE
• If the Compact Archive Unit is set to TYPE 1, the attention message above appears because the image data saved in the Compact
Archive Unit is RAW data which cannot be read in the Edit Mode.
• If the image data is saved while the Compact Archive Unit is set to TYPE 2, the attention message does not appear when reading the
image data in the Edit Mode.
• If the setting is changed to TYPE 2, reading the image data that was saved with the TYPE 1 is not available.

4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
1 On the Option Registration, change the Type of the Compact Archive Unit to TYPE 2.
2 Set other than the Compact Archive Unit to Input Media.

41900 23/32
 41900
Attention message: Main

No. 1935
There is insufficient space on the disk for the Order Controller. Are you sure you want
to delete the Compact Archive Unit data automatically?

Attention message release

YES or NO
• Selecting YES, data stored in CAU (Type 2) are deleted from old one.
• Selecting NO, data stored in CAU (Type 2) is not deleted.
However, you cannot put a check mark for Order Controller as ;.

Condition
Condition
Following condition appears if you try to put check mark ; in Order Controller with CAU (Type 2) registered.
• Total data size of the image data stored in CAU (Type 2) is over 30 GB.

NOTE
• If you select NO, unnecessary data in CAU is deleted at Archive Print Selection.

4. Troubleshooting

41900 24/32
 41900
Attention message: Main

No. 1936
Compact Archive Unit data was not deleted. Delete them manually.

Attention message release

• Click YES: OK to cancel the attention message.

Condition
Condition
When attention No. 1935 appears and then press YES, the condition below appears.
• Data in CAU (Type 2) are automatically deleted but total image data size is not below 30 GB.
• File cannot automatically deleted for some reason.

NOTE
• Clicking YES: OK key does not register Order Controller.
• However, automatically deleted data in CAU will not be recovered.

Corrective action

4. Troubleshooting
1. Delete the unnecessary data in CAU at Archive Print Selection.
NOTE
• If unnecessary file is Hold On Save, change to Auto Delete .
2. Delete all the orders left on Waiting Order and Finished Order.
3. Select Order Controller on Function and Option Registration again.

41900 25/32
 41900
Attention message: Main

No. 1937
The file was not found.

Countermeasure message
For details, refer to the manual.
Attention message release
YES

Condition
Condition
Any required files were not found when making a DVD Video or Video CD.

Suffix number Condition

0001 Background image for Menu display.
0002 Background image for Order Selection Display.
0003 Background image of control button for Order Selection Display.
0004 Background image for Index display.

4. Troubleshooting
0005 Background image of control button for Index Display.
0006 Background image for Slide Show Selection Display.
0007 Background image of control button for Slide Show Selection Display.
0020 Opening movie of moving image DVD-Video.
0021 Opening movie of moving image Video CD.
0030 BGM file of DVD-Video.
0031 BGM file of Video CD.
0100 Message image of View images.
0101 Message image (for DVD-Video) of View slideshow (Once).
0102 Message image (for DVD-Video) of View slideshow (Repeat).
0103 Message image of Setting.
0104 Image of ALL Images button on the Slide Show Selection Display.
0105 Message image of 1. View images.
0106 Message image of 2. View slideshow.
0107 Image of 7. ALL Images button on the Slide Show Selection Display.
0120 RETURN button image
0121 PREV button image
0122 NEXT button image
0130 Message image of Slide Show BGM.
0131 Image 1 of BGM selection option button.
0132 Image 2 of BGM selection option button.
0133 Image 3 of BGM selection option button.
0134 Image 4 of BGM selection option button.
0140 Message image of Image Information display.
0141 File name button image of information selection option.
0142 File name + date button image of information selection option.
0143 Date button image of information selection option.
0144 Button image of information selection option is not displayed.
0150 DVD-Video opening movie for dummy.
0160 BGM file of DVD-Video silent BGM file.

NOTE
• Corresponding file name appears in the second line.

41900 26/32
 41900
Attention message: Main

Diagnosis
Suffix number Countermeasure Manual No.
0001 to 0099 Configure the necessary items at DVD Writing Setting. -
0100 to 0160 Install the QSS software again. PC Service Manual

4. Troubleshooting

41900 27/32
 41900
Attention message: Main

No. 1939
The String is too long to register.

Attention message release

YES

Condition
Condition
DVD Video, Video CD title, and Comment string exceeds allowed dot number (563 dot).

Suffix number (bit) Condition

0001 Title
0002 Comment

NOTE
• The corresponding condition is displayed in the third line.
• Suffix number is displayed with the total of the bit operation.

4. Troubleshooting
For details about how to determine the condition, see Suffix number display.
☞ 4002
Check Point
1 Correct the number of letters so that the system can display at DVD Writing Setting.

41900 28/32
 41900
Attention message: Main

No. 1940
Invalid format. Failed to read.

Attention message release

YES

Condition
Condition
There are no regulated format of DVD Video, Video CD Opening movie (mpg), BGM file (mp2), or image file (bmp).
Format of the BGM file registered at HOT ALBUM cannot play with DVD Player.

Check Point
1 Confirm the format and configure it again at DVD Writing Setting.

4. Troubleshooting

41900 29/32
 41900
Attention message: Main

No. 1977
There is insufficient space left on the disk. Stop the process.

Attention message release

YES/START
The attention message is closed.

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- The capacity of C drive in the QSS and the memory is insufficient, because there are too much images in one
order.

Check Point
1 If printing from the storage media, reduce the number of selected image files at the File Selection display, and
divide the order into several orders.
2 If printing from films, divide the order into several orders to reduce the number of films in one order.
3 Move unnecessary files from drive C or delete the files.

4. Troubleshooting

41900 30/32
 41900
Attention message: Main

No. 1980
Failed to import the file. Confirm the file is correctly selected.

Attention message release

YES/START
The attention message is closed.

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- This appears if you try to import a file using the Short Cut Key tab on the Operator Selections display but the
file is not shortcut key settings information file.

Corrective action
1. After confirming that the selected file is a shortcut key settings information file, import it again.

4. Troubleshooting

41900 31/32
 41900
Attention message: Main

No. 1981
Short Cut Key is selected overlapped.

Attention message release

YES/START
The attention message is closed.

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- Appears if shortcut key settings overlap in Short Cut Key tab on the Operator Selections display while YES:
OK or other tab is clicked.

NOTE
• The overlapping shortcut key is displayed in the second line of the message. (a maximum of 3 are displayed)

Corrective action
1. Configure shortcut key settings again so that they do not overlap.

4. Troubleshooting

41900 32/32
 43370 Attention message: Compact Archive Unit/Edit

Attention message: Compact Archive Unit/Edit

No. 3371−4052
Refer to the Troubleshooting Manual for Corrective action of Attention message.

Condition

IMPORTANT
• The Attention messages not described in the QSS Service Manual are shown here.
Refer to the Troubleshooting Manual for Corrective action of Attention message.
Attention message (Compact archive unit)
Attention message table
No.3371 Could not execute Hold On Save.
No.3372 There is insufficient space left for Hold on Save.
No.3373 The data could not be saved to the Compact Archive Unit. Would you like to continue?
No.3374 The Compact Archive Unit could not be used. Confirm the setting.
No.3375 The data could not be saved to the Compact Archive Unit. Stop the process.

4. Troubleshooting
Attention message (Edit)
Attention message table
No.4001 Are you sure about deleting?
No.4002 Red Eye Correction cannot be executed no more.
No.4003 Image cannot be inserted into the specified position.
No.4004 Graphics are too large to insert.
No.4005 Image save is complete.
No.4006 Prints cannot be made with this Print Channel. Select a Print Channel using a larger paper width.
No.4007 The Letter Information was not read successfully.
No.4008 Display the preview without CMM correction.
No.4009 Template file was not found. Select the folder including the files.
No.4010 Specify the image area.
No.4011 Are you sure you want to exit?
No.4012 No more UNDO can be executed.
No.4013 No more REDO can be executed.
No.4014 The saved data cannot be read with this version.
No.4015 Selected file already exists.
No.4016 The area cannot be overlapped in Album Print.
No.4017 The head and jaw position is opposite, or the selected area is too small.
No.4018 Would you like to quit the Edit Mode?
No.4019 If you Import, all customer information will be deleted. Are you sure you want to Import?
No.4020 Failed to write the file.
No.4021 Failed to read the file.
No.4022 Select one or more images.
No.4023 Image magnification ratio or reduction ratio is out of range.
No.4024 Select the layer.
No.4025 This template has more than 16 layers. This template cannot be used.
No.4026 The image size is too large to insert.
No.4027 The same data already exists. Would you like to overwrite?
No.4028 Failed to export the Image Save File.
No.4029 The drive is empty.
No.4030 Failed to delete the Exported Image Save Data.
No.4031 There is insufficient space left on the disk.

43370 1/2
 43370
Attention message: Compact Archive Unit/Edit

Attention message table

No.4032 Template size is too large to read.
No.4033 Vertical templates cannot be used to make frame prints. Select a horizontal template.
No.4034 A pupil could not be detected in the specified area.
No.4035 Additional phrases could not be saved.
No.4036 The image size is too small to insert.
No.4037 The same file name already exists. Would you like to overwrite?
No.4038 This file is CMYK data. Color cannot be converted correctly. Would you like to read the data?
No.4039 Image size during editing is too large.
No.4040 The database was not changed. Confirm the property of each field.
No.4041 A form larger than the print size cannot be used.
No.4042 Single Form is not positioned.
No.4043 A Single Form protrudes from the Print Area.
No.4044 Single Form is overlapped.
No.4045 No more than three Single Form types can be positioned.
No.4046 When the Paper Setting is changed, the current position information is canceled.

4. Troubleshooting
No.4047 The selected font was not found.
No.4048 The image size is too small to make a Test Print.
No.4049 No more items can be added.
No.4051 Adobe Photoshop was not started. Confirm whether the option has been registered correctly.
No.4052 Are you sure to update?

NOTE
• In the Attention message table, the attention message No. that the QSS does not currently use may be described.

43370 2/2
 44200 Attention message: External system

Attention message: External system

No. 4200−4360
For corrective action of the attention message, see the d-Storage/ CD-R external writing
system Service Manual.

Condition

IMPORTANT
• The Attention messages not described in the QSS Service Manual are shown here.
For corrective action of the attention message, see the d-Storage/ CD-R external writing system Service Manual.
Attention message (External PCs)
Attention message table
No.4200 The ink comes to an end.
No.4201 The CD is filled to capacity when writing the Viewer Software. This order will be canceled.
No.4202 The background data was not found.
No.4203 The logo data was not found.
No.4204 There is insufficient space left on the hard disk.

4. Troubleshooting
No.4205 An error has occurred in the Rimage.
No.4206 The Viewer Software folder was not found.
No.4207 The Shop Data folder was not found.

Attention message (External system)

Attention message table
No.4208 Image size is too large.
No.4210 Confirm the CD-R external writing system.
No.4211 The data cannot be output to the CD-R external writing system. Confirm the power supply of CD-R external writing
system.
No.4213 The output media size is too large. The data cannot be output to the External System.
No.4215 Confirm the d-Storage.
No.4216 The data cannot be output to the d-Storage. Confirm the power supply of d-Storage.
No.4217 Confirm the LAN connection with the d-Storage.
No.4230 Previous order information remains. Would you like to continue?
No.4231 Too many files. Could not read.
No. 4360 The shared folder of Rimage CD/DVD Publishing Systems is full. Wait until the writing of CD is completed.

NOTE
• In the Attention message table, the attention message No. that the QSS does not currently use may be described.

44200 1/1
 44250 Attention message: QSS-Kids

Attention message: QSS-Kids

No. 4250−4308
Refer to the QSS-Kids Service Manual for Corrective action of Attention message.

Condition

IMPORTANT
• The Attention messages not described in the QSS Service Manual are shown here.
Refer to the QSS-Kids Service Manual for Corrective action of Attention message.
Attention message (QSS-Kids)
Attention message table
No.4250 Output QSS are not registered.
No.4251 Data could not be updated. Try again?
No.4252 The version of destination QSS is incorrect. Execute by offline mode.
No.4253 The proceeding order remains. Would you like to execute the Close Down Checks?
No.4254 Destination QSS was not found. Execute by offline mode.
No.4255 This order number already exists. Change the order number.

4. Troubleshooting
No.4256 There is insufficient Spooler Capacity. The order was not accepted.
No.4259 The Receipt Number already exists. Process the orders that remain in QSS-Kids.
No.4260 The version of destination QSS is incorrect. Match the version.
No.4300 The version of destination QSS is incorrect. Match the version.
No.4302 The versions of QSS-Kids and QSS of selected destination are different. %s Match the versions.
No.4303 The capacity of the files to transfer exceeds 500 MB. Reduce the file capacity to upload.
No.4304 The .tar file of the same name already exists. Would you like to overwrite?
No.4305 Would you like to delete the selected file?
No.4306 Would you like to delete the Accept Record?
No.4307 The destination QSS is not selected. Select the destination QSS.
No.4308 The QSS selected as the destination is a model which cannot be used. Match the model and the version.

NOTE
• In the Attention message table, the attention message No. that the QSS does not currently use may be described.

44250 1/1
 44350 Attention message: Bravo II

Attention message: Bravo II

No. 4350−4358
See the Bravo II Service Manual for Corrective action of Attention message.

Condition

IMPORTANT
• The Attention messages not described in the QSS Service Manual are shown here.
See the Bravo II Service Manual for Corrective action of Attention message.
Attention message (Bravo II)
Attention message table
No.4350 The input bin is empty. Set the media and press the Ink Cartridge button on the Bravo.
No.4351 The quantity of ink in the color ink cartridge ran short. Open the cover of the Bravo and press the Ink
Cartridge button, then install the new cartridge. When continuing processing without replacing the cartridge,
press the Ink Cartridge button.
No.4352 The quantity of ink in the black ink cartridge ran short. Open the cover of the Bravo and press the Ink
Cartridge button, then install the new cartridge. When continuing processing without replacing the cartridge,
press the Ink Cartridge button.

4. Troubleshooting
No.4353 The quantity of ink in both ink cartridges ran short. Open the cover of the Bravo and press the Ink Cartridge
button, then install the new cartridges. When continuing processing without replacing the cartridges, press
the Ink Cartridge button.
No.4354 The Bravo Top Cover is open. Close the cover.
No.4355 The shared folder of PTBurn is full. Wait until the writing of CD is completed.
No.4356 The power supply of Bravo is not ON. Turn ON the Bravo.
No.4357 The data has already been written to this media. Set a new media.
No.4358 Write the data. Set the media.

NOTE
• In the Attention message table, the attention message No. that the QSS does not currently use may be described.

44350 1/1
 45500 Error message: Processor 1

Error message: Processor 1

No. 5500
The processing solution temperature is above the safety range. CD
No. 5501
The processing solution temperature is above the safety range. BF
No. 5502
The processing solution temperature is above the safety range. STB

Countermeasure message
Replace the chemical filter cartridge. For details, refer to the manual.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
Error message No. Condition
No. 5500 The CD processing solution temperature exceeds the safety range (setting temperature + 1°C) after temperature

4. Troubleshooting
adjustment has been completed. (CD thermosensor)
No. 5501 The BF processing solution temperature exceeds the safety range (setting temperature + 3°C) after temperature
adjustment has been completed. (BF thermosensor)
No. 5502 The STB processing solution temperature exceeds the safety range (setting temperature + 3°C) after temperature
adjustment has been completed. (STB thermosensor)
NOTE
• There is a specific process specification whose safe range of STB is setting temperature +7°.

Check Point
1 Confirm that the value measured via Thermosensor Calibration is correctly entered.
2 Confirm the setting temperature of the chilling unit (only when equipped with the chilling unit).
3 Check that the cooling water solenoid valve for CD, BF or STB works well (only when equipped with the
cooling water unit).
4 Check whether the tank cooling fans (FAN 1 to 3) operate normally.

Diagnosis
For cooling failure Manual No.
Cooling water solenoid valve ☞ 63290
• If the cooling water solenoid valve does not operate when DC 24 V is output between pins 1 and 2 on the connector of each cooling
water solenoid valve, the solenoid valve is defective.
Chilling unit ☞ 63290
Cooling fan ☞ 63290
• If the cooling fan does not operate when DC 24 V in output between pins 1 and 2 on the connector of each cooling fan, the tank
cooling fan is defective.
Processor I/O PCB ☞ 66210
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
Processor power supply 2

When temperature is incorrectly detected Manual No.

Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Thermosensor ☞ 63290
• Unplug the connector of each thermosensor. If the measured resistance between pins 1 and 2 on the plug side differs greatly from the
values in the table below, the thermosensor is defective.
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400

45500 1/17
 45500
Error message: Processor 1

Actual temperature (°C) Resistance value (KΩ)

10 20.35
20 12.59
30 7.99
35 6.42
38 5.65
40 5.19
45 4.22

When temperature is incorrectly adjusted Manual No.

Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
Processor power supply 2
Processor power supply 3

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

4. Troubleshooting

45500 2/17
 45500
Error message: Processor 1

No. 5503
The dryer temperature is above the safety range.

Countermeasure message
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- The dryer temperature exceeds the safety range (setting temperature + 10°C) after the temperature adjustment is
completed. (dryer thermosensor)

Diagnosis
When temperature is incorrectly adjusted Manual No.
☞ 66200

4. Troubleshooting
Processor control PCB

When temperature is incorrectly detected Manual No.

Dryer thermosensor ☞ 63290
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
• Unplug the connector of the dryer thermosensor. If the measured resistance between pins 1 and 2 on the plug side differs greatly
from the values in the table below, the thermosensor is defective.
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400

Actual temperature (°C) Resistance value (KΩ)

10 19.07
20 11.92
30 7.63
40 5.05
50 3.41
60 2.35
70 1.66
80 1.19

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

45500 3/17
 45500
Error message: Processor 1

No. 5504
The processing solution temperature is below the processing range. CD
No. 5505
The processing solution temperature is below the processing range. BF
No. 5506
The processing solution temperature is below the processing range. STB

Countermeasure message
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO
NOTE
• The processing solution temperature will be adjusted when the error display is closed.

Condition

4. Troubleshooting
Error message No. Condition
No. 5504 The CD processing solution temperature falls below the processing range (setting temperature − 1°C) after the
temperature adjustment has been completed. (CD temperature sensor)
No. 5505 The BF processing solution temperature falls below the processing range (setting temperature − 3°C) after the
temperature adjustment has been completed. (BF temperature sensor)
No. 5506 The STB processing solution temperature drops below the processing range (setting temperature − 5°C) after the
temperature adjustment finishes. (STB temperature sensor)

Check Point
1 Confirm that the value measured via Thermosensor Calibration is correctly entered.
2 Check the setting temperature of the chilling unit (only when equipped with the chilling unit).

Diagnosis
Blown fuses Manual No.
F2 Processor relay PCB ☞ 66220
F5
F6
F7

When temperature is incorrectly adjusted Manual No.

Processing solution heater ☞ 63290
Processor relay PCB ☞ 66220
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
Processor power supply 2

Heater name Resistance (Ω)

CD (H1) 72
BF (H2) 72
STB (H3) 57.6

When temperature is incorrectly detected Manual No.

Thermosensor ☞ 63290

45500 4/17
 45500
Error message: Processor 1

When temperature is incorrectly detected Manual No.

• Unplug the connector of each thermosensor. If the measured resistance between pins 1 and 2 on the plug side differs greatly from the
values in the table below, the thermosensor is defective.
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400

Actual temperature (°C) Resistance value (KΩ)

10 20.35
20 12.59
30 7.99
35 6.42
38 5.65
40 5.19
45 4.22

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

4. Troubleshooting

45500 5/17
 45500
Error message: Processor 1

No. 5507
The dryer temperature is below the processing range.

Countermeasure message
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO
The dryer temperature will be adjusted when the error display is closed.

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- The dryer temperature falls below the processing range (setting temperature − 10°C) during paper processing.
(dryer thermosensor)

Diagnosis
Blown fuses Manual No.

4. Troubleshooting
F1 Processor relay PCB ☞ 66220
F3
F4
F8
F9
F10
F11

When temperature is incorrectly adjusted Manual No.

Dryer heater ☞ 63290
• Unplug the connector of the dryer heater (H4). If the measured resistance on the plug side differs greatly from the values in the table
below, the heater is defective.
Processor relay PCB ☞ 66220
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
Processor power supply 2

Measured point Resistance (KΩ)

1-2 79.8
3-4 48.4
4-5 31.3
6-7 79.8
8-9 48.4
9-10 31.3
11-12 39.3
12-13 12.6

When temperature is incorrectly detected Manual No.

Dryer thermosensor ☞ 63290
• Unplug the connector of the dryer thermosensor. If the measured resistance between pins 1 and 2 on the plug side differs greatly
from the values in the table below, the thermosensor is defective.
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400

45500 6/17
 45500
Error message: Processor 1

Actual temperature (°C) Resistance (KΩ)

10 19.07
20 11.92
30 7.63
40 5.05
50 3.41
60 2.35
70 1.66
80 1.19

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

4. Troubleshooting

45500 7/17
 45500
Error message: Processor 1

No. 5508
The processing solution level is too low.

Countermeasure message
Refer to the manual for corrective action.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- The processing solution level detectors of the processing solution float switches (CD, BF, and STB) turned OFF.

NOTE
• If the processing solution level detector of the processing solution float switch turns off, all the processing solution heaters and
circulation pumps turn off.

4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
Common to all specifications
1 Check if the processing solution is leaking from the tank.
2 Clean the replenishment pump, strainer units of water supply pump or a hose. Check the output amounts.
3 Check if the float of the processing solution float switch moves up and down smoothly.

Diagnosis
Common to all specifications
Blown fuses Manual No.
F15 Processor I/O PCB ☞ 66210
F17

Common to all specifications

When the level is incorrectly detected Manual No.
Processing solution float switch ☞ 63290
Processor relay PCB ☞ 66220
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Processor I/O PCB ☞ 66210
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
Processor power supply 2

[N] specification
When the solution is insufficiently added Manual No.
Replenisher pump ☞ 63290
Refilling water pump ☞ 63290
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200

[SM] specification
When the solution is insufficiently added Manual No.
Replenisher pump ☞ 63290
Water Supply Pump ☞ 63290
SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200

45500 8/17
 45500
Error message: Processor 1

When the solution is insufficiently added Manual No.

Processor I/O PCB ☞ 66210
NOTE
• If the CD-W has any problem, the message No. 5524 Refilling water operation error. is displayed first.
[J] specification
When the solution is insufficiently added Manual No.
Water Supply Pump ☞ 63290
Processor I/O PCB ☞ 66210
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200

[F] specification
When the solution is insufficiently added Manual No.
P1R Replenisher Pump ☞ 63290
P2RA Replenisher Pump
P2RB Replenisher Pump
F replenishment I/O PCB ☞ 66800

4. Troubleshooting
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200

‹ Symptoms due to connection failure of wiring/symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse

Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure Symptoms of fuse blowout
☞ 4203 ☞ 4253

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

45500 9/17
 45500
Error message: Processor 1

No. 5509
The circulation amount has decreased.

Countermeasure message
Replace the chemical filter cartridge. For details, refer to the manual.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES
NOTE
• This error message will be shown only when the system is equipped with the optional digital flowmeter.

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- The circulation amount of the CD processing solution measured by the digital flowmeter falls below 3 L/min.
- Although the system is not equipped with a digital flowmeter, the digital flowmeter is set to ON via Option
Registration.

4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
• This error will not be displayed when the digital flowmeter is set to OFF via Option Registration.

Check Point
1 Check that the filter cartridge is not soiled.
2 Check if the circulation pump and the hose connected to the pump are clogged.

Diagnosis
Blown fuses Manual No.
F13 Processor relay PCB ☞ 66220

Failed parts Manual No.

Digital flowmeter ☞ 63290
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Processor relay PCB ☞ 66220
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400

‹ Symptoms due to connection failure of wiring/symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse

Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure Symptoms of fuse blowout
☞ 4203 ☞ 4253

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

45500 10/17
 45500
Error message: Processor 1

No. 5510
Processor A/D conversion error.

Countermeasure message
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- The analog data detected by each thermosensor cannot be converted to digital data.

IMPORTANT
• The A/D conversion is a process to convert analog data of the temperature measured by the processing solution
thermosensor, the dryer thermosensor and the inner thermosensor into digital data via the processor control PCB.

4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Thermosensor ☞ 63290
• Unplug the connector of each thermosensor. If the measured resistance between pins 1 and 2 on the plug side differs greatly from the
values in table 1 below, the thermosensor is defective.
Dryer thermosensor ☞ 63260
• Unplug the connector of the dryer thermosensor. If the measured resistance between pins 1 and 2 on the plug side differs greatly
from the values in table 2 below, the thermosensor is defective.
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Processor power supply 2 ☞ 67400

Table 1 ?2
Actual temperature (°C) Resistance (KΩ) Actual temperature (°C) Resistance (KΩ)
10 20.35 10 19.07
20 12.59 20 11.92
30 7.99 30 7.63
35 6.42 40 5.05
38 5.65 50 3.41
40 5.19 60 2.35
45 4.22 70 1.66

‹ Symptoms due to connection failure of wiring/symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse

Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure Symptoms of fuse blowout
☞ 4203 −

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

45500 11/17
 45500
Error message: Processor 1

No. 5511
The circulation pump has stopped. CD
No. 5513
The circulation pump has stopped. BF
No. 5515
The circulation pump has stopped. STB1
No. 5516
The circulation pump has stopped. STB2
No. 5517
The circulation pump has stopped. STB3
No. 5518
The circulation pump has stopped. STB4

Countermeasure message

4. Troubleshooting
Contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
Error message No. Condition
No. 5511 The rotation detector built in the CD circulation pump detects that the pump has stopped rotating.
No. 5513 The rotation detector built in the BF circulation pump detects that the pump has stopped rotating.
No. 5515 The rotation detector built in the STB circulation pump detects that the pump has stopped rotating.
No. 5516 The rotation detector built in the STB2 circulation pump detects that the pump has stopped rotating.
No. 5517 The rotation detector built in the STB3 circulation pump detects that the pump has stopped rotating.
No. 5518 The rotation detector built in the STB4 circulation pump detects that the pump has stopped rotating.

Check Point
1 Check that the filter cartridge is not soiled.

Diagnosis
Blown fuses Manual No.
F13 Processor relay PCB ☞ 66220

Failed parts Manual No.

Circulation pump ☞ 63290
• If the circulation pump does not operate when DC 24 V is outputted between pins 1 and 2 on the connector of circulation, the pump
is defective.
Processor I/O PCB ☞ 66210
Processor relay PCB ☞ 66220
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
Processor power supply 2
Processor power supply 3

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

45500 12/17
 45500
Error message: Processor 1

No. 5519
Thermosensor error. CD
No. 5520
Thermosensor error. BF
No. 5521
Thermosensor error. STB

Countermeasure message
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Error message No. Condition

4. Troubleshooting
No. 5519 The temperature detected by the CD thermosensor is not within a specified range.
No. 5520 The temperature detected by the BF thermosensor is not within a specified range.
No. 5521 The temperature detected by the STB thermosensor is not within a specified range.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Thermosensor ☞ 63290
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
• Unplug the connector of the thermosensor. If the measured resistance between pins 1 and 2 on the plug side differs greatly from the
values in the table below, the thermosensor is defective.
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400

Actual temperature (°C) Resistance (KΩ)

10 20.35
20 12.59
30 7.99
35 6.42
38 5.65
40 5.19
45 4.22

‹ Symptoms due to connection failure of wiring/symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse

Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure Symptoms of fuse blowout
☞ 4203 -

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

45500 13/17
 45500
Error message: Processor 1

No. 5522
Dryer Thermosensor error.

Countermeasure message
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- The temperature detected by the dryer thermosensor is not within a specified range.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Dryer thermosensor ☞ 63260

4. Troubleshooting
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
• Unplug the connectors of the dryer thermosensor and inner thermosensor. If the measured resistance between pins 1 and 2 on the
plug side differs greatly from the values in the table below, the thermosensor is defective.
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400

Actual temperature (°C) Resistance (KΩ)

10 19.07
20 11.92
30 7.63
40 5.05
50 3.41
60 2.35
70 1.66
80 1.19

IMPORTANT
• Perform the following operations if the system was turned on for first time in five or more days, and either of error message
No. 5538 or No. 5522 was shown.
1. Initialize the processor control PCB data.
2. The error may be closed by loading the processor data on the Reading and Writing Data display.
• Countermeasures against this problem are taken in the following system program versions.

System System program version

QSS-3201/3202/3203 Ver. 9.00 or later
QSS-3211/3212/3213
QSS-3202PRO/3203PRO
QSS-3211DLS/3212DLS/3213DLS Not corresponded
QSS-3201SD/3202SD/3203SD Ver. 5.00 or later
QSS-3202SD PRO/3203SD PRO

‹ Symptoms due to connection failure of wiring/symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse

Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure Symptoms of fuse blowout
☞ 4203 −

45500 14/17
 45500
Error message: Processor 1

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

4. Troubleshooting

45500 15/17
 45500
Error message: Processor 1

No. 5524
Refilling water operation error. CD-W
No. 5525
Refilling water operation error. BF-W
No. 5526
Refilling water operation error. STB1-W
No. 5527
Refilling water operation error. STB2-W
No. 5528
Refilling water operation error. STB3-W
No. 5529
Refilling water operation error. STB4-W

Countermeasure message

4. Troubleshooting
Refer to the manual for corrective action.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
Error message No. Condition
No. 5524 The refilling water level detector of the CD processing solution float switch does not detect on even though about
26 seconds have passed since refilling water operation started.
No. 5525 The refilling water level detector of the BF processing solution float switch does not detect on even though about
26 seconds have passed since refilling water operation started.
No. 5526 The refilling water level detector of the STB1 processing solution float switch does not detect on even though
about 26 seconds have passed since refilling water operation started.
No. 5527 The refilling water level detector of the STB2 processing solution float switch does not detect on even though
about 26 seconds have passed since refilling water operation started.
No. 5528 The refilling water level detector of the STB3 processing solution float switch does not detect on even though
about 26 seconds have passed since refilling water operation started.
No. 5529 The refilling water level detector of the STB4 processing solution float switch does not detect on even though
about 26 seconds have passed since refilling water operation started.

NOTE
• The CD, BF and STB4 processing solution float switches have a processing solution level detector, a refilling water level detector and
a safety thermostat for each.
The STB3, 5 and 6 processing solution float switches have a refilling water level detector for each.

Check Point
1 Check if the processing solution is leaking from the tank.
2 Check if the float of the processing solution float switch moves up and down smoothly.
3 Check that the hoses from the refilling water pumps CD-W, BF-W, STB1-W, STB2-W, STB3-W, and STB4-W
to the sub-tank are not clogged.

Diagnosis
When water is incorrectly added Manual No.
Refilling water pump ☞ 63290
• The replenisher pump does not start operating when AC 24 V is outputted between pins 1 and 2 on the connector of replenisher
pump, the pump is defective.

45500 16/17
 45500
Error message: Processor 1

When water is incorrectly added Manual No.

Processor I/O PCB ☞ 66210
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
Processor power supply 2

When refilling water is incorrectly detected Manual No.

Processing solution float switch ☞ 63290
• Disconnect the connectors of the CD, BF, STB1, STB2, STB3, and STB4 processing solution float switches. If there is no
conduction between pins 1 and 2 on the jack side when the float is raised, the float switch is defective.
Processor relay PCB ☞ 66220
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

4. Troubleshooting

45500 17/17
 45530 Error: Processor 2

Error: Processor 2

No. 5530
The Processor Top Cover is open.
No. 5531
The dryer cover is open.

Countermeasure message
Close the cover.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
Error message No. Condition
No. 5530 While prints are being made, the interlock switch (processor top cover) turns off.
No. 5531 While prints are being made, the interlock switch (dryer cover) turns off.

NOTE

4. Troubleshooting
• The drive motor, the refilling water pump, the cleaning pump, and the exhaust fan will stop when the interlock switch (processor top
cover) turns off.
• When the interlock switch (dryer cover) turns off, the drive motor, the dryer heater and the dryer fan will stop.

Check Point
1 Check that the processor top cover is securely closed.
2 Check that the dryer top cover and the dryer front cover are securely closed.

Diagnosis
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Interlock switch (Processor top cover) ☞ 63290
Interlock switch (dryer cover) ☞ 63260

Failed parts Manual No.

Interlock switch (Processor top cover) ☞ 63290
• Unplug the connector of the interlock switch. If there is no conduction between pins 1 and 2 on the plug side when you place a
magnet close to the interlock switch, the interlock switch is defective.
Interlock switch (dryer cover) ☞ 63260
• Unplug the connector of the interlock switch. If there is no conduction between pins 1 and 2 on the plug side when you place a
magnet close to the interlock switch, the interlock switch is defective.
Processor relay PCB ☞ 66220
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
Processor power supply 3

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

45530 1/13
 45530
Error: Processor 2

No. 5532
The Processing Solution Safety Thermostat has activated.

Countermeasure message
Contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- The safety thermostat of the processing solution float switches CD, BF or STB turns off.

NOTE
• The processing solution safety thermostat is activated at the following temperatures.

Standard processing Time reduction processing

Status Temperature (°C) Status Temperature (°C)

4. Troubleshooting
OFF 46±3 OFF 51±3
ON 36±3 ON 41±3

• If the safety thermostat of the processing solution float switch turns OFF, all the processing solution heaters and circulation pumps will
stop.

Check Point
1 Check that the filter cartridge is not soiled.
2 Check if the hose connected to the circulation pump are clogged.

Diagnosis
Blown fuses Manual No.
F14 Processor I/O PCB ☞ 66210
F15

When temperature is incorrectly adjusted Manual No.

Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400

When the safety thermostat is defective Manual No.

Processing solution float switch ☞ 63290
• Unplug the connector of the processing solution float switch. If there is no conduction between pins 6 and 8 on the jack side when the
processing solution temperature is at 36°C or below, the float switch is defective.
Processor I/O PCB ☞ 66210
Processor relay PCB ☞ 66220
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
Processor power supply 3

When temperature is incorrectly detected Manual No.

Thermosensor ☞ 63290
• Unplug the connectors of the CD, BF and STB thermosensor. If the measured resistance between pins 1 and 2 on the plug side differs
greatly from the values in the table below, the thermosensor is defective.
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200

45530 2/13
 45530
Error: Processor 2

When temperature is incorrectly detected Manual No.

Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400

Actual temperature (°C) Resistance (KΩ)

10 20.35
20 12.59
30 7.99
35 6.42
38 5.65
40 5.19
45 4.22

In the case of a circulation failure Manual No.

Circulation pump ☞ 63290
• If the circulation pump does not operate when DC 24 V is outputted between pins 1 and 2 on the connector of circulation, the pump
is defective.
Processor I/O PCB ☞ 66210

4. Troubleshooting
Processor relay PCB ☞ 66220
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
Processor power supply 2
Processor power supply 3

‹ Symptoms due to connection failure of wiring/symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse

Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure Symptoms of fuse blowout
☞ 4203 ☞ 4253

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

45530 3/13
 45530
Error: Processor 2

No. 5533
The Dryer Safety Thermostat has activated.

Countermeasure message
Contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- The dryer safety thermostat turns off.

NOTE
• The dryer safety thermostat is activated at the following temperatures.
OPEN (OFF) 90±2.8°C
CLOSE (ON) 70±4.4°C

4. Troubleshooting
• When the dryer safety thermostat goes OFF, the dryer heater and dryer fan go OFF.

Check Point
1 Check if the dryer fan is rotating.

Diagnosis
When the dryer fan rotates incorrectly Manual No.
Dryer fan ☞ 63260

Blown fuses Manual No.

F14 Processor I/O PCB ☞ 66210
F15
F12 Processor relay PCB ☞ 66220

When temperature is incorrectly adjusted Manual No.

Processor control PCB ☞ 66200

When the safety thermostat is defective Manual No.

Dryer safety thermostat ☞ 63260
• Disconnect the connector of the dryer safety thermostat. If there is no conduction between pins 1 and 2 on the plug side when the
dryer section temperature is at 60°C or below, the safety thermostat is defective.
Processor I/O PCB ☞ 66210
Processor relay PCB ☞ 66220
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
Processor power supply 3

When temperature is incorrectly detected Manual No.

Dryer thermosensor ☞ 63260
• Unplug the connector of the dryer thermosensor. If the measured resistance between pins 1 and 2 on the plug side differs greatly from
the values in the table below, the thermosensor is defective.
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400

45530 4/13
 45530
Error: Processor 2

Actual temperature (°C) Resistance (KΩ)

10 19.07
20 11.92
30 7.63
40 5.05
50 3.41
60 2.35
70 1.66
80 1.19

‹ Symptoms due to connection failure of wiring/symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse

Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure Symptoms of fuse blowout
☞ 4203 ☞ 4253

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

4. Troubleshooting

45530 5/13
 45530
Error: Processor 2

No. 5534
Print Sorter Unit operation error.

Countermeasure message
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Suffix number Condition
0001 Although a specified time has passed since the print sorter unit started operating, the sorter home sensor does not
turn LIGHT.
0002 Although a specified time has passed since the sorter home sensor turned LIGHT, it does not turn DARK.

Check Point

4. Troubleshooting
1 Clean the sorter home sensor using a blower brush.

Diagnosis
Operation failure Manual No.
Sorter motor ☞ 63260
• If the conveyor motor (DM3) is not activated when DC 24 V is outputted between pins 1 and 2 on the connector of conveyor motor,
the motor is defective.
Processor I/O PCB ☞ 66210
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
Processor power supply 2

Detection failure Manual No.

Sorter home sensor ☞ 63260
Processor I/O PCB ☞ 66210
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

45530 6/13
 45530
Error: Processor 2

No. 5535
Paper has jammed in the processor section.

Countermeasure message
Refer to the manual for corrective action.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- After the printer feeds out the paper to the processor, the print sensors (right, center and left) in the dryer unit do
not turn DARK within a specified time.

IMPORTANT
• Verify that paper is being fed properly.
☞ 56100

4. Troubleshooting
• Pieces of paper are lined up in two rows, and they are fed to the processor.
• These pieces of paper in each row are checked whether they passed or not by the print sensors in the dryer unit.
• This error message will appear when the print sensors failed to detect the prints even though the sensors tried to detect
the prints six times continuously.
• The error above may occur when the ARCNET communication status is not normal.
If the error occurs, check the following items.
• Check the ARCNET communication status on the Version Check display.
☞ 37530
• Check the ARCNET communication path.
☞ 50520
• For the diagnosis of ARCNET communication, confirm the ARCNET communication diagnosis manual.

Check Point
1 Confirm that the upper guides and the squeegee unit are securely attached.
2 Confirm that the gears and the rollers rotate smoothly after removing the paper processing rack from the
processing solution tank.
3 Confirm that the lower turn belt of the paper processing rack is damaged.
4 Confirm that no paper remains in the dryer rack.
5 Confirm that the print sensor is soiled.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Check the cause of failure in System Version Check at the No. 6901 ARCNET ☞ 37530
communication error.
Perform the diagnosis of ARCNET communication error. ☞ 50520

When the dryer fan rotates incorrectly Manual No.

Dryer fan ☞ 63260
Processor relay PCB ☞ 66220
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
Processor power supply 3

Blown fuses Manual No.

F12 Processor relay PCB ☞ 66220

45530 7/13
 45530
Error: Processor 2

When the drive motor is defective Manual No.

Drive motor ☞ 63290
Processor relay PCB ☞ 66220
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
Processor power supply 3

Detection failure Manual No.

Paper sensor 2 ☞ 63110
Print sensor ☞ 63260
Printer I/O PCB 3 ☞ 66040
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Processor relay PCB ☞ 66220
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Multi power supply ☞ 66100
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400

4. Troubleshooting
‹ Symptoms due to connection failure of wiring/symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse
Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure Symptoms of fuse blowout
☞ 4203 −

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

45530 8/13
 45530
Error: Processor 2

No. 5537
The Rack Stopper is not set.

Countermeasure message
Close the cover.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- While prints are being made, the rack stopper sensor turns off.

Check Point
1 Check that the rack stopper is securely placed.

4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Rack stopper sensor ☞ 63290

Failed parts Manual No.

Rack stopper sensor ☞ 63290
• Unplug the connector of the interlock switch. If there is no conduction between pins 1 and 2 on the plug side when you place a
magnet close to the interlock switch, the interlock switch is defective.
Processor I/O PCB ☞ 66210
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

45530 9/13
 45530
Error: Processor 2

No. 5538
Backup data error. Processor

Countermeasure message
Load backup data from the floppy disk. For details, refer to the manual.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Suffix number Condition
0### The backup data of the processor control PCB is abnormal.
1### The backup data of the system HDD and the processor control PCB are abnormal.

NOTE
• The value informed from CPU is displayed in the last three digits of the suffix number.
• If approximately 5 days have passed with the power supply being off or if the processor control PCB has been replaced with a new

4. Troubleshooting
one, this error message is shown.

IMPORTANT
• Perform the following operations if the system was turned on for first time in five or more days, and either of error message
No. 5538 or No. 5522 was shown.
1. Initialize the processor control PCB data.
2. The error may be cleared by loading the processor data on the Reading and Writing Data display.
• Countermeasures against this problem are taken in the following system program versions.
System System program version
QSS-3201/3202/3203 Ver. 9.00 or later
QSS-3211/3212/3213
QSS-3202PRO/3203PRO
QSS-3211DLS/3212DLS/3213DLS Not corresponded
QSS-3201SD/3202SD/3203SD Ver. 5.00 or later
QSS-3202SD PRO/3203SD PRO

• If the error message above appears, the backup data of the processor control PCB saved in HDD is sent to the processor
control PCB within approx. 5 to 10 minutes while the error cannot be closed.
After the completion of sending the backup data, the error above can be closed.
However, the backup data saved in HDD may have a problem. If the error above occurs, we recommend you to read the
backup data on the media saved at the close down check.

Diagnosis
If the data was deleted Manual No.
Carry out Reading data. ☞ 35400
Only for F specification, the error message ☞ No. 5905[F], ☞ No. 5906[F] , or ☞ No. 5907[F] may appear in ☞ 57020
specific condition.

Failed parts Manual No.

Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

45530 10/13
 45530
Error: Processor 2

No. 5539
Print Conveyor Unit was removed.

Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- The conveyor unit sensor turns LIGHT while the drive motor is operating.

Check Point
1 Check if the conveyor unit sensor is soiled.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.

4. Troubleshooting
Conveyor unit sensor ☞ 63260
Processor I/O PCB ☞ 66210
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

45530 11/13
 45530
Error: Processor 2

No. 5549
Drive Motor Revolution Count Auto Adjustment error.

Countermeasure message
Contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
Condition
- It was not adjusted properly when Drive Motor Revolution Count Auto Adjustment was performed in
Functions of Drive Motor Revolution Count Setting.

NOTE
• The suffix number differs depending on the operation which is currently processed.

Suffix number Condition

4. Troubleshooting
0001 Even though the drive motor revolution count is set to 255, it was smaller than the required count.
0002 Even though the drive motor revolution count is set to 0, it was more than the required count.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Drive motor ☞ 63290
Processor relay PCB ☞ 66220
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
Processor power supply 3

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

45530 12/13
 45530
Error: Processor 2

No. 5550
Drive Motor has stopped.

Countermeasure message
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
Condition
- The drive motor has stopped due to the protected operation.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Drive motor ☞ 63290

4. Troubleshooting
Processor relay PCB ☞ 66220
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
Processor power supply 3

‹ Symptoms due to connection failure of wiring/symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse

Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure Symptoms of fuse blowout
☞ 4203 -

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

45530 13/13
 45600 Error message: Tablet replenishment

Error message: Tablet replenishment

No. 5600[J]
Tablet Drum operation error. CD
No. 5601[J]
Tablet Drum operation error. BF
No. 5602[J]
Tablet Drum operation error. STB

Countermeasure message
Remove the Tablet Cartridge and take corrective action. For details, refer to the manual.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
Suffix Condition
number

4. Troubleshooting
- Even though the drum was moved for a specified time to return it to the home position, the home position was not detected.
Even though the system attempted to move the drum for a specified time to exit the home position, the drum remained at that
position.
Even though the drum is reversed, tablet sensor 1 does not turn DARK after a specified time.
Even though a specified time has passed since tablet sensor 1 passed the home position and turned DARK, tablet sensor 1
does not turn LIGHT.

NOTE
• The home position is the position when tablet sensors 1 and 2 are LIGHT.

Check Point
1 Check if the chute is not dirty.
2 Check if the bucket platform is not dirty.
3 Check if the tablet is not stuck between the cartridge and drum.

Diagnosis
Uncleaned places Manual No.
The module drum is cleaned. ☞ 27690

Adjustment failure point Manual No.

Upper, middle and lower elevator sensors attaching position adjustment failure ☞ 63310

Failed parts Manual No.

Check if the elevator does not tilt. -
Confirm that tablet sensor is not dirty. ☞ 63310
Tablet sensors 1 and 2 ☞ 63310
Drum Motor CD, BF, STB ☞ 63310
• If the drum motor is not activated when 24 V DC is output between PINs 15 and 16 of the drum motor connectors, the motor is
defective.
Tablet replenishment driver PCB ☞ 66500
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
Processor power supply 2

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

45600 1/5
 45600
Error message: Tablet replenishment

No. 5603[J]
A tablet has [Link]
No. 5604[J]
A tablet has [Link]
No. 5605[J]
A tablet has [Link]

Countermeasure message
Remove the Tablet Cartridge and take corrective action. For details, refer to the manual.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
Suffix number Condition

4. Troubleshooting
- Even though a specified time has passed since the drum was moved from the home position and tablet sensor 1 turned
DARK, tablet sensor 1 does not turn LIGHT.
Even though the drum was moved from the home position, tablet sensor 1 does not turn DARK after a specified time.
Even though a specified time has passed since tablet sensor 1 passed the home position, it does not turn DARK.
Even though the drum is reversed, the home position is not detected after a specified time.

NOTE
• The home position is the position when tablet sensors 1 and 2 are LIGHT.

Check Point
1 Check if the chute is not dirty.
2 Check if the bucket platform is not dirty.
3 Check if the elevator does not tilt.
4 Check if the tablet is not stuck between the cartridge and drum.

Diagnosis
Uncleaned places Manual No.
The module drum is cleaned. ☞ 27690

Adjustment failure point Manual No.

Upper, middle and lower elevator sensors attaching position adjustment failure ☞ 63310

Failed parts Manual No.

Check if the elevator does not tilt. -
Confirm that tablet sensor is not dirty. ☞ 63310
Tablet sensors 1 and 2 ☞ 63310
Drum Motor CD, BF, STB ☞ 63310
• If the drum motor is not activated when 24 V DC is output between PINs 15 and 16 of the drum motor connectors, the motor is
defective.
Tablet replenishment driver PCB ☞ 66500
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
Processor power supply 2

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

45600 2/5
 45600
Error message: Tablet replenishment

No. 5609[J]
Printing cannot continue without replenishment. CD
No. 5610[J]
Printing cannot continue without replenishment. BF
No. 5611[J]
Printing cannot continue without replenishment. STB

Countermeasure message
Contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
Error message No. Condition

4. Troubleshooting
No. 5609 The Reservoir Count exceeds the drop limit/without Replenishment Limit in Basic Kit
No. 5610 Setting when Order Display→Processor Status→Change→Tablet Drop Reservoir
is set to ON.
No. 5611

NOTE
• To reset the reservoir count, set the reservoir count of Counter to 0. See ☞ 33070.
• To reset the Water Supply Reservoir Amount, reset it via Functions in Counter.
See ☞ 33070.

45600 3/5
 45600
Error message: Tablet replenishment

No. 5612[J]
Tablet Replenishment Elevator operation error.

Countermeasure message
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Suffix number Condition
0001 Even though a specified time has passed after the elevator moves up, the elevator lower sensor did not turn
LIGHT.
0002 When the elevator was raised, the elevator middle sensor did not turn DARK even though the elevator lower
sensor turned LIGHT and a specified time passed.
0003 When the elevator was raised, the elevator upper sensor did not turn DARK even though the elevator middle
sensor turned DARK and a specified time passed.

4. Troubleshooting
0004 Even though the elevator was lowered for a specified time, the elevator upper sensor did not turn LIGHT.
0005 When the elevator was lowered, the elevator middle sensor did not turn LIGHT even though it turned dark and a
specified time passed.
0006 When the elevator was lowered, the elevator lower sensor did not turn DARK even though the elevator middle
sensor turned LIGHT and a specified time passed.

Diagnosis
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Elevator sensor attached to inappropriate position ☞ 63310
Position adjustment failure of elevator lower sensor ☞ 27680
Position adjustment failure of elevator middle sensor ☞ 27670
Position adjustment failure of elevator upper sensor ☞ 27660

Failed parts Manual No.

Confirm that the upper sensor for elevator is dirty. ☞ 63310
Upper sensor for elevator ☞ 63310
Elevator motor ☞ 63310
• If the elevator motor is not activated when 24 V DC is outputted between pins 1 and 2 of the elevator motor connectors, the elevator
motor is defective.
Tablet replenishment driver PCB ☞ 66500
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
Processor power supply 2

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

45600 4/5
 45600
Error message: Tablet replenishment

No. 5613[J]
The processing solution level is too low. STB1

Countermeasure message
Refer to the manual for corrective action.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- When the processing solution level detector of the STB1 processing solution float switch turns off and water
supply is carried out for a given amount of time, the processing solution level detector keeps off.

Check Point
1 Check if the processing solution is leaking from the tank.

4. Troubleshooting
2 Check that the valve of the strainer unit is not closed.
3 Clean the strainer.
4 Check if the replenisher hose are not clogged.
5 Check the output amount.
6 Check if the float of the processing solution float switch moves up and down smoothly.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
STB1 processing solution float switch ☞ 63310
• Disconnect the connectors of the STB1 processing solution float switch. If there is no conduction between pins 1 and 3 when the
float is raised, the float switch is defective.
STB water supply pump ☞ 63310
• If the water supply pump does not start to operate when AC 24 V is outputted between pins 1 and 2 on connector of STB water
supply pump, the water supply pump is defective.
Processor relay PCB ☞ 66220
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Processor I/O PCB ☞ 66210
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

45600 5/5
 45700 Error message: SM replenishment

Error message: SM replenishment

No. 5700[SM]
Replenishment pump operation error. CD-A
No. 5701[SM]
Replenishment pump operation error. CD-B
No. 5702[SM]
Replenishment pump operation error. CD-C
No. 5703[SM]
Replenishment pump operation error. CD-W
No. 5704[SM]
Replenishment pump operation error. BF-A
No. 5705[SM]
Replenishment pump operation error. BF-B
No. 5706[SM]
Replenishment pump operation error. STB

4. Troubleshooting
Countermeasure message
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Suffix number Condition
0001 The replenisher pump sensor or water supply pump sensor stays DARK even though a specified time has passed
since the replenisher pump or the water supply pump started operating.
0002 The replenisher pump sensor or water supply pump sensor stays LIGHT even though a specified time has passed
since the replenisher pump or the water supply pump started operating.

Check Point
1 Check that the valve of the strainer unit is not closed.
2 Clean the strainer.
3 Check that the replenisher hose and water supply hose are not clogged.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Replenisher pump and water supply pump ☞ 63300
• If the replenishment pump and water supply pump do not operate when AC 24 V is outputted between the pins (CD-A:1-2, CD-B:3-
4, CD-C:5-6, CD-W:1-2, BF-A:7-8, BF-B:9-10, STB:11-12) on the plug side of connectors for the pumps, the pumps are defective.
Replenisher pump sensor and water supply pump sensor ☞ 63300
SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600
Processor I/O PCB ☞ 66210
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
Processor power supply 2
Processor power supply 3

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

45700 1/4
 45700
Error message: SM replenishment

No. 5708[SM]
Replenishment Package solution remaining error.
No. 5709[SM]
Replenishment Package solution remaining error.

Countermeasure message
Refer to the manual for corrective action.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
The message No. 0700 Replace the Replenishment Package with a new one. is shown when the replenishment alarm value is set to -5%
(initial value) in Package Capacity Setting and either replenishment package becomes empty. In this case, the message Nos. 5708 and
5709 Replenishment Package solution remaining error. is not shown.
Suffix number Condition

4. Troubleshooting
- The percentage of the replenishment remaining amount (internal calculated value) to the replenishment package
capacity became smaller than the replenishment alarm value. (Replenishment remaining amount < Package
capacity × Replenishment remaining amount / 100) But the replenishment solution sensor does not turn DARK.

Check Point
1 Check if the actual package capacity is same as the one set in the Package Capacity Setting.
2 Check if the replenishment alarm value is sufficient.
3 Check that the valve of the strainer unit is not closed.
4 Clean the strainer.
5 Check that the replenisher hose and water supply hose are not clogged.

Diagnosis
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Sensitivity adjustment failure of the replenishment solution sensor ☞ 27830

Failed parts Manual No.

Replenishment solution sensor CD-A, CD-B, CD-C, BF-A, BF-B, or STB ☞ 63300
SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
Processor power supply 2
Processor power supply 3

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

45700 2/4
 45700
Error message: SM replenishment

No. 5710[SM]
Refilling water operation error. CD-W
No. 5711[SM]
Refilling water operation error. BF-W
No. 5712[SM]
Refilling water operation error. STB1-W
No. 5713[SM]
Refilling water operation error. STB2-W
No. 5714[SM]
Refilling water operation error. STB3-W
No. 5715[SM]
Refilling water operation error. STB4-W

Countermeasure message

4. Troubleshooting
Refer to the manual for corrective action.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
Error message No. Condition
No. 5710 The refilling water level detector of the CD processing solution float switch does not
turn ON even though a specified time has passed since refilling water operation started.
No. 5711 The refilling water level detector of the BF processing solution float switch does not
turn ON even though a specified time has passed since refilling water operation started.
No. 5712 The refilling water level detector of the STB1 processing solution float switch does not
turn ON even though a specified time has passed since refilling water operation started.
No. 5713 The refilling water level detector of the STB2 processing solution float switch does not
turn ON even though a specified time has passed since refilling water operation started.
No. 5714 The refilling water level detector of the STB3 processing solution float switch does not
turn ON even though a specified time has passed since refilling water operation started.
No. 5715 The refilling water level detector of the STB4 processing solution float switch does not
turn ON even though a specified time has passed since refilling water operation started.

Check Point
1 Check if the processing solution is leaking from the tank.
2 Check that the hoses from the water supply pump and refilling water pump are not clogged.
3 Check that the processing float switch moves smoothly.

Diagnosis
When water is incorrectly added Manual No.
Water Supply Pump ☞ 63300
• If the water supply pump does not operate when AC 24 V is outputted between the pins (CD-W:1-2, BF-W:3-4, STB4:5-6) on the
connectors of water supply pumps CD-W, BF-W and STB4, the pump is defective.
Refilling water pump ☞ 63300
• The refilling water pump does not operate when AC 24 V is outputted between pins 1 and 2 on the connectors of the refilling water
pump, STB1, STB2 and STB3, the pump is defective.
SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600
Processor I/O PCB ☞ 66210

45700 3/4
 45700
Error message: SM replenishment

When water is incorrectly added Manual No.

Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
Processor power supply 2

When refilling water is incorrectly detected Manual No.

Processing solution float switch ☞ 63300
• Unplug the connector of the processing solution float switch. If there is no conduction between the pins (CD:5-6, BF:5-6, STB:1-2,
STB4:5-6) on the jack side, the float switch is defective.
Processor relay PCB ☞ 66200
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

4. Troubleshooting

45700 4/4
 45900 Error message: F replenishment

Error message: F replenishment

No. 5900[F]
Replenisher cartridge open motor operation error.

Countermeasure message
Contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Suffix number Condition
0001 When the replenisher cartridge setting part is moved to the lower position for opening the replenisher cartridge,
the Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper) does not turn to LIGHT even after a specified time has
passed.
0002 When the replenisher cartridge setting part is moved to the lower position for opening the replenishment
cartridge, the Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower) does not turn to DARK even after a specified time
has passed.
0003 When the replenisher cartridge setting part is moved to lower position to open the replenishment cartridge,

4. Troubleshooting
Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower) detects the error.
Although the replenisher cartridge setting part has been moved upwards then, Replenisher Cartridge Position
Sensor (Lower) does not turn to LIGHT even after a specified time has passed.
(When restarting after operation stop such as instant-off)
0004 When the replenisher cartridge setting part is moved to the upper position after the replenishment cartridge was
failed to be opened, the Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower) does not turn to LIGHT even after a
specified time has passed.
0005 When the replenisher cartridge setting part is moved to the upper position after the replenishment cartridge was
failed to be opened, the Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper) does not turn to DARK even after a
specified time has passed.
0006 When the replenisher cartridge setting part is moved to upper position due to the failure in opening the
replenishment cartridge, Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper) detects the error.
Although the replenisher cartridge setting part has been moved downwards then, Replenisher Cartridge Position
Sensor (Upper) does not turn to LIGHT even after a specified time has passed.
(When restarting after operation stop such as instant-off)
0007 When the replenisher cartridge setting part is moved to the cap cleaning position for cleaning the cap, the
Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower) does not turn to LIGHT even after a specified time has passed.
0008 When the replenisher cartridge setting part is moved to the cap cleaning position for cleaning the cap, the
Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper) does not turn to DARK even after a specified time has passed.
0009 When the replenisher cartridge setting part is moved to the cap cleaning position to clean the cap, Replenisher
Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper) detects the error.
Although the replenisher cartridge setting part has been moved downwards then, Replenisher Cartridge Position
Sensor (Upper) does not turn to LIGHT even after a specified time has passed.
(When restarting after operation stop such as instant-off)
0010 When the replenisher cartridge setting part is moved to the lower position for draining the water after cleaning
the cap, the Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper) does not turn to LIGHT even after a specified time
has passed.
0011 When the replenisher cartridge setting part is moved to the lower position for draining the water after cleaning
the cap, the Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower) does not turn to DARK even after a specified time
has passed.
0012 When the replenisher cartridge setting part is moved to the lower position for draining the water after cleaning
the cap, Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower) detects the error.
Although the replenisher cartridge setting part has been moved upwards then, Replenisher Cartridge Position
Sensor (Lower) does not turn to LIGHT even after a specified time has passed.
(When restarting after operation stop such as instant-off)
0013 When the replenisher cartridge setting part is moved to the upper position after the replenishment cartridge is
opened or cap is cleaned, the Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower) does not turn to LIGHT even after a
specified time has passed.

45900 1/15
 45900
Error message: F replenishment

Suffix number Condition

0014 When the replenisher cartridge setting part is moved to the upper position after the replenishment cartridge is
opened or cap is cleaned, the Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper) does not turn to DARK even after a
specified time has passed.
0015 Opening or cleaning the replenisher cartridge is completed and Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper)
detects it.
Although the replenisher cartridge setting part has been moved downwards then, Replenisher Cartridge Position
Sensor (Upper) does not turn to LIGHT even after a specified time has passed.
(When restarting after operation stop such as instant-off)

For details of operation specification, see ☞ 57010.

• For suffix numbers 0001 to 0006, making approx. 507 sheets of 127 mm×89 mm print is available after the error occurs.
• Regarding the suffix numbers 0007 to 0015, print proceeds if an error message is cleared by pressing YES.

Countermeasure
1. Check whether the replenisher cartridge setting part malfunctions or not.
☞ 4600
2. Perform recovery procedure 1 from the replenishment error.

4. Troubleshooting
☞ 4610

Check Point
Check that the replenisher cartridge setting part operates normally. ☞ 35320

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper) ☞ 63280
Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower)
Replenisher Cartridge Open Motor
Interlock Switch (Replenisher Section Door)
F replenishment I/O PCB ☞ 66800
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

45900 2/15
 45900
Error message: F replenishment

No. 5901[F]
Replenishment solution level sensor error. P1R
No. 5902[F]
Replenishment solution level sensor error. P2RA
No. 5903]F]
Replenishment solution level sensor error. P2RB
No. 5904[F]
Replenishment solution level sensor error. PSR

Countermeasure message
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

4. Troubleshooting
Condition
Suffix number Condition
- When # # # (upper) replenishment solution level sensors of each processing solution are ON and when # # #
(lower) replenishment solution level sensors are OFF

Countermeasure
1. Check the status of the replenishment solution level sensors of each processing solution with Input Check.
☞ 35220

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Replenishment solution level sensor ☞ 63280
F replenishment I/O PCB ☞ 66800
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

45900 3/15
 45900
Error message: F replenishment

No. 5905[F]
P1R replenishment solution output amount/replenishment solution level management
is abnormal.
No. 5906[F]
P2RA replenishment solution output amount/replenishment solution level management
is abnormal.
No. 5907[F]
P2RA replenishment solution output amount/replenishment solution level management
is abnormal.

Countermeasure message
Contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

4. Troubleshooting
Condition
Suffix number Condition
0001 When opening process is complete, # # # (upper) replenishment solution level sensors of each processing
solution do not turn off even a specified amount of processing solution is added.
0002 When # # # (upper) replenishment solution level sensors of each processing solution turned off, the processing
solution less than the specified amount was added and # # # (lower) replenishment solution level sensors of each
processing solution also turned off.
0003 After # # # (upper) replenishment solution level sensors turned off, # # # (lower) replenishment solution level
sensors of each processing solution do not turn off even though the processing solution exceeding the specified
amount has been added.

For details of operation specification, see ☞ 57010.

• Making the equivalent to approx. 507 sheets of 127 mm×89 mm print is available after the error occurs.
• If Pump Output Amount Measurement of Pump Output Amount Setting is not performed at system installation, the above
errors may occur.
• The causes are shown below.
1. Even if each replenishment pump operates for a specified time, lower amounts of solution than the specified range is
replenished, and # # # (lower) replenishment solution level sensor of each solution is off.
2. If each replenishment pump operates for a specified time, larger amount of solution than the specified range is replenished,
and # # # (lower) replenishment solution level sensor of each solution does not turn off.

• If data (all data, or only the processor data) is initialized or ☞ No. 5538 Backup data error. Processor occurs after the processor
control PCB is replaced, suffix number 00002 of the error shown above may occur. ☞ 57020

Countermeasure
1. Check the status of the replenishment solution level sensors of each processing solution with Input Check.
☞ 35220
2. Perform recovery procedure 2 from the replenishment error.
☞ 4620

Check Point
Confirm that the hoses from each replenishment pump are not jammed. -
Check each replenishment pump output amount again. ☞ 33003

45900 4/15
 45900
Error message: F replenishment

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Replenishment solution level sensor ☞ 63280
P1R Replenisher Pump P2RA Replenisher Pump P2RB Replenisher Pump
F replenishment I/O PCB ☞ 66800
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

4. Troubleshooting

45900 5/15
 45900
Error message: F replenishment

No. 5908[F]
Failed to open the replenisher cartridge.

Countermeasure message
Contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- After it was opened and a specified time passed, # # # (lower) replenishment solution level sensor for each
processing solution does not turn on.

Suffix number Condition

0001 P1R
0002 P2RA

4. Troubleshooting
0004 P2RB

For details of operation specification, see ☞ 57010.

• Making the equivalent to approx. 507 sheets of 127 mm×89 mm print is available after the error occurs.

Countermeasure
1. Perform recovery procedure 1 from the replenishment error.
☞ 4610

Check Point
Check the status of the replenishment solution level sensors of each processing solution with Input ☞ 35220
Check.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
P1R (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor ☞ 63280
P2RA (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor
P2RB (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor
F replenishment I/O PCB ☞ 66800
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

45900 6/15
 45900
Error message: F replenishment

No. 5909[F]
Cartridge cleaning valve/Agitation solenoid valve is abnormal. P1R
No. 5910[F]
Cartridge cleaning valve cleaning valve is abnormal. P2RA
No. 5911[F]
Cartridge cleaning valve cleaning valve is abnormal. P2RB

Countermeasure message
Contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
ERROR No. Condition

4. Troubleshooting
5909 When the replenisher cartridge is cleaned, P1R cartridge flushing valve and P1R agitation solenoid valve are
opened and the auto cleaning pump is turned on for a specified time. However, P1R (Upper) Replenishment
Solution Level Sensor does not turn on.
5910 When the replenisher cartridge is cleaned, P2RA cartridge flushing valve is opened and the auto cleaning pump
is turned on for a specified time. However, P2RA (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor does not turn
on.
5911 When the replenisher cartridge is cleaned, P2RB cartridge flushing valve is opened and the auto cleaning pump is
turned on for a specified time. However, P2RB (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor does not turn on.

For details of operation specification, see ☞ 57010.

• Making the equivalent to approx. 507 sheets of 127 mm×89 mm print is available after the error occurs.
• If Initial Replenisher Operation (Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump)→Create Replenishment Solution (Manual
Open)→Initial Replenisher Operation (Replenisher Pump) in Processor Set Up Mode are not performed in order at system
installation, the above errors may occur.
• The causes are shown below.
• If normal opening operation is performed at system installation, replenishment solution is created with the replenishment
tank empty. Then, the replenishment solution does not reach the position where P2RA (Upper) Replenishment Solution
Level Sensor and P2RB (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor turn on, and the above errors occur.
• If opening operation is performed in the Processor Set Up Mode at system installation, the above errors do not occur even
if P2RA (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor and P2RB (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor are off.

Countermeasure
1. Perform recovery procedure 1 from the replenishment error.
☞ 4610

Check Point
Check the hoses for bends (Hoses connected to each of the cartridge cleaning valves and the auto cleaning pump).
Check the output amounts of auto cleaning pump + each automated cleaning valve again. ☞ 33004
Check the status of the replenishment solution level sensors of each processing solution with Input Check. ☞ 35220
Confirm by Output Check that each cartridge valve and the auto cleaning pump work. ☞ 35320
• P1R Cartridge Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump
• P2RA Cartridge Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump
• P2RB Cartridge Cleaning Valve + Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump
• P1R agitation solenoid valve + Replenisher Cartridge Cleaning Pump

45900 7/15
 45900
Error message: F replenishment

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
P1R (Upper) Replenishment P2RA (Upper) Replenishment P2RB (Upper) Replenishment ☞ 63280
Solution Level Sensor Solution Level Sensor Solution Level Sensor
Auto cleaning pump Automated cleaning valve
F replenishment I/O PCB ☞ 66800
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

4. Troubleshooting

45900 8/15
 45900
Error message: F replenishment

No. 5912[F]
Predetermined process amount was exceeded.

Countermeasure message
Contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
Condition
When an error in the following error list occurred and printed before the error was cleared, the integrated value of P1R replenishment
amount has exceeded the specified amount (approx. 507 sheets for 127 mm x 89 mm size).

Error list
• ☞ No. 902 [F] • Install the replenisher cartridge.
• ☞ No. 905 [F] • Install the new replenisher cartridge.

4. Troubleshooting
• ☞ No. 5900[F] • Replenisher cartridge open motor operation error.
• ☞ No. 5905[F] • P1R replenishment solution output amount/replenishment solution level management is abnormal.
• ☞ No. 5906[F] • P2RA replenishment solution output amount/replenishment solution level management is abnormal.
• ☞ No. 5907[F] • P2RA replenishment solution output amount/replenishment solution level management is abnormal.
• ☞ No. 5908[F] • Failed to open the replenisher cartridge.
• ☞ No. 5909[F] • Cartridge cleaning valve/Agitation solenoid valve is abnormal. P1R
• ☞ No. 5910[F] • Cartridge cleaning valve cleaning valve is abnormal. P2RA
• ☞ No. 5911[F] • Cartridge cleaning valve cleaning valve is abnormal. P2RB
• ☞ No. 5913[F] • An error occurred in the replenisher section.

• Even if an error is cleared, it reoccurs until the replenisher cartridge is opened (replenishment solution is created).

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Take the corrective action in the error list. -

45900 9/15
 45900
Error message: F replenishment

No. 5913[F]
An error occurred in the replenisher section.

Countermeasure message
Contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
Condition
When an error in the following error list occurred, the system was restarted or started before the error was cleared.

Error list
• ☞ No. 5900[F] • Replenisher cartridge open motor operation error.
• ☞ No. 5905[F] • P1R replenishment solution output amount/replenishment solution level management is abnormal.
☞ No. 5906[F]

4. Troubleshooting
• • P2RA replenishment solution output amount/replenishment solution level management is abnormal.
• ☞ No. 5907[F] • P2RA replenishment solution output amount/replenishment solution level management is abnormal.
• ☞ No. 5908[F] • Failed to open the replenisher cartridge.
• ☞ No. 5909[F] • Cartridge cleaning valve/Agitation solenoid valve is abnormal. P1R
• ☞ No. 5910[F] • Cartridge cleaning valve cleaning valve is abnormal. P2RA
• ☞ No. 5911[F] • Cartridge cleaning valve cleaning valve is abnormal. P2RB
• ☞ No. 5913[F] • An error occurred in the replenisher section.

• Making the equivalent to approx. 507 sheets of 127 mm×89 mm print is available after the error occurs.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Take the corrective action in the error list. -

45900 10/15
 45900
Error message: F replenishment

No. 5914[F]
Temperature and humidity sensor error.

Countermeasure message
Restart the system. If this error recurs, contact your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
ERROR No. Condition
0001 The measured environmental temperature is not within the range between −10°C and +60°C.
0002 The measured environmental humidity is not within the range between 0 % and 100 %.

• An error occurs when Automatic is selected at Operator Selections → Processor → Humidity.

• If errors occur frequently, water is not refilled when evaporated.
In such cases, select one of the Standard , Low or High, except Automatic, in Operator Selections → Processor → Humidity.

4. Troubleshooting
Then, water is refilled and the system can be used again.

Check Point
Check the status of the temperature and humidity sensor via Input Check. ☞ 35220
Check that there is no dust on the temperature and humidity sensor. ☞ 63280
Check that there is no connection failure in the wiring between the temperature and humidity sensor and -
processor control PCB.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Temperature and humidity sensor ☞ 63280
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

45900 11/15
 45900
Error message: F replenishment

No. 5916[F]
Solution level of the processing tank goes below the processable level. P1
No. 5917[F]
Solution level of the processing tank goes below the processable level. P2
No. 5918[F]
Solution level of the processing tank goes below the processable level. PS1
No. 5919[F]
Solution level of the processing tank goes below the processable level. PS2
No. 5920[F]
Solution level of the processing tank goes below the processable level. PS3
No. 5921[F]
Solution level of the processing tank goes below the processable level. PS4

Countermeasure message

4. Troubleshooting
Contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- • # # #When the processable level decreases and addition of specific amount water is carried, # # #the
processable level detector keeps off.
• When the product starts up with program timer and filling up the moisture which evaporated is carried out,
# # # the processable level detector keeps off.

• If Pump Output Amount Measurement of Pump Output Amount Setting and Measure Auto Cleaning Water Output
Amount of Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount Setting are not performed at system installation, the above errors may occur.
• The causes are shown below.
1. Even if specified amount of water is supplied, # # # processable level does not turn on.
2. Even if each replenishment pump operates for a specified time, specified amount of solution is not replenished.

NOTE
• If the processing solution level detector of the processing solution float switch turns off, all the processing solution heaters and
circulation pumps turn off.

Countermeasure
1. Perform ☞ Taking countermeasures after the error No.5916 to No.5921 occurs.
☞ 4630

Check Point
Check if the processing solution is leaking from the tank. -
Check if the float of the processing solution float switch moves up and down smoothly. -
Check the status of the float switches of each processing solution via Input Check. ☞ 35220
Check each replenishment pump output amount again. ☞ 33003
Check the output amounts of auto cleaning pump + each automated cleaning valve again. ☞ 33004
Select Operator Selections→Processor, and change the Evaporation Correction setting from OFF to -
ON.*1

*1. If Evaporation Correction is set to OFF, water is not replenished automatically although # # # processable level decreases.

45900 12/15
 45900
Error message: F replenishment

Diagnosis
When the level is incorrectly detected Manual No.
Processing solution float switch ☞ 63280
Processor relay PCB ☞ 66220
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Processor I/O PCB ☞ 66210
Processor power supply 2 ☞ 67400

When the solution is insufficiently added Manual No.

Replenisher pump ☞ 63280
P1, P2 and PS automated cleaning valve
Replenisher cartridge cleaning pump
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

4. Troubleshooting

45900 13/15
 45900
Error message: F replenishment

No. 5922[F]
Replenisher section door is open.

Countermeasure message
Refer to the manual for corrective action.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
Condition
When the replenisher section door is opened while the replenisher cartridge is open (replenishment solution is being created).

Suffix number Condition

0001 When the replenisher section door is opened before the cap is cleaned.
0002 When the replenisher section door is opened while the cap is being cleaned.

4. Troubleshooting
• For suffix number 0001, making approx. 507 sheets of 127 mm×89 mm print is available after the error occurs.
• For the suffix number 0002, print proceeds if an error message is cleared by pressing YES.

Countermeasures for the suffix number 0001

1. Close the replenisher section door.
2. Perform recovery procedure 2 from the replenishment error.
☞ 4620

Check Point
Check if the replenisher section door is closed securely. -
Check the Interlock Switch (Replenisher Section Door) status via Input Check. ☞ 35220

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Interlock Switch (Replenisher Section Door) ☞ 63280
F replenishment I/O PCB ☞ 66800
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

45900 14/15
 45900
Error message: F replenishment

No. 5923[F]
Solution remains in the replenishment tank.

Countermeasure message
Drain the replenishment solution from the tank.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
Condition
• The causes are shown below.
1. The replenishment solution cannot be detected by P1R (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor/P2RA (Lower)
Replenishment Solution Level Sensor/P2RB (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor, because the amount of the
replenishment solution decreases.
2. Mixing replenisher is in standby status when starting the mixing replenisher automatically, because the Interlock Switch
(Replenisher Section Door) is opened.

4. Troubleshooting
3. When # # # (lower) replenishment solution level sensor detects the replenishment solution while the mixing replenisher is in
standby status.

Suffix number Condition

0001 P1R
0002 P2RA
0004 P2RB

For details of operation specification, see ☞ 57010.

NOTE
• When the Manual Open and Create Replenishment Solution (Manual Open) buttons are clicked and the (lower) replenishment
solution level sensors of P1R, P2RA or P2RB is on, the following attention message is displayed.
☞ No. 913 [F] Manual opening cannot be started.
The above-mentioned error can be canceled when one of the following conditions are fulfilled.
• Manual Open and Create Replenishment Solution (Manual Open) are performed without solution in each replenishment tank.
• All the (lower) and (upper) replenishment solution level sensors of each replenishment tank are on.

Countermeasure
1. Drain replenishment solution completely from the replenishment tanks of P1R, P2RA and P2RB. ☞ 27550
2. Perform Manual Open with each replenishment tank empty.☞ 33003

Check Point
Check the status of # # # (lower) replenishment solution level sensors of each processing solution with ☞ 35220
Input Check.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
P1R (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor ☞ 63280
P2RA (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor
P2RB (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor
F replenishment I/O PCB ☞ 66800
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

45900 15/15
 46000 Error message: Printer 1

Error message: Printer 1

No. 6012
Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A
No. 6013
Paper did not load. Paper Magazine B

Countermeasure message
Refer to the manual for corrective action.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
Error message No. Condition
No. 6012 Paper cannot be loaded from paper magazine A.
No. 6013 Paper cannot be loaded from paper magazine B.

4. Troubleshooting
Suffix number Condition
0001 Even when a specified length of paper is advanced after the paper loading has started, paper end sensors A and B
do not turn DARK.
0002 Even when a specified length of paper is advanced after the paper end sensors A and B have turned dark, the
loading sensor does not turn DARK.
0003 Even though specified length of paper is rewound when the magazine initial operation is carried out during the
paper loading, paper end sensors A and/or B do not turn LIGHT.

NOTE
• When the triple magazine unit is installed, the paper magazine A is displayed.
• For details about magazine initial operation, see 55100 ☞ Performs magazine initial operation.

Check Point
1 Check that the paper is correctly inserted into the paper magazine.
2 Clean the advance roller.

Diagnosis
Blown fuses Manual No.
F35 Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 66020

Advance failure Manual No.

Paper magazine motor A or B ☞ 63051
Paper supply motor A, B or C ☞ 63060
Printer I/O PCB 2 ☞ 66030
Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 66020
Triple magazine PCB ☞ 66050
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Printer power supply 2 ☞ 66100

Detection failure (paper end sensor) Manual No.

Paper end sensor A or B ☞ 63051
Printer I/O PCB 3 ☞ 66040
Triple magazine PCB ☞ 66050
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Multi power supply ☞ 66100

46000 1/24
 46000
Error message: Printer 1

Detection failure (paper loading sensor) Manual No.

Paper loading sensor ☞ 66030
Printer I/O PCB 2 ☞ 66030
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Multi power supply ☞ 66100

‹ Symptoms due to connection failure of wiring/symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse

Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure Symptoms of fuse blowout
☞ 4202 ☞ 4252

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

4. Troubleshooting

46000 2/24
 46000
Error message: Printer 1

No. 6014
Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine A
No. 6015
Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine B

Countermeasure message
Remove the paper. For details, refer to the manual.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
Error message No. Condition
No. 6014 Paper cannot be rewound into paper magazine A.
No. 6015 Paper cannot be rewound into paper magazine B.

4. Troubleshooting
Suffix number Condition
0001 Even when a specified length of paper is rewound after the paper rewinding has started, the paper loading sensor
does not turn light.
0002 Even when a specified length of paper is rewound after the paper loading sensor has turned light, paper end
sensors A and B do not turn LIGHT.

NOTE
• When the triple magazine unit is installed, the paper magazine A is displayed.

Check Point
1 Check that the paper is correctly inserted into the paper magazine.
2 Clean the advance roller.
3 Check that the paper loading sensor and the paper end sensor are not soiled.

Diagnosis
Blown fuses Manual No.
F35 Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 66020

Advance failure Manual No.

Paper magazine motor A or B ☞ 63051
Paper supply motor A, B or C ☞ 63060
Printer I/O PCB 2 ☞ 66030
Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 66020
Triple magazine PCB ☞ 66050
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Printer power supply 2 ☞ 66100

Detection failure (paper end sensor) Manual No.

Paper end sensor A or B ☞ 63051
Printer I/O PCB 3 ☞ 66040
Triple magazine PCB ☞ 66050
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Multi power supply ☞ 66100

46000 3/24
 46000
Error message: Printer 1

Detection failure (paper loading sensor) Manual No.

Paper loading sensor ☞ 66030
Printer I/O PCB 2 ☞ 66030
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Multi power supply ☞ 66100
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

4. Troubleshooting

46000 4/24
 46000
Error message: Printer 1

No. 6016
Paper Cutter operation error.

Countermeasure message
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Suffix number Condition
0001 The cut home sensor does not detect LIGHT even though a specified time has passed after the cut operation
started.
0002 The cut end sensor does not turn DARK even though a specified time has passed after the cut operation started
and the cut home sensor turned light.
0003 Even when a specified time has passed after the cut operation was completed, the cut end sensor does not turn
LIGHT.

4. Troubleshooting
0004 Even when a specified time has passed after the cut operation was completed and the cut end sensor turned
LIGHT, the cut home sensor does not turn DARK.
0005 The cut home sensor and cut end sensor are DARK in the initial operation.

IMPORTANT
• If the paper supply unit is not set correctly, this error may occur.

NOTE
• The cutter blade may be locked or seized.

Check Point
1 Confirm that the paper supply unit is installed correctly.

Diagnosis
Blown fuses Manual No.
F32 Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 66020

Operation failure Manual No.

Cutter unit ☞ 25620
Cut motor ☞ 63060
• If the cut motor does not operate when DC 24 V is outputted between pins 1 and 2 on the connector of each cut motor, the cut motor
is defective.
Printer I/O PCB 2 ☞ 66030
Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 66020
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Printer power supply 1 ☞ 66100
Multi power supply

Detection failure Manual No.

Cut home sensor ☞ 63060
Cut end sensor
Printer I/O PCB 2 ☞ 66030
Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 66020
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Multi power supply ☞ 66100

46000 5/24
 46000
Error message: Printer 1

‹ Symptoms due to connection failure of wiring/symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse

Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure Symptoms of fuse blowout
☞ 4202 −

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

4. Troubleshooting

46000 6/24
 46000
Error message: Printer 1

No. 6017
Paper has jammed in the printer section.

Countermeasure message
Remove the paper. For details, refer to the manual.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
Suffix number Condition
0001 The exposure start sensor does not turn DARK even though the paper was fed to the exposure standby position.
0002 The exposure start sensor does not turn LIGHT even though the paper was exposed and fed for a specified time.
0003 The paper sensor 1 does not turn DARK even though the paper was fed to the paper advance unit 1.
0004 The paper sensor 1 does not turn LIGHT even though the paper was fed from the paper advance unit 1.
0005 The paper sensor 2 (left) does not turn DARK even though the paper was fed to the processor loading unit.

4. Troubleshooting
0006 The paper sensor 2 (left) does not turn LIGHT even though the paper was fed from the processor loading unit.
0007 The paper sensor 2 (center) does not turn DARK even though the paper was fed to the processor loading unit.
0008 The paper sensor 2 (center) does not turn LIGHT even though the paper was fed from the processor loading unit.
0009 The paper sensor 2 (right) does not turn DARK even though the paper was fed to the processor loading unit.
0010 The paper sensor 2 (right) does not turn LIGHT even though the paper was fed from the processor loading unit.

Check Point
1 Confirm that each sensor is not dirty.
2 Check if the pressure guide is in position.
3 Carry out Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment in Functions of Paper Sensor Adjustment.

IMPORTANT
• When the error of the suffix number 0005, 0007 or 0009 of message Paper has jammed in the printer section. occurs,
check that the rollers of the paper advance unit 2 and the processor loading unit are not soiled.
Paper advance unit 2 Processor loading unit

Rollers

Rollers

46000 7/24
 46000
Error message: Printer 1

• When the suffix numbers from 0005 to 0010 of message Paper has jammed in the printer section. occurs, check that
the spring 2 of paper advance unit 1 is not broken.
Paper advance unit 1

Spring 2

4. Troubleshooting
G078460

Diagnosis
Blown fuses Manual No.
F33 Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 66020
F38 Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 66040

Operation failure Manual No.

Exposure advance motor 1 ☞ 63070
Exposure advance motor 2
Paper advance motor 2 ☞ 63090
Paper advance motor 3 ☞ 63100
Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 66020
Printer I/O PCB 2 ☞ 66030
Printer I/O PCB 3 ☞ 66040
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Printer power supply 1 ☞ 66100
Multi power supply

Detection failure Manual No.

Exposure start sensor ☞ 63070
Paper sensor 1 ☞ 63090
Paper sensor 2 (left, center or right) ☞ 63110
Printer I/O PCB 3 ☞ 66040
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Multi power supply ☞ 66100

46000 8/24
 46000
Error message: Printer 1

‹ Symptoms due to connection failure of wiring/symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse

Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure Symptoms of fuse blowout
☞ 4202 −

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

4. Troubleshooting

46000 9/24
 46000
Error message: Printer 1

No. 6021
Paper remains in the printer section.

Countermeasure message
Remove the paper. For details, refer to the manual.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
Suffix number Condition
0001 Paper end sensor A turns DARK after the error message No. 6017: Paper has jammed in the printer section.
was released.
0002 Paper end sensor B turns DARK after the error message No. 6017: Paper has jammed in the printer section.
was released.
0003 Paper end sensor C turns DARK after the error message No. 6017: Paper has jammed in the printer section.
was released.

4. Troubleshooting
0004 The loading sensor turns DARK after the error message No. 6017: Paper has jammed in the printer section.
was released.
0005 The exposure start sensor turns DARK after the error message No. 6017: Paper has jammed in the printer
section. was released.
0006 The paper sensor 1 turns DARK after the error message No. 6017: Paper has jammed in the printer section.
was released.
0007 The paper sensor 2 (left) turns DARK after the error message No. 6017: Paper has jammed in the printer
section. was released.
0008 The paper sensor 2 (center) turns DARK after the error message No. 6017: Paper has jammed in the printer
section. was released.
0009 The paper sensor 2 (right) turns DARK after the error message No. 6017: Paper has jammed in the printer
section. was released.
0010 Paper end sensor A2 turns DARK after the error message No. 6017: Paper has jammed in the printer section.
was released.

Check Point
1 Confirm that each sensor is not dirty.
2 Check if the pressure guide is in position.
3 Carry out Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment in Functions of Paper Sensor Adjustment.

Diagnosis
Blown fuses Manual No.
F33 Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 66020

Detection failure Manual No.

Paper end sensor A, B or C ☞ 63051
Loading sensor ☞ 63060
Exposure start sensor ☞ 63070
Paper sensor 1 ☞ 63090
Paper sensor 2 (left, center or right) ☞ 63110
Printer I/O PCB 2 ☞ 66030
Printer I/O PCB 3 ☞ 66040
Triple magazine PCB ☞ 66050
Quad magazine PCB ☞ 66055
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000

46000 10/24
 46000
Error message: Printer 1

Detection failure Manual No.

Multi power supply ☞ 66100
‹ Symptoms due to connection failure of wiring/symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse
Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure Symptoms of fuse blowout
☞ 4202 −

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

4. Troubleshooting

46000 11/24
 46000
Error message: Printer 1

No. 6049
Pressure Guide operation error.

Countermeasure message
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- The home position is not detected even though the pressure guide motor operated for a specified time.

Check Point
1 Check that the pressure guide sensor is not soiled.

4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
Blown fuses Manual No.
F33 Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 66020

Operation failure Manual No.

Pressure guide motor ☞ 63090
Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 66020
Printer I/O PCB 3 ☞ 66040
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Printer power supply 1 ☞ 66100
Multi power supply

Detection failure Manual No.

Pressure guide sensor ☞ 63090
Printer I/O PCB 3 ☞ 66040
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Multi power supply ☞ 66100
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

46000 12/24
 46000
Error message: Printer 1

No. 6054
The Initial Setup was not executed.

Countermeasure message
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- An attempt is made to carry out printing without initial setup.

NOTE
• Check the points and follow the diagnosis mentioned below even though the initial setup has been finished.

Check Point

4. Troubleshooting
1 Allow the computer to read the backup data.

Diagnosis
Failure Manual No.
Carry out initial setup. -

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

46000 13/24
 46000
Error message: Printer 1

No. 6056
Printer system error.

Countermeasure message
Contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
Suffix number Condition
0001 When the RAM or the like on the printer control PCB is checked during start-up, they are abnormal.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000

4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

46000 14/24
 46000
Error message: Printer 1

No. 6069
The printer top cover is open.

Countermeasure message
Remove any paper that remains then close the door.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES
• This attention message will be automatically closed when the printer door is closed.

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- Interlock switch 1 (printer top cover) turns off.

NOTE
• Some electrical parts stop operations when the interlock switch (printer top cover) turns off.

4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
1 Check that the printer top cover is securely closed.

Diagnosis
Blown fuses Manual No.
F3 Laser I/O PCB ☞ 66060

Adjustment failure point Manual No.

Adjustment failure in the attaching position of the interlock switch (printer top cover) -

Failed parts Manual No.

Interlock switch (printer top cover) ☞ 63050
Laser I/O PCB ☞ 66060
Laser control PCB ☞ 66010
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

46000 15/24
 46000
Error message: Printer 1

No. 6073
Synchronous Sensor error.

Countermeasure message
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Suffix number Condition
0001 The R laser synchronous signal does not enter within the specified period to the synchronous sensor PCB.

Diagnosis

IMPORTANT
• Because only the synchronous signal of R laser is observed, this error message does not occur even if the synchronous

4. Troubleshooting
sensor of G/B laser has problem.
• Click Output Check→Printer→Engine Section→R Laser Output ON to confirm R laser synchronous condition.
G/B laser synchronous condition can be also confirmed by clicking G Laser Output ON or B Laser Output ON.
Each laser is normal in condition below.
☞ 35310
LP-1700 LP-2300
Laser Synchronous Sensor Synchronous Synchronous
Polygon Mirror Frequency 1380±7 1720±7

Adjustment failure point Manual No.

Adjustment failure in the attaching position of the interlock switch (printer top cover) -

Blown fuses Manual No.

F1 Laser I/O PCB ☞ 66060

Failed parts Manual No.

Laser control PCB ☞ 66010
Laser I/O PCB ☞ 66060
R-AOM driver ☞ 66080
Multi power supply ☞ 66100
Laser power supply
Laser unit ☞ 63080

IMPORTANT
• Replacement and adjustment of the parts in the laser unit are impossible.
Replace the unit.

‹ Symptoms due to connection failure of wiring/symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse

Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure Symptoms of fuse blowout
☞ 4202 ☞ 4252

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

46000 16/24
 46000
Error message: Printer 1

No. 6074
B Laser control error.
No. 6075
G Laser control error.

Countermeasure message
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
Stop Alarm
Error message release
Error Clear

Condition
Suffix number Condition
From 0006 to 0011 A communication or control error occurred between the laser control PCB and the laser unit.

IMPORTANT

4. Troubleshooting
• In the laser unit type B, this error message will not be displayed.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Laser control PCB ☞ 66010
Laser I/O PCB ☞ 66060
B laser driver ☞ 66070
G laser driver
B-AOM driver ☞ 66080
G-AOM driver
Multi power supply ☞ 66100
Laser power supply
Laser unit ☞ 63080

IMPORTANT
• Replacement and adjustment of the parts in the laser unit are impossible.
Replace the unit.

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

46000 17/24
 46000
Error message: Printer 1

No. 6076
Polygon Mirror control error.

Countermeasure message
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Suffix number Condition
0001 The polygon mirror does not rotate properly.
0002 Any of R/G/B Laser turns to asynchronous 7 times or more per 1 second while the system is printing or
initializing after the power supply is turned on.

NOTE
• The processable range of polygon mirror frequency is from 1373 Hz to 1387 Hz.

4. Troubleshooting
Countermeasure
1. The status of Engine Section is normal if Polygon Mirror Synchronous and Polygon Mirror Frequency is the following value
when performing the Output Check for Engine Section.

Display Status
Polygon Mirror Synchronous Synchronous

2. Carry out G Laser Output ON, B Laser Output ON and R Laser Output ON in Output Check and confirm in each case if the
value of Polygon Mirror Frequency is the following value.

Display Status
Polygon Mirror Frequency 1380±7

3. Carry out the following diagnostics.

Diagnosis
Blown fuses Manual No.
F2 Laser I/O PCB ☞ 66060

Failed parts Manual No.

Laser control PCB ☞ 66010
Laser I/O PCB ☞ 66060
Multi power supply ☞ 66100
Laser power supply
AOM driver (In case of suffix number 0002) ☞ 66080
Laser unit ☞ 63080

IMPORTANT
• Replacement and adjustment of the parts in the laser unit are impossible.
Replace the unit.

‹ Symptoms due to connection failure of wiring/symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse

Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure Symptoms of fuse blowout
☞ 4202 ☞ 4252

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

46000 18/24
 46000
Error message: Printer 1

No. 6077
Interlock error.

Countermeasure message
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Suffix number Condition
0001 Unused
0002 When the printer control PCB had detected the interlock, the laser control PCB had not detected the interlock.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.

4. Troubleshooting
Laser control PCB ☞ 66010
Laser I/O PCB ☞ 66060
Multi power supply ☞ 66100
Laser power supply

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

46000 19/24
 46000
Error message: Printer 1

No. 6081
Backup data error. Printer

Countermeasure message
Load backup data from the floppy disk. For details, refer to the manual.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Suffix number Condition
0### The backup data of the printer control PCB is abnormal.
1### The backup data of the system HDD and the printer control PCB are abnormal.

NOTE
• The value informed from CPU is displayed in the last three digits of the suffix number.
• If about 5 days has passed with the power supply off or if the printer control PCB is replaced with a new one, this error message will

4. Troubleshooting
be shown.

Diagnosis
If the data was deleted Manual No.
Carry out Reading data. ☞ 35400

Failed parts Manual No.

Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

46000 20/24
 46000
Error message: Printer 1

No. 6082
Setup error.

Countermeasure message
Refer to the manual for corrective action.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
Suffix Condition
number
0001 The center correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the system exposure light intensity setup in the initial
setup. (R)
0002 The center correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the system exposure light intensity setup in the initial
setup. (G)
0003 The center correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the system exposure light intensity setup in the initial

4. Troubleshooting
setup. (B)
0004 The center correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the gamma setup in the initial setup. (R)
0005 The center correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the gamma setup in the initial setup. (G)
0006 The center correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the gamma setup in the initial setup. (B)
0007 The tone correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the gamma setup in the initial setup. (R)
0008 The tone correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the gamma setup in the initial setup. (G)
0009 The tone correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the gamma setup in the initial setup. (B)
0010 The AOM bias characteristic updating of initial setup is out of allowable range. (R)
0011 The AOM bias characteristic updating of initial setup is out of allowable range. (G)
0012 The AOM bias characteristic updating of initial setup is out of allowable range. (B)
0101 The center correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the system exposure light intensity setup in the paper
specification registration setup. (R)
0102 The center correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the system exposure light intensity setup in the paper
specification registration setup. (G)
0103 The center correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the system exposure light intensity setup in the paper
specification registration setup. (B)
0104 The center correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the gamma setup in the paper specification registration
setup. (R)
0105 The center correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the gamma setup in the paper specification registration
setup. (G)
0106 The center correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the gamma setup in the paper specification registration
setup. (B)
0107 The tone correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the gamma setup in the paper specification registration
setup. (R)
0108 The tone correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the gamma setup in the paper specification registration
setup. (G)
0109 The tone correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the gamma setup in the paper specification registration
setup. (B)
0201 The center correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the daily setup. (R)
0202 The center correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the daily setup. (G)
0203 The center correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the daily setup. (B)
0204 The tone correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the daily setup. (R)
0205 The tone correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the daily setup. (G)
0206 The tone correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the daily setup. (B)
0301 The center correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the paper magazine registration setup. (R)
0302 The center correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the paper magazine registration setup. (G)

46000 21/24
 46000
Error message: Printer 1

Suffix Condition
number
0303 The center correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the paper magazine registration setup. (B)
0304 The tone correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the paper magazine registration setup. (R)
0305 The tone correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the paper magazine registration setup. (G)
0306 The tone correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the paper magazine registration setup. (B)
0401 The center correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the emulsion number change. (R)
0402 The center correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the emulsion number change. (G)
0403 The center correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the emulsion number change. (B)
0404 The tone correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the emulsion number change. (R)
0405 The tone correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the emulsion number change. (G)
0406 The tone correction is out of allowable range when carrying out the emulsion number change. (B)
0501 The AOM bias setting value is out of allowable range when carrying out each setup. (R)
0502 The AOM bias setting value is out of allowable range when carrying out each setup. (G)
0503 The AOM bias setting value is out of allowable range when carrying out each setup. (B)
0504 The Dmax setting value is out of allowable range when carrying out each setup. (R)
0505 The Dmax setting value is out of allowable range when carrying out each setup. (G)

4. Troubleshooting
0506 The Dmax setting value is out of allowable range when carrying out each setup. (B)
0507 The target density setting value is out of allowable range when carrying out each setup. (R)
0508 The target density setting value is out of allowable range when carrying out each setup. (G)
0509 The target density setting value is out of allowable range when carrying out each setup. (B)

Check Point
1 Calibrate the colorimeter.
2 Check that the calibration plate is not soiled.

Diagnosis
Adjustment failure Manual No.
Adjust the colorimeter unit. ☞ 35100

Colorimeter failure Manual No.

Colorimeter unit failure ☞ 21110
Calibration plate failure

Failed parts Manual No.

Laser control PCB ☞ 66010
Laser I/O PCB ☞ 66060
B laser driver ☞ 66070
G laser driver
B-AOM driver ☞ 66080
G-AOM driver
R-AOM driver
Multi power supply ☞ 66100
Laser power supply
Laser unit ☞ 63080

IMPORTANT
• Replacement and adjustment of the parts in the laser unit are impossible.
Replace the unit.

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

46000 22/24
 46000
Error message: Printer 1

No. 6087
Laser Control PCB system error.

Countermeasure message
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
Condition
An error occurs on the laser control PCB.

Suffix number Condition

0001 RAM at data output side mounted on the laser control PCB is abnormal.(at power input and during initial
operation)
0002 SD-RAM mounted on the laser control PCB is abnormal.

4. Troubleshooting
0003 (32)
The image data that is sent to the laser control PCB from the PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB via LVDS does not
agree with the image data that is sent by ARCNET communication.
(32SD)
The image data that is sent to the laser control PCB from the PC-laser-interface PCB via LVDS does not agree
with the image data that is sent by ARCNET communication.
0004 Pixel value of the main scanning direction of the image data is small or large.
0005 RAM at data output side mounted on the laser control PCB is abnormal.(while printing)
0006 Exposure does not complete even though a specified time has elapsed after starting the exposure.
0007 Pixel value of the main scanning direction of the image data is small or large.
0008 Lookup table data and shading table sent from the main PC cannot be transferred to the laser control PCB
successfully.
Communication between the main PC and laser control PCB via ARCNET line ended abnormally at turning on
the power supply.
• LUT data from the main PC is identified as abnormal.
• Shading data from the main PC is identified as abnormal.
0009 Received LUT magazine code and exposure-specified magazine code do not match at starting the printing
operation.
0010 No exposure-specified magazine code from the main PC exists.
0011 No instruction of the laser output from the main PC exists.
0019 There are two mode of communication of main PC→laser and main PC→printer→laser.
During the exposure, these two communications have the same negative No. and frame No.
This message occurs when differences between these negative No. and frame No. are detected.
0022 Cable connection error between the printer control PCB and laser control PCB occurs.

Diagnosis
The countermeasure action and the failed part would differ depending on the suffix number (bit).

Suffix number (bit) Countermeasure

0001 Laser control PCB may be defective.
0002 ☞ 66010
0005
0006

46000 23/24
 46000
Error message: Printer 1

Suffix number (bit) Countermeasure

0003 (32)
Confirm the connection of the cable between PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB and laser control PCB. (LVDS)
• Failure in the laser control PCB
☞ 66010
• Failure in the PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB
PC Service Manual
(32SD)
Confirm the connection of the cable between PC-laser-interface PCB and laser control PCB. (LVDS)
• Failure in the laser control PCB
☞ 66010
• Failure in the PC-laser interface PCB
PC Service Manual
This error may occur when the ARCNET communication status is abnormal.
• For the diagnosis of ARCNET communication, refer to the ARCNET Communication Diagnosis Manual.
0004 It does not occur normally.
0007
0008 This error may occur when the ARCNET communication status is abnormal.

4. Troubleshooting
0009 • Check the ARCNET communication status on the Version Check display.
0010 ☞ 37530
0011
• Check the ARCNET communication path.
0019
☞ 50520
• For the diagnosis of ARCNET communication, refer to the ARCNET Communication Diagnosis Manual.
0022 Confirm the wire connection between the printer control PCB (J/P212) ↔ and the laser control PCB (J/P1520).
• Failure in the laser control PCB
☞ 66010
• Failure in the printer control PCB
☞ 66000
‹ Symptoms due to connection failure of wiring/symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse
Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure Symptoms of fuse blowout
☞ 4201 −
☞ 4202 −

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

46000 24/24
 46100 Error message: Printer 2

Error message: Printer 2

No. 6101
Paper Hold Motor operation error.

Countermeasure message
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Suffix number Condition
0001 The paper hold sensor does not turn DARK from LIGHT even though a specified time has elapsed after starting
the paper hold motor operation.
0002 The paper hold sensor does not turn LIGHT from DARK even though a specified time has elapsed after starting
the paper hold motor operation.

IMPORTANT

4. Troubleshooting
• If the paper supply unit is not set correctly, this error may occur.

Check Point
1 Confirm that the paper supply unit is installed correctly.

Diagnosis
Blown fuses Manual No.
F32 Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 66020

Detection failure Manual No.

Paper hold sensor ☞ 63060
Printer I/O PCB 2 ☞ 66030
Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 66020
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Multi power supply ☞ 66100

Operation failure Manual No.

Paper hold motor ☞ 63060
Printer I/O PCB 2 ☞ 66030
Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 66020
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Multi power supply ☞ 66100
Printer power supply 1

‹ Symptoms result from disconnection of connector

Failed parts
☞ 4202

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

46100 1/33
 46100
Error message: Printer 2

No. 6104
Printer Door is open.

Countermeasure message
Remove any paper that remains then close Printer Doors 1 and 2.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
Suffix number Condition
0001 While prints are being made, the interlock switch (printer door 1, 2 or 4) turns off.
0002 While prints are being made, the printer door 3 sensor turns off.

NOTE
• Some electrical parts stop operations when the interlock switch (printer door 1, 2 or 4) or printer door 3 sensor turns off.

4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
1 Check that printer doors 1, 2, 3, and 4 are securely closed.

Diagnosis
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Adjustment failure of attaching position of the interlock switch (printer door 1, 2, 4) -
Adjustment failure in the attaching position of the printer door 3 sensor -

Failed parts Manual No.

Interlock switch (printer door 1, 2, 4) ☞ 63050
• Unplug the connector of the interlock switches (printer door 1, 2 and 4). If there is no conduction between pins 1 and 3 on the plug
side when you place a magnet close to the interlock switches (printer door 1, 2 and 4), the interlock switches are defective.
Printer door 3 sensor ☞ 63050
• Unplug the connector of the printer door 3 sensor. If there is no conduction between pins 1 and 3 on the plug side when you place a
magnet close to the printer door 3 sensor, the sensor is defective.
Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 66020
Triple magazine PCB ☞ 66050
Quad magazine PCB ☞ 66055
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Multi power supply ☞ 66100
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

46100 2/33
 46100
Error message: Printer 2

No. 6105
B Laser light source status error.
No. 6106
G Laser light source status error.

Countermeasure message
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Error message No. Condition
6105 An error occurs in the light source state of B laser.
6106 An error occurs in the light source state of G laser.

4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
• This error lets you know that the B/G laser head in the laser unit has deteriorated.
• If either of the errors above occur, past experience has shown that there is a high probability that the laser unit is the cause.
If the error occurs every day although it used to occur at a few days intervals at first and comes to occur with more increased frequency
so that it cannot be released, the laser unit must be replaced urgently.
• When the error is closed once, the error does not recur until the power supply is reset or the system is started by the program timer.

IMPORTANT
• If an error occurs every time the power supply is reset or the system is started by the program timer, check the contents of
Point. When there is no problem, it is highly possible that the laser unit is defective.
• Check each of G Laser Light Source Status and B Laser Light Source Status for Input Check → Printer → Engine
Section, and if it is OK, it is highly possible that each part at the Failed parts is normal.
☞ 35210
• Follow the diagnostic procedure shown below if G Laser Light Source StatusB Laser Light Source Status is No Good.

Diagnosis
Point
1 Check if the power (5 V) is supplied from the laser I/O PCB and laser control PCB.

Failed parts Manual No.

Laser unit ☞ 63080
B laser driver ☞ 66070
G laser driver
Laser I/O PCB ☞ 66060
Laser control PCB ☞ 66010

IMPORTANT
• Replacement and adjustment of the parts in the laser unit are impossible.
Replace the unit.

‹ Symptoms due to connection failure of wiring/symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse

Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure Symptoms of fuse blowout
☞ 4202 -

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

46100 3/33
 46100
Error message: Printer 2

No. 6107
R Laser temperature is out of range.

Countermeasure message
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Suffix number Condition
0001 R laser temperature is controlled between 27.7°C and 28.3°C for 6 seconds or more (standby status) and then the
temperature exceeds 31.0°C (upper limit temperature) again.
0002 R laser temperature is controlled between 22.7°C and 28.3°C for six seconds or more (standby status) and then
the temperature drops to 15.0°C (lower temperature limit) or lower again.

NOTE

4. Troubleshooting
• The R laser thermosensor is built into the R laser.
• You can check the temperature of R laser in Laser Unit Adjustment.
☞ 37300
Check Point
1 Perform the diagnosis of ☞ Specifying the occurring cause: Laser temperatures are being adjusted. (R) appears. See
4302.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Multi power supply ☞ 66100
Laser power supply
Laser control PCB ☞ 66010
Laser I/O PCB ☞ 66060
Laser unit ☞ 63080
Laser unit heater ☞ 63080
Laser unit cooling fans 1 or 2 (Suffix number 0001) ☞ 63050

IMPORTANT
• Replacement and adjustment of the parts in the laser unit are impossible.
Replace the unit.

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

46100 4/33
 46100
Error message: Printer 2

No. 6112
Could not load the paper. Paper Magazine C

Countermeasure message
Refer to the manual for corrective action.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
Suffix number Condition
0001 Even when a specified length of paper is advanced after the paper loading has started, paper end sensor C does
not turn DARK.
0002 Even when a specified length of paper is advanced after the paper end sensor C has turned DARK, the loading
sensor does not turn DARK.
0003 Even though specified length of paper is rewound when the magazine initial operation is carried out during the
paper loading, paper end sensors C do not turn LIGHT.

4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
• For details about magazine initial operation, see 55100 ☞ Performs magazine initial operation.

Check Point
1 Check that the paper is correctly inserted into the paper magazine.
2 Clean the advance roller.

Diagnosis
Blown fuses Manual No.
F35 Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 66020

Advance failure Manual No.

Paper magazine motor C ☞ 63051
Paper supply motor B/C ☞ 63060
Printer I/O PCB 2 ☞ 66030
Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 66020
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Printer power supply 2 ☞ 66100

Detection failure (paper end sensor) Manual No.

Paper end sensor C ☞ 63051
Printer I/O PCB 3 ☞ 66040
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Multi power supply ☞ 66100

Detection failure (paper loading sensor) Manual No.

Paper loading sensor ☞ 66030
Printer I/O PCB 2 ☞ 66030
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Multi power supply ☞ 66100

46100 5/33
 46100
Error message: Printer 2

‹ Symptoms due to connection failure of wiring/symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse

Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure Symptoms of fuse blowout
☞ 4202 ☞ 4252

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

4. Troubleshooting

46100 6/33
 46100
Error message: Printer 2

No. 6113
Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine C

Countermeasure message
Remove the paper. For details, refer to the manual.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
Suffix number Condition
0001 Even when a specified length of paper is rewound after the paper rewinding has started, the paper loading sensor
does not turn light.
0002 Even when a specified length of paper is rewound after the paper loading sensor has turned light, paper end
sensor C does not turn LIGHT.

Check Point

4. Troubleshooting
1 Check that the paper is correctly inserted into the paper magazine.
2 Clean the advance roller.
3 Check that the paper loading sensor and the paper end sensor are not soiled.

Diagnosis
Blown fuses Manual No.
F35 Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 66020

Advance failure Manual No.

Paper magazine motor C ☞ 63051
Paper supply motor B/C ☞ 63060
Printer I/O PCB 2 ☞ 66030
Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 66020
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Printer power supply 2 ☞ 66100

Detection failure (paper end sensor) Manual No.

Paper end sensor C ☞ 63051
Printer I/O PCB 3 ☞ 66040
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Multi power supply ☞ 66100

Detection failure (paper loading sensor) Manual No.

Paper loading sensor ☞ 66030
Printer I/O PCB 2 ☞ 66030
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Multi power supply ☞ 66100
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

46100 7/33
 46100
Error message: Printer 2

No. 6134
Paper Supply Pressure Change Motor operation error.

Countermeasure message
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Suffix number Condition
0001 The paper supply pressure change sensor does not turn DARK even though a specified time elapsed after starting
the paper supply pressure change motor operation.
0002 The paper supply pressure change sensor does not turn LIGHT even though a specified time elapsed after starting
the paper supply pressure change motor operation.

Diagnosis

4. Troubleshooting
Blown fuses Manual No.
F32 Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 66020

Operation failure Manual No.

Paper supply pressure change motor ☞ 63060
Printer I/O PCB 2 ☞ 66030
Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 66020
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Multi power supply ☞ 66100
Printer power supply 1

Detection failure Manual No.

Paper supply pressure change sensor ☞ 63060
Printer I/O PCB 2 ☞ 66030
Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 66020
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Multi power supply ☞ 66100

‹ Symptoms due to connection failure of wiring/symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse

Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure Symptoms of fuse blowout
☞ 4202 −

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

46100 8/33
 46100
Error message: Printer 2

No. 6135
Arm Unit 1 operation error.

Countermeasure message
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Suffix number Condition
0001 The zigzagging correction sensor does not turn DARK even though the paper supply arm motor moved arm unit
1 for the specified length in the direction of paper advance.
0002 The zigzagging correction sensor does not turn LIGHT even though the paper supply arm motor moved arm unit
1 for the specified length in the reverse direction of paper advance when zigzag correction sensor is DARK.

Check Point

4. Troubleshooting
1 Clean each sensor using a blower brush.
2 Carry out Paper Sensor Adjustment. ☞ 36000

Diagnosis
Blown fuses Manual No.
F32 Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 66020

Operation failure Manual No.

Paper supply arm motor (right or left) ☞ 63060
Printer I/O PCB 2 ☞ 66030
Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 66020
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Multi power supply ☞ 66100
Printer power supply 1

Detection failure Manual No.

Zigzagging correction sensor (right or left) ☞ 63070
Printer I/O PCB 3 ☞ 66040
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Multi power supply ☞ 66100

‹ Symptoms due to connection failure of wiring/symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse

Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure Symptoms of fuse blowout
☞ 4202 −

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

46100 9/33
 46100
Error message: Printer 2

No. 6136
Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 1 operation error.

Countermeasure message
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Suffix number Condition
0001 Exposure advance pressure change sensor 1 does not turn DARK from LIGHT even though the exposure
advance pressure change motor 1 has moved for the specified length.
0002 Exposure advance pressure change sensor 1 does not turn LIGHT from DARK even though the exposure
advance pressure change motor 1 has moved for the specified length.

Diagnosis

4. Troubleshooting
Blown fuses Manual No.
F32 Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 66020

Operation failure Manual No.

Exposure advance pressure change motor 1 ☞ 63070
Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 66020
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Printer power supply 1 ☞ 66100

Detection failure Manual No.

Exposure advance pressure change sensor 1 ☞ 63070
Printer I/O PCB 3 ☞ 66040
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Multi power supply ☞ 66100

‹ Symptoms due to connection failure of wiring/symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse

Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure Symptoms of fuse blowout
☞ 4202 ☞ 4252

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

46100 10/33
 46100
Error message: Printer 2

No. 6137
Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 2 operation error.

Countermeasure message
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Suffix number Condition
0001 Exposure advance pressure change sensor 2 does not turn DARK from LIGHT even though the exposure
advance pressure change motor 2 has moved for the specified length.
0002 Exposure advance pressure change sensor 2 does not turn LIGHT from DARK even though the exposure
advance pressure change motor 2 has moved for the specified length.

Diagnosis

4. Troubleshooting
Blown fuses Manual No.
F33 Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 66020

Operation failure Manual No.

Exposure advance pressure change motor 2 ☞ 63060
Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 66020
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Printer power supply 1 ☞ 66100

Detection failure Manual No.

Exposure advance pressure change sensor 2 ☞ 63070
Printer I/O PCB 3 ☞ 66040
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Multi power supply ☞ 66100

‹ Symptoms due to connection failure of wiring/symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse

Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure Symptoms of fuse blowout
- ☞ 4252

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

46100 11/33
 46100
Error message: Printer 2

No. 6138
Paper Advance Arm Motor (Left) operation error.
No. 6139
Paper Advance Arm Motor (Right) operation error.

Countermeasure message
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Suffix number Condition
0001 The arm sensor (left) or (right) does not turn DARK even though the paper advance arm motor (left) or (right)
has operated for a specified pulse.
0002 The arm sensor (left) or (right) does not turn LIGHT even though the paper advance arm motor (left) or (right)

4. Troubleshooting
has operated for a specified pulse.

Check Point
1 Clean the arm sensor (right or left). ☞ 63100

Diagnosis
Blown fuses Manual No.
F37 Printer I/O PCB 3 ☞ 66040

Operation failure Manual No.

Paper advance arm motor (right or left) ☞ 63100
Printer I/O PCB 3 ☞ 66040
Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 66020
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Printer power supply 1 ☞ 66100
Multi power supply

Detection failure Manual No.

Arm sensor (right or left) ☞ 63100
Printer I/O PCB 3 ☞ 66040
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Multi power supply ☞ 66100

‹ Symptoms due to connection failure of wiring/symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse

Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure Symptoms of fuse blowout
☞ 4202 ☞ 4252

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

46100 12/33
 46100
Error message: Printer 2

No. 6140
Lane Select Motor (Left) operation error.
No. 6141
Lane Select Motor (Right) operation error.

Countermeasure message
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Suffix number Condition
0001 The lane select sensor (left) or (right) does not turn DARK even though the lane select motor (left) or (right) has
operated for a specified pulse.
0002 The lane select sensor (left) or (right) does not turn LIGHT even though the lane select motor (left) or (right) has

4. Troubleshooting
operated for a specified pulse.

Diagnosis
Blown fuses Manual No.
F38 Printer I/O PCB 3 ☞ 66040

Operation failure Manual No.

Lane select motor (right, left) ☞ 63100
Printer I/O PCB 3 ☞ 66040
Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 66020
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Printer power supply 1 ☞ 66100
Multi power supply

Detection failure Manual No.

Lane select sensor (right or left) ☞ 63100
Printer I/O PCB 3 ☞ 66040
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Multi power supply ☞ 66100
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

46100 13/33
 46100
Error message: Printer 2

No. 6142
Paper Advance Pressure Change Motor (Left) operation error.
No. 6143
Paper Advance Pressure Change Motor (Right) operation error.

Countermeasure message
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Suffix number Condition
0001 The paper advance pressure change sensor (left) or (right) does not turn DARK even though the paper advance
pressure change motor (left) or (right) operated and the pressure roller increased the pressure.
0002 The paper advance pressure release sensor (left) or (right) does not turn LIGHT even though the paper advance

4. Troubleshooting
pressure change motor (left) or (right) operated and the pressure roller released the pressure.

Diagnosis
Blown fuses Manual No.
F38 Printer I/O PCB 3 ☞ 66040

Operation failure Manual No.

Paper advance pressure change motor (right or left) ☞ 63100
Printer I/O PCB 3 ☞ 66040
Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 66020
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Printer power supply 1 ☞ 66100
Multi power supply

Detection failure Manual No.

Paper advance pressure change sensor (right or left) ☞ 63100
Printer I/O PCB 3 ☞ 66040
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Multi power supply ☞ 66100

‹ Symptoms due to connection failure of wiring/symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse

Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure Symptoms of fuse blowout
☞ 4202 ☞ 4252

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

46100 14/33
 46100
Error message: Printer 2

No. 6148
Paper End Sensor A error.
No. 6149
Paper End Sensor B error.
No. 6150
Paper End Sensor C error.

Countermeasure message
Clean the sensor with a blower brush. For details, refer to the manual. After cleaning, adjust the Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity again.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
Condition

4. Troubleshooting
- Each print sensor was not adjusted properly when Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment was
performed in Functions of Paper Sensor Adjustment.

NOTE
• Paper magazine A is an option. (Triple magazine specification or quad magazine specification)
• The suffix number differs depending on the operation which is currently processed.
Suffix number Condition
0001 When the light source level of the emission sensor is set to 0, the detection sensor does not turn DARK.
0002 When the light source level of the emission sensor is set to 255, the detection sensor does not turn LIGHT.
0003 When the light source level of the emission sensor is set to 1/9 of setting value, the detection sensor does not turn
DARK.
0004 When the light source level of the emission sensor is set to the setting value, the detection sensor does not turn
LIGHT.

Check Point
1 Clean the paper end sensor using a blower brush.
2 Confirm the sensor status on the Paper Sensor Adjustment display. ☞ 36000

NOTE
• In the service mode, LED light intensity value is displayed in the Paper Sensor Adjust.
• After cleaning the sensor, carry out Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment again and check that the sensor LED light
intensity changes.

Diagnosis
Failure Manual No.
Paper end sensor A, B or C ☞ 63051
Printer I/O PCB 3 ☞ 66040
Triple magazine PCB ☞ 66050
Quad magazine PCB ☞ 66055
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Multi power supply ☞ 66100
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

46100 15/33
 46100
Error message: Printer 2

No. 6151
Paper Loading Sensor error.

Countermeasure message
Contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
Condition
- Each print sensor was not adjusted properly when Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment was
performed in Functions of Paper Sensor Adjustment.

NOTE
• The suffix number differs depending on the operation which is currently processed.

Suffix number Condition

4. Troubleshooting
0001 When the light source level of the emission sensor is set to 0, the detection sensor does not turn DARK.
0002 When the light source level of the emission sensor is set to 255, the detection sensor does not turn LIGHT.
0003 When the light source level of the emission sensor is set to 1/9 of setting value, the detection sensor does not turn
DARK.
0004 When the light source level of the emission sensor is set to the setting value, the detection sensor does not turn
LIGHT.

Check Point
1 Clean the paper loading sensor using a blower brush.
2 Confirm the sensor status on the Paper Sensor Adjustment display. ☞ 36000

NOTE
• In the service mode, LED light intensity value is displayed in the Paper Sensor Adjust.
• After cleaning the sensor, carry out Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment again and check that the sensor LED light
intensity changes.

Diagnosis
Failure Manual No.
Paper loading sensor ☞ 63060
Printer I/O PCB 2 ☞ 66030
Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 66020
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Multi power supply ☞ 66100
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

46100 16/33
 46100
Error message: Printer 2

No. 6152
Zigzagging Correction Sensor (Left) error.
No. 6153
Zigzagging Correction Sensor (Right) error.

Countermeasure message
Contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
Condition
- Each print sensor was not adjusted properly when Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment was
performed in Functions of Paper Sensor Adjustment.

4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
• The suffix number differs depending on the operation which is currently processed.

Suffix number Condition

0001 When the light source level of the emission sensor is set to 0, the detection sensor does not turn DARK.
0002 When the light source level of the emission sensor is set to 255, the detection sensor does not turn LIGHT.
0003 When the light source level of the emission sensor is set to 1/9 of setting value, the detection sensor does not turn
DARK.
0004 When the light source level of the emission sensor is set to the setting value, the detection sensor does not turn
LIGHT.

Check Point
1 Clean the zigzagging correction sensor (right or left). ☞ 63070
2 Carry out Paper Sensor Adjustment. ☞ 36000

Diagnosis
Failure Manual No.
Zigzagging correction sensor (right or left) ☞ 63070
Printer I/O PCB 3 ☞ 66040
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Multi power supply ☞ 66100
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

46100 17/33
 46100
Error message: Printer 2

No. 6155
Exposure Start Sensor error.

Countermeasure message
Clean the sensor with a blower brush. For details, refer to the manual. After cleaning, adjust the Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity again.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
Condition
- Each print sensor was not adjusted properly when Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment was
performed in Functions of Paper Sensor Adjustment.

NOTE
• The suffix number differs depending on the operation which is currently processed.

Suffix number Condition

4. Troubleshooting
0001 When the light source level of the emission sensor is set to 0, the detection sensor does not turn DARK.
0002 When the light source level of the emission sensor is set to 255, the detection sensor does not turn LIGHT.
0003 When the light source level of the emission sensor is set to 1/9 of setting value, the detection sensor does not turn
DARK.
0004 When the light source level of the emission sensor is set to the setting value, the detection sensor does not turn
LIGHT.

Check Point
1 Clean the exposure start sensor using a blower brush.
2 Confirm the sensor status on the Paper Sensor Adjustment display. ☞ 36000

NOTE
• In the service mode, LED light intensity value is displayed in the Paper Sensor Adjust.
• After cleaning the sensor, carry out Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment again and check that the sensor LED light
intensity changes.

Diagnosis
Failure Manual No.
Exposure start sensor ☞ 63070
Printer I/O PCB 3 ☞ 66040
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Multi power supply ☞ 66100
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

46100 18/33
 46100
Error message: Printer 2

No. 6157
Paper Sensor 1 error.

Countermeasure message
Clean the sensor with a blower brush. For details, refer to the manual. After cleaning, adjust the Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity again.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
Condition
- Each print sensor was not adjusted properly when Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment was
performed in Functions of Paper Sensor Adjustment.

NOTE
• The suffix number differs depending on the operation which is currently processed.

Suffix number Condition

4. Troubleshooting
0001 When the light source level of the emission sensor is set to 0, the detection sensor does not turn DARK.
0002 When the light source level of the emission sensor is set to 255, the detection sensor does not turn LIGHT.
0003 When the light source level of the emission sensor is set to 1/9 of setting value, the detection sensor does not turn
DARK.
0004 When the light source level of the emission sensor is set to the setting value, the detection sensor does not turn
LIGHT.

Check Point
1 Clean paper sensor 1 using a blower brush.
2 Confirm the sensor status on the Paper Sensor Adjustment display. ☞ 36000

NOTE
• In the service mode, LED light intensity value is displayed in the Paper Sensor Adjust.
• After cleaning the sensor, carry out Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment again and check that the sensor LED light
intensity changes.

Diagnosis
Failure Manual No.
Paper sensor 1 ☞ 63090
Printer I/O PCB 3 ☞ 66040
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Multi power supply ☞ 66100
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

46100 19/33
 46100
Error message: Printer 2

No. 6158
Paper Sensor 2 (Left) error.
No. 6159
Paper Sensor 2 (Center) error.
No. 6160
Paper Sensor 2 (Right) error.

Countermeasure message
Clean the sensor with a blower brush. For details, refer to the manual. After cleaning, adjust the Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity again.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
Condition

4. Troubleshooting
- Each print sensor was not adjusted properly when Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment was
performed in Functions of Paper Sensor Adjustment.

NOTE
• The suffix number differs depending on the operation which is currently processed.

Suffix number Condition

0001 When the light source level of the emission sensor is set to 0, the detection sensor does not turn DARK.
0002 When the light source level of the emission sensor is set to 255, the detection sensor does not turn LIGHT.
0003 When the light source level of the emission sensor is set to 1/9 of setting value, the detection sensor does not turn
DARK.
0004 When the light source level of the emission sensor is set to the setting value, the detection sensor does not turn
LIGHT.

Check Point
1 Clean paper sensor 2 with a blower brush.
2 Confirm the sensor status on the Paper Sensor Adjustment display. ☞ 36000

NOTE
• In the service mode, LED light intensity value is displayed in the Paper Sensor Adjust.
• After cleaning the sensor, carry out Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment again and check that the sensor LED light
intensity changes.

Diagnosis
Failure Manual No.
Paper sensor 2 (left, center or right) ☞ 63110
Printer I/O PCB 3 ☞ 66040
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Multi power supply ☞ 66100
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

46100 20/33
 46100
Error message: Printer 2

No. 6173
Printer Door 3 is open. It may be adversely affect print quality.

Countermeasure message
Close the printer door. When you inspect the paper currently processing, check whether it is satisfactory.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
Condition
- The print door 3 sensor turns off while printing from paper magazine B or C.

NOTE
• This error appears to let the operator know that opening printer door 3 during printing is a wrong operation and that adversely affects
the print quality.

4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
1 Check that printer door 3 is securely closed.

Diagnosis
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Adjustment failure in the attaching position of the printer door 3 sensor -

Failed parts Manual No.

Printer door 3 sensor ☞ 63050
• Unplug the connector of the printer door 3 sensor. If there is no conduction between pins 1 and 3 on the plug side when you place a
magnet close to the printer door 3 sensor, the sensor is defective.
Triple magazine PCB ☞ 66050
Quad magazine PCB ☞ 66055
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Multi power supply ☞ 66100
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

46100 21/33
 46100
Error message: Printer 2

No. 6177
Laser Unit temperature is out of range.

Countermeasure message
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Suffix number Condition
0001 Laser temperature is controlled once between 23.0°C and 42.0°C for ten seconds or more (standby status) and
then the temperature exceeds 45.0°C (upper limit temperature) again.
0002 Laser temperature is controlled once between 23.0°C and 42.0°C for ten seconds or more (standby status) and
then the temperature falls under 20.0°C (lower limit temperature) again.

NOTE

4. Troubleshooting
• The laser thermosensor is built into the laser unit.
• You can check the temperature of laser unit in Laser Unit Adjustment.
☞ 37300
Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Multi power supply ☞ 66100
Laser power supply
Laser control PCB ☞ 66010
Laser I/O PCB ☞ 66060
Laser unit ☞ 63080
Laser unit heater ☞ 63080
Laser unit cooling fan 1 or 2 ☞ 63050

IMPORTANT
• Replacement and adjustment of the parts in the laser unit are impossible.
Replace the unit.

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

46100 22/33
 46100
Error message: Printer 2

No. 6179
B/G Laser Output Unit error.

Countermeasure message
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
Stop Alarm
Error message release
Error Clear

Condition
Suffix number Condition
0001 The type detection of the laser unit differs between lasers B and G.
0002
0003 The type of B or G laser driver and the system program version are not correct.
Found that the wiring between the laser drivers B or G and the laser unit does not correct at the type detection of
the laser unit.

4. Troubleshooting
0004 The type detection of the laser unit differs between the laser driver B or the laser driver G and the laser unit.

Check Point
1 Check that the wiring of the laser drivers B and G have been securely connected.
2 Check that the wiring of the laser drivers B, G and laser unit have been securely connected.
3 Confirm that the types of the laser drivers B and G and laser unit are adequate.
☞ 66070
☞ 35500
4 Type Ff
Confirm the wire connection between the laser control PCBs (P1509, P1510) and the laser unit.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
B laser driver ☞ 66070
G laser driver
Laser I/O PCB ☞ 66060
Laser control PCB ☞ 66010
Multi power supply ☞ 66100
Laser power supply
Laser unit ☞ 63080
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

46100 23/33
 46100
Error message: Printer 2

No. 6187
Setup calculation error.

Countermeasure message
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Suffix number Condition
0001 Problematic setup calculation result detected.
0002

NOTE
• Perform initial setup again if the error shown above occurs.

4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Carry out initial setup. -

46100 24/33
 46100
Error message: Printer 2

No. 6195
Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A2

Countermeasure message
Refer to the manual for corrective action.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
Suffix number Condition
0001 Even when a specified length of paper is advanced after the paper loading has started, paper end sensor A2 does
not turn DARK.
0002 Even though a specified length of paper is advanced after paper end sensor A2 turns LIGHT, the loading sensor
does not turn DARK.
0003 Even though specified length of paper is rewound when the magazine initial operation is carried out during the
paper loading, paper end sensor A2 do not turn LIGHT.

4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
• For details about magazine initial operation, see 55100 ☞ Performs magazine initial operation.

Check Point
1 Check that the paper is correctly inserted into the paper magazine.
2 Clean the advance roller.

Diagnosis
Advance failure Manual No.
Paper magazine motor A2 ☞ 63051
Paper supply motor A2 ☞ 63055
Paper supply motor A ☞ 63060
Printer I/O PCB 2 ☞ 66030
Quad magazine PCB ☞ 66055
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Printer power supply 2 ☞ 66100

Detection failure (paper end sensor) Manual No.

Paper end sensor A2 ☞ 63051
Quad magazine PCB ☞ 66055
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Multi power supply ☞ 66100

Detection failure (paper loading sensor) Manual No.

Paper loading sensor ☞ 66030
Printer I/O PCB 2
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Multi power supply ☞ 66100

‹ Symptoms due to connection failure of wiring/symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse

Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure Symptoms of fuse blowout
☞ 4202 ☞ 4252

46100 25/33
 46100
Error message: Printer 2

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

4. Troubleshooting

46100 26/33
 46100
Error message: Printer 2

No. 6196
Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine A2

Countermeasure message
Remove the paper. For details, refer to the manual.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
Suffix number Condition
0001 Even when a specified length of paper is rewound after the paper rewinding has started, the paper loading sensor
does not turn light.
0002 Even when a specified length of paper is rewound after the paper loading sensor has turned light, paper end
sensor A2 does not turn LIGHT.

Check Point

4. Troubleshooting
1 Check that the paper is correctly inserted into the paper magazine.
2 Clean the advance roller.
3 Check that the paper loading sensor and the paper end sensor are not soiled.

Diagnosis
Advance failure Manual No.
Paper magazine motor A2 ☞ 63051
Paper supply motor A2 ☞ 63055
Paper supply motor A ☞ 63060
Printer I/O PCB 2 ☞ 66030
Quad magazine PCB ☞ 66055
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Printer power supply 2 ☞ 66100

Detection failure (paper end sensor) Manual No.

Paper end sensor A2 ☞ 63051
Quad magazine PCB ☞ 66055
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Multi power supply ☞ 66100

Detection failure (paper loading sensor) Manual No.

Paper loading sensor ☞ 66030
Printer I/O PCB 2 ☞ 66030
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Multi power supply ☞ 66100
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

46100 27/33
 46100
Error message: Printer 2

No. 6197
Paper End Sensor A2 error.

Countermeasure message
Clean the sensor with a blower brush. For details, refer to the manual. After cleaning, adjust the Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity again.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
Condition
- Each print sensor was not adjusted properly when Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment was
performed in Functions of Paper Sensor Adjustment.

NOTE
• The suffix number differs depending on the operation which is currently processed.

Suffix number Condition

4. Troubleshooting
0001 When the light source level of the emission sensor is set to 0, the detection sensor does not turn DARK.
0002 When the light source level of the emission sensor is set to 255, the detection sensor does not turn LIGHT.
0003 When the light source level of the emission sensor is set to 1/9 of setting value, the detection sensor does not turn
DARK.
0004 When the light source level of the emission sensor is set to the setting value, the detection sensor does not turn
LIGHT.

Check Point
1 Clean the paper end sensor using a blower brush.
2 Confirm the sensor status on the Paper Sensor Adjustment display. ☞ 36000

NOTE
• In the service mode, LED light intensity value is displayed in the Paper Sensor Adjust.
• After cleaning the sensor, carry out Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment again and check that the sensor LED light
intensity changes.

Diagnosis
Failure Manual No.
Paper end sensor A2 ☞ 63051
Quad magazine PCB ☞ 66055
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Multi power supply ☞ 66100
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

46100 28/33
 46100
Error message: Printer 2

No. 6199
Pressure Release Motor A2 operation error.

Countermeasure message
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Suffix number Condition
0001 The pressure change sensor A2 does not turn DARK even though a specified time elapsed after activating the
pressure release motor A2.
0002 The pressure change sensor A2 does not turn LIGHT even though a specified time elapsed after activating the
pressure release motor A2.

Check Point

4. Troubleshooting
1 Check that the paper supply unit A2 is installed correctly.

Diagnosis
Operation failure Manual No.
Pressure release motor A2 ☞ 63051
Quad magazine PCB ☞ 66055
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Printer power supply 1 ☞ 66100
Multi power supply

Detection failure Manual No.

Pressure change sensor A2 ☞ 63051
Quad magazine PCB ☞ 66055
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Multi power supply ☞ 66100

‹ Symptoms due to connection failure of wiring/symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse

Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure Symptoms of fuse blowout
☞ 4202 −

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

46100 29/33
 46100
Error message: Printer 2

No. 6200
Width Change Motor A2 operation error.

Countermeasure message
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Suffix number Condition
0001 The width change sensor A2 does not turn DARK even though the paper guide in the paper supply unit A2
started initial operation.
0002 The width change sensor A2 does not turn LIGHT even though the paper guide in the paper supply unit A2
moved to a specified position.

Check Point

4. Troubleshooting
1 Check that the paper supply unit A2 is installed correctly.

Diagnosis
Operation failure Manual No.
Width change motor A2 ☞ 63051
Quad magazine PCB ☞ 66055
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Printer power supply 1 ☞ 66100
Multi power supply

Detection failure Manual No.

Width change sensor A2 ☞ 63051
Quad magazine PCB ☞ 66055
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Multi power supply ☞ 66100

‹ Symptoms due to connection failure of wiring/symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse

Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure Symptoms of fuse blowout
☞ 4202 −

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

46100 30/33
 46100
Error message: Printer 2

No. 6201
Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A

Countermeasure message
Refer to the manual for corrective action.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
Suffix number Condition
0001 Even when a specified length of paper is advanced after the paper loading has started, paper end sensor A does
not turn DARK.
0002 Even when a specified length of paper is advanced after the paper end sensor A has turned DARK, the loading
sensor does not turn dark.
0003 Even though specified length of paper is rewound when the magazine initial operation is carried out during the
paper loading, paper end sensor A does not turn LIGHT.

4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
• When the quad magazine unit is installed, this message appears.
• For details about magazine initial operation, see 55100 ☞ Performs magazine initial operation.

Check Point
1 Check that the paper is correctly inserted into the paper magazine.
2 Clean the advance roller.

Diagnosis
Advance failure Manual No.
Paper magazine motor A ☞ 63051
Paper supply motor A ☞ 36060
Printer I/O PCB 2 ☞ 66030
Quad magazine PCB ☞ 66055
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Printer power supply 2 ☞ 66100

Detection failure (paper end sensor) Manual No.

Paper end sensor A ☞ 63051
Quad magazine PCB ☞ 66055
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Multi power supply ☞ 66100

Detection failure (paper loading sensor) Manual No.

Paper loading sensor ☞ 66030
Printer I/O PCB 2 ☞ 66030
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Multi power supply ☞ 66100

‹ Symptoms due to connection failure of wiring/symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse

Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure Symptoms of fuse blowout
☞ 4202 −

46100 31/33
 46100
Error message: Printer 2

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

4. Troubleshooting

46100 32/33
 46100
Error message: Printer 2

No. 6202
Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine A

Countermeasure message
Remove the paper. For details, refer to the manual.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
Suffix number Condition
0001 Even when a specified length of paper is rewound after the paper rewinding has started, the paper loading sensor
does not turn light.
0002 Even when a specified length of paper is rewound after the paper loading sensor has turned light, paper end
sensor A does not turn LIGHT.

NOTE

4. Troubleshooting
• When the quad magazine unit is installed, this message appears.

Check Point
1 Check that the paper is correctly inserted into the paper magazine.
2 Clean the advance roller.
3 Check that the paper loading sensor and the paper end sensor are not soiled.

Diagnosis
Blown fuses Manual No.
F35 Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 66020

Advance failure Manual No.

Paper magazine motor A ☞ 63051
Paper supply motor A ☞ 63060
Printer I/O PCB 2 ☞ 66030
Quad magazine PCB ☞ 66055
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Printer power supply 2 ☞ 66100

Detection failure (paper end sensor) Manual No.

Paper end sensor A ☞ 63051
Quad magazine PCB ☞ 66055
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Multi power supply ☞ 66100

Detection failure (paper loading sensor) Manual No.

Paper loading sensor ☞ 66030
Printer I/O PCB 2 ☞ 66030
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Multi power supply ☞ 66100
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

46100 33/33
 46300 Error message: Scanner/ Film Carrier

Error message: Scanner/ Film Carrier

No. 6303−6337
Refer to the Scanner Service Manual for Corrective action of Error message.

Condition

IMPORTANT
• The Error messages not described in the QSS Service Manual are shown here.
Refer to the Scanner Service Manual for Corrective action of Error message.
Error message (Scanner)
Error message table
No. 6303 Scanner Zoom 1 operation error.
No. 6304 Scanner Zoom 2 operation error.
No. 6305 Scanner Focus operation error.
No. 6306 Scanner IRIS operation error.
No. 6309 Scanner change of light error.
No. 6319 Backup data error. Scanner AFC

4. Troubleshooting
No. 6321 Focus auto adjustment error.
No. 6322 Scanner input balance error.
No. 6324 F stop value range error.
No. 6327 Scanner Light Source Section temperature adjustment error.
No. 6329 Analog setting communication error.
No. 6330 Digital setting communication error.
No. 6331 Line scanning communication error.
No. 6332 Light Source adjustment error.
No. 6333 The Line Data is out of the Standard Range Error.
No. 6334 Lane change operation error.
No. 6335 The Scanner Unit Cover is open.
No. 6336 Scanner Zoom operation error.

NOTE
• In the Error No. message table, the error message No. that the QSS does not use currently may be described.

46300 1/3
 46300
Error message: Scanner/ Film Carrier

No. 6400−6446
Refer to the Scanner Service Manual for Corrective action of Error message.

Condition

IMPORTANT
• The Error messages not described in the QSS Service Manual are shown here.
Refer to the Scanner Service Manual for Corrective action of Error message.
Error message (Film carrier)
Error message table
No. 6400 Perforation Sensor error.
No. 6401 Loading Sensor error.
No. 6402 Ready Sensor error.
No. 6403 135 film has stopped at the Film Carrier.
No. 6404 240 film has stopped at the Film Carrier.

4. Troubleshooting
No. 6405 110 film has stopped at the Film Carrier.
No. 6406 120 film has stopped at the Film Carrier.
No. 6407 Spool Key operation error.
No. 6408 The Film Carrier is unlocked.
No. 6409 The 240 Cleaning Leader has stopped.
No. 6410 Film Sensor error.
No. 6411 Film Carrier Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment was not executed.
No. 6412 135 DX Sensor 1 error.
No. 6413 135 DX Sensor 2 error.
No. 6414 135 DX Sensor 3 error.
No. 6415 135 DX Sensor 4 error.
No. 6416 240 DX Sensor 1 error.
No. 6417 240 DX Sensor 2 error.
No. 6423 Auto focus error.
No. 6424 Mount Unit operation error.
No. 6425 Mount detection error.
No. 6426 The lane is out of position.
No. 6429 System error. (AFC / Scanner control PCB)
No. 6431 Auto focus error.
No. 6432 Mount insertion operation error.
No. 6433 Mount detection error.
No. 6434 Mount detection (inlet) error.
No. 6435 Mount insertion operation error.
No. 6436 Mount elevator operation error.
No. 6437 Mount eject operation error.
No. 6438 135 Cleaning Leader has stopped.
No. 6439 The film strip is too short for processing.
No. 6441 The 120 Cleaning Leader has stopped.
No. 6442 The perforation of the film may be broken.
No. 6443 Move Table operation error.
No. 6444 Cartridge is out of position.
No. 6445 End Perforation Sensor error.
No. 6446 Film was set to the incorrect lane.

46300 2/3
 46300
Error message: Scanner/ Film Carrier

NOTE
• In the Error message table, the error message No. that the QSS does not use currently may be described.

4. Troubleshooting

46300 3/3
 46500 Error message: Disk/Media

Error message: Disk/Media

No. 6506
Hard disk is full. Delete the unnecessary image file(s).

Countermeasure message
Refer to the manual for corrective action.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
• Select NO to bring up the File Delete dialog box. Delete unnecessary files in the hard disk.
• Select PASS to stop the operation.

Condition
Suffix number Condition
0001 When the power supply is turned on or the data is to be written to the hard disk, the free space of hard disk drive
is below 4 GB.

NOTE
• The name of the corresponding drive is displayed in the third line of the message.
C:

4. Troubleshooting
• Read only files will not be deleted.

Check Point
1 Delete unnecessary files.

46500 1/1
 46550 Error message: Colorimeter

Error message: Colorimeter

No. 6551
Paper has jammed in the Colorimeter Unit.

Countermeasure message
Remove the paper and clean the Colorimeter Unit Advance Roller. For details, refer to the manual.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
Suffix number Condition
0001 Although a specified length of paper is fed in paper advance operation, paper sensor 2 does not detect DARK.
0002 While paper is fed in paper advance operation, paper sensor 2 turns LIGHT.
0003 When ejecting paper, paper sensor 2 does not turn LIGHT although a specified length of paper is fed to lead the
front end of the paper.

Check Point

4. Troubleshooting
1 Check that a short test print has not been inserted.
2 Clean the advance rollers of the colorimeter with a cleaning sheet.
3 Carry out each correction via Colorimeter Unit Adjustment.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Paper sensor 1 or 2 ☞ 61000
Paper advance motor
Colorimeter Control PCB ☞ 64130
ATX motherboard PC Service Manual
Colorimeter unit ☞ 21110
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

46550 1/3
 46550
Error message: Colorimeter

No. 6552
Backup data error. Colorimeter Unit

Countermeasure message
Load backup data from the floppy disk. For details, refer to the manual.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Suffix number Condition
0001 The backup data for the colorimeter control PCB is not found or the data is abnormal. (when the backup data is
not stored in the HD of the computer.)
0002 The backup data for the colorimeter control PCB is not found or the data is abnormal. (when the backup data is
stored in the HD of the computer.)

NOTE

4. Troubleshooting
• The name of the corresponding CPU PCB will be displayed in the second line of the message.
• Backup data is saved on EEPROM mounted on the PCB and is not lost even if the system power is turned OFF for an extended period
of time.
• The message with suffix number 0002 appears after the colorimeter control PCB was replaced. Clearing the error by selecting NO
reads the backup data of the paper front end advance length correction and feed error correction from the hard disk to the colorimeter
control PCB.

Diagnosis
If the data was deleted Manual No.
Carry out Reading data. ☞ 35400

Failed parts Manual No.

Colorimeter Control PCB ☞ 64130
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

46550 2/3
 46550
Error message: Colorimeter

No. 6554
Calibration Plate advance error.

Countermeasure message
Remove the paper. For details, refer to the manual.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
Suffix number Condition
0001 Although the calibration plate has been fed for a specified length, paper sensor 2 dose not turn dark.
0002 When the calibration plate is being fed, paper sensor 1 turns LIGHT from DARK.
0003 In initial operation, although a specified length of moving to the home position was attempted to the calibration
plate, paper sensors 1 and 2 do not turn LIGHT.
0004 When the calibration plate is being fed, paper sensor 1 turns LIGHT.

4. Troubleshooting
0005 Although the calibration plate has been fed for a specified length, paper sensor 2 does not turn DARK.
0006 Although the calibration plate has been fed for a specified length, paper sensor 1 does not turn DARK.

Check Point
1 Check if the calibration plate is inserted correctly.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Paper sensor 1 or 2 ☞ 61000
Paper advance motor
Colorimeter Control PCB ☞ 64130
ATX motherboard PC Service Manual
Colorimeter unit ☞ 21110

‹ Symptoms due to connection failure of wiring/symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse

Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure Symptoms of fuse blowout
☞ 4201 −

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

46550 3/3
 46600 Error message: Pricing unit

Error message: Pricing unit

No. 6600
Pricing Unit communication error.

Countermeasure message
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- Power of the Pricing Unit was not on when issuing Pricing sheet.

NOTE
• Depending on type of the pricing unit, the suffix number is different.

Suffix number Type

0002 Type A

4. Troubleshooting
Bar code pricing unit
0003 Type B
Card printer pricing unit
0004 Type C
Bar code pricing unit

Check Point
1 Check that the pricing unit power supply is ON.

Diagnosis
Blown fuses Manual No.
F15 PU control PCB ☞ 64140

Failed parts Manual No.

PU control PCB ☞ 64140
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

46600 1/4
 46600
Error message: Pricing unit

No. 6601-##
Pricing Unit operation error.

Countermeasure message
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Suffix number Condition
0001 Although a specified time has passed since printing started, printing is not completed.
0002 Since excessive communication data is sent to the pricing unit, the printing operation is delayed.
0003
0004
0005 Even after a specified time has passed since the data was transmitted to the personal computer, no signal is
returned.

4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
• Depending on type of the pricing unit, the suffix number is different.

Suffix number Type

0001 Normal
Pricing Unit
0002 Type A
Bar code pricing unit
0003 Type B
Card printer pricing unit
0004 Type C
Bar code pricing unit
0005 Type D
For PC output

Diagnosis
Blown fuses Manual No.
F15 PU control PCB ☞ 64140

Failed parts Manual No.

PU control PCB ☞ 64140
Desk power supply 2 ☞ 64170
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

46600 2/4
 46600
Error message: Pricing unit

No. 6602
Pricing Unit Printer operation error.

Countermeasure message
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Condition
Abnormal data is sent from the card printer.
Continuous check for two or more seconds detects that an error signal has been sent.

Suffix number Type

0003 Type B

4. Troubleshooting
Card printer pricing unit

NOTE
• Depending on type of the pricing unit, the suffix number is different.
• When the pricing unit specification via Machine Specification is set to Not in use, this error does not occur.

Diagnosis
Blown fuses Manual No.
F15 PU control PCB ☞ 64140

Failed parts Manual No.

Printer -
PU control PCB ☞ 64140
Desk power supply 2 ☞ 64170
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

46600 3/4
 46600
Error message: Pricing unit

No. 6603
Backup data error. PU

Countermeasure message
Load backup data from the floppy disk. For details, refer to the manual.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO
• Select YES to read the backup data in the hard disk.

Condition
Suffix number Condition
0### The backup data of the PU control PCB is abnormal.
1### The backup data of the system HDD and the PU control PCB are abnormal.

NOTE
• The value informed from CPU is displayed in the last three digits of the suffix number.

4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
If the data was deleted Manual No.
Carry out Reading data. ☞ 35400

Failed parts Manual No.

PU control PCB ☞ 64140
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

46600 4/4
 46620 Error: NMC

Error: NMC

No. 6620
Remote Control was not finished.

Attention message release

YES or NO

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- Remote Control has not finished.

Check Point
1 If it recurs, reinstall the Noritsu-eNET system program.

4. Troubleshooting

46620 1/4
 46620
Error: NMC

No. 6621
Could not connect to the server.

Countermeasure message
Contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- It is shown when you attempt to download backup data via the Reading Data (Noritsu-eNET → CPU) display
but that the backup data has not been downloaded after a certain period of time.

Check Point
1 Restart the computer.

4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Confirm the connection to the server. −

46620 2/4
 46620
Error: NMC

No. 6622
There is no backup data in the server.

Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- The error will be shown when you attempt to download backup data via the Reading Data (Noritsu-eNET →
CPU) display but there is no backup data in the server.

4. Troubleshooting

46620 3/4
 46620
Error: NMC

No. 6623
Noritsu-eNET Mail was not started.

Countermeasure message
Contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- The error will be displayed when you attempt to check Noritsu-eNET mail but there is no mail display software.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Reinstall the Noritsu-eNET software. −

4. Troubleshooting

46620 4/4
 46640 Error message: D-ICE control

Error message: D-ICE control

No. 6640
System error. (D-ICE Control PCB)

Countermeasure message
Contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
Suffix number Condition
0001 When starting up the D-ICE control PCB, conditions of ICs on the PCB were abnormal.
0100 During the actual scanning, an abnormal data is sent to Digital ICE Control PCB.
0500 The buffer memory for main on the D-ICE PCB overflowed.
0501 The buffer memory for interrupting on the D-ICE PCB overflowed.
1### The focus adjustment data was abnormal.
22## Communication with the D-ICE control PCB was abnormal.

4. Troubleshooting
23##
4000 When starting up the D-ICE control PCB, conditions of the D-ICE PCB was abnormal.
4100 Deleting data in the flash ROM on the D-ICE control PCB failed.
4101 Writing data in the flash ROM on the D-ICE control PCB failed.
4200 Registering data in the flash ROM on the D-ICE control PCB stopped.
4201 Abnormal registered data was found in data registering in the flash ROM on the D-ICE control PCB.
8000 The condition of the D-ICE PCB was abnormal.

The third digit of suffix numbers (1###)

The third digit indicates the film carrier where the focus adjustment data error is generated.

Suffix number Film carrier

11## 135/240 AFC-II (135 lane), 135 AFC
12## 135/240 AFC-II (240 lane)
13## 110 AFC-II
14## 120 AFC-II
15## 135/240 MMC-II
16## 135/240 AMC-II

The last two digits of suffix number (1####)

The last two digit indicate the magnification with which the focus adjustment data error is generated.

Suffix number Film carrier

11## 135/240 AFC-II (135 lane), 135 AFC
12## 135/240 AFC-II (135 lane)
13## 110 AFC-II
14## 120 AFC-II
15## 135/240 MMC-II
16## 135/240 AMC-II

The last two digits of suffix number (22##, 23##)

The value informed from CPU is displayed in the last two digits of the suffix number.

IMPORTANT
• The error above may occur when the ARCNET communication status is not normal.
If the error occurs, check the following items.

46640 1/5
 46640
Error message: D-ICE control

• Check the ARCNET communication status on the Version Check display.

☞ 37530
• Check the ARCNET communication path.
☞ 50520
• For the diagnosis of ARCNET communication, confirm the ARCNET communication diagnosis manual.

Diagnosis
Adjustment failure point Manual No.
Carry out Focus Adjustment. Scanner Service Manual

Failed parts Manual No.

D-ICE control PCB ☞ 64030
D-ICE PCB ☞ 64040
ARCNET-HUB PCB ☞ 64100
PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB PC Service Manual

‹ Symptoms due to connection failure of wiring/symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse

4. Troubleshooting
Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure Symptoms of fuse blowout
☞ 4201 −

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

46640 2/5
 46640
Error message: D-ICE control

No. 6641
Backup Data error. D-ICE Control PCB

Countermeasure message
Load backup data from the floppy disk. For details, refer to the manual.
IMPORTANT
• If the error message above appears, it cannot be canceled for approx. 5 to 10 minutes until the Order Display is
displayed.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Suffix number Condition
0### The backup data of the D-ICE control PCB is abnormal.
1### The backup data of the system HDD and the D-ICE control PCB are abnormal.

4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
• The value informed from CPU is displayed in the last three digits of the suffix number.
• This error message appears when the D-ICE control is replaced with a new one.
• When the data is written to the flash memory of D-ICE control PCB, the power supply of QSS is turned OFF or the QSS system is shut
down.
During the Light Source Registration or Light Source Update, the power supply of QSS is turned OFF or the QSS system is shut down.

IMPORTANT
• If the error message above appears, the backup data for the D-ICE control PCB saved in HDD is sent to the D-ICE control
PCB within approx. 5 to 10 minutes while the error cannot be canceled.
After the completion of sending the backup data, the error above can be closed.
However, the backup data saved in HDD may have a problem. If the error above occurs, we recommend you to read the
backup data on the media saved at the close down check.

Diagnosis
Countermeasure Manual No.
Read the backup data saved in media at the close down check. ☞ 35400

Failed parts Manual No.

D-ICE control PCB ☞ 64030
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

46640 3/5
 46640
Error message: D-ICE control

No. 6642
D-ICE Control PCB error.

Countermeasure message
Contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
Condition
The D-ICE PCB had some problems while D-ICE control PCB are communicating with the D-ICE PCB.

Suffix number Condition

0001 The data that D-ICE PCB received from the scanner is too small or too large.
0002 The D-ICE PCB attempted to send image data to the image processing PCB but the image processing PCB is not
in receiving condition.

4. Troubleshooting
0003 The D-ICE PCB is abnormal.
0004 The communication between D-ICE PCB and D-ICE control PCB has some problems.
0005 The data that D-ICE control PCB received from D-ICE PCB has some problems.
0006 D-ICE PCB has some problems when performing self-diagnosis.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
When the error message above appears, carry out Image Path Check (Film Series Image Path) ☞ 35920
of Self-diagnostic.
D-ICE PCB ☞ 64040
D-ICE control PCB ☞ 64030
Image processing PCB ☞ 64000
Scanner unit Scanner Service Manual

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

46640 4/5
 46640
Error message: D-ICE control

No. 6643
Digital Masking Unit operation error.

Countermeasure message
Contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
Condition
Digital Masking Unit in Operator Selections is (with a check mark) but it has some problems when starting up or upgrading the
software.

Suffix number Condition

0001 Digital Masking Unit could not be detected.
0002 Digital Masking Unit was abnormal.

4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
• When the check mark of Digital Masking Unit in Operator Selections is removed, this error does not occur.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
D-ICE PCB ☞ 64040
D-ICE control PCB ☞ 64030
Data change-over PCB ☞ 64080
Scratch mend PCB 1 ☞ 64070
Scratch mend PCB 2 ☞ 64060
DIMM ☞ 64050

‹ Symptoms due to connection failure of wiring/symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse

Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure Symptoms of fuse blowout
☞ 4201 −

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

46640 5/5
 46802 Error message: Software upgrade

Error message: Software upgrade

No. 6803
Language version of message data is incorrect. Message display in English.

Countermeasure message
Upgrade software again. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- When the power supply is turned on or when the language of the system specification is to be changed, the
selected language does not appear.

Diagnosis
Countermeasure Manual No.
Upgrade the system program. ☞ 35600

4. Troubleshooting

46802 1/1
 46820 Error message: Image processing PCB

Error message: Image processing PCB

No. 6822
Image Processing PCB Image data operation error.

Countermeasure message
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Suffix number Condition
0001 Processing does not end in a specified time when transferring the image data to the expanded memory on the
image processing PCB via the image correction PCB from the input memory on the image processing PCB.
0002 Processing does not end in a specified time when transferring the image data to the main PC via LVDS from the
input memory on the image processing PCB.
0003 Processing does not end in a specified time when transferring the image data to the main PC via the image
correction PCB and then LVDS from the input memory on the image processing PCB.

4. Troubleshooting
0004 Transferring does not end in a specified time when transferring the image data from the expanded memory on the
image processing PCB to the laser control PCB.
0005 Transferring does not end in a specified time when transferring the image data to the main PC via LVDS from
the expanded memory on the image processing PCB.
0006 Transferring does not end in a specified time when transferring the image data to the CD-R external writing
system via LVDS from the expanded memory on the image processing PCB.
0007 Processing does not end in a specified time when transferring the image data to the input memory on the image
processing PCB via LVDS from the main PC.
0008 Processing does not end in a specified time when transferring the image data to the expanded memory on the
image processing PCB via LVDS and then the image correction PCB from the main PC.
0009 Processing does not end in a specified time when transferring the image data to the composite memory on the
image processing PCB via LVDS and then the image correction PCB from the main PC.
0010 Processing does not end in a specified time when transferring the image data to the input memory on the image
processing PCB via the D-ICE PCB from the scanner unit.
0011 Processing does not end in a specified time when transferring the image data to the main PC via the D-ICE PCB
from the scanner unit.
0012 Processing does not end in a specified time when transferring the image data to the main PC via the image
correction PCB from the main PC.
0013 Processing does not end in a specified time when writing data to the expanded memory from the CPU on the
image processing PCB.
0014 Processing does not end in a specified time when writing data to the composite memory from the CPU on the
image processing PCB.
0020 The data size that is received in the input memory on the image processing PCB via LVDS does not agree with
the data size that is notified by ARCNET.
0021 The image data received by the input memory on image processing PCB from the scanner unit via LVDS and the
image information received by the image processing PCB from the AFC/scanner control PCB via ARCNET do
not match.
0022 The data was expanded in the expanded memory on the image processing PCB from the input memory on the
image processing PCB but the size does not agree.
0023 The data was received in the expanded memory on the image processing PCB from the main PC but the size does
not agree.
0024 The data was received in the composite memory on the image processing PCB from the main PC but the size
does not agree.
0025 The data was written to the expanded memory from CPU on the image processing PCB but the size does not
agree.
0026 The data was written to the composite memory from CPU on the image processing PCB but the size does not
agree.
0027 From the main PC, 1 frame magnification was performed to the main PC but the size does not agree.

46820 1/3
 46820
Error message: Image processing PCB

Suffix number Condition

0040 The communication with the image correction PCB has some problems.
0050 CMS data is abnormal.
0060 Undefined error
0061 It does not occur normally.
0062
0063
0070 The data was resent to the CD-R external writing system more than three times.
0071 The notification that data resending to the CD-R external writing system was completed was sent more than
three times.

NOTE
• Although the suffix numbers for these error messages vary depending on the error occurring conditions, the corrective action should
be taken according to the following check point and diagnosis.
Target PCB
Symbol Object
A Image processing PCB

4. Troubleshooting
B Image correction PCB
C PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB
D AFC/scanner control PCB or scanner unit
E D-ICE control PCB
F Laser control PCB
G Buffer PCB unit (CD-R external writing system)

Check point
Suffix number A B C D E F G
0001 9 9
0002 9 9
0003 9 9 9
0004 9 9
0005 9 9
0006 9 9
0007 9 9
0008 9 9 9
0009 9 9
0010 9 9 9
0011 9 9 9 9
0012 9 9 9
0013 9
0014 9
0020 9 9
0021 9 9 9
0022 9 9
0023 9 9 9
0024 9 9
0025 9
0026 9
0027 9 9 9
0040 9 9
0050 9
0070 9

46820 2/3
 46820
Error message: Image processing PCB

Suffix number A B C D E F G
0071 9

IMPORTANT
• This error may occur when the ARCNET communication status is abnormal.
If the error occurs, check the following items.
• Check the ARCNET communication status on the Version Check display.
☞ 37530
• Check the ARCNET communication path.
☞ 50520
• For the diagnosis of ARCNET communication, confirm the ARCNET communication diagnosis manual.
• When the CPU of main PC is occupied by the processing of those other than the QSS system program, this error may be
occurred.
If the error occurs in specific condition or timing, check whether the device or software used has any problems.
• Communication (Ethernet etc.)
• Hardware (Media drive etc.)
• Software (Antivirus software etc.)

4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
If No. 6822-0008 is shown when images are read from storage media to make normal prints, and Image ☞ 64010
Magnification is set to 91% to 93% on the 1 Frame Magnification display, check the image correction
PCB and its version.
If No. 6900-0800 and No. 6822-0008 are shown when Output Size is set to - in Media to Save, and images
of a specific size are read from and saved to storage media, check the image correction PCB and its version.
When the suffix numbers 0010, 0011, 0021 of the error message above appears, carry out Image Path ☞ 35920
Check (Film Series Image Path) of Self-diagnostic.
Image processing PCB ☞ 64000
Image correction PCB ☞ 64010
D-ICE control PCB ☞ 64030
D-ICE PCB ☞ 64040
ARCNET-HUB PCB ☞ 64100
Laser control PCB ☞ 66010
AFC/scanner control PCB Scanner Service Manual
PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB PC Service Manual
CD-R external writing system -
Scanner unit Scanner Service Manual

‹ Symptoms due to connection failure of wiring/symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse

Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure Symptoms of fuse blowout
☞ 4201 −
See the Scanner Service Manual. −

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

46820 3/3
 46900 Error message: Main

Error message: Main

No. 6900
Main control system error.

Countermeasure message
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Condition
Because of QSS control system, it is in a condition that the main control system cannot assume, such as that there is no necessary file, the
file is damaged and the data to be collated is not consistent.

Suffix number (bit) Condition

0001 ARCNET or LVDS cannot be used.
0002 There is no enough memory, failed to operate.

4. Troubleshooting
0004 There is no initial data file.
0008 It loses one frame of the scanned images (0 frame).
0010 The temporary file can not be made.
0020 The number of scanned images is too many.
0040 Occurs while the backup data in the HDD is checked.
Could not save the backup data from the HDD to the memory.
0080 Occurs while the backup data in the HDD is checked.
Failed backup data is detected while the backup data in the HDD is checked.
0100 Communication error between tasks
0200 The backup file of the frame format cannot be found.
0400 The data base file of the archive is damaged.
0800 • The image data was not sent normally from main PC → laser control PCB (LVDS).
• The data mainly processed is not consistent.
0800 The data mainly processed is not consistent.
1000 When writing the data to the input media like MO, the image data is not written normally.

IMPORTANT
• The error above may occur when the ARCNET communication status is not normal.
If the error occurs, check the following items.
• Check the ARCNET communication status on the Version Check display.
☞ 37530
• Check the ARCNET communication path.
☞ 50520
• For the diagnosis of ARCNET communication, confirm the ARCNET communication diagnosis manual.
• When the CPU of main PC is occupied by the processing of those other than the QSS system program, this error may be
occurred.
If the error occurs in specific condition or timing, check whether the device or software used has any problems.
• Communication (Ethernet etc.)
• Hardware (Media drive etc.)
• Software (Antivirus software etc.)
NOTE
• Suffix number is displayed with the total of the bit operation.
For details about how to determine the condition, see Suffix number display.
☞ 4002

46900 1/23
 46900
Error message: Main

Check Point
1 Reset the power supply.
2 Load the system data.
☞ 35400
3 When recurs, obtain the log data.
☞ 37500

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Check the cause of failure in System Version Check at the No. 6901 ARCNET ☞ 37530
communication error.
Perform the diagnosis of ARCNET communication error. ☞ 50520
The countermeasure action and the failed part would differ depending on the suffix number (bit).

Suffix number (bit) Countermeasure Manual No.

0040 1. Load the backup data. -
0080 2. If there is no improvement in symptom after the backup data is

4. Troubleshooting
read, initialize all the data, then load the backup data again.
0004 Reinstall the QSS system program. PC Service Manual
0010
0001 Perform recovery.
0002
0100
0200
0400 Initialize the Compact Archive Unit. ☞ 36700
0800 • Check the LVDS communication between main PC → laser -
control PCB.
• When recurs, get the log data. ☞ 37500
1000 Check the connection of each media drive. PC Service Manual

32
Suffix number (bit) Failed parts Manual No.
0040 • Hard disk (for system) PC Service Manual
0080 • Failure of DIMM (PC)
0200
0800
0800 If No. 6900-0800 and No. 6822-0008 are shown when Output Size is ☞ 64010
set to - in Media to Save, and images of a specific size are read from
and saved to storage media, check the image correction PCB and its
version.
0001 D-ICE PCB ☞ 64030
Laser control PCB ☞ 66010
PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB PC Service Manual
0001 Image processing PCB ☞ 64000
0008
0020
0008 Scanner unit Scanner Service Manual
0020

46900 2/23
 46900
Error message: Main

Suffix number (bit) Failed parts Manual No.

0100 ARCNET cable -
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
AFC/scanner control PCB Scanner Service Manual
Image processing PCB ☞ 64000
PU control PCB ☞ 64140
Laser control PCB ☞ 66010
D-ICE control PCB ☞ 64030
ARCNET-HUB PCB ☞ 64100
PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB PC Service Manual
Multi power supply (scanner) Scanner Service Manual
Power PCB ☞ 64160
Desk power supply 1 ☞ 64170
Desk power supply 2
Multi power supply (printer) ☞ 66100
☞ 67400

4. Troubleshooting
Processor power supply 1
CD-R writing system -
d-Storage -
1000 Each media drive PC Service Manual

NOTE
• If the failed part is on the PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB, check the setting of DS1.
32SD
Suffix number (bit) Failed parts Manual No.
0040 • Hard disk (for system) PC Service Manual
0080
0200
0001 Laser control PCB ☞ 66010
PC-laser interface PCB PC Service Manual
PC-scanner interface PCB
0008 Scanner unit Scanner Service Manual
0020
0100 ARCNET cable -
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
AFC/scanner control PCB Scanner Service Manual
PU control PCB ☞ 64140
Laser control PCB ☞ 66010
Switch control PCB ☞ 64090
PC-laser interface PCB PC Service Manual
PC-scanner interface PCB
Multi power supply (scanner) Scanner Service Manual
Power PCB ☞ 64160
Desk power supply 1 ☞ 64170
Desk power supply 2
Multi power supply (printer) ☞ 66100
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400

46900 3/23
 46900
Error message: Main

Suffix number (bit) Failed parts Manual No.

0800 LVDS cable -
Laser control PCB ☞ 66010
PC-laser interface PCB PC Service Manual
PC-scanner interface PCB
Failure of DIMM (PC)
1000 Each media drive PC Service Manual

‹ Symptoms due to connection failure of wiring/symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse

Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure Symptoms of fuse blowout
☞ 4201 −
☞ 4202 −

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

4. Troubleshooting

46900 4/23
 46900
Error message: Main

No. 6901
ARCNET communication error.

Countermeasure message
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Condition
When the power supply is turned on, the version is checked, or software is upgraded, an ARCNET communication error occurs.
The communication error occurs temporarily because of the instant power failure.

Suffix number (bit) PCB

0001 Printer control PCB

4. Troubleshooting
0008 Processor control PCB
0010 AFC/scanner control PCB
0080 Image Processing PCB*1
0100 PU control PCB
0200 Laser control PCB
0800 CD-R writing system*1
1000 d-Storage*1
2000 D-ICE Control PCB (32)
PC-Scanner Interface PCB (32SD)
4000 Switch control PCB*2

*1. For 32SD, this attention message does not appear.

*2. For 32, this attention message does not appear.

IMPORTANT
• When this error occurs, the operation may not be continued. It is necessary to reset the power supply of QSS.
• The PCB without reference to the error may be displayed in the second line depending on the equipped options, cable
connecting position and/or ARCNET communication feature.
Check the ARCNET communication path other than the displayed PCB.
☞ 50520
• Check the ARCNET communication status on the Version Check display.
☞ 37530
• For the diagnosis of ARCNET communication, confirm the ARCNET communication diagnosis manual.

NOTE
• The name of PCB where the error arises will be displayed in the second line of the message.
• Suffix number is displayed with the total of the bit operation.
For details about how to determine the condition, see Suffix number display.
☞ 4002
Check Point
1 Reset the power supply.

46900 5/23
 46900
Error message: Main

2 If the error with suffix number 0010 occurs, check the power supply cable connection of the scanner unit.

S-2, S-3, S-4 S1-II

Power supply cable Power supply cable

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Check the cause of failure in System Version Check at the No. 6901 ARCNET ☞ 37530
communication error.
Perform the diagnosis of ARCNET communication error. ☞ 50520

4. Troubleshooting
32
Failed parts Manual No.
ARCNET cable -
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
AFC/scanner control PCB Scanner Service Manual
Image processing PCB ☞ 64000
PU control PCB ☞ 64140
Laser control PCB ☞ 66010
D-ICE control PCB ☞ 64030
ARCNET-HUB PCB ☞ 64100
PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB PC Service Manual
Multi power supply (scanner) Scanner Service Manual
Power PCB ☞ 64160
Desk power supply 1 ☞ 64170
Desk power supply 2
Multi power supply (printer) ☞ 66100
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
CD-R writing system -
d-Storage -

32SD
Failed parts Manual No.
ARCNET cable -
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
AFC/scanner control PCB Scanner Service Manual
PU control PCB ☞ 64140
Laser control PCB ☞ 66010
Switch control PCB ☞ 64090
PC-laser interface PCB PC Service Manual
PC-scanner interface PCB
Multi power supply (scanner) Scanner Service Manual

46900 6/23
 46900
Error message: Main

Failed parts Manual No.

Power PCB ☞ 64160
Desk power supply 1 ☞ 64170
Desk power supply 2
Multi power supply (printer) ☞ 66100
Processor power supply 1 ☞ 67400
‹ Symptoms due to connection failure of wiring/symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse
Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure Symptoms of fuse blowout
☞ 4201 −
☞ 4202 −
☞ 4203 −
See the Scanner Service Manual. −

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

4. Troubleshooting

46900 7/23
 46900
Error message: Main

No. 6902
LVDS communication error.

Countermeasure message
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Condition
The LVDS communication error occurs.

Suffix number (bit) PCB

0001 AFC/scanner control PCB
0002 Image processing PCB

4. Troubleshooting
IMPORTANT
• The error above may occur when the ARCNET communication status is not normal.
If the error occurs, check the following items.
• Check the ARCNET communication status on the Version Check display.
☞ 37530
• Check the ARCNET communication path.
☞ 50520
• For the diagnosis of ARCNET communication, confirm the ARCNET communication diagnosis manual.

NOTE
• The name of PCB where the error arises will be displayed in the second line of the message.
• Suffix number is displayed with the total of the bit operation.
For details about how to determine the condition, see Suffix number display.
☞ 4002
• When the CPU of main PC is occupied by the processing of those other than the QSS system program, this error may be occurred.
If the error occurs in specific condition or timing, check whether the device or software used has any problems.
• Communication (Ethernet etc.)
• Hardware (Media drive etc.)
• Software (Antivirus software etc.)

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
AFC/scanner control PCB Scanner Service Manual
Image processing PCB ☞ 64000
PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB PC Service Manual

‹ Symptoms due to connection failure of wiring/symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse

Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure Symptoms of fuse blowout
☞ 4201 −
See the Scanner Service Manual. −

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

46900 8/23
 46900
Error message: Main

No. 6903
Serial communication error.

Countermeasure message
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES or NO
• Select YES to continue the communication.
• Select NO to abort the communication.

Condition
Condition
The serial communication has an error.

Suffix number (bit) Condition

4. Troubleshooting
0001 Between the ATX mother board and the colorimeter control PCB
0002 Between the colorimeter and the colorimeter control PCB

NOTE
• The name of PCB where the error arises will be displayed in the second line of the message.
• Suffix number is displayed with the total of the bit operation.
For details about how to determine the condition, see Suffix number display.
☞ 4002
Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Check the cause of failure in System Version Check at the No. 6901 ARCNET ☞ 37530
communication error.
Perform the diagnosis of ARCNET communication error. ☞ 50520
Perform recovery. PC Service Manual

Failed parts Manual No.

Serial cable -
Colorimeter Control PCB ☞ 64130
ATX motherboard PC Service Manual
Colorimeter unit ☞ 21110
Power PCB ☞ 64160
Desk power supply 2 ☞ 64170

‹ Symptoms due to connection failure of wiring/symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse

Symptoms due to the wiring connection failure Symptoms of fuse blowout
☞ 4201 −
See the Scanner Service Manual. −

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

46900 9/23
 46900
Error message: Main

No. 6906
Failed to change the mode. Enter to the next mode?

Countermeasure message
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
• Select PASS to change the mode again.
• Select NO to stop the change.
• Select YES to enter the next mode.

Condition
Condition
Each control PCB does not return any signal when the mode is changed.

The first figure of suffix number:

The mode which you are going to bring up is displayed.

4. Troubleshooting
Suffix number (bit) PCB
1### Normal mode
2### Input/Output mode
3### Setup mode
4### Adjustment mode
5### Start Up Checks mode
6### Close Down Checks mode
7### Program timer mode
8### Input Check mode
F### Unknown

The last three digits of suffix number:

Each control PCB which was failed to change the mode is indicated by the total of the bit operation.
Suffix number (bit) PCB
#002 AFC/scanner control PCB
#004 Image Processing PCB*1
#008 Printer control PCB
#080 Processor control PCB
#100 PU control PCB
#800 LASER

*1. For 32SD, this attention message does not appear.

NOTE
• Suffix number is displayed with the total of the bit operation.
For details about how to determine the condition, see Suffix number display.
☞ 4002
Diagnosis
33
Failed parts Manual No.
ARCNET cable -
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
AFC/scanner control PCB Scanner Service Manual

46900 10/23
 46900
Error message: Main

Failed parts Manual No.

Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
Image processing PCB ☞ 64000
PU control PCB ☞ 64140
Laser control PCB ☞ 66010
D-ICE control PCB ☞ 64030
ARCNET-HUB PCB ☞ 64100
PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB PC Service Manual

32SD
Failed parts Manual No.
ARCNET cable -
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
AFC/scanner control PCB Scanner Service Manual
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
PU control PCB ☞ 64140
☞ 66010

4. Troubleshooting
Laser control PCB
Switch control PCB ☞ 64090
PC-laser interface PCB PC Service Manual
PC-scanner interface PCB

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

46900 11/23
 46900
Error message: Main

No. 6907
The file was not found.

Countermeasure message
Contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- The required file for setup does not exist.

NOTE
• The file name where the error occurs is displayed in the second line of the message.
• Although the suffix numbers for these error messages will vary depending on the error occurring conditions, the corrective action
should be taken according to the following diagnosis.

4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
Countermeasure Manual No.
Upgrade the system program. ☞ 35600
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

46900 12/23
 46900
Error message: Main

No. 6908
Processing response error.

Countermeasure message
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Condition
When the processing command is given, each CPU does not return any signal.
The communication error occurs temporarily because of the instant power failure.

Suffix number (bit) PCB

0001 Printer control PCB

4. Troubleshooting
0008 Processor control PCB
0010 AFC/scanner control PCB
0080 Image Processing PCB*1
0100 PU control PCB
0200 Laser control PCB
0800 External System*1
4000 Switch control PCB*2
8000 Colorimeter Control PCB

*1. For 32SD, this attention message does not appear.

*2. For 32, this attention message does not appear.

NOTE
• The target CPU PCB or the CPU in the affected unit will be displayed in the second line of the message.
• Suffix number is displayed with the total of the bit operation.
For details about how to determine the condition, see Suffix number display.
☞ 4002
Check Point
1 Reset the power supply.

Diagnosis
33
Failed parts Manual No.
ARCNET cable -
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
AFC/scanner control PCB Scanner Service Manual
Image processing PCB ☞ 64000
PU control PCB ☞ 64140
Laser control PCB ☞ 66010
Colorimeter Control PCB ☞ 64130
ARCNET-HUB PCB ☞ 64100
PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB PC Service Manual
CD-R writing system -
d-Storage -

46900 13/23
 46900
Error message: Main

32SD
Failed parts Manual No.
ARCNET cable -
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
AFC/scanner control PCB Scanner Service Manual
Switch control PCB ☞ 64090
PU control PCB ☞ 64140
Laser control PCB ☞ 66010
Colorimeter Control PCB ☞ 64130
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

4. Troubleshooting

46900 14/23
 46900
Error message: Main

No. 6909
CPU was reset. Abort the process.

Countermeasure message
Enter the Close Down Checks display, and select Power OFF from Functions. Then turn off the circuit breaker and turn on again.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Condition
The CPU is reset due to power failure.

Suffix number (bit) PCB

0080 Image Processing PCB*1
0200 Laser control PCB

4. Troubleshooting
*1. For 32SD, this attention message does not appear.

NOTE
• The target CPU PCB or the CPU in the affected unit will be displayed in the second line of the message.
• Suffix number is displayed with the total of the bit operation.
For details about how to determine the condition, see Suffix number display.
☞ 4002
Check Point
1 Reset the power supply.

Diagnosis
33
Failed parts Manual No.
Image processing PCB ☞ 64000
Laser control PCB ☞ 66010

32SD
Failed parts Manual No.
Laser control PCB ☞ 66010
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

46900 15/23
 46900
Error message: Main

No. 6913
System was shut down forcibly. Restart the system.

Countermeasure message
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Suffix number Condition
0001 QSS_SEQ.exe file has shut down forcibly.
0002 QSS_Dsp.exe file has shut down forcibly.
0004 NMC-related .exe file has shut down forcibly.
0008
0010

4. Troubleshooting
0020
0040 Image processing software has shut down forcibly.
0080 Media I/O transformer has shut down forcibly.

IMPORTANT
• The error above may occur when the ARCNET communication status is not normal.
If the error occurs, check the following items.
• Check the ARCNET communication status on the Version Check display.
☞ 37530
• Check the ARCNET communication path.
☞ 50520
• For the diagnosis of ARCNET communication, confirm the ARCNET communication diagnosis manual.

NOTE
• Although the suffix numbers for these error messages will vary depending on the error occurring conditions, the corrective action
should be taken according to the message.

Check Point
1 Reset the power supply.
2 If the error above may occur when reading data, confirm the image data is a readable format with QSS.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Check the cause of failure in System Version Check at the No. 6901 ARCNET ☞ 37530
communication error.
Perform the diagnosis of ARCNET communication error. ☞ 50520

33
Failed parts Manual No.
ARCNET cable -
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
AFC/scanner control PCB Scanner Service Manual
Image processing PCB ☞ 64000
PU control PCB ☞ 64140
Laser control PCB ☞ 66010
46900 16/23
 46900
Error message: Main

Failed parts Manual No.

D-ICE control PCB ☞ 64030
ARCNET-HUB PCB ☞ 64100
PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB PC Service Manual
CD-R writing system -
d-Storage -
Failure of DIMM (PC) (If the suffix number is 0001) PC Service Manual

32SD
Failed parts Manual No.
ARCNET cable -
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
AFC/scanner control PCB Scanner Service Manual
Switch control PCB ☞ 64090
PU control PCB ☞ 64140
☞ 66010

4. Troubleshooting
Laser control PCB
PC-laser interface PCB PC Service Manual
PC-scanner interface PCB
Failure of DIMM (PC) (If the suffix number is 0001)

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

46900 17/23
 46900
Error message: Main

No. 6916
PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB control error.

Countermeasure message
Enter the Close Down Checks display, and select Power OFF from Functions. Then restart the personal computer.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO
NOTE
• This error does not occur when using 32SD because this system is not equipped with the PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB.

Condition
Condition
An error occurred at the diagnostic check of the PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB.

Suffix number (bit) Condition

0001 Standard PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB

4. Troubleshooting
0002 PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB for Compact Archive Unit (option)

NOTE
• Suffix number is displayed with the total of the bit operation.
For details about how to determine the condition, see Suffix number display.
☞ 4002
Check Point
1 Restart the system.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB PC Service Manual

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

46900 18/23
 46900
Error message: Main

No. 6921
PCB error.

Countermeasure message
Enter the Close Down Checks display, and select Power OFF from Functions. Then turn off the circuit breaker and turn on again. If this
error recurs, contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Condition
When turning on the power supply or upgrading the program version, each CPU judged that the PCB was abnormal.

Suffix number (bit) PCB

0001 Printer control PCB
0008 Processor control PCB

4. Troubleshooting
0010 AFC/scanner control PCB
0080 Image Processing PCB*1
0100 PU control PCB
0200 Laser control PCB
0800 CD-R writing system*1
1000 d-Storage*1
2000 D-ICE control PCB *1
PC-scanner interface PCB*2
4000 Image correction PCB*1
Switch control PCB*2
8000 Colorimeter Control PCB

*1. For 32SD, this attention message does not appear.

*2. For 32, this attention message does not appear.

NOTE
• Suffix number is displayed with the total of the bit operation.
For details about how to determine the condition, see Suffix number display.
☞ 4002
Check Point
1 Reset the power supply.

Diagnosis
33
Failed parts Manual No.
ARCNET cable -
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
AFC/scanner control PCB Scanner Service Manual
Image processing PCB ☞ 64000
Image correction PCB ☞ 64010
PU control PCB ☞ 64140
Laser control PCB ☞ 66010
D-ICE control PCB ☞ 64030

46900 19/23
 46900
Error message: Main

Failed parts Manual No.

ARCNET-HUB PCB ☞ 64100
PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB PC Service Manual
CD-R writing system -
d-Storage -

32SD
Failed parts Manual No.
ARCNET cable -
Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
AFC/scanner control PCB Scanner Service Manual
Switch control PCB ☞ 64090
PU control PCB ☞ 64140
Laser control PCB ☞ 66010
PC-laser interface PCB PC Service Manual

4. Troubleshooting
PC-scanner interface PCB

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

46900 20/23
 46900
Error message: Main

No. 6918
Failed to start the DLS.

Countermeasure message
Restart the system. If this error recurs, contact your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Suffix number Condition
0001 The signal of starting failure from DLS has been notified to QSS.
0002 The signal of completing starting from DLS has not been notified to QSS although a specified time has passed.

Check Point
1 Restart the system.

4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
1. Save the log data of DLS.
☞ 37600
2. Restart the system.
3. If it does not work out, reinstall the DLS software.
See the PC Service Manual.
4. If it does not work out, execute the recovery.
See the PC Service Manual.

46900 21/23
 46900
Error message: Main

No. 6922
Device control error.

Countermeasure message
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Suffix number Condition
0001 An error of Windows about the USB flash memory is detected using the self-diagnostic function of the main
control system.

Check Point
1 Confirm whether the USB flash memory is not being removed during reading data from the USB flash memory.

4. Troubleshooting
2 Failure in the USB flash memory
3 Reset the power supply.

Diagnosis
Countermeasure Manual No.
Failure in the USB Flash Memory Compatible Kit PC Service Manual
Upgrade the system program. ☞ 35600

46900 22/23
 46900
Error message: Main

No. 6925
PC-Laser Interface PCB control error.

Countermeasure message
Enter the Close Down Checks display, and select Power OFF from Functions. Then restart the personal computer.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Condition
An error occurred during the PC laser interface diagnostic check.

Check Point
1 Reset the power supply.

4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
PC-laser interface PCB PC Service Manual

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

46900 23/23
 48350 Error: Compact Archive Unit

Error: Compact Archive Unit

No. 8361
Archive File read error.

Countermeasure message
Refer to the manual for corrective action.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- Reading image data is failed while printing from the compact archive unit.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Hard disk drive PC Service Manual

4. Troubleshooting
NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

48350 1/4
 48350
Error: Compact Archive Unit

No. 8362
Archive File write error.

Countermeasure message
Refer to the manual for corrective action.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- Writing data is failed while saving the image to the compact archive unit.

Check Point
1 Conduct Defragmentation of the Compact Archive Unit.

4. Troubleshooting
Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Hard disk drive PC Service Manual

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

48350 2/4
 48350
Error: Compact Archive Unit

No. 8363
Compact Archive Unit processing error.

Countermeasure message
Refer to the manual for corrective action.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Suffix number Condition
- Cannot communicate with the Compact Archive Unit (TYPE2) in order to save to, or print from the Compact
Archive Unit (TYPE2).

NOTE
• This message appears only in the case of Compact Archive Unit (TYPE2).

4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
1 Check the settings for Option Registration and Operator Selections of the Compact Archive Unit (TYPE2).
2 If this occurs while using the QSS-Kids, check the connection between the QSS-Kids and the machine.
3 Initialize the Compact Archive Unit (TYPE2).

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Hard disk drive PC Service Manual

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

48350 3/4
 48350
Error: Compact Archive Unit

No. 8364
Compact Archive Unit cannot be used.

Countermeasure message
Contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
NO

Condition
Condition
Compact Archive Unit cannot be used at the start-up of QSS or when reading back-up data.

Suffix number Condition

0001 There is no hard disk drive available for use.
0002 There is only one PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB (for TYPE1 only).

4. Troubleshooting
0003 The hard disk drive has not been formatted.
0004 The capacity of the hard disk drive has become below the lower limit.

Check Point
1 Reset Option Registration of the Compact Archive Unit (TYPE2) and reset the power supply.
Restart the machine, carry out Option Registration again, and check.

Diagnosis
Failed parts Manual No.
Hard disk drive PC Service Manual

NOTE
• To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

48350 4/4
 49000 Error message: Edit

Error message: Edit

No. 9000
Edit mode System error.

Countermeasure message
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
Suffix number Condition
0001 There is no [Link] in Windows 2000.
0002 AlhpaBlend function is not supported in Windows 2000.
0003 The image information file is broken when entering in image editing mode.
0004 There is not the image information file when entering in image editing mode.
0005 Making data for frame printing is failed.
0006 The contents of PSD file is defective when entering in image editing mode.

4. Troubleshooting
0007 Changing the size of template image is failed when entering in image editing mode.
0008 Changing the magnification of inserted image data is failed.
0009 Reading the letter information file in the template selection display is failed.
0010 Reading phrase data is failed.
0011 The contents of PSD file is defective when entering the information file correction display.
0012 Changing the size of template image is failed when entering the information file correction display.
0013 Opening the file is failed.
0014 Memory mapping is failed.

NOTE
• This message appears when operating in the Edit mode.

Diagnosis
Countermeasure Manual No.
Upgrade the system program. ☞ 35600
Install the QSS software again. PC Service Manual
Perform recovery.

49000 1/4
 49000
Error message: Edit

No. 9001
Edit mode Information file error.

Countermeasure message
Clear this error. If this error recurs, contact us or your place of purchase.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
Suffix number Condition
0001 The image insertion information is defective when reading an information file in the Edit mode.
0002 The letter information is defective when reading an information file in the Edit mode.
0003 There is an unknown information data when reading information file extend data in the Edit mode.

NOTE
• This message appears when reading an information file in the Edit mode.

4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
1 Check if the information file is not broken in the template information correction screen.
2 Install the option template again.

49000 2/4
 49000
Error message: Edit

No. 9002
Edit mode Image data error.

Countermeasure message
This file format cannot be read, or this file is broken. Select the correct file.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
Suffix number Condition
0001 Reading PSD file is failed.
0002 Copying the image inserted in Inserted Graphics is failed.
0003 The inserted image data cannot be read by Plug-in.
0004 Reading PSD file is failed.
0005 Reading PSD image file is failed.

4. Troubleshooting
0006 There is not the image file to insert.
0007 Reading image file to insert is failed.
0008 The layer information to read image is defective.
0009 Reading Bitmap file in the preview screen is failed.
0010 Reading thumbnail file in the template selection screen is failed.
0011 Writing thumbnail file in the template selection screen is failed.
0012 There is not a file when receiving the template file name.

NOTE
• This message appears when operating in the Edit mode.

Check Point
1 Check if the corrective image data is selected.
2 Carry out the operation using another image data.

Diagnosis
Countermeasure Manual No.
Upgrade the system program. ☞ 35600
Install the QSS software again. PC Service Manual

49000 3/4
 49000
Error message: Edit

No. 9003
Edit mode Image read error.

Countermeasure message
Saved image is broken. Remake the data, and save it.
Alarm release
NO
Error message release
YES

Condition
Suffix number Condition
0001 The image saved data to read is broken.
0002 There is not the information file in the image saved data to read.
0003 There is not the template file in the image saved data to read.

NOTE
• This message appears when reading an image in the Edit mode.

4. Troubleshooting
Check Point
1 Make the image data again.

Diagnosis
Countermeasure Manual No.
Upgrade the system program. ☞ 35600
Install the QSS software again. PC Service Manual

49000 4/4
 49200 Error message: External device

Error message: External device

No. 9200−9381
For corrective action of the attention message, see the d-Storage/ CD-R external writing
system Service Manual.

Condition

IMPORTANT
• The Attention messages not described in the QSS Service Manual are shown here.
For corrective action of the attention message, see the d-Storage/ CD-R external writing system Service Manual.
Error (External PC)
Attention message table
No.9200 The buffer PCB was not found.
No.9201 Failed to upgrade the buffer PCB.
No.9202 The PCI-ARCNET PCB was not found.
No.9203 There is insufficient memory.
No.9204 Language version of message data is incorrect. Message is shown in English.

4. Troubleshooting
No.9205 The image data to be written to the CD was not found.

Attention message (External system)

Attention message table
No.9230 There is insufficient space left on the disk. Delete unnecessary data to secure enough disk space.
No.9231 Failed to read the database.
No.9232 Failed to read the image information.
No.9233 Could not connect to the d-Storage. Confirm the connection of LAN cable.
No.9234 The shared folder cannot be accessed. Would you like to continue?
No.9235 Writing failed.
No.9236 Failed to read the DPOF data file.
No.9237 DLL version is incorrect.

Error: CD-R external writing system (Directly connecting Rimage)

Attention message table
No.9350 The setting file could not be read. Start by default setting.
No.9351 DLL version is incorrect.
No.9356 The selected order was not deleted.
No.9357 Failed to write to the CD.
No.9380 Rimage CD/DVD Publishing Systems was not started.
No.9381 Failed to access the shared folder of Rimage CD/DVD Publishing Systems.

NOTE
• In the Attention message table, the attention message No. that the QSS does not currently use may be described.

49200 1/1
 49250 Error message: QSS-Kids

Error message: QSS-Kids

No. 9250−9311
For error corrective action, refer to QSS-Kids Service Manual.

Condition

IMPORTANT
• The Error messages not described in the QSS Service Manual are shown here.
Refer to the QSS-Kids Service Manual for Corrective action of Error message.
Error message (QSS-Kids)
Error message table
No.9250 Language version of message data is incorrect. Order Management Software is displayed in English.
No.9251 Version error. Confirm the version of Order Management Software.
No.9252 Order Management Software was shut down forcibly. The system will be restarted.
No.9253 QSS-Kids Main system control error. The Order Store Folder Path was not obtained from the Order
Management Software.
No.9254 QSS-Kids Main system control error. The order data was not found.

4. Troubleshooting
No.9255 QSS-Kids Main system control error. Accepted order has been completed.
No.9256 QSS-Kids Main system control error. The order has been completed.
No.9257 QSS-Kids Main system control error. The number of files in the Order Store Folder and the number of frames
are not in agreement.
No.9300 The processed order could not be deleted.
No.9301 Log file could not be written.
No.9302 There is insufficient memory. Quite other applications.
No.9303 The Folder Name for the order data could not be changed.
No.9304 Order Data Folder could not be created.
No.9305 Recorded Data could not be created.
No.9306 Initial Setting Information File could not be saved.
No.9307 The Order Process Information Management file could not be saved.
No.9308 Processable Order Check File could not be created.
No.9309 Processable Order Check File could not be deleted.
No.9310 Spooler Domain Check File could not be deleted.
No.9311 Spooler Domain Check File could not be created.

NOTE
• In the Error message table, the error message No. that the QSS does not use currently may be described.

49250 1/1
 49350 Error: Bravo II

Error: Bravo II

No. 9350−9376
For error corrective action, refer to Bravo II Service Manual.

Condition

IMPORTANT
• The Error messages not described in the QSS Service Manual are shown here.
See the Bravo II Service Manual for corrective actions of the messages.
Error (Bravo II)
Error message table
No.9350 The setting file could not be read. Start by default setting.
No.9351 DLL version is incorrect.
No.9354 [Link] process response error.
No.9356 The selected order was not deleted.
No.9357 Failed to write to the CD.
No.9358 PTBurn system error.

4. Troubleshooting
No.9359 Tray Operation error. Press the Ink Cartridge button on the Bravo.
No.9360 The ink cartridges were not found. Open the cover of the Bravo and press the Ink Cartridge button. Make
sure the cartridges are installed.
No.9361 Bravo Internal Printer communication error. Press the Ink Cartridge button of the Bravo.
No.9362 The media was not picked. Press the Ink Cartridge button of the Bravo.
No.9363 Arm operation error. Press the Ink Cartridge button of the Bravo.
No.9364 Arm Picker error. Press the Ink Cartridge button of the Bravo.
No.9365 There are no user authorizations on the personal computer. Login as Administrator, and restart the software.
No.9366 PTBurn Internal Software error. Restart the software.
No.9367 CD-R drive for Bravo was not found. Disconnect all the cables from the Bravo (including power supply).
Then reconnect all the cables to the Bravo and restart the computer.
No.9369 The Bravo Utility was not started.
No.9370 The PTBurn was not started.
No.9371 The shared folder of PTBurn could not be accessed.
No.9373 Job history information file error.
No.9374 An error has occurred when data writing was executed on the Bravo.
No.9375 The media was not picked. Remove the media and turn ON the power supply of the Bravo.
No.9376 An error has occurred when data writing was executed on the Bravo.

NOTE
• In the Error message table, the error message No. that the QSS does not use currently may be described.

49350 1/1
 5000

5. Operation sequence

Starting up/Closing down Operation .................................................................................... 50500

Startup sequence ................................................................................................................................................50500
Startup sequence (DLS specification) ...............................................................................................................50501
Startup sequence for PC ....................................................................................................................................50510
ARCNET communication ..................................................................................................... 50520
ARCNET communication flow .........................................................................................................................50520
Data Flow Chart (32) ........................................................................................................... 50600
Data flow in printing (negative/positive) [32] ...................................................................................................50600
Data flow in printing (media) [32] ....................................................................................................................50610
Data flow in data saving [32] ............................................................................................................................50620
Data flow to the CD-R external writing system [32] .........................................................................................50630
Data flow to the CAU [32] ................................................................................................................................50640
Data flow in the image processing PCB [32] ....................................................................................................50650
Data flow in the D-ICE PCB [32] .....................................................................................................................50660
Data Flow Chart [Stand Alone Scanner] (32) ...................................................................... 50670
Data flow of the Net Scan mode [Stand Alone Scanner] [32] ...........................................................................50670
Data flow in the Image processing PCB [Stand Alone Scanner] [32] ...............................................................50680

5 Operation sequence
Data Flow Chart (32SD) ...................................................................................................... 50700
Data flow in printing [32SD] .............................................................................................................................50700
Data flow in data saving [32SD] .......................................................................................................................50710
Data flow to the CAU [32SD] ...........................................................................................................................50730
Data Flow Chart (DLS specification) ................................................................................... 50800
Data flow around the DLS System Management Software [DLS specification] ..............................................50800
Data flow in printing [DLS specification] .........................................................................................................50810
Data flow in data saving [DLS specification] ...................................................................................................50820
Data flow in the image processing PCB [DLS specification] ...........................................................................50830
Data flow in the D-ICE PCB [DLS specification] ............................................................................................50840
Paper path diagram ............................................................................................................. 55000
Paper path diagram ............................................................................................................................................55000
Paper advance operation .................................................................................................... 55100
Paper supply operation (loading operation) .......................................................................................................55100
Paper supply operation (arm unit 1 operation) ..................................................................................................55200
Exposure advance operation ..............................................................................................................................55300
Paper advance operation (paper advance unit 1 operation) ...............................................................................55400
Paper advance operation (paper advance unit 2 operation) ...............................................................................55500
Paper rewind operation ......................................................................................................................................55600
Paper splicing operation ....................................................................................................................................55700
Paper end operation ...........................................................................................................................................55800
Fogged paper operation .....................................................................................................................................55900
Processor paper advance operation .................................................................................... 56100
Processor paper advance operation ....................................................................................................................56100
Print conveyor unit operation ............................................................................................... 56200
Print conveyor unit operation ............................................................................................................................56200
Print sorter unit operation .................................................................................................... 56300
Print sorter unit operation ..................................................................................................................................56300

5000 1/2
 5000

Replenishment operation sequence [F specification] .......................................................... 57010

Replenishment operation sequence [F] ..............................................................................................................57010
Replenishment operation sequence [F] ..............................................................................................................57020

5 Operation sequence

5000 2/2
 50500 Starting up/Closing down Operation

Starting up/Closing down Operation

Startup sequence

• This section explains the starting sequence.

1. The set time of the program timer has been reached.

G070717

2. The power supply relay of 200 V turns on.

5. Operation sequence
• The processor control PCB turns on the relay (X10) of the processor relay PCB.
• See the Wiring diagram.

3. The control PCBs turn on.

4. The system starts adjusting the processing solution temperature.

• Relays of the processor relay PCB (X1, X6 and X7) turn on.
• See the Wiring diagram.

5. The system starts adjusting the LED light source temperature.

6. The system starts adjusting the laser unit temperature.

7. The D-ICE control PCB (32) or Switch control PCB (32SD) turns on the power supply of the built-in
personal computer.

• Startup sequence for PC

1. When power is supplied to the D-ICE control PCB (32) or Switch control PCB (32SD), the time circuit in the D-ICE control
PCB (32) or Switch control PCB (32SD) operates.
2. The start signal is sent to PC in three minutes after working the timer circuit.
3. The power is supplied to each part of the PC to start it up.

8. The PC starts up and it starts up the QSS software.

• The PC checks the free space on the C drive of the hard disk drive while it starts up the QSS software.
If the main software does not start normally
• ☞ No. 6900 Main control system error.

50500 1/4
 50500
Starting up/Closing down Operation

If the free space on the C drive of hard disk drive is 4 GB or less.

• ☞ No. 6506 Hard disk is full. Delete the unnecessary image file(s).

9. Checks the status of backup data on the hard disk drive.

• When starting the main software, the status of backup data of each control PCB in the hard disk drive is checked.
If the backup data on the hard disk drive is not normal
• ☞ No. 6900 Main control system error.

10. Checks the communication status between the main software and each control PCB.
• After the backup data is checked, the system checks the communication status between control PCBs.
• The checking order is shown below.

Order 33 32SD
1 Processor control PCB Processor control PCB
2 D-ICE control PCB PC-scanner interface PCB
3 AFC/scanner control PCB AFC/scanner control PCB
4 PU control PCB*1 PU control PCB*1
5 Image processing PCB Printer control PCB
6 Printer control PCB Laser control PCB
7 Laser control PCB Switch control PCB

5. Operation sequence
8 CD-R writing system*1 Colorimeter Control PCB*2
9 d-Storage*1 -
10 Colorimeter Control PCB*2 -

*1. The system checks the communication status of the PCBs only when these options are registered for Option Registration.
*2. The system does not check the communication status of the colorimeter control PCB in ARCNET communication but in Serial
communication. Then regardless of the other control PCBs' communication orders, the system checks the colorimeter control PCB when the
main software starts up.

NOTE
• Even if error occurs in the processor control PCB while the main software is checking the communication status of the
control PCBs, the main software checks the communication status of the control PCBs in order of communication status
checking.
If the colorimeter control PCB does not start normally
• ☞ No. 6903 Serial communication error.
If the processor control PCB does not start normally
• ☞ No. 6901 ARCNET communication error.
If the D-ICE control PCB does not start normally
• ☞ No. 6901 ARCNET communication error.
If the PC-scanner interface PCB does not start normally
• ☞ No. 6901 ARCNET communication error.
If the AFC/scanner control PCB does not start normally
• ☞ No. 6901 ARCNET communication error.
If the PU control PCB does not start normally
• ☞ No. 6901 ARCNET communication error.
If the image processing PCB does not start normally
• ☞ No. 6901 ARCNET communication error.
If the printer control PCB does not start normally
• ☞ No. 6901 ARCNET communication error.

50500 2/4
 50500
Starting up/Closing down Operation

If the laser control PCB does not start normally

• ☞ No. 6901 ARCNET communication error.
When the switch control PCB does not start normally
• ☞ No. 6901 ARCNET communication error.
NOTE
• After the main software and each control PCB communicated normally, backup data is written to the hard disk from each
control PCB. (except Laser Control PCB)
• If the backup data of each control PCB is No Good, backup data is written to each control PCB from the hard disk drive.
• After the main software and the laser control PCB communicated normally, backup data is written to the laser control PCB
from the hard disk drive.
• After writing the backup data, the laser will be controlled.
When the CD-R writing system does not start normally
• No. 4211: The data cannot be output to the CD-R external writing system. Confirm the power supply of CD-R external
writing system.
Refer to the Service Manual of CD-R external writing system.
When the d-Storage does not start normally
• No. 4216: The data cannot be output to the d-Storage. Confirm the power supply of d-Storage.
Refer to the Service Manual of d-Storage.

11. The process for starting the QSS software completes.

5. Operation sequence
NOTE
• After the QSS software starts up, the message Would you like to proceed to the operation mode? appears if any key is
pressed.
• The system shows the order display when the YES key is pressed.
• The system shows the display of the temperature adjustment when the NO key is pressed.

12. It displays the message The processing solution temperatures are being adjusted.

13. The temperature adjustment of the processing solutions is completed.

14. It displays Laser temperatures are being adjusted.

• It displays this only when the temperature adjustment for the laser is not completed at this point.

15. Temperature adjustment of the laser unit is completed.

16. It displays Scanner temperature is being adjusted.

17. It displays LED Light Source Standby

18. Temperature adjustment of the scanner is completed.

19. Temperature adjustment of the LED light source is completed.

20. The system performs the light source update.

NOTE
• When starting up in the program timer, the light source update is carried out for the mounted film carrier automatically.

50500 3/4
 50500
Starting up/Closing down Operation

If pressing the manual sorter switch or turning on the circuit breaker to start up, No. 1306: Update the light source. If film
remains in the Film Carrier, remove it. will be displayed after the Start-up checks is completed if it is necessary.

21. After all temperature adjustments are completed, the message Would you like to proceed to the
operation mode? appears.

NOTE
• When the circuit breaker is started after it has been turned on, this message will not appear.

22. The YES key is pressed.

NOTE
• When the circuit breaker is started after it has been turned on, this operation is not necessary.

23. It displays Do not vibrate the machine. Vibration affects print quality.

24. The system displays an attention/error message if any.

25. The Start Up Checks display is shown.

5. Operation sequence

50500 4/4
 50501
Starting up/Closing down Operation

Startup sequence (DLS specification)

• This section explains the starting sequence.

1. The set time of the program timer has been reached.

G070717

2. The power supply relay of 200 V turns on.

5. Operation sequence
• The processor control PCB turns on the relay (X10) of the processor relay PCB.
• See the Wiring diagram.

3. The control PCBs turn on.

4. The system starts adjusting the processing solution temperature.

• Relays of the processor relay PCB (X1, X6 and X7) turn on.
• See the Wiring diagram.

5. The system starts adjusting the LED light source temperature.

6. The system starts adjusting the laser unit temperature.

7. The D-ICE control PCB turns on the power supply of the built-in personal computer.

• Startup sequence for PC

1. When power is supplied to the D-ICE control PCB, the timer circuit in the PCB operates.
2. The start signal is sent to PC in three minutes after working the timer circuit.
3. The power is supplied to each part of the PC to start it up.

8. PC starts, and QSS System Program starts up.

• The process for starting the QSS System Program is carried out.
If the main software does not start normally
• ☞ No. 6900:Main control system error.

9. DLS System Management Software starts up.

• By the order from the QSS System Program, DLS System Management Software starts up.

50501 1/3
 50501
Starting up/Closing down Operation

If DLS System Management Software does not start up

• ☞ No. 6918:Failed to start the DLS.

10. Checks the status of backup data on the hard disk drive.
• When starting the main software, the status of backup data of each control PCB in the hard disk drive is checked.
If the backup data on the hard disk drive is not normal
• ☞ No. 6900:Main control system error.

11. Checks the communication status between the main software and each control PCB.
• After the backup data is checked, the system checks the communication status between control PCBs.
• The checking order is shown below.

Order PCB
1 Processor control PCB
2 D-ICE control PCB
3 AFC/scanner control PCB
4 Image processing PCB
5 Printer control PCB
6 Laser control PCB
7 Colorimeter Control PCB*1

5. Operation sequence
*1. The system does not check the communication status of the colorimeter control PCB in ARCNET communication but in Serial
communication. Then regardless of the other control PCBs' communication orders, the system checks the colorimeter control PCB when the
main software starts up.

NOTE
• Even if error occurs in the processor control PCB while the main software is checking the communication status of the
control PCBs, the main software checks the communication status of the control PCBs in order of communication status
checking.
If the colorimeter control PCB does not start normally
• ☞ No. 6903 Serial communication error.
If the processor control PCB does not start normally
• ☞ No. 6901 ARCNET communication error.
If the D-ICE control PCB does not start normally
• ☞ No. 6901 ARCNET communication error.
If the AFC/scanner control PCB does not start normally
• ☞ No. 6901 ARCNET communication error.
If the image processing PCB does not start normally
• ☞ No. 6901 ARCNET communication error.
If the printer control PCB does not start normally
• ☞ No. 6901 ARCNET communication error.
If the laser control PCB does not start normally
• ☞ No. 6901 ARCNET communication error.
NOTE
• After the main software and each control PCB communicated normally, backup data is written to the hard disk from each
control PCB. (except Laser Control PCB)
• If the backup data of each control PCB is No Good, backup data is written to each control PCB from the hard disk drive.
• After the main software and the laser control PCB communicated normally, backup data is written to the laser control PCB
from the hard disk drive.
• After writing the backup data, the laser will be controlled.

50501 2/3
 50501
Starting up/Closing down Operation

12. The process for starting QSS System Program completes.

• After starting up the QSS System Program, it controls the starting up of DLS System Management Software.
If DLS System Management Software does not start up
• ☞ No. 6918:Failed to start the DLS.
NOTE
• After the QSS System Program starts up, the message Would you like to proceed to the operation mode? appears if any
key is pressed.
• The system shows the order display when the YES key is pressed.
• The system shows the display of the temperature adjustment when the NO key is pressed.

13. The process for starting DLS System Management Software completes.

14. The machine displays the message Would you like to proceed to the operation mode?.
NOTE
• When the circuit breaker is started after it has been turned on, this message will not appear.

15. The YES key is pressed.

NOTE

5. Operation sequence
• When the circuit breaker is started after it has been turned on, this operation is not necessary.

16. It displays Do not vibrate the machine. Vibration affects print quality.

17. The system displays an attention/error message if any.

18. The Start Up Checks display is shown.

19. The temperature adjustment for the laser unit completes.

20. The temperature adjustment for the scanner completes.

21. The temperature adjustment for the LED light source completes.

22. The system performs the light source update.

NOTE
• When starting up in the program timer, the light source update is carried out for the mounted film carrier automatically.
If pressing the manual sorter switch or turning on the circuit breaker to start up, No. 1306: Update the light source. If film
remains in the Film Carrier, remove it. will be displayed after the Start-up checks is completed if it is necessary.

23. The adjustment of processing solution temperature completes.

50501 3/3
 50510
Starting up/Closing down Operation

Startup sequence for PC

This section covers the startup sequence of widely used PC (Windows 2000).
IMPORTANT
• The screens described in this section may be different from the actual ones or may not be displayed depending on the PC
type or connected devices.

1. Standby status

(1) Standby current is supplied from the ATX power supply to the mother board.

2. Power ON

(1) Power ON signal is input to the ATX power supply.

(2) Power LED turns on.
(3) Power is supplied to the mother board.
(4) Power is supplied to the built-in drives.

3. POST (Power On Self Test, which is self diagnosis in starting up)

5. Operation sequence
(1) VGA BIOS test
• Video board test

G057479

(2) CPU, memory test

• Resetting CPU
• DRAM check

G057480

(3) IDE connected device detection

• Program execution in BIOS
• Keyboard connection check
• Reading CMOS memory setting
• Initializing the chipset and on-board I/O
• Detecting the floppy disk
• Detecting the IDE hard disk

50510 1/4
 50510
Starting up/Closing down Operation

G057481

(4) SCSI connected device detection

• Detecting the SCSI connected device

G057482

(5) System configurations

5. Operation sequence
• Displaying the system settings (settings for the software and hardware)

G057483

(6) PCI device listing

• Displaying the PCI devices

G057484

(7) Starting disk searching

(8) Selecting the device where the OS installed

50510 2/4
 50510
Starting up/Closing down Operation

4. Reading the NTLDR (NT loader, which is the program to start the OS)

(1) Starting the bootstrap loader in the BIOS ROM (to initialize the program)
(2) Searching the MBR (master boot record, the first sector) in the hard disk
(3) NTLDR moves to the RAM
(4) Searching the system file to start the OS with NTLDR in the hard disk
(5) The system file to start the OS moves to the RAM by NTLDR.

5. Starting the OS
NOTE
• The files required to start the OS.

File name Explanation

[Link] Controls the installed OS, location to save the OS, the OS starting as a default and
waiting time for starting up the PC.
ntldr Displays the starting menu, reads the OS.
[Link] Collects the hardware information and writes it to the OS (registry).

(1) "Starting Windows" display

5. Operation sequence
White progress bar appears.

G057485

(2) "Starting up" display

Blue progress bar appears.

G057486

50510 3/4
 50510
Starting up/Closing down Operation

(3) "Please wait" display

G057487

5. Operation sequence

50510 4/4
 33
ARCNET communication figure (without option)
ATX motherboard

PCI-LVDS/ARCNET
PCB (standard)

Printer control PCB

Laser control PCB Processor control PCB

J/P223 J/P224
J/P221
J/P219 J/P220 J/P518 J/P517
ARCNET communication flow

J/P1516 J/P1517 J/P222

Order of the ARCNET communication (without option)

ARCNET
ARCNET
1 Processor control PCB
J/P74 2 D-ICE control PCB

50520
50520

J/P73
3 AFC/scanner control PCB
J/P54
J/P443 J/P442 4 Image processing PCB
J/P53 5 Printer control PCB
6 Laser control PCB
J/P76
D-ICE control PCB ARCNET (Connector emission side)
Image correction ARCNET (Connector detection side)
PCB J/P75
AFC/scanner control
J/P72 J/P20 PCB
J/P71 J/P21

Image processing
D-ICE PCB
PCB

G076422
ARCNET communication

1/5
ARCNET communication

5. Operation sequence
 33
Processor control PCB PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB (standard) ARCNET communication figure (with option)

J/P518 J/P517

ATX motherboard

Printer control PCB

Laser control PCB

J/P224
J/P223 J/P221
J/P220 J/P222
J/P219
J/P1516 J/P1517
ARCNET-HUB PCB

J/P135

Order of the ARCNET communication (with option)

J/P136
ARCNET 1 Processor control PCB
J/P74
J/P73 2 D-ICE control PCB
3 AFC/scanner control PCB
J/P54
4 PU control PCB

50520
50520

J/P443 J/P442 J/P53

5 Image processing PCB
J/P76 J/P133 6 Printer control PCB
D-ICE control 7 Laser control PCB
PCB 8 CD-R writing system
Image correction PCB J/P134
J/P75 9 d-Storage
J/P137
J/P138 ARCNET (Connector emission side)
AFC/scanner ARCNET (Connector detection side)
J/P139
J/P72 J/P20 control PCB J/P140
J/P71 J/P21

Image processing PCB D-ICE PCB

J/P299 J/P300
PU control PCB
(option)

PCI-ARCNET CD-R external writing system (option)

conversion PCB d-Storage (option)
(option)

G076416
ARCNET communication

2/5
5. Operation sequence
 Processor control PCB PC-laser interface PCB ARCNET communication figure (without option)

32SD
J/P518 J/P517
J/P198(J/P73)
J/P199(J/P74)

PC-scanner
ATX motherboard
Printer control PCB interface PCB
Laser control PCB

J/P196(J/P71)
J/P224
J/P223 J/P221 J/P197(J/P72)
J/P219 J/P220 J/P222
J/P1516 J/P1517

Order of the ARCNET communication (without

option)

ARCNET
1 Processor control PCB
J/P54 2 PC-scanner interface PCB
J/P53 3 AFC/scanner control PCB
5 Printer control PCB

50520
50520

J/P76 6 Laser control PCB

ARCNET (Connector emission side)
J/P75 ARCNET (Connector detection side)
J/P74
J/P73
AFC/scanner
J/P72 J/P20 control PCB
J/P71 J/P21
Switch control PCB

G082831
ARCNET communication

3/5
5. Operation sequence
 Processor control PCB PC-laser interface PCB
ARCNET communication figure (with option)

32SD
J/P518 J/P517
J/P198(J/P73)
J/P199(J/P74)
PC-scanner interface
PCB ATX motherboard
Printer control PCB
Laser control PCB

J/P196(J/P71)
J/P224
J/P223 J/P221 J/P197(J/P72)
J/P219 J/P220 J/P222
J/P1516 J/P1517

Order of the ARCNET communication (with option)

ARCNET
1 Processor control PCB
J/P54 2 PC-scanner interface PCB
J/P53 3 AFC/scanner control PCB
4 PU control PCB

50520
50520

J/P76 5 Printer control PCB

6 Laser control PCB
J/P75 ARCNET (Connector emission side)
ARCNET (Connector detection side)
J/P74
J/P73
AFC/scanner
J/P72 J/P20 control PCB
J/P71 J/P21
Switch control PCB

J/P299 J/P300
PU control PCB
(option)

G082832
ARCNET communication

4/5
5. Operation sequence
 50520
ARCNET communication

IMPORTANT
• ARCNET communication figure appears above. You can connect the ARCNET cable to any port if IN/OUT is correct.
The actual connecting position of the ARCNET cable may be different from the above ARCNET communication figure.

z Order of the ARCNET communication

33
No. Order of the ARCNET communication No. Order of the ARCNET communication
1 Processor control PCB 6 Printer control PCB
2 D-ICE control PCB 7 Laser control PCB
3 AFC/scanner control PCB 8 CD-R writing system
4 PU control PCB 9 d-Storage
5 Image processing PCB

32SD
No. Order of the ARCNET communication No. Order of the ARCNET communication
1 Processor control PCB 5 Printer control PCB
2 PC-scanner interface PCB 6 Laser control PCB
3 AFC/scanner control PCB 7 Switch control PCB
4 PU control PCB

5. Operation sequence
For ARCNET communication error diagnosis, refer to ARCNET communication diagnosis manual.

50520 5/5
 AOM
Mirror ATX motherboard
VIDEO BOARD

Media drive
PCI-
R laser R-AOM LVDS/ARC
driver
NET PCB
Bl LVDS (standard)
ase
r G-AOM
driver
G
la
ser B-AOM
driver
Laser control PCB Printer control PCB Processor control PCB

ARCNET
Polygon mirror
LVDS ARCNET ARCNET
ARCNET
Lens
Synchronous sensor

ARCNET
J/P455 J/P456

ARCNET

Image correction
PCB

50600
50600

D-ICE control PCB AFC/scanner

control PCB
Data flow in printing (negative/positive) [32]

Prescanning data
Actual scanning data

Image processing D-ICE PCB

PCB

LVDS
PCB

[J485]
[J484A]
DIMM

Data change-over

Scratch mend PCB 1

Scratch mend PCB 2

Scratch mend PCB 1

Digital masking unit (option)

G072346

1/2
Data Flow Chart (32)
Data Flow Chart (32)

5. Operation sequence
 50600
Data Flow Chart (32)

z Input of this system operation is film scanning operation and output is printing
operation.

1. The scanner unit scans a film.

2. The D-ICE PCB detects scratches or dust on the film base layer and correct them. (Standard)
IMPORTANT
• The D-ICE PCB does not perform base layer scratch erasing for prescanning data.
• For details of scratch erasing in the D-ICE PCB, refer to ☞ 50660.

NOTE
• The optional Digital Masking Unit improves the correction of the scratch on the film.
• Those PCBs detect scratches and dust on the film and correct them.
• The data change-over PCB sorts the image data between those for scratch mend PCB 1 [J484A] and for scratch mend
PCB 1 [J485].

3. The image correction PCB performs image correction of actual scanning data such as color and
density correction, DSA, and image rotation.

IMPORTANT

5. Operation sequence
• Prescanning data does not go through the image correction PCB.
• Prescanning data goes through the D-ICE PCB → the image processing PCB, and then it is sent to the PC as
the image data for PJP to be displayed on the monitor.

NOTE
• The prescanning data is used for the index print.
• For details about the image correction PCB, image processing PCB and their data flows, refer to ☞ 50650.

4. Image data editing such as frame combination and front print combination is performed in the image
processing PCB.

5. The image data goes through the laser control PCB and is output to the laser unit.

6. The laser unit exposes the paper.

50600 2/2
 AOM ATX motherboard
Mirror
VIDEO BOARD

Media drive
R laser R-AOM PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB (standard)
driver
Bl
ase G-AOM LVDS
r
driver
G
la
se
r B-AOM
HDD (Standard)

driver
Laser control PCB Printer control PCB Processor control PCB

ARCNET
Polygon mirror LVDS ARCNET ARCNET
ARCNET

Lens
Data flow in printing (media) [32]

ARCNET
Synchronous sensor J/P455 J/P456
ARCNET

Image correction
PCB AFC/scanner

50610
50610

D-ICE control PCB

control PCB
Setup print data
Image data (print)

Image processing
PJP image data (monitor display)

D-ICE PCB
PCB

LVDS
PCB

[J485]
[J484A]
DIMM

Data change-over

Scratch mend PCB 1

Scratch mend PCB 2

Scratch mend PCB 1

Digital masking unit (option)

G072349

1/2
Data Flow Chart (32)

5. Operation sequence
 50610
Data Flow Chart (32)

z Input of this system operation is the media and output is a print.

1. PC reads the image data from a media.

NOTE
• The PJP image data is generated in the PC and displayed on the monitor.

2. The image data is sent to the image processing PCB from the PC.

3. The image correction PCB performs image correction such as color and density correction, DSA, and
image rotation.

IMPORTANT
• Setup print data goes through the image correction PCB but color and density correction and CMS correction
are not performed.

NOTE
• For details about the image correction PCB, image processing PCB and their data flows, refer to ☞ 50650.

4. Image data editing such as frame combination and front print combination is performed in the image
processing PCB.

5. Operation sequence
5. The image data goes through the laser control PCB and is output to the laser unit.

6. The laser unit exposes the paper.

50610 2/2
 Mirror AOM
VIDEO BOARD ATX motherboard

Media drive
PCI-
R laser R-AOM LVDS/ARC
driver
NET PCB
Bl LVDS
ase
r G-AOM
driver
G
la
se
r B-AOM
Media

driver

Laser control PCB Printer control PCB Processor control PCB

ARCNET
Data flow in data saving [32]

Polygon mirror ARCNET ARCNET

LVDS
ARCNET
Lens
Synchronous sensor

ARCNET
J/P455 J/P456
ARCNET
Image correction
PCB

50620
50620

D-ICE control PCB AFC/scanner

Prescanning data

control PCB
Actual scanning data

D-ICE PCB
Image processing
PCB

LVDS
PCB

[J485]
[J484A]
DIMM

Data change-over

Scratch mend PCB 1

Scratch mend PCB 2

Scratch mend PCB 1

Digital masking unit (option)

G072350

1/2
Data Flow Chart (32)

5. Operation sequence
 50620
Data Flow Chart (32)

z Input of this system operation is film scanning operation and output is media writing
operation (including the Bravo).

1. The scanner unit scans a film.

2. The D-ICE PCB detects scratches or dust on the film base layer and correct them. (Standard)
IMPORTANT
• The D-ICE PCB does not perform base layer scratch erasing for prescanning data.
• For details of scratch erasing in the D-ICE PCB, refer to ☞ 50660.

NOTE
• The optional Digital Masking Unit improves the correction of the scratch on the film.
• Those PCBs detect scratches and dust on the film and correct them.
• The data change-over PCB sorts the image data between those for scratch mend PCB 1 [J484A] and for scratch mend
PCB 1 [J485].

3. The image correction PCB performs image correction such as color and density correction, DSA, and
image rotation.

IMPORTANT

5. Operation sequence
• Prescanning data does not go through the image correction PCB.
• Prescanning data goes through the D-ICE PCB → the image processing PCB, and then it is sent to the PC as
the image data for PJP to be displayed on the monitor.

NOTE
• For details about the image correction PCB, image processing PCB and their data flows, refer to ☞ 50650.

4. The image processing PCB performs color correction of the image data such as CMS.

IMPORTANT
• When the data is output to a media, the image processing PCB does not perform image data editing such as
frame combination and front print combination.

5. The system outputs the image data to each media.

50620 2/2
 PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB (standard)
Mirror AOM
ATX

HDD
VIDEO motherboard
BOARD

(Standard)
R laser R-AOM
driver LVDS
Bl
ase
r G-AOM
CAU HDD (Option)

driver LVDS
G
la
se
r B-AOM
driver FLATBED
Printer control PCB SCANNER(A4)
Laser control PCB Processor control PCB

ARCNET
(Option)

Polygon mirror LVDS

ARCNET ARCNET
ARCNET
Lens LVDS
Synchronous sensor

ARCNET
J/P1350 J/P456 ARCNET
PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB

ARCNET

PCB
ARCNET-HUB PCB
Prescanning data

50630
HDD
50630

D-ICE control PCB AFC/scanner

Actual scanning data

control PCB PU control PCB

Image correction

PCB

DSP PCB

CD-R WRITER
Buffer

IEEE1394
(option)
ARCNET
Data flow to the CD-R external writing system [32]

D-ICE PCB
ATX motherboard
LVDS
Image processing PCB
PCB

[J485]
[J484A]
DIMM

PCB (option)
PCI-/ARCNET
Data change-over

CD-R external writing system

Scratch mend PCB 1

Scratch mend PCB 1

(option)
Scratch mend PCB 2

Digital masking unit (option)

G072347

1/2
Data Flow Chart (32)

5. Operation sequence
 50630
Data Flow Chart (32)

z Input of this system operation is film scanning operation and output is the CD-R
external writing system.

1. The scanner unit scans a film.

2. The D-ICE PCB detects scratches or dust on the film base layer and correct them. (Standard)
IMPORTANT
• The D-ICE PCB does not perform base layer scratch erasing for prescanning data.
• For details of scratch erasing in the D-ICE PCB, refer to ☞ 50660.

NOTE
• The optional Digital Masking Unit improves the correction of the scratch on the film.
• Those PCBs detect scratches and dust on the film and correct them.
• The data change-over PCB sorts the image data between those for scratch mend PCB 1 [J484A] and for scratch mend
PCB 1 [J485].

3. The image correction PCB performs image correction of actual scanning data such as color and
density correction, DSA, and image rotation.

IMPORTANT

5. Operation sequence
• Prescanning data does not go through the image correction PCB.
• Prescanning data goes through the D-ICE PCB → the image processing PCB, and then it is sent to the PC as
the image data for PJP to be displayed on the monitor.

NOTE
• For details about the image correction PCB, image processing PCB and their data flows, refer to ☞ 50650.

4. The image processing PCB performs color correction of the image data such as CMS.

IMPORTANT
• When the data is output to the CD-R external writing system, the image processing PCB does not perform
image data editing such as frame combination and front print combination.
• The buffer PCB does not perform color conversion.

5. The image data is sent to the buffer PCB of the CD-R external writing system from the image
processing PCB.

6. DSP PCB performs JPEG conversion and edge sharpening.

7. HDD saves the image data temporarily.

8. The image data is output to the CD-R external writing system from IEEE1394.

50630 2/2
 PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB (standard)
Mirror AOM
ATX
motherboard

HDD
VIDEO
BOARD

(Standard)
R laser R-AOM
driver LVDS
Bl
ase
r G-AOM
driver LVDS
G
Printing from CAU

la
se
r B-AOM
driver FLATBED
Printer control PCB SCANNER(A4)
Laser control PCB Processor control PCB
Output to the CAU (TYPE2)

ARCNET
Data flow to the CAU [32]

(Option)

(Option)
CAU HDD

Polygon mirror
LVDS
ARCNET ARCNET
ARCNET
Lens LVDS
Synchronous sensor

ARCNET
J/P456 ARCNET
PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB

J/P445 J/P455 ARCNET

ARCNET-HUB PCB

PCB

50640
50640

AFC/scanner

HDD
D-ICE control PCB
control PCB PU control PCB

PCB

DSP PCB

CD-R WRITER
Buffer

IEEE1394
(option)

Image correction
ARCNET
Prescanning data

D-ICE PCB
ATX motherboard
Image processing PCB LVDS
Output to the CAU (TYPE1)

PCB

[J485]
DIMM

[J484A]

PCB (option)
PCI-/ARCNET
CD-R external writing system
Data change-over

Scratch mend PCB 1

Scratch mend PCB 1

(option)
Scratch mend PCB 2

Digital masking unit (option)

G072354

1/3
Data Flow Chart (32)

5. Operation sequence
 50640
Data Flow Chart (32)

z Input of this system operation is film scanning operation and output is the CAU.
Writing data to the CAU (TYPE1: 12 bits)

1. The scanner unit scans a film.

2. The D-ICE PCB detects scratches or dust on the film base layer and correct them. (Standard)

IMPORTANT
• The D-ICE PCB does not perform base layer scratch erasing for prescanning data.
• For details of scratch erasing in the D-ICE PCB, refer to ☞ 50660.

NOTE
• The optional Digital Masking Unit improves the correction of the scratch on the film.
• Those PCBs detect scratches and dust on the film and correct them.
• The data change-over PCB sorts the image data between those for scratch mend PCB 1 [J484A] and for scratch mend
PCB 1 [J485].

3. The image data is output to the PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB (option) from the input memory in the image
processing PCB.

IMPORTANT

5. Operation sequence
• For details about the image processing PCB and the data flow, refer to ☞ 50650.
• In case of the CAU (TYPE1), if image correction, such as color and density correction, DSA and image
rotation, is performed, the information data and the image data are saved in the HDD of the CAU. In case of
reading from the CAU, the Correction value shows the value corrected.
• The image data saved in the CAU (TYPE1) is raw data for the scanner. It is not general data. It cannot be
used unless the QSS processes the data.

4. The image data is saved in the HDD of the CAU.

Writing data to the CAU (TYPE2: 8 bits)

1. The scanner unit scans a film.

2. The D-ICE PCB detects scratches or dust on the film base layer and correct them. (Standard)

IMPORTANT
• The D-ICE PCB does not perform base layer scratch erasing for prescanning data.
• For details of scratch erasing in the D-ICE PCB, refer to ☞ 50660.

NOTE
• The optional Digital Masking Unit improves the correction of the scratch on the film.
• Those PCBs detect scratches and dust on the film and correct them.
• The data change-over PCB sorts the image data between those for scratch mend PCB 1 [J484A] and for scratch mend
PCB 1 [J485].

3. The image data is output to the PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB (standard) from the composition processing
section in the image processing PCB.

IMPORTANT
• For details about the image processing PCB and the data flow, refer to ☞ 50650.

50640 2/3
 50640
Data Flow Chart (32)

• In case of the CAU (TYPE2), if image correction, such as color and density correction, DSA and image
rotation, is performed, the information data is not saved to the HDD of the CAU. In case of reading from the
CAU, all Correction value is N.
• Save the image data saved to the CAU (TYPE2) as JPEG data.

NOTE
• In case of CAU (TYPE2), you can save the composite image made using in the Edit mode, to the CAU.
• For the details about the difference between the CAU (TYPE1) and the CAU (TYPE2), refer to Compact Archive Unit
Operator's Manual, Difference between TYPE1 and TYPE2.

4. The image data is saved in the HDD of the CAU.

Printing from the CAU (TYPES 1 and 2)

1. The image data is output to the image processing PCB via standard PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB from
the HDD of the CAU.

2. The image correction PCB performs image correction such as color and density correction, DSA, and
image rotation.

NOTE
• For details about the image correction PCB, image processing PCB and their data flows, refer to ☞ 50650.

5. Operation sequence
3. Image data editing such as frame combination and front print combination is performed in the image
processing PCB.

4. The image data goes through the laser control PCB and is output to the laser unit.

5. The laser unit exposes the paper.

50640 3/3
 PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB Printing from the CAU (TYPE1 and TYPE2)
(Option) Printing from a media
Printing from the FB scanner
Index print
Sample print D-ICE PCB
Setup print
FLATBED
SCANNER(A4)
PCI-
LVDS/ARC J/P456
LVDS Image input section
NET PCB
Prescanning data

(standard)
Outputting to media
Actual scanning data

ATX
Input memory
motherboard

HDD

CAU HDD (Option)

(Standard)
VIDEO
BOARD Output to the CAU (TYPE1)
LVDS Image correction PCB
J/P445
Outputting to the CD-R external writing system

Outputting frame image from the HDD (standard)

Image processing PCB

J/P1350 CMS section

Media drive

50650
50650
Data flow in the image processing PCB [32]

LVDS Development memory

Composite
memory

HDD
Package print

PCB

DSP PCB

CD-R WRITER
Buffer

IEEE1394
Composition processing section
LVDS
Outputting to media
Output to the CAU (TYPE1)

Output to the CAU (TYPE2)

ATX motherboard Output to the CAU (TYPE2)

Outputting to the CD-R external Laser control PCB

writing system
Parts mounted on the image processing PCB

CD-R external writing system (option)

Printing from the CAU (TYPES 1 and 2), (others)

Laser unit

PCB (option)
PCI-/ARCNET

G072353

1/3
Data Flow Chart (32)

5. Operation sequence
 50650
Data Flow Chart (32)

z The route of image data in the image processing PCB is described as the system
operation.

1. The scanner unit scans a film.

2. The image data is sent to the image input section of the image processing PCB from the D-ICE PCB.
IMPORTANT
• The D-ICE PCB does not perform base layer scratch erasing for prescanning data.

3. The image input section of the image processing PCB sends the image data that has been input from
the D-ICE PCB to the input memory or LVDS cables.

4. When the image processing PCB is in process, its input memory stores the image data temporarily.

5. Image processing on the image correction PCB varies depending whether the input data is film or not.
☞ When the input media is film
☞ When the input media is not film
6. CMS section of the image processing PCB performs CMS correction.

5. Operation sequence
7. When the composition processing section of the image processing PCB is in process, its development
memory stores the image data temporarily.

8. The composition processing section of the image processing PCB combines the frame image or front
print image to the image data.

IMPORTANT
• The composition image such as frame image and front print is not saved in the CAU (TYPE1), a media or the
CD-R external writing system.
• In case of CAU (TYPE2), you can save the composite image made using in the Edit mode, to the CAU.

NOTE
• The frame data is sent from the HDD (standard) via the composite memory.

9. The image data goes through the laser control PCB and is output to the laser unit.

10. The laser unit exposes the paper.

z When the input media is film

1. The image correction PCB performs image correction such as color and density correction, DSA, and
image rotation.

2. Convert the image data which is input onto the image correction PCB from 12 bit to 8 bit.

IMPORTANT
• When printing from the CAU (type 1: 12 bit image data), take the same process as ☞ 2.

50650 2/3
 50650
Data Flow Chart (32)

• You can see the image data converted from 12 bit to 8 bit on the PC monitor even when processing from film
in the Edit mode. For this reason, you do not need to print in some cases.
If an abnormal image occurs, check the condition of input image in the Edit mode.

3. The image data is sent to the image processing PCB from the image correction PCB.

z When the input media is not film

1. The image correction PCB performs image correction such as color and density correction, DSA, and
image rotation.

2. The image data is sent to the image processing PCB from the image correction PCB.

IMPORTANT
• Setup print data and sample print data go through the image correction PCB but color and density correction
and CMS correction are not performed.

5. Operation sequence

50650 3/3
 50660
Data Flow Chart (32)

Data flow in the D-ICE PCB [32]

Actual scanning data (digital masking)

Actual scanning data (D-ICE is OFF)

Actual scanning data (standard)

Prescanning data

Adjustment data

Parts mounted on the D-ICE PCB

Option: Digital masking unit

D-ICE PCB

DIMM (Option)

5. Operation sequence
SUB1

Scratch mend PCB 2

(Option)

Data change-over PCB Scratch mend PCB 1

(Option) [J484A] (option)

Scratch mend PCB 1 [J485]

(Option)

MAIN

Image correction
PCB

Image processing
PCB

G072352

50660 1/2
 50660
Data Flow Chart (32)

z The route of image data in the D-ICE PCB is described as the system operation.
NOTE
• 1. The image data goes through SUB1 and MAIN whether processing is performed or not.
SUB1 (digital adjustment for the scanner such as shading)
MAIN (controlling output to the image processing PCB)
• 2. If DIMM is installed, the image data goes through it whether processing is performed or not.
• 3. D-ICE PCB does not perform scratch erasing for prescanning, but processing 1 above of SUB 1 and MAIN is performed.
• 4. Processing for the actual scanning (D-ICE is OFF) is the same as processing 3 above.
• 5. Adjustment indicates adjustments for the scanner such as the light source registration, light axis adjustment and focus
adjustment.

1. When scratch mend PCB 2 is in process, the DIMM stores the actual scanning data temporarily.
(Option)

NOTE
• Processing time of digital masking depends on how much scratches are on a film.

2. SUB1 of the D-ICE PCB detects scratches or dust on the film base layer and correct them. (Standard)

IMPORTANT
• The D-ICE PCB does not perform base layer scratch erasing for prescanning data.

5. Operation sequence
NOTE
• This performs digital adjustment such as shading for the scanner.

3. Scratch mend PCB 2, the data change-over PCB, scratch mend PCB 1 [J484A], and scratch mend
PCB 1 [J485] detect the scratches and dust on a film and correct them. (Option)

NOTE
• Three scratch mend PCBs share the tasks to improve the processing speed of scratch erasing.
• The data change-over PCB sorts the image data between those for scratch mend PCB 1 [J484A] and for scratch mend
PCB 1 [J485].

4. MAIN of the D-ICE PCB detects scratches or dust on the film base layer and correct them. (Standard)

IMPORTANT
• The D-ICE PCB does not perform base layer scratch erasing for prescanning data.

NOTE
• Besides detecting and correcting the scratches and dust on the film base layer, this controls D-ICE totally, communicates
with the D-ICE control PCB, and controls outputting image data to the image processing PCB.

5. The image data is sent to the image processing PCB from the D-ICE PCB.

IMPORTANT
• Prescanning data goes through the D-ICE PCB → the image processing PCB, and then it is sent to the PC as
the image data for PJP to be displayed on the monitor. See ☞ 50600.
• Prescanning data and test print data for setup do not go through the digital masking unit. Scratch erasing
process for base layer (standard) is not performed in D-ICE PCB.

NOTE
• The optional Digital Masking Unit improves the correction of the scratch on the film.
• Those PCBs detect scratches and dust on the film and correct them.

50660 2/2
 50670 Data Flow Chart [Stand Alone Scanner] (32)

Data Flow Chart [Stand Alone Scanner] (32)

Data flow of the Net Scan mode [Stand Alone Scanner] [32]

Actual scanning data

Prescanning data

External PC

LAN PORT

VIDEO
LAN BOARD
BOARD
ATX motherboard

ATX
motherboard

HDD

LVDS
VIDEO BOARD

LVDS/ARC
NET PCB
PCI-

AFC/scanner

DIMM
control PCB

5. Operation sequence
ARCNET
ARCNET

Scratch mend PCB 2

ARCNET

Data change-over
D-ICE PCB

Digital masking unit (option)

LVDS

PCB
D-ICE control PCB

Scratch mend PCB 1

[J484A]

Scratch mend PCB 1

[J485]
J/P456
J/P455

Image correction

Image processing
LVDS

PCB

PCB

G076401

50670 1/2
 50670
Data Flow Chart [Stand Alone Scanner] (32)

z Input for this system operation is performed by film scanning operation and the
external PC.

1. The scanner unit scans a film.

2. The D-ICE PCB detects scratches or dust on the film base layer and correct them. (Standard)
IMPORTANT
• The D-ICE PCB does not perform base layer scratch erasing for prescanning data.
• For details of scratch erasing in the D-ICE PCB, refer to ☞ 50660.

NOTE
• The optional Digital Masking Unit improves the correction of the scratch on the film.
• Those PCBs detect scratches and dust on the film and correct them.
• The data change-over PCB sorts the image data between those for scratch mend PCB 1 [J484A] and for scratch mend
PCB 1 [J485].

3. The image correction PCB performs image correction such as color and density correction, DSA,
rotation and cropping.

IMPORTANT

5. Operation sequence
• Prescanning data does not go through the image correction PCB.
• Prescanning data goes through the D-ICE PCB → the image processing PCB, and then it is sent to the
external PC as the image data for PJP.

NOTE
• For details about the image correction PCB, image processing PCB and their data flows, refer to ☞ 50680.

4. The image processing PCB performs color correction of the image data such as CMS.

IMPORTANT
• When 48bit is selected, the image processing PCB does not perform color correction of the image data such
as CMS.

5. The image data is output to the external PC via QSS computer.

50670 2/2
 50680
Data Flow Chart [Stand Alone Scanner] (32)

Data flow in the Image processing PCB [Stand Alone Scanner] [32]

24 bit scanning data 48 bit scanning data

Prescanning data Parts mounted on the image processing PCB

Composition processing section

Image correction PCB

Development memory
Image input section

Input memory

CMS section
D-ICE PCB

Image processing PCB

5. Operation sequence
Composite
memory
J/P456

J/P445

J/P1350
LVDS
LVDS
PCI-LVDS/ARCNET

BOARD
VIDEO
PCB (standard)

VIDEO
BOARD
motherboard

motherboard

LAN
ATX

BOARD
ATX

LAN PORT
HDD

Media drive HDD

(Standard) External PC

G076402

50680 1/2
 50680
Data Flow Chart [Stand Alone Scanner] (32)

z The route of image data in the image processing PCB is described as the system
operation.

1. The scanner unit scans a film.

2. The image data is sent to the image input section of the image processing PCB from the D-ICE PCB.
IMPORTANT
• The D-ICE PCB does not perform base layer scratch erasing for prescanning data.

3. The image input section of the image processing PCB sends the image data that has been input from
the D-ICE PCB to the input memory or LVDS cables.

4. When the image processing PCB is in process, its input memory stores the image data temporarily.

5. The image correction PCB performs image correction such as color and density correction, DSA,
rotation and cropping.

6. The image data is sent to the image processing PCB from the image correction PCB.

5. Operation sequence
IMPORTANT
• When 48bit is selected, the image data is output from the image processing PCB via J/P456 (LVDS)→QSS
computer to the external PC.

7. CMS section of the image processing PCB performs CMS correction.

8. When the composition processing section of the image processing PCB is in process, its development
memory stores the image data temporarily.

9. The image data is output to the external PC via QSS computer.

50680 2/2
 ATX motherboard

PC-laser
interface
Mirror LVDS PCB/ARCN
ET PCB
Laser unit
Media drive

PC-scanner
R laser R-AOM interface
driver
PCB/ARCN
Bl LVDS
ase
r G-AOM ET PCB
AOM driver HDD
Data flow in printing [32SD]

G
la
se
r B-AOM Laser control PCB Printer control PCB Processor control PCB
driver

ARCNET

Polygon mirror

50700
50700

ARCNET
Synchronous sensor
Lens ARCNET
Print data

Switch control PCB

Prescanning data
Actual scanning data

AFC/scanner
control PCB
Data coming from the media drive

G082833

1/2
Data Flow Chart (32SD)
Data Flow Chart (32SD)

5. Operation sequence
 50700
Data Flow Chart (32SD)

z Input of this system operation is film scanning operation and output is printing
operation.

1. When input is film, scan the film in the scanner unit.

NOTE
• Pre-scanning data is used for index print.

2. Process data by the PC-scanner interface PCB before processing the image with PC.
NOTE
• PC-scanner interface PCB rectifies the sub-scanning direction (pixel gap of CCD of RGB).

3. Processing the image with PC.

IMPORTANT
• Scratch erasing is performed by DIGITAL ICE Technology Correction.

NOTE
• Image correction of actual scanning data such as color and density correction, DSA, and image rotation are performed on
PC.
• Image data editing such as frame combination, front print combination and paper fitting is performed on PC.

5. Operation sequence
• Prescanning data goes through the PC-scanner interface PCB, and then it is sent to the PC as the image data for PJP to be
displayed on the monitor.
• The data sent from a media drive as well as the processing method of data of coming from a film is printed via the HDD.

4. The image data goes through the laser control PCB and is output to the laser unit.

5. The laser unit exposes the paper.

50700 2/2
 ATX motherboard

PC-laser
interface
PCB/ARCN
Mirror LVDS ET PCB Media drive

Laser unit

PC-scanner
R laser R-AOM
driver interface
PCB/ARCN
Bl LVDS
AOM
ase
r G-AOM ET PCB
driver HDD
G
la
se
r B-AOM Laser control PCB Printer control PCB Processor control PCB
Data flow in data saving [32SD]

driver

ARCNET
Polygon mirror

50710
50710

ARCNET
Synchronous sensor
Lens ARCNET
Saving Data

Switch control PCB

Prescanning data
Actual scanning data

AFC/scanner control PCB

G082834

1/2
Data Flow Chart (32SD)

5. Operation sequence
 50710
Data Flow Chart (32SD)

z Input of this system operation is film scanning operation and output is media writing
operation (including the Bravo).

1. The scanner unit scans a film.

NOTE
• Pre-scanning data is used for index print.

2. Process data by the PC-scanner interface PCB before processing the image with PC.
NOTE
• PC-scanner interface PCB rectifies the sub-scanning direction (pixel gap of CCD of RGB).

3. Processing the image with PC.

IMPORTANT
• Scratch erasing is performed on DIGITAL ICE Technology Correction PC.

NOTE
• Image correction of actual scanning data such as color and density correction, DSA, and image rotation are performed on
PC.
• Image data editing such as frame combination, front print combination and paper fitting is performed on PC.

5. Operation sequence
• Pre-scanning data goes through the PC-scanner interface PCB, and then it is sent to the PC as the image data for PJP to
be displayed on the monitor.

4. On the PC, the color and density correction of scanning data is preformed and the image data is
written to each media.

50710 2/2
 ATX motherboard

PC-laser
interface
PCB/ARCN
ET PCB
Data flow to the CAU [32SD]

LVDS

PC-scanner
interface
PCB/ARCN
LVDS
ET PCB CAU HDD
HDD

50730
50730

Laser control PCB Processor control PCB

Printer control PCB
ARCNET

Laser unit

R laser R-AOM
driver ARCNET
Bl
ase G-AOM ARCNET
r
Prescanning data

driver
G
la
se
r B-AOM
driver

PU PCB
Switch control PCB
Writing data to the CAU (TYPE1, 2)
Printing from the CAU (TYPES 1 and 2)

AFC/scanner
control PCB

G082835

1/3
Data Flow Chart (32SD)

5. Operation sequence
 50730
Data Flow Chart (32SD)

z Input of this system operation is film scanning operation and output is the CAU.
Writing data to the CAU (TYPE1, 2)
NOTE
• The operations of data writing to the CAUs (TYPE1: 12 bit, TYPE2: 8 bit) are the same.

1. The scanner unit scans a film.

NOTE
• Pre-scanning data is used for index print.

2. Process data by the PC-scanner interface PCB before processing the image with PC.
NOTE
• PC-scanner interface PCB rectifies the sub-scanning direction (pixel gap of CCD of RGB).

3. Processing the image with PC.

IMPORTANT
• Scratch erasing is performed by DIGITAL ICE Technology Correction.

NOTE

5. Operation sequence
• Image correction of actual scanning data such as color and density correction, DSA, and image rotation are performed on
PC.
• Image data editing such as frame combination, front print combination and paper fitting is performed on PC.
• Prescanning data goes through the PC-scanner interface PCB, and then it is sent to the PC as the image data for PJP to be
displayed on the monitor.
• The data sent from a media drive as well as the processing method of data of coming from a film is saved to the CAU via
the HDD.

4. On the PC, the color and density correction of scanning data is preformed and the image data is saved
to the HDD of CAU.

IMPORTANT
• In case of the CAU (TYPE1), if image correction, such as color and density correction, DSA and image
rotation, is performed, the information data and the image data are saved in the HDD of the CAU. In case of
reading from the CAU, the Correction value shows the value corrected.
• The image data saved in the CAU (TYPE1) is raw data for the scanner. It is not general data. It cannot be
used unless the QSS processes the data.
• In case of the CAU (TYPE2), if image correction, such as color and density correction, DSA and image
rotation, is performed, the information data is not saved to the HDD of the CAU. In case of reading from the
CAU, all Correction value is N.
• Save the image data saved to the CAU (TYPE2) as JPEG data.

NOTE
• In case of CAU (TYPE2), you can save the composite image made using in the Edit mode, to the CAU.
• For the details about the difference between the CAU (TYPE1) and the CAU (TYPE2), refer to Compact Archive Unit
Operator's Manual, Difference between TYPE1 and TYPE2.
Printing from the CAU (TYPES 1 and 2)

1. The image data is output to the laser control PCB via standard PC laser interface PCB from the HDD
of the CAU. Image data is outputted to the laser control PCB via HDD of CAU, standard HDD, and the
PC-laser interface PCB.

50730 2/3
 50730
Data Flow Chart (32SD)

2. Outputs the image data to the laser unit.

3. The laser unit exposes the paper.

5. Operation sequence

50730 3/3
 50800 Data Flow Chart (DLS specification)

Data Flow Chart (DLS specification)

Data flow around the DLS System Management Software [DLS

specification]

Input

Editing

Output

Network Order (Option by Kodak) Scanner Media

Desk section

PC LAN PCI-
Media drive
LVDS/ARCNET
PCB

System Management

5. Operation sequence
Software

Editing

HDD (system)
KIAS (Z:) WIP (V:) PrintBuf (Y:)

HDD (archive)
Archive (U:)

Image processing
PCB

Printer Laser control PCB

QSS System Program

G072417

50800 1/2
 50800
Data Flow Chart (DLS specification)

z Data flow around the DLS System Management Software is described.

NOTE
• For details about the data flow of scanner and printer, refer to the descriptions below.
• Data flow in printing (negative/positive) [DLS specification]
☞ 50810
• Data flow in data saving [DLS specification]
☞ 50820
• Data flow in the image processing PCB [DLS specification]
☞ 50830
• Data flow in the D-ICE PCB [DLS specification]
☞ 50840

1. The image data is read into WIP (V:) from the input devices such as scanner or media.
NOTE
• For the Network Order (Option by Kodak), the image data input to KIAS (Z:) from the network device is transferred to
WIP (V:).

2. The image is edited in the Preview display.

NOTE
• The sequence of editing operations such as color and density correction, image rotation, scaling, front print, index print

5. Operation sequence
and template composition is performed all in the System Management Software.

3. By pressing Start Job, the edited image data is saved in WIP (V:) and transferred to PrintBuf (Y:).

4. The image data is transferred from PrintBuf (Y:) to each output device such as printer, media and
archive.

50800 2/2
 AOM ATX motherboard
Mirror VIDEO BOARD

Media drive
PCI-
R laser R-AOM
driver LVDS/ARC
NET PCB
Bl LVDS
ase
r G-AOM (standard) HDD
driver
G
la
se
r B-AOM
driver
Laser control PCB Printer control PCB Processor control PCB

ARCNET
Polygon mirror
LVDS ARCNET ARCNET
ARCNET
Lens
Synchronous sensor

ARCNET
J/P455 J/P456

ARCNET

Image correction
Data flow in printing [DLS specification]

PCB

50810
50810

Print data

D-ICE control PCB AFC/scanner

Image data

control PCB
Prescanning data
Actual scanning data

Image processing D-ICE PCB

PCB

LVDS
PCB

[J485]
[J484A]
DIMM

Data change-over

Scratch mend PCB 1

Scratch mend PCB 1

Scratch mend PCB 2

Digital masking unit (option)

G076404

1/2
Data Flow Chart (DLS specification)

5. Operation sequence
 50810
Data Flow Chart (DLS specification)

z Input is film scanning operation or the image data and output is printing operation.

1. When input is film, scan the film in the scanner unit.

NOTE
• For DLS specification, prescanning data is used only as the data for the film stop position check and the frame position
analysis.
Actual scan data is used for index print and preview.

2. Scanning data detects scratches or dust on the film base layer and corrects them on the D-ICE PCB.
(Standard)

IMPORTANT
• For details of scratch erasing in the D-ICE PCB, refer to ☞ 50840.

NOTE
• The optional Digital Masking Unit improves the correction of the scratch on the film.
• Those PCBs detect scratches and dust on the film and correct them.
• The data change-over PCB sorts the image data between those for scratch mend PCB 1 [J484A] and for scratch mend
PCB 1 [J485].

3. Scanning data sends the image data to HDD via D-ICE PCB → Image processing PCB → PCI-
LVDS/ARCNET PCB → ATX mother board, to display the data on the monitor.

5. Operation sequence
NOTE
• For details, refer to ☞ 50800.

4. When input is image, the image data is transferred to HDD from the media drive.
NOTE
• For details, refer to ☞ 50800.

5. On the computer, the color and density correction of scanning data is performed and the print data is
transferred to the image processing PCB.

NOTE
• For details, refer to ☞ 50800.

6. On the image processing PCB, the paper fitting of the image is performed and the image data is output
to the laser unit via the laser control PCB.

7. The laser unit exposes the paper.

50810 2/2
 AOM ATX motherboard
Mirror VIDEO BOARD

Media drive
PCI-
R laser R-AOM
driver LVDS/ARC
Bl LVDS NET PCB
ase
r G-AOM (standard) HDD
driver
Media

G
la
se
r B-AOM
driver
Laser control PCB Printer control PCB Processor control PCB

ARCNET
Polygon mirror LVDS ARCNET ARCNET
ARCNET
Lens

ARCNET
Synchronous sensor J/P455 J/P456

ARCNET

Image correction
PCB

50820
50820

D-ICE control PCB AFC/scanner

Saving Data

control PCB
Scanning data
Data flow in data saving [DLS specification]

Prescanning data

Image processing D-ICE PCB

PCB

LVDS
PCB

[J485]
[J484A]
DIMM

Data change-over

Scratch mend PCB 1

Scratch mend PCB 2

Scratch mend PCB 1

Digital masking unit (option)

G076405

1/2
Data Flow Chart (DLS specification)

5. Operation sequence
 50820
Data Flow Chart (DLS specification)

z Input of this system operation is film scanning operation and output is media writing
operation.

1. The scanner unit scans a film.

2. Scanning data detects scratches or dust on the film base layer and corrects them on the D-ICE PCB.
(Standard)

IMPORTANT
• For details of scratch erasing in the D-ICE PCB, refer to ☞ 50840.

NOTE
• The optional Digital Masking Unit improves the correction of the scratch on the film.
• Those PCBs detect scratches and dust on the film and correct them.
• The data change-over PCB sorts the image data between those for scratch mend PCB 1 [J484A] and for scratch mend
PCB 1 [J485].

3. Scanning data sends the image data to HDD via D-ICE PCB → Image processing PCB → PCI-
LVDS/ARCNET PCB → ATX mother board, to display the data on the monitor.

NOTE
• For details, refer to ☞ 50800.

5. Operation sequence
4. On the computer, the color and density correction of scanning data is performed and the image data is
written to each media.

NOTE
• For details, refer to ☞ 50800.

50820 2/2
 Printing from archive
Printing from a media
Index print
Sample print
Setup print PCI-LVDS/ARCNET
PCB (standard)
D-ICE PCB

Archive
ATX J/P456

Media drive
LVDS Image input section
motherboard
Scanning data

Prescanning data
Printing from a media

Input memory

HDD
VIDEO

(Standard)
BOARD

J/P445
LVDS Image correction PCB

Image processing PCB

J/P1350 CMS section

50830
50830

Development memory
Composite
Print data

memory

Composition processing section

Data flow in the image processing PCB [DLS specification]

Laser control PCB

Parts mounted on the image processing PCB

Laser unit

G076406

1/2
Data Flow Chart (DLS specification)

5. Operation sequence
 50830
Data Flow Chart (DLS specification)

z The route of image data in the image processing PCB is described as the system
operation.

1. The scanner unit scans a film.

2. Scanning data transfers the image data to the image input section of the image processing PCB from
the D-ICE PCB.

NOTE
• For DLS specification, prescanning data is used only as the data for the film stop position check and the frame position
check.

3. Scanning data transfers the image data, which has been input from the D-ICE PCB in the image input
section of the image processing PCB, to the LVDS cables via the input memory.

4. Scanning data sends the image data to HDD via PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB → ATX mother board, to
display the data on the monitor.

5. On the computer, the color and density correction of scanning data is performed and the print data is
transferred to the image correction PCB.

5. Operation sequence
NOTE
• When printing from archive or media, print via HDD (standard).

6. Paper fitting of image is performed on the image correction PCB.

7. The image data is sent to the image processing PCB from the image correction PCB.

8. Without processing in the CMS section, Development memory and Composition processing section on
the image processing PCB, the image data is output to the laser unit via the laser control PCB.

NOTE
• When the composition processing section of the image processing PCB is in process, its development memory stores the
image data temporarily.

9. The laser unit exposes the paper.

50830 2/2
 50840
Data Flow Chart (DLS specification)

Data flow in the D-ICE PCB [DLS specification]

Scanning data (digital masking)

Scanning data (D-ICE is OFF)

Scanning data (standard)

Prescanning data

Adjustment data

Parts mounted on the D-ICE PCB

Option: Digital masking unit

D-ICE PCB

DIMM (Option)

5. Operation sequence
SUB1

Scratch mend PCB 2

(Option)

Data change-over PCB Scratch mend PCB 1

(Option) [J484A] (option)

Scratch mend PCB 1 [J485]

(Option)

MAIN

Image correction
PCB

Image processing
PCB

G072352

50840 1/2
 50840
Data Flow Chart (DLS specification)

z The route of image data in the D-ICE PCB is described as the system operation.
NOTE
• 1. The image data goes through SUB1 and MAIN whether processing is performed or not.
SUB1 (digital adjustment for the scanner such as shading)
MAIN (controlling output to the image processing PCB)
• 2. If DIMM is installed, the image data goes through it whether processing is performed or not.
• 3. For scanning data (D-ICE is OFF), erasing scratches is not performed on the D-ICE PCB. However, the above 1 process of
SUB1 and MAIN is performed.
• 4. Adjustment indicates adjustments for the scanner such as the light source registration, light axis adjustment and focus
adjustment.
• For DLS specification, prescanning data is used only as the data for the film stop position check and the frame position check.

1. When the scratch mend PCB 2 is in process, the DIMM stores the scanning data temporarily. (Option)
NOTE
• Processing time of digital masking depends on how much scratches are on a film.

2. SUB1 of the D-ICE PCB detects scratches or dust on the film base layer and correct them. (Standard)
NOTE
• This performs digital adjustment such as shading for the scanner.

5. Operation sequence
3. Scratch mend PCB 2, the data change-over PCB, scratch mend PCB 1 [J484A], and scratch mend
PCB 1 [J485] detect the scratches and dust on a film and correct them. (Option)

NOTE
• Three scratch mend PCBs share the tasks to improve the processing speed of scratch erasing.
• The data change-over PCB sorts the image data between those for scratch mend PCB 1 [J484A] and for scratch mend
PCB 1 [J485].

4. MAIN of the D-ICE PCB detects scratches or dust on the film base layer and correct them. (Standard)
NOTE
• Besides detecting and correcting the scratches and dust on the film base layer, this controls D-ICE totally, communicates
with the D-ICE control PCB, and controls outputting image data to the image processing PCB.

5. The image data is sent to the image processing PCB from the D-ICE PCB.
IMPORTANT
• Test print for setup does not go through the digital masking unit. Scratch erasing process for base layer
(standard) is not performed in D-ICE PCB.

NOTE
• The optional Digital Masking Unit improves the correction of the scratch on the film.
• Those PCBs detect scratches and dust on the film and correct them.

50840 2/2
 55000 Paper path diagram

Paper path diagram

Paper path diagram

The following diagram shows the paper advance path in the printer by dotted lines.

Exposure advance unit Paper advance unit 1 Arm unit 2 Paper advance unit 2

Paper magazine A2

Processor loading unit

Laser unit

CVP unit

Paper cutter unit

Arm unit 1
Paper magazine B

Paper supply unit A2

5. Operation sequence
Paper magazine C

Paper magazine A Paper supply unit A Paper supply unit

G068369
The following diagram shows the paper advance path in the processor by dotted lines.
Print conveyor unit

No. 1 upper guide

Dryer rack

Processing tanks and processing

racks

G082012

55000 1/1
 55100 Paper advance operation

Paper advance operation

Paper supply operation (loading operation)

This section explains how the paper is advanced to the exposure advance unit by arm unit 1 since the paper is loaded.
NOTE
• Paper supply operation (loading operation) varies by the paper advance length.
• ☞ When the paper advance length is 113.5 mm or less
• ☞ When the paper advance length is between 113.6 mm and 165.5 mm
• ☞ When the paper advance length is 165.6 mm or more

z When the paper advance length is 113.5 mm or less

Pressure release motor A2 Paper supply motor A2
Paper end sensor A2

Paper advance motor 1

Paper magazine motor A2

Paper magazine B

Paper end sensor B

Paper magazine A2 Paper magazine motor B

5. Operation sequence
Width change motor
A2 Paper supply motor B/C

Paper end sensor C

Paper magazine A

Paper loading sensor

Paper magazine motor A

Paper supply motor A

Paper magazine motor C
Paper end sensor A
Paper magazine C

Note: The thick solid line indicates the paper.

G068487

1. Paper loading starts.

Paper magazines A, B and C

Goes to Step 8.
Paper magazine A2
Goes to Step 2.

2. The paper guide in the paper supply unit A2 moves.

• Width change motor A2: ON/OFF
When the paper guide is on the home position
• It moves to the paper width of paper to be processed.

55100 1/7
 55100
Paper advance operation

When the paper guide is at the different position from the paper width of paper to be processed
• The paper guide returns to the home position, and then it moves to the paper width of paper to be loaded.
When the paper width of paper to be loaded and that of paper processed just before it are same
• Goes to Step 3.
When the paper guide does not operate
• No. 6200
Width Change Motor A2 operation error.

3. Advance roller A2 is pressured.

• Pressure release motor A2: ON
When the pressure release motor does not operate
• No. 6199
Pressure Release Motor A2 operation error.

4. The paper is advanced.

• Paper magazine motor A2: ON
• Paper supply motor A/A2: ON

5. The paper passes through the paper end sensor.

5. Operation sequence
When the paper end sensor A2 cannot detect any paper
• No. 6195
Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A2

6. Specified length of paper is advanced until the paper edge reaches just before the advance roller A.
• Paper magazine motor A2: OFF
• Paper supply motor A/A2: OFF

7. The advance roller A2 repeats the pressure release/pressure twice.

• Pressure release motor A2: ON
When the pressure release motor does not operate
• No. 6199
Pressure Release Motor A2 operation error.

8. The paper is advanced.

• Paper magazine motor A/A2/B/C: ON
• Paper supply motor A/A2/B/C: ON
Paper magazines A, B and C
Goes to Step 9.
Paper magazine A2
Goes to Step 10.

9. The paper passes through the paper end sensor.

When paper end sensors A/B/C cannot detect the paper

• No. 6012, No. 6201
Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A
• No. 6013

55100 2/7
 55100
Paper advance operation

Paper did not load. Paper Magazine B

• No. 6112
Could not load the paper. Paper Magazine C

10. The paper passes through the paper loading sensor.

When the paper loading sensor cannot detect any paper

• No. 6012, No. 6201
Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A
• No. 6013
Paper did not load. Paper Magazine B
• No. 6112
Could not load the paper. Paper Magazine C
• No. 6195
Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A2
Paper magazines A, B and C
Goes to Step 12.
Paper magazine A2
Goes to Step 11.

11. The pressure of the advance roller A2 is released.

5. Operation sequence
• Pressure release motor A2: ON
When the pressure release motor does not operate
• No. 6199
Pressure Release Motor A2 operation error.

12. Condition is confirmed.

Loading for the first time after turning on the power supply or open/close the printer door
Goes to Step 13.
Conditions other than above
Goes to Step 14.

13. Performs magazine initial operation.

Magazine initial operation is the operation that rewind the paper until the paper end sensor is not detected, and next advance
the paper to the position where it passed through the paper loading sensor again.
• Paper magazine motor A/A2/B/C: ON/OFF
• Paper supply motor A/A2/B/C: ON/OFF
If paper end sensor A/A2/B/C cannot detect the papers in rewinding paper and in re-advancing, and if
paper loading sensor cannot detect the papers in re-advancing
• No. 6012, No. 6201
Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A
• No. 6013
Paper did not load. Paper Magazine B
• No. 6112
Could not load the paper. Paper Magazine C
• No. 6195
Paper did not load. Paper Magazine A2

14. The paper is advanced for the paper length.

• Paper magazine motor A/A2/B/C: ON/OFF

55100 3/7
 55100
Paper advance operation

• Paper supply motor A/A2/B/C: ON/OFF

• Paper advance motor 1: ON/OFF

15. The paper is cut.

• Cut motor: ON/OFF
When cutting is not completed:
• No. 6016
Paper Cutter operation error.

16. Paper is advanced to Arm unit 1 receiving position.

• Paper advance motor 1: ON/OFF
When arm unit 1 is not on standby in receiving position
• The paper stays at the paper standby position until arm unit 1 comes down to its receiving position.

17. Loading and cutting are completed.

z When the paper advance length is between 113.6 mm and 165.5 mm

Pressure release motor Paper supply motor A2
Paper end sensor A2 A2

5. Operation sequence
Paper advance motor 1
Paper magazine motor A2

Paper magazine B

Paper end sensor B

Paper magazine A2 Paper magazine motor B

Width change motor

Paper supply motor B/C
A2
Paper end sensor C

Paper magazine A

Paper loading sensor

Paper magazine motor A

Paper supply motor A

Paper magazine motor C
Paper end sensor A
Paper magazine C

Note: The thick solid line indicates the paper.

G068488

IMPORTANT
• Step 1 to Step 13 is common regardless of the paper advance length. For details, refer to ☞ When the paper
advance length is 113.5 mm or less.

55100 4/7
 55100
Paper advance operation

1. Paper loading starts.

2. The paper guide in the paper supply unit A2 moves.

3. Advance roller A2 is pressured.

4. The paper is advanced.

5. The paper passes through the paper end sensor.

6. Specified length of paper is advanced until the paper edge reaches just before the advance roller A.

7. The advance roller A2 repeats the pressure release/pressure twice.

8. The paper is advanced.

9. The paper passes through the paper end sensor.

5. Operation sequence
10. The paper passes through the paper loading sensor.

11. The pressure of the advance roller A2 is released.

12. Condition is confirmed.

13. Performs magazine initial operation.

14. Paper is advanced to Arm unit 1 receiving position.

• Paper magazine motor A/A2/B/C: ON
• Paper supply motor A/A2/B/C: ON
• Paper advance motor 1: ON
When arm unit 1 is not on standby in receiving position
• The paper stays at the paper standby position until arm unit 1 comes down to its receiving position.

15. The paper is advanced for the paper length.

• Paper magazine motor A/A2/B/C: ON/OFF
• Paper supply motor A/A2/B/C: ON/OFF
• Paper advance motor 1: ON/OFF

IMPORTANT
• Arm unit 1 advances the paper at the same speed of loading.
☞ 55200

16. The paper is cut.

• Cut motor: ON/OFF

55100 5/7
 55100
Paper advance operation

When cutting is not completed:

• No. 6016
Paper Cutter operation error.

17. Loading and cutting are completed.

z When the paper advance length is 165.6 mm or more

Pressure release motor Paper supply motor A2

Paper end sensor A2
A2

Paper advance motor 1

Paper magazine motor A2

Paper magazine B

Paper end sensor B

Paper magazine motor B

Paper magazine A2

Width change motor Paper supply motor B/C

A2

5. Operation sequence
Paper end sensor C

Paper magazine A

Paper loading sensor

Paper magazine motor A

Paper supply motor A

Paper magazine motor C
Paper end sensor A
Paper magazine C

Note: The thick solid line indicates the paper.

G068489

IMPORTANT
• Step 1 to Step 13 is common regardless of the paper advance length. For details, refer to ☞ When the paper
advance length is 113.5 mm or less.

1. Paper loading starts.

2. The paper guide in the paper supply unit A2 moves.

3. Advance roller A2 is pressured.

4. The paper is advanced.

5. The paper passes through the paper end sensor.

55100 6/7
 55100
Paper advance operation

6. Specified length of paper is advanced until the paper edge reaches just before the advance roller A.

7. The advance roller A2 repeats the pressure release/pressure twice.

8. The paper is advanced.

9. The paper passes through the paper end sensor.

10. The paper passes through the paper loading sensor.

11. The pressure of the advance roller A2 is released.

12. Condition is confirmed.

13. Performs magazine initial operation.

14. Paper is advanced to Arm unit 1 receiving position.

5. Operation sequence
• Paper magazine motor A/A2/B/C: ON/OFF
• Paper supply motor A/A2/B/C: ON/OFF
• Paper advance motor 1: ON/OFF
When arm unit 1 is not on standby in receiving position
• The paper stays at the paper standby position until arm unit 1 comes down to its receiving position.

15. The loading is completed.

IMPORTANT
• If the paper advance length is 165.6 mm and more, paper cut operation is performed in paper supply
operation (arm unit 1 operation).
☞ 55200

55100 7/7
 55200
Paper advance operation

Paper supply operation (arm unit 1 operation)

This section describes how arm unit 1 carries the loaded paper to the exposure advance unit.
NOTE
• Paper supply operation (arm unit 1 operation) varies by the paper advance length.
• ☞ When the paper advance length is 165.5 mm or less
• ☞ When the paper advance length is between 165.6 mm and 392.5 mm
• ☞ When the paper advance length is between 395.6 mm and 466.5 mm
• ☞ When the paper advance length is 466.6 mm or more

z When the paper advance length is 165.5 mm or less

1. Arm unit 1 pressures the loaded paper.

• Paper hold motor: ON (pressured)/OFF
When the paper hold sensor does not turn dark:
• No. 6101
Paper Hold Motor operation error.

Paper advance rollers

5. Operation sequence
Paper hold sensor

Paper hold motor

Note: The thick solid line indicates the paper.

G068490

2. Arm unit 1 advances paper to the exposure advance unit.

• Paper supply arm motors (right and left): ON (forward)/OFF
• Paper magazine motor A/A2/B/C: OFF
• Paper supply motor A/A2/B/C: OFF
• Paper advance motor 1: ON
When zigzagging correction sensors (right and left) do not turn dark:
• No. 6135
Arm Unit 1 operation error.

55200 1/21
 55200
Paper advance operation

IMPORTANT
• Arm unit 1 advances the paper at the same speed of loading until the paper passes through the paper
advance rollers.

Paper supply arm motor (right or left)

Paper supply motor A2

Paper magazine motor A2 Zigzagging correction sensor (right or left)

Paper advance motor 1

Paper magazine B

Paper magazine motor B

Paper magazine A2

Paper supply motor B/C

5. Operation sequence
Paper magazine A

Paper magazine motor A

Paper supply motor A

Paper magazine motor C

Note: The thick solid line indicates the paper. Paper magazine C

G068491

3. The zigzag correction is performed.

• Paper supply arm motors (right and left): ON/OFF
NOTE
• The zigzag correction is performed after paper advance operation stops.

4. The paper is transferred to the exposure advance unit, and then arm unit 1 releases pressure.
• Paper hold motor: ON (released)/OFF
When the paper hold sensor does not turn light:
• No. 6101
Paper Hold Motor operation error.

55200 2/21
 55200
Paper advance operation

Paper hold sensor

Paper hold motor

5. Operation sequence
Note: The thick solid line indicates the paper.

G068492

5. Arm unit 1 moves to the paper receiving standby position.

• Paper supply arm motors (right and left): ON (reverse)/OFF
When zigzagging correction sensors (right and left) do not turn light:
• No. 6135
Arm Unit 1 operation error.

55200 3/21
 55200
Paper advance operation

Paper supply arm motor (right or left)

Zigzagging correction sensor (right or left)

5. Operation sequence
Note: The thick solid line indicates the paper.

G068493

z When the paper advance length is between 165.6 mm and 392.5 mm

1. Arm unit 1 pressures the loaded paper.

• Paper hold motor: ON (pressured)/OFF
When the paper hold sensor does not turn dark:
• No. 6101
Paper Hold Motor operation error.

55200 4/21
 55200
Paper advance operation

Paper hold sensor

Paper hold motor

5. Operation sequence
Note: The thick solid line indicates the paper.

G068494

2. Arm unit 1 and the paper are advanced for the paper length.
• Paper supply arm motors (right and left): ON (forward)/OFF
• Paper magazine motor A/A2/B/C: ON
• Paper supply motor A/A2/B/C: ON
• Paper advance motor 1: ON

IMPORTANT
• Arm unit 1 advances the paper at the same speed of loading.

55200 5/21
 55200
Paper advance operation

Paper supply motor A2

Paper magazine motor A2

Paper advance motor 1

Paper magazine B

Paper magazine A2 Paper magazine motor B

Paper supply motor B/C

Paper magazine A

Paper magazine motor A

Paper supply motor A

Paper magazine motor C

5. Operation sequence
Note: The thick solid line indicates the paper. Paper magazine C

G068495

3. The paper is cut.

• Cut motor: ON/OFF
When cutting is not completed:
• No. 6016
Paper Cutter operation error.

55200 6/21
 55200
Paper advance operation

Cut motor

Cut end sensor

Cut home sensor

Note: The thick solid line indicates the paper.

5. Operation sequence
G068496

4. Arm unit 1 advances paper to the exposure advance unit.

• Paper supply arm motors (right and left): ON (forward)/OFF
• Paper supply motor A/A2/B/C: OFF
• Paper advance motor 1: ON
When zigzagging correction sensors (right and left) do not turn dark:
• No. 6135
Arm Unit 1 operation error.

IMPORTANT
• Arm unit 1 carries the paper at the same speed of the paper advance rollers until the paper passes through
the paper advance rollers.

55200 7/21
 55200
Paper advance operation

Paper supply motor A2 Paper supply arm motor (right or left)

Zigzagging correction sensor (right or left)

Paper magazine motor A2

Paper advance motor 1

Paper magazine B

Paper magazine A2 Paper magazine motor B

Paper supply motor B/C

Paper magazine A

5. Operation sequence
Paper magazine motor A

Paper supply motor A

Paper magazine motor C

Note: The thick solid line indicates the paper. Paper magazine C

G068497

5. The zigzag correction is performed.

• Paper supply arm motors (right and left): ON/OFF
NOTE
• The zigzag correction is performed after paper advance operation stops.

6. When the paper advance length is 300 mm or more, paper supply pressure is released.
• Paper supply pressure change motor: ON (released)/OFF
When the paper supply pressure change sensor does not turn dark:
• No. 6134
Paper Supply Pressure Change Motor operation error.

55200 8/21
 55200
Paper advance operation

Paper supply pressure change motor

Paper supply pressure change sensor

Note: The thick solid line indicates the paper.

5. Operation sequence
G068498

7. The paper is transferred to the exposure advance unit, and then arm unit 1 releases pressure.
• Paper hold motor: ON (released)/OFF
When the paper hold sensor does not turn light:
• No. 6101
Paper Hold Motor operation error.

Paper hold sensor

Paper hold motor

Note: The thick solid line indicates the paper.

G068499

55200 9/21
 55200
Paper advance operation

8. Arm unit 1 moves to the paper receiving standby position.

• Paper supply arm motors (right and left): ON (reverse)/OFF
When zigzagging correction sensors (right and left) do not turn light:
• No. 6135
Arm Unit 1 operation error.

Paper supply arm motor (right or left)

Zigzagging correction sensor (right or left)

5. Operation sequence
Note: The thick solid line indicates the paper.

G068500

z When the paper advance length is between 395.6 mm and 466.5 mm

1. Arm unit 1 pressures the loaded paper.

• Paper hold motor: ON (pressured)/OFF
When the paper hold sensor does not turn dark:
• No. 6101
Paper Hold Motor operation error.

55200 10/21
 55200
Paper advance operation

Paper hold sensor

Paper hold motor

Note: The thick solid line indicates the paper.

5. Operation sequence
G068494

2. Arm unit 1 advances paper to the exposure advance unit.

• Paper supply arm motors (right and left): ON (forward)/OFF
• Paper magazine motor A/A2/B/C: ON
• Paper supply motor A/A2/B/C: ON
• Paper advance motor 1: ON
When zigzagging correction sensors (right and left) do not turn dark:
• No. 6135
Arm Unit 1 operation error.

IMPORTANT
• Arm unit 1 advances the paper at the same speed of loading.

55200 11/21
 55200
Paper advance operation

Paper supply motor A2

Paper supply arm motor (right or left)

Paper magazine motor

A2 Zigzagging correction sensor (right or left)

Paper advance motor 1

Paper magazine B

Paper magazine A2
Paper magazine motor B

Paper supply motor B/C

Paper magazine A

5. Operation sequence
Paper magazine motor A

Paper supply motor A

Paper magazine motor C

Note: The thick solid line indicates the paper. Paper magazine C

G069826

3. The zigzag correction is performed.

• Paper supply arm motors (right and left): ON/OFF
NOTE
• The zigzag correction is performed after paper advance operation stops.

4. The paper is advanced for the paper length.

• Paper magazine motor A/A2/B/C: ON
• Paper supply motor A/A2/B/C: ON
• Paper advance motor 1: ON

IMPORTANT
• The machine makes a loop in the paper supply unit to adjust advance speeds of exposure advance operation
and paper supply operation.

55200 12/21
 55200
Paper advance operation

Paper supply motor A2

Paper supply arm motor (right or left)

Paper magazine motor Zigzagging correction sensor (right or left)

A2

Paper advance motor 1

Paper magazine B

Paper magazine A2
Paper magazine motor B

Paper supply motor B/C

Paper magazine A

Paper magazine motor A

5. Operation sequence
Paper supply motor A
Paper magazine motor C

Note: The thick solid line indicates the paper. Paper magazine C

G069827

5. The paper is cut.

• Cut motor: ON/OFF
When cutting is not completed:
• No. 6016
Paper Cutter operation error.

55200 13/21
 55200
Paper advance operation

Cut motor

Cut end sensor

Cut home sensor

Note: The thick solid line indicates the paper.

5. Operation sequence
G069828

6. The paper is transferred to the exposure advance unit, and then paper supply pressure is released.
• Paper supply pressure change motor: ON (released)/OFF
When the paper supply pressure change sensor does not turn dark:
• No. 6134
Paper Supply Pressure Change Motor operation error.

Paper supply pressure change motor

Paper supply pressure change sensor

Note: The thick solid line indicates the paper.

G069829

55200 14/21
 55200
Paper advance operation

7. Arm unit 1 releases pressure.

• Paper hold motor: ON (released)/OFF
When the paper hold sensor does not turn light:
• No. 6101
Paper Hold Motor operation error.

Paper hold sensor

Paper hold motor

5. Operation sequence
Note: The thick solid line indicates the paper.

G069830

8. When the exposure start sensor changed LIGHT from DARK, arm unit 1 moves to the paper receiving
standby position.

• Paper supply arm motors (right and left): ON (reverse)/OFF

When zigzagging correction sensors (right and left) do not turn light:
• No. 6135
Arm Unit 1 operation error.
When the exposure start sensor does not turn LIGHT after the specified time.
• No. 6017
Paper has jammed in the printer section.

55200 15/21
 55200
Paper advance operation

Paper supply arm motor (right or left)

Zigzagging correction sensor (right or left)

5. Operation sequence
Note: The thick solid line indicates the paper.

G068500

z When the paper advance length is 466.6 mm or more

1. Arm unit 1 pressures the loaded paper.

• Paper hold motor: ON (pressured)/OFF
When the paper hold sensor does not turn dark:
• No. 6101
Paper Hold Motor operation error.

55200 16/21
 55200
Paper advance operation

Paper hold sensor

Paper hold motor

Note: The thick solid line indicates the paper.

5. Operation sequence
G068494

2. Arm unit 1 advances paper to the exposure advance unit.

• Paper supply arm motors (right and left): ON (forward)/OFF
• Paper magazine motor A/A2/B/C: ON
• Paper supply motor A/A2/B/C: ON
• Paper advance motor 1: ON
When zigzagging correction sensors (right and left) do not turn dark:
• No. 6135
Arm Unit 1 operation error.

IMPORTANT
• Arm unit 1 advances the paper at the same speed of loading.

55200 17/21
 55200
Paper advance operation

Paper supply arm motor (right or left)

Paper supply motor A2

Zigzagging correction sensor (right or left)

Paper magazine motor
A2
Paper advance motor 1

Paper magazine B

Paper magazine A2
Paper magazine motor B

Paper supply motor B/C

Paper magazine A

Paper magazine motor A

5. Operation sequence
Paper supply motor A
Paper magazine motor C

Note: The thick solid line indicates the paper. Paper magazine C

G069826

3. The zigzag correction is performed.

• Paper supply arm motors (right and left): ON/OFF
NOTE
• The zigzag correction is performed after paper advance operation stops.

4. The paper is transferred to the exposure advance unit, and then arm unit 1 releases pressure. The
system starts loop control and advances the paper for the paper length.

• Paper magazine motor A/A2/B/C: ON

• Paper supply motor A/A2/B/C: ON
• Paper advance motor 1: ON

IMPORTANT
• The machine makes a loop in the paper supply unit to adjust advance speeds of exposure advance operation
and paper supply operation.
When the paper hold sensor does not turn light:
• No. 6101
Paper Hold Motor operation error.

55200 18/21
 55200
Paper advance operation

Paper supply arm motor (right or left)

Paper supply motor A2

Zigzagging correction sensor (right or left)

Paper magazine motor
A2 Paper hold sensor

Paper hold motor

Paper magazine B

Paper magazine A2
Paper magazine motor B

Paper supply motor B/C

Paper magazine A

Paper magazine motor A

5. Operation sequence
Paper supply motor A
Paper magazine motor C

Note: The thick solid line indicates the paper. Paper magazine C

G069965

5. The paper is cut.

• Cut motor: ON/OFF
When cutting is not completed:
• No. 6016
Paper Cutter operation error.

55200 19/21
 55200
Paper advance operation

Cut motor

Cut end sensor

Cut home sensor

Note: The thick solid line indicates the paper.

5. Operation sequence
G069966

6. Paper supply pressure is released.

• Paper supply pressure change motor: ON (released)/OFF
When the paper supply pressure change sensor does not turn dark:
• No. 6134
Paper Supply Pressure Change Motor operation error.

Paper supply pressure change motor

Paper supply pressure change sensor

Note: The thick solid line indicates the paper.

G069967

55200 20/21
 55200
Paper advance operation

7. When the exposure start sensor changed LIGHT from DARK, arm unit 1 moves to the paper receiving
standby position.

• Paper supply arm motors (right and left): ON (reverse)/OFF

When zigzagging correction sensors (right and left) do not turn light:
• No. 6135
Arm Unit 1 operation error.
When the exposure start sensor does not turn LIGHT after the specified time.
• No. 6017
Paper has jammed in the printer section.

Paper supply arm motor (right or left)

Zigzagging correction sensor (right or left)

5. Operation sequence
Note: The thick solid line indicates the paper.

G068500

55200 21/21
 55300
Paper advance operation

Exposure advance operation

This section explains the paper advance operation via the exposure advance unit during exposure.

z Flowchart

1. The paper is transferred from arm unit 1.

The status of the exposure advance unit is as follows.

• Exposure advance pressure change motor 1: ON (released)/OFF
• Exposure advance pressure change motor 2: ON (inlet released/exit pressured)/OFF

2. The paper is exposed and advanced.

• Exposure advance motors 1 and 2: ON

3. The paper leading end is advanced for the specific length from the exposure advance inlet roller.
• Exposure advance pressure change motor 2: ON (inlet pressured/exit released)/OFF
If exposure advance pressure does not change
• No. 6137
Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 2 operation error.

5. Operation sequence
Exposure advance motor 2

Exposure advance pressure change motor 2

Exposure advance motor 1

G069831

4. The paper leading end is advanced for the another specific length from the exposure advance inlet
roller.

• Exposure advance pressure change motor 1: ON (released)/OFF

• Exposure advance motor 1: OFF
If exposure advance pressure does not change
• No. 6136
Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 1 operation error.

55300 1/3
 55300
Paper advance operation

Exposure starting
position

Exposure advance pressure change

motor 1
G069832

5. The paper is advanced to the exposure position.

• The laser emission is started.

6. The paper leading end is advanced for the specific length from the exposure advance exit roller.

5. Operation sequence
• Exposure advance pressure change motor 2: ON (exit pressured)/OFF
If exposure advance pressure cannot be changed
• No. 6137
Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 2 operation error.

Exposure advance pressure change

motor 2

G069833

7. The paper rear end is advanced to the position a specified distance away from the front of the
exposure advance inlet roller.

• Exposure advance pressure change motor 2: ON (inlet pressure slightly released)/OFF

If exposure advance pressure cannot be changed
• No. 6137
Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 2 operation error.

55300 2/3
 55300
Paper advance operation

Exposure advance pressure change

motor 2

G069834

8. The paper rear end is advanced to the position another specified distance away from the front of the
exposure advance inlet roller.

• Exposure advance pressure change motor 2: ON (inlet pressure released)/OFF

If exposure advance pressure cannot be changed

5. Operation sequence
• No. 6137
Exposure Advance Pressure Change Motor 2 operation error.

Exposure advance pressure change

motor 2

G069835

55300 3/3
 55400
Paper advance operation

Paper advance operation (paper advance unit 1 operation)

This section explains how the paper goes through the paper advance unit 1.
NOTE
• Paper advance operation (paper advance unit 1 operation) varies by the paper advance length.
• ☞ When the paper advance length is 254.0 mm or less
• ☞ When the paper advance length is between 254.1 mm and 457.0 mm
• ☞ When the paper advance length is between 457.1 mm and 528.0 mm
• ☞ When the paper advance length is 528.1 mm or more

z When the paper advance length is 254.0 mm or less

1. Paper is advanced to paper advance unit 1.

2. The paper leading end passes 15 mm before the advance inlet roller.

3. Paper advance unit 1 releases the pressure.

• Pressure guide motor: ON (released)/OFF

5. Operation sequence
Pressure guide motor

G069836

4. The paper rear end passed the exposure center by 2 mm.

5. When paper advance unit 1 pressures the paper, the paper advance motor 2 starts working to
advance the paper.

• Pressure guide motor: ON (pressured)/OFF

• Paper advance motor 2: ON

55400 1/6
 55400
Paper advance operation

Paper advance motor 2

Pressure guide motor

G069837

6. Paper advance motor 2 changes its speed to high speed.

7. After paper advance motor 2 stops, paper advance unit 1 releases pressure.
• Paper advance motor 2: OFF

5. Operation sequence
• Pressure guide motor: ON (released)/OFF

Paper advance motor 2

Pressure guide motor

G069838

z When the paper advance length is between 254.1 mm and 457.0 mm

1. Paper is advanced to paper advance unit 1.

2. The paper leading end passes 15 mm before the advance inlet roller.

3. Paper advance unit 1 releases the pressure.

• Pressure guide motor: ON (released)/OFF

55400 2/6
 55400
Paper advance operation

Pressure guide motor

G069836

4. The paper rear end passed the exposure center by 2 mm.

5. When paper advance unit 1 pressures the paper, the paper advance motor 2 starts working to
advance the paper at the exposure speed.

5. Operation sequence
• Pressure guide motor: ON (pressured)/OFF
• Paper advance motor 2: ON

Paper advance motor 2

Pressure guide motor

G069837

6. Paper advance motor 2 stops.

• Paper advance motor 2: OFF

7. Paper advance unit 1 releases the pressure.

• Pressure guide motor: ON (released)/OFF

55400 3/6
 55400
Paper advance operation

Pressure guide motor

G069838

z When the paper advance length is between 457.1 mm and 528.0 mm

1. Paper is advanced to paper advance unit 1.

2. The paper leading end passes 15 mm before the advance inlet roller.

5. Operation sequence
3. Paper advance unit 1 releases the pressure.
• Pressure guide motor: ON (released)/OFF

Pressure guide motor

G069836

z When the paper advance length is 528.1 mm or more

1. Paper is advanced to paper advance unit 1.

2. The paper leading end passes 15 mm before the advance inlet roller.

55400 4/6
 55400
Paper advance operation

3. Paper advance unit 1 releases the pressure.

• Pressure guide motor: ON (released)/OFF

Pressure guide motor

G069836

4. The paper rear end passed the exposure center by 2 mm.

5. Operation sequence
5. When paper advance unit 1 pressures the paper, the paper advance motor 2 starts working to
advance the paper at the exposure speed.

• Pressure guide motor: ON (pressured)/OFF

• Paper advance motor 2: ON

Paper advance motor 2

Pressure guide motor

G069837

6. The paper rear end passed 130 mm from the exposure advance exit roller.

7. Paper advance unit 1 releases the pressure.

• Pressure guide motor: ON (released)/OFF

55400 5/6
 55400
Paper advance operation

Pressure guide motor

G069838

8. After pressure of paper advance unit 1 is released completely, paper advance motor 2 stops.
• Paper advance motor 2: OFF

5. Operation sequence

55400 6/6
 55500
Paper advance operation

Paper advance operation (paper advance unit 2 operation)

This section explains how the paper goes through the paper advance unit 2.
NOTE
• Paper advance operation (paper advance unit 2 operation) varies by the paper width and the paper advance length.
• ☞ Paper with the width of 152.0 mm or less and the advance length of 178.0 mm or less
• ☞ Paper with the width of 152.0 mm or less and the advance length between 178.1 and 305.0 mm
• ☞ Paper with the width of 152.0 mm or less and the advance length of 305.1 mm or more
• ☞ The paper width is 165.0 mm or more.

Paper advance pressure change sensor (left)

Lane select motor (left)

Lane select sensor (left)

Arm sensor (right)

Paper advance arm motor (left)

Paper advance pressure change motor (left)

5. Operation sequence
Paper advance unit 2

Paper advance unit 1

Processor loading unit

Paper advance pressure change motor (right)

Arm sensor (right)

Paper advance arm motor (right)

Lane select sensor (right)

Lane select motor (right)

Paper advance pressure change sensor (right)

G069962

z Paper with the width of 152.0 mm or less and the advance length of 178.0 mm or less

1. Paper is advanced from paper advance unit 1.

55500 1/17
 55500
Paper advance operation

2. Arm units 2 (right) (left) moves to paper advance unit 1. Arm unit 2 (left) moves to its standby position
and arm unit 2 (right) moves to its paper receiving position.

• Lane select motors (right) (left): ON/OFF

• Paper advance arm motors (right) (left): ON/OFF
If the arm sensors (right) (left) do not turn DARK
• No. 6138
Paper Advance Arm Motor (Left) operation error.
• No. 6139
Paper Advance Arm Motor (Right) operation error.
If the lane select sensor (left) does not turn DARK
• No. 6140
Lane Select Motor (Left) operation error.
If the lane select sensor (right) does not turn LIGHT
• No. 6141
Lane Select Motor (Right) operation error.

5. Operation sequence
G069839

3. Paper is advanced to arm unit 2 (right).

4. Arm unit 2 (right) pressures the paper.

• Paper advance pressure change motor (right): ON (pressured)/OFF
If the paper advance pressure change sensor (right) does not turn DARK
• No. 6143
Paper Advance Pressure Change Motor (Right) operation error.

55500 2/17
 55500
Paper advance operation

G069841

5. Arm unit 2 (right) moves to the processor loading unit.

• Lane select motor (right): ON/OFF
• Paper advance arm motor (right): ON/OFF

5. Operation sequence
If the arm sensor (right) does not turn LIGHT
• No. 6139
Paper Advance Arm Motor (Right) operation error.

G069842

6. Arm unit 2 (right) releases pressure.

• Paper advance pressure change motor (right) :ON (released)/OFF
If the paper advance pressure change sensor (right) does not turn LIGHT
• No. 6143
Paper Advance Pressure Change Motor (Right) operation error.

55500 3/17
 55500
Paper advance operation

G069843

7. Arm unit 2 (left) moves to paper receiving position of paper advance unit 1.
• Lane select motor (left): ON/OFF
If land select sensor (left) does not turn LIGHT

5. Operation sequence
• No. 6140
Lane Select Motor (Left) operation error.

G069844

8. Paper is advanced to arm unit 2 (left).

9. Arm unit 2 (left) pressures the paper.

• Paper advance pressure change motor (left): ON (pressured)/OFF
If the paper advance pressure change sensor (left) does not turn DARK
• No. 6142
Paper Advance Pressure Change Motor (Left) operation error.

55500 4/17
 55500
Paper advance operation

G069845

10. Arm unit 2 (left) moves to the processor loading unit and arm unit 2 (right) moves to the paper
receiving position of the paper advance unit 1.

• Lane select motors (right) (left): ON/OFF

• Paper advance arm motors (right) (left): ON/OFF

5. Operation sequence
If the arm sensor (left) does not turn LIGHT
• No. 6138
Paper Advance Arm Motor (Left) operation error.
If the arm sensor (right) does not turn DARK
• No. 6139
Paper Advance Arm Motor (Right) operation error.

G069944

11. Arm unit 2 (left) releases pressure.

• Paper advance pressure change motor (left) :ON (released)/OFF
If the paper advance pressure change sensor (left) does not turn LIGHT
• No. 6142
Paper Advance Pressure Change Motor (Left) operation error.

55500 5/17
 55500
Paper advance operation

G069945

z Paper with the width of 152.0 mm or less and the advance length between 178.1 and
305.0 mm

1. Paper is advanced from paper advance unit 1.

5. Operation sequence
2. Arm units 2 (right) (left) moves to paper advance unit 1. Arm unit 2 (left) moves to its standby position
and arm unit 2 (right) moves to its paper receiving position.

• Lane select motors (right) (left): ON/OFF

• Paper advance arm motors (right) (left): ON/OFF
If the arm sensors (right) (left) do not turn DARK
• No. 6138
Paper Advance Arm Motor (Left) operation error.
• No. 6139
Paper Advance Arm Motor (Right) operation error.
If the lane select sensor (left) does not turn DARK
• No. 6140
Lane Select Motor (Left) operation error.
If the lane select sensor (right) does not turn LIGHT
• No. 6141
Lane Select Motor (Right) operation error.

55500 6/17
 55500
Paper advance operation

G069839

3. Paper is advanced to arm unit 2 (right).

4. Arm unit 2 (right) pressures the paper.

5. Operation sequence
• Paper advance pressure change motor (right): ON (pressured)/OFF
If the paper advance pressure change sensor (right) does not turn DARK
• No. 6143
Paper Advance Pressure Change Motor (Right) operation error.

G069841

5. Arm unit 2 (right) moves to the paper advance standby position.

• Lane select motor (right): ON/OFF
• Paper advance arm motor (right): ON/OFF
If the arm sensor (right) does not turn LIGHT
• No. 6139
Paper Advance Arm Motor (Right) operation error.
If the lane select sensor (right) does not turn DARK
• No. 6141

55500 7/17
 55500
Paper advance operation

Lane Select Motor (Right) operation error.

G069946

6. Arm unit 2 (left) moves to paper receiving position of paper advance unit 1.

5. Operation sequence
• Lane select motor (left): ON/OFF
• Paper advance arm motor (left): ON/OFF
If land select sensor (left) does not turn LIGHT
• No. 6140
Lane Select Motor (Left) operation error.

G069947

7. Paper is advanced to arm unit 2 (left).

8. Arm unit 2 (left) pressures the paper.

• Paper advance pressure change motor (left): ON (pressured)/OFF
If the paper advance pressure change sensor (left) does not turn DARK
• No. 6142
Paper Advance Pressure Change Motor (Left) operation error.

55500 8/17
 55500
Paper advance operation

G069949

9. Arm unit 2 (left) moves to the paper advance standby position.

• Paper advance arm motor (left): ON/OFF
If the arm sensor (left) does not turn LIGHT

5. Operation sequence
• No. 6138
Paper Advance Arm Motor (Left) operation error.

G069950

10. Arm units 2 (right) (left) move to the processor loading unit.
• Paper advance arm motors (right) (left): ON/OFF
If the lane select sensor (right) does not turn LIGHT
• No. 6141
Lane Select Motor (Right) operation error.

55500 9/17
 55500
Paper advance operation

G069951

11. Arm units 2 (right, left) release the pressure.

• Paper advance pressure change motors (right) (left): ON (released)/OFF
If the paper advance pressure change sensors (right) (left) do not turn LIGHT
• No. 6142

5. Operation sequence
Paper Advance Pressure Change Motor (Left) operation error.
• No. 6143
Paper Advance Pressure Change Motor (Right) operation error.

G069952

12. Arm units 2 (right) (left) move to paper advance unit 1. Arm unit 2 (right) moves to its paper receiving
position.

• Lane select motors (right) (left): ON/OFF

• Paper advance arm motors (right) (left): ON/OFF
If the arm sensors (right) (left) do not turn DARK
• No. 6138
Paper Advance Arm Motor (Left) operation error.
• No. 6139
Paper Advance Arm Motor (Right) operation error.

55500 10/17
 55500
Paper advance operation

If the lane select sensor (left) does not turn DARK

• No. 6140
Lane Select Motor (Left) operation error.
If the lane select sensor (right) does not turn LIGHT
• No. 6141
Lane Select Motor (Right) operation error.

5. Operation sequence
G069970

z Paper with the width of 152.0 mm or less and the advance length of 305.1 mm or
more

1. Paper is advanced from paper advance unit 1.

2. Arm units 2 (right) (left) move to paper advance unit 1. Arm unit 2 (right) moves to its paper receiving
position.

• Lane select motors (right) (left): ON/OFF

• Paper advance arm motors (right) (left): ON/OFF
If the arm sensors (right) (left) do not turn DARK
• No. 6138
Paper Advance Arm Motor (Left) operation error.
• No. 6139
Paper Advance Arm Motor (Right) operation error.
If the lane select sensor (left) does not turn DARK
• No. 6140
Lane Select Motor (Left) operation error.
If the lane select sensor (right) does not turn LIGHT
• No. 6141
Lane Select Motor (Right) operation error.

55500 11/17
 55500
Paper advance operation

G069839

3. Paper is advanced to arm unit 2 (right).

4. Arm unit 2 (right) pressures the paper.

5. Operation sequence
• Paper advance pressure change motor (right): ON (pressured)/OFF

IMPORTANT
• Arm unit 2 advances the paper at the same speed of exposure speed without pressuring the paper.
• It pressures the paper after exposure.
If the paper advance pressure change sensor (right) does not turn DARK
• No. 6143
Paper Advance Pressure Change Motor (Right) operation error.

G069971

5. Arm unit 2 (right) moves to the processor loading unit.

• Paper advance arm motor (right): ON/OFF
If the arm sensor (right) does not turn LIGHT
• No. 6139
Paper Advance Arm Motor (Right) operation error.

55500 12/17
 55500
Paper advance operation

G069953

6. Arm unit 2 (right) releases pressure.

• Paper advance pressure change motor (right) :ON (released)/OFF

5. Operation sequence
If the paper advance pressure change sensor (right) does not turn LIGHT
• No. 6143
Paper Advance Pressure Change Motor (Right) operation error.

G069954

7. Arm unit 2 (right) moves to the paper receiving position.

• Paper advance arm motors (right) (left): ON/OFF
If the arm sensor (right) does not turn DARK
• No. 6139
Paper Advance Arm Motor (Right) operation error.

55500 13/17
 55500
Paper advance operation

G069955

z The paper width is 165.0 mm or more.

1. Paper is advanced from paper advance unit 1.

5. Operation sequence
2. Arm units 2 (right) (left) move to the paper receiving position.
• Lane select motors (right) (left): ON/OFF
• Paper advance arm motors (right) (left): ON/OFF
If the arm sensors (right) (left) do not turn DARK
• No. 6138
Paper Advance Arm Motor (Left) operation error.
• No. 6139
Paper Advance Arm Motor (Right) operation error.

G069956

3. The paper is advanced to arm units 2 (right) (left).

55500 14/17
 55500
Paper advance operation

4. Arm units 2 (right) (left) pressure the paper.

• Paper advance pressure change motors (right) (left): ON (pressured)/OFF
If the paper advance pressure change sensors (right) (left) do not turn DARK
• No. 6142
Paper Advance Pressure Change Motor (Left) operation error.
• No. 6143
Paper Advance Pressure Change Motor (Right) operation error.

5. Operation sequence
G069958

5. Arm units 2 (right) (left) move to the processor loading unit.

• Paper advance arm motors (right) (left): ON/OFF
If the arm sensors (right) (left) do not turn light
• No. 6138
Paper Advance Arm Motor (Left) operation error.
• No. 6139
Paper Advance Arm Motor (Right) operation error.

55500 15/17
 55500
Paper advance operation

G069959

6. Arm units 2 (right, left) release the pressure.

5. Operation sequence
• Paper advance pressure change motors (right) (left): ON (released)/OFF
If the paper advance pressure change sensors (right) (left) do not turn LIGHT
• No. 6142
Paper Advance Pressure Change Motor (Left) operation error.
• No. 6143
Paper Advance Pressure Change Motor (Right) operation error.

G069960

7. Arm units 2 (right) (left) move to the paper receiving position.

• Paper advance arm motors (right) (left): ON/OFF
If the arm sensors (right) (left) do not turn DARK
• No. 6138
Paper Advance Arm Motor (Left) operation error.
• No. 6139

55500 16/17
 55500
Paper advance operation

Paper Advance Arm Motor (Right) operation error.

G069961

5. Operation sequence

55500 17/17
 55600
Paper advance operation

Paper rewind operation

This section explains how the paper is rewound.

Paper rewind conditions
• The paper is changed to the paper in another paper magazine from the paper which is being loaded from the paper magazine.
• No operation is made for a specified time with the paper loaded.
• Rewind Paper is selected.
• The paper end sensor is detecting the paper when the power supply is turned on.
• When an error occurs
• After paper magazine replacement, the interlock switch (printer door) is detected.

z Flowchart

1. Paper rewind operation starts.

• Paper magazine motor A/A2/B/C: ON (reverse)
• Paper supply motor A/A2/B/C: ON (reverse)

2. The paper leading end passed through the paper loading sensor.

When the paper loading sensor does not detect the paper leading end

5. Operation sequence
• No. 6014-01, No. 6202-01
Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine A
• No. 6015-01
Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine B
• No. 6113-01
Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine C
• No. 6196-01
Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine A2

3. The paper leading end passed through the paper end sensor.

When the paper end sensor does not detect the paper leading end
• No. 6014-02, No. 6202-02
Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine A
• No. 6015-02
Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine B
• No. 6113-02
Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine C
• No. 6196-02
Paper did not rewind. Paper Magazine A2

4. Stop the paper in the magazine.

• Paper magazine motor A/A2/B/C: OFF
• Paper supply motor A/A2/B/C: OFF

5. Paper rewind operation is completed.

55600 1/1
 55700
Paper advance operation

Paper splicing operation

This section explains the splicing detection with the loading sensor while printing.
Splice section (hole) detecting condition

Splice hole
Paper loading sensor (SE7)
Splice section
Paper cutters

Paper advance direction

Y X

Cut prohibitive area (228.1 mm) Exposure possible area

5. Operation sequence
G074573
• X = Paper length out the paper cutter
• Y = Paper length between the leading end of the cut-forbidden area and the cutter

z Operation outline:

z Condition 1: When detecting a splice section (hole) with the loading sensor and the dimension of the
exposure capable area is the print advance length or more (X + Y = Print advance length, or X + Y is longer
than Print advance length)

1. Loads the paper so that X is same as the print advance length and cut it, and then carry out the printing
normally.
2. Loads the spliced part and cuts it, then feeds the paper to the processor.
(Splice section length = Cut prohibitive area + Y mm)

z Condition 2: When detecting a splice section (hole) with the loading sensor and the dimension of the
exposure capable area is less than the print advance length (X + Y < Print advance length)

1. Loads the splice section and cut it, and then feed it to the processor.
(Splice section length = Cut prohibitive area + X + Y mm)

55700 1/1
 55800
Paper advance operation

Paper end operation

This section explains the operation of paper end.

z Flowchart

1. Paper is being processed.

2. The paper rear end passed through the paper end sensor.

When printable area is longer than the print setting advance length at the detection of the paper end.
• Proceed the operation.
When the length of printable + exposable area is shorter than the rest of print length at the detection of
paper end.
• The paper is not cut and the machine performs Step 5.
When the paper is in exposure and the length of printable + exposable area is equal to or longer than
the rest of the print length at the detection of paper end.
• Proceed the operation.
When the paper is in exposure and the length of printable + exposable area is shorter than the rest of
print length at the detection of paper end.

5. Operation sequence
• The operation goes on but the print need to be made again.

Paper end sensor Paper cut position

Exposure possible area Printable area

Paper advance direction

30 mm

Cut-forbidden area
Lane A: 198 mm
Lane A2: 198 mm
Lane B: 174.9 mm
Lane C: 174.9 mm
G058720

3. The paper is advanced to the cut position.

4. Paper cut ☞ 55100☞ 55200

5. Advance all the paper to the exposure section.

6. The paper end processing is complete.

• No. 1000
The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine A
• No. 1001
The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine B
• No. 1052
The Paper Magazine is out of paper. Paper Magazine C

55800 1/1
 55900
Paper advance operation

Fogged paper operation

This section explains the fogged paper processing operation.

Condition of fogged paper processing operation
• The printer door is opened while the printer or paper is being loaded.
• The printer top cover is opened with printer door closes.

z Flow chart (when the printer door is opened)

1. Close printer doors 1, 2, 3, and 4.

2. The paper end sensor checks if there is any paper.

If the paper end sensor detects paper

• The system rewinds the paper and perform Step 4.
If the paper end sensor does not detect any paper
• No. 1002, No. 1086
Would you like to feed the leading edge of paper? Paper Magazine A
• No. 1003
Would you like to feed the leading edge of paper? Paper Magazine B

5. Operation sequence
• No. 1053
Would you like to feed the leading edge of paper? Paper Magazine C
• No. 1084
Would you like to feed the leading edge of paper? Paper Magazine A2
• If Yes is selected, the system performs Step 4.
• If No is selected, fogged paper operation is ended.

3. The paper loading operation starts.

4. The paper is advanced to the cut position.

• Feed the paper leading end 100 mm from the paper cutting position.

Paper roll

Paper magazine

Manual cutter

Fogged feed 100 mm

G058721

5. Paper cut ☞ 55100☞ 55200

55900 1/2
 55900
Paper advance operation

6. The paper is advanced to the exposure section.

7. The fogged paper processing is complete.

5. Operation sequence

55900 2/2
 56100 Processor paper advance operation

Processor paper advance operation

Processor paper advance operation

This section explains the process that begins with the paper entering the processor and ends with it being deposited into either the print
conveyor unit or the print receiving tray (large). It is a precondition that the temperature adjustment of the processing solution is completed.

1. The processor enters the following states when the paper is loaded. ☞ 55100
• Processor drive motor: ON
• Dryer fan: ON
• Dryer heater: ON

2. The back edge of the paper passes through paper sensor 2 (left, center, right), which is located in the
processor loading unit.

Print conveyor unit

Print receiving tray (large)

Paper sensors 2 (left, center and right)

5. Operation sequence
Position A

G082003

3. When the paper leading edge passes position A in the above figure, the process signal is transmitted to
the processor by the printer.

• The following data are transmitted to the processor by the printer.

Transmission data list

1 Information of paper advance length 5 Information of print counts
2 Information of paper width 6 Information of paper advance position
3 Information of paper surface 7 Information of paper lane
4 Order information 8 Information of splice

56100 1/4
 56100
Processor paper advance operation

4. Paper arrives at the dryer rack.

• The paper advance procedures listed below vary depending on print paper width and advance length.

Paper width Advance length Paper advance procedure references

Between 82.5 and 152 mm Between 82.5 and 305 mm ☞ Paper output to the print conveyor unit
Between 82.5 and 305 mm Between 305.1 and 457.2 mm ☞ Paper sent to the print receiving tray
Between 152.1 and 305 mm Between 82.5 and 305 mm (large)/long length print tray:
• Between 203.3 and 305 mm Between 457.3 and 914 mm
(For the QSS-32: Ver. 7.01 or earlier; for
the QSS-32SD: Ver. 3.01 or earlier.)
• Between 127.1 and 305 mm
(For the QSS-32: Ver. 8.0 or later; for the
QSS-32SD: Ver. 4.0 or later.)

NOTE
• The printer examines print size to determine whether prints should be sent to the print conveyor unit or the print
receiving tray (large)/long length print tray, and then issues appropriate instructions to the processor.

z Paper sent to the print receiving tray (large)/long length print tray:

1. The paper leading edge passes through the dryer lane select sensor.

5. Operation sequence
• If the dryer lane select sensor fails to detect paper sent to the print receiving tray (large)/long length print tray in six
consecutive attempts within a specified amount of time, the following error message will appear onscreen: ☞ No. 5535:
Paper has jammed in the processor section.

Dryer lane select sensor: SE45

Long Length Print Tray

Print receiving tray (large)

G082004
• The leading edge of the paper being sent to the print receiving tray (large)/long length print tray passes through the dryer
lane select sensor, activating the dryer lane select solenoid and causing the select guide to move into the print receiving
tray (large) position after a specified amount of time elapses.
• The trailing edge of the paper being sent to the print receiving tray (large)/long length print tray passes through the dryer
lane select sensor, activating the dryer lane select solenoid and causing the select guide to move into the print conveyor
position after a specified amount of time elapses.
NOTE
• Paper other than standard prints also sent to the print receiving tray (large)

Types of paper sent to the print receiving tray (large)

Leading-edge feed paper Trailing-edge feed paper
Fogged paper Splice section
Control strips

56100 2/4
 56100
Processor paper advance operation

Dryer rack

Paper advance direction

A specified time A specified time

Dryer lane select sensor

Dryer lane select solenoid: OFF Dryer lane select solenoid: ON Dryer lane select solenoid: ON

Lane select guide: print conveyor Lane select guide: print receiving tray (large)

G082005

2. Paper is output to the print receiving tray (large)/long length print tray.

5. Operation sequence
NOTE
• The long length print tray must be installed to accommodate prints with an advance length of 457.3 mm or over.
• Maximum capacity of print receiving tray (large)/long length print tray
Receiving tray Maximum capacity
Print receiving tray (large) 50 prints
Long Length Print Tray 10 prints

• Component status a specified amount of time after the dryer lane select sensor detects the trailing edge of the last sheet
of paper.
Processor drive motor: OFF
Dryer fan: OFF
Dryer heater: OFF

56100 3/4
 56100
Processor paper advance operation

z Paper output to the print conveyor unit

1. The paper leading edge passes through the print sensor in the dryer rack.
• The following message is displayed onscreen if the print sensor fails to detect paper sent to the print conveyor unit six
consecutive times within the specified time period: ☞ No. 5535: Paper has jammed in the processor section.
Print sensor (right): SE28
Print sensor (center): SE29
Print sensor (left): SE30
Print conveyor unit

G082006
• The print sensor (left, center, right) detects paper sent to the print conveyor unit.

5. Operation sequence
Dryer rack
Paper advance direction
Print sensor (left)

2 4 6

1 3 5
Print sensor (center)

Print sensor (right)

G082007

2. The prints are output to the print conveyor unit.

• For movement of the print conveyor unit, see ☞ 56200.
NOTE
• A specified length of time after the print sensor detects the trailing edge of the final sheet of paper
Processor drive motor: OFF
Dryer fan: OFF
Dryer heater: OFF

56100 4/4
 56200 Print conveyor unit operation

Print conveyor unit operation

Print conveyor unit operation

This section explains the process that begins with paper passing through the dryer rack print sensor and ends with it being output to the
print sorter unit.
NOTE
• Print conveyor operation varies depending on differences in paper advance methods brought about by a variety of paper widths and
advance lengths.
• ☞ Paper with the width of 152.0 mm or less and the advance length of 178.0 mm or less
• ☞ Paper with the width of 152.0 mm or less and the advance length between 178.1 and 305.0 mm

z Paper with the width of 152.0 mm or less and the advance length of 178.0 mm or less
NOTE
• For details of paper advance inside the printer, see ☞ 55500.

1. The paper passes through the print sensor.

• For details of the operation from entering of paper into the processor to the ejection to the print conveyor unit, see
☞ 56100.

2. The print sensor detects the paper rear end.

5. Operation sequence
3. The prints are output to the print conveyor unit.

4. Conveyor belt starts to move.

• Conveyor motor: ON
Condition: When a specific time passes after ☞ 2 The print sensor detects the paper rear end.
Dryer rack
Paper advance direction
Print sensor (left)

Print sensor (center)

Print sensor (right)

A specified time

Conveyor motor: OFF Conveyor motor: ON

G082008

5. Paper is output into the print sorter unit's print receiving tray.

6. Conveyor belt stops moving.

• Conveyor motor: OFF (Stop)
Condition: When a specific time passes after conveyor motor ON.

56200 1/2
 56200
Print conveyor unit operation

7. The print receiving tray moves.

• For details about operation of the print receiving tray of the print sorter unit, see ☞ 56300.

z Paper with the width of 152.0 mm or less and the advance length between 178.1 and
305.0 mm
NOTE
• For details of paper advance inside the printer, see ☞ 55500.

1. The paper passes through the print sensor.

• For details of the operation from entering of paper into the processor to the ejection to the print conveyor unit, see
☞ 56100.

2. The print sensor detects the paper rear end.

3. The prints are output to the print conveyor unit.

4. Conveyor belt starts to move.

5. Operation sequence
• Conveyor motor: ON (rotation)
Condition: When a specific time passes after ☞ 2 The print sensor detects the paper rear end.
Dryer rack
Paper advance direction
Print sensor (left)

Print sensor (center)

Print sensor (right)

A specified time

Conveyor motor: OFF Conveyor motor: ON

G071653

5. Paper is output into the print sorter unit's print receiving tray.

6. Conveyor belt stops moving.

• Conveyor motor: OFF (Stop)
Condition: When a specific time passes after conveyor motor ON.

7. The print receiving tray moves.

• For details about operation of the print receiving tray of the print sorter unit, see ☞ 56300.

56200 2/2
 56300 Print sorter unit operation

Print sorter unit operation

Print sorter unit operation

This section explains the operation until the print receiving tray starts to move after paper is output to the print sorter unit.

1. The last piece of paper of an order is output to the print receiving tray of the print sorter unit.

2. The print receiving tray moves.

• Sorter motor: ON
When the following two conditions are fulfilled, the print receiving tray moves.
• Condition 1: The print sensor detects the paper leading edge of the next order.
• Condition 2: A fixed time has passed after the sensor detects the rear edge of the paper of the previous order.
NOTE
• If condition 2 is not applied (inadequate interval between customer orders), the print receiving tray will not start until a
specified length of time elapses.

Sorter motor: DM4

5. Operation sequence
Sorter home sensor: SE26

G082009

Dryer rack
Paper advance direction

Print sensor (left) A specified time

A specified time

Order Order Order

Print sensor (center)

Print sensor (right)

Sorter motor: ON Sorter motor: ON

Longer than the Shorter than the specified

Sorter motor: OFF
specified time time
G082010

56300 1/2
 56300
Print sorter unit operation

NOTE
• Print size and quantity sorted by the print sorter unit vary depending on the type of size-specific sorting being performed.

Paper width Advance length Maximum capacity

Type 1 Type 2
Between 82.5 and 102 mm Between 82.5 and 305 mm 50 prints 82 prints
Between 102.1 and 152 mm. Between 82.5 and 254 mm 50 prints 82 prints
Between 254.1 and 305 mm. 50 prints 50 prints

3. Print receiving tray operation stops.

• Sorter motor: OFF
Condition: The sorter home sensor turns DARK.

4. The print full sensor of the print sorter unit turns DARK.
• When the print full sensor turns DARK in a specified time, the message ☞ No. 0505Remove the prints from the Print
Sorter Unit. is shown.
• The print sorter unit is not activated until attention message No. 0505 is closed.

5. Operation sequence
Print full sensor: SE27

G082011

56300 2/2
 57010 Replenishment operation sequence [F specification]

Replenishment operation sequence [F specification]

Replenishment operation sequence [F]

Piping diagram

Reprenishment SE60
cartridge

SE61 P1R P2RA P2RB

MV7 MV8

MV6 MV9
SE62
MV5 MV10

MV4

P17
SE63 SE65 SE67
Replenisher tank LSE7

P1R P2RA P2RB PSR

SE64 SE66 SE68 LSE8

RP1 RP2 RP3 RP4

5. Operation sequence
Processing tank P1 P2 PS-1 PS-2 PS-3 PS-4

G085080

Symbol Name Symbol Name

SE60 Cartridge sensor MV4 P1R cartridge flushing valve
SE61 Cartridge position sensor (upper) MV5 P2RA cartridge flushing valve
SE62 Cartridge position sensor (lower) MV6 P2RB cartridge flushing valve
SE63 P1R (upper) replenishment solution level sensor MV7 P1R agitation solenoid valve
SE64 P1R (lower) replenishment solution level sensor MV8 P1 automated cleaning valve
SE65 P2RA (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level MV9 P2 automated cleaning valve
Sensor
SE66 P2RA (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level MV10 PS automated cleaning valve
Sensor
SE67 P2RB (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level P17 Replenisher cartridge cleaning pump
Sensor
SE68 P2RB (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level RP1 P1R Replenisher Pump
Sensor
LSE7 PSR (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor RP2 P2RA Replenisher Pump
LSE8 PSR (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level RP3 P2RB Replenisher Pump
Sensor
- - RP4 PSR Replenisher Pump

• This section explains the replenishment operation flow.

57010 1/7
 57010
Replenishment operation sequence [F specification]

1. Create Replenishment Solution or Create Replenishment Solution (Manual Open) has been
performed.

2. PSR (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor is on.

• PSR (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor: ON
If PSR (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor is off
• ☞ No. 904 [F] Replenish PSR.

3. P1R/P2RA/P2RB (lower) replenishment solution level sensors are off.

P17
SE63 SE65 SE67
LSE7

Replenisher tank P1R P2RA P2RB PSR

SE64 SE66 SE68 LSE8

RP1 RP2 RP3 RP4

G085081

5. Operation sequence
• P1R (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor: OFF
• P2RA (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor: OFF
• P2RB (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor: OFF
If P1R/P2RA/P2RB (lower) replenishment solution level sensors are on
• ☞ No. 913 [F] Manual opening cannot be started.

4. The replenishment cartridge is set.

• Replenisher cartridge set sensor: on
If the replenishment cartridge is set
• Automatically goes to Step 5.
If the replenishment cartridge is not set
• ☞ No. 902 [F] Install the replenisher cartridge.

5. The replenisher section door is closed.

• Interlock Switch (Replenisher Section Door): ON
If the replenisher section door is closed
• Automatically goes to Step 7.
If the replenisher section door is not closed
• ☞ No. 903 [F] Close the replenisher section door.

57010 2/7
 57010
Replenishment operation sequence [F specification]

6. P1R/P2RA/P2RB (lower) replenishment solution level sensors are off.

P17
SE63 SE65 SE67
LSE7

P1R P2RA P2RB PSR

Replenisher tank

SE64 SE66 SE68 LSE8

RP1 RP2 RP3 RP4

G085081
• P1R (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor: OFF
• P2RA (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor: OFF
• P2RB (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor: OFF
If P1R/P2RA/P2RB (lower) replenishment solution level sensors are on
• ☞ No. 5923[F] Solution remains in the replenishment tank.

7. The replenishment cartridge is moved to lower position.

• Replenisher Cartridge Open Motor: ON
• Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper): DARK → LIGHT

5. Operation sequence
If Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper) does not turn LIGHT
• ☞ No. 5900[F]−0001Replenisher cartridge open motor operation error.

8. The replenishment cartridge is stopped at lower position.

• Replenisher Cartridge Open Motor: OFF
• Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower): LIGHT → DARK
If Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower) does not turn DARK
• ☞ No. 5900[F]−0002Replenisher cartridge open motor operation error.

9. The system waits until the replenishment solution falls.

57010 3/7
 57010
Replenishment operation sequence [F specification]

10. The replenishment solution level sensor (lower) detects the replenishment solution.

P17

SE63 SE65 SE67 LSE7

Reprenishment P1R P2RA P2RB PSR

cartridge
SE64 SE66 SE68 LSE8

RP1 RP2 RP3 RP4

P1 P2 PS-1 PS-2 PS-3 PS-4

Replenisher tank

G085082

5. Operation sequence
• P1R (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor: OFF→ON
• P2RA (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor: OFF→ON
• P2RB (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor: OFF→ON
If any of replenishment solution level sensors (lower) does not turn on
• ☞ No. 5908[F] Failed to open the replenisher cartridge.
If no replenishment solution level sensors (lower) turn on
• ☞ No. 5905[F] Install the new replenisher cartridge.

11. The system operates the replenishment cartridge cleaning pump.

• Replenishment cartridge cleaning pump: OFF → ON

12. The system opens the P1R cartridge flushing valve for a certain period of time to clean the cartridge, then
closes the P1R cartridge flushing valve.

SE60
SE61
MV7 MV8

P1R P2RA P2RB MV9

Reprenishment MV6
cartridge SE62
MV5 MV10

MV4

P17
SE63 SE65 SE67 LSE7

Replenisher tank
P1R P2RA P2RB PSR

SE64 SE66 SE68 LSE8

G085083

57010 4/7
 57010
Replenishment operation sequence [F specification]

• P1R cartridge flushing valve: ON/OFF

13. The system opens and cleans the P2RA cartridge flushing valve for a certain period of time, then closes it.
• P2RA cartridge flushing valve: ON/OFF
• P2RA (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor: OFF→ON
If P2RA (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor does not turn on
• ☞ No. 5910[F]Cartridge cleaning valve cleaning valve is abnormal. P2RA
NOTE
• No error occurs at Manual Open or Create Replenishment Solution (Manual Open).

14. The system opens the P2RB cartridge flushing valve for a certain period of time to clean the cartridge,
then closes the valve.

• P2RB cartridge flushing valve: ON/OFF

• P2RB (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor: OFF→ON
If P2RB (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor does not turn on
• ☞ No. 5911[F]Cartridge cleaning valve cleaning valve is abnormal. P2RB
NOTE
• No error occurs at Manual Open or Create Replenishment Solution (Manual Open).

15. The system opens the P1R agitation solenoid valve, agitates P1R replenishment solution for a certain

5. Operation sequence
period of time, and closes the valve.

SE60

SE61 MV7 MV8

Reprenishment P1R P2RA P2RB MV9
MV6
cartridge
SE62 MV5 MV10

MV4

P17

SE63 SE65 SE67 LSE7

Replenisher tank P1R P2RA P2RB PSR

SE64 SE66 SE68 LSE8

RP1 RP2 RP3 RP4

G085084
• P1R cartridge flushing valve: ON/OFF
• P1R (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor: OFF→ON
If P1R (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor does not turn on
• ☞ No. 5909[F]Cartridge cleaning valve/Agitation solenoid valve is abnormal. P1R

16. Stops the Replenishment cartridge cleaning pump.

• Replenishment cartridge cleaning pump: ON → OFF

57010 5/7
 57010
Replenishment operation sequence [F specification]

17. P1R/P2RA/P2RB (upper) replenishment solution level sensors detect all replenishment solution.
• If creating the replenishment solution with the replenishment tank completely empty, the replenishment solution is not filled
up until P2RA (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor and P2RB (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor turn
on.
Therefore, only for Manual Open and Create Replenishment Solution (Manual Open), no error occurs even if P2RA
(Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor and P2RB (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor do not turn on.

18. The replenish cartridge moves to the cap cleaning position (upper position).

SE61
P1R P2RA P2RB MV7 MV8

MV6 MV9
SE62
MV5 MV10
Reprenishment
cartridge
MV4

P17
SE63 SE65 SE67 LSE7

PSR

5. Operation sequence
P1R P2RA P2RB
Replenisher tank
SE64 SE66 SE68 LSE8

RP1 RP2 RP3 RP4 G085134

• Replenisher Cartridge Open Motor: ON → OFF
• Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower): DARK → LIGHT
• Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper): LIGHT → DARK
If Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower) does not turn LIGHT
• ☞ No. 5900[F]−0007Replenisher cartridge open motor operation error.
If Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper) does not turn DARK
• ☞ No. 5900[F]−0008Replenisher cartridge open motor operation error.

19. The system operates the replenishment cartridge cleaning pump.

• Replenishment cartridge cleaning pump: ON

20. The system opens the P1R cartridge flushing valve for a certain period of time to clean the cartridge, then
closes the P1R cartridge flushing valve.

• P1R cartridge flushing valve: ON/OFF

21. The system opens and cleans the P2RA cartridge flushing valve for a certain period of time, then closes it.
• P2RA cartridge flushing valve: ON/OFF

22. The system opens the P2RB cartridge flushing valve for a certain period of time to clean the cartridge,
then closes the valve.

• P2RB cartridge flushing valve: ON/OFF

57010 6/7
 57010
Replenishment operation sequence [F specification]

23. Stops the Replenishment cartridge cleaning pump.

• Replenishment cartridge cleaning pump: OFF

24. The replenishment cartridge moves from the cap cleaning position (upper position) to the lower position to
discharge washing water.

• Replenisher Cartridge Open Motor: ON → OFF

• Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper): DARK → LIGHT
• Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower): LIGHT → DARK
If Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper) does not turn LIGHT
• ☞ No. 5900[F]−0010Replenisher cartridge open motor operation error.
If Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower) does not turn DARK
• ☞ No. 5900[F]−0011Replenisher cartridge open motor operation error.

25. The replenisher cartridge is moved from the lower position to the upper position.
• Replenisher Cartridge Open Motor: ON → OFF
• Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower): DARK → LIGHT
• Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper): LIGHT → DARK
If Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower) does not turn LIGHT

5. Operation sequence
• ☞ No. 5900[F]−0013Replenisher cartridge open motor operation error.
If Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper) does not turn DARK
• ☞ No. 5900[F]−0014Replenisher cartridge open motor operation error.

26. End

57010 7/7
 57020
Replenishment operation sequence [F specification]

Replenishment operation sequence [F]

• Only for F specification, the error message may be shown when both conditions 1 and 2 are fulfilled.

Condition 1 Condition 2
• When the remaining amount of P1R replenishment solution is 1. The processor control PCB is replaced.
3034.8 or less, or the remaining amount of P2RA/P2RB 2. A data is initialized.
replenishment solutions are 1168.8 or less.
3. ☞ No. 5538 Backup data error. Processor occurs.

NOTE
• The error occurs if both conditions 1 and 2 are fulfilled, because the number of replenishment pump revolution is stored in the
processor control PCB.
• When initializing a data or replacing the processor control PCB, the number of pump revolution stored in the processor control PCB is
initialized.
• The number of pump revolution is not backed up in Reading and Writing Data. Therefore, the error may occur only when both
conditions 1 and 2 are fulfilled.
Countermeasure
1. Drain all replenishment solution in the replenishment tank (P1R/P2RA/P2RB). ☞ 27550
2. Carry out Manual Open in F: Functions of Pump Output Amount Setting.

Example:
• When the remaining amount of P1R replenishment solution is • When the remaining amount of P1R replenishment solution is
3034.9 ml to 3756 ml or more, or the remaining amount of 3034.8 or less, or the remaining amount of P2RA/P2RB

5. Operation sequence
P2RA/P2RB replenishment solution is 1168.9 ml to 1461 ml replenishment solutions are 1168.8 or less.
or more.
• The mixing replenisher is correctly completed. Error
• ☞ No. 5905[F]−00002 P1R replenishment solution output
amount/replenishment solution level management is abnormal.
• ☞ No. 5906[F]−00002 P2RA replenishment solution output
amount/replenishment solution level management is abnormal.
• ☞ No. 5907[F]−00002 P2RB replenishment solution output
amount/replenishment solution level management is abnormal.
Example 1: If the mixing replenisher is correctly completed Example 2: If the mixing replenisher is not correctly completed
The replenisher tank when the condition 2 occurs. The replenisher tank when the condition 1 or 2 occurs.

P1R P2RA P2RB P1R P2RA P2RB

12mm

18.7mm
12mm

18.7mm

22.4mm
22.4mm

SE63 SE63
SE67 SE67
SE65 SE65
65.9mm
77.2mm
65.9mm
77.2mm

65.9mm
65.9mm

SE64 SE68 SE64 SE66 SE68

SE66

3756ml 1461ml 1461ml 3000ml 1000ml 1000ml

P1R P2RA P2RB P1R P2RA P2RB

12mm

18.7mm
12mm

18.7mm

22.4mm
22.4mm

SE63 SE63
SE67 SE67
SE65 SE65
65.9mm
77.2mm
65.9mm
77.2mm

65.9mm
65.9mm

SE64 SE66 SE68 SE64 SE66 SE68

The replenisher tank when the replenishment solution runs out The replenisher tank when the replenishment solution runs out

57020 1/2
 57020
Replenishment operation sequence [F specification]

SE63 P1R (upper) replenishment solution level sensor SE64 P1R (lower) replenishment solution level sensor
SE65 P2RA (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level SE66 P2RA (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level
Sensor Sensor
SE67 P2RB (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level SE68 P2RB (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level
Sensor Sensor

5. Operation sequence

57020 2/2
 6000

6. Electrical parts

Compatibility of PCBs and electrical parts ........................................................................... 60100

Compatibility of QSS-32 series PCBs and electrical parts ................................................................................60100
Position of electrical parts (desk section) ............................................................................ 61000
Desk section/CS-1 (positions of PCBs and electrical parts) [32] ......................................................................61000
Desk section/CS-2 (positions of PCBs and electrical parts) [32SD] .................................................................61000
Position of electrical parts (printer section) .......................................................................... 63000
Printer section (positions of PCBs) ...................................................................................................................63000
Printer section (positions of electrical parts) .....................................................................................................63050
Paper magazine mounts A, A2, B, and C (positions of electrical parts) ...........................................................63051
Paper supply unit A2 (positions of electrical parts) ..........................................................................................63055
Paper supply unit (positions of electrical parts) ................................................................................................63060
Exposure advance unit (positions of electrical parts) ........................................................................................63070
Laser unit (position and description of electrical parts) ....................................................................................63080
Paper advance unit 1 (positions of electrical parts) ...........................................................................................63090
Paper advance unit 2 (positions of electrical parts) ...........................................................................................63100
Processor loading unit (positions of electrical parts) .........................................................................................63110
Position of PCBs (processor section) .................................................................................. 63200
Processor section (positions of PCBs) [F] [N] [SM] [J] ....................................................................................63200
Processor section (position of PCB) [SM] ..................................................................................................63200
Processor section (positions of PCBs) [J] ...................................................................................................63200
Position of electrical parts (dryer section and order classification section) .......................... 63260

6 Electrical parts
Dryer section and order classification section (positions of electrical parts) ....................................................63260
Positions of electrical parts (Processor section) .................................................................. 63280
Processor section (positions of electrical parts) [F] ...........................................................................................63280
Processor section (positions of electrical parts) [N] ..........................................................................................63290
Processor section (positions of electrical parts) [SM] .......................................................................................63300
Processor section (positions of electrical parts) [J] ...........................................................................................63310
Processor section (List of adjustment after electrical parts replacement) [F] ...................................................63312
Processor section (fan operation specification) ................................................................... 63321
Processor section (fan operation specification) .................................................................................................63321

6000 1/2
 6000

Descriptions of PCB (desk section) ..................................................................................... 64000

Image processing PCB (J391305) .....................................................................................................................64000
Image correction PCB (J391359) ......................................................................................................................64010
D-ICE control PCB (J391306) ..........................................................................................................................64030
D-ICE PCB (J391374) .......................................................................................................................................64040
D-ICE control PCB and removing the D-ICE PCB (CS-1) ...............................................................................64045
DIMM (I090499) ...............................................................................................................................................64050
Scratch mend PCB 2 (J390905) .........................................................................................................................64060
Scratch mend PCB 1 [J484A] and scratch mend PCB 1 [J485] (J390904) .......................................................64070
Data change-over PCB (J390906) .....................................................................................................................64080
Switch control PCB (J391238) ..........................................................................................................................64090
ARCNET HUB PCB (J391277) ........................................................................................................................64100
Keyboard connecting PCB (J391265) ...............................................................................................................64110
Keyboard switch PCB (J390794) ......................................................................................................................64120
Colorimeter control PCB (J391264) ..................................................................................................................64130
PU control PCB (J391321) ................................................................................................................................64140
Power PCB (J391262) .......................................................................................................................................64160
Description of power supply (desk section) ......................................................................................................64170
Description of PCB (printer section) .................................................................................... 66000
Printer control PCB (J391254) ..........................................................................................................................66000
Laser control PCB (J391270) ............................................................................................................................66010
Printer I/O PCB 1 (J391255) .............................................................................................................................66020
Printer I/O PCB 2 (J391256) .............................................................................................................................66030
Printer I/O PCB 3 (J391253) .............................................................................................................................66040

6 Electrical parts
Triple magazine PCB (J391257) .......................................................................................................................66050
Quad magazine PCB (J391177) ........................................................................................................................66055
Laser I/O PCB (J391252) ..................................................................................................................................66060
B laser driver and G laser driver ........................................................................................................................66070
AOM driver .......................................................................................................................................................66080
CVP PCB (J391258) ..........................................................................................................................................66090
Power supply (printer section) ...........................................................................................................................66100
Explanation of PCBs (Processor section) ............................................................................ 66200
Processor control PCB [F] [N] [SM] [J] ............................................................................................................66200
Processor I/O PCB (J391356) [N] [SM] [J] [F] ................................................................................................66210
Processor relay PCB (J391260) [N] [SM] [J] [F] ..............................................................................................66220
Tablet replenishment driver PCB (J391351) [J] ................................................................................................66500
SM I/O PCB (J391191, J391378) [SM] ............................................................................................................66600
F replenishment I/O PCB (J391322) [F] ...........................................................................................................66800
Power supply (processor) ..................................................................................................................................67400
Changing the power supply specifications (Outside Japan) ..............................................................................68050
Changeing the power supply specifications [Stand alone scanner] ...................................................................68060
Cables ................................................................................................................................. 68100
Precautions for handling the optical fiber cable and LVDS cable ....................................................................68100
Power ON/OFF .................................................................................................................... 68500
Operation when the power supply is turned on .................................................................................................68500
When power is not supplied to input and output sections (How to use the starter jumper) .............................68550

6000 2/2
 60100 Compatibility of PCBs and electrical parts

Compatibility of PCBs and electrical parts

Compatibility of QSS-32 series PCBs and electrical parts

Reference
☞ Control PCB ☞ PCB (other parts) ☞ Power supply PCB ☞ Exposure engine

z Explanation
• The PCB and the parts No. used in the PCB installed on QSS differs depending on the type.
• The corrective actions after replacing the PCBs may differ depending on system model though the parts No. of PCB is the same in
the list. Be sure to confirm the explanation of each PCB when replacing the parts.
NOTE
• 9 is used and − is unused.
• (J# # # # # #) in the list stands for that the part is no more available.

z Control PCB
Name Part No. 3 3 3 3 Manual No. Remarks
2 2 2 2
P S S
R D D
O P
R
O
Printer control PCB J390947*1 9 9 9 9 ☞ 66000
J391254 − − 9 9
Laser control PCB J390919*1 9 9 9 9 ☞ 66010
J391270 − − 9 9
Processor control PCB J390878*1 9 9 9 9 ☞ 66200

6. Electrical parts
J391358
J391259
PU control PCB J307103*1 9 9 9 9 ☞ 64140
J391321 − − 9 9
D-ICE control PCB J390946*1 9 9 − − ☞ 64030
J391306
Switch control PCB J391121*1 − − 9 9 ☞ 64090
J391238
Colorimeter Control PCB J390801*1 9 9 9 9 ☞ 64130
J391264 − − 9 9

*1. Not complying with the RoHS Directive

z PCB (other parts)

Name Part No. 3 3 3 3 Manual No. Remarks
2 2 2 2
P S S
R D D
O P
R
O
PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB J390865*1 9 9 − − The PC Service Manual explains PCB.
J391307
PC-laser interface PCB J391048*1 − − 9 9
J391266
PC-scanner interface PCB J391049*1 − − 9 9
J391267
ARCNET HUB PCB J390479*1 9 − − − ☞ 64100
J391277

60100 1/4
 60100
Compatibility of PCBs and electrical parts

Name Part No. 3 3 3 3 Manual No. Remarks

2 2 2 2
P S S
R D D
O P
R
O
Image processing PCB J390864*1 9 9 − − ☞ 64000
J391305
Image correction PCB J390913*1 9 9 − − ☞ 64010
J391359
D-ICE PCB J390903*1 9 − − − ☞ 64040
J391374
Scratch mend PCB 1 [J484A] J390904*1 9 − − − ☞ 64070
Scratch mend PCB 1 [J485] 9 − − −
Data change-over PCB J390906*1 9 − − − ☞ 64080
Scratch mend PCB 2 J390905*1 9 − − − ☞ 64060
DIMM I090499*1 9 − − − ☞ 64050
B-AOM driver Z025645 9 9 9 9 ☞ 66080
G-AOM driver I124032 9 9 9 9
I124020
R-AOM driver 9 9 9 9
(I124019)*1
(I124012)*1
B laser driver J391160*2 9 9 9 9 ☞ 66070
G laser driver (J390973)*1 9 9 9 9
B laser driver J391231*2 9 9 9 9
G laser driver J390929*1 9 9 9 9
*1
9 9 9 9 ☞ 64110

6. Electrical parts
Keyboard connecting PCB J390645
J391265 − − 9 9
Keyboard switch PCB J390794 9 9 9 9 ☞ 64120
Printer I/O PCB 1 J390866*1 9 9 9 9 ☞ 66020
J391255 − − 9 9
Printer I/O PCB 2 J390867*1 9 9 9 9 ☞ 66030
J391256 − − 9 9
Printer I/O PCB 3 J390868*1 9 9 9 9 ☞ 66040
J391253 − − 9 9
Laser I/O PCB J390945*1 9 9 9 9 ☞ 66060
J391252 − − 9 9
Processor I/O PCB J391164*1 9 9 9 9 ☞ 66210
J391356
(J390798)*1
CVP PCB J390943*1 9 9 9 9 ☞ 66090
J391258 − − 9 9
Triple magazine PCB J390835*1 9 9 9 9 ☞ 66050
J391257 − − 9 9
Quad magazine PCB J391177 9 9 9 9 ☞ 66055
Power PCB J390938*1 9 9 9 9 ☞ 64160
J391262 − − 9 9
Processor relay PCB J390917*1 9 9 9 9 ☞ 66220
J391260
Transistor PCB J404493*1 9 9 9 9 −
SM I/O PCB J390330*1
9 9 9 9 ☞ 66600 Only [SM] specification
J391191 9 9 9 9
J391378

60100 2/4
 60100
Compatibility of PCBs and electrical parts

Name Part No. 3 3 3 3 Manual No. Remarks

2 2 2 2
P S S
R D D
O P
R
O
Tablet replenishment driver PCB J306328*1 9 9 9 9 ☞ 66500 Only for [J]specification
J391351 − − 9 9
F replenishment I/O PCB J391322 9 9 9 9 ☞ 66800 Only [F] specification
Temperature and humidity sensor I096003 9 9 9 9 ☞ 63280
*1. Not complying with the RoHS Directive
*2. Each PCB must be replaced depending on the laser unit type.
For details, see ☞ 63080.

z Power supply PCB

Name Part No. 3 3 3 3 Manual No. Remarks
2 2 2 2
P S S
R D D
O P
R
O
Desk power supply 1 I038293*1 9 9 − − ☞ 64170
I038429
I038404 − − 9 9
Desk power supply 2 I038263*1 9 9 − −
9 9 9 9

6. Electrical parts
I038403
Multi power supply (printer) I038160 9 9 9 9 ☞ 66100
Printer power supply 1 I038361 9 9 9 9
Printer power supply 2 I038287*1 9 9 9 9
I038406 − − 9 9
Printer power supply 3 I038364*1 9 9 9 9
I038421 − − 9 9
Printer power supply 4 I038414 9 9 9 9
(I038415)
I038409
Laser power supply I038286*1 9 9 9 9
I038405 − − 9 9
Processor power supply 1 I038320*1 9 9 9 9 ☞ 67400
I038404
Processor power supply 2 I038286*1 9 9 9 9
Processor power supply 3 I038405

*1. Not complying with the RoHS Directive

60100 3/4
 60100
Compatibility of PCBs and electrical parts

z Exposure engine
Name Part No. 3 3 3 3 Manual No. Remarks
2 2 2 2
P S S
R D D
O P
R
O
Laser unit (Type A1) Z023718*1*2*3 9 9 9 9 ☞ 63080
(Z022427)*1*3
Laser Unit (TypeB1) Z023719*1 9 9 9 9
(Z020964)*1*3
Laser unit (Type Ff) Z025544*1*2 9 9 9 9

*1. When replacing laser unit, pay attention to the combination of the laser unit and B and G laser drivers.
*2. When using the Type A1 (Z023718) or Laser Unit (Type Ff), the specified system program version is required.
See 66070☞ 2. Precautions for replacement.
*3. Not complying with the RoHS Directive

6. Electrical parts

60100 4/4
 61000 Position of electrical parts (desk section)

Position of electrical parts (desk section)

Desk section/CS-1 (positions of PCBs and electrical parts) [32]

Position of PCBs and electrical parts varies between 32 and 32SD.

• For details about 32SD, see ☞ Desk section/CS-2 (positions of PCBs and electrical parts) [32SD].

z Position (front face)

3

5
4

1 7

G068447

Desk section (PCB) (front)

No. Name Manual No. Remarks

6. Electrical parts
1 Keyboard connecting PCB ☞ 64110
2 Colorimeter Control PCB ☞ 64130 *1

Desk section (electrical parts) (front)

No. Name Symbol Remarks
3 Colorimeter − Colorimeter unit *1
4 Paper sensor 1 SE75
5 Paper sensor 2 SE76
6 Paper advance motor PM12
7 Pressure change solenoid SOL1

*1. For the Stand Alone Scanner, this is not attached.

61000 1/5
 61000
Position of electrical parts (desk section)

z Position (back face)

8: For standard PC

8: For high-spec PC
18 9
17 10
12
6 11

1
7

15

14

6. Electrical parts
4 5 16 13
3 G068431

Desk section (PCB) (back)

No. Name Symbol Manual No. Remarks
1 Image correction PCB ☞ 64010
2 Image processing PCB ☞ 64000
3 Power PCB ☞ 64160
4 Desk power supply 1 PS2 ☞ 64170
5 Desk power supply 2 PS3
6 PU control PCB ☞ 64140 Option*2*3
7 ARCNET-HUB PCB ☞ 64100 Option*3
8 Keyboard switch PCB ☞ 64120 Only PC-NRT-RS2/RD2 is
equipped with this PCB.
9 D-ICE control PCB ☞ 64030
10 D-ICE PCB ☞ 64040 *2

11 Scratch mend PCB 1 [J484A] ☞ 64070 Option*1*2

12 Scratch mend PCB 1 [J485]
13 Data change-over PCB ☞ 64080 Option*1*2
14 Scratch mend PCB 2 ☞ 64060 Option*1*2
15 DIMM ☞ 64050 Option*1*2

*1. The digital masking unit (Z809810-01) consists of two scratch mend PCBs 1, a data change-over PCB, a scratch mend PCB 2, and a DIMM.
*2. For the Stand Alone Printer, this PCB is not attached.
*3. For the DLS specification, this PCB is not attached.

61000 2/5
 61000
Position of electrical parts (desk section)

Desk section (electrical parts) (back)

No. Name Symbol Remarks
16 D-ICE PCB cooling fan FAN2 Blowing (always ON when 200 V is
supplied to desk power supply 2)
17 Control unit cooling fan FAN1 Exhaust (always ON when 200 V is
supplied to desk power supply 2)
18 Buzzer BZ1

6. Electrical parts

61000 3/5
 61000
Position of electrical parts (desk section)

Desk section/CS-2 (positions of PCBs and electrical parts) [32SD]

Position of PCBs and electrical parts varies between 32 and 32SD.

• For detail about 32, refer to ☞ Desk section/CS-1 (positions of PCBs and electrical parts) [32].

z Position (front face)

3

5
4

1 7

G068447

Desk section (PCB) (front)

No. Name Manual No. Remarks

6. Electrical parts
1 Keyboard connecting PCB ☞ 64110
2 Colorimeter Control PCB ☞ 64130

Desk section (electrical parts) (front)

No. Name Symbol Remarks
3 Colorimeter − Colorimeter unit
4 Paper sensor 1 SE75
5 Paper sensor 2 SE76
6 Paper advance motor PM12
7 Pressure change solenoid SOL1

61000 4/5
 61000
Position of electrical parts (desk section)

z Position (back face)

11

6. Electrical parts
1 2 3
G082807

Desk section (PCB) (back)

No. Name Symbol Manual No. Remarks
1 Power PCB ☞ 64160
2 Desk power supply 1 PS2 ☞ 64170
3 Desk power supply 2 PS3
4 PU control PCB ☞ 64140 Option*1
5 Keyboard switch PCB ☞ 64120
6 Switch control PCB ☞ 64090
*1. For the Stand Alone Printer, this PCB is not attached.

Desk section (electrical parts) (back)

No. Name Symbol Remarks
11 Buzzer BZ1

61000 5/5
 63000 Position of electrical parts (printer section)

Position of electrical parts (printer section)

Printer section (positions of PCBs)

z Position 1

4
1

5
10 9 8

6. Electrical parts
11

6 7
G068432

Printer section 1
No. Name Symbol Manual No. Remarks
1 B-AOM driver ☞ 66080
2 G-AOM driver
3 R-AOM driver
4 Laser control PCB ☞ 66010
5 Laser I/O PCB ☞ 66060
6 B laser driver ☞ 66070
7 G laser driver
8 Printer control PCB ☞ 66000
9 Multi power supply (printer) PS4 ☞ 66100
10 Printer I/O PCB 3 ☞ 66040
11 Laser power supply PS5 ☞ 66100

63000 1/3
 63000
Position of electrical parts (printer section)

z 2

7 4
5

6. Electrical parts
1 2 3 G069576

63000 2/3
 63000
Position of electrical parts (printer section)

G086492

6. Electrical parts
Printer section 2
No. Name Symbol Manual No. Remarks
1 Printer I/O PCB 1 ☞ 66020
2 CVP PCB ☞ 66090 Option
3 Printer power supply 3 PS3 ☞ 66100
4 Printer power supply 1 PS1
5 Printer power supply 2 PS2
6 Printer I/O PCB 2 ☞ 66030
7 Triple magazine PCB ☞ 66050
8 Quad magazine PCB ☞ 66055
9 Printer power supply 4 ☞ 66100

63000 3/3
 63050
Position of electrical parts (printer section)

Printer section (positions of electrical parts)

z Position (front face)

For the triple magazine

7
11

6. Electrical parts
10
3 1 2 4
G068441

For the quad magazine unit

11

10

12

G086493

Printer main body (front face)

No. Name Symbol Remarks
*1
1 Interlock Switch (Printer Door 1) LS2
2 Interlock Switch (Printer Door 2) LS3
3 Printer Door 3 Sensor LS4
4 Inner cooling fan FAN1 Blowing (the fan is always ON.)
5 Control box cooling fan 4 FAN6 Intake (The fan is always on.)

63050 1/2
 63050
Position of electrical parts (printer section)

No. Name Symbol Remarks

*1
6 Interlock Switch (Printer Top Cover) LS1
7 Paper advance section cooling fan 2 FAN7 Blowing (the fan is always ON.)
8 Inner thermosensor TH1
9 Paper magazine lamp B/C L1
10 Paper magazine lamp A L2
11 Counter CO Option
*1
12 Interlock switch (printer door 4) LS5
*1. When LS1, 2, 3, and 5 are turned off, all the motors in the printer stop.
Also, the control signals of B, G and R-AOM drivers are cut off and laser light is not output from the laser unit.

z Position (back face)

1
6

6. Electrical parts
5

G068443

Printer main body (back face)

No. Name Symbol Remarks
1 Laser unit cooling fan 1 FAN8 Go to ☞ 37300 for ON/OFF controlling of
2 Laser unit cooling fan 2 FAN9 laser unit cooling fans 1 and 2.
3 Control box cooling fan 3 FAN4 Exhaust (The fan is always on.)
4 Control box cooling fan 2 FAN3
5 Control box cooling fan 1 FAN2
6 Paper advance section cooling fan 1 FAN5

63050 2/2
 63051
Position of electrical parts (printer section)

Paper magazine mounts A, A2, B, and C (positions of electrical parts)

z Layout diagram
For the triple magazine Paper magazine mount B 3 1

8
Paper magazine mount A

6. Electrical parts
7 9
Paper magazine mount C

6
4

5
G068427

For the quad magazine unit

11

Paper magazine mount A2

10

12

Paper magazine mount A

7

G086494

63051 1/2
 63051
Position of electrical parts (printer section)

Paper magazine mount B

No. Name Symbol Remarks
1 Paper magazine motor B PM1
2 Paper magazine code sensor B SE1
3 Paper end sensor B SE4

Paper magazine mount C

No. Name Symbol Remarks
4 Paper magazine motor C PM2
5 Paper magazine code sensor C SE2
6 Paper end sensor C SE5

Paper magazine mount A

No. Name Symbol Remarks
7 Paper magazine motor A PM3
8 Paper magazine code sensor A SE3
9 Paper end sensor A SE6

Paper magazine mount A2

No. Name Symbol Remarks
10 Paper magazine motor A2 PM22
11 paper magazine code sensor A2 SE28
12 Paper end sensor A2 SE29

6. Electrical parts

63051 2/2
 63055
Position of electrical parts (printer section)

Paper supply unit A2 (positions of electrical parts)

z Layout diagram

6. Electrical parts
5

G086495

Paper supply unit A2

No. Name Symbol Remarks
1 Width change motor A2 PM24
2 Paper supply motor A2 PM25
3 Pressure release motor A2 DM7
4 Pressure change sensor A2 SE30
5 Width change sensor A2 SE31

63055 1/1
 63060
Position of electrical parts (printer section)

Paper supply unit (positions of electrical parts)

z Layout diagram
2 1
11 7

13

14

12 8 9 10
3

6. Electrical parts
4
G068425

Paper supply unit

No. Name Symbol Remarks
1 Paper supply arm motor (left) PM7
2 Paper supply arm motor (right) PM8
3 Paper hold motor DM3
4 Paper hold sensor SE11
5 Paper supply pressure change motor DM2
6 Paper supply pressure change sensor SE10
7 Paper loading sensor SE7
8 Cut home sensor SE8
9 Cut end sensor SE9
10 Cut motor DM1
11 Ribbon advance motor DM6
12 Paper supply motor A PM5
13 Paper advance motor 1 PM6
14 Paper supply motor B/C PM4

63060 1/1
 63070
Position of electrical parts (printer section)

Exposure advance unit (positions of electrical parts)

z Layout diagram

7
Front

4
5

Front

1
3
2
G068426

6. Electrical parts
Exposure advance unit
No. Name Symbol Remarks
1 Zigzagging correction sensor (left) SE12
2 Zigzagging correction sensor (right) SE13
3 Exposure start sensor SE14
4 Exposure advance pressure change sensor 1 SE15
5 Exposure advance pressure change sensor 2 SE16
6 Exposure advance motor 1 PM9
7 Exposure advance motor 2 PM11
8 Exposure advance pressure change motor 1 PM10
9 Exposure advance pressure change motor 2 PM12

63070 1/1
 63080
Position of electrical parts (printer section)

Laser unit (position and description of electrical parts)

z Type of the laser unit and identifying its type

There are the following types of laser units. There is no difference in functions and quality.

Laser unit (Type # # #) Laser unit (# #) #-Laser driver Remarks

Type A1 (Z025593)*1*2 A1 Z023718*1*2 B J391160
Label: First four-digit number is G
No. 0913.
Type A1 (Z022425)*2 Z023718*2 B J390973*2*3 The part in
(Z022427)*2 G J391160*3 parentheses is
Label: First four-digit number is discontinued.
No. 0913.
Type B1 (Z022426)*2 B1 Z023719*2 B J390929*2
(Z020964)*2 G
Label: First four-digit number is
No. 0912.
Type Ff (Z026028) *1 f Z025544 B J391160
Label: First four-digit number is G J391231
No. 0918.
Type Ff (Z020763) *1 f Z025544 B J391160
Label: First four-digit number is G J390929*2
No. 0918.

*1. When using the Type A1 (Z023718) or Laser Unit (Type Ff), it is necessary to verify that the system program is upgraded to the specified version.
See 66070☞ 2. Precautions for replacement.
*2. Not complying with the RoHS Directive
*3. (J391160) and (J390973) cannot be used by mixture. Confirm the parts No. and use the same PCB type of B laser driver and G laser driver.

6. Electrical parts
• For replacing and adjusting the position of the laser unit, see ☞ 26710.
• There are two ways to identify the type of the laser unit which is equipped as described below.
1. It can be identified by the version of the LASER on the System Version Check display.
☞ 35500
2. It can be identified by the label placed on the laser unit.

Laser unit

0918######## 0913######## 0912########

Type Ff Type A1 Type B1
G072401

IMPORTANT
• When replacing laser unit, pay attention to the combination of the laser unit and B and G laser drivers.
We recommend that you replace a laser unit with the same type of laser unit. However, depending on our stock
conditions, there may be situations when we cannot obtain the same type or have a different type in stock. In those
cases, pay attention to the combination of the laser unit and B and G laser drivers, and then replace the laser unit.

63080 1/2
 63080
Position of electrical parts (printer section)

• ☞ 66070
Example) When replacing the laser unit (A1) with the laser unit (f)
Composition of parts before replacement Composition of parts after replacement
Laser unit (Type A1) → Replacing → Laser unit (Type f)
B laser driver (J391160) → No need for → B laser driver (J391160)
replacement
G laser driver (J391160) → Replacing → G laser driver (J391231)

z Layout diagram

6. Electrical parts
1
G068440

Laser unit
No. Name Symbol Remarks
1 Laser unit heater H5 Go to ☞ 37300 for ON/OFF controlling of
the laser unit heater.

63080 2/2
 63090
Position of electrical parts (printer section)

Paper advance unit 1 (positions of electrical parts)

z Layout diagram
4

1 G068422

Paper advance unit 1

No. Name Symbol Remarks
1 Paper advance motor 2 PM13
2 Pressure guide motor PM14
3 Pressure guide sensor SE17

6. Electrical parts
4 Paper sensor 1 SE18

63090 1/1
 63100
Position of electrical parts (printer section)

Paper advance unit 2 (positions of electrical parts)

z Layout diagram

12 5 3 10 7

11 6 13

6. Electrical parts
1 8

2 4
G068424

Paper advance unit 2

No. Name Symbol Remarks
1 Arm sensor (left) SE19
2 Arm sensor (right) SE20
3 Lane select motor (left) PM17
4 Lane select motor (right) PM18
5 Paper advance pressure change motor (left) DM4
6 Paper advance pressure change motor (right) DM5
7 Paper advance arm motor (left) PM15
8 Paper advance arm motor (right) PM16
9 Paper advance motor 3 PM19
10 Lane select sensor (left) SE21
11 Lane select sensor (right) SE22
12 Paper advance pressure change sensor (left) SE23
13 Paper advance pressure change sensor (right) SE24

63100 1/1
 63110
Position of electrical parts (printer section)

Processor loading unit (positions of electrical parts)

z Layout diagram

G068423

Processor loading unit

No. Name Symbol Remarks
1 Paper sensor 2 (left) SE25
2 Paper sensor 2 (center) SE26
3 Paper sensor 2 (right) SE27

6. Electrical parts

63110 1/1
 63200 Position of PCBs (processor section)

Position of PCBs (processor section)

Processor section (positions of PCBs) [F] [N] [SM] [J]

Description for each specification

Some PCBs are additionally installed depending on the system specification. See below for the description for each specification.

Reference
☞ Processor section (position of PCB) ☞ Processor section (positions of PCBs) [J]
[SM]

z Layout diagram
[N] [SM] and [J] specifications 1

4 2 5

3 7

6. Electrical parts
G068433

[F]
8 2

← Remove the PCB

plate (four screws)

7 6 5
G085942

Processor section
No. Name Symbol Manual No. Remarks
1 Processor control PCB ☞ 66200
2 Processor I/O PCB ☞ 66210
3 Processor relay PCB ☞ 66220 *1

4 Transistor PCB ☞ 60100 Cooling water solenoid valve

(option)

63200 1/2
 63200
Position of PCBs (processor section)

No. Name Symbol Manual No. Remarks

5 Processor power supply 1 PS1 ☞ 67400
6 Processor power supply 2 PS2
7 Processor power supply 3 PS3
8 F replenishment I/O PCB ☞ 66800 F specification only
*1. For F specification., to remove the processor relay PCB it is necessary to remove all connectors of processor power supply 1, processor power
supply 2 and processor power supply 3 and to remove the PCB plate (four screws).

Processor section (position of PCB) [SM]

z Layout diagram

1
G070039

SM replenishment unit
No. Name Symbol Manual No. Remarks
1 SM I/O PCB ☞ 66600

6. Electrical parts
Processor section (positions of PCBs) [J]

z Layout diagram

1 G051059

Tablet replenishment unit

No. Name Symbol Manual No. Remarks
1 Tablet replenishment driver PCB ☞ 66500

63200 2/2
 63260 Position of electrical parts (dryer section and order classification section)

Position of electrical parts (dryer section and order classification section)

Dryer section and order classification section (positions of electrical parts)

z Layout diagram

18
13 1 17

6 5 4 15
11

8-1

16

8
7

6. Electrical parts
12 14
10

G068390

Dryer section, order classification section

No. Name Symbol Remarks
1 Conveyor unit sensor SE25
2 Sorter home sensor SE26
3 Print full sensor SE27
4 Print sensor (right) SE28
5 Print sensor (center) SE29
6 Print sensor (left) SE30
7 Dryer lane select sensor SE45
8 Dryer safety thermostat STH3 [N], [SM] and [J] specifications
8-1 [F]
9 Dryer thermosensor TH4

63260 1/2
 63260
Position of electrical parts (dryer section and order classification section)

No. Name Symbol Remarks

10 Interlock switch (dryer cover) LS5
11 Manual sorter switch (manual replenisher switch) SW1
12 Dryer fan FAN15
13 Conveyor motor DM3
14 Sorter motor DM4
15 Dryer selection solenoid SOL16
16 Dryer heater H4
17 Processor condition lamp
18 Signal lamp Option

6. Electrical parts

63260 2/2
 63280 Positions of electrical parts (Processor section)

Positions of electrical parts (Processor section)

Processor section (positions of electrical parts) [F]

Description for each specification

In this section, the location of information varies depending on the specification. See below for the description for each specification.

Reference
☞ Processor section (positions ☞ Processor section (positions ☞ Processor section (positions
of electrical parts) [N] of electrical parts) [SM] of electrical parts) [J]

z Layout diagram

From 1 to 12 32

From 15 to 20

22 27

21 28
29

6. Electrical parts
23 24 25 26 14 13 33 31 30
G085930

Processor section (front face)

No. Name Symbol Remarks
1 P1 processing solution float switch FS1
P1 processable level
P1 processing solution level
P1 safety thermostat
2 P2 processing solution float switch FS2
P2 processable level
P2 processing solution level
P2 safety thermostat
3 PS1 processing solution float switch FS3
PS1 processable level
4 PS2 processing solution float switch FS4
PS2 processable level
5 PS3 processing solution float switch FS5
PS3 processable level
6 PS4 processing solution float switch FS6
PS4 processable level
7 CD thermosensor TH1
8 BF thermosensor TH2
9 STB thermosensor TH3
10 P1 Heater H1
11 P2 Heater H2

63280 1/4
 63280
Positions of electrical parts (Processor section)

No. Name Symbol Remarks

12 PS Heater H3
13 Minute Meter CO Option
14 Power supply cooling fan FAN14 Exhaust*1
15 CD circulation pump P1
16 BF circulation pump P3
*3
17 STB1 circulation pump P5
18 STB2 circulation pump P6
19 STB3 circulation pump P7
20 STB4 circulation pump P8
21 Tank cooling fan 1 FAN4 Intake *1
22 CD digital flowmeter FLS1 Option
*2
23 P1R Replenisher Pump RP1
24 P2RA Replenisher Pump RP2
25 P2RB Replenisher Pump RP3
26 PSR Replenisher Pump RP4
27 Earth leakage circuit breaker 1 NFB2 See 4203 ☞ Earth leakage circuit
breaker 1 (NFB2).
28 Earth leakage circuit breaker 2 NFB3 See 4203 ☞ Earth leakage circuit
breaker 2 (NFB3).
29 Earth leakage circuit breaker 3 NFB4 See 4203 ☞ Earth leakage circuit
breaker 3 (NFB4).
30 Terminal strip 1 TA1
31 Terminal strip 2 TA2
32 Interlock switch (Processor top cover) LS4

6. Electrical parts
33 Transformer TR1
*1. For details about processor section fan operation specification, see ☞ 63321.
*2. After replacing each electrical part, see Processor section (List of adjustment after electrical parts replacement) ☞ 63312.
*3. When removing the connector connected in the circuit pump, be sure to press the lock, and remove it.
If the locked connector is pulled by force, the connector in the circuit pump will be damaged.

Press this part.

G085422

63280 2/4
 63280
Positions of electrical parts (Processor section)

z Layout diagram

3 2 1 4 5 28 29 27 26

22

21
23
24 25
20

• Rear: 30
• Middle: 31
• Front: 32

15 16
14 • Rear
• Rear: 17
13, 12, 11, 10
• Middle: 18
• Front
6, 7, 8, 9 • Front: 19

6. Electrical parts
G085931

Processor section (back face)

No. Name Symbol Remarks
1 Replenisher Cartridge Set Sensor SE60
*3
2 Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Upper) SE61
3 Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor (Lower) SE62
4 Replenishment cartridge opening motor DM5 *3

5 Interlock Switch (Replenisher Section Door) LS8

*3
6 P1R cartridge flushing valve MV4
7 P2RA cartridge flushing valve MV5
8 P2RB cartridge flushing valve MV6
9 P1R agitation solenoid valve MV7
10 P1 automated cleaning valve MV8
11 P2 automated cleaning valve MV9
12 PS automated cleaning valve MV10
13 Automated cleaning valve - Unused
*3
14 Replenisher cartridge cleaning pump P17
15 PSR (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor LSE7
16 PSR (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor LSE8
17 P1R (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor SE63 *2*3

P1R (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor SE64

18 P2RA (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor SE65
P2RA (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor SE66
19 P2RB (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor SE67
P2RB (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level Sensor SE68

63280 3/4
 63280
Positions of electrical parts (Processor section)

No. Name Symbol Remarks

20 Temperature and humidity sensor SE69
21 Drive motor M11 If replaced, perform Drive Motor
Revolution Count Setting.
☞ 33502
22 Exhaust fan FAN13 Exhaust*1
23 Drive motor cooling fan FAN16 Blowing*1
24 Tank cooling fan 3 FAN12 Exhaust*1
25 Tank cooling fan 2 FAN11 Exhaust*1
26 CD effluent float switch FS7
*4
27 BF effluent float switch FS8
28 STB effluent float switch FS9
29 Rack stopper sensor LS14
30 P1 Cooling Water Solenoid Valve MV1
31 P2 Cooling Water Solenoid Valve MV2
32 PS Cooling Water Solenoid Valve MV3
*1. For details about processor section fan operation specification, see ☞ 63321.
*2. For details about # # # replenishment solution level sensors, see the following image.
For replacing the replenishment solution level sensor, see ☞ 27530.

# # #(Upper) replenishment solution level sensor # # #(Lower) replenishment solution level sensor

6. Electrical parts
G085885
*3. After replacing each electrical part, see Processor section (List of adjustment after electrical parts replacement) ☞ 63312.
*4. Not applicable for the F specification.

63280 4/4
 63290
Positions of electrical parts (Processor section)

Processor section (positions of electrical parts) [N]

Description for each specification

In this section, the location of information varies depending on the specification. See below for the description for each specification.

Reference
☞ Processor section (positions ☞ Processor section (positions ☞ Processor section (positions
of electrical parts) [F] of electrical parts) [SM] of electrical parts) [J]

z Layout diagram
20 9 8 7

10, 42, 1, 11, 43, 2, 3, 4, 5, 17, 12, 44, 6

18
21
25
23 24
From 26 to 31

49

6. Electrical parts
22

19
39, 40, 41
45

13, 14, 15

46 50
47

51
48

52

38, 37, 36, 35, 34, 33, 32, 16

G068434

Processor section
No. Name Symbol Remarks
1 CD processing solution float switch FS1
CD refilling water level
CD processing solution level
CD safety thermostat

63290 1/3
 63290
Positions of electrical parts (Processor section)

No. Name Symbol Remarks

2 BF processing solution float switch FS2
BF refilling water level
BF processing solution level
BF safety thermostat
3 STB1 processing solution float switch FS3
STB1 refilling water level
4 STB2 processing solution float switch FS4
STB2 refilling water level
5 STB3 processing solution float switch FS5
STB3 refilling water level
6 STB4 processing solution float switch FS6
STB4 refilling water level
STB4 processing solution level
STB4 safety thermostat
7 CD effluent float switch FS7
*2
8 BF effluent float switch FS8
9 STB effluent float switch FS9
10 CD thermosensor TH1
11 BF thermosensor TH2
12 STB thermosensor TH3
13 CD replenishment solution level sensor LSE1
14 BF replenishment solution level sensor LSE2
15 STB replenishment solution level sensor LSE3
16 Refilling water tank level sensor LSE4

6. Electrical parts
17 Interlock switch (Processor top cover) LS4
18 Rack stopper sensor LS14
19 Power supply cooling fan FAN14 Circulation *1
20 Exhaust fan FAN13 Exhaust*1
21 Drive motor cooling fan FAN16 Blowing*1
22 Tank cooling fan 1 FAN10 Intake *1
23 Tank cooling fan 3 FAN12 Exhaust*1
24 Tank cooling fan 2 FAN11 Exhaust*1
25 Drive motor M3 If replaced, perform Drive Motor
Revolution Count Setting.
☞ 33502
26 CD circulation pump P1
27 BF circulation pump P3
*3
28 STB1 circulation pump P5
29 STB2 circulation pump P6
30 STB3 circulation pump P7
31 STB4 circulation pump P8
32 CD-W refilling water pump P9
33 BF-W refilling water pump P10
34 STB1-W refilling water pump P11
35 STB2-W refilling water pump P12
36 STB3-W refilling water pump P13
37 STB4-W refilling water pump P14
38 Cleaning pump 1 P15
39 CD replenisher pump RP1
40 BF replenisher pump RP2

63290 2/3
 63290
Positions of electrical parts (Processor section)

No. Name Symbol Remarks

41 STB replenisher pump RP3
42 CD heater H1
43 BF heater H2
44 STB heater H3
45 Hour meter HM1 Option
46 CD cooling water solenoid valve MV1 Option
47 BF cooling water solenoid valve MV2 Option
48 STB cooling water solenoid valve MV3 Option
49 CD digital flowmeter FLS1 Option
50 Earth leakage circuit breaker 1 NFB2 See 4203 ☞ Earth leakage circuit
breaker 1 (NFB2).
51 Earth leakage circuit breaker 2 NFB3 See 4203 ☞ Earth leakage circuit
breaker 2 (NFB3).
52 Earth leakage circuit breaker 3 NFB4 See 4203 ☞ Earth leakage circuit
breaker 3 (NFB4).
*1. For details about processor section fan operation specification, see ☞ 63321.
*2. Not applicable for the F specification.
*3. When removing the connector connected in the circuit pump, be sure to press the lock, and remove it.
If the locked connector is pulled by force, the connector in the circuit pump will be damaged.

Press this part.

6. Electrical parts
G085422

63290 3/3
 63300
Positions of electrical parts (Processor section)

Processor section (positions of electrical parts) [SM]

Description for each specification

In this section, the location of information varies depending on the specification. See below for the description for each specification.

Reference
☞ Processor section (positions ☞ Processor section (positions ☞ Processor section (positions
of electrical parts) [F] of electrical parts) [N] of electrical parts) [J]

z Layout diagram
16
9 8 7

21

17
10,28,1,11,12,29,2,3,4,5,6,13,30,6

19
20
14

From 22 to 27

6. Electrical parts
15
18

32

31 36
33
35
37
34
38

G070016

Processing tank section

No. Name Symbol Remarks
1 CD processing solution float switch FS1
CD refilling water level
CD processing solution level
CD safety thermostat

63300 1/4
 63300
Positions of electrical parts (Processor section)

No. Name Symbol Remarks

2 BF processing solution float switch FS2
BF refilling water level
BF processing solution level
BF safety thermostat
3 STB1 processing solution float switch FS3
STB1 refilling water level
4 STB2 processing solution float switch FS4
STB2 refilling water level
5 STB3 processing solution float switch FS5
STB3 refilling water level
6 STB4 processing solution float switch FS6
STB4 refilling water level
STB4 processing solution level
STB4 safety thermostat
7 CD effluent float switch FS7
8 BF effluent float switch FS8
9 STB effluent float switch FS9
10 CD thermosensor TH1
11 BF thermosensor TH2
12 STB thermosensor TH3
13 Interlock switch (Processor top cover) LS4
14 Rack stopper sensor LS14
15 Power supply cooling fan FAN14 Circulation *1
16 Exhaust fan FAN13 Exhaust*1

6. Electrical parts
17 Drive motor cooling fan FAN16 Blowing*1
18 Tank cooling fan 1 FAN10 Intake *1
19 Tank cooling fan 3 FAN12 Exhaust*1
20 Tank cooling fan 2 FAN11 Exhaust*1
21 Drive motor M3 If replaced, perform Drive Motor
Revolution Count Setting.
☞ 33502
22 CD circulation pump P1
*2
23 BF circulation pump P3
24 STB1 circulation pump P5
25 STB2 circulation pump P6
26 STB3 circulation pump P7
27 STB4 circulation pump P8
28 CD heater H1
29 BF heater H2
30 STB heater H3
31 Hour meter HM1 Option
32 CD cooling water solenoid valve MV1 Option
33 BF cooling water solenoid valve MV2 Option
34 STB cooling water solenoid valve MV3 Option
35 CD digital flowmeter FLS1 Option
36 Earth leakage circuit breaker 1 NFB2 See 4203 ☞ Earth leakage circuit
breaker 1 (NFB2).
37 Earth leakage circuit breaker 2 NFB3 See 4203 ☞ Earth leakage circuit
breaker 2 (NFB3).

63300 2/4
 63300
Positions of electrical parts (Processor section)

No. Name Symbol Remarks

38 Earth leakage circuit breaker 3 NFB4 See 4203 ☞ Earth leakage circuit
breaker 3 (NFB4).
*1. For details about processor section fan operation specification, see ☞ 63321.
*2. When removing the connector connected in the circuit pump, be sure to press the lock, and remove it.
If the locked connector is pulled by force, the connector in the circuit pump will be damaged.

Press this part.

G085422

z Layout diagram

26 3 21 13 22
2
23
25

29

6. Electrical parts
24 6

4 28

27

19

12

18
10
17

20

9 16

14

15 11

8
7 G070041

63300 3/4
 63300
Positions of electrical parts (Processor section)

SM replenishment unit
No. Name Symbol Remarks
1 CD-A replenisher pump sensor SE32
2 CD-B replenisher pump sensor SE33
3 CD-C replenisher pump sensor SE34
4 BF-A replenisher pump sensor SE35
5 BF-B replenisher pump sensor SE36
6 STB replenisher pump sensor SE37
7 CD-A replenishment solution sensor SE38
8 CD-B replenishment solution sensor SE39
9 CD-C replenishment solution sensor SE40
10 STB replenishment solution sensor SE41
11 BF-A replenishment solution sensor SE42
12 BF-B replenishment solution sensor SE43
13 CD-W water supply pump sensor SE44
14 Water supply tank level sensor LSE5
15 Replenishment package sensor P-1 LS6
16 Replenishment package sensor P-2 LS7
17 STB1-W refilling water pump P11
18 STB2-W refilling water pump P12
19 STB3-W refilling water pump P13
20 Cleaning pump 1 P15
21 CD-W water supply pump RP1
22 BF-W water supply pump RP2

6. Electrical parts
23 STB4-W water supply pump RP3
24 CD-A replenisher pump RP5
25 CD-B replenisher pump RP6
26 CD-C replenisher pump RP7
27 BF-A replenisher pump RP8
28 BF-B replenisher pump RP9
29 STB replenisher pump RP10

63300 4/4
 63310
Positions of electrical parts (Processor section)

Processor section (positions of electrical parts) [J]

Description for each specification

In this section, the location of information varies depending on the specification. See below for the description for each specification.

Reference
☞ Processor section (positions ☞ Processor section (positions ☞ Processor section (positions
of electrical parts) [F] of electrical parts) [N] of electrical parts) [SM]

z Layout diagram
10, 32, 1, 11, 33, 2, 3, 4,13, 12, 34, 6
40
7 6 5
16

21

17
14

20
19

From 22 to 27

6. Electrical parts
18
15

29, 30, 31 35

39 41

36

42

37
43
8
28 38

G070036

Processing tank section

No. Name Symbol Remarks
1 CD processing solution float switch FS1
CD refilling water level
CD processing solution level
CD safety thermostat

63310 1/4
 63310
Positions of electrical parts (Processor section)

No. Name Symbol Remarks

2 BF processing solution float switch FS2
BF refilling water level
BF processing solution level
BF safety thermostat
3 STB1 processing solution float switch FS3
STB1 refilling water level
4 STB4 processing solution float switch FS6
STB4 refilling water level
STB4 processing solution level
STB4 safety thermostat
5 CD effluent float switch FS7
6 BF effluent float switch FS8
7 STB effluent float switch FS9
8 SW/DW Tank Level Sensor LSE3
9 SW Tank Level Sensor LSE4
10 CD thermosensor TH1
11 BF thermosensor TH2
12 STB thermosensor TH3
13 Interlock switch (Processor top cover) LS4
14 Rack stopper sensor LS14
15 Power supply cooling fan FAN14 Circulation *1
16 Exhaust fan FAN13 Exhaust*1
17 Drive motor cooling fan FAN16 Blowing*1
18 Tank cooling fan 1 FAN10 Intake *1

6. Electrical parts
19 Tank cooling fan 3 FAN12 Exhaust*1
20 Tank cooling fan 2 FAN11 Exhaust*1
21 Drive motor M3 If replaced, perform Drive Motor
Revolution Count Setting.
☞ 33502
*2
22 CD circulation pump P1
23 BF circulation pump P3
24 STB1 circulation pump P5
25 STB2 circulation pump P6
26 STB3 circulation pump P7
27 STB4 circulation pump P8
28 Cleaning pump 1 P15
29 CD water supply pump RP1
30 BF water supply pump RP2
31 STB water supply pump RP3
32 CD heater H1
33 BF heater H2
34 STB heater H3
35 Hour meter HM1 Option
36 CD cooling water solenoid valve MV1 Option
37 BF cooling water solenoid valve MV2 Option
38 STB cooling water solenoid valve MV3 Option
39 CD digital flowmeter FLS1 Option
40 STB tablet conveyor motor DM5
41 Earth leakage circuit breaker 1 NFB2 See 4203 ☞ Earth leakage circuit
breaker 1 (NFB2).

63310 2/4
 63310
Positions of electrical parts (Processor section)

No. Name Symbol Remarks

42 Earth leakage circuit breaker 2 NFB3 See 4203 ☞ Earth leakage circuit
breaker 2 (NFB3).
43 Earth leakage circuit breaker 3 NFB4 See 4203 ☞ Earth leakage circuit
breaker 3 (NFB4).
*1. For details about processor section fan operation specification, see ☞ 63321.
*2. When removing the connector connected in the circuit pump, be sure to press the lock, and remove it.
If the locked connector is pulled by force, the connector in the circuit pump will be damaged.

Press this part.

G085422

z Layout diagram

11 10

6. Electrical parts
7
8
9

18 19
3 20

1
5
2
6

14

13
12

15 4 16
G051047

Tablet replenishment unit section

No. Name Symbol Remarks
1 CD Tablet Sensor 1 SE48
2 CD Tablet Sensor 2 SE49
3 BF Tablet Sensor 1 SE50
4 BF Tablet Sensor 2 SE51
5 STB Tablet Sensor 1 SE52
6 STB Tablet Sensor 2 SE53

63310 3/4
 63310
Positions of electrical parts (Processor section)

No. Name Symbol Remarks

7 CD Cartridge Sensor SE54
8 BF Cartridge Sensor SE55
9 STB Cartridge Sensor SE56
10 Upper sensor for elevator SE57
11 Middle sensor for elevator SE58
12 Lower sensor for elevator SE59
13 Tablet replenishment unit interlock switch LS9
14 CD Drum motor M4
15 BF Drum motor M5
16 STB Drum motor M6
17 Elevator motor M7
18 CD Operation Lamp L5
19 BF Operation Lamp L6
20 STB Operation Lamp L7

6. Electrical parts

63310 4/4
 63312
Positions of electrical parts (Processor section)

Processor section (List of adjustment after electrical parts replacement) [F]

Item Adjustment option after replacement Reference

P1R Replenisher Pump Replacing • Perform Pump Output Amount Measurement. ☞ 33003
P2RA Replenisher Pump
P2RB Replenisher Pump
PSR Replenisher Pump
P1R cartridge flushing valve*1 Replacing • Perform Measure Auto Cleaning Water Output ☞ 33004
P2RA cartridge flushing valve *1 Amount of Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount
Setting.
P2RB cartridge flushing valve*1
P1R agitation solenoid valve*1 • If necessary, perform Output Check for the ☞ 27540
P1 automated cleaning valve*2 cartridge flushing valve and replenishment
cartridge cleaning pump.
P2 automated cleaning valve*2
PS automated cleaning valve*2
Replenisher cartridge cleaning pump Replacing • Perform Initial Replenishment Operation of Auto ☞ 33004
Cleaning Water Output Amount Setting.
• Perform Measure Auto Cleaning Water Output
Amount of Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount
Setting.
P1R (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level Replacing • Replacing the replenishment solution level sensor ☞ 27530
Sensor*3 • If necessary, perform Recovery procedure from the ☞ 4610
P1R (Lower) Replenishment Solution Level replenishment error 1 or Recovery procedure ☞ 4620
Sensor*3 from the replenishment error 2.
P2RA (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level
Sensor*3
P2RA (Lower) Replenishment Solution
Level Sensor*3

6. Electrical parts
P2RB (Upper) Replenishment Solution Level
Sensor*3
P2RB (Lower) Replenishment Solution
Level Sensor*3
Replenishment cartridge opening motor Replacing • If necessary, perform Replenishment cartridge ☞ 4600
Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor installation section troubleshooting flow.
(Upper)
Replenisher Cartridge Position Sensor
(Lower)

*1. P1R, P2RA, P2RB and P1R cartridge flushing valves are to be replaced as a set.
*2. P1, P2 and P3 cartridge flushing valves are to be replaced as a set.
*3. # # #(upper) replenishment solution level sensor and # # #(lower) replenishment solution level sensor are to be replaced as a set.

63312 1/1
 63321 Processor section (fan operation specification)

Processor section (fan operation specification)

Processor section (fan operation specification)

z Operation specification of the fan

Name Symbol Operation condition
Tank cooling fan 1 FAN10 When the CD or BF processing solution temperature is more than the setting
Tank cooling fan 2 FAN11 temperature for 30 seconds, the fan is on. When the CD or BF processing solution
temperature is less than the setting temperature for 30 seconds, the fan is off.
Tank cooling fan 3 FAN12
Exhaust fan FAN13 When the top cover is closed, the fan is always on.
When the top cover is opened, the fan is off.
Power supply cooling fan FAN14 The fan is always on.
Drive motor cooling fan FAN16 When the drive motor operates, the fan is on. When the drive motor stops, the fan is off.

NOTE
• All the fans above except the exhaust fan are off while the program timer activates.

6. Electrical parts

63321 1/1
 64000 Descriptions of PCB (desk section)

Descriptions of PCB (desk section)

Image processing PCB (J391305)

Image processing PCB (new)

Unused Unused depending on the conditions

6. Electrical parts
G078391

Image processing PCB (old)

Unused
Unused depending on the conditions
G068419

64000 1/3
 64000
Descriptions of PCB (desk section)

NOTE
• Connecting PCB/CS-1 (J390864) does not comply with the RoHS Directive.

z Function
• Receives the image data from the D-ICE PCB.
• Stores the image data in the input memory temporarily and the development memory to process and edit the image data.
• Performs transmission and reception of the image data with the image correction PCB.
• Performs inputting and outputting the image data with PC.
• Performs inputting and outputting the image data with the external PC.
• Outputs the image data to the laser control PCB.
• Performs the optical ARCNET communications.

IMPORTANT
• Although the parts mounted on the image processing PCB (new) and the image processing PCB (old) are different,
they are compatible with each other.

z Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

• When replacing a PCB, save the memory data and Logdata of when a problem (error) occurs.
Press the Alt key and the Y key on the keyboard when the problem occurs. ☞ 37520
• Return the failed PCB with the memory data and Logdata.

z 1. Position
☞ 61000
z 2. Precautions for replacement

6. Electrical parts
• Check the settings of DIP switches.

IMPORTANT
• On this PCB, the optical fiber cables connect to the connectors P443 (IN) and P442 (OUT) and the LVDS cables
connect to the connectors J1350, J445, J455, and J456. Be sure to read the Precautions for handling the optical
fiber cable and LVDS cable, then work properly. ☞ 68100

z 3. Adjustment after replacement

• Load the system program.
☞ 35600
z 4. Symptoms caused by poor wiring connections
• See 4201 ☞ Image processing PCB.

z Unused connector

IMPORTANT
• The parts mounted on the image processing PCB (new) and the image processing PCB (old) are different.

Connector No. Purpose Remarks

J445 Connecting to the Compact Archive Unit When the Compact Archive Unit (option) is
equipped
P450 Connecting to D-ICE PCB When scanner section is equipped
P451 to P454 Unused
J455 Connecting to the laser control PCB When the printer is equipped
J1350 Connected to CD-R writing kit for external PC (Option)
CN1 to CN5 Unused
JP1 and JP2 Unused

64000 2/3
 64000
Descriptions of PCB (desk section)

z Component parts table

IMPORTANT
• The parts mounted on the image processing PCB (new) and the image processing PCB (old) are different.

LED No. Purpose Status

LED1 Status display ON when sending data to the PCI-
LVDS/ARCNET PCB
LED2 Status display ON when sending data to the PCI-
LVDS/ARCNET PCB (option)
LED3 Status display ON when sending data to the external PC
LED4 Status display ON when sending data to the laser control PCB
LED5 DC+5 V input check On when the power supply is turned on.
LED6 Status display Blinks when the image data is input from D-ICE
PCB and it is being processed in the image
processing PCB.
LED7 Status display Blinks when accessing to the input memory
LED8 Status display Blinks when the data is input from the image
correction PCB and the data is being processed.
LED9 Status display Blinks when accessing to the development
memory
LED10 Status display Blinks when the data is being received in LVDS

Test point No. Purpose Measurement with voltmeter Remarks

TP1 Unused Impossible
TP2 to TP10 Ground Possible
TP11 DC+5 V voltage measurement Possible
TP12 DC+3.3 V voltage measurement Possible

6. Electrical parts
TP13 DC+2.5 V voltage measurement Possible
TP14 Unused Impossible

Switch No. Bit No. Settings Purpose Remarks

DS1 1 OFF Unused Be sure to turn OFF. *1
DS2 1 OFF Unused Be sure to turn off.
2 OFF Unused
3 OFF Unused
4 OFF Unused
5 OFF Unused
6 OFF Unused
7 OFF Unused
8 OFF Unused

*1. DS1 is a push button switch.

If the push button switch is not pushed, it is OFF.

64000 3/3
 64010
Descriptions of PCB (desk section)

Image correction PCB (J391359)

6. Electrical parts
Memory

Unused
G070032
NOTE
• Image correction PCB (J390913) does not comply with the RoHS Directive.

z Function
• Performs auto sharpness, auto contrast, scaling, image rotation, and density correction to the input image.
NOTE
• The two memories have been attached to the image correction PCB cannot be replaced alone.

z Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

• When replacing a PCB, save the memory data and Logdata of when a problem (error) occurs.
Press the Alt key and the Y key on the keyboard when the problem occurs. ☞ 37520
• Return the failed PCB with the memory data and Logdata.

z 1. Position
☞ 61000
z 2. Precautions for replacement
• Check that the two memories have been attached to the image correction PCB.

z 3. Adjustment after replacement

• The following system program versions are required for using the image correction PCB (J391359).

64010 1/2
 64010
Descriptions of PCB (desk section)

System System program version

QSS-3201/3202/3203 Ver. 9.00 or later
QSS-3211/3212/3213
QSS-3202PRO/3203PRO
QSS-3211DLS/3212DLS/3213DLS 1. Upgrade the system program version to Ver. 4.00 or later.
2. Install the patch software for the image correction PCB.
For details, see the REPLACEMENT INSTRUCTION.
• For outside Japan: R504509-01

• Load the system program.

☞ 35600
z 4. Symptoms caused by poor wiring connections
• See 4201 ☞ Image correction PCB.

z Unused connector
Connector No. Purpose Remarks
P1348 Unused
P1349 Unused
P1365 Unused
CN1 Unused

z Component parts table

LED No. Purpose Status
LED1 Unused

6. Electrical parts
LED2 Unused
LED3 Unused
LED4 Unused

Test point No. Purpose Measurement with voltmeter Remarks

TP1 to 5 Unused Impossible The test pin is unmounted.
TP7 to 34 Unused Impossible
TP36 to 67 Unused Impossible
TP68 to 72 Ground Possible
TP78 to 82 Unused Impossible The test pin is unmounted.
TP87 to 102 Unused Impossible
TP107 to 121 Unused Impossible
TP123 to 134 Unused Impossible

Jumper No. Bit No. Settings Purpose Remarks

JP3 1 Open Reset The test pin is unmounted.

NOTE
• Some PCBs have connector(s) and test point(s) on their back side.
• Other ground(s) than TP68 to TP72 is on the PCB.

64010 2/2
 64030
Descriptions of PCB (desk section)

D-ICE control PCB (J391306)

Optical fiber cable

Unused
G068438
NOTE
• D-ICE control PCB J390946 does not comply with the RoHS Directive.

6. Electrical parts
z Function
• Controls the D-ICE PCB.
• Controls the buzzer and PC power switch of ON.

z Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

• When replacing a PCB, save the memory data and Logdata of when a problem (error) occurs.
Press the Alt key and the Y key on the keyboard when the problem occurs. ☞ 37520
• Return the failed PCB with the memory data and Logdata.

z 1. Position
☞ 61000
z 2. Precautions for replacement
• Back up the system data.
☞ 35400
• To remove the D-ICE control PCB, read the procedures for removing the D-ICE control PCB and the D-ICE PCB. ☞ 64045
• Check the settings of DIP switches.

IMPORTANT
• You can connect the optical fiber cable to any connector below only if you do not mistake IN and OUT.
• This PCB has the connectors (below) which are connected to optical fiber cables. Be sure to read the Precautions
for handling the optical fiber cable and LVDS cable, then work properly. ☞ 68100
Optical fiber cable list
OUT J71, J73, J75, J53
IN J72, J74, J76, J54

64030 1/2
 64030
Descriptions of PCB (desk section)

z 3. Adjustment after replacement

• Load the system program.
☞ 35600
• Read the system data.
☞ 35400
z 4. Symptoms caused by poor wiring connections
• See 4201 ☞ D−ICE control PCB.

z Unused connector
Connector No. Purpose Remarks
P55 Unused

z Component parts table

LED No. Purpose Status
LED1 DC5 V input check On when the power supply is turned on.
LED2 DC24 V input check On when the power supply is turned on.

Test point No. Purpose Measurement with voltmeter Remarks

TP1 DC5 V voltage measurement Possible
TP2 DC24 V voltage measurement Possible
TP3 Ground Possible
TP4 Ground Possible
TP5 Unused Impossible

6. Electrical parts
TP6 Unused Impossible

Switch No. Bit No. Settings Purpose Remarks

DS1 1 OFF Unused Be sure to turn off.
2
3
4

64030 2/2
 64040
Descriptions of PCB (desk section)

D-ICE PCB (J391374)

Unused

6. Electrical parts
Unused depending on the conditions
G068437
NOTE
• D-ICE PCB J390903 does not comply with the RoHS directive.

z Function
• Communicates with the D-ICE control PCB.
• Transfers the image data to image processing PCB from the scanner.
• Performs the image cut of the input image from the scanner by film size.
• Detects and corrects the scratch and dust on the film base layer.

z Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

• When replacing a PCB, save the memory data and Logdata of when a problem (error) occurs.
Press the Alt key and the Y key on the keyboard when the problem occurs. ☞ 37520
• Return the failed PCB with the memory data and Logdata.

z 1. Position
☞ 61000
z 2. Precautions for replacement
• To remove the D-ICE PCB, read the procedures for removing the D-ICE control PCB and the D-ICE PCB. ☞ 64045
• Check the settings of DIP switches.

64040 1/3
 64040
Descriptions of PCB (desk section)

IMPORTANT
• The LVDS cable connects to the connector P436 on this PCB. Be sure to read the Precautions for handling the
optical fiber cable and LVDS cable, then work properly. ☞ 68100

z 3. Adjustment after replacement

• Load the system program.
☞ 35600
z 4. Symptoms caused by poor wiring connections
• See 4201 ☞ D−ICE PCB.

z Unused connector
Connector No. Purpose Remarks
J485 Scratch mend PCB 1 [J485] Option
J484A Scratch mend PCB 1 [J484A]
J486 Data change-over PCB Option
J487
J483 Scratch mend PCB 2 Option
J480 DIMM Option
CN−MAIN Unused
CN−SUB Unused

z Component parts table

LED No. Purpose Status

6. Electrical parts
LED1 DC5 V input check On when the power supply is turned on.
LED2 DC3.3 V input check On when the power supply is turned on.
LED3 DC2.5 V−1 input check On when the power supply is turned on.
LED4 DC2.5 V−2 input check On when the power supply is turned on.
LED5 to 12 Unused

Test point No. Purpose Measurement with voltmeter Remarks

TP1 DC5 V voltage measurement Possible
TP2 Ground Possible
TP3 DC1.4 V voltage measurement Possible
TP4 Ground Possible
TP5 DC3.3 V voltage measurement Possible
TP6 Ground Possible
TP7 DC2.5 V−1 input check Possible
TP8 Ground Possible
TP9 DC2.5 V−2 input check Possible
TP10 Ground Possible
TP11 Unused Impossible
TP14 to 17 Unused Impossible
TP20 to 23 Unused Impossible

Switch No. Bit No. Settings Purpose Remarks

DS1 1 OFF Unused Be sure to turn off.
2
3
4

64040 2/3
 64040
Descriptions of PCB (desk section)

Switch No. Bit No. Settings Purpose Remarks

DS2 1 OFF Unused Be sure to turn off.
2
3
4

6. Electrical parts

64040 3/3
 64045
Descriptions of PCB (desk section)

D-ICE control PCB and removing the D-ICE PCB (CS-1)

1. Remove the rear cover.

☞ 20050
2. Remove the D-ICE PCB cooling fan. (Loosen three screws.)
D-ICE PCB cooling fan

Loosen these screws.

G070237

3. Disconnect all connectors from the D-ICE control PCB and the D-ICE PCB.

6. Electrical parts
4. Remove the six PCB spacers of the D-ICE PCB and PCB pressers 1 and 2. (six screws)
PCB spacers

PCB presser 1

PCB spacer

PCB presser 2
PCB spacers

G068212

5. Remove the four screws of the D-ICE control PCB.

64045 1/2
 64045
Descriptions of PCB (desk section)

6. Remove the D-ICE control PCB and the D-ICE PCB together and separate them to replace.
IMPORTANT
• Be sure to remove those D-ICE control PCB and D-ICE PCB together. If you remove one of them only, the
spacer that fixes the PCBs may damage the PCB.
D-ICE control PCB

Connection

D-ICE PCB
G072360

6. Electrical parts

64045 2/2
 64050
Descriptions of PCB (desk section)

DIMM (I090499)

Terminal
G070040

z Function
• Stores the image data temporarily.

z Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

z 1. Position
☞ 61000
z 2. Precautions for replacement
• Do not touch the terminal.

z 3. Adjustment after replacement

• None

z 4. Symptoms caused by poor wiring connections

6. Electrical parts
• Refer to 4201 ☞ DIMM.

z Unused connector
• None

64050 1/1
 64060
Descriptions of PCB (desk section)

Scratch mend PCB 2 (J390905)

G068411

z Function
• Corrects the scratches on the film base layer.

z Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

z 1. Position
☞ 61000

6. Electrical parts
z 2. Precautions for replacement
• Do not touch the terminal of CN2.

z 3. Adjustment after replacement

• None

z 4. Symptoms caused by poor wiring connections

• See 4201 ☞ Scratch mend PCB 2.

z Unused connector
• None

z Component parts table

Test point No. Purpose Measurement with voltmeter Remarks
TP1 Ground Possible
TP2 Unused Impossible
TP3 Voltage measurement Possible Must be between 3.1 V and 3.5
V.
TP4 Voltage measurement Possible Must be between 1.7 V and 1.9
V.
TP5 Unused Impossible
TP6 Ground Possible

64060 1/2
 64060
Descriptions of PCB (desk section)

Switch No. Bit No. Settings Purpose Remarks

SW1 1 OFF Unused Be sure to turn off.
2

6. Electrical parts

64060 2/2
 64070
Descriptions of PCB (desk section)

Scratch mend PCB 1 [J484A] and scratch mend PCB 1 [J485] (J390904)

Unused
G068444

z Function
• Corrects the scratches on the film emulsion layer.

z Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

6. Electrical parts
z 1. Position
☞ 61000
z 2. Precautions for replacement
• Do not touch the terminal of CN1.
• Check the settings of DIP switches.

z 3. Adjustment after replacement

• None

z 4. Symptoms caused by poor wiring connections

• Refer to 4201 ☞ Scratch mend PCB 1 [J484A].
• Refer to 4201 ☞ Scratch mend PCB 1 [J485].

z Unused connector
Connector No. Purpose Remarks
CN3 Unused

z Component parts table

LED No. Purpose Status
LED1 Unused
LED2 Unused
LED3 Unused
LED4 Unused

64070 1/2
 64070
Descriptions of PCB (desk section)

Test point No. Purpose Measurement with voltmeter Remarks

TP1 DC1.4 V (ground) Possible
TP2 DC1.4 V voltage measurement Possible

Switch No. Bit No. Settings Purpose Remarks

DS1 1 OFF Unused Be sure to turn off.
2
3
4

6. Electrical parts

64070 2/2
 64080
Descriptions of PCB (desk section)

Data change-over PCB (J390906)

G068410

z Function
• The data change-over PCB relays the image data when scratch mend PCB 1 is mounted on the D-ICE PCB.

z Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

6. Electrical parts
z 1. Position
☞ 61000
z 2. Precautions for replacement
• None

z 3. Adjustment after replacement

• None

z 4. Symptoms caused by poor wiring connections

• Refer to 4201 ☞ Data change-over PCB.

z Unused connector
• None

64080 1/1
 64090
Descriptions of PCB (desk section)

Switch control PCB (J391238)

TP4
J71

J72

J73

J74

J75

J76

TP6 J53

TP5 J54
TP1
LED1
P50 Optical fiber cable
LED2
TP3

TP2

P158 P51 P52

G082808
NOTE
• Switch control PCB J391121 does not comply with the RoHS Directive.

z Function
• Controls the buzzer and PC power switch of ON.

6. Electrical parts
• Relays ARCNET communication.

z Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

• When replacing a PCB, save the memory data and Logdata of when a problem (error) occurs.
Press the Alt key and the Y key on the keyboard when the problem occurs. ☞ 37520
• Return the failed PCB with the memory data and Logdata.

z 1. Position
☞ 61000
z 2. Precautions for replacement

IMPORTANT
• You can connect the optical fiber cable to any connector below only if you do not mistake IN and OUT.
• This PCB has the connectors (below) which are connected to optical fiber cables. Be sure to read the Precautions
for handling the optical fiber cable and LVDS cable, then work properly. ☞ 68100
Optical fiber cable list
OUT J71, J73, J75, J53
IN J72, J74, J76, J54

z 3. Adjustment after replacement

• Load the system program.
☞ 35600
z 4. Symptoms caused by poor wiring connections
• See 4201 ☞ Switch control PCB.

64090 1/2
 64090
Descriptions of PCB (desk section)

z Unused connector
• None

z Component parts table

LED No. Purpose Status
LED1 DC5 V input check On when the power supply is turned on.
LED2 DC24 V input check On when the power supply is turned on.

Test point No. Purpose Measurement with voltmeter Remarks

TP1 DC5 V voltage measurement Possible The test pin is unmounted.
TP2 DC24 V voltage measurement Possible
TP3 Ground Possible
TP4 Ground Possible The test pin is unmounted.
TP5 Unused Impossible
TP6 Unused Impossible

6. Electrical parts

64090 2/2
 64100
Descriptions of PCB (desk section)

ARCNET HUB PCB (J391277)

Optical fiber cable

Unused

Unused depending on the conditions

G068391
NOTE
• ARCNET HUB PCB/CS-1 (J390479) does not comply with the RoHS Directive.

z Function
• Relays ARCNET communication.

6. Electrical parts
z Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

z 1. Position
☞ 61000
z 2. Precautions for replacement

IMPORTANT
• You can connect the optical fiber cable for the ARCNET HUB PCB to any connectors below unless you miss to
distinguish the IN/OUT side of the cable. The positions of unused connectors may vary by model.
• This PCB has the connectors (below) which are connected to optical fiber cables. Be sure to read the Precautions
for handling the optical fiber cable and LVDS cable, then work properly. ☞ 68100
Optical fiber cable list
OUT J133, J135, J137, J139
IN J134, J136, J138, J140

z 3. Adjustment after replacement

Connector No. Purpose Remarks
J131, J132 Unused
J137, J138 Connected to CD-R writing kit for external PC Option
J139, J140 Connected to the PU control PCB Option
J141 to J146 Unused

z Unused connector
• None

64100 1/2
 64100
Descriptions of PCB (desk section)

z Component parts table

LED No. Purpose Status
LED1 DC+5 V input check On when the power supply is turned on.

Test point No. Purpose Measurement with voltmeter Status

TP1 DC+5 V voltage measurement Possible
TP2 Ground Possible

6. Electrical parts

64100 2/2
 64110
Descriptions of PCB (desk section)

Keyboard connecting PCB (J391265)

G057402
NOTE
• Keyboard connecting PCB J390645 does not comply with the RoHS Directive.

z Function
• Connects the operation keyboard.

z Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

6. Electrical parts
z 1. Position
☞ 61000
z 2. Precautions for replacement
• None

z 3. Adjustment after replacement

• None

z Unused connector
• None

z Component parts table

• None

64110 1/1
 64120
Descriptions of PCB (desk section)

Keyboard switch PCB (J390794)

6. Electrical parts
G068402

z Function
• Relays signals of the operation keyboard, full keyboard and mouse to the PC.
NOTE
• The power is not supplied to the keyboard switch PCB unless the PC is ON.

z Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

z 1. Position
☞ 61000
z 2. Precautions for replacement
• None

z 3. Adjustment after replacement

• None

z Unused connector
• None

z Component parts table

LED No. Purpose Status
LED1 DC+5 V input check On when the power supply is turned on.

64120 1/2
 64120
Descriptions of PCB (desk section)

Test point No. Purpose Measurement with voltmeter Remarks

TP1 Unused Impossible
TP2 DC+5 V voltage measurement Possible
TP3 Ground Possible

Fuse No. Rating Purpose Remarks

F24 T3.15 A/125 V ATX power supply protection

6. Electrical parts

64120 2/2
 64130
Descriptions of PCB (desk section)

Colorimeter control PCB (J391264)

Not mounted depending on conditions

G068401
NOTE
• Colorimeter control PCB J390801 does not comply with the RoHS Directive.

z Function
• Controls the colorimeter unit.

6. Electrical parts
• Relays the communication between the colorimeter and PC.
• Communicates with the PC.

z Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

• When replacing a PCB, save the memory data and Logdata of when a problem (error) occurs.
Press the Alt key and the Y key on the keyboard when the problem occurs. ☞ 37520
• Return the failed PCB with the memory data and Logdata.

z 1. Position
☞ 61000
z 2. Precautions for replacement
• Back up the system data.
☞ 35400
• Check the setting of the DIP switch.

z 3. Adjustment after replacement

• Load the system program.
☞ 35600
• Read the system data.
☞ 35400
• Correct the front end advance length and the error by the colorimeter unit adjustment.
☞ 35100
z 4. Symptoms caused by poor wiring connections
• See 4201 ☞ Colorimeter Control PCB.

64130 1/2
 64130
Descriptions of PCB (desk section)

z Unused connector
• None

z Component parts table

IMPORTANT
• Although sometimes the test pins are unmounted, the test points can be used for the measurement.

LED No. Purpose Status

LED1 DC+5 V input check On when the power supply is turned on.
LED2 DC+12 V input check On when the power supply is turned on.
LED3 DC+24 V input check On when the power supply is turned on.

Test point No. Purpose Measurement with voltmeter Remarks

TP1 DC+5 V voltage measurement Possible
TP2 DC+12 V voltage measurement Possible
TP3 DC+24 V voltage measurement Possible
TP4 Ground Possible DC+5 V, DC+12 V
TP5 Ground Possible DC+24 V
TP7 Unused Impossible
TP9 Unused Impossible

Switch No. Bit No. Settings Purpose Remarks

DS1 1 OFF Unused Be sure to turn off.
2 OFF
3 OFF

6. Electrical parts
4 OFF

64130 2/2
 64140
Descriptions of PCB (desk section)

PU control PCB (J391321)

Unused depending on the conditions

G068417

NOTE

6. Electrical parts
• PU Control PCB J307103 does not comply with the RoHS Directive.

z Function
• Controls the pricing unit.

z Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

• When replacing a PCB, save the memory data and Logdata of when a problem (error) occurs.
Press the Alt key and the Y key on the keyboard when the problem occurs. ☞ 37520
• Return the failed PCB with the memory data and Logdata.

z 1. Position
☞ 61000
z 2. Precautions for replacement
• Back up the system data.
☞ 35400
• Check the setting of the DIP switch.

IMPORTANT
• This PCB has connectors P299 (IN) and P300 (OUT) which are connected to optical fiber cables. Be sure to read the
Precautions for handling the optical fiber cable and LVDS cable, then work properly. ☞ 68100

z 3. Adjustment after replacement

• Read the system program.
☞ 35600
• Read the system data.
☞ 35400
64140 1/2
 64140
Descriptions of PCB (desk section)

z Unused connector
Connector No. Purpose Remarks
P301 Pricing unit keyboard connection
P302 Pricing unit display connection
P303 PU data communication unit connection
P306 Connection to the printer power supply of the pricing
unit

z Component parts table

LED No. Purpose Status
LED1 DC+24 V input check On when the power supply is turned on.
LED2 DC+5 V input check On when the power supply is turned on.

Test point No. Purpose Measurement with voltmeter Remarks

TP1 DC+24 V voltage check Possible
TP2 DC+5 V voltage check Possible
TP3 Ground Possible
TP4 Ground Possible

Switch No. Bit No. Settings Purpose Remarks

DS1 1 OFF Unused Be sure to turn off.
2 OFF Unused
3 OFF Unused
4 OFF Unused

6. Electrical parts
5 OFF Unused
6 OFF Unused
7 OFF Unused
8 OFF Unused

64140 2/2
 64160
Descriptions of PCB (desk section)

Power PCB (J391262)

Unused
G068403
NOTE
• Power PCB J390938 does not comply with the RoHS Directive.

z Function
• Supplies the voltage of AC 200 V.
• Protects the power surge.

6. Electrical parts
z Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

z 1. Position
☞ 61000
z 2. Precautions for replacement
• Move the jumper connector (J100) in P100 to the PCB with which you are going to replace.

z 3. Adjustment after replacement

• None

z 4. Symptoms caused by poor wiring connections

• Refer to 4201 ☞ Power PCB.

z Unused connector
Connector No. Purpose Remarks
P103 Unused

z Component parts table

Fuse No. Rating Purpose Remarks
FL1 250 V/T5 A Lightning surge protection Cannot be replaced.
FL1 250 V/T5 A Lightning surge protection Cannot be replaced.

64160 1/1
 64170
Descriptions of PCB (desk section)

Description of power supply (desk section)

32 (CS-1)

G068404

32SD (CS-2)

6. Electrical parts
Unused
G082830

z Function
32 (CS-1)
Symbol Name Part No. Function Remarks
PS2 Desk power supply 1 I038293*1 Supplies the power to DC+5 V
I038429 each PCB.
PS3 Desk power supply 2 I038263*1 Supplies the power to DC+24 V
I038403 each PCB.

*1. Not complying with the RoHS Directive

32SD (CS-2)
Symbol Name Part No. Function Remarks
PS2 Desk power supply 1 I038404 Supplies the power to DC+5 V
each PCB.
PS3 Desk power supply 2 I038403 Supplies the power to DC+24 V
each PCB.

64170 1/3
 64170
Descriptions of PCB (desk section)

IMPORTANT
• Each power supply is equipped with the overvoltage and overheat protection functions. If the functions operate, turn
off the circuit breaker of the system and wait for a while, then turn on again. If the overheat protection function is
operated, check if each cooling fan is in operation.

z Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

z 1. Position
☞ 61000
z 2. Precautions for replacement
Do not change each volume that has already been adjusted by the manufacturer before shipping.

Power supply Precautions for replacement

Desk power supply 1 Do not change each volume that has already been adjusted by the manufacturer before
Desk power supply 2 shipping.

z 3. Adjustment after replacement

• None

z 4. Symptoms caused by poor wiring connections

32 (CS-1)
Power supply Reference
Desk power supply 1 See 4201 ☞ Desk power supply 1.
Desk power supply 2 See 4201 ☞ Desk power supply 2.

6. Electrical parts
32SD (CS-2)
Power supply Reference
Desk power supply 1 See 4201 ☞ Desk power supply 1.
Desk power supply 2 See 4201 ☞ Desk power supply 2.

z Unused connector
32 (CS-1)
• None
32SD (CS-2)
Power supply Connector No. Purpose Remarks
Desk power supply 1 None
Desk power supply 2 CN2 Unused
CN52 Unused

z Component parts table

32 (CS-1)
Fuse
Power supply Fuse No. Rating Purpose Remarks
Desk power supply 1 F1 T6.3 AH/250 V AC 200 V power Cannot be replaced.
supply protection
Desk power supply 2 F1 T5 AH/250 V AC 200 V power
supply protection

64170 2/3
 64170
Descriptions of PCB (desk section)

32SD (CS-2)
Fuse
Power supply Fuse No. Rating Purpose Remarks
Desk power supply 1 F1 T2 AH/250 V AC 200 V power Cannot be replaced.
supply protection
Desk power supply 2 F1 T3.15AH/250 V AC 200 V power
supply protection

6. Electrical parts

64170 3/3
 66000 Description of PCB (printer section)

Description of PCB (printer section)

Printer control PCB (J391254)

Unused

6. Electrical parts
Unused depending on the conditions
G068355
NOTE
• Processor control PCB J390947 does not comply with the RoHS Directive.

z Function
• Controls the printer I/O PCB.
• Communicates with the laser control PCB.
• Performs the optical ARCNET communications.

z Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

• When replacing a PCB, save the memory data and Logdata of when a problem (error) occurs.
Press the Alt key and the Y key on the keyboard when the problem occurs. ☞ 37520
• Return the failed PCB with the memory data and Logdata.

z 1. Position
☞ 63000
z 2. Precautions for replacement
• Back up the system data.
☞ 35400
• Check the setting of the DIP switch.

IMPORTANT
• You can connect the optical fiber cable to any connector below only if you do not mistake IN and OUT.

66000 1/2
 66000
Description of PCB (printer section)

• This PCB has connectors J219 (OUT), J220 (IN), J221 (OUT), J222 (IN), J223 (OUT) and J224 (IN) which are
connected to optical fiber cables. Be sure to read the Precautions for handling the optical fiber cable and LVDS
cable, then work properly. ☞ 68100

z 3. Adjustment after replacement

• Read the system program.
☞ 35600
• Read the system data.
☞ 35400
• Perform paper sensor adjustment.
☞ 36000
z 4. Symptoms caused by poor wiring connections
• Refer to 4202 ☞ Printer control PCB.

z Unused connector
Connector No. Purpose Remarks
P210 Corresponds to the CVP. Option
P213 Quad magazine PCB Option
P214 Unused

z Component parts table

LED No. Purpose Status
LED1 DC+5 V input check On when the power supply is turned on.
LED2 DC+3.3 V input check On when the power supply is turned on.

6. Electrical parts
Test point No. Purpose Measurement with voltmeter Remarks
TP1 DC+5 V voltage measurement Possible
TP2 to TP6 Ground Possible
TP7 DC+3.3 V voltage measurement Possible
TP8 to TP15 Unused Impossible

Switch No. Bit No. Settings Purpose Remarks

DS1 1 OFF Unused Be sure to turn off.
2 OFF Unused
3 OFF Unused
4 OFF Unused
DS2 1 OFF Unused Be sure to turn off.
2 OFF Unused
3 OFF Unused
4 OFF Unused
DS3 1 OFF Unused Be sure to turn off.
2 OFF Unused
3 OFF Unused
4 OFF Unused
DS4 1 OFF Unused Be sure to turn off.
2 OFF Unused
3 OFF Unused
4 OFF Unused

66000 2/2
 66010
Description of PCB (printer section)

Laser control PCB (J391270)

6. Electrical parts
Unused Unused depending on the conditions
G068356
NOTE
• Laser control PCB J390919 does not comply with the RoHS Directive.

z Function
• Controls the laser unit.
• Receives the image data from the image processing PCB.
• Controls correction of image data.
• Communicates with the printer control PCB.
• Performs the optical ARCNET communications.

z Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

• When replacing a PCB, save the memory data and Logdata of when a problem (error) occurs.
Press the Alt key and the Y key on the keyboard when the problem occurs. ☞ 37520
• Return the failed PCB with the memory data and Logdata.

z 1. Position
☞ 63000
z 2. Precautions for replacement
• Check the setting of the DIP switch.

66010 1/3
 66010
Description of PCB (printer section)

IMPORTANT
• The shapes of the connectors (J/P1501, J/P1502 and J/P1503) of laser control PCB are the same. Be careful not to
connect to the wrong connector.

IMPORTANT
• This PCB has connectors J1517 (IN) and J1516 (OUT) which are connected to optical fiber cables. Be sure to read
the Precautions for handling the optical fiber cable and LVDS cable, then work properly. ☞ 68100

z 3. Adjustment after replacement

• When using J391270, the following system program versions are required.

System System program version

QSS-3201/3202/3203 Ver. 7.01 or later
QSS-3211/3212/3213
QSS-3202PRO/3203PRO
QSS-3211DLS/3212DLS/3213DLS Ver. 3.02 or later
QSS-3201SD/3202SD/3203SD Ver. 3.01 or later
QSS-3202SD PRO/3203SD PRO

• Read the system program.

☞ 35600
z 4. Symptoms caused by poor wiring connections
• Refer to 4202 ☞ Laser control PCB.

z Unused connector
Connector No. Purpose Remarks

6. Electrical parts
P1509 To connect to laser unit Used only with a laser unit (type Ff)
P1510 Connects to the laser operation record PCB.
P1518 Unused
P1521 Unused
CN1 Unused
CN2 Unused
CN3 Unused

z Component parts table

Test point No. Purpose Measurement with voltmeter Remarks
TP401 DC+5 V voltage measurement Possible
TP402 to 407 Ground Possible
TP408 DC+12 V voltage measurement Possible
TP409 Ground Possible
TP410 DC+3.3 V voltage measurement Possible
TP411 DC+2.5 V voltage measurement Possible
TP412 DC+5 V-0 voltage measurement Possible
TP413 DC+5 V−1 voltage measurement Possible
TP414 Ground Possible
TP415 DC+5 V−2 voltage measurement Possible
TP416 Ground Possible
TP417 Unused Impossible
TP418 Unused Impossible
TP419 Ground Possible

66010 2/3
 66010
Description of PCB (printer section)

Switch No. Bit No. Settings Purpose Remarks

DS201 1 OFF Unused Be sure to turn off.
2 OFF Unused
3 OFF Unused
4 OFF Unused
5 OFF Unused
6 OFF Unused
7 OFF Unused
8 OFF Unused

6. Electrical parts

66010 3/3
 66020
Description of PCB (printer section)

Printer I/O PCB 1 (J391255)

Unused

Unused depending on the conditions

G068357
NOTE
• Printer I/O PCB 1 J390866 is not compliant with the RoHS directive.

6. Electrical parts
z Function
• Controls paper magazine motors B and C, exposure advance motors 1 and 2, exposure advance pressure change motors 1 and 2,
paper advance motor 2, pressure guide motor, paper advance section cooling fan 1, inner cooling fan, control box cooling fan 1,
and counter. Switches on/off by interlock switches (printer doors 1 and 2).
• Relays the power supply to PCBs.

z Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

z 1. Position
☞ 63000
z 2. Precautions for replacement
• Since the shape of several connectors on the PCB are the same, replace the PCB with much care.

z 3. Adjustment after replacement

• None

z 4. Symptoms caused by poor wiring connections

• Refer to 4202 ☞ Printer I/O PCB 1.

z 5. Symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse

• Refer to 4252 ☞ Printer I/O PCB 1.

66020 1/2
 66020
Description of PCB (printer section)

z Unused connector
Connector No. Purpose Remarks
P232 Counter Option
P236 Unused
P243 Unused
P244 Unused
P246 Triple magazine PCB Option
P253 Quad magazine PCB
P255 CVP unit Option

z Component parts table

LED No. Purpose Status
LED1 DC+24 V-1 input check ON when power is supplied, OFF when the
interlock switch is off.
LED2 DC+24 V-2 input check ON when power is supplied, OFF when the
interlock switch is off.
LED3 DC+24 V input check On when the power supply is turned on.
LED4 DC+36 V input check ON when power is supplied, OFF when the
interlock switch is off.
LED5 DC+5 V input check On when the power supply is turned on.
LED6 For checking the interlock OFF when the interlock switch is off.

Test point No. Purpose Measurement with voltmeter Remarks

TP1 DC+24 V−1 voltage Possible 0 V when interlock switch is off.
measurement

6. Electrical parts
TP2 DC+24 V−2 voltage Possible 0 V when interlock switch is off.
measurement
TP3 DC+24 V voltage measurement Possible
TP4 DC+36 V voltage measurement Possible 0 V when interlock switch is off.
TP5 DC+5 V voltage measurement Possible
TP6 DC+5 V interlock check Possible 0 V when interlock switch is off.
TP7 Ground Possible
TP8 Ground Possible

Fuse No. Rating Purpose Remarks

F32 T6.3 A/125 V DC+24 V−1 power supply
protection
F33 T6.3 A/125 V DC+24 V−2 power supply
protection
F34 T3.15 A/125 V DC+24 V power supply
protection
F35 T6.3 A/125 V DC+36 V power supply
protection

66020 2/2
 66030
Description of PCB (printer section)

Printer I/O PCB 2 (J391256)

Unused depending on the conditions

G068358
NOTE
• Printer I/O PCB 2 J390867 does not comply with the RoHS directive.

6. Electrical parts
z Function
• Controls the electrical parts of paper supply unit.

z Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

z 1. Position
☞ 63000
z 2. Precautions for replacement
• None

z 3. Adjustment after replacement

• None

z 4. Symptoms caused by poor wiring connections

• Refer to 4202 ☞ Printer I/O PCB 2.

z Unused connector
Connector No. Purpose Remarks
P267 Triple magazine Option
Quad magazine

66030 1/2
 66030
Description of PCB (printer section)

z Component parts table

Test point No. Purpose Measurement with voltmeter Remarks
TP1 DC+5 V voltage measurement Possible 0 V when interlock switch is off.
TP2 DC+36 V voltage measurement Possible 0 V when interlock switch is off.
TP3 DC+24 V voltage measurement Possible 0 V when interlock switch is off.
TP4 Ground Possible
TP5 Ground Possible

6. Electrical parts

66030 2/2
 66040
Description of PCB (printer section)

Printer I/O PCB 3 (J391253)

G068359
NOTE
• Printer I/O PCB 3 J390868 does not comply with the RoHS directive.

z Function
• Relays the control signals and input signals of paper magazine mounts B and C, exposure advance unit, paper advance unit 1,
paper advance unit 2, and processor loading unit.
• Drive function of motors of paper advance unit 2.
• Drive function of control box cooling fans 2, 3, and 4.
• Relays the control signals of paper magazine lamp B/C.

6. Electrical parts
z Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

z 1. Position
☞ 63000
z 2. Precautions for replacement
• Since the shape of several connectors on the PCB are the same, replace the PCB with much care.

z 3. Adjustment after replacement

• None

z 4. Symptoms caused by poor wiring connections

• Refer to 4202 ☞ Printer I/O PCB 3.

z 5. Symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse

• Refer to 4252 ☞ Printer I/O PCB 3.

z Unused connector
• None

z Component parts table

LED No. Purpose Status
LED1 DC+5 V input check On when the power supply is turned on.
LED2 DC+24 V-3 input check ON when power is supplied, OFF when the
interlock switch is off.

66040 1/2
 66040
Description of PCB (printer section)

LED No. Purpose Status

LED3 DC+24 V-4 input check ON when power is supplied, OFF when the
interlock switch is off.

Test point No. Purpose Measurement with voltmeter Remarks

TP1 DC+5 V voltage measurement Possible
TP2 DC+24 V−3 voltage Possible 0 V when interlock switch is off.
measurement
TP3 DC+24 V-4 voltage Possible 0 V when interlock switch is off.
measurement
TP4 Ground Possible
TP5 Ground Possible

Fuse No. Rating Purpose Remarks

F37 T6.3 A/125 V DC+24 V−3 power supply
protection
F38 T6.3 A/125 V DC+24 V−4 power supply
protection

6. Electrical parts

66040 2/2
 66050
Description of PCB (printer section)

Triple magazine PCB (J391257)

Unused
G068360
NOTE
• Triple magazine PCB J390835 does not comply with the RoHS Directive.

z Function
• Controls the electrical parts of the triple magazine unit.

z Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

6. Electrical parts
z 1. Position
☞ 63000
z 2. Precautions for replacement
• None

z 3. Adjustment after replacement

• None

z 4. Symptoms caused by poor wiring connections

• Refer to 4202 ☞ Triple magazine PCB.

z Unused connector
Connector No. Purpose Remarks
P302 Unused

z Component parts table

Test point No. Purpose Measurement with voltmeter Remarks
TP1 DC+5 V voltage measurement Possible
TP2 DC+36 V voltage measurement Possible 0 V when interlock switch is off.
TP3 Unused Impossible
TP4 Ground Possible

66050 1/1
 66055
Description of PCB (printer section)

Quad magazine PCB (J391177)

Unused
G086483

z Function

6. Electrical parts
• Controls the electrical parts of the quad magazine unit.

z Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

z 1. Position
☞ 63000
z 2. Precautions for replacement
• None

z 3. Adjustment after replacement

• None

z 4. Symptoms caused by poor wiring connections

• Refer to 4202 ☞ Quad magazine PCB.

z Unused connector
Connector No. Purpose Remarks
P1710 Unused

z Component parts table

LED No. Purpose Status
LED1 DC+5 V input check On when the power supply is turned on.
LED2 IL+36 V input check Lights when the interlock switch is on.

66055 1/2
 66055
Description of PCB (printer section)

LED No. Purpose Status

LED3 IL+36 V input check Lights when the interlock switch is on.
LED4 DC+24 V input check On when the power supply is turned on.

Test point No. Purpose Measurement with voltmeter Remarks

TP1 DC+5 V voltage measurement Possible Not mounted
TP2 Ground Possible
TP3 Ground Possible Not mounted
TP4 IL+36 V voltage measurement Possible Not mounted
TP5 IL+24 V voltage measurement Possible Not mounted
TP6 Ground Possible Not mounted
TP7 DC+24 V voltage measurement Possible Not mounted

Fuse No. Rating Purpose Remarks

F55 T3.15 A/125 V Protection of IL+36 V
F56 T2.0 A/125 V Protection of IL+24 V

6. Electrical parts

66055 2/2
 66060
Description of PCB (printer section)

Laser I/O PCB (J391252)

Not mounted depending on conditions

G068361
NOTE
• Laser I/O PCB J390945 does not comply with the RoHS directive.

z Function
• Controls the interlocks of B-AOM driver, G-AOM driver and R-AOM driver.
• Controls the laser unit heater, laser unit cooling fans 1 and 2, and paper advance section cooling fan 2.

6. Electrical parts
• Relays the control signals of B laser driver, G laser driver and R laser driver.
• Supplies the power to each PCB.

z Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

z 1. Position
☞ 63000
z 2. Precautions for replacement
• None

z 3. Adjustment after replacement

• None

z 4. Symptoms caused by poor wiring connections

• Refer to 4202 ☞ Laser I/O PCB.

z 5. Symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse

• Refer to 4252 ☞ Laser I/O PCB.

z Unused connector
• None

66060 1/3
 66060
Description of PCB (printer section)

z Component parts table

IMPORTANT
• Although sometimes the test pins are unmounted, the test points can be used for the measurement.

Test point No. Purpose Measurement with Remarks

voltmeter
TP1 DC+12 V voltage Possible When the normal value (+12 V) is not detected:
measurement • Failure in the multi power supply
• Failure in cable(s) between the multi power supply
and laser I/O PCB
TP2 Ground Possible Ground when TP1, TP3, TP9, TP11, TP12, and TP13
are measured.
TP3 DC-12 V voltage Possible When the normal value (−12 V) is not detected:
measurement • Failure in the multi power supply
• Failure in cable(s) between the multi power supply
and laser I/O PCB
TP4 DC+5 V voltage Possible When the normal value (+5 V) is not detected:
measurement • Failure in the multi power supply
• Failure in cable(s) between the multi power supply
and laser I/O PCB
TP5 Ground Possible Ground when TP4 and TP10 are measured.
TP6 DC+5 V voltage Possible When the normal value (+5 V) is not detected:
measurement • Failure in the multi power supply
• Failure in cable(s) between the multi power supply
and laser I/O PCB
TP7 Ground Possible Ground when TP6 is measured.

6. Electrical parts
TP8 DC+24 V−1 voltage Possible If the normal value (+24 V) is not detected
measurement • Failure in the laser power supply
• Failure in cable(s) between the laser power supply
and laser I/O PCB
TP9 R laser temperature Possible If the normal value (+1 V) is not detected
control standard voltage • Failure in the laser control PCB
check
• Failure in the laser I/O PCB
• Disconnection or short-circuit of thermosensor
Replace the laser unit for the thermosensor failure.
TP10 DC+24 V voltage Possible If the normal value (+24 V) is not detected
measurement • Failure in the laser power supply
• Failure in cable(s) between the laser power supply
and laser I/O PCB
TP11 R laser temperature Possible When the normal value (more than 0 V to less than 1 V)
control section status is not detected:
check • 0 V means the thermosensor is broken.
• 1 V or more means the thermosensor is short-
circuit.
You can check the thermosensor status by the resistance
between pins 7 and 8 on the connector (J1532)
connected to the laser I/O PCB.
• ∞ Ω means the thermosensor is broken.
• 0Ω means the thermosensor is short-circuit.
Replace the laser unit for the thermosensor failure.

66060 2/3
 66060
Description of PCB (printer section)

Test point No. Purpose Measurement with Remarks

voltmeter
TP12 Peltier drive control Possible When the normal value (0 V to 5 V) is not detected:
voltage check • Failure in the laser control PCB
• Failure in the laser I/O PCB
• Disconnection or short-circuit of cable for Peltier
drive
Replace the laser unit for the Peltier drive failure.
TP13 R laser light intensity Possible Normal value
adjustment voltage check If the R laser lights*1: +5.3 V
If the R laser turns off*1: +9.3 V
If the normal value is not detected
• Failure in the laser control PCB
• Failure in the laser I/O PCB
• Failure in the laser unit
• Disconnection or short-circuit of the cable for R
laser
Replace the laser unit for the cable of R laser
TP14 Ground Possible Ground when TP8 is measured.
TP15 Unused Impossible
TP16 Unused Impossible
*1. To turn on/off the R laser, turn ON/OFF R Laser Output of Output Check. See ☞ 35310.

Fuse No. Rating Purpose Remarks

F1 T3.15 A/125 V DC+24 V−1 power supply
protection

6. Electrical parts
F2 T6.3 A/125 V DC+24 V−2 power supply
protection
F3 T6.3 A/125 V DC+24 V−3 power supply
protection

66060 3/3
 66070
Description of PCB (printer section)

B laser driver and G laser driver

J391160/J390973
B laser driver G laser driver
Part No. Part No.

Unused
G074521

J391231/J390929
B laser driver G laser driver

6. Electrical parts
Unused
G068362

IMPORTANT
• The combination of B and G laser drivers depends on laser unit types.

Laser unit Laser driver Part No.

Laser unit (Type A1) B laser driver J391160*1 -
Z025593 G laser driver
Laser unit (Type A1) B laser driver J390973*2*3*4 -
Z022425 G laser driver J391160
Laser Unit (TypeB1) B laser driver J390929*2 -
G laser driver
Laser Unit (Type Ff)*1 B laser driver J391160 J391160
G laser driver J391231 J390929*2

*1. When using the Type A1 (Z025593) whose B and G laser drivers are J391160 or laser unit (Type Ff), verify that the system program is upgraded
to the specified version.

66070 1/2
 66070
Description of PCB (printer section)

See ☞ 2. Precautions for replacement.

*2. Not complying with the RoHS Directive
*3. (J391160) and (J390973) cannot be used by mixture. Confirm the parts No. and use the same PCB type of B laser driver and G laser driver.
*4. B laser driver and G laser driver (J390973) are no longer available.
Refer to ☞ 63080 for laser units.

z Function
• Controls B laser and G laser.

z Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

z 1. Position
☞ 63000
z 2. Precautions for replacement
• When using the Laser Drivers (J391160, J391231) or Laser Unit (Type Ff), the following system program versions are required.

System System program version

QSS-3201/3202/3203 Ver. 5.0 or later
QSS-3211/3212/3213
QSS-3202PRO/3203PRO
QSS-3211DLS/3212DLS/3213DLS Ver. 3.0 or later
QSS-3201SD/3202SD/3203SD Ver. 2.0 or later
QSS-3202SD PRO/3203SD PRO

z 3. Adjustment after replacement

• None

6. Electrical parts
z 4. Symptoms caused by poor wiring connections
• Refer to 4202 ☞ B laser driver.
• Refer to 4202 ☞ G laser driver.

z Unused connector
PCB Name Connector No. Purpose
B laser driver P1656 Unused
G laser driver P1666 Unused

z Component parts table

• None

66070 2/2
 66080
Description of PCB (printer section)

AOM driver

B-AOM driver G-AOM driver R-AOM driver

G058738

Part No. How to identify AOM drivers

Z025645 The shpe is changed. (Changed to a pentagonal prism from a
rectangular parallelepiped)

6. Electrical parts
I124032*2 24L is stated on the label. Label on the back
*2
I124020 24K is stated on the label.
I124019*1*2 24J1 is stated on the label.
*1*2
I124012 24J is stated on the label.

*1. Not complying with the RoHS Directive

*2. It is discontinued

z Function
• Converts the image data to the signal that controls the AOM (optoacoustic modulation) element.
• Controls AOM (optoacoustic modulation) element.

z Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

z 1. Position
☞ 63000
z 2. Precautions for replacement
• The AOM drivers are compatible for each other and can be used together.

66080 1/3
 66080
Description of PCB (printer section)

z 3. Adjustment after replacement

• Perform the daily setup for each paper type.

• If the daily setup is completed normally, the work has finished.

• If the daily setup is not completed normally, perform the initial setup.

z 4. Symptoms caused by poor wiring connections

• Refer to 4202 ☞ B-AOM driver.
• Refer to 4202 ☞ G-AOM driver.
• Refer to 4202 ☞ R-AOM driver.

z Unused connector
• None

z Component parts table

• None

z Removing the AOM driver

1. Open the printer top cover.

2. Remove paper advance unit 2.
☞ 26550
3. Remove the processor loading unit.
☞ 26610

6. Electrical parts
4. Remove the wiring cover. (Loosen two screws.)
Wiring cover

G072357

5. Remove the AOM driver unit. (Loosen two screws.)

IMPORTANT
• Raise the AOM driver and remove it, then place on the processor top cover.

66080 2/3
 66080
Description of PCB (printer section)

• Operate with extreme care for wiring to the laser unit, laser control PCB and laser I/O PCB.

Loosen this screw.

R-AOM driver

G-AOM driver

B-AOM driver
AOM driver unit

Processor top cover

Loosen this screw.
G072358

6. Electrical parts

66080 3/3
 66090
Description of PCB (printer section)

CVP PCB (J391258)

Not mounted depending on conditions

G066110

NOTE
• CVP PCB (J390943) does not comply with the RoHS Directive.

z Function
• Controls the correction value printing unit.

6. Electrical parts
z Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

z 1. Position
☞ 63000
z 2. Precautions for replacement
• None

z 3. Adjustment after replacement

• None

z 4. Symptoms caused by poor wiring connections

• Refer to 4202 ☞ CVP PCB.

z 5. Symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse

• Refer to 4252 ☞ CVP PCB.

z Unused connector
• None

z Component parts table

IMPORTANT
• Although sometimes the test pins are unmounted, the test points can be used for the measurement.

66090 1/2
 66090
Description of PCB (printer section)

Test point No. Purpose Measurement with Remarks

voltmeter
TP1 DC+36 V voltage measurement Possible
TP2 Ground Possible
TP3 DC+24 V voltage measurement Possible

Fuse No. Rating Purpose Remarks

F25 T3.15 A/125 V DC+36 V power supply 0 V when interlock switch is off.
protection

6. Electrical parts

66090 2/2
 66100
Description of PCB (printer section)

Power supply (printer section)

6. Electrical parts
Unused

G068367

z Function
Symbol Name Part No. Function Remarks
PS1 Printer power supply 1 I038361 Supplies the power to each PCB. DC+24 V
PS2 Printer power supply 2 I038287*1 Supplies the power to printer I/O DC+36 V
I038406 PCB 1.
PS3 Printer power supply 3 I038364*1 Supplies the power to printer I/O DC+24 V
I038421 PCB 1.
PS4 Multi power supply I038160 Supplies the power to each PCB. DC+5 V, DC+12 V,
(printer) DC-12 V
PS5 Laser power supply I038286*1 Supplies the power to laser I/O DC+24 V
I038405 PCB.
PS6 Printer power supply 4 I038414 Supplies the power to the quad DC+36 V
I038415 paper magazine PCB.
I038409

*1. Not complying with the RoHS Directive

IMPORTANT
• Each power supply is equipped with the overvoltage and overheat protection functions. If the functions operate, turn
off the circuit breaker of the system and wait for a while, then turn on again. If the overheat protection function is
operated, check if each cooling fan is in operation.

66100 1/3
 66100
Description of PCB (printer section)

z Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

z 1. Position
☞ 63000
z 2. Precautions for replacement
Do not change each volume that has already been adjusted by the manufacturer before shipping.

Power supply Precautions for replacement

• Printer power supply 2 • In the following, be sure to remove the PCB spacer, because the number of screws is changed
• Laser power supply from five to four.
If the PCB spacer is not removed, there will be a short circuit to the PCB.
• Changing from printer power supply 2 I038287 to I038406
• Changing from laser power supply 2 I038286 to I038405

Remove.

• Printer power supply 3 • When changing the printer power supply 3 from I038364 to I038421, use the modification part
(Z026119-01) because the installation method is different between them. *1
1. Remove the four PCB spacers.
2. Install the plate to the new PCB.
3. Attach the two 7mm spacers to the new PCB and install it.

6. Electrical parts
Plate

7mm
Attach the spacer.

• Printer power supply 4 • Regarding the printer power supply 4, there are three types of the PCBs: I038414, I038415 and
I038409.
The PCBs: I038414, I038415 and I038409 are not compatible with each other, because their
cables and connectors are different.
When replacing the printer power supply 4, replace it with the same type of PCB.
• The printer power supply 4 type can be distinguished by the type given on the PCB.
I038414: ZWS100AF-36/J
I038415: JBW36-2R8
I038409: ZWS100AF-36

*1. The modification part includes the Power Supply PCB, two spacers, one plate and two screws.

z 3. Adjustment after replacement

• None

z 4. Symptoms caused by poor wiring connections

Power supply Reference
Printer power supply 1 Refer to 4202 ☞ Printer power supply 1 (PS1).
Printer power supply 2 Refer to 4202 ☞ Printer power supply 2 (PS2).
Printer power supply 3 Refer to 4202 ☞ Printer power supply 3 (PS3).

66100 2/3
 66100
Description of PCB (printer section)

Power supply Reference

Multi power supply Refer to 4202 ☞ Multi power supply (printer) (PS4).
Laser power supply Refer to 4202 ☞ Laser power supply (PS5).
Printer power supply 4 Refer to 4202 ☞ Printer power supply 4 (PS6).

z Unused connector
Power supply Connector No. Purpose Remarks
Printer power supply 1 CN2 Unused
CN52 Unused
Printer power supply 2 None
Printer power supply 3 None
Multi power supply CN4 Unused
Laser power supply None
Printer power supply 4 None

z Component parts table

Fuse
Power supply Fuse No. Purpose Remarks
Printer power supply 1 F1 AC 200 V power Cannot be replaced.
supply protection
Printer power supply 2 F1 AC 200 V power
supply protection
Printer power supply 3 F1 AC 200 V power
supply protection

6. Electrical parts
Multi power supply F1 AC 200 V power
supply protection
Laser power supply F1 AC 200 V power
supply protection
Printer power supply 4 F1 AC 200 V power
supply protection

66100 3/3
 66200 Explanation of PCBs (Processor section)

Explanation of PCBs (Processor section)

Processor control PCB [F] [N] [SM] [J]

P521

Unused depending on the conditions Not mounted depending on conditions

6. Electrical parts
G070014
NOTE
• Processor control PCB J390878 does not comply with the RoHS Directive.

Processor control PCB J390878 J391259 J391358

z Function
• Controls the processor section.

• The difference between processor control PCBs J390878 and J391259 and processor control PCB J391358 is that P521 connector is
added to processor control PCBs J390878 and J391259. (To be compatible with the F specification)
• The processor control PCBs J390878 and J391259 cannot be used with the F specification.

z Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

• When replacing a PCB, save the memory data and Logdata of when a problem (error) occurs.
Press the Alt key and the Y key on the keyboard when the problem occurs. ☞ 37520
• Return the failed PCB with the memory data and Logdata.

z 1. Position
☞ 63200
z 2. Precautions for replacement
• Backup the system data.
☞ 35400
• Check the setting of the DIP switch.
• Check the jumper connector.

66200 1/3
 66200
Explanation of PCBs (Processor section)

• Only for F specification, the following error messages may appear in a specific condition after initializing the data.
☞ No. 5905[F], ☞ No. 5906[F], ☞ No. 5907[F]
For details, see ☞ 57020.

IMPORTANT
• On this PCB, the optical fiber cables are connected to the connectors J517 (IN) and J518 (OUT). Be sure to read
•

the Precautions for handling the optical fiber cable and LVDS cable, then work properly. ☞ 68100

z 3. Adjustment after replacement

• Read the system program.
☞ 35600
• Load the system data.
☞ 35400
z 4. Symptoms caused by poor wiring connections
• See 4203 ☞ Processor control PCB.

z Unused connector
Connector No. Purpose Remarks
P512 Digital flowmeter Option
P520 • [N] specification: unused
• [SM] specification: connecting to SM I/O PCB
• [J] specification: connecting to tablet replenishment driver PCB
•
• [F] specification: connecting to F replenishment I/O PCB
P521 • [N] [SM] [J] specifications: unused Connector is connected only

6. Electrical parts
• [F] specification: connecting to the temperature and humidity sensor for J391358.

z Component parts table

IMPORTANT
• Although sometimes the test pins are unmounted, the test points can be used for the measurement.

LED No. Purpose Status

LED1 DC+24 V input check On when the power supply is turned on.
LED2 DC+5 V input check On when the power supply is turned on.
LED3 DC+12 V input check On when the power supply is turned on.
LED4 DC+5 V input check On when the power supply is turned on.

Test point No. Purpose Measurement with voltmeter Remarks

TP1 Ground Possible
TP2 Unused Impossible
TP3 Unused Impossible
TP4 Ground Possible
TP5 DC+24 V voltage measurement Possible
TP6 DC+5 V voltage measurement Possible
TP7 DC+12 V voltage measurement Possible
TP8 Ground Possible
TP9 DC+5 V voltage measurement Possible
TP10 Thermosensor input voltage Impossible
measurement
TP11 Thermosensor standard voltage Possible 2.5 V
measurement

66200 2/3
 66200
Explanation of PCBs (Processor section)

Test point No. Purpose Measurement with voltmeter Remarks

TP12 Thermosensor standard voltage Possible 1.0 V
measurement

Switch No. Bit No. Settings Purpose Remarks

DS1 1 OFF Unused Be sure to turn off.
2 OFF
3 OFF
4 OFF

Jumper No. Settings Open Short Remarks

JP2 Open When operated Unused Be sure to set to open.

6. Electrical parts

66200 3/3
 66210
Explanation of PCBs (Processor section)

Processor I/O PCB (J391356) [N] [SM] [J] [F]

Unused depending on the conditions Not mounted depending on conditions

G068365
NOTE
• Processor I/O PCBs J391164 and J390798 are not compliant with RoHS directives.

z Function
• Controls each electrical part of the processor section.

z Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

6. Electrical parts
z 1. Position
☞ 63200
z 2. Precautions for replacement
• None

z 3. Adjustment after replacement

• None

z 4. Symptoms caused by poor wiring connections

• See 4203 ☞ Processor I/O PCB.

z 5. Symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse

• See 4253 ☞ Processor I/O PCB.

z Unused connector
Connector No. Purpose Remarks
P671 [N] [SM] [J] [F] specifications: unused
P672 [N] [SM] [F] specifications: unused
• [J] specification: connecting to the STB tablet conveyor motor and the
tablet replenishment driver PCB
P673 Hour meter Option
P675 [N] [SM] [J] [F] specifications: unused
P676 [N] [J] [F] specifications: unused
• [SM] specification: connected to CD circulation pump

66210 1/3
 66210
Explanation of PCBs (Processor section)

Connector No. Purpose Remarks

P677 • [SM] specification: unused
• [N] [J] [F] specifications: connected to CD circulation pump
P683 • [SM] [F] specifications: unused
• [N] specification: connected to CD circulation pump
• [J] specification: connected to CD circulation pump
P684 [N][J] specifications: unused
• [SM] specification: connecting to SM I/O PCB
• [F] specification: connecting to F replenishment I/O PCB
P685 • [SM] [F] specifications: unused
• [N] specification: connected to refilling water pump
• [J] specification: connecting to cleaning pump 1
P688 • [SM] [F] specifications: unused
• [N] specification: connected to # # # replenishment solution level sensor
and refilling water tank level sensor
• [J] specification: connecting to SW/DW tank level sensor and SW tank
level sensor
P691 For chilling unit Option
P692 For cooling water unit Option
P700 [N] [SM] [J] [F] specifications: unused
P701 Signal lamp Option

z Component parts table

IMPORTANT

6. Electrical parts
• Although sometimes the test pins are unmounted, the test points can be used for the measurement.

LED No. Purpose Status

LED1 • [N] [SM] specifications: unused • [N] [SM] specifications: unused
• [J] specification: SSR18 operation check (CD water supply • [J] [F] specifications: ON during
pump) operation
• [F] specification: SSR18 operation check (P1R replenisher
pump)
LED2 • [N] [SM] specifications: unused • [N] [SM] specifications: unused
• [J] specification: SSR19 operation check (CD water supply • [J] [F] specifications: ON during
pump) operation
• [F] specification: SSR19 operation check (P2RA
replenisher pump)
LED3 • [N] [SM] specifications: unused • [N] [SM] specifications: unused
• [J] specification: SSR20 operation check (STB water • [J] [F] specifications: ON during
supply pump) operation
• [F] specification: SSR20 operation check (P2RB
replenisher pump)
LED4 [N] [SM] [J] [F] specifications: unused
LED5 • [SM] specification: CD circulation amount check • [SM] specification: ON when CD
• [N] [J] [F] specifications: unused circulation amount has decreased
• [N] [J] [F] specifications: unused
LED6 Relay X13 operation check (effluent float switch) ON during operation
LED7 Relay X12 operation check (program timer) OFF when the program timer operates.
LED8 Exhaust fan operation check ON during operation
LED9 Drive motor cooling fan operation check ON during operation
LED10 Tank cooling fan operation check ON during operation
LED11 Unused

66210 2/3
 66210
Explanation of PCBs (Processor section)

LED No. Purpose Status

LED13 Conveyor motor reverse operation check ON during operation
LED14 Conveyor motor forward operation check ON during operation
LED15 Sorter motor operation check ON during operation
LED16 • [N] specification: refilling water pump and cleaning pump The LED status during operation is shown
LED17 operation check in the table.*1
LED18 • [J] specification: cleaning pump operation check
• [SM] [F] specifications: unused
LED19 DC+24 V power supply check On when the power supply is turned on.
LED20 DC+5 V power supply check On when the power supply is turned on.
*1. Table (You can check whether the pump is working by ON/OFF of LED16, 17 and 18.)

CD−W BF−W STB1−W STB2−W STB3−W STB4−W

Refilling water Refilling water Refilling water Refilling water Refilling water Refilling water
pump pump pump pump pump pump
LED16 On Off On Off On Off
LED17 Off On On Off Off On
LED18 Off Off Off On On On

Cleaning
pump
LED16 On
LED17 On
LED18 On

Test point No. Purpose Measurement with voltmeter Remarks

TP1 AC+24 V voltage measurement Possible

6. Electrical parts
TP2 AC+24 V voltage measurement Possible
TP3 DC+5 V power supply Possible
measurement
TP4 DC+24 V voltage measurement Possible
TP5 Ground Possible
TP6 Ground Possible

Fuse No. Rating Purpose Remarks

F14 T6.3 A/125 V DC+24 V power voltage
protection
F15 T6.3 A/125 V DC+24 V power voltage
protection
F16 T3.15 A/125 V AC+24 V power supply
protection

66210 3/3
 66220
Explanation of PCBs (Processor section)

Processor relay PCB (J391260) [N] [SM] [J] [F]

6. Electrical parts

Unused
G068366
NOTE
• Processor relay PCB J390917 does not comply with the RoHS Directive.

z Function
• Changes the power supply specifications.
• Supplies power to each unit.
Dryer heater, processing solution heater, dryer fan, and drive motor
• Protects the power surge.
• Supplies the power of AC 200 V line.

66220 1/3
 66220
Explanation of PCBs (Processor section)

z Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

• Even if the circuit breaker of the machine is turned off, voltage is applied to terminal TA3 on processor relay PCB. If
processor relay PCB is to be replaced, be sure to turn off the circuit breaker of the main power supply.

z 1. Position
☞ 63200
z 2. Precautions for replacement
• Wire the terminal strip TA3 according to the voltage specification of the main body.
• Check the voltages of P642, P645, P658, and P661.
IMPORTANT
• Replace the connector so that the voltage described on the connector lower part matches the applied one.

z 3. Adjustment after replacement

• None

z 4. Symptoms caused by poor wiring connections

• See 4203 ☞ Processor relay PCB.

z 5. Symptoms resulted from blowout of fuse

• See 4253 ☞ Processor relay PCB.

z Unused connector

6. Electrical parts
Connector No. Purpose Remarks
P647 Unused The starter jumper is connected at forced startup.

z Component parts table

LED No. Purpose Status
LED1 SSR1 operation check (CD heater) ON during operation
LED2 SSR2 operation check (BF heater) ON during operation
LED3 SSR3 operation check (STB heater) ON during operation
LED4 SSR4 and 6 operation check (dryer heater 1) ON during operation
LED5 SSR5 and 7 operation check (dryer heater 2) ON during operation
LED6 SSR8 operation check (dryer heater 3) ON during operation
LED7 Relays X6 and X7 operation check (processing ON during operation
solution float switch)
LED8 Relay X1 operation check (processing solution ON during operation
float switch safety thermostat)
LED9 Relay X10 operation check (printer main relay) ON during operation
LED10 Relay X8 operation check (dryer cover) ON during operation
LED11 Relay X5 operation check (processor top cover) ON during operation
LED12 Relays X2, 3 and 4 operation check (dryer safety ON during operation
thermostat)
LED13 Relay X9 operation check (dryer fan) ON during operation
LED14 DC+24 V power supply check On when the power supply is turned on.

Test point No. Purpose Measurement with voltmeter Remarks

TP1 DC+24 V voltage measurement Possible

66220 2/3
 66220
Explanation of PCBs (Processor section)

Test point No. Purpose Measurement with voltmeter Remarks

TP2 Ground Possible
TP3 Ground Possible

Fuse No. Rating Purpose Remarks

FL1 T5 A/250 V Protection circuit for power Cannot be replaced.
surges
FL2 T5 A/250 V Protection circuit for power Cannot be replaced.
surges
FL3 T5 A/250 V Protection circuit for power Cannot be replaced.
surges
FL4 T5 A/250 V Protection circuit for power Cannot be replaced.
surges
F1 T10 A/250 V Dryer heater
F2 T10 A/250 V Processing solution heater
F3 T5 A/250 V Dryer heater
F4 T6.3 A/250 V Dryer heater
F5 T3.15 A/250 V CD heater
F6 T3.15 A/250 V BF heater
F7 T5 A/250 V STB heater
F8 T5 A/250 V Dryer heater
F9 T6.3 A/250 V Dryer heater
F10 T5 A/250 V Dryer heater
F11 T15 A/250 V Dryer heater
F12 T3.15 A/250 V Dryer fan
F13 T6.3 A/250 V DC+24 V power supply

6. Electrical parts
protection
F14 T6.3 A/250 V DC+24 V power supply
protection

66220 3/3
 66500
Explanation of PCBs (Processor section)

Tablet replenishment driver PCB (J391351) [J]

G050714
NOTE
• Tablet replenishment driver PCB J391351 does not comply with the RoHS Directive.

z Function
• Supplies the power to each sensor of the tablet replenishment section and relays the input signal.
• Lights LEDs, drives motors and relays output signals on the tablet replenishment section

z Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

z 1. Position
☞ 63200
z 2. Precautions for replacement

6. Electrical parts
• None

z 3. Adjustment after replacement

• None

z Unused connector
• None

z Component parts table

LED No. Purpose Status
LED1 DC+5 V input check On when the power supply is turned on.
LED2 DC+24 V input check On when the power supply is turned on.
LED3 Relay X22 operation check On when the power supply is turned on.

Test point No. Purpose Measurement with voltmeter Remarks

TP1 DC+5 V voltage measurement Possible
TP2 DC+24 V voltage measurement Possible
G Ground Possible

Fuse No. Rating Purpose Remarks

F25 T3.15 A/125 V DC+24 V power supply
protection

66500 1/1
 66600
Explanation of PCBs (Processor section)

SM I/O PCB (J391191, J391378) [SM]

Unused
G070013
NOTE
• SM I/O PCB J390330 does not comply with the RoHS directive.

6. Electrical parts
z Function
• Supplies the power to each sensor of the SM replenishment section and relays the input signal.
• Drives each replenisher pump and water supply pump of the SM replenishment section and relays the output signal.

z Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

z 1. Position
☞ 63200
z 2. Precautions for replacement
• None

z 3. Adjustment after replacement

• Adjust the sensitivity of the replenishment solution sensor, after replacing the PCB.
☞ 27830
• Adjustment methods after replacement are different between SM I/O PCBs J391191, J390330 and J391378.

z Unused connector
Connector No. Purpose Remarks
P606 Unused

66600 1/2
 66600
Explanation of PCBs (Processor section)

z Component parts table

LED No. Purpose Status
LED1 CD−A replenishment solution presence check ON when there is replenishment solution.
LED2 CD−B replenishment solution presence check ON when there is replenishment solution.
LED3 CD−C replenishment solution presence check ON when there is replenishment solution.
LED4 STB replenishment solution presence check ON when there is replenishment solution.
LED5 BF−A replenishment solution presence check ON when there is replenishment solution.
LED6 BF−B replenishment solution presence check ON when there is replenishment solution.
LED7 DC+5 V input check On when the power supply is turned on.
LED8 DC+24 V−A input check On when the power supply is turned on.
LED9 DC+24 V−B input check On when the power supply is turned on.
LED10 SSR12 operation check (CD−A replenisher ON during operation
pump)
LED11 SSR13 operation check (CD−B replenisher ON during operation
pump)
LED12 SSR14 operation check (CD−C replenisher ON during operation
pump)
LED13 SSR15 operation check (BF−A replenisher ON during operation
pump)
LED14 SSR16 operation check (BF−B replenisher pump) ON during operation
LED15 SSR17 operation check (STB replenisher pump) ON during operation

Test point No. Purpose Measurement with voltmeter Remarks

TP1 DC+5 V voltage measurement Possible
TP2 DC+24 V−A voltage Possible
measurement

6. Electrical parts
TP3 DC+24 V−B voltage Possible
measurement
TPG1 Ground Possible
TPG2 Ground Possible

VR No. Purpose Remarks

VR1 CD−A replenishment solution sensor sensitivity
adjustment
VR2 CD−B replenishment solution sensor sensitivity
adjustment
VR3 CD−C replenishment solution sensor sensitivity
adjustment
VR4 STB replenishment solution sensor sensitivity
adjustment
VR5 BF−A replenishment solution sensor sensitivity
adjustment
VR6 BF−B replenishment solution sensor sensitivity
adjustment

66600 2/2
 66800
Explanation of PCBs (Processor section)

F replenishment I/O PCB (J391322) [F]

P601 P596 P604 P603

P609

P600
TP5 TP3

LED3

P599

LED2 LED7 P605

P606

TP4 LED6 LED5 LED4

TP2
LED1
TP1

F60 P607 P602 P608 P597 P598

Unused
G085943

z Function

6. Electrical parts
• Drives motor, each solenoid valve, replenisher pump and water supply pump of the F replenishment section, and relays the output
signal.
• Detects the solution level of the replenishment tank and controls the interlock switch (replenisher section door).

z Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

z 1. Position
☞ 63200
z 2. Precautions for replacement
• None

z 3. Adjustment after replacement

• None

z Unused connector
Connector No. Purpose Remarks
P608, P609 Unused

z Component parts table

LED No. Purpose Status
LED1 DC+24 V−A input check On when the power supply is turned on.
LED2 DC+24 V−B input check On when the power supply is turned on.
LED3 DC5 V input check On when the power supply is turned on.

66800 1/2
 66800
Explanation of PCBs (Processor section)

LED No. Purpose Status

LED4 P2RA Replenisher Pump and P2RB Replenisher ON
Pump performance check OFF
LED5, LED6 Unused
LED7 Interlock Switch (Replenisher Section Door): ON
ON/OFF check OFF

Test point No. Purpose Measurement with voltmeter Remarks

TP1 DC+24 V−A voltage Possible
measurement
TP2 DC+24 V−B voltage Possible
measurement
TP3 DC+5 V voltage measurement Possible
TP4G Ground Possible
TP5G DC+5 V Ground Possible

Fuse No. Rating Purpose

F60 T5 A/250 V PCB protection

6. Electrical parts

66800 2/2
 67400
Explanation of PCBs (Processor section)

Power supply (processor)

G068368

z Function
Symbol Name Part No. Function Remarks
*1
PS1 Processor power supply 1 I038320 Supplies the power to each PCB. DC+5 V
I038404
PS2 Processor power supply 2 I038286*1 Supplies the power to each PCB and DC+24 V
I038405 fan.
PS3 Processor power supply 3 Supplies the power to each PCB, DC+24 V
drive motor, and circulation pump.

*1. Not complying with the RoHS Directive

6. Electrical parts
IMPORTANT
• Each power supply is equipped with the overvoltage and overheat protection functions. If the functions operate, turn
off the circuit breaker of the system and wait for a while, then turn on again. If the overheat protection function is
operated, check if each cooling fan is in operation.

z Adjustments and precautions for PCB replacement

z 1. Position
☞ 63200
z 2. Precautions for replacement
Do not change each volume that has already been adjusted by the manufacturer before shipping.

Power supply Precautions for replacement

• Processor power supply • In the following, be sure to remove the PCB spacer, because the number of screws is changed
2 from five to four.
• Processor power supply If the PCB spacer is not removed, there will be a short circuit to the PCB.
3 • Changing the processor power supply 2 and processor power supply 3 from I038286 to
I038405

Remove.

67400 1/2
 67400
Explanation of PCBs (Processor section)

Power supply Precautions for replacement

• Processor power supply • When changing the printer power supply 1 from I038320 to I038404, use the modification part
1 (Z026118-01) because the installation method is different between them. *1
1. Remove the four PCB spacers.
2. Install the plate to the new PCB.
3. Attach the two 7mm spacers to the new PCB and install it.
Plate

7mm
Attach the spacer.

*1. The modification part includes the Power Supply PCB, two spacers, one plate and two screws.

z 3. Adjustment after replacement

• None

z 4. Symptoms caused by poor wiring connections

Power supply Reference
Processor power supply 1 See 4203 ☞ Processor power supply 1 (PS1).
Processor power supply 2 See 4203 ☞ Processor power supply 2 (PS2).
Processor power supply 3 See 4203 ☞ Processor power supply 3 (PS3).

6. Electrical parts
z Unused connector
• None

z Component parts table

Fuse
Power supply Fuse No. Purpose Remarks
Processor power supply 1 F1 AC 200 V power Cannot be replaced.
supply protection
Processor power supply 2 F1 AC 200 V power Cannot be replaced.
supply protection
Processor power supply 3 F1 AC 200 V power Cannot be replaced.
supply protection

67400 2/2
 68050
Explanation of PCBs (Processor section)

Changing the power supply specifications (Outside Japan)

• Be sure to turn off the circuit breaker and main power supply before starting this operation.
To set the power supply specification, wire between terminal strips TA1 and TA2 of the processor power supply section and connect
jumper connectors (J642, J645, J658 and J661) on the processor relay PCB.
[N], [SM] and [J] specifications

TA1 TA2 G068501

[F]

6. Electrical parts
TA1 TA2
G085937

z Change procedure

1. Wiring change
Wiring Single phase, two wires (AC 200 V Three phases, three wires (AC 200 Three phases, four wires (AC 346 V
No. to AC 240 V) V to AC 240 V) to AC 415 V)
A L1 − 1 L1 − 1 L1 − 1
B L2 − 2 L2 − 2 L2 − 3
C L3 − 6 L3 − 4 L3 − 5
D N−6 N−6 N−2
F 1−3 1−5 6−6
H 2−4 2−3 2−4
J 3−5 6−6 6−6

2. Check the connectors of dryer fan (J645) and dryer heater (J658 and J661).
Check that the connectors (J645, J658 and J661) on the processor relay PCB are connected to their input voltage.

68050 1/4
 68050
Explanation of PCBs (Processor section)

3. Check the connection of the connectors for transformer.

Check that the connector (J642) on the processor relay PCB are connected to the power supply for 200 V.
4. Checking the description on the tag
Check the tag attached around the circuit breaker to see if the description on the tag matches with the power supply
specifications.
If the power supply specification is changed, change the description on the tag.
5. Indication change of the power supply specification
In the Machine Specification mode, change the power supply specification. ☞ 35800

z Single phase, two wires (AC 200 V to AC 240 V)

Processor relay PCB

6. Electrical parts

Connect the connector for jumper according to each input voltage.

G068448

68050 2/4
 68050
Explanation of PCBs (Processor section)

z Three phases, three wires (AC 200 V to AC 240 V)

Processor relay PCB

6. Electrical parts
Connect the connector for jumper according to each input voltage.

G068449

68050 3/4
 68050
Explanation of PCBs (Processor section)

z Three phases, four wires (AC 346 V to AC 415 V)

Processor relay PCB

6. Electrical parts
Connect the connector for jumper according to each input voltage.

G068450

68050 4/4
 68060
Power specification

Changing the power supply specifications [Stand alone scanner]

• Be sure to turn off the circuit breaker and main power supply before starting this operation.

z Checking

1. Connection checking of the power supply

1

1
4

2
5

2
6

3
(VH-5P)

(VH-7P)

(VH-3P)

(VH-3P)
J/P101

J/P104

J/P102

P103
Power PCB
(VH-6P)

(VH-2P)
J/P100
J/P99

1
3

2
(2T)
E2530MRC
FC

W409072-01
LOAD
1

2
NFB1

E2530MRC
LINE

(3T)
1

6. Electrical parts
FC
W409076-01
W409070-01

E
(0707-1-CW)
P161

N
E
L

Outside Japan: Connect a single phase, two wires (AC200 to 240 V).

G076400

2. Indication change of the power supply specification

In the Machine Specification mode, change the power specifications. ☞ 35800

68060 1/1
 68100 Cables

Cables

Precautions for handling the optical fiber cable and LVDS cable

z PCBs which connect to the optical fiber cable

PCB Name Connector No. on the PCB Manual No. Remarks
ARCNET HUB PCB J133 (OUT), J134 (IN) ☞ 64100
J135 (OUT), J136 (IN)
J137 (OUT), J138 (IN)
J139 (OUT), J140 (IN)
J139 (OUT), J140 (IN)
AFC/scanner control PCB J20 (OUT), J21 (IN) Scanner Service
Manual
D-ICE control PCB J71 (OUT), J72 (IN) ☞ 64030
J73 (OUT), J74 (IN)
J75 (OUT), J76 (IN)
J53 (OUT), J54 (IN)
Printer control PCB J219(OUT), J220(IN) ☞ 66000
J221 (OUT), J222 (IN)
J223 (OUT), J224 (IN)
Laser control PCB J1516 (OUT), J1517 (IN) ☞ 66010
Processor control PCB J518 (OUT), J517 (IN) ☞ 66200
Image processing PCB J442 (OUT), J443 (IN) ☞ 64000
PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB CN3 (OUT), CN2 (IN) PC Service
Manual
PU control PCB P300 (OUT), P299 (IN) ☞ 64140 Option

6. Electrical parts
IMPORTANT
• For details of precautions for using optical fiber cable, refer to how to use tool and The Factor List of the ARCNET
Communication Errors in ARCNET Communication Diagnosis Manual.

z PCBs and unit to which the LVDS cable has been connected
PCB Name Connector No. on the PCB Manual No. Remarks
PCI-LVDS/ARCNET PCB CN1 PC Service
Manual
Laser control PCB P1513 ☞ 66010
Scanner unit P60 -
D-ICE PCB P436 ☞ 64040
Image processing PCB J1350, J445, J455, J456 ☞ 64000

68100 1/2
 68100
Cables

z Precautions when handling the LVDS cable

Do not bend the LVDS cable by R20 mm or less. Otherwise, the cable may break. Lay the cable with a bending radius of at least R50
mm. When inserting, removing, attaching the ferrite core, or wiring the cable, do not use force.

LVDS cable

G063561

6. Electrical parts

68100 2/2
 68500 Power ON/OFF

Power ON/OFF

Operation when the power supply is turned on

z When the circuit breaker was turned off during operation

1. Turn on the circuit breaker.

2. The power supply of the processor section is turned on and the temperature adjustment starts.
3. The power supplies of the input section and the printer section are turned on.
4. The personal computer will start in three minutes.
5. After communication check, the input section and the printer section are initialized.
The system program starts.

z When the circuit breaker was turned off while the program timer is activating

1. Turn on the circuit breaker.

2. The power supply of the processor section is turned on to activate the program timer.
3. Press the manual sorter switch two seconds.
4. At the same time when the temperature adjustment starts, the processor status lamp blinks.

6. Electrical parts

68500 1/1
 68550
Power ON/OFF

When power is not supplied to input and output sections (How to use the
starter jumper)

z Function
• You can supply power forcibly using the starter jumper when 200 V to 240 V is not supplied to the input and output sections
during operation.

z Status
• Power (200 V to 240 V) is not supplied to the input and output sections during operation.
• When the program timer is activated or temperature is being increased if the manual sorter switch is pressed for two seconds or
longer, the power (from 200 V to 240 V ) is not supplied to the input and output sections.

z Position of the starter jumper

[N], [SM] and [J] specifications Starter jumper

6. Electrical parts
Processor relay PCB

G077192

68550 1/3
 68550
Power ON/OFF

Starter jumper
[F]

Processor relay PCB

G085940

6. Electrical parts

68550 2/3
 68550
Power ON/OFF

z Diagnosis

Are the personal computer, monitor, and each unit in the input and
output sections operating?

Not operating Operating

No problem.

Is LED9 on the processor relay PCB on?

On Off
Repair or
replace Confirm that the circuit breaker of input section is ON.

Check if the connector is connected correctly, or cables

are not disconnected.
There is a J/P646 (processor relay PCB) ↔ J/P355 (connecting)
problem. ↔ J/P123 (connecting) ↔ J/P161 (connecting)
Check the Processor relay PCB.

No problem.

Check if the connector is connected correctly, or cables are not disconnected.

J/P656 (processor relay PCB) ↔ J/P797 (processor power 3)
J/P656 (processor relay PCB) ↔ J/P798 (processor power 3)

There is a Check whether there is blown fuse.

problem. F14 (125 V/6.3 A) (processor relay PCB)
Check the Processor relay PCB.

6. Electrical parts
No problem.

Turn off the power supply and attach the starter jumper on the connector (P647) of
processor relay PCB. Make the main relay between 200 V and 240 V turn ON forcibly.

Check the version of processor via System Version Check.

Version cannot be checked. Version can be checked.

Upgrade the software.

Turn off the power and remove the starter jumper. Turn on the power
again, and then check that LED9 of the processor relay PCB is ON.
On

Off

Processor control PCB failure

68550 3/3
 7000

7. Setup for service personnel

Setup for service personnel ................................................................................................. 70010

Setup during installation (Works to do until completing the temperature adjustment) .....................................70010
Setup during installation (Works after completing the temperature adjustment) ..............................................70020
Setup during installation [Stand Alone Scanner] ..............................................................................................70021
Setup during installation [Stand Alone Printer] ................................................................................................70022
Procedure for downgrading the profile data ......................................................................................................70025
Other works after installation (Language setting except English and Japanese) ..............................................70040
Check the processor setting [N] [SM] [J] .........................................................................................................70050
Check the processor setting [F] .........................................................................................................................70051
Scanner section adjustment check [S-2/S-3/S-4] ...............................................................................................70060
Scanner section adjustment check [S1-II] .........................................................................................................70060

7 Setup for service personnel

7000 1/1
 70010 Setup for service personnel

Setup for service personnel

Setup during installation (Works to do until completing the temperature

adjustment)

z Procedures

1. No. 1319: Scanner type was changed. The system will be restarted. may appear onscreen when
the machine is turned on.

If the attention message shown above appears onscreen, scanner-related data will be initialized after the system is restarted.
For details, see the Scanner Service Manual.

2. When registering or updating the light source at the installation, the messages No. 6331: Line
scanning communication error. or No. 6900: Main control system error. may appear.

When the error above occurs, release the error and upgrade the system using CD so as not to display this error message.

3. Upgrading the system program

Upgrade the system program.
IMPORTANT
• If upgrading the system is not carried out, the versions of scanner section/desk section/printer
section/processor section may not match, and the machine may not operate correctly.
• For details about Software Upgrade, refer to To upgrade the QSS software of Installation procedure of the QSS
software in the PC Service Manual.
NOTE
• If the system program is updated in installation, you do not have to backup the system data as explained in To upgrade
the QSS software.

4. Prepare of the tools for the setup

Prepare the following tools before setup for installation.

7. Setup for service personnel

• Service personnel floppy disk Type B
• Scanner adjustment chart
• For 135 AFC
• For 240 AFC
• For 120 AFC
• For 110 AFC
• For MMC
• For AMC
• Floppy disk for data backup
NOTE
• The service personnel floppy disk Type B and the adjustment chart are the service personnel tools. See Service
personnel tool list.
☞ 80310

5. Setting the magazine code of paper magazine

Set the paper magazine code to the paper width and paper surface to be used.

6. Loading paper into the paper magazine

Load the paper to be used for the initial setup into the paper magazine.

70010 1/3
 70010
Setup for service personnel

7. Cleaning of the optical parts

Clean the optical parts below.
„ Auto film carrier
Clean each brush, peripheral cooling fan, each sensor, each roller, and film path surface.
„ Cleaning the laser unit
Cleaning the laser dust-proof glass and pressure guide
„ Light source unit (input section)
Clean the dust prevention glass.
• For the cleaning procedures, see Maintenance Manual.

8. Entering the service personnel password

Insert the service personnel floppy disk into the floppy disk drive and enter the service personnel password on the PTBurn
Interface : display.

(1) Press F to select PTBurn Interface :.

(2) Insert the service personnel floppy disk into the floppy disk drive on the PTBurn Interface : display.
(3) Press the F key and -1 key.
(4) Enter the password (2260).
For the service personnel mode, Service Mode is displayed on each display.

9. Load the initial data.

Be sure to use the initial floppy disk provided with the machine and read the data in Reading Data (Floppy Disk -> CPU).
• For details about how to read the initial data, refer to ☞ 35400.
NOTE
• Read All Data in the service personnel level.
• There are four initial floppy disks.

Floppy disk Details

7. Setup for service personnel

INITIAL DATA1 The data related to the input section
INITIAL DATA2 The data related to the printer and exposure devices
INITIAL DATA3 The data related to the processor
INITIAL DATA4 The data related to the scanner and film carriers

Bringing up the display

Extension → Maintenance → Reading and Writing Data → Service Data → Reading Data (Floppy Disk -> CPU) → All Data

10. Install the Capacity Booster Software.

• For details about how to install the Capacity Booster Software, refer to the PC Service Manual.
NOTE
• If the capacity booster is not set as an option, this is not required.

11. Register and check the system specifications.

Register all the items.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Maintenance → Machine Specification
• For details about how to register and check, refer to ☞ 35800.

70010 2/3
 70010
Setup for service personnel

IMPORTANT
• If the message After restarted, execute following adjustment is displayed after changing the machine
type, carry out following settings.
• Drive Motor Revolution Count Auto Adjustment: ☞ 33502
• Pump Output Amount Measurement: ☞ 33003
• Thermosensor Calibration: ☞ 33500

12. Installing the optional software

NOTE
• Unnecessary for DLS specification
Install the optional software such as QSS template frame, QSS template calendar and QSS template album.
For details of the Installation procedure of optional software, refer to Installing the application software in the Image
Editing Operator's Manual.
NOTE
• When no optional software is used, this is not required.

13. Check the registration of the options.

Confirm that the options that the system is equipped with are registered.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Function and Option Registration
NOTE
• Unnecessary for DLS specification

14. Check the processor settings for [N], [SM], [J] and [F] specifications.

• [For N], [SM] and [J] specifications, refer to ☞ 70050.

• For the [F] specification, refer to ☞ 70051.

7. Setup for service personnel

15. Adjustment check of the scanner section
☞ 70060
16. Paper Sensor Adjustment
Perform Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment in Functions of Paper Sensor Adjustment to adjust each sensor.
☞ 36000
Bringing up the display
Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Paper Sensor Adjustment

17. Paper Guide Width Correction

Adjust the paper guide width of paper supply unit A2 so that the width is the same as the loading paper width.
IMPORTANT
• This operation is necessary when an optional Quad paper magazine unit has been installed.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Paper Guide Width Correction
• For adjustment procedure, see ☞ 36005.
This completes operations before the processing solution temperature is adjusted. After the temperature adjustment of the processing
solution has been completed, proceed to the next ☞ 70020 Works to do after the temperature adjustment completes.

70010 3/3
 70020
Setup for service personnel

Setup during installation (Works after completing the temperature

adjustment)

z Procedures

1. Processing the control strip

Process the control strip and check the condition of the processing solution.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Maintenance → Process Control Strip
• For details about how to process, refer to Control strip processing in the Maintenance Manual.

2. Confirming the zigzagging correction data sheet noted before shipment (only when the quad magazine
unit or triple magazine unit is installed)

Confirm that the values noted on data sheet and registered in the product are the same.
If not, register the values shown on data sheet to the product.
The zigzagging correction data sheet is attached inside the door of quad magazine unit/triple magazine unit.
Remove the data sheet when installing.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment
• Paper Guide Width Correction (only if the quad magazine unit is installed)
• Paper Advance Length Correction
• Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction
• Paper Guide Width Adjustment (for each Paper Width) (only if the quad magazine unit is installed)
• Exposure Center Correction

3. Paper Guide Width Correction (for each Paper Width)

It is necessary to set all the paper width and the paper surface used in the paper magazine A2.

7. Setup for service personnel

IMPORTANT
• This operation is necessary when an optional Quad paper magazine unit has been installed.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Paper Guide Width Correction (for
each Paper Width)
• For details of adjustment, refer to Adjusting the paper guide width [Paper Guide Width Adjustment (for each
Paper Width)], in the Quad Paper Magazine Unit Operator's Manual.

4. Paper supply unit A2 zigzagging adjustment

Confirm that magazine mount A2 and paper supply unit A2 are mutually adjusted.
IMPORTANT
• This operation is necessary when an optional Quad paper magazine unit has been installed.
• For adjustment procedure, see ☞ 26820.

5. Checking the exposure advance adjustment

Go to Exposure Advance Adjustment, Functions, Test Print Confirmation 1 (Paper Magazine A/A2/B/C) and confirm
following two points. If the test prints deviate from the standard, adjust them.
IMPORTANT
• When the exposure advance adjustment is carried out by magazine A, A2, B or C, it is complete.

70020 1/8
 70020
Setup for service personnel

Bringing up the display

Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Exposure Advance Adjustment

For measuring the length between Paper

Paper advance direction
Front End and 0 mm line

A
For measuring the length between
0 mm (0 inch) line and 254 mm
line
Exposure Image Correction: 254 mm
Left Right

For checking zigzagging of the

exposure advance unit

Rear end

G070022

(1) Check the Paper Front End to 0 mm (0 inch)-line Test Paper Measurement Value.
Check that the Exposure Start Timing Correction value is 25.4 mm.
• For adjustment procedure, see ☞ 36080.

7. Setup for service personnel

(2) Check the 0 mm (0 inch)-line to 254 mm-line Test Paper Measurement Value.
Check that the Exposure Image Correction value is 254 mm.
• For adjustment procedure, see ☞ 36080.
(3) Check the zigzag of exposure advance unit.
Check the image length of both sides. If the difference between left and right is 0.2 mm or more, carry out zigzagging
adjustment for the exposure advance unit.
• For adjustment procedure, see ☞ 36080.

6. Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction

SelectArm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction, F: Functions, Test Print 1/2 (Paper Magazines A/A2/B/C) and make test
prints and then confirm whether the zigzagging amounts (A-C) of the two test prints are allowable range shown in the
following table by both of the two test prints.

Test Print Tolerance range

Test print 1 (457.0 mm) A − C is within ±0.5 mm
Test print 2 (914.0 mm) A − C is within ±1.0 mm

IMPORTANT
• Perform arm unit 1 zigzagging correction for each paper magazine A, A2, B, and C.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Arm Unit Zigzagging Correction
• For adjustment procedure, see ☞ 36060.

70020 2/8
 70020
Setup for service personnel

Line A

A
B
C

Line C

G068462

7. Checking the Exposure Center Correction, Exposure Position Adjustment, Exposure Magnification
Fine Adjustment and Exposure Magnification Correction

Go to Exposure Position Adjustment, F: Functions, Test Print Confirmation (Paper Magazines A/A2/B/C) using the
paper with the maximum width that is in use and confirm following four points. If the test prints deviate from the standard,

7. Setup for service personnel

adjust them.
NOTE
• The following example is 305 mm test printing.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Exposure Position Adjustment

70020 3/8
 70020
Setup for service personnel

Center line

For checking the exposure center

correction (for each paper magazine)

For checking main scanning image

(BLOCK−B)

For checking sub scanning

images (BLOCK−D1)
(BLOCK−D2)

For checking the exposure

magnification correction
Exposure magnification fine adjustment checking
chart

7. Setup for service personnel

G070021

(1) Confirming the Exposure Magnification Correction

Check that the image is the correct size in relation to the paper width direction.
IMPORTANT
• Measure the distance between the 160 lines.
• When the exposure magnification correction is carried out for any one of magazine A, A2, B or C, it is
complete.
• For adjustment procedure, see ☞ 36020.
(2) Confirming the Exposure Position Adjustment
Check that each line makes a straight line in the rows (0a-0h) indicated by the triangle marks of BLOCK-B and the
lines (0) indicated by the triangle marks of BLOCK-D1 and BLOCK-D2 on the test print.
IMPORTANT
• When the exposure position adjustment is carried out by magazine A, A2, B or C, it is complete.
• For adjustment procedure, see ☞ 36030.
(3) Confirming the Exposure Magnification Fine Adjustment
Check the exposure magnification fine adjustment checking chart on the 160 line to see if the lines of cyan, magenta
and yellow are straight.
IMPORTANT
• When the exposure magnification correction is carried out by paper magazine A, A2, B or C, it is
complete.
• For adjustment procedure, see ☞ 36040.

70020 4/8
 70020
Setup for service personnel

(4) Exposure Center Correction (for each Paper Magazine)

Check that the length A between left end and center of the test print is half of the paper width.
IMPORTANT
• Carry out exposure center correction for each paper magazine A, A2, B and C.
• For adjustment procedure, see ☞ 36070.

8. Registering paper specification

Register the paper type used in the Initial Setup.
Confirm that the setup switch is turned on.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Setup → Laser Setup → Paper Specification Registration/Setup
• For the operation procedures, refer to ☞ 32510.

9. Initial Setup
Follow the instructions on the Initial Setup display. When two or three paper types are to be used, carry out Paper
Specification Registration/Setup on the Paper Specification Registration/Setup display for each paper.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Setup → Initial Setup

10. Magazine Registration/Setup

Use a paper type for which the initial setup was carried out, and register the magazine for each paper width.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Setup → Laser Setup → Magazine Registration/Setup
• For the operation procedures, refer to Operator's Manual - Additional Operations - Registering the paper magazine
and surface to be used.

11. Print Channel Setting [Prints from the film]

7. Setup for service personnel

NOTE
• Unnecessary for DLS specification
Select the print channel to print from each film.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Setup → Print Channel

12. Print Channel Setting [Each media, Flatbed Scanner]

NOTE
• Unnecessary for DLS specification

(1) Set the print channel to print from Each media or Flatbed Scanner.
IMPORTANT
• If color correction is necessary when printing from each media or the flatbed scanner, correct the
balance value (C, H, P) of each print channel. So, it is necessary to set each print channel for each
media and each flatbed scanner.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Setup → Print Channel

70020 5/8
 70020
Setup for service personnel

13. Checking the print color and density [Master Data]

NOTE
• Unnecessary for DLS specification

(1) Make each print of [N (normal), U (under) and O (over)] from the 135F negative•positive which is frequently
used at the shop.
(2) If color or density correction is necessary, correct them in the following mode.
Film type Input mode
135 negative Select Scanner Slope Correction (Negative)→Master Data→Scanner Slope, then correct N
(normal), U (under), and O (over).
135 positive Select Scanner Slope Correction (Positive)→Master Data→Scanner Slope, then correct N
(normal), U (under), and O (over).

• For details, refer to Correcting the Master Data (Correcting to all the films) in the Operator's Manual -
Additional Operations & Setup Manual -.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Setup → Scanner Setup → Scanner Slope Correction (Negative)/Scanner Slope Correction (Positive)

14. Checking the print color and density [Reference Slope, Scanner Slope]
NOTE
• Unnecessary for DLS specification

(1) Make each print of [N (normal), U (under) and O (over)] from the 240 negative/positive, 120 negative/positive,
and 110 negative/positive, which are frequently used at the shop.
(2) If color or density correction is necessary, correct them in the following mode.
Film type Input mode
240 negative Select Scanner Slope Correction (Negative)→240→Reference Slope, then correct N
(normal), U (under), and O (over).

7. Setup for service personnel

240 positive Select Scanner Slope Correction (Positive)→240→Scanner Slope, then correct N (normal),
U (under), and O (over).
110 negative Select Scanner Slope Correction (Negative), 110, Scanner Slope, and then correct N
(normal), U (under), and O (over).
110 positive Select Scanner Slope Correction (Positive)→110→Scanner Slope, and then correct N
(normal), U (under), and O (over).
120 negative (6×4.5, 6×6, 6×7, Select Scanner Slope Correction (Negative)→Each negative size→Scanner Slope, then
6×8, 6×9) correct N (normal), U (under), and O (over).
120 positive (6×4.5, 6×6, 6×7, Select Scanner Slope Correction (Positive)→Each negative size→Scanner Slope, then
6×8, 6×9) correct N (normal), U (under), and O (over).

• For details, refer to Carry out the reference slope correction (each film) in the Operator's Manual -
Additional Operations & Setup Manual -.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Setup → Scanner Setup → Scanner Slope Correction (Negative)/Scanner Slope Correction (Positive)

15. Checking the print color and density [DX Slope]

NOTE
• Unnecessary for DLS specification

70020 6/8
 70020
Setup for service personnel

(1) If color and density corrections are necessary for each negative size (135F, 135H, 135P, 135HD, 240) by each
manufacture•film sensitivity, correct them in the following mode.
Negative Input mode
135F negative Select Scanner Slope Correction (Negative), 135F, DX Slope, then correct N (normal), U
(under), and O (over).
135H negative Select Scanner Slope Correction (Negative), 135H, DX Slope, then correct N (normal), U
(under), and O (over).
135P negative Select Scanner Slope Correction (Negative), 135P, DX Slope, then correct N (normal), U
(under), and O (over).
135HD negative Select Scanner Slope Correction (Positive), 135HD, DX Slope, then correct N (normal), U
(under), and O (over).
240 negative Select Scanner Slope Correction (Negative)→240→DX Slope, then correct N (normal), U
(under), and O (over).

• For the operation procedures, refer to Carrying out the DX Slope Correction (each negative) in the Operator's
Manual - Additional Operations & Setup Manual -.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Setup → Scanner Setup → Scanner Slope Correction (Negative)/Scanner Slope Correction (Positive)

16. Checking blurred characters

NOTE
• Unnecessary for DLS specification
Go to Paper Specification Registration/Setup, Functions, Black Balance Adjustment to make a test print. If the colors
around the letters on the print are too blurred, adjust them.
• For adjustment procedure, see ☞ 32510.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Setup → Laser Setup → Paper Specification Registration/Setup

17. Checking banding

7. Setup for service personnel

Go to Paper Pressure Operation Correction, Functions, Test Print Confirmation (magazines A/A2/B/C) to make test
prints. Check banding for each paper type.
• For adjustment procedure, see ☞ 36090.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Paper Pressure Operation
Correction

18. Monitor setup

Specifications other than DLS

Adjust the brightness for the display monitor.
Carry out monitor setup and create a monitor profile.
• For adjustment procedure, see ☞ 32530.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Setup → Monitor Setup
DLS specification
Adjust the monitor.
• For details about Monitor adjustment, refer to the PC Service Manual.

70020 7/8
 70020
Setup for service personnel

19. DSA setting [Negative•Positive (135, 240, 120, and 110)]

NOTE
• Unnecessary for DLS specification

(1) For the film of 135, 240, 120 and 110, if the DSA correction is needed, set each DSA via Master Data.
NOTE
• DSA correction can be set for each print channel.
• For details, refer to Correcting the Automatic Contrast, the Automatic Sharpness and the Chroma in the
Operator's Manual - Additional Operations & Setup Manual -.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Setup → Master Data → DSA

20. DSA setting [Each media, flatbed scanner and Net Order]
NOTE
• Unnecessary for DLS specification

(1) If DSA correction is necessary when printing from each media, the flatbed scanner or Net Order, set each DSA
via Master Data.
NOTE
• DSA correction can be set for each print channel.
• For details, refer to Correcting the Automatic Contrast, the Automatic Sharpness and the Chroma in the
Operator's Manual - Additional Operations & Setup Manual -.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Setup → Master Data → DSA

21. Formatting a floppy disk for backup data

Format a prepared floppy disk for backup data on the Format Floppy Disk display.

7. Setup for service personnel

This floppy disk is used to save the internal system data after the setup has been completed during installation.
IMPORTANT
• A floppy disk is necessary for the backup data of user level.
• Four floppy disks are necessary for the backup data of service personnel level.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Maintenance → Reading and Writing Data → All Data → Format Floppy Disk

22. Saving backup data

Save backup data to the floppy disk formatted in Step 21.
This completes the operations.

70020 8/8
 70021
Setup for service personnel

Setup during installation [Stand Alone Scanner]

z Procedures

1. In the case of the stand-alone scanner, No. 6901: ARCNET communication error. occurs when the
power supply is turned ON.

2. When registering or updating the light source at the installation, the messages No. 6331: Line
scanning communication error. or No. 6900: Main control system error. may appear.

If one of the errors (1, 2) described above occurs, cancel the error and use the CD to upgrade the system.
Procedure: Press and hold Ctrl+Alt+Delete. Select the following in the order shown here: Windows Task Manager,
Applications, Order Display, QSS-SEQ, End Task to quit the QSS software.

3. Upgrading system using the CD

Insert the QSS software CD into the CD drive and start [Link] in the CD-ROM.
IMPORTANT
• If upgrading the system is not carried out, the versions of desk section/printer section/processor section may
not match, and the machine may not operate correctly.
• For details about Software Upgrade, refer to To upgrade the QSS software of Installation procedure of the QSS
software in the PC Service Manual.
NOTE
• If the system program is updated in installation, you do not have to backup the system data as explained in To upgrade
the QSS software.

4. Load the initial data.

Be sure to use the initial floppy disk provided with the machine and read the data in Reading Data (Floppy Disk -> CPU).
• For details about how to read the initial data, refer to ☞ 35410.

7. Setup for service personnel

NOTE
• Read All Data in the service personnel level.
• There are two initial floppy disks.
Floppy disk Details
INITIAL DATA1 The data related to the input section
INITIAL DATA4 The data related to the scanner and film carriers

Bringing up the display

Extension → Maintenance → Reading and Writing Data → Service Data → Reading Data (Floppy Disk -> CPU) → All Data

5. Install the Capacity Booster A Software.

• For details about how to install the Capacity A Booster Software, refer to the PC Service Manual.
NOTE
• If the capacity booster is not set as an option, this is not required.

6. Register and check the system specifications.

Register all the items.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Maintenance → Machine Specification
• For details about how to register and check, refer to ☞ 35800.

70021 1/4
 70021
Setup for service personnel

7. Prepare of the tools for the setup

Prepare the following tools before setup for installation.
• Service personnel floppy disk Type B
• Scanner adjustment chart
• For 135 AFC
• For 240 AFC
• For 120 AFC
• For 110 AFC
• For MMC
• For AMC
• Floppy disk for data backup
NOTE
• The service personnel floppy disk Type B and the adjustment chart are the service personnel tools. See Service
personnel tool list.
☞ 80310

8. Cleaning of the optical parts

Clean the optical parts below.
„ Auto film carrier
Clean each brush, peripheral cooling fan, each sensor, each roller, and film path surface.
„ Light source unit (input section)
Clean the dust prevention glass.
• For the cleaning procedures, see Maintenance Manual.

9. Entering the service personnel password

Insert the service personnel floppy disk into the floppy disk drive and enter the service personnel password on the PTBurn
Interface : display.

7. Setup for service personnel

(1) Press F to select PTBurn Interface :.
(2) Insert the service personnel floppy disk into the floppy disk drive on the PTBurn Interface : display.
(3) Press the F key and -1 key.
(4) Enter the password (2260).
For the service personnel mode, Service Mode is displayed on each display.

10. Installing the optional software

• Install the optional software such as CD-R Engine.
NOTE
• When no optional software is used, this is not required.

11. Check the registration of the options.

Confirm that the options that the system is equipped with are registered.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Function and Option Registration

12. Adjust the sensor of the film carrier.

Carry out the adjustment of the film carrier sensor.

70021 2/4
 70021
Setup for service personnel

The adjustment items vary depending on which film carrier is attached.

135/240 AFC 120 AFC 110 AFC 135 AFC

Sensor Sensitivity Sensor Sensitivity Sensor Sensitivity Sensor Sensitivity
Adjustment Adjustment Adjustment Adjustment
DX Sensor Standard DX Sensor Standard
Adjustment Adjustment

Bringing up the display

Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Film Carrier Unit Adjustment

13. Check the light axis and swing and tilt of the scanner unit.
Check that Light Axis Adjustment and Swing and Tilt Adjustment are in right positions.
IMPORTANT
• When you do not have the 135/240 AFC, use the 120 AFC and 110 AFC for checking.

(1) Check Light Axis Adjustment.

Set the scanner adjustment chart to the 135/240 AFC (135 lane) and check the display of Number of Pixels
Exceeding the Threshold.
When the difference of the displayed values is the following values or less, it is in position. If the difference of the
displayed values is more than the values in the table, Light Axis Adjustment is required.
Priority*1 Attached film carrier Difference of G values when adjusting the
light axis
1 135/240 AFC (135 lane)*2 ±37 pixels
2 120 AFC ±28 pixels
3 110 AFC ±28 pixels

*1. Check the film carriers are set when carrying out Light Axis Adjustment of the scanner unit, according to the above priority.
*2. For the 135/240 AFC, be sure to use the 135 lane to check Light Axis Adjustment.

(2) Check Swing and Tilt Adjustment.

Set the scanner adjustment chart to the 135/240 AFC (135 lane) and carry out Swing and Tilt Adjustment Check.
When the displayed values are the following values or less, it is in position. If the displayed values are more than the

7. Setup for service personnel

values in the table, Swing and Tilt Adjustment is required.
IMPORTANT
• When the value of the 135/240 AFC (135 lane) is less than the following value for that, checking the
Swing and Tilt Adjustment of the 120 AFC and 110 AFC is not required.

Priority*1 Attached film carrier Value when checking the swing and tilt
adjustment
1 135/240 AFC (135 lane)*2 27/54 step
2 120 AFC 27/54 step
3 110 AFC 24/54 step

*1. Check the film carriers are set when carrying out Swing and Tilt Adjustment of the scanner unit, according to the priority
above.
*2. For the 135/240 AFC, be sure to use the 135 lane to check Swing and Tilt Adjustment.

Bringing up the display

Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Scanner Unit Adjustment → Swing and Tilt/Light Axis Adjustment
• For adjustment, refer to the Scanner Service Manual.

14. Light Source Registration

Register the light source.
Proceed the work according to the instructions on the Light Source Registration display.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Scanner Unit Adjustment → Light Source Registration

70021 3/4
 70021
Setup for service personnel

• For adjustment, refer to the Scanner Service Manual.

15. Scanner focus adjustment

Carry out the focus adjustment of all the film carriers and mount carriers to be used.
Carry out Focus Auto Adjustment for each film carrier and mount carrier using the prepared scanner adjustment chart.
IMPORTANT
• Carry out the focus adjustment of all the film carriers and mount carriers that the user uses.
• For the film carrier and mount carrier, carry out the focus adjustment for the magnification rate.
• For adjustment, refer to the Scanner Service Manual.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Scanner Unit Adjustment → Focus Adjustment

16. Print Channel Setting Scanning size from film

Set the scanning size to scan from each film.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Setup → Print Channel

17. Formatting a floppy disk for backup data

Format a prepared floppy disk for backup data on the Format Floppy Disk display.
This floppy disk is used to save the internal system data after the setup has been completed during installation.
IMPORTANT
• A floppy disk is necessary for the backup data of user level.
• Two floppy disks are necessary for the backup data of service personnel level.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Maintenance → Reading and Writing Data → All Data → Format Floppy Disk

18. Saving backup data

7. Setup for service personnel

Save backup data to the floppy disk formatted in Step 17.
This completes the operations.

70021 4/4
 70022
Setup for service personnel

Setup during installation [Stand Alone Printer]

z Procedures

1. In the case of the stand-alone scanner, No. 6640: System error. (D-ICE Control PCB) and No. 6901:
ARCNET communication error. occur when the power supply is turned ON.

When the error mentioned above occurs, press Ctrl+Alt+Delete and select the Order display and QSS-SEQ in the
Applications from Windows Task Manager, then click End Task to quit the QSS software.

2. If you need to downgrade the version of the profile data due to the difference between the version of
factory-installed profile data in the machine and that of the system program, see ☞ 70025.

IMPORTANT
• If the version of factory-installed profile data for the machine and system program version are the same, there
is no need to downgrade the version of profile data.

3. Upgrading system using the CD

Insert the QSS software CD into the CD drive and start [Link] in the CD-ROM.
IMPORTANT
• If upgrading the system is not carried out, the versions of desk section/printer section/processor section may
not match, and the machine may not operate correctly.
• For details about Software Upgrade, see To upgrade the QSS software of Installation procedure of the QSS software
in the PC Service Manual.
NOTE
• If the system program is updated in installation, you do not have to backup the system data as explained in To upgrade
the QSS software.

4. Load the initial data.

7. Setup for service personnel

Be sure to use the initial floppy disk provided with the machine and read the data in Reading Data (Floppy Disk -> CPU).
• For details about how to read the initial data, see ☞ 35400.
NOTE
• Read All Data in the service personnel level.
• There are three initial floppy disks.
Floppy disk Details
INITIAL DATA1 The data related to the input section
INITIAL DATA2 The data related to the printer and exposure devices
INITIAL DATA3 The data related to the processor

Bringing up the display

Extension → Maintenance → Reading and Writing Data → Service Data → Reading Data (Floppy Disk -> CPU) → All Data

5. Install the Capacity Booster Software.

• For details about how to install the Capacity Booster Software, see the PC Service Manual.
NOTE
• If the capacity booster is not set as an option, this is not required.

6. Register and check the system specifications.

Register all the items.

70022 1/8
 70022
Setup for service personnel

Bringing up the display

Extension → Maintenance → Machine Specification
• For details about how to register and check, see ☞ 35800.

IMPORTANT
• If the message After restarted, execute following adjustment is displayed after changing the machine
type, carry out following settings.
• Drive Motor Revolution Count Auto Adjustment: ☞ 33502
• Pump Output Amount Measurement: ☞ 33003
• Thermosensor Calibration: ☞ 33500

7. Prepare of the tools for the setup

Prepare the following tools before setup for installation.
• Service personnel floppy disk Type B
• Floppy disk for data backup
NOTE
• The service personnel floppy disk Type B and the adjustment chart are the service personnel tools. See Service
personnel tool list.
☞ 80310

8. Setting the magazine code of paper magazine

Set the paper magazine code to the paper width and paper surface to be used.

9. Loading paper into the paper magazine

Load the paper to be used for the initial setup into the paper magazine.

10. Cleaning of the optical parts

Clean the optical parts below.
„ Cleaning the laser unit

7. Setup for service personnel

Cleaning the laser dust-proof glass and pressure guide
• For the cleaning procedures, see Maintenance Manual.

11. Entering the service personnel password

Insert the service personnel floppy disk into the floppy disk drive and enter the service personnel password on the PTBurn
Interface : display.

(1) Press F to select PTBurn Interface :.

(2) Insert the service personnel floppy disk into the floppy disk drive on the PTBurn Interface : display.
(3) Press the F key and -1 key.
(4) Enter the password (2260).
For the service personnel mode, Service Mode is displayed on each display.

12. Installing the optional software

• Install the optional software such as QSS template frame, QSS template calendar and QSS template album.
• For details about the Installation procedure of optional software, see Installing the application software in the
Image Editing Operator's Manual.
NOTE
• When no optional software is used, this is not required.

70022 2/8
 70022
Setup for service personnel

13. Check the registration of the options.

Confirm that the options that the system is equipped with are registered.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Function and Option Registration

14. Check the processor settings for [N], [SM], [J] and [F] specifications.

• [For N], [SM] and [J] specifications, see ☞ 70050.

• For the [F] specification, see ☞ 70051.

15. Paper Sensor Adjustment

Perform Paper Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment in Functions of Paper Sensor Adjustment to adjust each sensor.
☞ 36000
Bringing up the display
Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Paper Sensor Adjustment

16. Paper Guide Width Correction

Adjust the paper guide width of paper supply unit A2 so that the width is the same as the loading paper width.
IMPORTANT
• This operation is necessary when an optional Quad paper magazine unit has been installed.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Paper Guide Width Correction
• For adjustment procedure, see ☞ 36005.

17. Processing the control strip

Process the control strip and check the condition of the processing solution.

7. Setup for service personnel

Bringing up the display
Extension → Maintenance → Process Control Strip
• For details about how to process, see Control strip processing in the Maintenance Manual.

18. Paper Guide Width Correction (for each Paper Width)

It is necessary to set all the paper width and the paper surface used in the paper magazine A2.
IMPORTANT
• This operation is necessary when an optional Quad paper magazine unit has been installed.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Paper Guide Width Correction (for
each Paper Width)
• For details of adjusting procedures, see Adjusting the paper guide width [Paper Guide Width Adjustment (for each
Paper Width)], in the Quad Paper Magazine Unit Operator's Manual.

19. Checking the exposure advance adjustment

Go to Exposure Advance Adjustment → Functions → Test Print Confirmation 1 (Paper Magazine A/A2/B/C) and
confirm following two points. If the test prints deviate from the standard, adjust them.
IMPORTANT
• When the exposure advance adjustment is carried out by magazine A, A2, B or C, it is complete.

70022 3/8
 70022
Setup for service personnel

Bringing up the display

Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Exposure Advance Adjustment

For measuring the length between Paper

Paper advance direction
Front End and 0 mm line

A
For measuring the length between
0 mm (0 inch) line and 254 mm
line
Exposure Image Correction: 254 mm
Left Right

For checking zigzagging of the

exposure advance unit

Rear end

G070022

(1) Check the Paper Front End to 0 mm (0 inch)-line Test Paper Measurement Value.
Check that the Exposure Start Timing Correction value is 25.4 mm.
• For adjustment procedure, see ☞ 36080.

7. Setup for service personnel

(2) Check the 0 mm (0 inch)-line to 254 mm-line Test Paper Measurement Value.
Check that the Exposure Image Correction value is 254 mm.
• For adjustment procedure, see ☞ 36080.
(3) Check the zigzag of exposure advance unit.
Check the image length of both sides. If the difference between left and right is 0.2 mm or more, carry out zigzagging
adjustment for the exposure advance unit.
• For adjustment procedure, see ☞ 36080.

20. Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction

Go to Arm Unit 1 Zigzagging Correction, Functions, Test Print 1/2 (Paper Magazines A/A2/B/C) and make test prints
and then confirm whether the zigzagging amount (A-C) is allowable range in the following table by both of the two test
prints.

Test Print Tolerance range

Test print 1 (457.0 mm) A − C is within ±0.5 mm
Test print 2 (914.0 mm) A − C is within ±1.0 mm

IMPORTANT
• Perform arm unit 1 zigzagging correction for each paper magazine A, A2, B, and C.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Arm Unit Zigzagging Correction
• For adjustment procedure, see ☞ 36060.

70022 4/8
 70022
Setup for service personnel

Line A

A
B
C

Line C

G068462

21. Checking the Exposure Center Correction, Exposure Position Adjustment, Exposure Magnification
Fine Adjustment and Exposure Magnification Correction

Go to Exposure Position Adjustment, F: Functions, Test Print Confirmation (Paper Magazines A/A2/B/C) using the
paper with the maximum width that is in use and confirm following four points. If the test prints deviate from the standard,

7. Setup for service personnel

adjust them.
NOTE
• The following example is 305 mm test printing.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Exposure Position Adjustment

70022 5/8
 70022
Setup for service personnel

Center line

For checking the exposure center

correction (for each paper magazine)

For checking main scanning image

(BLOCK−B)

For checking sub scanning

images (BLOCK−D1)
(BLOCK−D2)

For checking the exposure

magnification correction
Exposure magnification fine adjustment checking
chart

7. Setup for service personnel

G070021

(1) Confirming the Exposure Magnification Correction

Check that the image is the correct size in relation to the paper width direction.
IMPORTANT
• Measure the distance between the 160 lines.
• When the exposure magnification correction is carried out for any one of magazine A, A2, B or C, it is
complete.
• For adjustment procedure, see ☞ 36020.
(2) Confirming the Exposure Position Adjustment
Check that each line makes a straight line in the rows (0a-0h) indicated by the triangle marks of BLOCK-B and the
lines (0) indicated by the triangle marks of BLOCK-D1 and BLOCK-D2 on the test print.
IMPORTANT
• When the exposure position adjustment is carried out by magazine A, A2, B or C, it is complete.
• For adjustment procedure, see ☞ 36030.
(3) Confirming the Exposure Magnification Fine Adjustment
Check the exposure magnification fine adjustment checking chart on the 160 line to see if the lines of cyan, magenta
and yellow are straight.
IMPORTANT
• When the exposure magnification correction is carried out by paper magazine A, A2, B or C, it is
complete.
• For adjustment procedure, see ☞ 36040.

70022 6/8
 70022
Setup for service personnel

(4) Exposure Center Correction (for each Paper Magazine)

Check that the length A between left end and center of the test print is half of the paper width.
IMPORTANT
• Carry out exposure center correction for each paper magazine A, A2, B and C.
• For adjustment procedure, see ☞ 36070.

22. Registering paper specification

Register the paper type used in the Initial Setup.
Confirm that the setup switch is turned on.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Setup → Laser Setup → Paper Specification Registration/Setup
• For the operation procedures, see ☞ 32510.

23. Initial Setup

Follow the instructions on the Initial Setup display. When two or three paper types are to be used, carry out Paper
Specification Registration/Setup on the Paper Specification Registration/Setup display for each paper.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Setup → Initial Setup

24. Magazine Registration/Setup

Use a paper type for which the initial setup was carried out, and register the magazine for each paper width.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Setup → Laser Setup → Magazine Registration/Setup
• For the operation procedures, see Operator's Manual - Additional Operations - Registering the paper magazine and
surface to be used.

25. Print Channel Setting [Each media, Flatbed Scanner]

7. Setup for service personnel

(1) Set the print channel to print from Each media or Flatbed Scanner.
IMPORTANT
• If color correction is necessary when printing from each media or the flatbed scanner, correct the
balance value (C, H, P) of each print channel. So, it is necessary to set each print channel for each
media and each flatbed scanner.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Setup → Print Channel

26. Checking blurred characters

Go to Paper Specification Registration/Setup, Functions, Black Balance Adjustment to make a test print. If the colors
around the letters on the print are too blurred, adjust them.
• For adjustment procedure, see ☞ 32510.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Setup → Laser Setup → Paper Specification Registration/Setup

27. Checking banding

Go to Paper Pressure Operation Correction, Functions, Test Print Confirmation (magazines A/A2/B/C) to make test
prints. Check banding for each paper type.
• For adjustment procedure, see ☞ 36090.

70022 7/8
 70022
Setup for service personnel

Bringing up the display

Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Printer Mechanical Adjustment → Paper Pressure Operation
Correction

28. Monitor setup

Adjust the brightness for the display monitor.
Carry out monitor setup and create a monitor profile.
• For adjustment procedure, see ☞ 32530.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Setup → Monitor Setup

29. DSA setting [Each media, flatbed scanner and Net Order]

(1) If DSA correction is necessary when printing from each media, the flatbed scanner, or Net Order, set each DSA
via Master Data.
NOTE
• DSA correction can be set for each print channel.
• For details, see Correcting the Automatic Contrast, the Automatic Sharpness and the Chroma in the Operator's
Manual - Additional Operations & Setup Manual -.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Setup → Master Data → DSA

30. Formatting a floppy disk for backup data

Format a prepared floppy disk for backup data on the Format Floppy Disk display.
This floppy disk is used to save the internal system data after the setup has been completed during installation.
IMPORTANT
• A floppy disk is necessary for the backup data of user level.
• Four floppy disks are necessary for the backup data of service personnel level.

7. Setup for service personnel

Bringing up the display
Extension → Maintenance → Reading and Writing Data → All Data → Format Floppy Disk

31. Saving backup data

Save backup data to the floppy disk formatted in Step 30.
This completes the operations.

70022 8/8
 70025
Setup for service personnel

Procedure for downgrading the profile data

z Procedures

IMPORTANT
• You need to downgrade the version of the profile data when the version of the factory-installed profile data in the
machine and the system program version are different.
• In order to downgrade the version of the profile data, delete the Pf folder. In steps following this, upgrade the system
version and install the profile data using the CD. This recreates the profile data.

1. Delete the profile data.

(1) Access the Start menu and select Accessories via Programs.
(2) Select Windows Explorer.
(3) Open My Computer and delete Pf folder located in C:\NoritsuKoki\QSS−32_33\Data in the Local Disc:C.

2. Upgrading system using the CD

Insert the QSS software CD into the CD drive and start [Link] in the CD-ROM.
IMPORTANT
• If upgrading the system is not carried out, the versions of desk section/printer section/processor section may
not match, and the machine may not operate correctly.
• For details about Software Upgrade, refer to To upgrade the QSS software of Installation procedure of the QSS
software in the PC Service Manual.
NOTE
• If the system program is updated in installation, you do not have to backup the system data as explained in To upgrade
the QSS software.

3. Install profile data of which the version matches the system program version.

7. Setup for service personnel

Insert the profile data CD into the CD drive and start [Link] in the CD-ROM.
IMPORTANT
• If you do not install profile data, normal color print may not be available.
• For details about how to install, refer to Procedure for installing the profile data in the PC Service Manual.

70025 1/1
 70040
Setup for service personnel

Other works after installation (Language setting except English and

Japanese)

English messages are displayed on the screen of the system.

It is necessary to configure the Regional Options and Dictionary settings, and install the translated message data so that the messages in
other languages than English are displayed and text in the languages can be entered.
Change the settings according to the following procedure.
IMPORTANT
• Prepare the following data in advance.
• Translated message file (Save the data to a floppy disk.)
• Translated HELP files (Save the data to a CD-R or a CD-R/W.)

z To access the Windows display

Access the Windows display when setting each item such as the dictionary function relating to the Windows system.
Switch the display according to the following procedure.
1. Access the Close Down Checks display.
Bringing up the display
Click F on Order Display. → PTBurn Interface : → Extension → Close Down Checks
Close Down Checks display

S0009-00-UM02

2. Click F: Functions.
The F: Functions display is shown.

7. Setup for service personnel

F: Functions display

S0009-00-UM62

3. Click Quit The Application.

The confirmation window to end the application appears.
4. Click YES: Execute.
The confirmation window appears again.
5. Click YES: Execute.
The Windows display appears.

z To install message file

Install the translated message file to the system. Carry out the operation according to the following procedure.
1. Insert the floppy disk in which the message data is saved into the floppy disk drive.
2. Double-click [Link] in the floppy disk.
Installation starts.

70040 1/9
 70040
Setup for service personnel

3. Click Next.
Example: InstallShield Wizard

G050657

4. Click Finish.
Example: InstallShield Wizard

7. Setup for service personnel

G050660
This completes installing message file.
Next, install the HELP file.

z To install the HELP file

Build the translated local language's Help file in the system in advance. Carry out the operation according to the following procedure.

1. Insert the CD-ROM in which the HELP file is saved into the CD-ROM drive.
2. Double-click the [Link] file in the CD-R or the CD-R/W.
Installation starts.

70040 2/9
 70040
Setup for service personnel

3. Click Next.
Example: InstallShield Wizard

G056142

4. Click Finish.
Example: InstallShield Wizard

7. Setup for service personnel

G056143
Installation of the HELP file is complete.
Next, configure the language settings.

z Setting the language

1. Select Start → Settings → Control Panel.

Example: Windows display

G050628

70040 3/9
 70040
Setup for service personnel

2. Double-click Regional Options.

Select the items in the following order.
Example: Control Panel display

G050683
The Regional Options display appears.
3. Click the General tab (index) and set the region (country) and language.
(1) Select the appropriate language and check the box in Language settings for the system.
Example: Regional Options display

7. Setup for service personnel

G050662

70040 4/9
 70040
Setup for service personnel

(2) Click and click the appropriate locale (location).

Example: Regional Options display

G050612

4. Click the Input Locales tab (index) and set the dictionary function.
(1) Click Add.
Example: Regional Options display

G050663
7. Setup for service personnel
(2) Select the Input locale.
Example: Add Input Locale display

G050666

70040 5/9
 70040
Setup for service personnel

(3) Select the Keyboard layout.

Example: Add Input Locale display

G050666

(4) Click OK.

The display returns to the Regional Options display.
(5) Select the language as default use.
Example: Regional Options display

G050663

(6) Click Set as Default.

The language is registered as the default.
Example: Regional Options display

7. Setup for service personnel

G050663

5. Click Apply.
Example: Regional Options display

G050663

70040 6/9
 70040
Setup for service personnel

6. Click OK.
Example: Regional Options display

G050663

7. Insert the Windows 2000 Professional CD-R or CD-R/W into the CD-ROM drive and click OK.
Example: InstallShield Wizard

G050664
The file copy starts. After the copy, you are prompted to restart the system.
8. Click No.
Example: InstallShield Wizard

G050667

9. Restart the system.

7. Setup for service personnel

(1) Click Start and click Shut Down.
Example: Windows display

G050604

70040 7/9
 70040
Setup for service personnel

(2) Click , and click Shut down.

Example: Shut Down Windows display

G050605

(3) Click OK.

Windows is quit and monitor display disappears.
(4) Confirm that the power lamp goes off.

Power lamp
G069106

(5) Turn off the circuit breaker.

7. Setup for service personnel

Circuit breaker
G069048

(6) Turn on the circuit breaker in 10 seconds after it was turned off.
Circuit breaker

G069049
The power supply of this system is turned on and after a while, the power supply of the display monitor automatically
turns on. Then, the message Do not vibrate the machine. Vibration affects print quality. appears.
This completes the operation.

70040 8/9
 70040
Setup for service personnel

10. Select the appropriate language on the Machine Specification display.

Select the appropriate language and set it.

(1) Access the Machine Specification display.

Bringing up the display
Menu: 2260 → Extension → Maintenance → Machine Specification
(2) Click and select Language.
Example: Machine Specification display

S3066-00-SM00

(3) Click and select HELP Language.

Example: Machine Specification display

7. Setup for service personnel

S3066-00-SM00

(4) Click YES: Enter.

70040 9/9
 70050
Setup for service personnel

Check the processor setting [N] [SM] [J]

Description for each specification

In this section, the location of information varies depending on the specification. See below for the description for each specification.
• For F specification, refer to ☞ 70051.

z Work until the processing solution temperature adjustment is completed [N]

1. Carry out Initial Replenishment of the pump.

Measure the output amounts of CD Replenisher Pump, BF Replenisher Pump and STB Replenisher Pump, then register
the measured values.
• For the operation procedures, refer to Operator's Manual - Additional Operations - Measuring the pump output
amount.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Processor Settings → Pump Output Amount Setting → F: Functions → Initial Replenishment Operation

2. Carry out Pump Output Amount Setting.

Measure the output amounts of CD Replenisher Pump, BF Replenisher Pump and STB Replenisher Pump, then register
the measured values.
• For the operation procedures, refer to Operator's Manual - Additional Operations - Measuring the pump output
amount.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Processor Settings → Processor Standard Setting → Pump Output Amount Setting

z Work until the processing solution temperature adjustment is completed [SM]

1. Carry out Initial Replenishment of the pump.

7. Setup for service personnel

Prepare the containers to receive the solutions from CD-A, CD-B, CD-C and STB replenishment pumps, and perform the
initial replenishment operation.
This operation is performed to measure the correct pump output amounts of only these pumps.
• For the operation procedures, refer to ☞ 27810.
NOTE
• When the initial replenishment is executed, all the replenisher pumps and water supply pumps operate simultaneously.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Processor Settings → Pump Output Amount Setting → F: Functions → Initial Replenishment Operation

z Work until the processing solution temperature adjustment is completed [J]

z Operations before processing solution temperature adjustment is complete

1. Configure the Evaporation Refill Correction setting.

Configure each setting of Evaporation Refill Correction.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Processor Settings → Processor Standard Setting → Refilling Water Amount Setting
• For setting procedures, refer to ☞ 33540.

70050 1/2
 70050
Setup for service personnel

2. Carry out Pump Output Amount Setting.

Measure the output amounts of CD Water Supply Pump, S -> B Replenishment Pump and STB Water Supply Pump,
then register the measured values.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Processor Settings → Processor Standard Setting → Pump Output Amount Setting

z Works to do after completing the temperature adjustment

1. Confirming the tablet delivery operation

Perform printing to see if the tablet is correctly delivered from the bucket to the tablet chute.
If the tablet is not delivered correctly, position adjustment is required for the elevator upper sensor, elevator middle sensor or
elevator lower sensor.
• For adjusting the elevator upper sensor, refer to ☞ 27660.
• For adjusting the elevator middle sensor, refer to ☞ 27670.
• For adjusting the elevator lower sensor, refer to ☞ 27680.

7. Setup for service personnel

70050 2/2
 70051
Setup for service personnel

Check the processor setting [F]

z Operations before processing solution temperature adjustment is complete

1. Perform Processor Set Up Mode.

Remove the air from the auto cleaning pump and perform manual opening, and remove the air from each replenisher pump.
Bringing up the display
Extension: 2260 → Processor Settings → Processor Standard Setting → Processor Set Up Mode
• For the operation procedures, refer to ☞ 33504.

• If Processor Set Up Mode is not performed at system installation, the errors below may occur.
☞ No. 5909[F] ☞ No. 5910[F] ☞ No. 5911[F]

2. Carry out Pump Output Amount Setting.

Measure the output amounts of P1R Replenisher Pump, P2RA Replenisher Pump and P2RB Replenisher Pump, then
register the measured values.
• For the operation procedures, see Operator's Manual - Additional Operations - Measuring the pump output
amount.
• See ☞ 33003.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Processor Settings → Pump Output Amount Setting

• If Pump Output Amount Setting is not performed at system installation, the errors below may occur.
☞ No. 5905[F] ☞ No. 5906[F] ☞ No. 5907[F]
☞ No. 5916[F] ☞ No. 5917[F] ☞ No. 5918[F] ☞ No. 5919[F] ☞ No. 5920[F] ☞ No. 5912[F]

3. Perform Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount Setting.

7. Setup for service personnel

Measure the output amounts of cleaning water of P1, P2 and PS, then register the measured values.
• For the operation procedures, refer to Operator's Manual - Additional Operations - Measuring the pump output
amount [ Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount Setting ].
• See ☞ 33004.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Processor Settings → Processor Standard Setting → Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount Setting

• If Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount Setting is not performed at system installation, the errors below may occur.
☞ No. 5916[F] ☞ No. 5917[F] ☞ No. 5918[F] ☞ No. 5919[F] ☞ No. 5920[F] ☞ No. 5921[F]

4. Change settings in Operator Selections→Processor

Change the following mode settings.

Item Changing settings

Evaporation Correction Change from OFF → ON.
Humidity Confirm that this is set to Automatic.
Quiet Process Change from OFF → ON.

• For the operation procedures, refer to Operator's Manual - Additional Operations - Measuring the pump output
amount [ Auto Cleaning Water Output Amount Setting ].
Bringing up the display
Extension → Operator Selections → Processor

70051 1/1
 70060
Setup for service personnel

Scanner section adjustment check [S-2/S-3/S-4]

Adjustment check for scanners S-2/S-3/S-4 and that for S1-II are different.
• For S1-II, refer to ☞ Scanner section adjustment check [S1-II].

z Operations before processing solution temperature adjustment is complete

1. Adjust the sensor of the film carrier.

Carry out the adjustment of the film carrier sensor.
The adjustment items vary depending on which film carrier is attached.
135/240 AFC 120 AFC 110 AFC 135 AFC
Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment
DX Sensor Standard Adjustment DX Sensor Standard Adjustment

Bringing up the display

Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Film Carrier Unit Adjustment

2. Check the light axis and swing and tilt of the scanner unit.
Check that Light Axis Adjustment and Swing and Tilt Adjustment are in right positions.
IMPORTANT
• When you do not have the 135/240 AFC, use the 120 AFC and 110 AFC for checking.

(1) Check Light Axis Adjustment.

Set the scanner adjustment chart to the 135/240 AFC (135 lane) and check the display of Number of Pixels
Exceeding the Threshold.
When the difference of the displayed values is the following values or less, it is in position.
When using S-2/S-3, if the difference of the displayed values is more than the values in the table, Light Axis
Adjustment is required.
For S-4, if the difference of the displayed value is more than the values in the table, Scanner unit, AFC-II, or the
Scanner adjustment chart may be defective.

7. Setup for service personnel

Priority*1 Attached film carrier Difference of G values when adjusting the
light axis
1 135/240 AFC (135 lane)*2 ±37 pixels
2 120 AFC ±28 pixels
3 110 AFC ±28 pixels

*1. Check the film carriers are set when carrying out Light Axis Adjustment of the scanner unit, according to the above priority.
*2. For the 135/240 AFC, be sure to use the 135 lane to check Light Axis Adjustment.

(2) Check Swing and Tilt Adjustment.

Set the scanner adjustment chart to the 135/240 AFC (135 lane) and carry out Swing and Tilt Adjustment Check.
When the displayed values are the following values or less, it is in position.
• The Swing and Tilt of S-2/S-3 must be adjusted if the difference between the values displayed exceeds that
shown in the table.
• For S-4, if the difference of the displayed value is more than the values in the table, Scanner unit, AFC-II, or the
Scanner adjustment chart may be defective.
Scanner Priority*1 Attached film carrier Value when checking the swing
and tilt adjustment
S-2/S-3 1 135/240 AFC (135 lane)*2 27/54 step
2 120 AFC 27/54 step
3 110 AFC 24/54 step
*2
S-4 1 135/240 AFC (135 lane) 51/54 step
2 120 AFC 51/54 step
3 110 AFC 46/54 step

70060 1/5
 70060
Setup for service personnel

*1. Check the film carriers are set when carrying out Swing and Tilt Adjustment of the scanner unit, according to the priority
above.
*2. For the 135/240 AFC, be sure to use the 135 lane to check Swing and Tilt Adjustment.

IMPORTANT
• When the value of the 135/240 AFC (135 lane) is less than the following value for that, checking the
Swing and Tilt Adjustment of the 120 AFC and 110 AFC is not required.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Scanner Unit Adjustment → Swing and Tilt/Light Axis Adjustment
• For adjustment, refer to the Scanner Service Manual.

3. Light Source Registration

Register the light source.
Proceed the work according to the instructions on the Light Source Registration display.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Scanner Unit Adjustment → Light Source Registration
• For adjustment, refer to the Scanner Service Manual.

4. Scanner focus adjustment

Carry out the focus adjustment of all the film carriers and mount carriers to be used.
Carry out Focus Auto Adjustment for each film carrier and mount carrier using the prepared scanner adjustment chart.
IMPORTANT
• Carry out the focus adjustment of all the film carriers and mount carriers that the user uses.
• For the film carrier and mount carrier, carry out the focus adjustment for the magnification rate.
• For adjustment, refer to the Scanner Service Manual.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Scanner Unit Adjustment → Focus Adjustment

5. Scanner light source update

7. Setup for service personnel

NOTE
• After carrying out the focus adjustment of the scanner unit, be sure to carry out light source update.
• For adjustment, refer to the Scanner Service Manual.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Scanner Unit Adjustment → Light Source Update

70060 2/5
 70060
Setup for service personnel

Scanner section adjustment check [S1-II]

Adjustment check for scanners S-2/S-3/S-4 and that for S1-II are different.
• For S-2/S-3/S-4, refer to ☞ Scanner section adjustment check [S-2/S-3/S-4].

z Operations before processing solution temperature adjustment is complete

1. Carry out Sensor Sensitivity Adjustment of the auto film carrier.

Carry out the Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment.
Proceed the work according to the instructions on the Sensor LED Light Intensity Adjustment display.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Film Carrier Unit Adjustment
• For adjustment, refer to the Scanner Service Manual.

2. Checking the swing and tilt, light axis and lane stop position of scanner unit
Check that swing and tilt, light axis and lane stop position are in proper positions.

(1) Check Light Axis Adjustment.

Set the scanner adjustment chart (135) to the film feed unit (135 lane) and check the display of Number of Pixels
Exceeding the Threshold.
Check the difference between G value of 0 to 2500 and G values of 2501 to 5000.
When the difference of the values on the display is ±32 pixels or less, they are proper. If the difference of the values on
the display is more than ±33 pixels, Light Axis Adjustment is required.
IMPORTANT
• For Light Axis Adjustment Check, be sure to use 135 lane.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Scanner Unit Adjustment → Swing and Tilt/Light Axis
Adjustment

7. Setup for service personnel

• For adjustment, refer to the Scanner Service Manual.
(2) Check Swing and Tilt Adjustment.
Set the scanner adjustment chart (135) to the 135 lane of film feed unit, then perform Swing and Tilt Adjustment
Check.
When the value on the display is 12/44 step or less, it is proper. If the value on the display is more than 13/44 step,
Swing and Tilt Adjustment is required.
IMPORTANT
• For Swing and Tilt Adjustment Check, be sure to use 135 lane.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Scanner Unit Adjustment → Swing and Tilt/Light Axis
Adjustment
• For adjustment, refer to the Scanner Service Manual.
(3) Check Lane Stop Position.
Set the scanner adjustment chart (135) on 135 lane and one (240) on 240 lane of the film feed unit, then perform Lane
Adjustment.
When the center of the waveforms of graph on the display is positioned within two waves to right and left from the
center line, it is proper. If it is out of position, Lane Adjustment is required.
IMPORTANT
• For Lane Stop Position Check, be sure to use both of 135 and 240 lanes.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Scanner Unit Adjustment → Swing and Tilt/Light Axis
Adjustment
• For adjustment, refer to the Scanner Service Manual.

70060 3/5
 70060
Setup for service personnel

3. Light Source Registration

Register the light source.
Proceed the work according to the instructions on the Light Source Registration display.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Scanner Unit Adjustment → Light Source Registration
• For adjustment, refer to the Scanner Service Manual.

4. Scanner focus adjustment

Carry out Focus Adjustment for both of 135 and 240 lanes.
Carry out Focus Auto Adjustment for each lane using the prepared scanner adjustment chart.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Scanner Unit Adjustment → Focus Adjustment
• For adjustment, refer to the Scanner Service Manual.

5. Light Source Update

Update the light source.
Proceed the work according to the instructions on the Light Source Update display.
Bringing up the display
Extension → Maintenance → Various Adjustment → Scanner Unit Adjustment → Light Source Update
• For adjustment, refer to the Scanner Service Manual.

7. Setup for service personnel

70060 4/5
 70060
Setup for service personnel

This page is intentionally blank.

7. Setup for service personnel

70060 5/5
 8000

8. Appendix

Periodically replaced parts .................................................................................................. 80110

List of Maintenance/Periodically Replaced Parts/Consumable Parts (Desk Section) .......................................80110
List of Maintenance/Periodically Replaced Parts/Consumable Parts (Printer Section) ....................................80120
List of Maintenance/Periodically Replaced Parts/Consumable Parts (Processor Section) [N] [F] ...................80130
List of Maintenance/Periodically Replaced Parts/Consumable Parts (Processor Section) [SM] .....................80140
List of Maintenance/Periodically Replaced Parts/Consumable Parts (Processor Section) [J] .........................80150
Positions of paper jam release labels .................................................................................. 80210
Positions of paper jam release labels .................................................................................................................80210
Service personnel tool list .................................................................................................... 80310
Service personnel tool list [N] [SM] [J] [F] ......................................................................................................80310
Operation keyboard correspondence list ............................................................................. 81010
Operation keyboard correspondence list ...........................................................................................................81010
Operation keyboard correspondence list (DLS specification) ...........................................................................81020
Condition list for replenishment solution sensors ................................................................ 81510
Condition list for replenishment solution sensors [SM] ....................................................................................81510
Table of wiring diagrams ..................................................................................................... 89000
Table of wiring diagrams ...................................................................................................................................89000

8 Appendix

8000 1/1
 80110 Periodically replaced parts

Periodically replaced parts

List of Maintenance/Periodically Replaced Parts/Consumable Parts (Desk

Section)

The list below shows maintenance items and parts required to be performed or replaced by user or service personnel to keep the system
quality.
Check the actual processing hours and number of prints using the hour meter and the print counter.
IMPORTANT
• For the maintenance parts, regularly check them and replace them if necessary.
Some parts need to be replaced according to the processing time or the number of processed prints. The replacement
timing varies depending on the operating condition of the system.
Since the replacement timing is the rough standard, you need not necessarily replace the parts on the specified timing.
• For the periodically replaced parts, replace them when the processing time or the number of prints processed reaches the
specified value regardless of the condition of the parts.
• The numerical values below do not show any warranty period.

NOTE
• The hour meter and the print counter are optional on the systems which are to be shipped outside Japan.

z List of maintenance
For the procedure of maintenance by users, refer to Maintenance Manual.

z PC control unit
Parts or checking items U/S Description for maintenance Part No. Timin Stand Q Reason for
g ard ua maintenance/replace
replac nti ment
ement ty
timing
Cleaning the floppy disk U Clean it using a commercially - As - - Data may not be read
drive available floppy disk for cleaning. needed correctly from the
Cleaning the MO drive U Clean it using the optional MO head - Three- media drive.
cleaner. month

U: User, S: Service personnel

z Desk unit
Parts or checking items U/S Description for maintenance Part No. Timin Stand Q Reason for
g ard ua maintenance/replace

8. Appendix
replac nti ment
ement ty
timing
Cleaning the air filter U Vacuum the dust using a vacuum A128749 1 week - 2 If the air does not flow
cleaner. smoothly due to the dust
If the dirt cannot be removed, turn accumulated on the air
the side with dust down and wash it filter, the temperature in
with running water. the control box may
(Replace when it has been increase and it may
seriously damaged.) cause malfunction of the
PCBs.

U: User, S: Service personnel

80110 1/4
 80110
Periodically replaced parts

z CRT monitor unit B

Parts or checking items U/S Description for maintenance Part No. Timin Stand Q Reason for
g ard ua maintenance/replace
replac nti ment
ement ty
timing
Cleaning the display U Wipe the tube face gently using a - As - - The dirt on the display
monitor soft cloth. If the dirt cannot be needed monitor makes difficult
removed, wipe it using the firmly to judge correctly at
squeezed damp soft cloth with a correcting scanned
neutral detergent and water. image color and density,
and that may adversely
affect the print finish.

U: User, S: Service personnel

z Flatbed scanner
Parts or checking items U/S Description for maintenance Part No. Timin Stand Q Reason for
g ard ua maintenance/replace
replac nti ment
ement ty
timing
Cleaning the flatbed U Wipe the glass surface using a soft - As - - The dirt on the glass
scanner cloth. needed surface may adversely
affect the scanning
image.

U: User, S: Service personnel

z Colorimeter unit
Parts or checking items U/S Description for maintenance Part No. Timin Stand Q Reason for
g ard ua maintenance/replace
replac nti ment
ement ty
timing
Cleaning the calibration U At Start Up Checks Z021441 Start 2 years 1 Since the dirty
plate*1 If the dirt cannot be removed, wipe up calibration plate makes
it using a firmly squeezed damp soft One- the registration with the
cloth. After that, wipe it using a dry month incorrect standard value

8. Appendix
cloth. at the setup, it may
At monthly check adversely affects the
Wipe the measurement area using a print finish.
firmly squeezed damp soft cloth
with a neutral detergent diluted with
water. Then, wipe and dry it up
using a dry soft cloth.
Cleaning the advance U Clean with the cleaning sheet for - Six - - The measurement of the
roller colorimeter month setup prints may fail.
s

*1. Periodically replaced parts: It is necessary to replace even if two years has not been passed, when the parts has been deteriorated in quality
(including calibration data FD).
U: User, S: Service personnel

80110 2/4
 80110
Periodically replaced parts

z Film receiving box

Parts or checking items U/S Description for maintenance Part No. Timin Stand Q Reason for
g ard ua maintenance/replace
replac nti ment
ement ty
timing
Cleaning the film U At Start Up Checks - Start - 1 It damages the film. Be
receiving box Clean using the vacuum cleaner. up sure to remove dust.
If the dirt even remains, wipe it
using the firmly squeezed damp soft
cloth.

U: User, S: Service personnel

z Table peripheral section

Parts or checking items U/S Description for maintenance Part No. Timin Stand Q Reason for
g ard ua maintenance/replace
replac nti ment
ement ty
timing
Cleaning the operation U Clean it using the blower brush, a - As - - Dust coming into the
keyboard or the computer vacuum cleaner, the firmly- needed product may cause a
keyboard squeezed damp cloth, etc. system failure.

U: User, S: Service personnel

z List of periodically replaced parts

For the procedure of replacing the maintenance parts by users, refer to Maintenance Manual.

z Colorimeter unit
Part name U/S Part No. Quantity Recommended Reason for
timing of maintenance/replacement
replacement
Calibration plate unit B*1 U Z021441 1 2 years Since the dirty or deteriorated
calibration plate makes the registration
with the incorrect standard value at the
setup, it may adversely affects the print
finish.

8. Appendix
*1. It is necessary to replace even if two years has not been passed, when the parts has been deteriorated in quality (including calibration data FD).
U: User, S: Service personnel

z PC control unit
Part name U/S Part No. Quantity Recommended Reason for
timing of maintenance/replacement
replacement
Battery pack*1 S I085024 1 3 years If the battery pack deteriorates, the PC
2 may not shut down properly when
power goes out temporary, and the
HDD may be damaged.
Lithium battery S I085026 1 If the lithium battery deteriorates, the
(For use with setting data stored on the mother board
PC-NRT-RS2, may be lost or the clock may slow.
RD2)
I085027
(PC-NRT-
RS6/RS9)

80110 3/4
 80110
Periodically replaced parts

Part name U/S Part No. Quantity Recommended Reason for

timing of maintenance/replacement
replacement
USB A TO A (FEMALE) U I068443 1 Every 1500 orders If the cable unit connecting USB
CABLE ASSY*2 memory deteriorates, data may not be
read properly from the media drive.
*1. Within three years from the date shown on the battery replacement label (for required two battery packs for high-spec PC)
*2. Only for specific models are set as option.
U: User, S: Service personnel

8. Appendix

80110 4/4
 80120
Periodically replaced parts

List of Maintenance/Periodically Replaced Parts/Consumable Parts (Printer

Section)

The list below shows maintenance items and parts required to be performed or replaced by user or service personnel to keep the system
quality.
Check the actual processing hours and number of prints using the hour meter and the print counter.
IMPORTANT
• For the maintenance parts, regularly check them and replace them if necessary.
Some parts need to be replaced according to the processing time or the number of processed prints. The replacement
timing varies depending on the operating condition of the system.
Since the replacement timing is the rough standard, you need not necessarily replace the parts on the specified timing.
• For the periodically replaced parts, replace them when the processing time or the number of prints processed reaches the
specified value regardless of the condition of the parts.
• The numerical values below do not show any warranty period.

NOTE
• The hour meter and the print counter are optional on the systems which are to be shipped outside Japan.

z List of maintenance
For the procedure of maintenance by users, refer to Maintenance Manual.

z Magazine section
Parts or checking items U/S Description for maintenance Part No. Timin Stand Q Reason for
g ard ua maintenance/replace
replac nti ment
ement ty
timing
Cleaning the inside of U Remove the paper dust using a - As - - It may damage the
paper magazine vacuum cleaner when loading the needed paper, or may fail the
Cleaning the surrounding U paper. - paper loading.
part of the roller
Cleaning the paper U Wiping it using the firmly squeezed -
advance roller in the paper damp cloth
magazine

U: User, S: Service personnel

8. Appendix

80120 1/7
 80120
Periodically replaced parts

z Paper magazine mount A, A2, B, C

Parts or checking items U/S Description for maintenance Part No. Timin Stand Q Reason for
g ard ua maintenance/replace
replac nti ment
ement ty
timing
Cleaning paper magazine U Remove the paper magazine and - Three- - - The messages No. 1004,
code sensors A, A2, B and clean the sensors using a blower month No. 1005, No. 1067, No.
C brush. 1088, No. 1090: Attach
the Paper Magazine.
Paper Magazine A,
A2, B, C No. 1010, No.
1011, No. 1068, No.
1089, No. 1091:
Change the Paper
Magazine. Paper
Magazine A, A2, B, C
may appear.
Cleaning paper end U A, A2: Pull out the magazine mount - The message No. 6017:
sensors A, A2, B and C and clean the sensors using a Paper has jammed in
blower brush. the printer section.
B, C: Clean the sensors using a may appear.
blower brush.

U: User, S: Service personnel

8. Appendix

80120 2/7
 80120
Periodically replaced parts

z Paper supply unit

Parts or checking items U/S Description for maintenance Part No. Timin Stand Q Reason for
g ard ua maintenance/replace
replac nti ment
ement ty
timing
Cleaning the advance U Pull out the unit and check if it is - As - - The paper advance
roller not dirty. needed length may vary. Also,
Cleaning the advance U If it is dirty, clean it using the - the message No. 6012,
roller (for paper magazine blower brush and wipe it using the 6013, 6112: Paper did
B, C) firmly squeezed damp cloth, if the not load. Paper
dirt cannot be removed. Magazine A, B, C may
Cleaning the advance U -
appear.
roller (for paper magazine
A)
Paper supply pressure U Pull out the unit and clean it using - Three- The message No. 6134:
change sensor the blower brush. month Paper Supply Pressure
Change Motor
operation error. may
appear.
Paper hold sensor U - The message No. 6101:
Paper Hold Motor
operation error. may
appear.
Pressure pin of arm unit 1 U Attach the cleaning sheet (for - Six Paper may meander.
cleaning arm unit 1) to arm unit 1 month The message No. 6017:
and clean it. Cleaning sheet is a s Paper has jammed in
user's periodically replaced parts.) the printer section.
may appear.
Slide shaft of arm unit 1 U Pull out the unit and apply a grease. - If arm unit 1 does not
move smoothly, it will
cause paper meandering
or paper jam.
Manual cutter S Check whether it cuts well and A067078 As 1 Paper cutting may not
replace it if dull. needed be available when paper
jams.
Paper cutter S Check if it cuts well and replace it if H076033 2 years 1 The dull paper cutter
not. (Replace it when the print may cause the paper end
counter reaches 1,500,000 everted.
approximately.)

8. Appendix
U: User, S: Service personnel

z Paper supply unit A2 (option)

Parts or checking items U/S Description for maintenance Part No. Timin Stand Q Reason for
g ard ua maintenance/replace
replac nti ment
ement ty
timing
Cleaning the advance U Pull out the unit and check if it is - As - - The paper advance
roller not dirty. needed length may vary. Also,
If it is dirty, clean it using the the message No. 6195,
blower brush and wipe it using the 6201: Paper did not
firmly squeezed damp cloth, if the load. Paper Magazine
dirt cannot be removed. A, A2 may appear.

80120 3/7
 80120
Periodically replaced parts

Parts or checking items U/S Description for maintenance Part No. Timin Stand Q Reason for
g ard ua maintenance/replace
replac nti ment
ement ty
timing
Pressure change sensor U Pull out the unit and clean it using - Three- The message No. 6199:
A2 the blower brush. month Pressure Release
Motor A2 operation
error. may appear.
Width change sensor A2 U - The message No. 6200:
Width Change Motor
A2 operation error.
may appear.
U: User, S: Service personnel

z CVP unit (option)

Parts or checking items U/S Description for maintenance Part No. Timin Stand Q Reason for
g ard ua maintenance/replace
replac nti ment
ement ty
timing
Dot head unit S Check the imprinting condition and I086167 3 years - 1 Although the ribbon
replace it if any dots are missing. cassette is replaced,
(One of the maintenance parts. imprinting may not
Replace it when the print counter perform correctly.
reaches 2,700,000 approximately.)

U: User, S: Service personnel

z Exposure advance unit

Parts or checking items U/S Description for maintenance Part No. Timin Stand Q Reason for
g ard ua maintenance/replace
replac nti ment
ement ty
timing
Cleaning the pressure U Remove the pressure guide and - 1 week - - Line appears on a print.
guide and roller check if it is not dirty. Also, it may occur that
Cleaning the paper path U If it is dirty, clean it using the - As the paper meanders in

8. Appendix
surface and roller of the blower brush. needed the exposure advance
exposure advance unit If the dirt cannot be removed, wipe unit, or it may not
it using the firmly squeezed damp correctly execute
Cleaning the exposure U -
cloth. Exposure Start
advance inlet pressure
Position Correction or
roller
Exposure Advance
Motor Speed
Correction.
Cleaning the exposure U Remove the pressure guide unit and - Three- The message No. 6017:
start sensor clean the sensors using a blower month Paper has jammed in
brush. the printer section.
may appear.

U: User, S: Service personnel

80120 4/7
 80120
Periodically replaced parts

z Laser unit
Parts or checking items U/S Description for maintenance Part No. Timin Stand Q Reason for
g ard ua maintenance/replace
replac nti ment
ement ty
timing
Cleaning the laser dust- U Blow the dust off using a blower - One- - - Streaks may be printed.
proof glass brush. month
Wipe it using the cleaning sheet if
necessary.

U: User, S: Service personnel

z Paper advance unit 1

Parts or checking items U/S Description for maintenance Part No. Timin Stand Q Reason for
g ard ua maintenance/replace
replac nti ment
ement ty
timing
Cleaning the advance U Check if it is not dirty. - As - - The message No. 6017-
roller If it is dirty, clean it using the needed 0002, 0003, 0004:
Cleaning the pressure U blower brush. - Paper has jammed in
roller If the dirt cannot be removed, wipe the printer section.
it using the firmly squeezed damp may appear.
cloth.
Cleaning paper sensor 1 U Clean the sensors using the blower - Three-
brush. month
Ink ribbon cassette U Check the printing density. - As - 1 If it runs out of ink,
needed back print may not be
printed normally.

U: User, S: Service personnel

z Paper advance unit 2

Parts or checking items U/S Description for maintenance Part No. Timin Stand Q Reason for
g ard ua maintenance/replace
replac nti ment
ement ty
timing

8. Appendix
Cleaning arm unit 2 U Check if it is not dirty. - As - - Scratches may appear
If it is dirty, clean it using the needed on the prints.
Cleaning the advance U blower brush. - The messages No. 6017-
roller If the dirt cannot be removed, wipe 0005, 0007, 0009:
it using the firmly squeezed damp Paper has jammed in
Cleaning the roller of the U -
cloth. the printer section.
pressure guide
may appear.
Cleaning the arm sensors U Clean the sensors using the blower - Three- No. 6138, 6139: Paper
(left and right) brush. month advance arm motor
(right or left)
operation error. may
occur.
Cleaning the selection U - No. 6138, 6141: Lane
sensors (left and right) Select Motor
(Left)/(Right)
operation error. may
occur.

U: User, S: Service personnel

80120 5/7
 80120
Periodically replaced parts

z Processor loading unit

Parts or checking items U/S Description for maintenance Part No. Timin Stand Q Reason for
g ard ua maintenance/replace
replac nti ment
ement ty
timing
Cleaning the paper U Check if it is not dirty. If it is dirty, - As - - No. 6017-0005, 0006,
advance rollers and paper clean it using the blower brush. needed 0007, 0008, 0009,
path surface If the dirt cannot be removed, wipe 0010:Paper has
it using the firmly squeezed damp jammed in the printer
cloth. [Link] appear.
Cleaning paper sensor 2 U Clean the sensors using the blower - Three-
(left, center and right) brush. month

U: User, S: Service personnel

z Printer control box 1

Parts or checking items U/S Description for maintenance Part No. Timin Stand Q Reason for
g ard ua maintenance/replace
replac nti ment
ement ty
timing
Cleaning air filter (1) U Vacuum the dust using a vacuum A074340 One- - 1 If the air does not flow
cleaner. month smoothly due to the dust
If the dirt cannot be removed, turn accumulated on the air
the side with dust down and wash it filter, the temperature in
with running water. the control box may
(Replace when it has been increase and it may
seriously damaged.) cause malfunction of the
PCBs.

U: User, S: Service personnel

z Printer control box 2

Parts or checking items U/S Description for maintenance Part No. Timin Stand Q Reason for
g ard ua maintenance/replace
replac nti ment
ement ty
timing

8. Appendix
Cleaning air filter (2) U Vacuum the dust using a vacuum A074343 One- - 1 If the air does not flow
Cleaning air filter (3) U cleaner. A074346 month 1 smoothly due to the dust
If the dirt cannot be removed, turn accumulated on the air
the side with dust down and wash it filter, the temperature in
with running water. the control box may
(Replace when it has been increase and it may
seriously damaged.) cause malfunction of the
PCBs.

U: User, S: Service personnel

z List of periodically replaced parts

For the procedure of replacing the maintenance parts by users, refer to Maintenance Manual.

80120 6/7
 80120
Periodically replaced parts

z Paper supply unit

Part name U/S Part No. Quantity Recommended Reason for
timing of maintenance/replacement
replacement
Cleaning sheet*1 U A076719 1 Every cleaning (Clean Paper may meander. The message No.
it every six months.) 6017: Paper has jammed in the
printer section. may appear.

*1. Replace it every cleaning arm unit 1.

U: User, S: Service personnel

z List of consumable parts

For the procedure of replacing the consumable part, refer to Maintenance Manual.

z CVP unit (option)

Part name U/S Part No. Quantity Reference value of Reason for
consumption maintenance/replacement
Ink ribbon cassette U H086044 1 100,000 prints If it runs out of ink, back print may not
be printed normally.

U: User, S: Service personnel

8. Appendix

80120 7/7
 80130
Periodically replaced parts

List of Maintenance/Periodically Replaced Parts/Consumable Parts

(Processor Section) [N] [F]

Description for each specification

This section differs depending on the specification. For the different points, refer to the following.

Reference
☞ List of Maintenance/Periodically Replaced Parts/Consumable ☞ List of Maintenance/Periodically Replaced Parts/Consumable
Parts (Processor Section) [SM] Parts (Processor Section) [J]

The list below shows maintenance items and parts required to be performed or replaced by user or service personnel to keep the system
quality.
Check the actual processing hours and number of prints using the hour meter and the print counter.
IMPORTANT
• For the maintenance parts, regularly check them and replace them if necessary.
Some parts need to be replaced according to the processing time or the number of processed prints. The replacement
timing varies depending on the operating condition of the system.
Since the replacement timing is the rough standard, you need not necessarily replace the parts on the specified timing.
• For the periodically replaced parts, replace them when the processing time or the number of prints processed reaches the
specified value regardless of the condition of the parts.
• The numerical values below do not show any warranty period.

NOTE
• The hour meter and the print counter are optional on the systems which are to be shipped outside Japan.

z List of maintenance
For the procedure of maintenance by users, refer to Maintenance Manual.

8. Appendix

80130 1/18
 80130
Periodically replaced parts

z Upper guide
Parts or checking U/S Description for Part No. Timin Stand Quantity Quantity Reason for
items maintenance g ard PP-1213 PP-1217 maintenance/repl
replac acement
ement
timing
Upper guides (Nos. 2 U Automatic cleaning - Close - - - The print may get
to 6) and squeegee unit every close down down damaged, dirty or
checks. uneven. The
Cleaning upper guide U Clean it using a soft - 1 week - - - message No. 5535:
(No. 1)*1 sponge with running Paper has
lukewarm water. After jammed in the
that, dry it up and processor section.
reattach it as it was. may appear.
Cleaning upper guide U Clean it with pouring
(No. 2) and squeegee warm water and a soft
unit*1 sponge. Then soak it in a
bat filled with water.
Cleaning upper guides U Clean them using a soft
(Nos. 3 to 6)*1 sponge with running
lukewarm water. After
that, dry them up and
reattach them as they
were.
Cleaning the guides of U Clean them using a soft
processing racks (Nos. sponge with running
1 to 6)*1 lukewarm water. After
that, reattach them as
they were.
Cleaning upper guides U Clean them using a soft - One- - - -
(Nos. 1 to 6) and sponge with running month
squeegee unit lukewarm water. Then
check its damage or
wear.
Turn roller (2) (Nos. 3 S Check its damage or A050679 2 years 2 years 45 45 The print may get
to 6 upper guides) wear. If it is damaged or seconds seconds bent, damaged,
worn, replace it with a 8 8 dirty or uneven.
new one. 25 25 The message No.
Check it every six month seconds seconds 5535: Paper has

8. Appendix
after two years have 8 8 jammed in the
passed. If necessary, processor section.
Quick Quick
replace it with a new may appear.
process: process:
one.
30 30
seconds seconds
8 8
Quick Quick
process: process:
20 20
seconds seconds
[F [F
specificati specificati
on] on]
10 10

80130 2/18
 80130
Periodically replaced parts

Parts or checking U/S Description for Part No. Timin Stand Quantity Quantity Reason for
items maintenance g ard PP-1213 PP-1217 maintenance/repl
replac acement
ement
timing
Turn roller (3) (Nos. 3 S C007827 45 45
to 6 upper guides) seconds seconds
8 8
25 25
seconds seconds
8 8
Quick Quick
process: process:
30 30
seconds seconds
8 8
Quick Quick
process: process:
20 20
seconds seconds
[F [F
specificati specificati
on] on]
6 6
Squeegee roller S A087422 45 45
assembly (2) (squeegee seconds seconds
unit) 1 1
25 25
seconds seconds
1 1
Quick Quick
process: process:
30 30
seconds seconds
1 1
Quick Quick
process: process:
20 20
seconds seconds

8. Appendix
[F [F
specificati specificati
on] on]
0 0

80130 3/18
 80130
Periodically replaced parts

Parts or checking U/S Description for Part No. Timin Stand Quantity Quantity Reason for
items maintenance g ard PP-1213 PP-1217 maintenance/repl
replac acement
ement
timing
Squeegee roller S A087421 45 45
assembly (3) (squeegee seconds seconds
unit) 1 1
25 25
seconds seconds
1 1
Quick Quick
process: process:
30 30
seconds seconds
1 1
Quick Quick
process: process:
20 20
seconds seconds
[F [F
specificati specificati
on] on]
0 0
Squeegee roller S A087424 45 45
assembly (2) (No. 2 seconds seconds
upper guide) 2 2
25 25
seconds seconds
2 2
Quick Quick
process: process:
30 30
seconds seconds
0 0
Quick Quick
process: process:
20 20
seconds seconds

8. Appendix
[F [F
specificati specificati
on] on]
0 0

80130 4/18
 80130
Periodically replaced parts

Parts or checking U/S Description for Part No. Timin Stand Quantity Quantity Reason for
items maintenance g ard PP-1213 PP-1217 maintenance/repl
replac acement
ement
timing
Squeegee roller S A087423 45 45
assembly (2) (No. 2 seconds seconds
upper guide) 1 1
25 25
seconds seconds
1 1
Quick Quick
process: process:
30 30
seconds seconds
3 3
Quick Quick
process: process:
20 20
seconds seconds
[F [F
specificati specificati
on] on]
0 0
Squeegee roller S Check its damage or A087420 2 years 2 years 45 45 The print may get
assembly (4) (No. 1 wear. If it is damaged or seconds seconds bent, damaged,
upper guide and worn, replace it with a 3 3 dirty or uneven.
squeegee unit) new one. 25 25 The message No.
Check it every six month seconds seconds 5535: Paper has
after two years have 3 3 jammed in the
passed. If necessary, processor section.
Quick Quick
replace it with a new may appear.
process: process:
one.
30 30
seconds seconds
3 3
Quick Quick
process: process:
20 20
seconds seconds

8. Appendix
[F [F
specificati specificati
on] on]
4 4

80130 5/18
 80130
Periodically replaced parts

Parts or checking U/S Description for Part No. Timin Stand Quantity Quantity Reason for
items maintenance g ard PP-1213 PP-1217 maintenance/repl
replac acement
ement
timing
Squeegee roller S A087419 45 45
assembly (2) (No. 1 seconds seconds
upper guide and 0 0
squeegee unit) 25 25
seconds seconds
0 0
Quick Quick
process: process:
30 30
seconds seconds
0 0
Quick Quick
process: process:
20 20
seconds seconds
[F [F
specificati specificati
on] on]
1 1
Squeegee roller S B023566 45 45
assembly seconds seconds
0 0
25 25
seconds seconds
0 0
Quick Quick
process: process:
30 30
seconds seconds
0 0
Quick Quick
process: process:
20 20
seconds seconds

8. Appendix
[F [F
specificati specificati
on] on]
2 2
Pressure bushing (13) S Check its damage or A032741 3 years 2700 28 28 The message No.
Pressure bushing (12) S wear. If it is damaged or A032742 hours 28 28 5535: Paper has
worn, replace it with a jammed in the
Idle gear (32T) S A050696 1 1
new one. processor section.
Double gear S Check it every six month A050698 8 8 may appear.
after three years have
passed. If necessary,
replace it with a new
one.
(As standard
replacement timing,
replace it every three
year when it works for
three hours per day.)
*1. Perform it at the close down checks on the day for the weekly regular checks.
U: User, S: Service personnel

80130 6/18
 80130
Periodically replaced parts

z Processing rack section [N]

Parts or checking U/S Description for Part No. Timin Stand Quantity Quantity Reason for
items maintenance g ard PP-1213 PP-1217 maintenance/repl
replac acement
ement
timing
Processing racks (Nos. U Wash it using a soft - One- - - - The print may get
1 to 6) sponge with running month bent, damaged,
lukewarm water (30 to dirty or uneven.
40 degrees centigrade) The message No.
so that any crystals are 5535: Paper has
dissolved. jammed in the
Lower turn belt (For U Wash it using a soft A049949 45 45 processor section.
CD and BF) sponge with running seconds seconds may appear.
lukewarm water. Check 2 2
its damage and scratch. 25 25
If necessary, replace it seconds seconds
with a new one. 2 2
Quick Quick
process: process:
30 30
seconds seconds
2 2
Quick Quick
process: process:
20 20
seconds seconds
1 2
[F [F
specificati specificati
on] on]
1 1
Lower turn belt (2) U A060316 45 45
(For STB) seconds seconds
4 4
25 25
seconds seconds
4 4
Quick Quick

8. Appendix
process: process:
30 30
seconds seconds
4 4
Quick Quick
process: process:
20 20
seconds seconds
0 0
[F [F
specificati specificati
on] on]
1 2

80130 7/18
 80130
Periodically replaced parts

Parts or checking U/S Description for Part No. Timin Stand Quantity Quantity Reason for
items maintenance g ard PP-1213 PP-1217 maintenance/repl
replac acement
ement
timing
Gasket (Nos. 1 to 5 S Check its damage. If it is B013955 2 years 2 years 5 5 Since the gasket is
processing racks) damaged, replace it with attached to prevent
Gasket (No. 6 S a new one. B020296 1 1 the processing
processing rack) Check it every six month solution
after two years have evaporated, the
passed. If necessary, processing solution
replace it with a new may be
one. deteriorated faster
if the gasket is
damaged.
Side roller (3) (Nos. 1 S Check its damage or A072989 2 years 2 years 45 45 The print may get
and 2 processing racks) wear. If it is damaged or seconds seconds bent, damaged,
worn, replace it with a 15 19 dirty or uneven.
new one. 25 25 The message No.
Check it every six month seconds seconds 5535: Paper has
after two years have 9 11 jammed in the
passed. If necessary, processor section.
Quick Quick
replace it with a new may appear.
process: process:
one.
30 30
seconds seconds
11 13
Quick Quick
process: process:
20 20
seconds seconds
12 12
[F [F
specificati specificati
on] on]
9 6
Side roller (4) S B020741 45 45
seconds seconds
25 37
25 25

8. Appendix
seconds seconds
19 29
Quick Quick
process: process:
30 30
seconds seconds
13 15
Quick Quick
process: process:
20 20
seconds seconds
0 0
[F [F
specificati specificati
on] on]
5 8

80130 8/18
 80130
Periodically replaced parts

Parts or checking U/S Description for Part No. Timin Stand Quantity Quantity Reason for
items maintenance g ard PP-1213 PP-1217 maintenance/repl
replac acement
ement
timing
Side roller (1) S A050692 45 45
seconds seconds
0 0
25 25
seconds seconds
0 0
Quick Quick
process: process:
30 30
seconds seconds
0 0
Quick Quick
process: process:
20 20
seconds seconds
10 12
[F [F
specificati specificati
on] on]
12 13
Bearing (1) S Check its damage or A035075 3 years 2700 45 45 The message No.
wear. If it is damaged or hours seconds seconds 5535: Paper has
worn, replace it with a 8 8 jammed in the
new one. 25 25 processor section.
Check it every six month seconds seconds may appear.
after three years have 6 8
passed. If necessary,
Quick Quick
replace it with a new
process: process:
one.
30 30
(As standard
seconds seconds
replacement timing,
8 8
replace it every three
year when it works for Quick Quick
three hours per day.) process: process:
20 20

8. Appendix
seconds seconds
2 2
[F [F
specificati specificati
on] on]
3 5

80130 9/18
 80130
Periodically replaced parts

Parts or checking U/S Description for Part No. Timin Stand Quantity Quantity Reason for
items maintenance g ard PP-1213 PP-1217 maintenance/repl
replac acement
ement
timing
Bevel gear (22T) S A035155 45 45
seconds seconds
26 34
25 25
seconds seconds
20 26
Quick Quick
process: process:
30 30
seconds seconds
18 20
Quick Quick
process: process:
20 20
seconds seconds
10 12
[F [F
specificati specificati
on] on]
13 15
Bevel gear S A050695 6 6
Idle gear (32T) S A050696 6 6
Center bushing S Check its damage or A216227 3 years 2700 45 45 The message No.
wear. If it is damaged or hours seconds seconds 5535: Paper has
worn, replace it with a 40 56 jammed in the
new one. 25 25 processor section.
Check it every six month seconds seconds may appear.
after three years have 28 40
passed. If necessary,
Quick Quick
replace it with a new
process: process:
one.
30 30
(As standard
seconds seconds
replacement timing,
24 28
replace it every three

8. Appendix
year when it works for Quick Quick
three hours per day.) process: process:
20 20
seconds seconds
16 20
[F [F
specificati specificati
on] on]
20 22

80130 10/18
 80130
Periodically replaced parts

Parts or checking U/S Description for Part No. Timin Stand Quantity Quantity Reason for
items maintenance g ard PP-1213 PP-1217 maintenance/repl
replac acement
ement
timing
Bevel gear (2) S A220062 45 45
seconds seconds
26 34
25 25
seconds seconds
20 26
Quick Quick
process: process:
30 30
seconds seconds
18 20
Quick Quick
process: process:
20 20
seconds seconds
10 12
[F [F
specificati specificati
on] on]
13 15
Bushing (1) S B010247 45 45
seconds seconds
12 12
25 25
seconds seconds
12 12
Quick Quick
process: process:
30 30
seconds seconds
12 12
Quick Quick
process: process:
20 20

8. Appendix
seconds seconds
2 2
[F [F
specificati specificati
on] on]
4 6

80130 11/18
 80130
Periodically replaced parts

Parts or checking U/S Description for Part No. Timin Stand Quantity Quantity Reason for
items maintenance g ard PP-1213 PP-1217 maintenance/repl
replac acement
ement
timing
Bearing (3) assembly S A051198 45 45
seconds seconds
6 6
25 25
seconds seconds
6 6
Quick Quick
process: process:
30 30
seconds seconds
6 6
Quick Quick
process: process:
20 20
seconds seconds
2 2
[F [F
specificati specificati
on] on]
3 4
Center bushing (2) S A083870 45 45
seconds seconds
0 0
25 25
seconds seconds
0 0
Quick Quick
process: process:
30 30
seconds seconds
0 0
Quick Quick
process: process:
20 20

8. Appendix
seconds seconds
2 0
[F [F
specificati specificati
on] on]
2 2

80130 12/18
 80130
Periodically replaced parts

Parts or checking U/S Description for Part No. Timin Stand Quantity Quantity Reason for
items maintenance g ard PP-1213 PP-1217 maintenance/repl
replac acement
ement
timing
Bearing (4) assembly S A084428 45 45
seconds seconds
0 0
25 25
seconds seconds
0 0
Quick Quick
process: process:
30 30
seconds seconds
0 0
Quick Quick
process: process:
20 20
seconds seconds
4 4
[F [F
specificati specificati
on] on]
3 3
U: User, S: Service personnel

z Tank section [N]

Parts or checking items U/S Description for Part No. Timin Stand Qua Qua Reason for
maintenance g ard ntity ntity maintenance/replac
replac PP- PP- ement
ement 1213 1217
timing
Float switch U Push and sink the upper of - Three- - - - The crystallized
the float with a stick and month processing solution on
check that the float moves the float may make the
up and down. float immovable
vertically. It may

8. Appendix
damage on the
automatic refilling
function as the change
of the processing
solution amount
cannot be detected
correctly, and the
processing solution
may be deteriorated
faster in result.
Cleaning the processing U Wash it using a brush with - 1 year - - - The print may get
solution tanks water. damaged, dirty or
Cleaning the reducing U Wash it using a sponge with - uneven.
solution block (For 25 water.
seconds)

80130 13/18
 80130
Periodically replaced parts

Parts or checking items U/S Description for Part No. Timin Stand Qua Qua Reason for
maintenance g ard ntity ntity maintenance/replac
replac PP- PP- ement
ement 1213 1217
timing
Filter cartridge U Check that it is not clogged H029037 2 2 6 6 If the filter cartridge is
or deformed. In that case, weeks weeks dirty, it affects print
replace it with a new one. quality. It affects the
circulation of the
solution as well, and
the message No. 5500,
5501, 5502: The
processing solution
temperature is above
the safety range. CD,
BF, STB may appear
in result.
U: User, S: Service personnel

z Frame section
Parts or checking items U/S Description for Part No. Timin Stand Qua Qua Reason for
maintenance g ard ntity ntity maintenance/replac
replac PP- PP- ement
ement 1213 1217
timing
Automatic cleaning pipe U Check whether or not - 2 - - - If crystals are stuck on
crystals stick on the opening weeks the opening of the
of the automatic cleaning automatic cleaning
pipe. If necessary, remove pipe, water cannot be
the pipe and wash it with spouted to wash the
such as a toothbrush. upper guides and the
print may get
damaged, dirty or
uneven, accordingly.
Cleaning the air filter U Vacuum the dust using a - One- - - - If the air flow is
vacuum cleaner. month interfered by the dust
If the dirt cannot be accumulated on the air
removed, turn the side with filter, it cannot cool
dust down and wash it with down the processing

8. Appendix
running water. tanks and the message
The processing
solution temperature
is above the safety
range. CD, BF, STB
may appear.

U: User, S: Service personnel

z Replenisher section [N]

Parts or checking items U/S Description for Part No. Timin Stand Qua Qua Reason for
maintenance g ard ntity ntity maintenance/replac
replac PP- PP- ement
ement 1213 1217
timing
Refilling water and water U Check the water amount. - Close - - - The message No. 500,
supply tanks down 603, 801: Add water
to the Refilling
Water Tank. may
appear.

80130 14/18
 80130
Periodically replaced parts

Parts or checking items U/S Description for Part No. Timin Stand Qua Qua Reason for
maintenance g ard ntity ntity maintenance/replac
replac PP- PP- ement
ement 1213 1217
timing
Washing the replenisher U Wash it with water. H056009 One- 1 year 3*1 3*1 The replenishment
pump strainer (Replace it with a new one month solution cannot be
when it has been seriously replenished correctly
damaged.) and the processing
Poppet valve (Fluoro S Check its damage. If it is I091004 3 years 3 years 2*1 2*1 solution may be
rubber CP-47L, VPII, damaged, replace it with a deteriorated faster in
QLII, ACPII) new one. result. The pump may
be damaged as well.
Poppet valve (EPDMCP- I091003 4*1 4*1
47L, VPII, QLII, ACPII) Check it every six month
after three years have
Poppet valve (EPDM 6*1 6*1
passed. If necessary, replace
Chemicals other than the
it with a new one.
above)
*1. The quantity varies depending on the processor specification.
U: User, S: Service personnel

z Replenisher section [F]

Parts or checking items U/S Description for Part No. Timin Stand Qua Qua Reason for
maintenance g ard ntity ntity maintenance/replac
replac PP- PP- ement
ement 1213 1217
timing
Nozzle U Check whether it is not - Six - - - When creating
clogged. If necessary, clean month replenishment
it with a toothbrush. s solution, the amount
of cartridge cleaning
water decreases and
the replenishment
solution will be
concentrated, which
influences processing
solution control.
The messages Nos.
5909, 5910, 5911:
Cartridge cleaning

8. Appendix
valve cleaning valve
is abnormal. may
appear.
Poppet valve (fluoro S Check its damage. If it is I091040 3 years 3 years 2 2 The replenishment
rubber) damaged, replace it with a solution cannot be
Poppet valve (EPDM) new one. I091003 3 years 3 years 6 6 replenished correctly
Check it after three years and the processing
have passed. If necessary, solution may be
replace it with a new one. deteriorated faster in
result. The pump may
be damaged as well.

U: User, S: Service personnel

80130 15/18
 80130
Periodically replaced parts

z Effluent section
Parts or checking items U/S Description for Part No. Timin Stand Qua Qua Reason for
maintenance g ard ntity ntity maintenance/replac
replac PP- PP- ement
ement 1213 1217
timing
Effluent tank U Collect the effluent. - Close - - - The message No. 503,
down 610: Empty the
As Effluent Tank. may
needed appear during the
printing.

U: User, S: Service personnel

z Dryer rack section

Parts or checking items U/S Description for Part No. Timin Stand Qua Qua Reason for
maintenance g ard ntity ntity maintenance/replac
replac PP- PP- ement
ement 1213 1217
timing
Cleaning the dryer rack U Check the dirt and damage - One- - - - The print may get
of each part. month damaged, dirty or
If the roller is dirt, wipe it uneven.
using the firmly squeezed
damp cloth.
Cleaning print sensors U Wipe it using a cotton swab. - Three- - - - The message No.
(left, center and right). month 5535: Paper has
jammed in the
processor section.
may appear.
Dryer drive chain U Lubricate the lubricating - The driving torque
felt. increases and that
After lubricating, turn the adversely affects the
knob to spread the oil to the paper advance. It may
drive chain fully. wear and damage the
parts related to the
drive as well.
Cleaning the dryer U Wipe it using a cotton swab. - Lane selection
selection sensor operation may be out

8. Appendix
of order and the
message
No.5535:Paper has
jammed in the
processor section.
may appear. Also, the
print may get bent or
damaged, or the wider
size prints may be
ejected to the
conveyer unit.

80130 16/18
 80130
Periodically replaced parts

Parts or checking items U/S Description for Part No. Timin Stand Qua Qua Reason for
maintenance g ard ntity ntity maintenance/replac
replac PP- PP- ement
ement 1213 1217
timing
Ejection roller S Check its damage or wear. A058613 2 years 2 years 2 2 It adversely affects the
Ejection roller S If it is damaged or worn, A058598 6 6 print alignment. The
replace it with a new one. print may get bent,
Check it every six month damaged, dirty or
after two years have passed. uneven. The message
If necessary, replace it with No. 5535: Paper has
a new one. jammed in the
Pile cloth S Check its dirt and damage. H039113 3 years 3 years 2 2 processor section.
If it is dirt or damaged , may appear.
replace it with a new one.
Check it every six month
after three years have
passed. If necessary, replace
it with a new one.
Center roller bushing S Check its damage or wear. A066056 3 years 2700 31 31 The message No.
Inlet roller bushing S If it is damaged or worn, A065831 hours 3 3 5535: Paper has
replace it with a new one. jammed in the
Pressure bushing S A221212 4 4
Check it every six month processor section.
Squeegee bushing S after three years have A220261 2 2 may appear.
Pressure spring bushing S passed. If necessary, replace A220296 2 2
Squeegee bushing S it with a new one. A125698 6 6
(For standard replacement
Advance roller (1) S timing, replace it every A069408 2 2 The print may get
Advance roller (3) S three years if it works three A069411 3 3 bent, damaged, dirty
hours per day.) or uneven. The
Advance roller (5) S A069414 3 3
) message No. 5535:
Advance roller (6) S A069417 2 2 Paper has jammed in
Advance roller (8) S A069420 1 1 the processor section.
Advance roller (7) S B018381 1 1 may appear.

Advance roller (10) S A076046 1 1

Dryer selection solenoid S Check the operation via I034254 3 years 1,500, 1 1 If the dryer selection
output check. 000 solenoid has an
Check and replace it every times operation failure, the
three years. message
(when processing 200 rolls No.5535:Paper has

8. Appendix
of 24-print films per day jammed in the
and its 25% is width wide processor section.
size prints.) may appear. Also, the
print may get bent or
damaged, or the wider
size prints may be
ejected to the
conveyer unit.
U: User, S: Service personnel

80130 17/18
 80130
Periodically replaced parts

z Print sorter section

Parts or checking items U/S Description for Part No. Timin Stand Qua Qua Reason for
maintenance g ard ntity ntity maintenance/replac
replac PP- PP- ement
ement 1213 1217
timing
Cleaning the print full U Clean it with a dry cloth. - As - - - Although the print
sensor needed does not exist, the
message No. 505:
Remove the prints
from the Print Sorter
Unit. may appear.
Cleaning the print U Check its dirt and damage. - As It adversely affects the
conveyor If necessary, wipe it with needed print alignment. The
the firmly-squeezed damp print may get dirty as
cloth. well.

U: User, S: Service personnel

z Option
Parts or checking items U/S Description for Part No. Timin Stand Qua Qua Reason for
maintenance g ard ntity ntity maintenance/replac
replac PP- PP- ement
ement 1213 1217
timing
Cleaning Y-type strainer U Clean it using a toothbrush - One- - - - The clogged strainer
(cooling water pluming with running water. month would affect the flow
unit) of the cooling water,
and the message No.
5500, 5501, 5502 The
processing solution
temperature is above
the safety range. CD,
BF, STB may occur.

U: User, S: Service personnel

z List of periodically replaced parts

None

z List of consumable parts 8. Appendix

None

80130 18/18
 80140
Periodically replaced parts

List of Maintenance/Periodically Replaced Parts/Consumable Parts

(Processor Section) [SM]

Items which are different from [N] specification are mentioned in the following list. For the items which are not mentioned, refer to ☞ List
of Maintenance/Periodically Replaced Parts/Consumable Parts (Processor Section) [N] [F].

z List of maintenance
For the procedure of maintenance by users, refer to Maintenance Manual.

z Upper guide [SM]

Parts or checking U/S Description for Part No. Timin Stand Quantity Quantity Reason for
items maintenance g ard PP-1213 PP-1217 maintenance/repl
replac acement
ement
timing
Turn roller (2) (Nos. 3 S Check its damage or A050679 2 years 2 years SM SM The print may get
to 6 upper guides) wear. If it is damaged or 8 8 bent, damaged,
worn, replace it with a SM-S SM-S dirty or uneven.
new one. 8 8 The message No.
Check it every six month 5535: Paper has
SM-2S SM-2S
after two years have jammed in the
10 10
passed. If necessary, processor section.
Turn roller (3) (Nos. 3 S replace it with a new C007827 SM SM may appear.
to 6 upper guides) one. 8 8
SM-S SM-S
8 8
SM-2S SM-2S
6 6
Squeegee roller S A076106 SM SM
assembly (2) (squeegee 1 1
unit) SM-S SM-S
1 1
SM-2S SM-2S
0 0
Squeegee roller S A074141 SM SM
assembly (3) (squeegee 1 1
unit) SM-S SM-S

8. Appendix
1 1
SM-2S SM-2S
0 0
Squeegee roller S A081790 SM SM
assembly (2) (No. 2 2 2
upper guide) SM-S SM-S
2 2
SM-2S SM-2S
0 0
Squeegee roller S A078885 SM SM
assembly (2) (No. 2 1 1
upper guide) SM-S SM-S
1 1
SM-2S SM-2S
2 2

80140 1/6
 80140
Periodically replaced parts

Parts or checking U/S Description for Part No. Timin Stand Quantity Quantity Reason for
items maintenance g ard PP-1213 PP-1217 maintenance/repl
replac acement
ement
timing
Squeegee roller S Check its damage or A074136 2 years 2 years SM SM The print may get
assembly (4) (No. 1 wear. If it is damaged or 3 3 bent, damaged,
upper guide and worn, replace it with a SM-S SM-S dirty or uneven.
squeegee unit) new one. 3 3 The message No.
Check it every six month 5535: Paper has
SM-2S SM-2S
after two years have jammed in the
4 4
passed. If necessary, processor section.
Squeegee roller S replace it with a new A068036 SM SM may appear.
assembly (2) (No. 1 one. 0 0
upper guide and SM-S SM-S
squeegee unit) 0 0
SM-2S SM-2S
1 1
Pressure bushing (13) S Check its damage or A032741 3 years 2700 28 28 The message No.
Pressure bushing (12) S wear. If it is damaged or A032742 hours 28 28 5535: Paper has
worn, replace it with a jammed in the
Idle gear (32T) S A050696 1 1
new one. processor section.
Double gear S Check it every six month A050698 8 8 may appear.
after three years have
passed. If necessary,
replace it with a new
one.
(As standard
replacement timing,
replace it every three
year when it works for
three hours per day.)
U: User, S: Service personnel

8. Appendix

80140 2/6
 80140
Periodically replaced parts

z Processing rack section [SM]

Parts or checking U/S Description for Part No. Timin Stand Quantity Quantity Reason for
items maintenance g ard PP-1213 PP-1217 maintenance/repl
replac acement
ement
timing
Lower turn belt (For U Wash it using a soft A049949 One- - SM SM The print may get
CD and BF) sponge with running month 2 2 bent, damaged,
lukewarm water. Check SM-S SM-S dirty or uneven.
its damage and scratch. 2 2 The message No.
If necessary, replace it 5535: Paper has
SM-2S SM-2S
with a new one. jammed in the
1 2
processor section.
Lower turn belt (2) U A060316 SM SM may appear.
(For STB) 4 4
SM-S SM-S
4 4
SM-2S SM-2S
0 0
Side roller (3) (Nos. 1 S Check its damage or A072989 2 years 2 years SM SM
and 2 processing racks) wear. If it is damaged or 9 11
worn, replace it with a SM-S SM-S
new one. 9 11
Check it every six month
SM-2S SM-2S
after two years have
12 12
passed. If necessary,
Side roller (4) S replace it with a new B020741 SM SM
one. 19 29
SM-S SM-S
11 13
SM-2S SM-2S
0 0
Side roller (1) S Check its damage or A050692 2 years 2 years SM SM The print may get
wear. If it is damaged or 0 0 bent, damaged,
worn, replace it with a SM-S SM-S dirty or uneven.
new one. 0 0 The message No.
Check it every six month 5535: Paper has
SM-2S SM-2S
after two years have jammed in the
10 12
passed. If necessary, processor section.

8. Appendix
replace it with a new may appear.
one.

80140 3/6
 80140
Periodically replaced parts

Parts or checking U/S Description for Part No. Timin Stand Quantity Quantity Reason for
items maintenance g ard PP-1213 PP-1217 maintenance/repl
replac acement
ement
timing
Bearing (1) S Check its damage or A035075 3 years 2700 SM SM The message No.
wear. If it is damaged or hours 6 8 5535: Paper has
worn, replace it with a SM-S SM-S jammed in the
new one. 6 8 processor section.
Check it every six month may appear.
SM-2S SM-2S
after three years have
2 2
passed. If necessary,
Bevel gear (22T) S replace it with a new A035155 SM SM
one. 20 26
(As standard SM-S SM-S
replacement timing, 16 18
replace it every three SM-2S SM-2S
year when it works for 10 12
three hours per day.)
Bevel gear S A050695 6 6
Idle gear (32T) S A050696 6 6
Center bushing S A216227 SM SM
28 40
SM-S SM-S
20 24
SM-2S SM-2S
16 20
Bevel gear (2) S A220062 SM SM
20 26
SM-S SM-S
16 18
SM-2S SM-2S
10 12
Bushing (1) S B010247 SM SM
12 12
SM-S SM-S
12 12
SM-2S SM-2S
2 2

8. Appendix
Bearing (3) assembly S A051198 SM SM
6 6
SM-S SM-S
6 6
SM-2S SM-2S
2 2
Center bushing (2) S Check its damage or A083870 3 years 2700 SM SM The message No.
wear. If it is damaged or hours 0 0 5535: Paper has
worn, replace it with a SM-S SM-S jammed in the
new one. 0 0 processor section.
Check it every six month may appear.
SM-2S SM-2S
after three years have
2 0
passed. If necessary,
Bearing (4) assembly S replace it with a new A084428 SM SM
one. 0 0
(As standard SM-S SM-S
replacement timing, 0 0
replace it every three SM-2S SM-2S
year when it works for 4 4
three hours per day.)
U: User, S: Service personnel

80140 4/6
 80140
Periodically replaced parts

z Tank section [SM]

Parts or checking items U/S Description for Part No. Timin Stand Qua Qua Reason for
maintenance g ard ntity ntity maintenance/replac
replac PP- PP- ement
ement 1213 1217
timing
Cleaning the reducing U Wash it using a sponge with - 1 year - - - The print may get
solution block water. damaged, dirty or
uneven.

U: User, S: Service personnel

z Replenisher section [SM]

Parts or checking items U/S Description for Part No. Timin Stand Qua Qua Reason for
maintenance g ard ntity ntity maintenance/replac
replac PP- PP- ement
ement 1213 1217
timing
Cleaning the probe U Clean with the specified - As - - - The adhered solution
Cleaning the probe holder U cotton swab dipped in water - needed crystallizes and
(Perform at the replacement damages the probe in
of the replenishment result, or soils around
package.) the system.
Cleaning the U - The replenishment
replenishment solution solution cannot be
sensor detected correctly, and
although it still
remains, the message
No. 700, 705: Replace
the Replenishment
Package with a new
one. may appear.
Washing the replenisher U Wash it with water. H056009 One- 1 year 7 7 The replenishment
pump strainer (Replace it with a new one month solution cannot be
when it has been seriously replenished correctly
damaged.) and the processing
Poppet valve S Check its damage. If it is I091040 3 years 3 years 8 8 solution may be
(except for STB) damaged, replace it with a deteriorated faster in
(Fluoro rubber) new one. result. The pump may

8. Appendix
Check it every six month be damaged as well.
Poppet valve S I091003 2 2
(except for STB) after three years have
(EPDM) passed. If necessary, replace
it with a new one.

U: User, S: Service personnel

z List of periodically replaced parts

z Replenisher section [SM]

Part name U/S Part No. Quantity Recommended Reason for
timing of maintenance/replacement
replacement
Probe (2) assembly (CD-C S A054659 1 1 year The replenishment solution cannot be
only) replenished correctly and the
Probe (1) assembly S A054658 5 1 year processing solution may be deteriorated
(Except CD-C) faster in result. That causes the solution
leakage and makes dirty in the area
around as well.

80140 5/6
 80140
Periodically replaced parts

Part name U/S Part No. Quantity Recommended Reason for

timing of maintenance/replacement
replacement
Poppet valve (STB only) S I091040 2 1 year The replenishment solution cannot be
replenished correctly and the
processing solution may be deteriorated
faster in result. The pump may be
damaged as well.
U: User, S: Service personnel

8. Appendix

80140 6/6
 80150
Periodically replaced parts

List of Maintenance/Periodically Replaced Parts/Consumable Parts

(Processor Section) [J]

Items which are different from [N] specification are mentioned in the following list. For the items which are not mentioned, refer to ☞ List
of Maintenance/Periodically Replaced Parts/Consumable Parts (Processor Section) [N] [F].

z List of maintenance
For the procedure of maintenance by users, refer to Maintenance Manual.

z Upper guide [J]

Parts or checking items U/S Description for Part No. Timin Stand Qua Qua Reason for
maintenance g ard ntity ntity maintenance/replac
replac PP- PP- ement
ement 1213 1217
timing
Squeegee roller (2) (No. 2 S Check its damage or wear. A081790 2 years 2 years 2 2 The print may get
upper guide) If it is damaged or worn, bent, damaged, dirty
Squeegee roller (2) (No. 2 S replace it with a new one. A078885 1 1 or uneven. The
upper guide) Check it every six month message No. 5535:
after two years have passed. Paper has jammed in
If necessary, replace it with the processor section.
a new one. may appear.

U: User, S: Service personnel

z Processing rack section [J]

Parts or checking items U/S Description for Part No. Timin Stand Qua Qua Reason for
maintenance g ard ntity ntity maintenance/replac
replac PP- PP- ement
ement 1213 1217
timing
Side roller (3) (Nos. 1 and S Check its damage or wear. A072989 2 years 2 years 9 11 The print may get
2 processing racks) If it is damaged or worn, bent, damaged, dirty
Side roller (4) S replace it with a new one. B020741 19 29 or uneven. The
Check it every six month message No. 5535:
after two years have passed. Paper has jammed in
If necessary, replace it with the processor section.
a new one. may appear.

8. Appendix
Bearing (1) S Check its damage or wear. A035075 3 years 2700 6 8 The message No.
Bevel gear (22T) S If it is damaged or worn, A035155 hours 20 26 5535: Paper has
replace it with a new one. jammed in the
Center bushing S A216227 28 40
Check it every six month processor section.
Bevel gear (2) S after three years have A220062 20 26 may appear.
passed. If necessary, replace
it with a new one.
(As standard replacement
timing, replace it every
three year when it works for
three hours per day.)

U: User, S: Service personnel

80150 1/2
 80150
Periodically replaced parts

z Tank section [J]

Parts or checking items U/S Description for Part No. Timin Stand Qua Qua Reason for
maintenance g ard ntity ntity maintenance/replac
replac PP- PP- ement
ement 1213 1217
timing
Cleaning the reducing U Wash it using a sponge with - 1 year - - - The print may get
solution block water. damaged, dirty or
uneven.

U: User, S: Service personnel

z Replenisher section [J]

Parts or checking items U/S Description for Part No. Timin Stand Qua Qua Reason for
maintenance g ard ntity ntity maintenance/replac
replac PP- PP- ement
ement 1213 1217
timing
Poppet valve (EPDM) S Check its damage. If it is I091003 3 years 3 years 6 6 Water cannot be
damaged, replace it with a supplied correctly and
new one. the processing
Check it every six month solution may be
after three years have deteriorated faster in
passed. If necessary, replace result. The pump may
it with a new one. be damaged as well.

U: User, S: Service personnel

z Tablet replenishment section [J]

Parts or checking items U/S Description for Part No. Timin Stand Qua Qua Reason for
maintenance g ard ntity ntity maintenance/replac
replac PP- PP- ement
ement 1213 1217
timing
Cleaning the tablet chute U Wipe using the damp cloth. - Close - - - Tablet may not be
down advanced properly and
Cleaning the STB tablet U Wiping it using firmly - As can clog.
conveyor squeezed damp cloth needed
Cleaning the drum U Wipe using the damp cloth. - Six

8. Appendix
month
s
Cleaner J U Replace with a new one - - Six 2 2 If cleaner J gets
periodically. (Drop into the month deteriorated, algae or
water supply tank and the s the like can come up
SW/DW tank.) in the tank.

U: User, S: Service personnel

80150 2/2
 80210 Positions of paper jam release labels

Positions of paper jam release labels

Positions of paper jam release labels

z Explanation
The paper jam release label is affixed at the back of printer top cover.

8. Appendix

G068197

80210 1/5
 80210
Positions of paper jam release labels

The paper jam release label is affixed at the back of the printer door.

For the dual paper

magazine and triple
magazine

8. Appendix

G068200

80210 2/5
 80210
Positions of paper jam release labels

For the quad

magazine unit

8. Appendix

G083462

80210 3/5
 80210
Positions of paper jam release labels

The paper jam release label is put at the back of printer door 4 of the quad paper magazine unit.

A2-3
([Link])

8. Appendix

G083463

80210 4/5
 80210
Positions of paper jam release labels

The paper jam release label is affixed at the back of the print sorter unit.

8. Appendix

G068196

80210 5/5
 80310 Service personnel tool list

Service personnel tool list

Service personnel tool list [N] [SM] [J] [F]

NOTE
• For details about service personnel tools related to film carrier like scanner adjustment chart, refer to the Scanner Service Manual.
(Desk section)
Tool Part No. Explanation
Colorimeter height adjustment jig A076430-01 Used to adjust the height of measuring point of the colorimeter.
Service personnel floppy disk F000472-01 Used to enter the service personnel password.

*1. Using e-NET PLUS System Program Unit and Noritsu-eNET System Program Unit requires those system versions or later which are listed below.

System Supported version

QSS-32 S-900SA S-1700SA QSS-32PRO Ver. 7.0
QSS-32SD QSS-32SD PRO Ver. 3.0

(Printer section)
Tool Part No. Explanation
Head adjusting jig A050486-01 Used to adjust the CVP printing pressure.
Optical fiber cable pushing bar A073143-01 Used to pull out the optical fiber cable.
For using Optical fiber cable pushing bar, refer to ARCNET
Communication Diagnosis Manualhow to use tool.
Loupe H099047-00 Used to adjust the exposure position.
H099039-00 (no
longer available)
Fiber cutter L003100-00 Used to cut the end of ARCNET cable when it is abnormal.
For using fiber cutter, refer to the ARCNET Communication
Diagnosis Manual, How to Use the Tools.
Aspirator H103007-00 To suck out the dust in the connector on the PCB connected to the
ARCNET cable.
For using aspirator, refer to the ARCNET Communication
Diagnosis Manual, How to Use the Tools.

(Processor section)
Tool Part No. Explanation
Grounding resistance measurement cable unit W407756-01 Used to check the grounding resistance between input section and

8. Appendix
printer section or processor section.
Air exhaust tool (pipe type) assembly A050400-01 Used when installing the SM specification and replacing the
replenisher pump. (compatible with the conventional SM machines)
Probe replacing jig A053235-01 Used when replacing the probe. (compatible with the conventional
SM machines)
Hose H121232 Use this to operate each automated flushing valve and auto cleaning
pump. (F specification)

80310 1/1
 81010 Operation keyboard correspondence list

Operation keyboard correspondence list

Operation keyboard correspondence list

Operation keyboard have same functions as some keys on the full keyboard.

QSS operation keyboard Corresponded full keyboard Remarks

F F1
REPT F2
ORDER F3
N F4
Y F5
M F6
C F7
D F8
-1 F9
+1 F10
PASS F11
NO/STOP F12
YES/START ENT
← ←
→ →
↑ ↑
↓ ↓

Operation keyboard

8. Appendix
G050097

81010 1/1
 81020
Operation keyboard correspondence list

Operation keyboard correspondence list (DLS specification)

Operation keyboard have same functions as some keys on the full keyboard.

QSS operation keyboard Corresponded full keyboard Operations on the DLS software
F F1 Not in use
REPT F2 Not in use
ORDER F3 Order number changing
N F4 Correction value input (Normal) N
Y F5 Y correction
M F6 M correction
C F7 C correction
D F8 D correction
-1 F9 Correction value input (-1)
+1 F10 Correction value input (+1)
PASS F11 Passed frame setting
NO/STOP F12 Not in use
YES/START ENT Same as Start Job
← ← ←
→ → →
↑ ↑ ↑
↓ ↓ ↓

Operation keyboard

8. Appendix
G050097

81020 1/1
 81510 Condition list for replenishment solution sensors

Condition list for replenishment solution sensors

Condition list for replenishment solution sensors [SM]

This list indicates the information relating to the suffix numbers in the No. 0700 and 0705 Replace the Replenishment Package with a
new one. P-# attention messages.
☞ No. 0700 [SM]
☞ No. 0705[SM]
• 0 indicates that the replenishment solution sensor is in DARK status.
• - indicates that the replenishment solution sensor is in LIGHT status.
Suffix Status of the replenishment solution sensor Attention message
number P-1 P-2
CD-A CD-B CD-C STB BF-A BF-B
01 0 - - - - - P-1 -
02 - 0 - - - - P-1 -
03 0 0 - - - - P-1 -
04 - - 0 - - - P-1 -
05 0 - 0 - - - P-1 -
06 - 0 0 - - - P-1 -
07 0 0 0 - - - P-1 -
08 - - - 0 - - P-1 -
09 0 - - 0 - - P-1 -
10 - 0 - 0 - - P-1 -
11 0 0 - 0 - - P-1 -
12 - - 0 0 - - P-1 -
13 0 - 0 0 - - P-1 -
14 - 0 0 0 - - P-1 -
15 0 0 0 0 - - P-1 -
16 - - - - 0 - - P-2
17 0 - - - 0 - P-1 P-2
18 - 0 - - 0 - P-1 P-2
19 0 0 - - 0 - P-1 P-2
20 - - 0 - 0 - P-1 P-2
21 0 - 0 - 0 - P-1 P-2
22 - 0 0 - 0 - P-1 P-2

8. Appendix
23 0 0 0 - 0 - P-1 P-2
24 - - - 0 0 - P-1 P-2
25 0 - - 0 0 - P-1 P-2
26 - 0 - 0 0 - P-1 P-2
27 0 0 - 0 0 - P-1 P-2
28 - - 0 0 0 - P-1 P-2
29 0 - 0 0 0 - P-1 P-2
30 - 0 0 0 0 - P-1 P-2
31 0 0 0 0 0 - P-1 P-2
32 - - - - - 0 - P-2
33 0 - - - - 0 P-1 P-2
34 - 0 - - - 0 P-1 P-2
35 0 0 - - - 0 P-1 P-2
36 - - 0 - - 0 P-1 P-2
37 0 - 0 - - 0 P-1 P-2
38 - 0 0 - - 0 P-1 P-2
39 0 0 0 - - 0 P-1 P-2
40 - - - 0 - 0 P-1 P-2

81510 1/2
 81510
Condition list for replenishment solution sensors

Suffix Status of the replenishment solution sensor Attention message

number P-1 P-2
CD-A CD-B CD-C STB BF-A BF-B
41 0 - - 0 - 0 P-1 P-2
42 - 0 - 0 - 0 P-1 P-2
43 0 0 - 0 - 0 P-1 P-2
44 - - 0 0 - 0 P-1 P-2
45 0 - 0 0 - 0 P-1 P-2
46 - 0 0 0 - 0 P-1 P-2
47 0 0 0 0 - 0 P-1 P-2
48 - - - - 0 0 - P-2
49 0 - - - 0 0 P-1 P-2
50 - 0 - - 0 0 P-1 P-2
51 0 0 - - 0 0 P-1 P-2
52 - - 0 - 0 0 P-1 P-2
53 0 - 0 - 0 0 P-1 P-2
54 - 0 0 - 0 0 P-1 P-2
55 0 0 0 - 0 0 P-1 P-2
56 - - - 0 0 0 P-1 P-2
57 0 - - 0 0 0 P-1 P-2
58 - 0 - 0 0 0 P-1 P-2
59 0 0 - 0 0 0 P-1 P-2
60 - - 0 0 0 0 P-1 P-2
61 0 - 0 0 0 0 P-1 P-2
62 - 0 0 0 0 0 P-1 P-2
63 0 0 0 0 0 0 P-1 P-2

8. Appendix

81510 2/2
 89000 Table of wiring diagrams

Table of wiring diagrams

Table of wiring diagrams

To access the wiring diagrams, click Wiring diagrams in Bookmarks.

Block No. Item Diagram No.

- System connection diagram J308920
- QSS-32PRO System connection diagram J309139
- S900SA/S1700SA System connection diagram J309140
- QSS-32SD System connection diagram J309936
- QSS-32SD PRO System connection diagram J310105

z Desk section
Block No. Item Diagram No.
CS 1-1 AC power source circuit diagram (CS-1) J308837
AC power source circuit diagram (CS-2) J309937
CS 1-2 DC power supply circuit diagram (1) (CS-1) J308838
DC power supply circuit diagram (1) (CS-2) J309938
CS 1-3 DC power supply circuit diagram (2) (CS-1) J308839
DC power supply circuit diagram (2) (CS-2) J309939
CS 1-4 PC power source circuit diagram (PC-NRT-RS2, PC-NRT- J308836
RS6)
PC power source circuit diagram (PC-NRT-RD2) (ATX J309091
power supply old type)
PC power source circuit diagram (PC-NRT-RD2) (ATX J309710
power supply new type)
PC power source circuit diagram (PC-NRT-RS9) J309940
PC power source circuit diagram (PC-NRT-RS11) J310451
CS 2-1 Control section (CS-1) J308834
Control section (CS-2) J309941
CS 2-2 PC connecting (PC-NRT-RS2) J308835
PC connecting (PC-NRT-RD2) J309090
PC connecting (PC-NRT-RS6) J309555
PC connecting (PC-NRT-RS9) J309942
PC connecting (PC-NRT-RS11) J310449

8. Appendix
CS 2-3 Pricing Unit (CS-1) J308840
Pricing Unit (CS-2) J309943
CS 2-4 Around colorimeter unit J404653

z Printer section
Block No. Item Diagram No.
LP 1-1 AC power supply circuit diagram J308953
LP 1-2 DC power supply circuit diagram (1) J308954
LP 1-3 DC power supply circuit diagram (2) J308955

LP 2-1 AC power supply connecting J308972

LP 2-2 DC power supply connecting J308973
LP 2-3 Around printer control PCB J308974
LP 2-4 Around printer I/O PCB 1 J308975
LP 2-5 Around printer I/O PCB 2 J308976
LP 2-6 Around printer I/O PCB 3 J308977
LP 2-7 Around triple magazine PCB J308978

89000 1/4
 89000
Table of wiring diagrams

LP 2-8 Correction value printing unit J308979

LP 2-9 Around laser unit (type B1) J308980
Around laser unit (type A1) J309447
Around to the laser unit (Type Ff) J310312
J310388
LP 2-10 Around quad magazine PCB J310065

LP 3-1 Frame section J308956

LP 3-2 Magazine mount unit J308957
LP 3-3 Paper supply unit (1) J308958
LP 3-4 Paper supply unit (2) J308959
LP 3-5 Exposure advance unit (1) J308960
LP 3-6 Exposure advance unit (2) J308961
LP 3-7 Paper advance unit 1 J308962
LP 3-8 Paper advance unit 2 (1) J308963
LP 3-9 Paper advance unit 2 (2) J308964
LP 3-10 Paper advance unit 2 (3) J308965
LP 3-11 Laser unit (1) J308966
LP 3-12 Laser unit (2) J308967
LP 3-13 Laser unit (3) J308968
LP 3-14 Laser unit (4) (type B1) J308969
Laser unit (4) (type A1) J309448
Laser unit (4) (Type Ff) J310313
LP 3-15 Correction value printing unit J308970
LP 3-16 Triple magazine unit J308971
LP 3-17 Quad magazine unit (1) J310211
LP 3-18 Quad magazine unit (2) J310212
LP 3-19 Quad magazine unit (3) J310213
LP 3-20 Quad magazine unit (4) J310214
LP 3-21 Quad magazine unit (5) J310215

z Processor section
Block No. Item Diagram No.

8. Appendix
PP 1-1 AC power source circuit diagram [N] [SM] [J] (outside J308921
Japan)
PP 1-1 AC power source circuit diagram [F] (outside Japan) J310244
PP 1-2 DC power supply circuit diagram [N] J308924
PP 1-2 DC power supply circuit diagram [SM] J308925
PP 1-2 DC power supply circuit diagram [J] J308926

PP 2-1 Around processor relay PCB [N] [SM] [J] J308844

PP 2-1 Around processor relay PCB [F] J310247
PP 2-2 Around processor I/O PCB [N] [SM] [J] J308845
PP 2-2 Around processor I/O PCB [F] J310248
PP 2-3 Around processor I/O PCB and CPU PCB [N] J308846
PP 2-3 Around processor I/O PCB and CPU PCB [SM] J308847
PP 2-3 Around processor I/O PCB and CPU PCB [J] J308848
PP 2-3 Around processor I/O PCB and CPU PCB [F] J310249
PP 2-4 Around SM I/O PCB [SM] J308850
PP 2-4 Around F replenishment I/O PCB [F] J310250
PP 2-5 Around tablet replenishment unit [J] J308851

89000 2/4
 89000
Table of wiring diagrams

PP 3-1 Temperature control block (1) [N] [F] J308928

PP 3-1 Temperature control block (1) [SM] J308929
PP 3-1 Temperature control block (1) [J] J309106
PP 3-2 Temperature control block (2) [N] [SM] [J] [F] J308930
PP 3-3 Processor section [N] [SM] [J] [F] J308931
PP 3-4 Replenisher section (1) [N] J308932
PP 3-4 Water supply section (1) [J] J308933
PP 3-5 Replenisher section (2) [N] J308934
PP 3-5 Water supply section (2) [J] J308935
PP 3-6 Effluent block [N] [SM] [J] [F] J308936
PP 3-7 Drive section [N] [SM] [J] [F] J308937
PP 3-8 Dryer section (1) [N] [SM] [J] [F] J308938
PP 3-9 Dryer section (2) [N] [SM] [J] [F] J308939
PP 3-10 Dryer section (3) [N] [SM] [J] [F] J308940
PP 3-11 Print conveyor section/print sorter unit [N] [SM] [J] [F] J308941
PP 3-12 SM replenisher section (1) [SM] J308942
PP 3-13 SM replenisher section (2) [SM] J308943
PP 3-14 SM replenisher section (3) [SM] J308944
PP 3-15 SM replenisher section (4) [SM] J308945
PP 3-16 Tablet replenishment section (1) [J] J308946
PP 3-17 Tablet replenishment section (2) [J] J308947
PP 3-22 F Replenisher section (1) [F] J310309
PP 3-23 F Replenisher section (2) [F] J310310
PP 3-24 F Replenisher section (3) [F] J310311

PP 4-1 Cooling water plumbing unit [N] [SM] [J] [F] J308952

z Accessories
Block No. Item Diagram No.
KIDS 1-1 Keyboard Expansion Kit J404678
BRAVO II 1-1 BRAVO II J404680

8. Appendix

89000 3/4
 89000
Table of wiring diagrams

This page is intentionally blank.

8. Appendix

89000 4/4